Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout126-06 RESOLUTIONMmaike RESOLUTION NO. 126-06 A RESOLUTION APPROVING A CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT WITH BRASFIELD & GORRIE, LLC IN THE AMOUNT OF $6,130,000.00 TO CONSTRUCT THE HAMESTRING SEWER LIFT STATION, WL -6; APPROVING A FOUR PERCENT (4%) CONTINGENCY IN THE AMOUNT OF $245,000.00; AND APPROVING A BUDGET ADJUSTMENT IN THE AMOUNT OF $5,100,000.00. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL SOF THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS: r ; , '. + As - Section 1. That the City Council of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas hereby approves a Construction Contract with Brasfield & • Gorrie, LLC in the amount of $6,130,000.00 to construct the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL -6. A copy of the Contract, marked Exhibit "A," is attached hereto and made a part hereof. Section 2. That the City Council of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas hereby approves a four percent (4%) contingency in the amount of $245,000.00. Section 3. That the City Council of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas hergbs,,,,,� approves a Budget Adjustment in the amount of $5,100,000.00. ��.•``�RKITR£y'' o,� �G� GAS Y �O,c SGp ••P, :.-..E3 • .. APPROV E t;•F. AYRKA;SL;'ti 9sNP c 1141^ G``. - 111 PASSED and APPROVED this 18th day of July, 2006. By: By: ^c~' DAN COODY, Mayor L SONDRA SMITH, City Clerk �Ir 11 DOCUMENT 00500 - AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE AND BRASFIELD & GORRIE Project Name: Contract Name: Contract No.: RLF Project No.: Wastewater System Improvement Project Hamestring Lift Station WL -6 CS -0500803-03 THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the lgfhday of ataY in the year 2006 by and between City of Fayetteville (hereinafter called Owner) and Brasfield & Gome (hereinafter called BRASFIELD & GORRIE) ARTICLE 1 WORK 1.01 BRASFIELD & GORRIE shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work under this Contract is generally described as follows: Construction Hamestring Lift Station including related appurtenances and site work. The wet well/dry well lift station shall contain seven 350 -HP horizontal end -suction centrifugal pumps. Other station features include dry well ventilation, wet well odor control, and an electrical control building. Piping work includes pump suction and discharge piping, potable water service piping, connections to approaching 24- and 48 -inch gravity sewers, and 24- and 30 -inch discharge force mains. The project is located on the west side of Fayetteville northwest of the existing Hamestring Lift Station, across Sunshine Road (Route 877). 1.02 The Contract for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is generally described as follows: The City of Fayetteville, Arkansas is undertaking a project to redirect sewer flows from portions of the City in the Illinois River drainage basin to a new wastewater treatment plant on the west side of the City and upgrade sewers in the City which are in the White River drainage basin and upgrade the existing wastewater treatment plant on the east side of the City. The project is known as the Wastewater System 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 — 1 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) Improvement Project and includes, but may not be limited to, four areas of improvements as follows: 1. Westside Wastewater Treatment Plant. 2. Westside Collection System Improvements. 3. Paul R. Noland Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements. 4. Eastside Collection System Improvements. ARTICLE 2 - ENGINEER 2.01 The Contract has been designed by RJN GROUP, INC. RJN GROUP, INC. assumes all duties and responsibilities, and has the rights and authority assigned to RJN GROUP, INC. in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. • ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT TIME 3.01 TIME OF THE ESSENCE: All time limits for milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. 3.02 DATES FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT: A. The Work will be Substantially Completed within 470 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS within 500 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run 1. Substantially Complete by date stated above shall be defined as the completion of all major work items as required for a fully operational system, including the installation of seven horizontal, two sumps and all valves. All piping work is to be installed and tested. All concrete 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 — 2 • y DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) and general- site work is complete and all ventilation and odor control is complete. The control building is to be complete, and all electric and potable water facilities shall be in place and operational. 3.03 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and BRASFIELD & GORRIE recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that THE CITY OF FAYEI 1'EVILLE will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the time specified above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving the actual loss suffered by THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE if the Work is not Substantially Completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such 'proof, THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and BRASFIELD & GORRIE agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) BRASFIELD & GORRIE shall pay THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE Five. Thousand Dollars ($5,000.00) for each calendar day that expires after the time specified above in Paragraph 3.02 for Substantial Completion until the Work is Substantially Complete. After Substantial Completion, if BRASFIELD & GORRIE shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the time specified in Paragraph 3.02 for completion and readiness for final payment or any proper extension thereof granted by THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, BRASFIELD & GORRIE shall pay THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE One Thousand Dollars ($1,000.00) for each calendar day that expires after the time specified for completion and readiness for final payment. ARTICLE 4 - CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 The CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE agrees to pay, and BRASFIELD & GORRIE agrees to accept, as full and final compensation for all work done under this agreement, the amount based on the prices bid in the Proposal which is hereto attached, for the actual amount accomplished under each pay item, said payments to be made in 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 - 3 DOCUMENT 00500 - AGREEMENT (continued) lawful money of the United States at the time and in the manner set forth in the • Specifications. 4.02 As provided in the General Conditions estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and measurements and determinations of actual quantities and classifications are to be made by RJN GROUP, INC. as provided in the General Conditions. 4.03 THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE shall pay BRASFIELD & GORRIE for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents an amount in current funds equal to the sum of the amounts determined pursuant to paragraphs below: For all Work, at the prices stated in BRASFIELD & GORRIE's Bid, attached hereto as an Exhibit. 4.04 Changes, modifications or amendments in scope, price or fees to this contract shall not be allowed without a formal contract amendment approved by the Mayor and the City Council in advance of the change in scope, costs, fees, or delivery schedule. ARTICLE 5 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 SUBMITTAL AND PROCESSING OF PAYMENTS: BRASFIELD & GORRIE shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS. Applications for Payment will be processed by THE CITY OF FAYEI PEVILLE as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. 5.02 PROGRESS PAYMENTS RETAINAGE: A. THE CITY OF FAYE 1 fhVILLE shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of BRASFIELD & GORRIE's Applications for Payment as recommended by RJN GROUP, INC. on or about the 20th day of each month during construction. All such payments will be measured by the schedule of values established in the GENERAL CONDITIONS (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 — 4 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) - units completed) or, in the event there is no schedule of values, as provided in the General Requirements. • 1 • Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as RJN GROUP, INC. shall determine, or THE CITY OF • FAYETTEVILLE may withhold, in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS. a. 90% of Work Completed (with the balance being retainage). If Work has been 50% completed as determined by RJN GROUP, INC. and if the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and RJN GROUP, INC., THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE on recommendation of RJN GROUP, INC. may determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work subsequently remain satisfactory to them a 5 percent retainage will be withheld on the remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion; and b. 100% of Equipment and Materials not incorporated in the Work but delivered, suitably stored, and accompanied by documentation satisfactory to THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. • 2. Upon Substantial Completion, THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to BRASFIELD & GORRIE to 95% of the Contract Price (with the balance being retainage), less such amounts as RJN GROUP, INC. shall determine, or THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE may withhold, in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS. 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 — 5 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) 5.03 FINAL PAYMENT: A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with the :1 : GENERAL CONDITIONS, THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by RJN GROUP, INC. and as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 6 - BRASFIELD & GORRIE'S REPRESENTATIONS 6.01 In order to induce THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE to enter into this Agreement, BRASFIELD & GORRIE makes the following representations: A. BRASFIELD & GORRIE has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents including the. Addenda and other related data identified in the Bid Documents. BRASFIELD & GORRIE has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance, arid furnishing of the Work. C. BRASFIELD & GORRIE is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance, and furnishing of the Work. BRASFIELD & GORRIE has carefully studied all: reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site; and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any, at the Site. BRASFIELD & GORRIE acknowledges that THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and RJN GROUP, INC. do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of information and 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 — 6 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) data shown or indicated in the Contract Documentswith respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site. E. BRASFIELD & GORRIE has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility of having done so) all such additional supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance, and furnishing of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by BRASFIELD & GORRIE and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. BRASFIELD & GORRIE does not consider that any additional. examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performing and furnishing of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Tiniest and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. BRASFIELD & GORRIE is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. II BRASFIELD & GORRIE has correlated the information known to BRASFIELD & GORRIE, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. BRASFIELD & GORRIE has given RJN GROUP, INC. written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that BRASFIELD & GORRIE has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by RJN GROUP, INC. is acceptable to BRASFIELD & GORRIE 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 — 7 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) J. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.. ARTICLE 7 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7.01 CONTENTS: • The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and BRASFIELD & GORRIE concerning the Work consist of the following and may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS: This Agreement. 2. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows): a. Notice to Proceed. b. BRASFIELD & GORRIE's Bid. c. Documentation submitted by BRASFIELD & GORRIE prior to Notice of Award. d. BRASFIELD & GORRIE's Act of Assurance Form. 3. Performance, Payment, and other Bonds. 4. General Conditions. - 5. MBE / WBE Compliance Evaluation Form. Supplementary Conditions. 7. Labor -Related Regulations. 8. Specifications consisting of divisions and sections as listed in table of contents of Project Manual. 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 — 8 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued). 9: Drawings consisting of a cover sheet and sheets as listed in the table of contents thereof, with each sheet bearing the following general title: Hamestring Lift Station, WL -6 10. Addenda number one. 11. The following which may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement and are not attached hereto. All Written Amendments and other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to the GENERAL CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8 - MISCELLANEOUS 8.01 TERMS: Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in the GENERAL CONDITIONS shall have the meanings stated in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. 8.02. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT: No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifidally but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by Law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 — 9 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) 8.03 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS: A. THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and BRASFIELD & GORRIE each binds himself, his partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the. Contract Documents. 8.04 SEVERABILITY: Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and BRASFIELD & GORRIE, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision. 8.05• OTHER PROVISIONS: Not Applicable. 8.06 CONTROLLING LAW 8.07 This Agreement shall be subject to, interpreted and enforced according to the laws of the State of Arkansas without regard to any conflicts of law provisions. ARKANSAS OF INFORMATION ACT A. City contracts and documents, including inteinal documents and documents of subcontractors and sub -consultants, prepared while performing City contractual work are subject to the Arkansas Freedom of Information Act (FOIA). If a Freedom of Information Act request is presented to the CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, BRASFIELD & GORRIE will do everything possible to provide the documents in a prompt and timely manner as prescribed in the Arkansas Freedom of Information Act (A.C.A. §25-19-101 et seq.). Only legally authorized photocopying costs pursuant to the FOIA may be assessed for this compliance. 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 —10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and BRASFIELD & GORRIE have signed this Agreement in quadruplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, BRASS ELD & GORR4, and RJN GROUP, INC. All portions of the Contract Documents have been<sioned, initialed, or identified by THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and BRASFIELu & GORRIE This Agreement will be effective on Jail I ' , 2006, which is the . - Effective Date of the Agreement. l BRASFIELD & ORRIS By: C'1 Title: Attest (SEAL) Address for giving notices A/rihiyjyam A(. 36? 33 License No. 07) 27 Ste' 066 Agent for Service of process (If BRASFIELD & GORRIE is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign.) Ci of Fa etteville Fa etteville Ar By: Title: Ma Attest l 0:(VTR lll .sal'l.,l. G.G\SY 0c'.(//3 • :�? • ;FAYETTEVILLE; ),'y„yGTON G %llll ,nn i111Inn (SEAL) Address for giving notices (If Owner is a public body, attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution or other documents authorizing execution of Agreement) Attorney For: City of Fayetteville END OF DOCUMENT 00500 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 - 11 • /Q1 /210 a6 City of Fayetteville, Arkansas Budget Adjustment Form Budget Year 2006 Department: Division: Program: Water/Wastewater Water/Wastewater WSIP, WL -6 Hamestring Sta. Date Requested 6/30/2006 Adjustment Number Project or Item Added/Increased: Project or Bern Deleted/Reduced: $5,100,000 is requested in the Wastewater System Improvements Project account to cover project costs for the Hamestring Lift Station construction (WL -6) and project costs prior to the next bond issue. Fund balance Justification of this Increase: These system revenues have been identified to cover Wastewater System Improvements Project costs in order to reduce the amount required to be borrowed. Justification of this Decrease: Sufficient funds remain within Fund Balance to meet City policies. Account Name Contract services Increase Expense Budget (Decrease Revenue Budget) Account Number Amount Project Number 4480 9480 5315 00 5,100,000 02133 0362 Account Name Use of fund balance Decrease Expense Budget (Increase Revenue Budget) Account Number Amount Project Number • 5400 0940 4999 99 5,100,000 02133 0362 Approval Signatures Requested By Date 11 De Finance Mayor nterna rvices Dir Date 31).iu,.04 Date WVite— Date Budget Office Use Only Type: A B C Date of Approval Posted to General Ledger Posted to Project Accounting Entered in Category Log Initial Date Initial Date Initial Date Initial Date David Jurgens Submitted By City of Fayetteville Staff Review Form City Council Agenda Items or Contracts 18 -Jul -06 City Council Meeting Date Water/Wastewater Division 7/'g/off gie104 ctSf)efa ti 0rrIL LL-C- Water/Wastewater Department Action Required: Approval of a construction contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of $6,130,000.00, for construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL -6, approve a 4% contingency of $245,000.00, and approve a budget adjustment. $6,375,000.00 Cost of this request 4480-9480-5315.00 Account Number 02133.0362 Project Number 109,663,682.00 Category/Project Budget 101,506,497.20 Funds Used to Date 8,157,184.80 Remaining Balance Budgeted Item Budget Adjustment Attached XX Wastewater System Imp Project Program Category / Project Name Water and Wastewater Program / Project Category Name Water/Sewer Fund Name Depart nt hector City Attorney Date Financ and Internal Service Dire or ' ' Date Mayor 4/6 Date Previous Ordinance or Resolution # Original Contract Date: Original Contract Number: Comments: City Council Meeting of July 18, 2006 CITY COUNCIL AGENDA MEMO To: Fayetteville City Council Thru: Mayor Dan Coody Fayetteville Sewer Committee From: David Jurgens, Water and Wastewater Director Date: 30 June, 2006 Subject: Approval of a construction contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of $6,130,000.00, for construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL -6, approve a 4% contingency of $245,000.00, and approve a budget adjustment. RECOMMENDATION City Administration recommend approval of a construction contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of $6,130,000.00, for construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL -6, approve a 4% contingency of $245,000.00, and approve a budget adjustment. BACKGROUND The City received three bids for this project, as follows: Brasfield & Gorrie $ 6,130,000.00 (low bid) Crossland Heavy 6,218,820.00 Van Horn Const 6,171,415.00 Engineer's Estimate $ 6,200,000.00 0 - The project entails building a 36 million gallon per day sewer lift station containing seven 350 horsepower pumps, including associated site work, and odor control. The lift station pumps water through the 24" and 30" sewer force mains (currently under construction) to the West Side Wastewater Treatment Plant. The lift station is where 51" Street crosses Hamestring Creek. DISCUSSION The bid has been reviewed by RJN Group, the Engineer; their letter recommending award is attached. The Arkansas Natural Resources Commission will complete their review prior to contract aWard. - Brasfield Gorrie is currently building the West Side WWTP, and is ranked number 29 in the Engineering News Record listing of the top 400 contractors in the country. BUDGET IMPACT Funds are available in the wastewater fund balance Fiscal Year 2006 budget. A budget adjustment is attached. 1 hese system revenues have been identified to cover Wastewater System Improvements Project costs in order to reduce the amount required to be borrowed. WL -6 Brasfield CCMcmoJuID6.doc RESOLUTION NO. A RESOLUTION APPROVING A CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT WITH BRASFIELD & GORRIE, LLC IN THE AMOUNT OF $6,130,000.00 TO CONSTRUCT THE HAMESTRING SEWER LIFT STATION, WL -6; APPROVING A FOUR PERCENT (4%) CONTINGENCY IN THE AMOUNT OF $245,000.00; AND APPROVING A BUDGET ADJUSTMENT IN THE AMOUNT OF $5,100.000.00. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS: Section 1. That the City Council of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas hereby approves a Construction Contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC in the amount of $6,130,000.00 to construct the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL -6. A copy of the Contract, marked Exhibit "A," is attached hereto and made a part hereof. Section 2. That the City Council of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas hereby approves a four percent (4%) contingency in the amount of $245,000.00. Section 3. That the City Council of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas hereby approves a Budget Adjustment in the amount of $5,100.000.00. PASSED and APPROVED this 18th day of June, 2006 ATTEST.. By: APPROVED AN COO'DY, Mayor StM IDRA StI� H, Civ Clerk Mayor: Department Director: Purchasing Manager: Finance & Internal Services Director: Budget Manager: IT Manager: Dispatch Manager: Utilities Manager: Other: 'O CD 0 V O) N d W N -s CO 3 Requester: , .;} David Jurgens - City: Birmingham Address:• 729 South 30th Street Vendor #: City Of Fayetteville (Not a Purchase Order) Shipping/Handling WSIP, WL -6, Hamestring Station 1 Description Quantity Vendor Name: P 'e''• hr" - - Brasfield & Gori•Ie,tCLC° " a", , .`'F,'.tv'' ..• '.' • Lot m a lUnit of Issue n rn r m m a m !J 0 0 0 0 0 0 !Unit Cost O O o 0 o o 00'0$ AV O O O 00'0$ O 0 O 0 0 O 0 O O faf) O O O 69 O 0 O w CO O O O O 0 O !Extended Cost 4480-9480-5315-00 Account N Zip Code: 35233 Fob Point: Fayetteville tequest r's:Erriployee #; 490 .. `gyp o 4" m 1Project/Subpr4ject # •:-)m u1 y; m y o<-I<3 H M w m g IT m to m- I v O C Zo 3 m 9 a a o Z 0 Z IX _ to o P IX I Inventory # Quotes Attached Yes: No: Expected Delivery Date: Date: 6/30/2006 m x co a D N N_ 4 lin group Excellence through Ownership June 30, 2006 Mr. Dave Jurgens, P.E. City of Fayetteville Director Water and Wastewater 113 West Mountain Street Fayetteville, AR 72701 Subject: Fayetteville Westside Wastewater Improvements - WL -6 RJN#18187500 Dear Mr. Jurgens: RJN has reviewed and processed the Contractor Bids for the above referenced project. All bids are correct as submitted by each contractor. Brasfield & Gorrie is certified to be the low bidder with a total bid amount of six million one hundred thirty thousand dollars and zero cents ($ 6,130,000). RJN is in the process of checking references supplied by Brasfield & Gorrie and expects that, based on their performance on the Fayetteville Westside Treatment Plant Project and the previous reference checks by the City, Brasfield & Gorrie will be found to be a qualified contractor. Contingent upon the final reference checks, RJN recommends that the contract for WL -6 in the amount of $ 6,130,000 be awarded to the low bidder, Brasfield & Gorrie. Attached is the summary of the Lump sum bids received. Should you have any further questions, please call me at (972) 437-4300. RJN Group, Inc Ail Xtio-t) Hugh M. Kelso Vice President xc: file www.gn.corr 26 East Meadow #8 • Fayetteville, AR 72701 • 479.444.6119 • fax 479.444.6119 BID TABULATION CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS WESTSIDE WASTEWATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENT PROJECT WL-6 IIAMESTRING LIFT STATION BID OPENING JUNE 29, 2006 10:30 AM Bidder Bid Amount ($) Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC 6,130,000 Crossland Heavy Contractors, Inc. 6,218,820 Van Horn Construction, Inc. 6,171,415 DOCUMENT 00500 - AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE AND (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) Project Name: Wastewater System Improvement Project Contract Name: Hamestring Lift Station Contract No.: WL -6 RLF Project No.: CS -0500803-03 THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the day of in the year 2006 by and between City of Fayetteville (hereinafter called Owner) and (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) (hereinafter called (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME)). ARTICLE 1 - WORK 1.01 (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work under this Contract is generally described as follows: Construction Hamestring Lift Station including related appurtenances and site work. The wet well/dry well lift station shall contain seven 350 -HP horizontal end -suction centrifugal pumps. Other station features include dry well ventilation, wet well odor control, and an electrical control building. Piping work includes pump suction and discharge piping, potable water service piping, connections to approaching 24- and 48 -inch gravity sewers, and 24- and 30 -inch discharge force mains. The project is located on the west side of Fayetteville northwest of the existing Hamestring Lift Station, across Sunshine Road (Route 877). ' 1.02 The Contract for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is generally described as follows: The City of Fayetteville, Arkansas is undertaking a project to redirect sewer flows from portions of the City in the Illinois River drainage basin to a new wastewater treatment plant on the west side of the City and upgrade sewers in the City which are in the White River drainage basin and upgrade the existing wastewater treatment plant on the east side of the City. The project is known as the Wastewater System 00500 - Agreement -Bidder rb 00500 — 1 U'I DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) Improvement Project and includes, but may not be limited to, four areas of improvements as follows: 1. Westside Wastewater Treatment Plant. 2. Westside Collection System Improvements. 3. Paul R. Noland Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements. 4. Eastside Collection System Improvements. ARTICLE 2- ENGINEER 2.01 The Contract has been designed by RJN GROUP, INC. RJN GROUP, INC. assumes all duties and responsibilities, and has the rights and authority assigned to RJN GROUP, INC. in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 3- CONTRACT TIME 3.01 TIME OF THE ESSENCE: A. All time limits for milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. 3.02 DATES FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT: A. •The Work will be Substantially Completed within 470 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS within 500 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. 1. Substantially Complete by date stated above shall be defined as the completion of all major work items as required for a fully operational system, including the installation of seven horizontal, two sumps and all valves. All piping work is to be installed and tested. All concrete 00500 - Agreement -Bidder rb 00500 - 2 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) and general site work is complete and all ventilation and odor control is complete. The control building is to be complete, and all electric and potable water facilities shall be in place and operational. .3.03 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: A. THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the time specified above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving the actual loss suffered by THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE if the Work is not Substantially Completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) shall pay THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE Five Thousand Dollars ($5,000.00) for each calendar. day that expires after the time specified above in Paragraph 3.02 for Substantial Completion until the Work is Substantially Complete. After Substantial Completion, if (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the time specified in Paragraph 3.02 for completion and readiness for final payment or any proper extension..thereof.granted by THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) shall pay THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE One Thousand Dollars ($1,00000) for each calendar day that expires after the time specified for completion and readiness for final payment. ARTICLE 4- CONTRACT:PRICE 4.01 The CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE agrees to pay, and (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) agrees to accept, as full and final compensation for all work done under this agreement, the amount based on the prices bid in the Proposal which is hereto 00500 -Agreement -Bidder rb 00500-3 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) attached, for the actual amount accomplished under each pay item, said payments to be made in lawful money of the United States at the time and in the manner set forth in the Specifications. 4.02 As provided in the General Conditions estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and measurements and determinations of actual quantities and classifications are to be made by RJN GROUP, INC. as provided in the General Conditions. 4.03 THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE shall pay (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents an amount in current funds equal to the sum of the amounts determined pursuant to paragraphs below:. A. For all Work, at the prices stated in (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME)'s Bid, attached hereto as an Exhibit. 404 Changes, modifications or amendments in scope, price or fees to this contract shall not be allowed without a formal contract amendment approved by the Mayor and the City Council in advance of the change in scope, costs, fees, or delivery schedule. ARTICLE 5- PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 SUBMITTAL AND PROCESSING OF PAYMENTS: A. (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS. Applications forPayment will be processed by THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. 5.02 PROGRESS PAYMENTS, RETAINAGE: A. THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME)'s Applications for Payment as recommended by RJN GROUP, INC. on or about the 20i° day of each month during construction. All such payments will be measured by the schedule of values established in the 00500 - Agreement -Bidder rb 00500-4 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) GENERAL CONDITIONS (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no schedule of values, as provided in the General Requirements. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as RJN GROUP, INC. shall determine, or THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE may withhold, in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS. a. 90% of Work Completed (with the balance being retainage). If Work has been 50% completed as determined by RJN GROUP, INC. and if the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to THE CITY -OF FAYETTEVILLE and RJN GROUP, INC.; THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE on • recommendation of RJN GROUP, INC. may determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work subsequently remain satisfactory to them a 5 percent retainage will be withheld on the remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion; and b. 100% of Equipment and Materials not incorporated in the Work but delivered, suitably stored, and accompanied by documentation satisfactory to THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. I Upon Substantial Completion; THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) to 95% of the Contract Price (with the balance being retainage), less such amounts as RJN GROUP, INC. shall determine, or THE. CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE may withhold, in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS. 00500- Agreement -Bidder rb 00500 — 5 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) 5.03 FINAL PAYMENT: A. Upon fmal completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS, THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by RJN GROUP, INC. and as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 6 - (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAMEI'S REPRESENTATIONS 6.01 In order to induce THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE to enter into this Agreement, (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) makes the following representations: A. (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents including the Addenda and other related data identified in the Bid Documents. B. (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance, and furnishing of the Work. C. (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance, and furnishing of the Work. D. (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site; and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any, at the Site. (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) acknowledges that THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and RN GROUP, INC. do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of information and data shown or indicated in the 00500 - Agreement -Bidder rb 00500— 6 DOCUMENT 00500 —AGREEMENT (continued) Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site. E. (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility of having done so).all such additional supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance, and furnishing of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. F. (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) does not consider that any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performing and furnishing of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. G. (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) is aware of the general nature of work to be:performed by THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents, H. (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) has correlated the information known to (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME), information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) has given RJN GROUP, INC. written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by RJN GROUP, INC. is acceptable to (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME). 00500 - Agreement -Bidder rb 00500-7 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) J. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. ARTICLE 7-. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7.01 CONTENTS: A. The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) concerning the Work consist of the following and may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS: 1. This Agreement. 2:. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows): a. Notice to Proceed. b. (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME)'s Bid. c. Documentation submitted by (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) prior to Notice of Award. d. (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME)'s Act of Assurance Form. 3. Performance, Payment, and other Bonds. 4. General Conditions. 5. MBE / WBE Compliance Evaluation Form. 6. Supplementary Conditions. 7. Labor -Related Regulations. 0 00500 - Agreement -Bidder rb 00500— 8 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) 8. Specifications consisting of divisions and sections as listed in table of contents of Project Manual. 9. Drawings consisting of a cover sheet and sheets as listed in the table of contents thereof, with each sheet bearing the following general title: Hamestring Lift Station, WL-.6 10. Addenda number one. 11. The following which maybe delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement and are not attached hereto: All Written Amendments and other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to the GENERAL CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8- MISCELLANEOUS 8.01 TERMS: A. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in the GENERAL CONDITIONS shall have the meanings stated in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. 8.02 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT: A. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due. may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction maybe ►imited.by Law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or. discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 00500 - Agreement -Bidder rb 00500 - 9 11111113�' DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) 8.03SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS: A. THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) each binds himself, his partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 8.04 SEVERABILITY: A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME), who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision. 8.05 OTHER PROVISIONS: Not Applicable. 8.06 CONTROLLING LAW A. This Agreement shall be subject to, interpreted and enforced according to the laws of the State of Arkansas without regard to any conflicts of law provisions. 8.07 ARKANSAS OF INFORMATION ACT A. City contracts and documents, including internal documents and documents of subcontractors and sub -consultants, prepared while performing City contractual work are subject to the Arkansas Freedom of Information Act (FOIA). If a Freedom of Information Act request is presented to the CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) will do everything possible to provide the documents in a prompt and timely manner as prescribed in the Arkansas Freedom of Information Act (A.C.A. §25-19- 101 et seq.). Only legally authorized photocopying costs pursuant to the FOIA may be assessed for this compliance. 00500 - Agreement -Bidder rb 00500- 10 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) have signed this Agreement in quadruplicate. One counterpart each has been.delivered to THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, (CONTRACTOR COMPLETENAME), and RJN GROUP, INC. All portions of the Contract Documents have been signed, initialed, or identified by THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) This Agreement will be effective on Effective Date of the Agreement. (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) By: (SEAL) Attest Address for giving notices License No. Agent for Service of process (If (CONTRACTOR COMPLETE NAME) is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign.) 2006, which is the City of Fayetteville Fayetteville, Arkansas By: Title: Mayor (SEAL) Attest Address for giving notices (If Owner is a public body, attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution or other documents authorizing execution of Agreement) Approved As to Form: By: Attorney For: City of Fayetteville END OF DOCUMENT 00500 00500 - Agreement -Bidder rb 00500— 11 Clarice Pearman - agreement Page 1 From: Clarice Pearman To: Jurgens, David Date: 7.19.06 2:08PM Subject: agreement David, Please see that I get a signed agreement for Brasfield & Gorrie to continue procesing the resolution passed by City Council, July 18, 2006. I know we talked earlier, this is a confirmation that I notified you. Thanks. Clarice /5. 1?� ab II F a. I , a> City of Fayetteville, Arkansas Water and Wastewater Department David Jurgens, Director PROJECT MANUAL FOR PROJECT NO.WL-6 HAMESTRING LIFT STATION RLF PROJECT NUMBER CS -050808-03 FAYETTEVILLE WASTEWATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENT PROJECT Volume 1 of 2 ENGINEER RJN Group, Inc. 26 E. Meadow, Suite 8 Fayetteville, AR 72701 RJN Project No. 18187500 May 2006 OWNER City of Fayetteville Waste and Wastewater Department 113 West Mountain Street Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701 Y PROJECT MANUAL Volume I of 2 Hamestring Lift Station Wastewater System Improvement Project Fayetteville, Arkansas Water and Wastewater Department Project No. WL-6 RLF Project No. CS -050808 -03 Engineer's Project No. 18187500 Engineer: RJN Group, Inc. 26 E. Meadow, Suite 8 Fayetteville, AR 72701 Telephone (479) 444-6119 Fax (479) 444-6119 (call first) 0000lb-Project Tide Page 00001b - 1 SPECIFICATIONS Summary of Specification and Drawing Revisions Issued May 30, 2006 Project Number: WL-6 Contract Title: Hamestring Lift Station RLF Project Number: CS -050808-03 00100 BID SOLICITATION 00120 Invitation to Bid 00120-1 of 4 • The purchase of the documents is waived if a set was purchased during the previous advertisement • Pre -bid is not mandatory 00200 Instructions to Bidders 00200-1 of!! • Modified 1.03, C, I Added property descriptions 7 pages 00500 AGREEMENT FORMS 00500 Agreement 00500-1 of 11 1 • Removed "Sample" Watermark 00700 CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents 00700 TOC-1 of 5 Contract General Conditions 00700-1 of 49 • Removed : 5.02, C. Owner's Protective Liability Insurance DIVISION 2- SITE CONSTRUCTION 02830 Chain Link Fences & Gates 02830-1 of 5 Added: 3.01, D., Gate Operator Specification DIVISION 3- CONCRETE 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete 03300-1 of 12 • Article 2.01 A, Revised to a Type H cement DIVISION 7- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ADD 07140 07140 Fluid -Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing 07180-1 of _ DIVISION 9- FINISHES 09703 Wet Well Concrete Lining 09703-1 of 10 • Revised entire spec. Volume 2 DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL 15010 Wet Well / Dry Well Piping 15010-1 of 5 • Deleted 2.02, C, ANSI spec. 15430 Piping Specialties 15430-1 of 4 00001 Summary of Specification Changes 00001c-1 • Added note about the two backflow preventers 15446 Sump Pumps 15446-1 of 4 • Removed the word "Dry" from the pump description DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL 16900 Programmable Logic Controller 16900-1 of 18 • Revised specification for Modicom Premium PLC 16901 Human -Machine Interface 16901-1 of 5 • Revised specification for industrial touch screen interface DRAWINGS REVISIONS C-5 Removed erroneous backflow preventer C-8 Revised subgrade requirements, added Note C S-1 to S-16 Corrected scaling issues S-4 Corrected corbel elevations and added epoxy coat designations to ceiling of wet well S-13 Corrected corbel and header pipe elevations M-2 Changed note on 24" and 30" valves M-3 Changed title of backflow preventer detail M-4 Added header elevations M-7&8 Added drain trap and changed pipe casing size from 4" to 2" IC -5 Removed valve and flow control valve from crossover END OF DOCUMENT 00001 00001 Summary of Specification Changes 0000lc-2 City of Fayetteville, Arkansas Wastewater System.Improvement Project Contact No. WL-6 Hamestring Lift Station DOCUMENT 00005 - INDEX AND CERTIFICATION SPECIFICATION INDEX DOCUMENT/ DIVISION DESCRIPTION VOLUMEI 00120 to 00945 SECTIONS DIVISION I - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 2- SITE CONSTRUCTION DIVISION 3- CONCRETE DIVISION 4- MASONRY Not Used DIVISION 5- METALS DIVISION 6- WOOD AND PLASTICS Not Used DIVISION 7- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION DIVISION 8- DOORS AND WINDOWS DIVISION 9 - FINISHES DIVISION 10 -SPECIALTIES DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Not Used DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 00010 Table of Contents 00010- 1 NUMBER OF PAGES 1 1 City of Fayetteville, Arkansas Wastewater System Improvement Project 1 Contact No. WL-6 Hamestring Lift Station ' DOCUMENT 00005 - INDEX AND CERTIFICATION 1 SPECIFICATION INDEX DOCUMENT/ NUMBER 1 DIVISION DESCRIPTION OF PAGES. DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 1 Not Used VOLUME 2 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 1 DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL CERTIFICATION 1 I hereby certify that the Hamestring Lift Station, Part of the City of Fayetteville's Wastewater System Improvements Project, Contract No. WL-6, RLF Project Number CS -050808-03, Plans and Specifications were prepared by me under my direct supervision and that I am duly Licensed Engineer under the laws of the State of Arkansas. 1 (Seal) 1 Name: Date: Zb /I b END OF DOCUMENT 1 /a&jtfl (pisnRE 1 xf E FESSIO A Y ;o NGIlVEE �� LW 00010 Table of Contents 00010-2 I. TABLE OF CONTENTS Volume 1 of 2 Project Number: WL-6 Contract Title: Hamestrine Lift Station RLF Project Number: CS -050808-03 Volume 1 II ti;ogets Tih t;u: r 1U 00100 BID SOLICITATION 00120 Invitation to Bid 00120-I of 4 00140 Bidder's Qualification Statement 00140-1 of 4 00200 Instructions to Bidders 00200-1 of 11 Property Descriptions 1 of 7 00400 BID FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS 00400 Bid Form 00400-1 of 8 00410 Bid Bond 00410-1 of 2 00430 List of Subcontractors 00430-1 of 1 00450 Equipment Questionnaire 00450-1 of I Contractor's Act of Assurance Form RLF-52 1 of 2 MBE/WBE Compliance Evaluation Form RLF-96 1 of I 00500 AGREEMENT FORMS 00500 Agreement 00500-1 of 11 00550 Notice to Proceed 00550-1 of 2 00600 BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00610 Performance Bond 00610-1 of 3 00611 Labor and Material Payment Bond 00611-1 of 4 00700 CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents 00700 TOC-1 of 5 Contract General Conditions 00700-1 of 49 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Supplemental Conditions of Revolving Loan Fund RLF-53 1 of 15 Appendix A -Labor Standards Provisions Ap A-1 of 8 Appendix 8 -Compliance Responsibility for Equal Employment Opportunity Ap B -I of 11 Prevailing Wage Determination 1 of4 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P, OSHA Standards 1 of 55 00900 MODIFICATIONS 00930 Request for Interpretation 00930-1 of 1 00931 Field Order 00931-1 oft 00932 Request for Proposal 00932-1 of 1 00940 Change Order 00940-1 of! 00945 Work Change Directive 00945-1 of 2 00010 Table of Contents 00010-i IH DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01110 Summaryof Work 01110-1 of 3 01250 Contract Modification Procedures 01250-1 of 2 01290 Payment Procedures 01290-1 of 2 01290.01 Application for Payment 01290.01-1 of 2 01290.02 Schedule of Values 01290.02-1 of 1 01290.12 Certificate of Substantial Completion 01290.12-1 of 1 01290.14 Contractor Affidavit for Final Payment 01290.14-1 of 2 01290.15 Subcontractor Affidavit for Final Payment 01290.15-1 of 1 01320 Project Meetings, Schedules & Reports 01320-1 of 4 01321 CPM Schedule 01321-1 of 8 01321.01 CPM Appendix A 01321.01-1 of 1 01325 Construction Photos 01325-1 of 5 01330 Submittals 01330-1 of 9 01330.01 Submittal Information Block 01330.01-1 of! 01420 Definitions & Standards 01420-1 of 4 01520 Field Offices & Sheds 01520-1 oft 01530 Barriers & Temperature Controls 01530-1 of 6 01560 Temporary Utilities & Facilities 01560-1 of 7 01580 Project Identification & Signs 01580-1 of 2 01600 Equipment & Materials 01600-1 of 6 01631 Substitutions 01631-1 of3 01631.01 Substitution Request Form 01631.01-1 of 2 01700 Training 01700-1 of3 01750 Manufacturer's Field Services 01750-1 of 2 01780 Contract Closeout 01780-1 of 6 01785 Warranties 01785-1 of 3 DIVISION 2- SITE CONSTRUCTION 02100 Site Preparation 02100-1 of 5 02161 Excavation Safety 02161-1 of 1 02200 Excavation, Embankment, Backfill and Grading 02200-1 of 7 02221 Trehching, Backfilling and Compacting 02221-1 of 6 02223 Explosives and Blasting 02223-1 of 6 02227 Aggregate Materials 02227-1 of 2 02229 Rock Removal 02229-1 of 2 02240 Dewatering 02240-1 of 2 02261 Site Restoration 02261-1 of 3 02270 Environmental Specifications 02270-1 of 16 02271 Geotextile Fabric 02271-1 of 2 02272 Riprap 02272-1 of 02451 Rock Anchors 02451-1 of 02535 Manhole Testing 02535-1 of 2 02601 Cast -in Place Manholes 02601-1 of 3 02602 Pre -Cast Concrete Manholes 02602-1 of 4 02616 Polyethylene Encasement 02616-1 of 3 02622 Plastic Pipe and Fittings 02622-1 of 4 02640 Valves & Accessories 02640-1 of 02665 Water Systems 02665-1 of 3 02730 Ductile Iron Pipe 02730-1 of 12 02751 Concrete Paving 02751-1 of 10 02752 Concrete Paving Joints 02752-1 of 4 02753 Concrete Pavement Curing 02753-1 of 2 02771 Integral Curb 02771-I of3 02775 Concrete Sidewalks 02775-1 of 3 00010 Table of Contents 00010-2 1 II II 02830 Chain Link Fences & Gates 02830-1 of 5 DIVISION 3- CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories 03100-1 of 5 ' 03200 _ Concrete Reinforcement 03200-1 of 5 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete 03300-1 of 12 03414 Precast Concrete Stairs 03414-1 of 5 ' 03600 Grout 03600-1 of 2 ill [1 I. 1 I. 1 DIVISION 4- MASONRY Not Used DIVISION 5- METALS 05511 Metal Stairs, Landings, Platforms, Catwalks, Ladders and Railings DIVISION 6- WOOD AND PLASTICS Not Used 05511-1 of9 DIVISION 7- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07140 Fluid -Applied Elastomeric Waterproofmg 07140-1 of 5 07180 Traffic Coatings 07180-1 of 5 DIVISION 8- DOORS AND WINDOWS 08311 Access Hatches 08311- 1 of 2 08950 Skylight System 08950-1 of 6 DIVISION 9- FINISHES 09703 Wet Well Concrete Lining 09703-1 of 10 09900 Painting 09900- 1 of 6 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10520 Emergency Shower and Eye Wash 10520-I of 3 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11349 FRP Ductwork and Accessories 11349-1 of 4 11357 Carbon Adsorber 11357-1 of 7 11360 Grease Eliminator 11360-1 oft DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Not Used DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13121 Pre -Engineered Metal Buildings 13121-1 of 8 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not Used Volume 2 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 Wet Well / Dry Well Piping 15010-1 of 5 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15050-1 of 3 15071 Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls 15071-1 of 8 15080 Wastewater Pump Suction and Discharge Valves 15080-1 of 3 00010 Table of Contents 00010-3 I 15081 Sump Pump Piping and Fittings 15081-1 of! I 15082 Pump Discharge Check Valve Control System 15082-1 of 2 15085 Duct Insulation 15085-1 of 8 15183 Refrigerant Piping 15183-1 of 6 15430 Piping Specialties 15430-1 of 4 15445 Wastewater Pumps 15445-1 of 7 15446 Sump Pumps 15446-1of4 15447 Pump Installation, Grouting, and Alignment 15447-1 of 10 15500 Odor Control Chemical Feed System 15500-1 of 7 15671 Air -Cooled Condensing Units 15671-1 of 4 15733 Outdoor Air Conditioners 15733-1 of 7 15734 Dehumidifier Units 15734-1 of? 15767 Propeller Unit Heaters 15767-1 of 3 15815 Metal Ducts 15815-1 of 5 15820 Duct Accessories 15820-1 of 3 15837 Centrifugal Fans 15837-1 of 6 15855 Diffusers, Registers; and Grilles 15855-1 of 2 , 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-1 of 10 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16011 Short-Circuit/Coordination Study 16011-1 of 3 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16050-1 of 8 16060 Grounding and Bonding 16060-1 of 5 16080 Electrical Testing 16080-1 of 2 16117 Concrete -Encased Duct Banks 16117-1 of 4 16120 Conductors and Cables T 16120-1 of 4 16130 Raceway and Boxes 16130-1 of 6 16140 Wiring Devices 16140-1 of 3 16429 Switchboards— Low Voltage (Group Mounted Feeders) 16429-1 of 15 16442 Panel Boards 16442-1 of 5 16461 Dry -Type Distribution Transformers (1,000 KVA and Below) 16461-1 of 4 16481 RVSS — Low -Voltage Starters 16481-1 of 5 16482 Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage 16482-1 of 8 16483 Variable Frequency Drives 16483-1 of 10 16511 Interior Lighting 16511-1 of 3 16800 General Requirements — Instrumentation and Controls 16800-1 of? 16801 Instrumentation Identification & Tagging Methods •16801-1 of 2 16802 Measuring and Controlling Instruments 16802-1 of 6 16802 Instrument Data and ISA Sheets 16802-1 of 12 16805 Cabinets, Control Panels and Enclosures 16805-1 of 4 16900 Programmable Logic Controller 16900-1 of 16 16900 PLC 11O List 16900-1 of 4 16901 Human -Machine Interface 16901-1 of 5 16905 Uninterniptible Power Supply System (UPS) 16905-1 of 5 Process Control Description 1 of 6 ' END OF DOCUMENT 00010 1 I 00010 Table of Contents 00010-4 1 DOCUMENT 00120 - INVITATION TO BID City of Fayetteville, Arkansas Invitation to Bid Bid 06-42, WL-6 Hamestring Sewer Lift Station Project Name: Wastewater System Improvement Project Contract Name: Hamestring Lift Station Contract No.: WL-6 RLF Project No.: CS -050808-03 Date: May 25, 2006 DESCRIPTION OF WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contract provides for the construction 01 36 million gallon per day capacity Hamestring Sewer Lift Station including related appurtenances and site work. The wet well/dry well lift station shall contain 7 — 350 HP horizontal end -suction centrifugal pumps. Other station features include dry well ventilation, wet well odor control, and an electrical control building. Piping work includes pump suction and discharge piping, potable water service piping, connections to approaching 24- and 48 -inch gravity sewers, and 24 - and 30 -inch discharge force mains. The project is located on the west side of Fayetteville northwest of the existing Hamestring Lift Station, 2034 North County Road 877 (Sunshine Road). BID INFORMATION Sealed bids will be received by the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas (the Owner) until 10:30 a.m., local time, June 29, 2006. Bids received'after this time will not be accepted. The City of Fayetteville will not be responsible for lost or misdirected bids. Bids will be opened and publicly read aloud immediately after specified closing time. All interested parties are invited to attend. Bids must be received at the following location BY 10:00 A.M. on Thursday, June 29, 2006: I I Purchasing Agent's Office (Room 306) at City Hall 113 West Mountain Street Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701 IBid 06-42, W-6 Hamestring Lift Station 00120-1 L DOCUMENT 00120 — INVITATION TO BID (Cont.) Sealed envelopes or packages containing bids shall be marked or endorsed "Bid 06-42, WL-6 Hamestring Lift Station and the Contractor's Arkansas License Number shall be clearly marked on the outside of the envelope. Copies of the Bid Documents may be obtained for bidding purposes from RJN Group, Inc. at a purchase price of Two Hundred Fifty Dollars (S 250.00) for each set (one (1) copy of Project Manual, one(1) set of Contract Drawings, and one (1) bid packet) of documents. Bid Documents may be obtained at the following Issuing Office: This fee will be waived for parties who purchased documents for bid 06-32, the first bid of this project. RJN Group, Inc. 12160 Abrams Road, Ste. 400 Dallas, TX 75243 Phone: 972-437-4300; Fax: 972-437-2707 Payments must be received prior to shipment of the Bid Documents. NO REFUND of payment will be made and no partial sets will be issued. No half size set will be sold or issued prior to the bid opening. Questions concerning the contract documents should be directed to the following: Mr. Kevin White, P.E. 727 North First Street, Suite 240 St. Louis, MO 63102 (314)588-9764, Ext. 325 Bid documents may be examined at the following locations: McGraw Hill Construction Dodge/Little Rock Kroger Center, Redding Building 1701 Centerview Drive, Suite 110 Little Rock, AR 72211-4311 (501)225-9453; Fax (501)225-9534 McGraw Hill Construction Dodge/Dallas 9155 Sterling Drive, Suite 160 Irving, TX 75063 (972)819-1400; Fax (972)819-1409 Bid 06-42, W-6 Hamestring Lift Station 00120-2 McGraw Hill Construction Dodge/Springfield 3275 E. Ridgeview, Ste. B Springfield, MO 65804-4092 (417)883-6600; Fax (417)883-6607 McGraw Hill Construction Dodge/Tulsa 12101 E. 51s` Street, Suite 105 Tulsa, OK 74146 (918)307-1'786; Fax (918)307-1788 DOCUMENT 00120 - INVITATION TO BID • (Cont.) E [] Northwest Arkansas Planning Room • 103-A Apple Blossom Road Bethel Heights, AR 72764 (479)750-7704; Fax (479)750-7709 ViiIfl'J u1 t N's c/o Southern Reprographics, Inc. 2905 Pointe Circle Fayetteville, AR 72703 (479)582-4022; Fax (479)582-4021 Reed Construction Data 30 Technology Pkwy, Ste. 100 Norcross, GA 30092 . (800)424-3996, Fax (800)303-8629 www.reedconstructiondata.com Bid News Construction Reports 5727 S. Garnett Road, Suite H Tulsa, OK 74146 (918)877-1200; Fax (918)877-1203 A prebid conference will be held on June 14, 2006 at 1:30 p.m. at the Fayetteville City Hall, Room 326 at 113 W. Mountain, Fayetteville, Arkansas. Bids will be received on a lump -sum basis. Bidders shall be qualified to do business and licensed in accordance with all applicable laws of the state and local governments and local city ordinances where the Project is located. The City of Fayetteville will evaluate Bidders in accordance with the Instruction to Bidders. Prequalification of Bidders will not be required. Owner will evaluate Bidders in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. Bid security in the form of a certified or bank cashier's check or a Bid Bond in the amount of 5% of Bid Amount of contract shall accompany each Bid in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders: Bids shall be in accordance with the Bid Documents. COMPLETION Completion time shall be as follows: The Work shall be Substantially Completed within 470 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS within 500 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. ' Bid 06-42, W-6 Hamestring Lift Station 00120-3 I DOCUMENT 00120 - INVITATION TO BID (Cont.) t ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS The Bid shall be conditioned upon compliance with all applicable labor related requirements including the regulations and stipulations concerning equal employment opportunity, minority manpower utilization, I affirmative action requirements, and minimum wage rates. The greater of the Arkansas Department of Labor Prevailing Wage Rate or the U. S. Department of Labor Prevailing Wage Rate shall establish the minimum wages to be paid to workers under this Contract. Pursuant to Ark. Code Annotated 22-9-203, the City of Fayetteville encourages all qualified small, ' minority and women business enterprises to bid and receive contracts for goods, services, and construction. Also, City of Fayetteville encourages all general contractors to subcontract portions of their ' contract to qualified small, minority, and women business enterprises. OWNER'S RIGHT TO REJECT The City of Fayetteville (Owner) reserves the right to reject any or all Bids and to waive irregularities therein, and all Bidders shall agree that such rejection shall be without liability on the part of the City of Fayetteville for any damage or claim brought by any Bidder because of such rejections, nor shall the Bidders seek any recourse of any kind against the City of Fayetteville because of such rejections. The filing of any Bid in response to this invitation shall constitute an agreement of the Bidder to these conditions. AWARD OF CONTRACT Any contract or contracts awarded under this Invitation for bids will be subject to the requirements of USEPA and State of Arkansas Revolving Loan Fund Program as described in the Contract Documents. OWNER CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE By Peggy Vice ' Title: Purchasing Manager t I Bid 06-42, W-6 Hamestring Lift Station 00120-4 1 U DOCUMENT 00140 — BIDDER'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT ' Project Name: Wastewater System Improvement Project '• Contract Name: Hamestring Lift Station Contract No.: WL-6 '• RLF Project No. i CS -050808-03 Date: 6/29/2006 ' SUBMITTED TO: The City of Fayetteville, Arkansas 113 West Mountain Street ' Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701 SUBMITTED BY: 1 Company Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC i Name Gary Harrington Address 729 South 301° Street ' Principal Office Birmingham, AL 35233 ' Corporation, partnership, individual, joint venture, other ' Arkansas State General Contractor's License Number 0077580406 ' EXPERIENCE STATEMENT I1. Bidder has been engaged as a General Contractor in construction for 42 years and has performed work of the nature and magnitude of this Contract for 35 years. Bidder has been in business under its present name for .8 years. ' 2. Bidder now has the following bonded projects under contract: (On a separate sheet, list project name, owner, name of owner contact, engineer / architect, name of engineer/architect contact, amount of contract, surety, and estimated completion date.) See Attachment A 3. Bidder has completed the following (list minimum of 3) contracts consisting of work ' similar to that proposed by this Contract: (On a separate sheet, list project name, owner, name of owner contact, engineer / architect, name of engineer/architect 00140 -Bidder's Qualification Statement 00140- 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I DOCUMENT 00140 - BIDDER'S OUALIFICATION STATEMENT (continued) ' contact, amount of contract, surety, and date of completion and percentage of the cost of the Work performed with Bidder's own forces.) See Attachment B 4. Has Bidder ever failed to complete any project? If so, state when, where, and why. 1 5. Bidder normally performs the following work with his own forces: Clearing & Grubbing; Demolition: Grading & Excavation: Concrete Formwork; Placement of concrete: plant and yard piping: ' structural steel erection: finished grading & grassing 6. Construction experience of key individuals in the organization is as follows (continued on attached sheets if needed): See Attachment C 1 7. In the event the Contract is awarded to Bidder, the required surety Bonds will be furnished by the following surety company and name and address of agent: Federal Insurance Company & Traveler's Casualty & Surety Agent: Hines, Ridolphi & Associates, Inc ' P.O. Box 531310 Birmingham, AL 35253 8. Bidder's Workmen's Compensation Experience Modifier Factor is: 0.77 I 00140 -Bidder's Qualification Statement 00140 -2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I U 1 I 1 1. 1. 1 t I I Bidder (continued) as indicated by the following: 1. J%ssPtstandLiallifities: Attach a financial statement, audited if available, including Bid er- s latS balance sheet and income statements showing the following items: See Attachment D a. Current assets (cash, joint venture accounts, accounts receivable, notes receivable, accrued income, deposits, materials inventory, and prepaid expenses). b. Net fixed assets. c. Other assets. d. Current liabilities (accounts payable, notes payable, accrued expenses, provision for income taxes, advances, accrued salaries, and accrued payroll taxes). e. Other liabilities (capital, capital stock, authorized and outstanding shares par values, earned surplus, and retained earnings). f. Name of firm preparing financial statement and date thereof: If financial statement is not for identical organization named herein, explain relationship and financial responsibility of the organization furnished. 2. Current Judgments: The following judgments are outstanding against Bidder: Judgment Creditors Where Docketed and Date Amount a. N/A $ lM 00140 -Bidder's Qualification Statement 00140 - 3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I DOCUMENT 00140 - BIDDER'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENTF (roptlnugd) I Bidder hereby represents and warrants that all statements set forth hetin true andQwrrect _ Date: 06/29/2006 J.V u ^- ' • _ Y Name of Organization: Brasfield & Gorr%. LLC By ao� Title Gary H,r>lington, V9e President (If Bidder is a partnership, the partnership name shall be signed, followed by the signature of at least one of the partners. If Bidder is a corporation, the corporate name shall be signed, followed by the signature of a duly -authorized officer and with the corporate seal affixed.) END OF DOCUMENT 00140 ' 1 1 1 I 1' 00140 -Bidder's Qualification Statement 00140 -4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 BRASFIELD �GORRIE ATTACHMENT A -BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT CONTRACT SCHEDULED SELF- PROJECT MM COMPLETION PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM Job Number: 051604036 $0 Start: 95% Knoxville Utilities Board 36" RS Rework @ Walker Springs 01/16/2006 4505 Middlebrook Pike 608 Walker Springs Road Knoxville, TN 37921 Knoxville, TN 37923 Jeff Lingerfelt 865.558.32438 Square Footage: 0 Finish: CH2M Hill -Knoxville Stories: 0 02/03/2006 4505 Middlebrook Pike Knoxville, TN 37921 I Job Number: 031013 $36,675,000 Start: 30% Barefoot Properties, LLC Adagio 11/17/2003 1414 County Highway 283 South 2421 County Hwy 30A Santa Rosa Beach, FL 35249 Santa Rosa Beach, FL 32459 Jason Sprenkle 850.622.0111 Square Footage: 361,600 Finish: Collins & Associates, Inc. Stories: 0 09/27/2005 465 Harrison Avenue Panama City, FL 32401 Vicky Williams 850.769.3357 E Job Number: 043801 $3,006,511 Start: 2% Agnes Scott College Agnes Scott College - Iman Hall 06/21/2004 141 East College Avenue 141 East College Avenue Decatur, GA 30030 Decatur, GA 30030 Bill Gailey 404.638.6278 Square Footage: 0 Finish: Toland Mizell PCI Group Inc. Stories: 4 03/03/2005 Alan Toland 404.343.3500 Penta Engineering Group Stephen Kimble I I t'• 1 1 r (� PROJECT ATTACHMENT A - BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT CONTRACT SCHEDULED SELF- a MM COMPLETION PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM Job Number: 041003 $472,700 Start: 10% Auburn University Auburn University Medical Clinic 02/16/2004 Auburn University Dept. of 400 Lem Morrison Drive Building Science Auburn University, AL 36849 Auburn University, AL 36849 Walker Davis Square Footage: 0 Finish: Evan Terry Associates Stories: 0 01/31/2005 One Perimeter Park South Birmingham, AL 35243 - Neil King 205.972.9100 Job Number. 051602 $20,500,000 Start: 10% Bonita Springs Utilities Bonita Springs Utilities East 02/15/2005 11860 East Terry Street Water Reclamation Facility Bonita Springs, FL 34135 � 25500 Weilfeld Road Mike Liggins Bonita Springs, FL 34135 800.583.1496 Square Footage: 0 Finish: Stories:0 10/15/2006 CH2MHill Constructors, Inc. - Tampa 4650 W. Cypress Street Tampa, FL 33607 Robert Ainslie 813.874.0777 Job Number: 021604 $54,890,000 Start: 81% Jefferson County Department of Cahaba River WWTP-Permit 10/28/2005 Environmental Services Improvements 716 Richard Arrington Jr. Blvd. 3900 Veona Daniels Drive North Birmingham, AL 35244 Birmingham, AL 35203 Wynn Echols 205.856.0303 Square Footage: 0 ij Stories: 0 Finish: 02/14/2005 PROJECT ATTACHMENT A- BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT CONTRACT SCHEDULED SELF - MM COMPLETION PERFORMED a PROJECT TEAM F.W. Dougherty Engineering & Associates - Birmingham 2441 Old Springville Road Birmingham, AL 35235 Job Number: 033214 $33,000,000 Start: 28% Davidson Retirement Properties Canterbury Court 03/01/2004 119 Davis Road, Suite 1-A 3750 Peachtree Road Augusta, GA 30907 Atlanta, GA 30319 Mike Harris 706.868.9299 Square Footage: 194,000 Finish: RDG Schutte Wilscam Birge, Stories: 9 09/01/2005 Inc. 900 Famam on the Mall, Suite 100 Omaha, NE 68102-5089 Scott Pfeifer Job Number: 053503 Children's Healthcare of Atlanta at Egleston Master Plan Concrete Lump Sum 1405 Clifton Road Atlanta, GA 30322 Square Footage: 891,370 Stories: 9 $17,320,938 Start10% Children's Healthcare of Atlanta 06/08/2005 1600 Tullie Circle Atlanta, GA 30329 Dan Maxwell 404.315.2441 Finish: 08/07/2006 Walter P. Moore - GA 1201 Peachtree Stree Atlanta, GA 30361 i " I ATTACHMENT A - BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT CONTRACT SCHEDULED SELF - PROJECT MM COMPLETION PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM ' Job Number: 041012 $8,174,000 Start: 10% City Of Homewood City of Homewood Municipal 06/01/2004 1903 29th Avenue South ' Center Patldng Structure and Homewood, AL 35209 Plaza Barry McCulley Between 28th and 29th Avenue South Homewood, AL 35209 ' Square Footage: 0 Finish: Cohen Carnaggio Reynolds Stories: 1 01/01/2005 2210 Second Ave North Birmingham, AL 35203 1 1 Job Number: 031502 $2,424,188 Start: 30% Alabama Department of ' Cochrane Bridge Repair 04/20/2003 Transportation U.S. Hwy 90 1409 Coliseum Boulevard Mobile, AL 36618-1109 Montgomery, AL 36130 p Square Footage: 0 Finish: Stories: 0 06/28/2004 ' Job Number: 051605 $38,680,169 Start: 80% The Metropolitan Government 'Dry Creek WWTP Facility 07/05/2005 of Nashville and Davidson Improvements County 61 Edenwold Road 1600 Second Avenue North Madison, TN 37115 Nashville, TN 37204 Ron Taylor 615.862.4585 Square Footage: 0 Finish: 'Stories:0 11/14/2007 Black & Veatch I. Robert Lantz Brown & Caldwell Bill Eleazer i. 615.250.1219 I ATTACHMENT A - BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT PROJECT Job Number: 043401 Floyd Medical Center Phase 3 Square Footage: 105,000 Stories: 3 CONTRACT SCHEDULED SELF - MM COMPLETION PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM $15,287,893 Start: 15% Floyd Medical Center 03/31/2004 304 Turner McCall Blvd. Rome, GA 30165 Sonny Rigas 706.802.2575 Finish: Earl Swensson Associates 04/02/2005 2100 West End Avenue, Suite 1200 Nashville, TN 37203 Matt Manning 615.329.9445 Job Number: 043623 $23,828,410 Start: 10% Executive Committee of the Georgia Baptist Convention 10/15/2004 Baptist Convention of the State 6405 Sugarloaf Parkway of Georgia Duluth, GA 30096 2930 Flowers Road Atlanta, GA 30341 J. White 770.455.0404 Square Footage: 145,000 Finish: Smallwood, Reynolds, Stewart, Stories: 6 02/28/2006 Stewart & Associates, Inc. - GA One Piedmont Center Atlanta, GA 30305-1521 Bert Picketing 404.233.5453 II ' Job Number: 031009 $25,880,000 Start: 6% Head Companies LaTerra at the King and the Bear 08/29/2003 18300 Scenic Hwy 98 955 Registry Boulevard Point Clear, AL 36564 'St. Augustine, FL 32092 Wayne Sloan • Square Footage: 221,000 Finish: Rink Design Architects Stories: 3 02/27/2006 Riverplace Tower Suite 500 Jacksonville, FL 32207 Mark Keister 904,396,6353 1 1 I ' PROJECT 1 Ii Job Number: 052007 Lockheed Martin 5600 Sandlake Road Orlando, FL 32819 ' Square Footage: 257,000 Stories: 6 10 I 11 II ii ATTACHMENT A- BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT Job Number: 051604;003 Lower First Creek Wastewater Storage Facility 1530 North Sixth Avenue Knoxville, TN 37917 Square Footage: 0 Stories: 0 Job Number: 041600 ' McDowell Creek Waste Water Treatment Plant 4901 Neck Road Huntersville, NC 28078 I CONTRACT ($MM) $17,247,730 SCHEDULED SELF - COMPLETION PERFORMED •1 PROJECT TEAM Atlantic Engineering Service 4019 Woodcock Drive Suite 201 Jacksonville, FL 32207 Robert Brown 904.743.4633 Start: 15% Lockheed Martin 07/15/2005 5600 Sandlake Road Orlando, FL 32819 Don Wilson 407.356.3361 Finish: Hunton Brady Architects P.A 07/15/2006 Steve Belfower 407.839.0886 $9,981,357 Start: 65% Knoxville Utilities Board 08/01/2005 4505 Middlebrook Pike Knoxville, TN 37921 Tim Tucker 865.558.32438 Finish: CH2M Hill -Knoxville 08/01/2006 4505 Middlebrook Pike Knoxville, TN 37921 Craig Parker 865.522.0262 $75,293,000 Start: 69% Charlotte -Mecklenburg Utilities 06/14/2004 510 Brookshire Blvd. Charlotte, NC 28216 Tom Howard 704.510.8441 11 BRASFIEID �GORRIE ATTACHMENT A-. BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT CONTRACT SCHEDULED SELF- .g PROJECT MM COMPLETION PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM Square Footage: 0 Finish: Stories: 0 06/14/2007 • Black & Veatch Engineers 8520 Cliff Cameron Drive Suite 350 Charlotte, NC 28269 Dave Parker 704.548.8461 I Job Number: 002209;000 $45,000,000 Start: 20% Morton Plant Mease Healthcare Mease Country Side Hospital 04/15/2001 - Clearwater 1860 Mease Drive 3231 McMullen Booth Rd. t Safety Harbor, FL 34695 Safety Harbor, FL 34695 Jim Pfeiffer 727.725.6233 Square Footage: 300,000 Finish: Flad & Associates - FL 1 Stories: 5 11/01/2005 3300 SW Archer Road Gainesville, FL 32609 John Blassick 352.378.3081 Job Number: 032202 $31,000,000 Start: 10% Morton Plant Mease Healthcare Morton Plant Roebling Building 05/01/2003 - Clearwater Replacement 1233 South Ft. Harrison Avenue 300 Pinellas Street Clearwater, FL 33756 Clearwater, FL 34756 Square Footage: 170,000 Finish: Harvard Jolly Cleese Toppe Stories: 5 05/01/2006 Architects 5201 West Kennedy Blvd Suite 515 I. Tampa, FL 33609 Paul Schnitzlein I 813.896,4611 I ' PROJECT I ATTACHMENT A - BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT CONTRACT ($MM) SCHEDULED SELF- k COMPLETION PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM I.C. Thomasson & Associates 2950 Kraft Drive, Suite 500 Nashville, TN 37204 ' Job Number: 031220;003 $326,155 Start: 10% Medical University Hospital MUHA - Central Energy Plant 08/01/2004 Authority (BGKS) 171 Ashley Avenue ' Charleston, SC 29425 Chris Malanuk 843.792.1477 ' Square Footage: 0 Finish: NBBJ-NY Stories: 0 10/30/2005 85 Fifth Avenue 10th Floor New York, NY 10003 Rodney Crumrine 212.924.9000 Job Number: 031220 ' MUSC - Phase 1 Hospital Replacement Charleston, SC 29425 Square Footage: 613,000 Stories: 9 I II $186,272,551 Start: 10% Medical University Hospital 07/10/2004 Authority (BGKS) 171 Ashley Avenue Charleston, SC 29425 Chris Malanuk 843.792.1477 Finish: LS3P 09/01/2007 205 1/2 King Street Charleston, SC 29401-3129NBBJ- NY 85 Fifth Avenue 10th Floor New York, NY 10003 Rodney Crumrine 212.924.9000Greg Soyka II BRASoFIELD ATTACHMENT A - BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT ' CONTRACT SCHEDULED SELF- 'PROJECT MM COMPLETION PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM Job Number: 044015 $25,212,000 Start: 47% Metro Government of Nashville Nashville Public Square 11/22/2004 & Davidson County 301 Gay Street 222 3rd Ave. North Nashville, TN 37201 Nashville, TN 27201 Marti Ziobro ' 615.880.2645 Square Footage; 440,000 Finish: Stories: 5 04/24/2006 Job Number: 041554 $7,449,500 Start: 10% University of Alabama North Ten Hoot Parking Deck 09/20/2004 125 Research Drive ' University of Alabama Tuscaloosa, AL 35487 Tuscaloosa, AL 35401 Brad Cook 'Square Footage: 0 Finish: Giattina Fisher Aycock Stories: 4 08/23/2005 1827 1st Avenue North, Suite 100 Birmingham, AL 35203Gresham ' Smith & Partners - AL 3595 Grandview Parkway Birmingham, AL 35243 Marzette Fisher ' 205.933.0906Kris Niklich 205.933.0906 I I Job Number: 041604 North Troy Land Port of Entry 801 State Road 243 North Troy, VT 058859 Square Footage: 6,832 Stories: 0 iI $1,320,000 Start: 83% 08/30/2004 Finish: 07/31/2006 Jacobs Facilities, Inc. Dana Squires I JS.F GORRIE ATTACHMENT A - BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT CONTRACT SCHEDULED SELF - PROJECT MM COMPLETION PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM CH2M Hill -West Palm One Harvard Center West Palm Beach, FL 33409 Drew Pedrick (561) 515-6613 r Job Number: 043519 $9,855,847 Start: 10% Northeast Georgia Medical Northeast Georgia Parking Deck 12/01/2004 Center - Gainesville, GA 820 Jesse Jewel Parkway 743 Spring Street Gainesville, GA 30501 Gainesville, GA 30501 Rudy Lonergan 770.535.3562 Square Footage: 330,752 Finish: CDH Partners, Inc. Stories: 6 10/01 /2005 675 Tower Road l Marietta, GA 30060 Danny Mackey 770.423.0016 g Job Number. 051601 $42,729,000 Start: 79% City of Jackson O.B. Curtis WTP Expansion 04/01/2005 Dept. of Public Works, P.O. Box 100 O.B. Curtis Drive 17 Ridgeland, MS 39157 Jackson, MS 39205 Donald Bach 601.960.1189 1 • Square Footage: 0 Finish: • Stories: 0 03/15/2007 Neel Schaffer, Inc. Chris Jones I S I ATTACHMENT A - BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT ' CONTRACT SCHEDULED SELF- ' PROJECT MM COMPLETION PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM Job Number. 032040 $4,200,000 Start: 48% Palmer Chiropractic University Palmer College of Chiropractic - 10/06/2003 Foundation, Inc. ' Clinic Building Phase 1B 1000 Brady Street 4777 City Center Parkway Davenport, IA 52803 Port Orange, FL 32119 Robert Lee ' 563.884.5123 Square Footage: 26,500 Finish: Herbert Lewis Kruse Blunck Stories: 0 01/12/2005 Architecture, Inc ' Fleming Building, Suite 202 Des Moines, LA, 50309 Mike Bechtel ' 515.288.9536 Job Number: 05510515% $1,030,621 04/0: Doctor's o CountyMemorial Drivl 'Pitt County Memorial Hospital - 04/03/2005 Doctoi s Park #1 C, Medical Drive Gamma Knife Addition Greenville, NC 27835 P O Box 6028 / 2100 Stantonsbury Todd Skinner Rd 252.847.4587 ' Greenville, NC 27835 Square Footage: 3,697 Finish: Freeman White - Raleigh Stories: 1 05/06/2005 2300 Rexwoods Drive, Suite 300 Raleigh, NC 27607 I. Craig Leonard 919.821.0505 I ' Job Number: 031014 $7,000,000 Start: 25% Seawatch Development Seawatch Condominiums 03/03/2004 24951 Perdido Beach Blvd 16605 Perdido Key Dr. Orange Beach, AL 36561 Perdido Key, FL 32507 Tom O'Rorke Square Footage: 70,000 Finish: Marion Bradford Architects ' Stories: 0 06/30/2005 228 Beaumont Dr. Vestavia Hills, AL 35216 Marion Bradford ill 1 I PROJECT I. ATTACHMENT A - BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT CONTRACT ($MM) SCHEDULED SELF- ,k COMPLETION PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM Bob Barnett 1724 2nd Avenue North Pell City, Al 35125 Bob Barnett 205.844.5334 I. Job Number: 033429 $52,195,137 Start: 10% Columbus Regional Senior Spring Harbor at Green Island 01/05/2004 Living, Inc. 7001 River Road 707 Center Street, Suite 400 ' Columbus, GA 31904 Columbus, GA 31901 Donald Elder 706.660.6342 ' Square Footage: 530,000 Finish: RDG Schutte Wilscam Birge, Stories: 0 09/05/2005 Inc.1 900 Farnam on the Mall, Suite 100 Omaha, NE 68102-5089 Scott Pfeifer II II 1 II I Job Number: 042005 St. Augustine Catholic Church 375 N. Sunset Drive Casselberry, FL 32707 ii 1 Thompson, Dreesen, & Dorner 10836 Old Mill Road Omaha, NE 68154 Kip Squire 402.330.8860 Davidson Retirement Properties 119 Davis Road, Suite 1-A Augusta, GA 30907 Mike Harris 706.868.9299 $1,421,200 Start: 10% The Catholic Diocese of 04/01/2004 Orlando 501 East Robinson Street Orlando, FL 32801 Norbert Dorsey 407.246.4870 I B GORRIE ATTACHMENT A -BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT CONTRACT SCHEDULED -SELF- I PROJECT MM COMPLETION PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM Square Footage: 5,000 Finish: Bruce Blackman, Architect Stories: 0 12/20/2004 1361 Audobon Rd. Maitland, FL 32751Hunton Brady Architects PA Bruce Blackman 407.644.7838Tim Johnson 407.839.0886 ii Job Number: 043803 $2,000,000 Start: 10% State University of West Georgia State University of West Georgia 01/03/2005 1600 Maple Street Campus Center Carrollton, GA 30118 1600 Maple Street Elsa Pena Carrollton, GA 30118 770.830.2371 Square Footage: 107,000 Finish: Cooper Carry, Inc. ;Stories: 3 03/03/2006 3520 Piedmont Road NE Atlanta, GA 30305 Timothy Fish 404.237.2000 I Carter & Associates - GA 171 17th Street, Suite 1200 Atlanta, GA 30363 I Job Number. 051204 $18,700,000 Start: 10% Russell County Community I. Summit Hospital - Bid Package # 04/22/2005 Hospital, LLC (DBA Summit 2 Hospital) 4401 River Chase Drive 3521 - G summerville Road Phenix City, AL 36867 Phenix City, AL 36887 Greg Griffith 334.291.9320 Square Footage: 0 Finish: David E. Johnson, Architect Stories: 0 05/22/2005 David Brown 615.370.7964 I c I BRASFIELD ��GORRIE ' PROJECT I. Job Number: 042033 ' The Plaza 125 South Orange Avenue Orlando, FL 32801 ' Square Footage: 425,000 Stories: 11 I' ' job Number: 033216 The View @ Chastain 3820 Roswell Road, NE Atlanta, GA 30342 Square Footage: 286,599 Stories: 12 I I. ATTACHMENT A- BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT CONTRACT SCHEDULED SELf- MM COMPLETION PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM $68,876,115 Start: 10% The Plaza LLC 10/04/2004 100 South Orange Avenue Orlando, FL 32801 Cameron Kuhn 407.540.9966 Finish: Baker Barrios Architects, Inc. 10/01/2006 300 South Orange Ave #900 Orlando, FL 32801 Tim Baker 407.875.0012 Tilden Lobnitz & Cooper 1717 South Orange Avenue, Suite 300 Orlando, FL 32806 Linda Wolfe 407.841.9050 $21,886,195 Start: 10% The Loft @ Chastain, LLC 01/01/2004 3475 Lenox Road, Ste. 645 Atlanta, GA 30326 Bob Nelson Finish: Aiken, Aiken, Beauchamp & 05/05/2005 Sheetz Architects, Inc. 2722 Piedmont Rd NE Atlanta, GA 30305 Stewart Aiken 404.238.4466 ^v.LD ATTACHMENT A- BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT PROJECT TEAM Job Number: 051206 $14,057,300 Start: 30% UAB UAB 16th Street Parking Deck 05/02/2005 701 20th Street S. SE corner of 10 Ave South & 16th Birmingham, AL 35294 Street South - Bill Camp Birmingham, AL 35294 Square Footage: 0 Finish: Williams Blackstock Architects, Stories: 6 04/30/2006 PC 2204 1st Avenue South Birmingham, AL 35233Reece Hoopes & Pincher -AL 2115 1st Avenue North Birmingham, AL 35203 Joel Blackstock 205.967.6944 CRS Engineering, Inc. 3504 7th Avenue North Birmingham, AL 35222LBYD 716 South 30th Street Birmingham, AL 35233 Michael McCauley 205.251.4500 Job Number: 051205 $3,664,600 Start: 15% University of Alabama at UAB Chemistry Building 3rd floor 04/29/2005 Birmingham Renovation 245 Facilities Administration 901 14th Street South Building Birmingham, AL 35294 Birmingham,, AL 35294-4554 John Slaughter 205.975.0428 Square Footage: 22,631 Finish: Design Form, Inc. Stories: 0 11/18/2005 Two 20th St North Suite 850 Birmingham, AL 35203 William Kidwell PROJECT ATTACHMENT A - BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT CONTRACT SCHEDULED SELF- MM COMPLETION PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM Hyde Engineering 158 Business Center Drive Birmingham, AL 35244MW / Davis Dumas & Associates, Inc. 2720 3rd Ave. South Birmingham, AL 35233 Job Number. 051207 $6,341,900 Start: 25% UAB UAB Dining Facility 06/01/2005 701 20th Street S. 900 16th Street South Birmingham, AL 35294 Birmingham, AL 35294 Susan Zumbado 205.934.4427 Square Footage: 28,000 Finish: Garrison Barrett Group Stories: 2 05/30/2005 2901 2nd Avenue South Birmingham, AL 35233 Jeff Quinn 205.879.3090 Walter Schoel Engineering Company, Inc. 1001 22nd Street South Birmingham, AL 35203CRS Engineering Inc. 3504 7th Avenue South Birmingham, AL 35222LBYD 716 South 30th Street Birmingham, AL 35233 Job Number: 041213 $2,790,100 Start: 10% UAB UAB Justice Science & Student 10/01/2004 801 6th Ave. South Visitation Building Birmingham, AL 35294 1201 University Blvd. James Guyton Birmingham, AL 35294 205.934.4427 1 I BRASFIELD �GORRIE 1�1 ATTACHMENT A- BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT ' CONTRACT SCHEDULED SELF- ' PROJECT MM COMPLETION PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM Square Footage: 37,000 Finish: Design Form, Inc. Stories: 0 03/31/2005 Two 20th St North Suite 850 '• Birmingham, AL 35203 Tom Kidwell 205.970.2288 Job Number: 051604;001 $21,629,630 Start: 78% Knoxville Utilities Board Upper First Creek Wastewater 04/11/2005 4505 Middlebrook Pike ' Storage Facility Knoxville, TN 37921 4712 N. Old Broadway St. NE Steve Mosteit Knoxville, TN 37918 865.558.32438 ' Square Footage: 0 Finish: CH2M Hill -Knoxville Stories: 0 11/01/2006 Craig Parker 865.522.0262 I. ' Job Number: 031600 $119,804,000 Start: 87% Jefferson County Department of Valley Creek WWTP - Phase VII 02/03/2003 Environmental Services Biological Filtration & 716 Richard Arrington Jr. Blvd. ' Disinfection Facilities North 3910 Clear Water Drive Birmingham, AL 35203 Bessemer, AL 35023 Robert Henderson ' 205.325.5979 Square Footage: 0 Finish: Stories: 0 09/01/2005 ' F.W. Dougherty Engineering & Associates - Birmingham ' 2441 Old Springville Road Birmingham, AL 35235 Dave Bechtel 205.856.0303 lo F ATTACHMENT A - BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT ' CONTRACT SCHEDULED SELF- ' PROJECT MM COMPLETION PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM Job Number: 001615;000 $50,292,000 Start: 73% Jefferson County Department of Valley Creek WWTP Phase V - 01/22/2001 Environmental Services 'Pump Station 716 Richard Arrington Jr. Blvd. 3923 Clear Water Road North Bessemer, AL 35023 Birmingham, AL 35203 Robert Henderson ' 205.325.5979 Square Footage: 0 Finish: ' Stories: 0 03/03/2005 P.W. Dougherty Engineering & ' Associates - Birmingham 2441 Old Springville Road Birmingham, AL 35235 Dave Bechtel ' 205.856.0303 a -- Job Number: 042023 $2,153,598 Start: 10% St. Joe Residential Acquistions, 'Victoria Hills Clubhouse 09/15/2004 Inc Deland, FL 32724 211 Spalding Way Deland, FL 32724 David Buth ' 386.738.6000 Square Footage: 7,000 Finish: Basham & Lucas Design Group ' Stories: 1 05/30/2005 7645 Gate Parkway #201 Jacksonville, FL 32256 PaulJacobs 904.731.2323 1 I I Job Number: 040905 Villa Coyaba Condominiums 3016 Scenic Hwy 98 East Destin, FL 32541 $15,200,000 Start: 20% Coyaba Development, LLC 07/01/2005 1414 County Highway Santa Rosa Beach, FL 32459 Patrick Sprenkle 850.622.0111 L_ II II II I Li I I � " I PROJECT Square Footage: 147,743 Stories: 5 ATTACHMENT A- BONDED PROJECTS UNDER CONTRACT Job Number: 055112 WakeMed Cary - ED Renovation 1900 Kildaire Farm Road Cary, NC 27511 Square Footage: 7,056 Stories: 0 CONTRACT SCHEDULED ($MM)COMPLETION Finish: 04/01/2006 SELF - PERFORMED PROJECT TEAM Collins & Associates, Inc. 465 Harrison Avenue Panama City, FL 32401 Bayne Collins 850.769.3357 $1,606,425 Start: 15% WakeMed Property Services 06/01/2005 3000 New Bern Avenue Raleigh, NC 27610 Finish: 02/28/2006 Job Number: 035027 $17,900,000 Start: 10% WakeMed Raleigh Campus WakeMed Raleigh Campus Heart 02/02/2004 3000 New Bem Avenue Tower Raleigh, NC 27610 3009 New Bern Avenue Tom Cavender Raleigh, NC 27610 919.350.8861 Square Footage: 118,000 Finish: Freeman White - Raleigh Stories: 5 08/01/2005 2300 Rexwoods Drive, Suite 300 Raleigh, NC 27607 Dave Stoess 919.789.0699 Job Number. 051604;002 Walker Springs Wastewater ' Storage Facility 608 Walker Springs Road Knoxville, TN 37923 Sgnaes Footage: 0 Stories: 0 1 $9,730,699 Start: 65% Knoxville Utilities Board 05/16/2005 4505 Middlebrook Pike Knoxville, TN 37921 Finish: 08/09/2006 II We submit the following projects for your review: A Village Creek WWTP Influent Pump Station -- Birmingham, AL Chattahoochee Complex Pump Station -- Atlanta, GA W. B. Casey Water Reclamation Facility -- Jonesboro, GA BRAS FIELD j GORRIE Nanmxc En IATIONI. Enw Dal ' _ _ _ .- . - _•s- ' _ a G + 7 l,. - ' Y i.. + r` 1 4 11 ~ii f jt :jjLflIfliS'I_ [ ( \ .fr .Y' r1 Y Y ItiflI Y'Z en 1'1 ...n ' 4 ti 4i' Owner '.ryaijefferson Codnty'Commission-Enviroilmerital Servtces :Y ri " .716 Richard A`tbngton Jr. Blvd. —. Suite A300 ` , . Birmingham, AL 35203.. .. RobertHenderson -. ' , , • 205/325-5979 -l. '. c ", • 4^i 1 •r �• t=t. ,^ I. Y. 11 .. i .. �.i n i t +. 'S • } y \ [ • Yob t'.. % of Work -Self Performed - ` 80% `' - ' F ) 4. {° Li Y. i. r 3 i .tt-.- •+ F} 1 1 , { Iai (t R ti '' •I 1 I • •'- _-t_ Structures/Buildings ,. The_building is.a concrete frame both below gride'(117.5') and. 1 a structural frame for the building.above grade (23,868 sf of - ross buildin area 7 levels). Exterior of building above grade t s I - . .�, ra.g g ,. " ) : is masonry exterior and masonry interior walls. Structural steel , roof framing with standing seam metal roof. Exterior wall has W ` - \ { Y E • r • r ,•' • bf • ie a . r r. � I . • , 4 storefront windows and alurmniun entrances. •' - Y •. Concrete Volume: 56,1 cy -. _ •rt • .^ f e _Ti I • 'I • 1x j Y ♦ f' ►, ii. '" "LY 1J. 1 n. ' R i • a A' Y�' 1 ,x,.a w N7= 1 ih 1 { f ..,I [ 4- At + • 7 6 ' J 'iE' , � b '_. . 1 y ..,i- '1 x r . l � A x'ra s il''}6 1 • 1' Village Creek WWTP Influent Pump Station Page 2 i. a', I'_ I. Project Scope also included Approximate Value: the Following: ; • Electrical 4,721,359 • • Instrumentation 614,771 ': • Installation of Chemical N/A Feed System . StartDate Actual Completion Date February 1, 2003 j i 1 September 17, 2001 (Notice to Proceed) 4 . 4 lx r.. ..F T .A a , a •, • . 'O - \ l - - i { vt` Y ' ,.'> f Y•+. R ` Y a.' a • i `• • • PS I Si ti •• r i 4! - Ir 4 R 41 + Y F i ftu Ii4 __________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________ :-, L •(1 I ' ? - 4 Owner : Ciry of Atlanta 7 _ •.f a ��i • _ . " .' 41 .• Adanta,.GA 3O318 •• •, ,+ ' BobSchwind•ler • •A ' € _, 404-235-2017 s • hM1R x ..'. ` • .' R 1.. V • • i ,M . J .. •, a v Y H. - f • F r I F q Y 4 x Ii: M 1 • i •• '% of Work Self Performed 78%. _ a 1 _r •, }. LL • •• y4. •I .,{�#• . !. • • StructuresB_< uildings,,,4 ' New Raw,Water w i ater Pumping Station l' +" . • Mechanically Cleaned Screening Structure with- Clearwell . '=. * • 4 ' I• : r .} rc and Flume:. " " • ..tom e. x :'F !. • ♦ y p I ' • Y C - ..: I •'a - Sind 'ti i t^ • h i a '.y >• y •t R - t•-• se - f a J r ii. a. •Y ' y I• ,.��+ • • • •y rv• : x^ {i• f }i I +i' t s h , 1� • t a Y. N a s • - h 9 Y i u 4 . 6 II r^•' '. R k.\f 'i' 'iR-;. ♦ -n �aY1 '• }- as `y .. . •)- r L- �5 +. n.... :: rt' •`i. f a. £ c Y }' 11 4 Chattahoochee Complex Pump Station Renovations Page 2 Project Scope also included the Following: • Electrical • Instrumentation • Installation of Chemical Feed System Approximate Value: $2,000,000 $ 750,000 N/A 1 Final Contract Amount $20,043,537 Actual Completion Date 640 Days I v : • F'1. f1 ' f 1• - -r F , .a.• .. 3 •. t':. " N Y, ;H . ".• ^ .1. • A • a• ' • r 1 n'a.P eA ii i •,. -'a t •r w +' - jtt'< - j Owner " Clayton Coun'fy Water Authonty •-# •. :. i• a. � ,.♦ 1600 Battle Creek Road ," . .....-� "• .„` r, '.• :Morrow, GA= 30260 ' >' ,, Mike Buffington, Manager a .. Y- + t- Y ♦ . I { ) ' . _ (770) 960-3616 . j • r 4• f:tMf H 4e.d. w h ♦� ., . { J . j k r 5 � a t Ys ♦i �. ♦' T I • "Y i �1 1 I • i t 1 % of'Work Self Performed : 80% -'I+ �" Structures/Buildings . Administration/Lab Building • . a i •'"' Chenucal Feed & Storage'Building I '.. • . Four Pump Stations. , s 4 ' ±. ' _, r •= • Headworks/Preliminary Treatment • ?! ' • Primary Clarifiers z : ' . •. ;Biological Rector/Aeration Basins r " • • •• ' Secondary Clarifiers * ; j 1•, , - >i. �• t • ,.• • _ Y p♦ ib. +J'.1' a �. 5 r� • . e r •. Total Concrete Volume: 28,000 cy` fl e 4 ti r hl . . n - • r l t •Y 5't 6 . Y n.r v • ir_l H Y 11 • ,� .:, a -1.a , • , •'2,473 LF of'4 through 30 Ductile Iron Pipe �,. �. 4 n.tt Y` F �. n • -' - 1 NI 'V wr I " .. Y' .Y n $ .r .r. t ^ • 7J Y ',• . s . i_ / Y{c,X iF 4�i•. •a iY .• t Y ,} _s. ,,. i 't y •(. ♦..: • 4f �•. - I I �, , n .�..• f 1J r 1 Y ` {. +r n W w,�Ih 1 •♦M ••i Y 11 S f t V t. +I - T 5 / • �5 M ' •M y • d ,�, .. • ! ••i ♦ ^ 1 4 y - ` Y t�t A . F• 4 r 1•Yee' I {� .r w•u-M Y 1• '1 •' 1 i.* r ar i .. 5 ..,T�.er 5 a • I- IIIKn e.ve Y .x. 4• try , n• , fi nn r II•1:•..• . •' • 1i y4':J, . Y^! v ,Yk • " 1 1 ♦ • \ .' -,-:: '. IJ .�' 1 tl j 4 •` n n e r •r• 5. `,. r.r , r F e 1 F ♦ n d y •if 4... . a r . i w.• 1 -t b, ; • ' 1. Mr•r' •, r r♦ `. `.. in n i LL a � L T }1 _ , y f r ,F., r' • f �'' J.a • 1 f_j *:t � Y, z i� L T i, WT lit-li: 3r i 4r2 1t! . " vti" •y1 • ( f 4S. • • _ f a i' T • F T r ••' 1. • \ 'h .' . a i• ' r.• •♦v ;1 t •�i 4 . V t� x • ♦ _� r' •bT r t3 y 1: i •- r • •1 • _ yY' 't Y = ,{Y 1 S. 4. I In With Name Position Construction B&G M. Miller Gorrie Chairmanof the Board & CEO 48 41 .� ' M. James Gorrie President 21 21 John P. Darnall III Executive Vice President 47 38 Jeffrey I. Stone Vice President & Chief Operating Officer 26 26 ' Randall J. Freeman Vice President/CFO 20 11 Thomas B. Garrett Vice President/Chief Information Officer 16 21 Charles L. Grizzle Vice President/General Counsel 18 13 ' Brian Barr Vice President/Division Manager 24 8 H. Clay Bright Vice President/Division Manage 21 21 ' Michael Byrd Vice President/Division Manager 11 11 Jeffrey T. Calvin Vice President/Division Manager 26 18 Clifford F. Clegg, III Vice President/Division Manager 10 10 ' Michael F. Culwell Vice President/Division Manager 19 17 John P. Darnall IV Vice President/Division Manager 23 21 Timothy J. Dwyer Vice President/Division Manager 20 20 ' C. Gary Harrington Vice President/Division Manager 37 25 Dennis S. Hill Vice President/Division Manager 27 23 ' Keith Johnson Vice President/Division Manager 13 13 Mark A. Jones Vice President/Division Manager 17 13 Roddy McCrory Vice President/Division Manager 18 9 'David J. Naeger Vice President/Division Manager 23 18 Trey Sanders Vice President/Division Manager 17 17 Alan S. Weeks Vice President/Division Manager 26 18 ' Eric V Young Vice President/Division Manager 22 12 Alan L. Anthony Vice President/Regional Manager 23 23 ' John R Mills Vice President/Regional Manager 33 33 Robertson W. Taylor Vice President/Regional Manager 20 20 Guerry M. Denson Vice President 31 21 ' James H. Lott, Jr. Vice President 45 25 Walter E. Whatley Controller 27 27 C. Terry Collier General Superintendent 23 23 ' Ivan Kimbrell General Superintendent 37 11 J. O. Pike General Superintendent 41 17 John C. Robertson General Superintendent 33 26 DeWayne Strickland General Superintendent 23 14 Updated January 16, 2006 I F BRASFIELD CS GORRIE EYREDIMG Ex,ERRIDX3, EVERY DAY' • PRICEWRTERHOU$CWPERS 0 7 1 Report of Independent Auditors To the Members Brasfield & Gorrie, L.L.C. and Gorrie Holdings, L.L.C. 1 I 1 1 1 'I PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 1901 6th Ave. N., Suite 1600 Birmingham AL 35203 Telephone (205) 252 8400 Facsimile (205) 252 7776 In our opinion, the accompanying combined balance sheet and related combined statements of income, comprehensive income, changes in members' capital, and cash flows present fairly, in all material respects, the combined financial position of Brasfield & Gorrie, L.L.C. and Gorrie Holdings, L.L.C. (the Companies) at December 31; 2005 and the combined results of their operations and their cash flows for the year then ended, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. These combined financial statements are the responsibility of the Companies' management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these combined financial statements based on our audit. We conducted our audit of these combined financial statements in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the combined financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the combined financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall combined financial statement presentation. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion. lW March 30, 2006 I Brasfield & Gorrie, L.L.C and Gorrie Holdings, L.L.C. Combined Balance Sheet December 31, 2005 (in thousands of dollars) a Assets Cash and cash equivalents $ 26,302 Restricted cash and cash equivalents 858 Marketable securities:.available-for-sale 4,777 Accounts receivable from construction contracts Current 209,076 Retainage, due upon completion 82,339 323,352 Other current assets 12,323 Total current assets 335,675 Marketable securities: available -for -sale 89,383 Fixed assets Land 2,820 Buildings 21 490 Construction machinery and equipment 35,311 Automobiles and trucks - 3,414 Office furniture and equipment 10,384 Leasehold improvements 1597 Aircraft 11,259 86,275 Less accumulated depreciation (31,309) 54,966 Other assets Investments in real estate 4,950 Other 6,391 11,341 Total assets $ 491,365 Liabilities Current portion of long-term debt $ 892 Accounts payable Trade 246,109 Retained from subcontractors 64,587 Amounts due to members 9,272 Accrued liabilities 23,320 Total current liabilities 344,180 Other liabilities 3,876 Total liabilities 348,056 Members' Capital 43,309 Total liabilities and members' capital $ 491,365 The accompanying notes are an integral part of these combined financial statements. 2 ' Brasfield & Gorrie, L.L.C. and Gorrie Holdings, L.L.C. I Combined Statement of Income Year Ended December 31, 2005 ' (in thousands of dollars) ' Earned revenues Cost of earned revenues Gross profit ' General and administrative expenses Income from operations ' Other income (expense) Interest income Interest expense ' Dividend income Realized gain on investments, net Other ' Net income t l� 1 4 $ 1,644,998 (1,569,304) 75,694 (27,378) 48,316 2,140 (328) 1,412 1,883 4,633 9,740 58,056 The accompanying notes are an integral part of these combined financial statements. 3 DOCUMENT 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1- INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 1.01 DEFINED TERMS: A. Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders and which are defined in the GENERAL CONDITIONS, have the meanings assigned to them in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Bid Documents shall include the following: B a. b. C. d. e. f. Contractor's Act of Assurance Form, RLF-52. dding Requirements: Invitation to Bid. Bidder's Qualification Statement Instructions to Bidders. Bid Form. Bid Bond. g. MBE / WBE Compliance Evaluation Form, RLF-96. 2. Contract Forms: a. Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. b. Performance Bond. c. Labor and Material Payment Bond. d. List of Subcontractors e. Equipment Questionnaire f. Contractor's Act of Assurance Form, RLF 52 g. MBE/WBE Compliance Evaluation Form RLF-96 • 3. Contract Conditions: • a. General Conditions. b. Supplementary Conditions. c. Labor -Related Regulations. 4. Specifications. 5. Drawings. 6. Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids. C. Certain additional items used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated below which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. 1. Bidder — one who submits a Bid directly to Owner as distinct from a sub - bidder, who submits a Bid to a Bidder. 2. Issuing Office — the office from which the Bid Documents are to be issued and where the bidding procedures are to be administered. 3. Successful Bidder — the lowest, responsible, and responsive Bidder to whom Owner on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided makes an award. 1.02 COPIES OF BID DOCUMENTS: A. Complete sets of the Bid Documents in the number and for the purchase sum stated in the Invitation to Bid, may be. obtained from the Issuing Office. B. Complete sets of Bid Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor Engineer assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bid Documents. 00200 -Instructions To Bidders 00200 -1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I DOCUMENT 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (continued) ' C. Owner and Engineer in making copies of Bid Documents available on the above terms do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 1.03 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS: A. Prequalification statements are not required. Owner will, however, evaluate the ' Bidder's qualifications following the opening of Bids. Evaluation criteria considered will include, but not be limited to: 1. Experience and performance records on similar work. 2. Financial responsibility. 3. Ability to supply construction equipment and personnel to complete the Work within the Contract Time: 4. Evidence of Bidder to do business in the state where the Project is located, or covenant to obtain such qualifications prior to award of the Contract. B. Bidders are requested to submit financial statement in Bidder's Qualification Statement, DOCUMENT 00140. C. Only those Bids will be considered which are submitted by Bidders who show satisfactory completion of work of type and size comparable to the Work required by these Bid Documents. 1. A list of projects involving lift stations, treatment plants with lift stations, pump stations, including pumping capacity and other pertinent information, identification of the owners and owner contact phone numbers, shall be submitted with the Bid. 2. See ARTICLE 5— AWARD OF CONTRACT herein for additional requirements after opening of Bids. D. Bidders must be licensed in the State of Arkansas and shall provide their license number on the Bid Form. Failure to provide license number shall result in a non- responsive Bid. 1.04 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE: A. Before submitting a Bid, it is the responsibility of each Bidder: 1. To thoroughly examine the Contract Documents and other related data identified in the Bid Documents (including "technical data" referred to below). 2. To visit the Site to become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3. To consider federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance, and furnishing of the Work. 4. To study and carefully correlate Bidder's knowledge and observations with the Contract Documents and such other related data. 5. To promptly notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies which Bidder has discovered in or between the Contract Documents and such other related documents. ' 00200 -Instructions To Bidders 00200 - 2 JUN Project No 11-1875-00 1 DOCUMENT 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (continued) 6. The Bidder's attention is called to the requirements of the Supplemental Conditions for the Revolving Loan Fund contained in the Contract Documents including but not limited to minority and women's business (MBE /.WBE Compliance Evaluation form RLF-96) participation and reporting requirements as well as labor standards and equal employment • opportunity provisions. Further, Bidders will be required to submit with their • bids, a Contractor's Act of Assurance form, RLF-52, certifying their understanding of and compliance with the Supplemental Conditions. ' B. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall be responsible to obtain such additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or ' contiguous to the Site or otherwise, which may affect cost, progress, performance, and furnishing of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, including safety precautions and programs incident thereto or which Bidder deems necessary to determine its Bid for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the time, price, and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. This ' shall include local shipping facilities and availability of lands if applicable. C. In the preparation of the Contract Documents, reports of explorations and tests of any Hazardous Environmental Condition(s) at the Site of the Work were not used. D. Access to the Site: • 1. On request, Owner: will provide each Bidder access to the Site to conduct such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as each ' Bidder deems necessary for submission of his Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes, clean up, and restore the Site to its former conditions upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies. 2. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights -of -way, and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All ' additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of Materials and Equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for by Contractor. ' Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities are to be obtained and paid for by Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. ' 3. Property owners affected by the Work are named on the Drawings where known, but the accuracy of such ownership is not guaranteed. Bidders shall verify and make their own arrangements with such property owners for any access needed in connection with the preparation of Bids. ' E. Subsurface Information: 1. Certain subsurface information has been obtained at, or in the vicinity of, the ' Site of the Work. 2. Copies of such subsurface information will be issued only to prospective Bidders who request such subsurface information and sign a receipt therefor. 3. There is no express or implied guarantee as to the accuracy or completeness of the subsurface information, nor of the interpretation thereof by the Owner, the Engineer, or any of their representatives. 00200 -Instructions To Bidders 00200 - 3 RJN Project No 11-1875-00 1 DOCUMENT 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (continued) 4. The subsurface information or copies thereof do not form a part of this or any Contract Document issued by the Owner or Engineer. 5. Each prospective Bidder shall make its own interpretation of subsurface information issued to it and shall, at its own expense, make surveys and investigations as it may deem necessary to evaluate conditions which will affect performance of the work. 6. Reports used in preparation of Contract Documents: a. In the preparation of the Contract Documents, the following reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site of the Work were used: (1) Report appended to this manual, prepared by McClelland Consulting Engineers, Inc.; entitled Boring Log No. B-1 to B-4. 7. Subsurface information issued by Owner or Engineer shall be returned by unsuccessful Bidders within thirty (30) days after Notice of Award. F. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by the I Bidder that he has complied with every requirement of this paragraph "Examination of Contract Documents and Site," and that the Bid Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 1.05 INTERPRETATIONS, MODIFICATIONS. AND ADDENDA: A. Any Bidder who discovers ambiguities, inconsistencies, or errors or is in doubt as to the meaning or intent of any part of the Bid Documents shall promptly request an interpretation from Engineer listed at the end of these Instructions to Bidders. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such requests will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by Engineer as having received the Bid Documents. Requests for clarification or interpretation received within 14 days of date of opening Bids will not be answered. B. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bid Documents as deemed advisable by ' Owner or Engineer. C. Because of the time required to publish and deliver, no Addenda will be issued within the last 7 days before the date of opening Bids. However, an addendum that affects the time, date or location of the Bid opening may be issued as little as 2 days before the date of opening Bids. D. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 1.06 PREBID CONFERENCE: A prebid conference will be held at 1:30 p.m., local time, on June 14, 2006. Prebid conference will be held at the following location: City Council Chambers (Room 219) at City Hall 113 West Mountain Street Fayetteville, AR 72701 Li 00200 -Instructions To Bidders 00200 - 4 RJN Project No 11-1875-00 [. DOCUMENT 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (continued) 1.07 LABOR -RELATED REGULATIONS: A. The Bidder's attention is directed to the special rules, regulations, and stipulations contained in Supplemental Conditions for the Revolving Loan Fund contained in the Contract Documents. B. The greater of the Arkansas Department of Labor Prevailing Wage Rate or the U. S. Department of Labor Prevailing Wage Rate shall establish the minimum wages to be paid to workers under this contract. A copy of the current Arkansas Department of Labor Prevailing Wage Rate is included in these documents. It is the contractor's responsibility to obtain'and comply with future Arkansas Department of Labor Prevailing Wage Rate schedules. C. Pursuant to Arkansas Code Annotated 22-9-203, the City of Fayetteville encourages all qualified minority and women business enterprises to bid on and receive contracts for goods, services, and construction. Also, City of Fayetteville encourages all general contractors to subcontract portions of their contract to qualified, small, minority, and women business enterprises. I C I I I [_l I 7 I I ARTICLE 2- BASIS OF BIDDING 2.01 SPECIFIED EOUIPMENT AND MATERIALS: A. Substitutions will be considered only after:the Effective Date of the Agreement and as set forth in the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SECTION 01631. B. Year 2000 Compliance 1. All equipment, devices, items, systems, software, hardware, and firmware provided shall be warranted as Year 2000 compliant, meaning that they shall properly, appropriately, and consistently function and accurately process date and time data (including without limitation: calculating, comparing, and sequencing) on and after December 31, 1999, including leap year calculations. This warranty supersedes anything in the Specifications or other Contract Documents which might be construed inconsistently. This warranty is applicable whether the equipment, device, item, system, • software, hardware, or firmware is specified with or without reference to a manufacturer's name, make, or model number. 2.02 INDIRECT COSTS: A. Taxes: 1. All applicable sales, use, compensating, or other taxes to be paid or withheld by Bidder, now imposed by any taxing authority, on Equipment and Materials to be incorporated in the Work, and on any or all other cost items entering into the Contract Price, shall be included in the Bid price. 2. The Bidder shall include all such taxes on Equipment and Materials. It will be the obligation of the Bidder to investigate the sales tax exemption and obtain final determination from the ADFA. 3. The Owner is exempt from the sate of Arkansas sales and use taxes on Equipment and Materials used to remove contaminants from wastewater and incorporated in the Work. The Bidder shall not include in his Bid any sales, ' 00200 -Instructions To Bidders 00200 - 5 RJN Project No 11-1875-00 J DOCUMENT 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (continued) use, or similar taxes from which Owner is exempt. Per Arkansas Gross Receipts Regulation GR-66, the following Equipment and Materials are exempt from the state sales and use taxes: Machinery and Equipment used to remove contaminants from wastewater. The treatment process begins when solids are first removed from the wastewater and ends when all solids and other contaminants are removed from wastewater. Such equipment includes pipes, pumps, valves, screens, screen baskets, gates, blowers, fans, skimmers, aerators, diffusers, equalization basins, concrete flumes, conveyor belts, flow meters, grit separators, grit removal equipment, back flow preventers, chlorination equipment, digester equipment, vacuators, and air eductors. The water treatment process does not include collecting wastewater from locations outside of the treatment plant, delivering wastewater to the treatment plant, or disposing of solids or other contaminants removed from wastewater. B. The cost of all construction licenses, building and other permits, and governmental inspections required by public authorities for performing the Work, which are applicable at the time Bids are opened and which are not specified to be obtained by Owner, shall be included in the Bid price. C. The cost of all royalties and license fees on Equipment and Materials to be furnished ' and incorporated in the Work shall be included in the Bid price. D. Tests, inspections, and related activities called for throughout the Bid Documents are a responsibility of Contractor unless specified otherwise. The Bid shall include all costs arising from such responsibility. E. The cost of all electrical, water, gas, telephone, sanitary, and similar facilities and services required by Contractor in performing the Work shall be included in the Bid ' price unless specified otherwise. 2.03 SUBCONTRACTORS: A. No Bid shall be based upon aggregate of Subcontractors performing more than 60 percent of the total Work. B. The experience, past performance, and ability of each proposed Subcontractor will be considered in the evaluation of Bids. Any Subcontractor so requested shall be required to furnish experience statements prior to the Notice of Awards. C. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, other person, or organization against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer may accept or reject Subcontractors in accordance with Paragraph 6.05 of the GENERAL CONDITIONS. 2.04 CONTRACT TIMES: A. The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to achieve ' Substantial Completion and also fmal completion and be ready for fmal payment shall be as stated in the Agreement. B. Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, are as set forth in the Agreement. 00200 -Instructions To Bidders 00200 -6 RJN Project No 11-1875-00 U DOCUMENT 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (continued) ARTICLE 3- BIDDING PROCEDURE 3.01 PREPARATION OF BID: A. One set of documents provided in the bid packet envelope included with the purchased set of drawings and specifications shall be used for the Bid. B. The Bid Forms shall be filled out in detail in black ink and signed by the Bidder. IC. Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner whose title shall appear under his signature, and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. ID. Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign), and the corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an ' assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the signature. E. Names of all persons signing shall be printed below their signatures. F. A power of attorney shall accompany the signature of anyone not otherwise authorized to bind the Bidder. G. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which shall be filled in on the Bid Form. H. The address to which communications regarding the Bids are to be directed shall be ' shown. 3.02 METHOD OF BIDDING: ' A. Bids will be received on a Lump Sum basis as set forth in the Bid Form. Firm Bids are required. ' 3.03 SUBCONTRACTORS INFORMATION SUBMITTED WITH BID: A. All Bidders shall submit with their Bid DOCUMENT 00430 -List of Subcontractors, completed with names of all such Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and ' organizations proposed for those portions of the Work for which such identification is required. The list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each ' such Subcontractor, Supplier, person, or organization, if requested by Engineer. If, after due investigation, Owner or Engineer has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or organization, Owner may, before the ' Notice of Award is given, request the apparent Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in the Bid. If the apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. The declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or organization listed and to whom Owner or Engineer does not make written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award 00200 -Instructions To Bidders 00200 - 7 RJN Project No 11-1875-00 1 DOCUMENT 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (continued) will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to revocation as provided in Paragraph 6.05 of the General Conditions. 3.04 MANUFACTURERS SUBMITTED WITH BID: A. All Bidders shall submit with their Bid, DOCUMENT 00450 -Equipment Questionnaire, listing the suppliers and manufacturers of major Equipment and Materials proposed for the work. If, after due investigation, Owner or Engineer has reasonable objection to any proposed Manufacturer, Supplier, or other person or organization, Owner may, before the Notice of Award is given, request the apparent Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in the Bid. If the apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Manufacturers, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. The declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Manufacturer, Supplier, or other person or organization listed and to whom Owner or Engineer does not make written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to revocation as provided in Paragraph 6.05 of the General Conditions. See Article 5.02.G for additional information. 3.05 FORMS TO BE SUBMITTED: A. The following forms shall be submitted with the Bid. 1. DOCUMENT 00140 BIDDER'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT 2. DOCUMENT 00400 BID FORM 3. Bid Security as certified check, bank cashier's check or Bid Bond (DOCUMENT 00410) 4. Contractor's Act of Assurance Form, RLF-52 5. MBE / WBE Compliance Evaluation Form, RLF-96 6. DOCUMENT 00430 - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS 7. DOCUMENT 00450 - EQUIPMENT QUESTIONNAIRE 3.06 BID SECURITY: A. Each Bid shall be accompanied by Bid security, payable to Owner, of the amount stipulated in the Invitation to Bid. B. The required security shall be in the form of a certified or bank cashier's check or a Bid Bond on the form prescribed by the AIA, Document A310, or on similar form in DOCUMENT 00410. C. Bid Bond shall be executed by a surety meeting the requirements set forth for "Surety Bonds" in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. D. Bid security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required surety Bonds as set forth in the GENERAL CONDITIONS, whereupon Bid security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute the Agreement and furnish the surety Bonds within 15 days after the date of Notice of Award, Owner may annul the Notice of Award, and Bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited to Owner. I 00200 -Instructions To Bidders 00200- 8 RJN Project No 11-1875-00 C II I F F r I r I Ii I I I I r II TT DOCUMENT 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (continued) E. The Bid security of any Bidder whom Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier of 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement and the required surety Bonds furnished, or the 91" day after the Bid opening. Bid security of other Bidders will be returned within 10 days of the bid opening. 3.07 SUBMISSION OF BID: A. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place designated in the Invitation to Bid. B. Bid Documents with accompanying Bid security and other required information shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope marked with the following: 1. Project name. 2. Contract title and number. 3. Name and address of Bidder. 4. Contractor's license number. C. If the Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "Sealed Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof. . 3.08 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS: A. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. B. If, within 24 hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of his Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid, and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4- OPENING OF BIDS 4.01 OPENING OF BIDS: A. Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non -responsive) read aloud publicly at the place where Bids are to be submitted. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bids will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids. B. All Bids shall remain open for a period of 90 days after Bids are opened, but Owner may, at his sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security at any time prior to that date. ARTICLE 5- AWARD OF CONTRACT 5.01 OWNER'S RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS: A. Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation the rights to reject any or all nonconforming, non -responsive, unbalanced, or conditional 00200 -Instructions To Bidders . 00200 -9 RJN Project No 11-1875-00 II I DOCUMENT 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (continued) Bids and to reject the Bid of any Bidder if Owner believes that.it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtfulfinancial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by Owner. Owner also reserves the right to waive all informalities not involving price, times, or changes in the Work and to negotiate Contract terms with the Successful Bidder. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and Unit Prices will be resolved in favor of the Unit Prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of the words. B. All Bidders must agree that such rejection shall be without liability on the part of the Owner nor shall the Bidders seek recourse of any kind against the Owner because of such rejections. The filing of any Bid shall constitute an agreement of the Bidder to these conditions. 5.02 EVALUATION OF BIDS: A. In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements and such Unit Prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. Owner must accept Alternates in numerical order. B. Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations is requested per Paragraph 5.02F of this Document. C. The evaluation of manufacturer's data as requested per Paragraph 5.02G, will include consideration of: 1. Owner -required inventory of spare parts. 2. Design changes which would be required to accommodate the proposed Equipment and Materials. 3. Installation requirements and related engineering, training, and operating costs. 4. Experience and performance record of the manufacturer. 5. Maintenance and frequency of inspections required to assure reliable performance of the Equipment. 6. Manufacturers' service facilities and availability of qualified field service personnel. 7. Efficiency and related operating expense during the anticipated useful life of the Equipment. 8. Rated performance of the Equipment. 9. Warranty of the Equipment. D. Owner may conduct such investigations as he deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of the Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to Owner's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 1 00200 -Instructions To Bidders 00200 - 10 RJN Project No 11-1875-00 L I: DOCUMENT 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (continued) E. Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder who does not pass any such evaluation to Owner's satisfaction. F. All Bidders shall submit a list of all Subcontractors Bidder expects to use in the Work. The use of Subcontractors listed by the Bidder and accepted by Owner prior to the Notice of Award will be required in the performance of the Work. ' G. The Bidder shall submit the completed Equipment Questionnaire contained in the Project Manual (DOCUMENT 00450) to the Engineer with the Bid. The ' Questionnaire shall contain a list of the Suppliers and manufacturers of the major Equipment and other principal items of Equipment and Materials he expects to use in the Work. The use of Suppliers and manufacturers listed by the Bidder and accepted by Owner prior to the Notice of Award will be required in the Work. ' H. Within 10 days after the Bids are opened, the apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall submit an itemized breakdown of any lump sum 'portion of its Bid. This breakdown must include a separate item for each major • category of work and each major piece of equipment (see attached 01290.02). This breakdown may or may not be reflected in subsequent time schedule submittals. II. The award of the Contract, if it is awarded, will be to the lowest, responsive, responsible Bidder whose evaluation by Owner indicates to Owner that the award will be in the best interest of Project and Owner. ' 5.03 NOTICE OF AWARD: A. After considering the basis of award and evaluation of Bids, if the Contract is to be ' awarded, Owner shall within 90 days after the date of opening Bids notify the Successful Bidder of acceptance of his Bid (indicating which, if any, Alternate Bids have been accepted). IARTICLE 6- SIGNING OF AGREEMENT U 6.01 When Owner gives Notice of Award to Successful Bidder, Engineer will issue the required :number of unbound, unsigned counterparts of the Agreement and other Contract Documents to Successful Bidder. ' 6.02 Within 15 days thereafter, Contractor (Successful Bidder) shall sign all copies of the Agreement leaving the dates blank, insert the properly executed Bonds, power of attorney documents, and other required documents in the appropriate places, and deliver all copies to Owner. 6.03 Within 10 days thereafter, Owner will execute all copies of the Agreement and insert the Date ' of Contract in the Agreement, Bonds, and power of attorney documents. Owner will provide the executed Contract Documents to Engineer for binding and distribution as required. Each duly executed counterpart will be accompanied by a complete set of Drawings with appropriate identification. END OF DOCUMENT 00200 1 00200 -Instructions To Bidders 00200- 11 RJN Project No 11-1875-00 U. I @1/13/2096 @8:07 9724372707 RJN GROUP INC PAGE 05/11 \, I OFFER AND ACCEPTANCE CONTRACT Page 3o15 ILift Station Site: r I I I n I I I I [] I I I EXHIBIT "A" PROPERTY DESCRIPTIONS A part of the North Half (N%) of the Southeast Quarter (SE'/4 of Section 2, Township 16 North, Range 31 West, being more panccularlydescribed as beginning ata point North 02° 31' 30" East 526.54 feet of the Southeast corner of the Northwest Quarter (NW'%) of the Southeast Quarter (SE'/°) of said Section 2, thence.North 59° 30' 30" West 105.87 feet to an iron pin at a fence comer; thence along an existing fence line North 03' 54' 44" East 108.13 feet to an iron pin at a fence comer, thence along an existing fence line North 82° 38' 48" East 45.90 feet to an iron pin; thencecontinuing along said fence line North 82° 37' 18" East 149.83 feet to an iron pin; thence South 06° 42' 15" East 145.72 feet tb an iron pin; thence.Southeastedy along.a 100 foot radius non -tangent curve to the right a distance of 60.30 feet, said curve having a chord bearing and distance of South 63° 19' 13" East 59.40 feet; thence South 46° 02' 30" East 92.55 feet to a nail and cap in the centerline of Sunshine Road; thence along said centerline South 690 08' 16" West 44.75 feet; thence continuing along said centeHine South 56° 32' 06" West 53.66 feetto a nail and cap In the Hamestring Creek Bridge; thence North 59° 30' 30" West 186.14 feet to the Point of Beginning, containing 1.11 acres, more or less, Washington County, Arkansas. Subject to any easements and/or rights of way of record. Permanent Easement (north): A thirty (30) foot permanent easement of equal and uniform width located ina part of the North Half (N%) of the Southeast Quarter (SE%) of Section 2, Township 16 North, Range 31 West, Washington County, Arkansas. being more particularly described as follows: From the Southeast comer of the Northwest Quarter (NW'/) of the Southeast Quarter (SE'/.) of said Section 2, thence North 02° 31' 30" East 528.54 feet to a point on the South fine of the above referenced property, thence along said South property line North 59° 30 30" West 105.87 feetto the Southwest corner of the above referenced property, thence along the West property line North 03°54'44" East 108.13 feet, thence leaving saki West property line North 82° 38'48" East 45.90 feet to the Point of Beginning; thence North or 01' 04" West 237.45 keel back to a point on the West property line; thence along said West property line North 03' 54' 44" East 42.60 feet; thence North 44° 17' 42" East 68.84 feet thence North 88° 05' d0" East 739.90 feet; thence North 14° 52' 37" East 40.52 feetto a point on the North line of the above referenced property; thence along said North property line South 71° 42' 51" East 30.05 feet; thence South 14° 52' 37' West 61.02 feet; thence South 88° 05' 00" West 750.12 feet; thence South 44° 17 42" West 45.75 feet thdnce South 03° 54' 44" West 28.70 feet; thence South 07° 01'04" East 234.40 feet; thence South 82° 37' 18" West 30.00 feet to the Point of Beginning, containing 33,738 square feet (0.77 acre), more or less. The bearings for this description are based on Arkansas State Plane Coordinates, North Zone, NAIL 83. the system which the'Cltyof Fayetteville presently uses. This bearing system mayvaryfrom the bearing system previously used In describing the subject project. Temporary Construction Easement (north): A twenty (20) foot temporary construction and grading easement of equal and uniform width Is located along the East and South sides of the above described Permanent Water/Sewer Easement. This temporary construction easement Is shown in detail on Exhibit "A" and contains 20,831 square feet (bA8 acre), more or less. The bearings for this description are based on Arkansas State Plane Coordinates, North Zone, NAd 83. the system which the City of Fayetteville presently uses. This bearing system mayvaryfrom the bedding system previously used in describing the subject project. Permanent Easement (south): A permanent easement of variable width located in a part of the Northeast Quarter (NE'I/) of! the Southeast Quarter (SE'/,) of Sexton 2; Township 16 North, Range 31 West, Washington Courtly; Arkansas, being more particularly described as follows: From the Southwest comer of the Northeast Quarter (NE%) of the Southeast Quarter (SEA) of said Section 2, thence North 02° 31'30" East 526.54 feet to a point on the South line of the above referenced property, thence along said South propert aline South 59° 30' 30" East 186.14 feet to the centerline of County Road No. 877 (Sunshine Road), thdnce along said centerline North 56° 32 _06_ East53.66 feetto the Point of Beginning thencecontinuing along 32° 41' 13" East 21.33 feet; thence North 78° 01' 06" East 117.66 feet to a point on the West line of the Hamstring Sewage Lift Station property (Deed Book 925 at Page 782); thence along said West property line South 11 °.08' 00' East 45.20 feet to.a point on the North line of an existing 15 foot utility easen%nt; thence along said North line North 87° 00' 34" West 147.80 feet: thence continuing along said NortH line South 510 33' 15" West 17.28 feet; thence North 32° 41' 13" West 29.67 feet to the Point of Beginning, containing 4,725 square feet (0.11 acre), more or less. 01/13/2@06 08:07 9724372707 RJN GROUP INC PAGE 8b/11 t OFFER AND ACCEPTANCE CONTRACT Page 4 of 5 The bearings for this description are based on ArkansasState Plane Coordinates, North Zone. NAD 83, the system which the City of Fayetteville presently uses. This bearing system mayvaryfrom the bearing system previously used in describing the subject project. Temporary Construction Easement (south): An eleven (11) foottemporary.construction and grading easement of equal and uniform width Is locbted along the North side of the above described Permanent Water/Sewer Easement. This temporary construction easement Is shown in detail on Exhibit A' and contains 1,318 square feet (0.03 acre), more or less. The bearings for this description are based on Arkansas State Plane Coordinates, North Zone, NAD 83, the system which the City of Fayetteville presently uses. This bearing system mayvaryfrom the bearing system previously used In describing the subject project. Permanent Easement Description (for 8" extension): A twenty (200 foot permanent easement of equal and uniform width located in part of the Northeast Quarter (NE/.) of the Southeast Quarter (SE'!.) of Section 2, Township 16 North, Range 31 West, Washington County, Arkansas, being more particularly described as follows: From the Southwest corner of the Northeast Quarter (NE%) of the Southeast Quarter (8E''h) of said Section 2, thence South 87°22 00" East 594.27 feet thence North 02° 38' 00" East 572.98 feet to the Point of Beginning, said point being orrthe North line of an existing 50 foot utility easement thence along said North line North 77° 47' 36" East 20.00 feet thence North 12° 12' 24" West 60,00 feet thence South Ti' 47 36" West 20.00 feet; thence South 12° 17 24" East 60.00 feet to the Point of Beginning, containing 1,200 square feet (0.03 acres), more or less. The bearings for this description are based on Arkansas State Plane Coordinates,.North Zone, NAD 83, the system which the Cityof Fayetteville presentyuses. This bearing system mayvaryfrom the bearing system previously used in describing the subject project. Temporary Construction and Grading Easement Description (for 8" extension): A ten (10) foot temporary construction and grading easement of equal and uniform width is located along the North, East, and West sides of the above described permanent Water/Sewer Easement. This temporary construction easement is shown In detail on Exhibit'A" and contains 1,600 square feet (0.04 acres), more or less. The bearings for thls-descrlption are based on Arkansas State Plane Coordinates, North Zone, NAD 83, the system which the City of Fayetteville presentyuses. This bearing system mayvaryfrom the bearing system previously used in describing the subject project I I I I I I I I I I SIGNED FOR IDENTIFICATION: Clydene arlau Trus dated December 22, 1997 d_ Date: Charles E. Schartau, Trustee fJ_A Date: Agent or Witness City of Fayetteville, Arkansas, A municlddl corporation Date: ��io t%S' I I I I OFFER AND ACCEPTANCE CONTRACT Page5of5 ACKNOWLEDGMENT STATE OF ARKANSAS COUNTY OF WASHINGTON ; ss. BE IT REMEMBERED, that on this date, before the undersigned, a duly commissioned and acting NotaryPublicwithin and for said County and State, personally appeared Charles E. Scharlau, Trustee of the Clydene Scharlau Trust dated December 22,1997, to me well known as the person who executed the foregoing document, and who stated and acknowledged that he had so signed, executed and delivered said instrument for the consideration, uses and purposes therein mentioned and set forth. y•. n� 'Isi.n STATE OF ARKANSAS COUNTY OF WASHINGTON ACKNOWLEDGMENT $s. BE IT REMEMBERED, that on this data, before the undersigned, a duly commissioned and acting Notary Public within and for said Countyand State, personally appeared Dan Coody and Sondra Smith, to me well known as the persons who executed the foregoing document, and who stated and acknowledged that they are the Mayor and City Clerk of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas, a municipal corporation, and are dulyauihorized in their respective capacities to execute the foregoing Instrument for and in the name and behalf of said municipal corporation, and further stated and acknowledged that- they had so signed, executed and delivered said instrument for the consideration, uses and purposes therein mentioned and set forth. WITNESS my hand and seal on this 10 day of ____, 2005. .giiirr rir ...... . Oi GO MY COMMISSION EXPIRES: ,,OTARY ': �oj N ry ublic .,••. PU. Bt.'C •#,(.d • •.......... � . 01/13/2006 08:07 9724372707 RJN (ih1 JN 1N(; A 9 N p:A �+ a i NO2.31'30'E 526.54' NO y / \ t. ti 4',1 3,st t.sns h x M II r r o � , — — - — — — — — — — — 110 -•Aye — — 2 W!Y N � •m 9' ~ •S. zz \. i 01/13/2006 08:07 9724372707 RJN GROUP INC PAGE 09/11 1 1 I 1 1 1 I. 1 I. 1 I. I PUE 18.1 - 33,738 50. FT. (0.77 ACRES) ICE 18A - 20,831 50. FT. (0.48 ACRES) \ I. UTIUTY EASEMENT PLAT TRACT MAP 140. 18 EXHIBIT "A' 40 ACRE LINE W LOT 2 NE CORNER dtwgtsT UE•DOWs S 21/4 La • SECTION • T -16—N, R -31—W .4$ N88.05'OO'E �a46btt 0P 739.90' SB850.1 'W y W a• .. ....... .................d::::.r•ra:.CY.o m xpj N �s 544.17'42'W 30' PUE = 45.75' C S03.54'44'W 28,70' V. S O o .3g49'E TRACT • m W V �0 . L C���-..tip Hanestr/n` >, Creek '. a IeS a30 in In W O W q o r P O r7 e 0 n z� z ro Y u '-I SE CORNER NWI/4, SE1/4 SECTION 2 T -16-N, R -31-W U 62'37'18"I .CITY OF FUTURS FNANSSi'am ` 30,00' fSSNSR LIFT STATION SITS Basis of Bearings: Based on the City of Fayetteville CPS Coordinate System TRACT 17 W n Ny S;j•42 vfirs v 30051£ . A rho 20 ICE rip• UE (925_781i - qTY PROPERTY CITY OF FAYETTEYRLE vi p! E7050NG HAMESTRING SEWER 4 LIFT STATION * 04 SCALE, 1' = 200' ll'(4 ,021 1 105 FAIRFIELD SUBDIVISION o PHASE 3 � ` P q; ~ LEGEND Permanent Utility Easement Temporary Construction Easement • Comers of Permanent Existing Utility Easement Line Utility Easement. -- _ 001-11407-006 001-11407-001 — Tax Parcel Numbers Existing Property Line 001-11428-000 001-11407-005 UE — Utility Easement n City of Fayetteville Water & Sewer Deportn Property Owner : CLYDENE SCHARLAU TRUST Drawn by : McClelland Consulting Engineers Date Aug. 2004 Scala : 1" = 200' Project No. 02133-0305 WL4 — TRACT 18 Wcstside Name : 01/13/2006 08:07 9724372707 RJN GROUP INC 1'Al*. jO/11 ' ' .Y• 0 0 a 0 11 1 N w h SI U F UTILITY EASEMENT PLAT WL3 TRACT MAP NO. 21 r } EXHIBIT 'A' PUE 21.1 — 4,725 50. FF. (0.11 Ac.) TCE21A—1,318SO. fl. (0.03Ac.) NOTE: CWY OF FAYETIEMUE 419 eq.ft. of the above PUE 21.1 is FUTURE HAMES1RING within the existing asphalt roadway. sImER 1171 A110N PROPERTYi) H7gg1'os•E (C,tty ROAD . ` .EV. \N69AA05' �r�sr It7.bfi• yc°sa,, ss ty��bb POB \ e H 25 ^pnk 9 ' • 9.3p t+' h''• 21.1 . •tt,£ C i ip /4 —.__, Basis of Bearings: Utntt EASEMENT eased on the City of ' a9 rayeltevRie CPS '� r "�' g51'33'15'V Coordinate Syltem // F 1728art La OPE M e / / r• � ` 1�ItOPERTY g9 $o • ///// / \ �01G ; /// 903 \� SCA'LEt 1' = 100' ! 1021 1 105 NYl CORNER NEt/a, SEI/4 SECTION 2 T -16-N, R -31-W :r' ..�..�. 106 FAIBFIELD SUBVJYISION d I PHASE 3 • Comers of Permanent Utility Easement 001-11407-001 — Tdx Parcel Number 001-11407-005 001-11407-006 001-11420-000 toot -143201 — Deed Record • City of Fayetteville Water & Sewer Deeporfinen, LEGEND Permanent Utility Easement : : :::: 1 Temporary Construction Easement Existing Utility Eosernent Una Existing Property Une UE Utility Easement ICE — Temporary Construction Easement Property Owner: CLYDD4E SCHARLAU TRUST Drown by: McClelland Consulting Engineers Date: Sept 2004 Scala : 1' = 100' Project No. 02133-0305 WL3 — Tract No. 21 I II Li ii II II I II II I II Name: Interceptors Date II OA/1J/ZU✓Jb ,o:o/ 7 /L43/L 1171 WIN URUUr 11YU rHuc 11/11 tPUE 22.1 — 1,200 S0. FT. (0.03 AC.) ice 22A - 1,600 SO. Ft (0.04 AC) Not ' 420 eq.fL of the above PUE 221 1a within the existing asphalt roadway. 412 aq.ft. of the above TCE 22A is within the existing asphalt roadway. aTY OF FAYETTEVN.E FUTURE HAMESTRING SEWER LIFT STATION PROPERTY ./� 15UTIITY EASEMENT 17-.,_j1270-131) aTY PROPERTY 104 swNE14 *may SECTION 2 q, T -19-N. R -31 -WK H UTILITY EASEMENT PLAT WL3 1RACT MAP NO. 22 EXHIBIT 'A' 5)1'A7036N I0' TCE 22A %p P08 22.1 CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE E)OSTNG HAMESIRING SEWER LIFT STATION PROPERTY (925-782) 1..105. 106 FAIRFIELD SUBDIVISION PHASE 3 T/'22'00'E 40 ACRE 1,'. 59427' LEGEND •-- Comers of Permanent Utility Easement 001-11407-001 — Tax Parcel Number 001-11407-005 001-11407-000 001-11428-000 2001-143281 --- Deed Record tffrATV3 'LO - an i -PROPERTY i SCALE' 1' = 100' Basis of Bearings: Based an the City of Foyettevate CPS f io Coordinate System Gi N87'22'00'V 729,67' �._r. - Permanent Utility Easement ;":"i.. Temporary Construction Easement -------- Existing utnity Easement line Existing Property Une LIE — Utility Easement Temporary Construction Eoaemant Property Owner: CLYOENE SI4ARLAU TRUST Project Name Cityof Drown by : mealdland Can'aaltng Erigtnebis Wostslde Sewer.lntererptora Fayetteville Data: March 2005 Scale: 1" = 100' No. Revlalona Date Water & Sewer Department Project No. 02133-0305 MA — TYaat No 22 bl/13/2UUb b13:b/ `J/G43/Z!t/ KJN UKUUV INc rHUt ✓JD/11 1 OFFER AND ACCEPTANCE CONTRACT Page3of5 ' EXHIBIT "A" PROPERTY DESCRIPTIONS I LiftStation Sile: A part of the North Half (N'/) of the Southeast Quarter (SE%} of Section2. Township 16 North, Range I. 31 West, being more particularydescribed as beginning ate point North 02° 31' 30" East 526.54 feet of the Southeast comer of the Northwest Quarter (NW%) of the Southeast Quarter (SEA) of said Section 2, thence:North 59° 30' 30" West 105.87 feet to an iron pin at a fence corner; thence along an existingfence line North 03° 54' 44" East 108.13 feet to an iron pin at a fence comer; thence along an ' existing fence line North 82° 38' 48" East45.90 feet to an iron pin; thencecontinuing along said fence line North 82° 3T 18" East 149.83 feet to an iron pin; thence South 06° 42' 15" East 145.72 feet tb an iron pin; thence Southeasterly along a 100 foot radius non -tangent curve to the right a distance of 60.30 feel, said curve having a chord bearing.end distance of South 63° 19' 13" East 59.40 feet; thence South 46° 02' 30" East 92.55 feet to a nail and cap in the centerline of Sunshine Road; thence ' along said centerline South 69° 08' 16" West 44.75 feet; thence continuing along said centetline South 56° 3706" West 53.66 feet to a nail and cap in the Hamestring Creek Bridge; thence North 59° 30' 30" West 186.14 feet to the Point of Beginning, containing 1.11 acres, more or less, Washington County, Arkansas. Subject to any easements and/or rights of way of record. ' Permanent Easement (north): A thirty (30) foot permanent easement of equal and uniform width located ins part of the North Half (N%) of the Southeast Quarter (SE'/4) of Section 2, Township 16 North, Range 31 West, Washington County. Arkansas, being more particularly described as follows: From the Southeast comer of the Northwest Quarter (NW /) of the Southeast Quarter (SE'/.) of said Section 2, thence North 02° 31' 30 East 525.54 feet to a point on the South line of the above referenced property, thence along said South property line North 59° 30' 30" West 105.87 feet Lathe Southwest corner of the above referenced property, thence along the West property line North 03° 54'44" East 108.13 feet, thence leaving said West property line North 82° 38' 48" East 45.90 feet to the Point of Beginning; thence North or 01' 04" West 237.45!feet back to a point on the West property line; thence along said West properly line North 03° 54' 44" East 42.60 feet; thence North 44° 17' 42" East 68.84 feet thence North 88° 05' 00" East 739.90 feet; thence North 14° 52' 37" East 40.52 feet.to a point on the North line of the above referenced property; thence along said North property line South 71° 42' 51" East 30.05 feet; thence South 14° 52' 37" West 61.02 feet; thence South 88° 05' 00" West 750.12 feet: thence South 44° IT 42" West 45.75 feet; thence South 03° 54' 44" West 28.70 feet; thence South 07° 01'04" East 234.40 feet: thence South 82° 37 18" West 30.00 feet to the Point of Beginning, containing 33,738 square feet (0.77 acre), more or less. The bearings for this description are based on Arkansas State Plane Coordinates, North Zone, NAt) 83, the system which the'Clty of Fayetteville presently uses. This bearing system mayvaryfrom the bearing system previously used In describing the subject project. Temporary Construction Easement (north): A twenty (20) foot temporary construction and grading easement of equal and uniform width is located along the East and South sides of the above described Permanent Water/Sewer Easement. This temporary construction easement Is shown in detail onEchibit "A" and contains 20,831 square feet (0.48 acre), more or less. The bearings for this description are based on Arkansas State Plane Coordinates, North Zone, NAC) 83, the system which the City of Fayetteville presently uses. This bearing system mayvaryfrom the bearing system previously used in describing the subject project. Permanent Easement (south): A permanent easement of variable width located in a part of the Northeast Quarter (NE'/.) of the Southeast Quarter (SE'/.) of Section. 2, Township 16 North, Range 31 West, Washington County, Arkansas, being more particularly described as follows: From the Southwest comer, of the Northeast Quarter (NE'/.) of the Southeast Quarter (SE%) of said Section 2, thence North 02° 31' 30" East 526.54 feet to a point on the South tine of the above referenced properly, thence along said South propertyline South 59° 30' 30" East 186.14 feet to the centerline of County Road No. 877 (Sunshine Road), thence along said centerline North 56° 32' 06' East 53.66 feet to the Point of Beginning; thence oont nuing along the centertineofCouay42sa'd Ne Bfl-(Sunsnlne Read}Nortn69' hec)ee 9oath. 32° 41' 13" East 21.33 feet; thence North 78° 01' 06" East 117.66 feet to a point on the West line of the ' Hamstring Sewage Lift Station property (Deed Book 925 at Page 782); thence along said West property •line South 11°.08' 00" East45.20 feet to.a point on the_North line of an existing 15 foot utility easement; thence along said North line North 87° 00' 34" West 147.80 feet; thence continuing along said Norttf line South 51° 33' 15" West 17.28 feet; thence North 32° 41' 13" West 29.67 feet to the Point of Beginning, containing 4,725 square feet (0.11 acre), more or less. 01/13/2006 08:07 9724372707 RJN GRUUP 1Nt: HAUL bblll I OFFER AND ACCEPTANCE CONTRACT Page 4 of 5 The bearings for this description are based on Arkansas.State Plane Coordinates, North Zone, NAD 83, the system which the City of Fayetteville presently uses. This bearing system may vary from the bearing system previously used in describing the subject project Temporary Construction Easement (south): An eleven (11) foot temporary construction and grading easement of equal and uniform width is located along the North side of the above described Permanent Water/Sewer Easement. This temporary construction easement is shown in detail on Exhibit "A' and contains 1,318 square feet (0.03 acre), chore or less. The bearings for this description are based on Arkansas State Plane Coordinates, NorthZone, NAD 83, the system which the City of Fayetteville presently uses. This bearing system mayvaryfrom the bearing system previously used in describing the subject project. Permanent Easement Description (for 8" extension): A twenty (20) foot permanent easement of equal and uniform width located In part of the Northeast Quarter (NE%) of the Southeast Quarter (SE%) of Section 2, Township 16 North, Range 31 West, Washington County, Arkansas, being more particularly described as folows: From the Southwest corner of the Northeast Quarter (NE%) of the Southeast Quarter (SE%) of said Section 2, thence South 87° 22' 00" East 594.27 feet, thence North 02° 38' 00" East 572.98 feet to the Point of Beginning, said point being on the North line of an existing 50 foot utility easement thence along said North line North 776471 36" East 20.00 feet thence North 12° 12' 24' West 60.00 feet thence South 77° 471 36" West 20.00 feet; thence South 12° 12' 24" East 60.00 feet to the Point of Beginning, containing 1,200 square feet (0.03 acres), more or less. The bearings for this description are based on Arkansas State Plane Coordinates, North Zone, NAD 83, the system which the Cityof Fayetteville presentlyuses. This bearing system mayvaryfrom the bearing system previously used in describing the subject project. Temporary Construction and Grading Easement Description (for 8" extension): Aten (10) foot temporary construction and grading easement of equal and uniform width is located along the North, East, and West sides of the above described permanent Water/Sewer Easement. This temporary construction easement is shown In detail on Exhibit'A" and contains 1,600 square feet (0.04 acres), more or less. The bearings for this description are based on Arkansas State Plane Coordinates, North Zone, NAO 83, the system which the Cityof Fayetteville presently uses. This bearing system mayvaryfrom the bearing system previously used in describing the subject project I I I L .1 I I SIGNED FOR IDENTIFICATION: Clyden arlau Trus dated December 22, 1997 ' Date: 3 I( Charles E. Schartau, Trustee t4/A Date: Agent or Witness City of Fayetteville, Arkansas, A municld l corporation Date: I I 1J n E OFFER AND ACCEPTANCE CONTRACT Page 5 of 5 ACKNOWLEDGMENT STATE OF ARKANSAS ss. COUNTY OF WASHINGTON BE IT REMEMBERED, that on this date, before the undersigned, a duly commissioned and acting Notary•Publiowithin and for said County and State, personally appeared Charles E. Scharlau, Trustee of the Clydene Scharlau Trust dated December 22,1997, to me well known as the person who executed the foregoing document, and who stated and acknowledged that he had so signed, executed and delivered said Instrument for the consideration, uses and purposes therein mentioned and set forth. my hand and seal on this uii day of MAc1 .200 No Pubtic RFS• ACKNOWLEDGMENT STATE OF ARKANSAS ss. COUNTY OF WASHINGTON BE IT REMEMBERED, that on this date, before the undersigned, a duly commissioned and acting Notary Publicwithin and for said Countyand State, personally appeared Dan Goody and Sondra Smith, to me well known as the persons who executed the foregoing document, and who stated and acknowledged that they are the Mayor and City Clerk of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas, a municipal corporation, and are duly authorized in their respective capacities to execute the foregoing instrument for and in the name and behalf of said municipal corporation, and further stated and acknowledged that they had so signed, ,executed and delivered said instrument for the consideration, uses and purposes therein mentioned and set forth. WITNESS my hand and seal on this 11 day of __________,2005. MY COMMISSION EXPIRES: �.•,• f U B'-tO ,: r J '1`61 •.........: "%....N 0Jt..t I I I 01/13/2006 08:07 y/'143/Yrol KJN QKuur •r&, I 000 • -_., PY itill I$N C A! N0354 44'E j i 10&l3' C) o� �-` N02.3f'30'E S26.S4' r : \ 'rte ' : ` V. aa.rw wee . 4a p m p q Li I 01/13/2@06 08:@7 9724372707 KJN UNUUK 1NU 1'A(± dy/ 11 In a a NN 0 vl UTIUV( EASEMENT PLAT TRACT MAP N0. 18 Basis of Bearings: PUE 15.1 — 33.738 SQ. FT. (0.77 ACRES) EXHIBIT "ABased on the City of TCE 18A — 20,B31 SQ. FT, (0.48 ACRES) Fayetteville CPS Coordinate System NE CORNER TIS2I/4 SECTION T -16-N, R -31-W 4 AA'�0p W tt Ner'38'48'E 45,90 - - a q Y ia Ho�str/ng - .., Creek. i SE CORNER NWI/4, SC)/4 SECTON 2 T -16-N, R -31-W LOT? aLCRRIST uEAPOWS N8805'00'E 739,90' S44'17'4ROW 45.75' SOr54'44'V 26,70' N J Ate+ Dc a A. • , , TRACT 17 $68'05'00'V r 7,50.12' 30' PUE L.20' TCE TRACT r CITY OP FUTURE FAYZITETItLE NAWESTRDVG 50' Ue (02Y781) SEWER LIFT STATION SITE -^AD S' UE �"C1270,131) v�' CITY PROPERTY CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE E10STINO HAMESTRINO SEWER UFT STATION 104 SCALE, 1' = 200' !OS FAIRFIELD SUBDIVISION Toy PHASE 3 LEGEND Permanent Utility Easement Temporay Construction Easement Comers of Permanent Existing Utility Easement Line Utility Easement. -- _ 001-11407-006 001-11407-007 — Tax Parcel Numbers Existing Property Una 001-11428-000 001-11407-005 LIE — Utility Easement r City of Fayetteville Water & Sewer Departs Property Owner : CLYDEW SCHARLAU TRUST Drawn by : McClelland Consulting Engineers Date: Aug. 2004 Scale : 1" = 200' Project No. 02133-0305 WL4 — TRACT 18 Project Name : Westside Sewer Interce 01/13/2006 08:07 9724372707 rwry crwr un. I UTILITY EASEMENT PLAT WL3 TRACT MAP NO. 21 Y f 1 EXHIBIT 'A' PUS 21.1 — 4,725 M FT. (0.11 AC.) TCE 21A — 1,318 SO. FT. (0.03 AC.) NOTE C7Y OF FAYETTENUE 419 eq:fL of the above PUE 21.1 is FUTURE HAASTRING within the existing asphalt roadway. SLyIER liFT TSTA110NpRop `\ 09'16, J'd g•Ol'06'E ( „ty s R I ' , • mac. L^ 1 4#'1t1 •/ng ' • sSy, 6•"'2 b PUB \ f - N 92 1i o toy 21.1 , % • a !a o tt_ .... .w r 5 2. `ao tno N87b0'34N_ 147.80' Basib of Bearings: y`�. t5 (,�70-1 No`"sy- It Based on the City of a v / / a c Fayetteville GPS _riJ• •33't5'W e ' Coordinate System / 4/ S511129' m w ri CITY / / PROPERTY , CITY W FAYEFIEMM k ! / / MING M EMING SEWtR "' y / LIFT STATION PRCPiIM ° // / \a' (925-782) 44� 103 SCALE' 1' = 100' NC 10¢ \\ ' y► 9021 4 t 105 106 N W b, C. a ¢lI �\ �'P� FAWFIELD SUBDIVISION C d I PHASE 3 ' a U U SW CORNER SSEECTTIONS2 /4 LEGEND __________ / +�+ T -16—N, R -31—W I. Comers of Permanent Permanent Utility Easement 1 A. Utility Easement Temporary Construction Easement 0,° 001-11407-001 lox Parcel Number - — — - Existing Utility Easement Una ' — 42 0140�' Existing Property tine o 001 -11 -11407 -COG H 0 01-11 42 0-0 00 LIE utility Easement 2001-143281 — Deed Record — TCE !• Temporary Constrm octlan Easement ' Property Owner: CLYDENE :ARLAU must Project Name: t Cityii Westside Sewer Interceptors Drawn *by : McClenand Consulting Engineers No. Reons Date Fayetteville Date; Sept 2004 scale : = too• N AWafer & Sewer Deportment Project No. 02133-0305 WL3 - Tract No. 21 ' 9 U1/1J/LUUV VO. UI J I L'.)( LI Ui 'U I' %I II ulV I flVL 111 J• 'TCE 22A - 1.600 So. FT. (0.04 AC.) NOTE 1, 420 sq.fl. of the above PUE 22t la within the existing asphalt roadway. 412 sq ft. of the above TCE 22A ds i within the existing asphalt roadway. ' 1 UTILITY EASEMENT PLAT WL3 TRACT MAP NO. 22 EXHIBIT 'A' CITY OF FAYETTEYIUF N ?Joe FUTURE )4AMESTRING �� �w ElOO3 I... SEWER UFT STATION PROPERTY I./ /> 12/ .aa. ■ SW tNEI/4b 1 /4 ■ SECTION 2 T -10-H. R -31-W e — Conti of Permanent Utility Easement ' 001-11407-001 — Tax Parcel Number 001-11407-005 001-11407-006 001-11428-000 ' 2001-143281 — Deed Record 103 - -. IS' UTllTY t:ASEHLT (1270-131) all PROPERTY 104 10'TCE22A 209 2.1 ��5 u76,i r CITY OF FAYETTEVILL( E)OS1MG HAMESTRING SEWER LIFT STATION PROPERTY (925-782) r r- CITY hi ry PROPERTY (w� SCALE, 1' = 100' Scala of EearIngs: Based on the city of FayettevOle CPS Coordinate System y? 1 l .105 106 r$ I i gC l*,S2/4 FAIRFIEL.D SUBD%IVISION T C1Kt4 R -31-w PHASE 3 Nn7r2PT v 'LEGEND r; ,,.- Permanent Utility Easement : Temporary Construction Easement --- Existing Utility Easement Une $ Existing Property Une UE — Utility Easement TCE — Temporary Construction Easement • CityProperty Owner : CLYDENE SCHARLAU TRUST y{. of r Drawn by : McCleliai 1 Fayetteville Date: March 2005 Water & Sewer Deportment Project No. 02133-0305 ' Scale : Y — 100' WL3 — TYact No. 22 Name : DOCUMENT 00400 - BID FORM Project Name: Wastewater System Improvement Project Contract Name: Hamestring Lift Station Contract No.: WL-6 BIDTO: Owner: The City of Fayetteville, Arkansas 113 West Mountain Street Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701 :D tOUl Bidder: Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC 729 South 30`h Street Birmingham, AL 35233 ARTICLE 1- INTENT 1.01 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement with Owner in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and furnish all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Bid price and within the Bid time indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2- TERMS AND CONDITIONS 2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 90 days after the day of Bid opening. Bidder will sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement with the Bonds and other documents required by the Bidding Requirements within 15 days after the date of Owner's Notice of Award. 00400 -Bid Form-B&G.doc . 00400— 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 DOCUMENT 00400 - BID FORM (continued) ARTICLE 3- BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents, as more fully set forth in the Agreement, that: A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bid Documents, and the following Addenda, receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged: Number I Date 06/22/2006 B. Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance, and furnishing of the Work. C. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance, and furnishing of the Work. D. Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site; and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any, at the Site. Bidder acknowledges that such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents and may not be complete for Bidder's purposes. Bidder acknowledges that Owner and Engineer do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of information and data shown or indicated in the Bid Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site. 00400 -Bid Form-B&G.doc _ 00400-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 DOCUMENT 00400-1311) FORM (continued) E. Bidder has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done so) all such additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. F. Bidder does not consider that any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performing and furnishing of the Work in accordance with the times, price, and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to Work for which this Bid is submitted as indicated in the Contract Documents. H. Bidder has correlated the information known to Bidder, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports, and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. I. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, ' or discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder. J. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work for which this Bid is submitted. K. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm, or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization, or Ii L corporation; Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any 00400 -Bid Form-B&G.doc. 00400— 3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 '. 1 DOCUMENT 00400 - BID FORM (continued) other Bidder to submit a false or sham bid; Bidder has not solicited or induced any person, firm, or a corporation to refrain from bidding; and Bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for himself any advantage over any other Bidder or over Owner. L. Bidder will perform the Work in compliance with all applicable trench safety standards set forth in Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Part 1926 — Subpart P — Excavations. ARTICLE 4- BID PRICE 4.01 Lump Sum Price A. Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the lump -sum price of Six Million One Hundred Thirty Thousand Dollars ($6,130,000) B. Provide a breakdown of the above lump sum bid per the following: (Note: The sum of this section to equal total lump sum price) 1. Trench or excavation safety systems complying with OSHA Part 1926 - SubpartP $ 7,000 2. Site Preparation $25,000 3. Dewatering $21,000 4. Excavation and grading: a. Soil $442,000 .b. Rock $w/above 5. Structural: a. Concrete $1,875,000 (anchors, mud slab, walls, floors, roof, pads, etc) b. Metal $130,000 (catwalks, supports, handrails, hatches, etc.) 00400 -Bid Form-B&G.doc. 00400-4 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 DOCUMENT 00400 - BID FORM (continued) r 6. Piping: a. Interior to Lift Station $620,000 b. Exterior to Lift Station $180,000 7. Electrical and Controls: $900,000 8. Equipment and Installation of: a. Pumps $840,000 b. Ventilation & HVAC: (1) Lift Station $350,000 (2) Electrical Building $w/above c. Odor Control $225,000 d. Skylights $15,000 e. Buildings $47,000 f. Fencing $19,000 9. Painting and Coatings $80,000 10. Landscaping $4,000 11. `Other' not included above $350,000 Describe other: ARTICLE 5- CONTRACT TIMES 5.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially completed and ready for final payment within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement. 5.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the Work within the times specified in the Agreement. 00400 -Bid Form-B&G.doc . 00400-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 DOCUMENT 00400 - BID FORM (continued) ARTICLE 6- BID CONTENT 6.01 The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid: A. Required Bid security in the form of a certified or bank cashier's check or a Bid Bond and in the amount of 5% of Amount of Bid Dollars ($ ). B. Required Bidder's Qualification Statement with supporting data (DOCUMENT 00140 - Bidder's Qualification Statement). C. Manufacturer's data where called for in Specifications (DOCUMENT 00450 - Equipment Questionnaire). D. DOCUMENT 00430 - List of Subcontractors. E. Contractor's Act of Assurance Form, RLF-52. F. MBE / WBE Compliance Evaluation Form, RLF-96. ARTICLE 7- COMMUNICATIONS 7.01 Communications concerning this Bid shall be addressed to the Bidder as follows: Gary Harrington 729 South 30'" Street Birmingham, AL 35233 Phone No. (205) 328-4000 FAX No. (205) 323-9290 ARTICLE 8- TERMINOLOGY 8.01 The terms used in this Bid which are defined in the GENERAL CONDITIONS or Instructions to Bidders will have the meanings assigned to them. SUBMITTED on 06/29/2006. Arkansas State Contractor License No. 0077580403. 00400 -Bid Form-B&G.doc. 00400 — 6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 DOCUMENT 00400 - BID FORM (continued) If Bidder is: An Individual Name (type or printed): By: (Individual's Signature) Doing business as: Business address: Phone No.: FAX No.: A Partnership Partnership Name: (SEAL) By: (Signature of general partner — attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (type or printed): Business address: Phone No.: FAX No.: . 00400 -Bid Form-B&G.doc. 00400 — 7 . RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 'z l J DOCUMENT 00400 - BID FORM (continued) A Corporation Corporation Name: Brasfield & Gorrie. LLC (SEAL) State of Incorporation: Delaware Type (General Business, Professional, Service, Limited Liability): By: (Signatuiv.ttach evid nc of authority to sign) Name (type or printed): Gary Harrington Title: Vice President SEAL) Attest: (Signature of Cofporate S� Business -address: 729 South 30th Street Birmingham, AL 35233 Phone No.: 205-328A000 FAX No.: 205-323-9290 END OF DOCUMENT 00400 00400 -Bid Form-B&G.doc _ 00400-8 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 BRASFIELD OGORRIE 729 South 30th Street Birmingham, Alabama 35233 Tel. 205.328.4000 Fax 205.251.1304 www.brasfieldgorrie.com BRASFIELD & GORRIE, L.L.C. Certified Copy of Resolution Of the Executive Committee I, Charles L. Grizzle, Jr., Corporate Secretary of Brasfield & Gorrie, L.L.C., do hereby certify the following is a true and correct copy of a resolution duly adopted at a meeting of the Executive Committee of Brasfield & Gorrie, L.L.C., a Delaware limited liability company, held May 22, 2006, a majority of the committee being present and constitution a quorum for the transaction of business: RESOLVED, that C. Gary Harrington, Vice President of Brasfield & Gorrie, L.L.C. (the "Company") is hereby authorized and directed in the name of and on behalf of the Company to sign all documents relating to the Wastewater System Improvement Project, Hamestring Lift Station in Fayetteville, Arkansas. Charles L. Grizzle, Jr. Corporate Secretary ATLANTA • BIRMINGHAM • NASHVILLE • ORLANDO' RALEIGH BRASFIELD & GORRI E, LLC DOCUMENT 00410 - BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that we Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC 729 South 30th Street Birmingham, AL 35233 as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and Federal Insurance Company 15 Mountain View Road Warren, NJ 07060 a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana as Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Fayetteville, Arkansas 113 West Mountain Street Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701 as Obligee, hereinafter called Owner, in the sum of Five Percent (5%) of the Amount Bid ------ ($ ), for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, Principal and said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Principal has submitted a Bid for the construction of Hamestring Lift Station, Project No. WL-6, Fayetteville Wastewater System Improvement Project. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Owner shall accept the Bid of Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms of such Bid, and give such Bond or Bonds as may be specified in the Bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of Principal to enter such Contract and give such Bond or Bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Owner the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said Bid and such larger amount for 00410 -Bid Bond 00410- 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 DOCUMENT 00410 - BID BOND (continued) which the Owner may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said Bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 29t' day of June 2006. PRINCIPAL (CORPORATE SEAL) Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC By SURETY Federal Insurance Company By Earl D. Ridolphi. Jr.. Attorney -in -Fact ATTORNEY -IN -FACT Post Office Box 531310. Birmingham. AL 35253 Telephone: 205-879-1945: Fax: 205-879-1946 (This Bond shall be accompanied with Attorney -in -Fact's authority from Surety) END OF DOCUMENT 00410 (CORPORATE SEAL) 00410 -Bid Bond 00410-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 II Ii II Chubb POWER Federal Insurance Company AU n; Surety Department OF Vigilant Insurance Company 15 Mountain View Road It...4 Surety ATTORNEY Pacific Indemnity Company Warren, NJ 07059 Know Al! by These Roads, Thal FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, an Indiana .spun Sa7BgaTY COMPANY, a W6w,sJn mrpa tun, do each hardy wneVk" and alppai Pannell, Sheryl Cooper, Charles E. Carper, IV and Shelby S. Tumb K. Aman, Sr., Joan N Miller and Walter C. Dowdy of Montgomery, STATE OF NEW JERSEY ' CaaMy d$anersL e6' on ads 18th Nove 11 I VIGILANT IN3ImANCE COMPANY, a Naw Yak wrparadan, and PACIFIC art D. Ridoiphi, Jr., Suzi Philpot, Roland Hines, Mary h of Birmingham, Alabama, Jane Huddleston, Douglas bama r• I' e 1 r r• I' •. �• o • , Y v V T. W. Cawamu4A, Vice Presidord def d mbar, 2005 bloc me, a Nam,y Pubic S Jersey, pasoneiy coma Kan sh C. Wends, to me krohwl b be AWWaM Setreary or FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VLILANT UMSURANCE COMPANY, end PACIFIC NDEEMNITY COMPANY, the companies which aseubd the fa sgoI g Power d Admwy, ad One.sakt Keal�h C. Wendel, being by t duly swan, did depose and say Vail he S AsWsfa 1 Secrdary d FEDERAL INIStARANCE COMPANY, VK3LANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY and Wows the caperate seas ahead, that the seals aa'aed b the blepoihp Pallor U NWney are shch oapomle sells all vase tlsrob aflbad by au horny of the By taws d said Canpalbs; all Rid he signed said Pc or kedamy MrM Ssaetay dsaid Compwdes by @re autlhOW, and dot he S ac 1-A .d with T. W. Ceaasagh, and kraww him b be Vice President d said Coinpasiss; and US the sh nSws oof T. W. Cavanagh, subeabed to said Paver S Nbnwy Is I, Me gsuine ha mftkig cit. W. Cavanagh, and we$ hereto a�Cdbed by aid"d said Dy- Uvss � Presence. NirtS Sew I ZARY N,wgy } �o. 22316 A. EDER New Jarsgr � , d� e� No. 2231647 p119��� Commission Expires Od. 28, ]001 Nday Public: CERTIFICATION 6had from be By- lawn of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGMNT INSURANCE COMPANY. and PACIFIC INDENITY COMPANY: I II I I I II Oiwn under my hall and seek Of Said Canpades at Warren, NJ ale 29th day of June, 2006 PIN THE EVENT YOU WISH TO NOTIFY US OF A CLAIM, VERIFY THE AUTHENTICITY OF THIS BOND OR NOTIFY US OF ANY OTHER MATTER, PLEASE CONTACT US AT ADDRESS LISTED ABOVE, OR BY TMedwne (908) 903.3493 Fat (9081903- 3656 emaa swyd,ubb,com 1 DOCUMENT 00430 - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS In compliance with the Instructions to Bidders and other Contract Documents, the undersigned submits the following names of Subcontractors to be used in performing the Work for Project No. WL-6, Hamestring Lift Station. Bidder certifies that all Subcontractors listed are eligible to perform the Work. Subcontractor's Work Subcontractor's Name License No. Work. Comp. EMR % of Contract Value Excavation/Grading Self Perform Concrete Self Perform Painting Dobbs Coating 0074680406 Mechanical Self Perform Electrical Robert Bailey Electric Instrumentation Bauman Piping Self Perform Fence Aber Fence 0135630207 Landscaping Self Perform Waterproofing Commercial Wa e r ofm I I NOTE: This form must be submitted in accordance wi the Instructions to Bidders. Bidder' ature END OF DOCk5tvthNT 00430 I00430 -List of Subcontractors 00430 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 DOCUMENT 00450 - EQUIPMENT QUESTIONNAIRE The Bidder shall enter in the spaces provided the names of the manufacturers of equipment which Bidder proposes to furnish, and shall submit this Equipment Questionnaire with its Bid. Owner will review and evaluate the information before award of the Contract. Only one manufacturer's name shall be listed for each item of equipment. Upon award of a contract, the named equipment shall be furnished. Substitutions will be permitted only if named equipment does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, the manufacturer is unable to meet the delivery requirements of the construction schedule, or the manufacturer is dilatory in complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Substitutions shall be subject to concurrence of Owner and shall be confirmed by Change Order. Preliminary acceptance of equipment listed by manufacturer's name shall not in any way constitute a waiver of the specifications covering such equipment; final acceptance will be based on full conformity with the Contract Documents. Failure to furnish all information requested or entering more than one manufacturer's name for any item in this Equipment Questionnaire may be cause for rejection of the Bid. J I Equipment I. Pumps P-1 to P-7 2. Pumps P-8 & P-9 3. Hydraulic Valve Control 4. Hydraulic Valves 5. 6. Variable -Frequency Drives Motor Control Center 8. Pre-Engr Building 9. Odor Control 10. Ventilation I00450 -Equipment Questionnaire Manufacturer/Model Cornell Cornell Pratt Pratt Modicon Eaton/CH Eaton/CH Heritage US Filter/Davis McOuay END OF DOCUMENT 00450 00450-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 U RLF-52 (R-7/01) CONTRACTOR'S ACT OF ASSURANCE FORM As the authorized representative of the individual, incorporation, or corporation (hereinafter referred to as the company) bidding on or participating in the Revolving Loan Fund (RLF) financed project, I certify that I have read and understand the requirements of the Revolving Loan Fund Supplemental Conditions and that the principles, agents and employees of the company will comply with these requirements including all relevant statutes and regulations issued pursuant thereto. I further certify as the authorized agent of the company that: I H MBE/WBE During the bid process and throughout the performance of the Contract, whenever subcontracts are to be awarded, I will take the 6 affirmative steps described in the Supplemental Conditions to utilize minority and women's business enterprise (MBE/WBE) firms wherever possible. will document to the borrower and ASWCC all efforts to secure MBE/WBE participation including follow-up efforts and will report to the Owner the dollar value of all MBE/WBE contracts and subcontracts awarded. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY I will comply with all requirements of 41 CFR Chapter 60 and Executive Orders 11246 and 11375, including inclusion of all required equal opportunity clauses in each sub -contract awarded in excess of $10,000 and I will furnish a similar statement from each proposed subcontractor, when appropriate. I will also comply with all Equal Employment Opportunity requirements as defined by Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973; the Age Discrimination Act of 1975; and Section 13 of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of 1972 regarding sex discrimination. ' NONSEGREGATED FACILITIES The company that I represent does not and will not maintain any facilities provided for its employees in a segregated manner, or permit its employees to perform their services at any location under company control where segregated facilities are maintained; and that the ' company will obtain a similar certification prior to the award of any subcontract exceeding $10,000 which is not exempt from the equal opportunity clause. ' LABOR STANDARDS I will comply with the Labor Standards Provisions contained in the RLF - Supplemental Conditions and furnish weekly payrolls and certifications as may be required by the Owner to affirm compliance. I will also require that weekly payrolls be submitted to the Owner for all ' subcontracts in excess of $2,000. OSHA REQUIREMENTS I will comply with the Department of Labor Safety and Health ' Regulations promulgated under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standard Act (40 U.S.C. 327-333) in the performance of the contract. PROCUREMENT PROHIBITIONS As required by Executive Order 11738, Section 306 of the Clean ' Air Act and Section 508 of the Clean Water Act, I certify that I will not procure goods and services from persons who have been convicted of violations of either law if the goods or services are to be produced by the facility that gave rise to the violation. IPage 1 of 2 I 1 RLF-52 (R-7/01) DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION I certify that to the best of my knowledge and belief that the company that I represent and its principals: (a) Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from covered transactions by any Federal department or agency; (b) Have not within a three year period preceding this proposal been convicted of or had a civil judgement rendered against them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public (Federal, State, or local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; violation of Federal or State antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, or receiving stolen property; (c) Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a government entity (Federal, State, or local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph (b) of this certification; and (d) Have not within a three-year period preceding this application/proposal had one or more public transactions (Federal, State, or local) terminated for cause or default. I understand that a false statement on this certification regarding debarment and suspension may be grounds for rejection of this proposal or termination of the award. In addition, under 18 USC Sec. 1001, a false statement may result in a fine of up to $10,000 or imprisonment for up to 5 years, or both. I further certify that I will obtain a similar certification for each subcontract awarded in excess of $25,000. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE COMPANY NAME: Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC 6/29/2006 Vice President Page 2 of 2 07/13/2000 10:31 FAX 2053239290 BRASFIELD&GORRIE RLF-96 (R -7/0I) 0002/002 II I I Ii I I I Ii I I I 'ItQ"p 1 1 •Ptf 1 • • 71 • • 1 • 1 1: 1 • .._- 1• Ill al •. ...1 . 111. 1 ..11:11 .11 III'.. .�•..; •.. ..1 . ..1...11. . .11.- .., . • 1 1 ' 1: • •111 • 1 • 1 1 1 • y 1 11 • 'JI ♦ 1 • 11 S 1 • • . N ' 1 1 K I .• V • I• 1. 4 • 11- 1 •' • :11. 1 4 •1w 1.1 11111. ♦1 •. • 1: : • • •1•• 1. Name of Project: Wastewater System Improvement Project Contract Nor: WL-6 RLF Project No. CS -050808-03 2. Name of General Contractor. (Name) (Complete a separate form for each MBEIWBE to be used as a subcontractor) (Address) (City, State, Zip Code) (Phone Number) (Fax Number) 4. Describe Work to be performed by the MBEIWBE, provide dollar amount of the subcontract. rll .� • F. II • a. • . • : •: w l • 1 • . .I n r • • : n : c 1 . • i • w r l . • u 1: II II T4fl;4aIis44 (1)i Name of General Contactor. �Brrasfielld� & Gorrie, LLC Signature: /CfClar� V- �Qlf.,daiiu arswe Title/Date: Vice President/Chief Estimator II C I I ARTICLE 1- WORK 1.01 BRASFIELD & GORRIE shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work under this Contract is generally described as ' follows: ' Construction Hamestring Lift Station including related appurtenances and site work. The wet well/dry well lift station shall contain seven 350 -HP horizontal end -suction centrifugal pumps. Other station features include dry well ventilation, wet well odor control, and an electrical control building. Piping work includes pump suction and discharge piping, potable water service piping, connections to approaching 24- and ' 48 -inch gravity sewers, and 24- and 30 -inch discharge force mains. The project is located on the west side of Fayetteville northwest of the existing Hamestring Lift ' Station, across Sunshine Road (Route 877). I1.02 The Contract for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is generally described as follows: ' The City of Fayetteville, Arkansas is undertaking a project to redirect sewer flows from portions of the City in the Illinois River drainage basin to a new wastewater treatment plant on the west side of the City and upgrade sewers in the City which are in the White River drainage basin and upgrade the existing wastewater treatment plant on the east side of the City. The project is known as the Wastewater System DOCUMENT 00500 - AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE AND BRASFIELD & GORRIE Project Name: Wastewater System Improvement Project Contract Name: Hamestring Lift Station Contract No.: WL-6 RLF Project No.: CS -0500803-03 THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the Iday of CJ uT in the year 2006 by and between City of Fayetteville (hereinafter called Owner) and Brasfield & Gorrie (hereinafter called BRASFIELD & GORRIE). ' 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 — 1 I DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) Improvement Project and includes, but may not be limited to, four areas of improvements as follows: 1. Westside Wastewater Treatment Plant. 2. Westside Collection System Improvements. 3. Paul R. Noland Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements. 4. Eastside Collection System Improvements. ARTICLE 2- ENGINEER 2.01 The Contract has been designed by RJN GROUP, INC. RJN GROUP, INC. assumes I all duties and responsibilities, and has the rights and authority assigned to RJN GROUP, INC. in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 3- CONTRACT TIME 3.01 TIME OF THE ESSENCE: A. All time limits for milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. 3.02 DATES FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT: A. The Work will be Substantially Completed within 470 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS, and completed and ready for final payment in ' accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS within 500 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. 1. Substantially Complete by date stated above shall be defined as the completion of all major work items as required for a fully operational system, including the installation of seven horizontal, two sumps and ' all valves. All piping work is to be installed and tested. All concrete 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 -2 I DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) and general site work is complete and all ventilation and odor control is complete. The control building is to be complete, and all electric and potable water facilities shall be in place and operational. 3.03 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: A. THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and BRASFIELD & GORRIE recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the time specified above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving the actual loss suffered by THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE if the Work is not • Substantially Completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and BRASFIELD & GORRIE ' agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) BRASFIELD & GORRIE shall pay THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE Five' ' Thousand Dollars ($5,000.00) for each calendar day that expires after the time specified above in Paragraph 3.02 for Substantial Completion until the Work is Substantially Complete. After Substantial Completion, if BRASFIELD & GORRIE shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the time specified in Paragraph 3.02 for completion and readiness for final payment or any proper extension thereof granted by • THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, BRASFIELD & GORRIE shall pay THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE One Thousand Dollars ($1,000.00) for each ' calendar day that expires after the time specified for completion and readiness for final payment. ' ARTICLE 4- CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 The CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE agrees to pay, and BRASFIELD & GORRIE agrees to accept, as full and final compensation for all work done under this agreement, the amount based on the prices bid in the Proposal which is hereto attached, for the actual amount accomplished under each pay item, said payments to be made in ' 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 - 3 I DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) lawful money of the United States at the time and in the manner set forth in the Specifications. ' 4.02 As provided in the General Conditions estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and measurements and determinations of actual quantities and classifications are to be made by RJN GROUP, INC. as provided in the General Conditions. 4.03 THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE shall pay BRASFIELD & GORRIE for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents an amount in current funds I equal to the sum of the amounts determined pursuant to paragraphs below: A. For all Work, at the prices stated in BRASFIELD & GORRIE's Bid, attached U hereto as an Exhibit. 4.04 Changes, modifications or amendments in scope, price or fees to this contract shall not be allowed without a formal contract amendment approved by the Mayor and the City Council in advance of the change in scope, costs, fees, or delivery schedule. ARTICLE 5- PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 SUBMITTAL AND PROCESSING OF PAYMENTS: A. BRASFIELD & GORRIE shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS. Applications for Payment will be processed by THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. ' 5.02 PROGRESS PAYMENTS. RETAINAGE: A. THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of BRASFIELD & GORRIE's ' Applications for Payment as recommended by RJN GROUP, INC. on or about the 20`" day of each month during construction. All such payments will be measured by the schedule of values established in the GENERAL CONDITIONS (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of ' 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 -4 . I I DOCUMENT 00500 - AGREEMENT (continued) units completed) or, in the event there is no schedule of values, as provided ' in the General Requirements. 1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as RJN GROUP, INC. shall determine, or THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE may withhold, in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS. a. 90% of Work Completed (with the balance being retainage). If ' Work has been 50% completed as determined by RJN GROUP, INC. and if the character and progress of the Work have been ' satisfactory to THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and RJN GROUP, INC., THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE on ' recommendation of RJN GROUP, INC. may determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work subsequently ' remain satisfactory to them a 5 percent retainage will be withheld on the remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion; and • b. 100% of Equipment and Materials not incorporated in the Work but delivered, suitably stored, and accompanied by documentation satisfactory to THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE ' as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. 2. Upon Substantial Completion, THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to BRASFIELD & GORRIE to 95% of the Contract Price (with the balance being retainage), less such amounts as RJN GROUP, INC. shall determine, or THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE may withhold, in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS. I ' 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 - 5 •t DOCUMENT 00500 - AGREEMENT (continued) 5.03 FINAL PAYMENT: A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS, THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by RJN GROUP, INC. and as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 6- BRASFIELD & GORRIE'S REPRESENTATIONS 6.01 In order to induce THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE to enter into this Agreement, BRASFIELD & GORRIE makes the following representations: A. BRASFIELD & GORRIE has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents including the Addenda and other related data identified in the Bid Documents. B. BRASFIELD & GORRIE has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance, and furnishing of the Work. C. BRASFIELD & GORRIE is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance, and furnishing of the Work. D. BRASFIELD & GORRIE has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site; and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any, at the Site. BRASFIELD & GORRIE acknowledges that THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and RJN GROUP, INC. do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of information and 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 -6 I I Li n I I Li I I P DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site. E. BRASFIELD & GORRIE has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility of having done so) all such additional supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance, and furnishing of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by BRASFIELD & GORRIE and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. F. BRASFIELD & GORRIE does not consider that any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performing and furnishing of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. G. BRASFIELD & GORRIE is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. IH. BRASFIELD & GORRIE has correlated the information known to I I I I BRASFIELD & GORRIE, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. BRASFIELD & GORRIE has given RJN GROUP, INC. written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that BRASFIELD & GORRIE has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by RJN GROUP, INC. is acceptable to BRASFIELD & GORRIE. ' 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 - 7 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) J. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. ARTICLE 7- CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7.01 CONTENTS: A. The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and BRASFIELD & GORRIE concerning ' the Work consist of the following and may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in the GENERAL CONDITIONS: 1. This Agreement. 2. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows): a. Notice to Proceed. b. BRASFIELD & GORRIE's Bid. c. Documentation submitted by BRASFIELD & GORRIE prior to Notice of Award. d. BRASFIELD & GORRIE's Act of Assurance Form. ' 3. Performance, Payment, and other Bonds. ' 4. General Conditions. 5. MBE / WBE Compliance Evaluation Form. 6. Supplementary Conditions. 7. Labor -Related Regulations. ' 8. Specifications consisting of divisions and sections as listed in table of contents of Project Manual. 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 — 8 DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) 9. Drawings consisting of a cover sheet and sheets as listed in the table of contents thereof, with each sheet bearing the following general title: Hamestring Lift Station, WL-6 10. Addenda number one. 11. The following which may be delivered or issued after the Effective • Date of the Agreement and are not attached hereto: All Written Amendments and other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to the GENERAL CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8- MISCELLANEOUS 8.01 TERMS: A. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in the GENERAL CONDITIONS shall have the meanings stated in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. 8.02 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT: A. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by Law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 — 9 I DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) 8.03 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS: A. THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and BRASFIELD & GORRIE each binds I himself, his partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives ' in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 8.04 SEVERABILITY: A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and BRASFIELD & GORRIE, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or I part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision. I 8.05 OTHER PROVISIONS: Not Applicable. 8.06 CONTROLLING LAW A. This Agreement shall be subject to, interpreted and enforced according to the laws of the State of Arkansas without regard to any conflicts of law provisions. I 8.07 ARKANSAS OF INFORMATION ACT A. City contracts and documents, including internal documents and documents of subcontractors and sub -consultants, prepared while performing City t contractual work are subject to the Arkansas Freedom of Information Act (FOIA). If a Freedom of Information Act request is presented to the CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, BRASFIELD & GORRIE will do everything possible to provide the documents in a prompt and timely manner as prescribed in the Arkansas Freedom of Information Act (A.C.A. §25-19-101 et seq.). Only legally authorized photocopying costs pursuant to the FOIA may be assessed for this compliance. ' 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 - 10 ' I DOCUMENT 00500 — AGREEMENT (continued) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and BRASFIELD & GORRIE have signed this Agreement in quadruplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, BRASFIELD & GORRTF and RJN GROUP, INC. All portions of the Contract Documents have beenasi�fck� sr. initialed, or identified by THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and BRASFIiLs3 E GORRIE. This Agreement will be effective on ' - L 2006, which -9 .t Effective Date of the Agreement. ��""111 II II BRASFIELD & Ty: Title: V Y 1 G (SEAL) Attest Address for giving notices S. 9 Sr' /resin €{r vvi. 4-i 35a 33 License No. O y SIO 906 Agent for Service of process (If BRASFIELD & GORRIE is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign.) By: / Title: Mayor (SEAL) Attest Address for giving notices (If Owner is a public body, attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution or other documents authorizing execution of Agreement) Approved As to Form //l r By: Attorney For: City of Fayetteville END OF DOCUMENT 00500 00500 - Agreement-BidderBrasfield & Gorrie.doc00500 — 11 �•'G\TY 01c'.• f ;FAYETTEVILLE: . .4. .. I.1 DOCUMENT 00550 - NOTICE TO PROCEED TO: (Contractor) Project Name: Contract Name: Contract No: RLF Project No.: Owner: Wastewater System Improvement Project Hamestring Lift Station WL-6 CS -0500808-03 City of Fayetteville, Arkansas You are notified that the Contract Time(s) under the above 20. By that under the Contract Documents. In accordance w g date(s) of Substantial Completion and final cgpletion Oki Before you may start any work r�rl deliver to the other, (with copies to , insurance, which each is required to Also before you may 00550 -Notice to Proceed 1 11111 on your obligations and Contractor, the are __, 20__, respectively. ittehs provide that you and Owner must each ILP ified additional insureds) certificates of in accordance with the Contract Documents. jt'tV4 Ofhe Sitar; you must submit the following: iili rr 011structi I �rogress schedule. thedule of Submittals. s Oule of values. evidence of insurance in accordance with the requirements of the General Insurance agent shall be licensed through the State Insurance Department. 00550- 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 DOCUMENT 00550 - NOTICE TO PROCEED (continued) You are required to return an acknowledgement copy of this Notice to Proceed to the Owner. Dated this day of ,20__ OWNER ACCE Certifi (Use Retun 00550 -Notice to Proceed 00550-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 L A.1 odd• Sri-/oi O2fl—f3C-M L L I Ti Ti I H I I L I L 11 I I 1J 11 DOCUMENT 00610 - PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC 729 South 30th Street Birmingham, AL 35233 as Principal, hereinafter called Contractor, and Federal Insurance Company AND Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America IS Mountain View Road One Tower Square 5PB Warren, NJ 07060 Hartford, CT 06183 as Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Fayetteville, Arkansas 113 West Mountain Street Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701 Six Million One Hundred Thirty Thousand as Obligee, hereinafter called Owner, in the amount of and No/100------------- Dollars ($ 6,130,000.00 J, for the payment whereof Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Contractor has by written Agreement dated 20 01, entered into a contract with Owner for construction of Hamestring Lift Station, Contract WL-6, which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. Whenever Contractor shall be, and declared by Owner to be in default under the Contract, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations, thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: I00610 -Performance Bond 00610-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I LI I I I I I I I I I I IJ C I 1J E DOCUMENT 00610 - PERFORMANCE BOND (continued) A. Complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, or B. Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, and upon determination by Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, or, if the Owner elects, upon determination by the Owner and the Surety jointly of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available as Work progresses (even though there should be a default or a succession of defaults under the contract or contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph) sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the Contract Price; but not exceeding, including other costs and damages for which the Surety may be liable hereunder, the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Contract and any amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. Any suit under this Bond must be instituted before the expiration of two years from the date on which final payment under the Contract falls due. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators, or succes Signed and sealed this _!.p r •� day of Ja 12044. CONTRACTOR C.a 00610 -Performance Bond 00610-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Li ' DOCUMENT 00610 - PERFORMANCE BOND (continued) I I I I Attorney -in -Fact's authority from Surety) IAND I I 1J I I SURETY Federal Insurance Company SURETY and Attorney -In -Fact An COUNTERSIGNED: Resident Agent State of Arkansas Matthew K. Cashion, Jr. By Licensed Resident Agent (CORPORATE SEAL) COUNTERSIGNED: Resident Agent State of Arkansas of America Matthew K. Cashion, Jr. B c k �L Licensed Resident Agent (This Bond shall be accompanied with Attorney -in -Fact's authority from Surety) '(Co -Sureties 50/50) (CORPORATE SEAL) Appr d as to Fo Attorney for A/ ewe ✓i f 4 END OF DOCUMENT 00610 ' 00610 -Performance Bond 00610-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 . i ,&<,yt�6- Sf3- /o 09�7P6 - /SCI.1 ' DOCUMENT 00611- LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND This Bond is issued simultaneously with Performance Bond in favor of Owner conditioned on the full and faithful performance of the Contract. 1 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that IBrasfield & Gorrie, LLC ' 729 South 30th Street Birmingham, AL 35233 as Principal, hereinafter called Contractor, and Federal Insurance Company AND Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America 15 Mountain View Road One Tower Square 5PB Warren, NJ 07060 Hartford, CT 06183 ' as Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Fayetteville, Arkansas 113 West Mountain Street ' Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701 as Obligee, hereinafter called Owner, for the use and benefit of claimants as herein below defined, in the amount of Six Million One Hundred Thirty Thousand and No/100 --------------------------------- Dollars (S 6,130,000.00 ), for the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, ' executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. ' WHEREAS, Contractor has by written Agreement dated , 20_, entered into a contract with Owner for construction of Fayetteville Wastewater System Improvement Project , Hamestring Lift ' Station, WL-6, which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract. ' NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if Contractor shall promptly make payment to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and material used or 00611 -Labor and Material Payment Bond 00611-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 L DOCUMENT 00611- LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND (continued) reasonably required for use in the performance of the Contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect, subject, however, to the following conditions: ' A. A claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a Subcontractor of the Contractor for labor, material, or both, used or reasonably required for 'use in the performance of the Contract, labor and material being construed to include that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or rental of equipment ' directly applicable to the Contract. B. The above -named Contractor and Surety hereby jointly and severally agree with the Owner ' that every claimant as herein defined, who has not been paid in full before the expiration of a period of 90 days after the date on which the last of such claimant's work or labor was done ' or performed, or materials were furnished by such claimant, may sue on this Bond for the use of such claimant, prosecute the suit to final judgment for such sum or sums as may be justly due claimant, and have execution thereon. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any such suit. C. No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder by any claimant: I. Unless claimant other than one having a direct contract with Principal, shall have given written notice to any two of the following: the Contractor, the Owner, or the ' Surety within 90 days after such claimant did or performed the last of the work or labor, or furnished the last of the materials for which said claim is made, stating with ' substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished, or for whom the work or labor was done or performed. ' Such notice shall be served by mailing the same by registered mail or certified mail, postage prepaid, in an envelope addressed to Contractor, Owner or Surety, at any tplace where an office is regularly maintained for the transaction of business, or served in any manner in which legal process may be served in the state in which the t aforesaid Project is located, save that such service need not be made by a public officer. ' 2. After the expiration of one year following the date on which Contractor ceased Work on the Contract, it being understood, however, that if any limitation embodied in this 00611 -Labor and Material Payment Bond 00611 -2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I I H I L I I 'I I L I I I H I DOCUMENT 00611- LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND (continued) Bond is prohibited by any Law controlling the construction hereof, such limitation shall be deemed to be amended so as to be equal to the minimum period of limitation permitted by such Law. 3. Other than in a state court of competent jurisdiction in and for the county or other political subdivision of the state in which the Project, or any part thereof, is situated, or in the United States District Court for the district in which the Project, or any part thereof, is situated, and not elsewhere. D. The amount of this Bond shall be reduced by and to the extent of any payment or payments made in good faith hereunder, inclusive of the payment by Surety of mechanics' liens which may be filed of record against said improvement, whether or not claim for the amount of such lien be presented under and against this Bond. Signed and sealed this I 14L day of J _\ 201k. CONTRACTOR SURETY (CORPORA COUNTERSIGNED: Resident Agent State of Arkansas U. Ike�11� 1 /1 �' I. r ' 00611 -Labor and Material Payment Bond 00611-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I ' DOCUMENT 00611- LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND (continued) ATTORNEY -IN -FACT (CORPORATE SEAL) (This Bon c accompanied with Attorney -in -Fact's authority from Surety) ' AND 1 I. 1 I (Co -Sureties 50/50) 1 SURETY Attomey-in-Fact's authority from Surety) COUNTERSIGNED: Resident Agent State of Arkansas Matthew K. Cashion, Jr. By licensed Resident Agent Apiovdp4o Attorney for • END OF DOCUMENT 00611 00611 -Labor and Material Payment Bond 00611 -4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 L Li n I I I El] Chubb POWER Federal Insurance Company Attn: Surety Department OF Vigilant Insurance Company 15 Mountain View Road Surety ATTORNEY pacific Indemnity Company Warren, NJ 07059 ow Know AM by it Presets, That FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, an Indiana mrpor-Ii.-,, VIGILANT AIIImANCE COMPANY. a Naw Yak oopaetbn, and PACIFIC wEJNrry COMPANY, a VVkcandn ow1aauon, do each hereby candiihb and appokd Earl O. Ridolphi, Jr., Suzi Philpot, Roland Hines, Mary Pannell, Sheryl Cooper, Charles E. Carper, IV and Shelby S. Tumbough of Birmingham, Alabama, Jane Huddleston, Douglas K. Amon, Sr., Joan N. Miller and Walter C. Dowdy of Montgomery, Alabama each as Mek true and tadd Aianey In. Fax b geode under such "-4.u&. In Iek runs and b dbn Mek .vnImeek b and deliver for and an ewer bSiolf ar Surely ewreah ae dterwle.. balls and un 11gs and aeiw wden¢ oor'gdory b the hebae aareol (die to bad bads) gWen a emended b to cocas d bwbess. and ay kalnereres anaMng a alrip Se sane, and cares I b the ,caked ...& e-ratlon deny Irobumax referred to in sold bonds a abrgabae. STATE OF NEW JERSEY Coway ciSomersd ' on Mk 18th day d November, 2005 sore me, a Nday Pubic S New Jersey, parsaSSy came Kandh C. Wanda, b me biohwh b be Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGLANT IISURA EE COMPANY, all PACIFIC INDBi1 ITY COMPANY, the companies wbioh aedAed the laregoing PAAwa S ACanwy, and the sold Kasialb C. Wendel, being by me duly an. rid depose and hey Mal he Is Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL ' INSURANCE COMPANY, VKRLAIT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACJRC INDERInY COMPANY all Si01r. the corporate seals Owed, that the seas II "I q ' to his bmgokg eo Power S Anay are such corporate seats and were there egad by artwr*y of the 0r La's load a.' q— at the to dgrwJ said Nbwer of Attorney as —_Secretary of Odd C..i.r Fes by No edhaty; and Met he U --rained win T. W. Cavanagh, and brows hkn b be Vice Presiderd Staid Comp...—; and the the uigi can d T. W. Cahahaugh, slanted b said Pons of Atbney k in the gamine hadamrg ST. W. Cavermag i, and was Mario subsated by adhorty of said By- Loas and In deponents Aeaaee. L L LI I I I I I L 'i�thiY ' rl PISg��� KANN A. EDER NSEry PiMiic, Stale of New JWW No.2231641 Commission Eap roe Oct. 28, 20t1� CERTIFICATION Fidrad Man the By- Lana it FEDERAL INSIAUNCE AANY. VIGLANT INS(RtANCE CO PANY, and PACrC INDEIt4RY COMPANY: 'Al Rowse d Stoney hr mid an helmet d the Gsrpa y may all eSI be emeoiAed b the ,...e ad on hhrinea 5th. Canpaiy, thy the gwimah a the Preddai or a Via RerJdal a an Assistant Vas Predda t, Jokny with the Secretary a an Aatident Seeday, uda Itek respect" de Soria. The sigrwbre d such Slicers maybe engraved, prMed or Mlweagwd. The sigmmn el coda d the IodoSrg dibera: C airman, Preddad, any Vin President. any AWdaa Vloe Ratdmm, try Secretory. any Aaktant Secretary and the sea ate Comps y may be albed by tacairdb b try Rover d Si. Kney or any _UP.= -le "l-Ceg tbweb appokhbrg Ass stad seaekrks aAborreys- In- Fad for purposes only of eaabg and fleeting bands end uaerklurgs and new writings any in the rely" meted, and any such power of aboma y a aspk�e hand such ramie siwimse a beaknre seal stud be veld aid bidig upon the Company and any such power so executed and cetbfud by such Nemec dgndure ad • -L. Ms seal slap be valid ad drdhg upon the Company wflh moped b any bad a udabidrg b which M Isalbcled.' I. Kemisei C. Wends. A—LOad Secretary of FEDERAL ISURAIA$ COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY. ad PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY ml tams do hmahy certfy That 0) thetaegah awed dthe By- LeasdOleCarpsalm ktue cadawed, (IA the Carpaibs are duly licensed ad aMwraad In La®d surety bseiaro in all 50 ate United States 01Ahedca and the atht,eed by the U.S. Treasury Depahat jute, Fedad and Vigilad as lteaed in Puerb Rim and the U.S. Vkpin kb In American Samoa, Ouam, and each dthe P"rkices ofCanada ecep Ponce Edward slam; and (-d) the broquing Powerd Aloney k late, caned ad in IuA Lace aid Sled. Given under my had and sad. d said Companies d Warren, NJ this • IN THE EVENT YOU WISH TO NOTIFY US OF A CLAIM, VERIFY THE AUTHENTICITY OF THIS BOND OR NOTIFY US OF ANY OTHER MATTER, PLEASE CONTACT US AT ADDRESS LISTED ABOVE, OR BY Telephone (9061901- 3493 Fmc (908) 903-3856 earar: areNiMohuhb.com L STPAUL POWER OF ATTORNEY TRAVELERS Farmington Casualty Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Seaboard Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Attorney -In Fact No. 216348 Certificate No. O O O 4 2 213 4 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York, that St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota, that Farmington Casualty Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company. and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut, that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the 'Companies"), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint i Roland Hines, Earl D. Ridolphi, Jr., Mary Pannell, Suzi Philpot, Sheryl Cooper, Charles E. Carper, IV, Douglas K. Amara, Jane Huddleston, Joan N. Miller, Walter C. Dowdy, and Shelby Tumbough of the City of Birmingham . State of Alaham l , their true and lawful Avomey(s)-in-Fact. each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds. recognizances. conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in thcir_business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons. guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or peel in an 1ciionn�yrsproceedings allowed by law. i IN WITNESS 1YHEREOF;.ttirCompanies have caused this in day ofstrument to be cigned� rid their cor6pom[e seals to be hereto affixed, this I I th 2006 d- y ,:Y, �il lx r` yFai•mington Casualty Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company Ejdelity and Guarantytlnsurance Company, O St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company } ---. '" . 9delity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters. Inc. T -avelers Casualty and Surety Company J Pss>' Seaboard Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America SL Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Ux6Un $WrrY �{\!E \xY IXS \ :xduq xJx IyU p ? a ! •r P:' •• :'d • J ,-Y 6 O ��Mu,tY r z OI tv0 Yi COP\RRXl�,p • { 0 1983 0 T92% u: — EA ;o a/AIF0Pa, rnRirCiq S :!` • Ce Issi s • dy` .r o. ��SEALo} ko�aSBAL:'z ° 6 F c s........ P 'd '. •e 2 E e.•.., a �Q a cN a � )>� ernlW d.\xc� !S. AYY +r' �' "P . dt]! tN1X` State of Connecticut By: City of Hartford ss. G rge W ompson. Sea' r \'ic President On this the I Ith day of May 2006 before me personally appeared George W. Thompson. who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company. Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters. Inc., Seaboard Surety Company. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company. and that he, as such, being authorized so to do. executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. fly In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. * R' My Commission expires the 30th day of June. 2006. C . jZ* Marie C. Tetre ult. Notary Public 58440-9-05 Printed in U.S.A. WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company, Fideliny and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters. Inc.. Seaboard Surety Company. Si, Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company. St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company. St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America. and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company. which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows: RESOLVED. that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, am• Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President. any Vice President. any Second Vice President. the Treasurer. any Assistant Treasurer. the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents to act for and ion behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds. recognizances. contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond. recognizance. or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her: and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President. any Vice Chairman. any Executive Vice President. any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may �r delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED. that any bond, recognizance. contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond. recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company wher la) signed by the President. any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President. any Second Vice President. the Treasurer. any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seat by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary: or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority: and it is FURTHER RESOLVED. that the signarure of each of the following officers: President, any Executive Vice President. any Senior Vice President. any Vice President. any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents. Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. 1. Kori M. Johanson. the undersigned. Assistant Secretary.'of Farmington Casualty Company. Fidelity.and Guaranty Insurance Company. Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., Seaboard Surety Company. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, SI. Paul Guardian Insurance Company. St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company. Travelers Casually and Surety Company, Travelers Casually and SuretyrCompany of :America.rand United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this -X\ da. y of _ .20 yv• Kori M. Johann Assistant Secretary; --' � pe5Uf� ` Sri,,. USX a 0 I , 'flit �or�ir nxo� rf �0.1r y 6 n s 1983 o i �9n% r�x v1e°,— rtm i coR �reln i.; '!Hy4lr0fq �F 44 Yfe�LF 95� N4�, ♦ �- •,, o ��.SEAL,IoI %*..SBiiLie " CWN o 36'4 Dam ; m ✓i96 ' To venfy the authenticity of this Power of Attorney. call 1-800-421.3880 or contact us at www.stpauttravelersbond.com. Please refer to the Attorney -In -Fact number, the above -named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. e I I E OF II Ii I A. . Wherever used in these General Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the ' following terms have the meanings indicated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof: 1. "Addenda" - written or graphic changes or interpretations of the Contract U Documents approved by Owner and issued by Engineer prior to the opening of Bids. 2. "Agreement" - the written agreement between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the I Agreement and made apart thereof as provided therein: 3. "Application for Payment" - the form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress and final ' payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. "Asbestos" - any material that contains more than 1% asbestos and is friable or is I. releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 5. "Bid" - the formal offer of the Bidder submitted on the prescribed Bid Form ' together with the required Bid security and -all information submitted with the Bid that pertains to performance of the Work. 6. "Bidder" - any person, firm, or corporation submitting a Bid for the Work or their t duly authorized representatives. 7. "Change Order" - a written document approved by Owner authorizing an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after execution of the Agreement. IS. "Contract Drawings" - drawings and other data designated as Contract Drawings prepared by Engineer for this Contract which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and are referred to in the Contract Documents. 9. "Contract Price" - the total monies payable to Contractor under the Contract - Documents as stated in the Agreement. 10. "Contract Times the number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: ' (i) achieve Substantial Completion; and (ii) complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineer's written recommendations of final payment. 11. "Contractor" - the person, firm or corporation with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement. SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1- DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1.02 A. The Contract Documents establish the rights and obligations of the parties and shall consist of the documents listed in Document 00500, Agreement. B. Reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions and approved Submittals by Contractor are not Contract Documents. C. Only printed or hard copies of items listed in Agreement are Contract Documents. Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, and the like that may be furnished by Owner to Contractor are not Contract Documents. 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - I SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) I 12. "Date of Contract", "Effective Date of the Agreement" - the date indicated in the Agreement -on -which -it -becomes -effective, -but -if no such -date -is -indicated it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 13. "Engineer" or "Engineer -Architect" - Architect, engineer, or other licensed professional who is either employed by or has contracted with Owner to serve in a design capacity and whose consultants, members, partners, employees, or agents have prepared and sealed the Drawings and Specifications. 14. "Engineer's Consultant" -.an individual or entity having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project. 15. "Equipment" - a product with operational or nonoperational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping. 16. "Field Order" - a written order issued by Engineer which orders minor changes in the Work in accordance with Paragraph 9.05 but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 17. "General Requirements" - Sections of DIVISION 1 of the Specifications. The General Requirements pertain to all sections of the Specifications. 18. "Hazardous Waste" - the term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided • in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as • amended from time to time. 19. "Law" - law of the place of the Project which shall govern the performance • hereunder. I 20. "Laws and Regulations," "Laws or Regulations" - laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and/or orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. - 21. "Lien" - charges, security interests, or encumbrances on Project funds, real property, or personal property. 22. "Materials" - products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined, or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. 23. "Notice of Award" - the written notice by Owner to the apparent successful Bidder stating that upon compliance by the apparent successful Bidder with the conditions precedent enumerated therein, within the time specified, Owner will • sign and deliver the Agreement. 24. "Notice to Proceed".- the written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform Contractor's obligation under the Contract Documents. 25. "Owner" - the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas, a constitutionally chartered municipal corporation, with which the Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be provided. 26. "Partial Utilization" - placing a portion of the Work in service for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose). before reaching Substantial Completion of all the Work. 27. "PCBs" - Polychlorinated biphenyls. 28. "Petroleum" - petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60o Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non -Hazardous Wastes ' and crude oils. 00700 -General Conditions -00700 - 2 t ' SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) 29. "Project" - the total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part as indicated elsewhere in the ' Contract Documents. 30. "Project Manual" - The bound documentary information prepared for bidding I. and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in Sc or more.volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents. 31. "Radioactive Material" - source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended 1 from time to time. 32. "Resident Project Representative" - the authorized representative of Engineer who is assigned to the construction Site or any part thereof. I. 33. "Reference Drawings" - drawings not specifically prepared for, nor a part of, this Contract, but which contain information pertinent, to the Work. 34. "Samples" - physical examples of Equipment, Materials, or workmanship that are t representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 35. "Shop Drawings" - all drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other I. data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 36. "Site" - lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed,, including rights -of -way and ' easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. 37. "Specifications" - those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written t technical descriptions of the Work, and covering the Equipment, Materials, workmanship, and certain administrative details applicable thereto. 38. "Subcontractor" - an individual, firm, or corporation having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 39. "Submittals" - all Shop Drawings, product data, and Samples which are prepared ' by Contractor, a Subcontractor, manufacturer, or Supplier, and submitted by Contractor to Engineer as a basis for approval by Engineer of the use of Equipment and Materials proposed for incorporation in the Work or needed to describe proper installation, operation and maintenance, or technical properties. I. 40. "Substantial Completion" - the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer as evidenced by his definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance ' with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be used for the purposes for which it was intended. 41. "Supplementary Conditions" part of the Contract Documents which, if present, 1 amends and/or supplements these General Conditions. 42. "Supplier" - a manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man, or vendor. 43. "Underground Facilities" - all pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which havebeen installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid ' petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal, traffic or other control systems, or water. 44. "Unit Price Work" - Work to be paid on the basis of Unit Prices. 1 ' 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 3 tr SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) 45. "Work" - the entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work is the result of performing services, the furnishing of Bonds and insurance, furnishing labor, and furnishing and incorporating Materials and Equipment into the construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 46. "Work Change Directive" - a written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the effective Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision'in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed as provided in Article 4 or to emergencies under Paragraph 6.13. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times' as provided in Paragraph 10.018. 47. "Written Amendment" - a written amendment to the Contract Documents, signed by Owner and Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement, and normally dealing with the nonengineering or nontechnical rather than strictly Work -related aspects of the Contract Documents. 48. "Year 2000 Compliance" or "Year 2000 Compliant" — means that equipment, devices, items, systems, software, hardware, and firmware included in the Work or used to produce the Work shall properly, appropriately, and consistently function and accurately process date and time data (including without limitation: calculating, comparing, and sequencing) on and.after December 31, 1999, including leap year calculations. 1.03 TERMINOLOGY: A. Whenever used in these General Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the following terminology shall have the intent and meaning specified below: 1. The terms "responsible" or "responsibility" mean that the party to which the term applies shall assume all responsibilities thereto. 2. The term "approve", when used in response to Submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by Contractor, will be held to limitations of Engineer's responsibilities and duties or specified in these General Conditions. In no case will "approval" by Engineer or Owner be interpreted as a release of Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of Contract Documents. 3. When applied to Equipment and Materials, the words "furnish", "install", and "provide" shall mean the following: a. The word "provide" shall mean to furnish, pay for, deliver, assemble, install, adjust, clean and otherwise make Materials and Equipment fit for their intended use. b. The word "furnish" shall mean to secure, pay for, deliver to Site, unload and uncrate Equipment and Materials. - c. The word "install" shall mean to assemble, place in position, incorporate in the Work, adjust, clean, and make fit for use. d. The phrase "furnish and install" shall be equivalent to the word "provide." 4. The word "day" shall constitute a calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. 007002General Conditions 00700 - 4 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL (continued) ARTICLE 2- PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 DELIVERY OF BONDS: A. When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such Bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish in accordance with Paragraph 5.01. 2.02 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS: 2.03 i t- ' 2.05 I. 1 A. Owner will furnish to Contractor copies of the Contract Documents as stated in the General Requirements. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIMES; NOTICE TO PROCEED: A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the 105th day after the day of Bid opening or the 30th day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier. STARTING THE PROJECT: A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run, but no Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION: A. Before starting construction and undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any Work affected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. B. Within twenty days after the Effective Date of the Agreement, Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review: 1. A mobilization construction progress schedule indicating the starting and completion dates of the various stages of the first 120 days of the Work. 2. A preliminary schedule of Submittal submissions. 3. A preliminary schedule of values for all of the Work which will include quantities and prices' of items aggregating the Contract Price and will subdivide the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during construction. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work which will be confirmed in writing by Contractor at the time of submission. I' 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 5 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) C. Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor shall deliver to Owner, certificates and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Paragraph 5.02 (and Owner shall deliver to Contractor certificates and other evidence of insurance requested by Contractor which Owner is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Paragraph 5.02). 2.06 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE: A. Within 20 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement; but before Contractor starts the Work at the Site, a conference attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05B, to discuss procedures for handling Submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work. 2.07 FINALIZING SCHEDULES: A. The construction schedule of major tasks and milestones shall be finalized prior to beginning of Work. The finalized construction progress schedule will be acceptable to Owner if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times, but such acceptance will neither impose on Owner responsibility for the progress or scheduling of the Work nor relieve Contractor from full responsibility therefor. The finalized schedule of Submittal submissions will be acceptable to Owner if it provides a workable arrangement for processing the submissions. The finalized schedule of values will be acceptable to Owner as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to components of the Work. ARTICLE 3- CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 INTENT: A. The Contract Documents comprise the entire agreement between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. The Contract Documents will be construed in accordance with the Law of the place of the Project. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, Materials, or Equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents as being required to produce the intended result will be supplied whether or not specifically called for, at no additional cost to Owner. 1. When words which have a well-known technical or trade meaning are used to describe Work, Materials, or Equipment, such words shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. - 2. Reference to standard specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to the Laws or Regulations of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual, or code (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents) shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 6 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their consultants, agents, or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to Engineer, or any of Engineer's consultants, agents or employees, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any ' duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of the Contract Documents. • 3. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by ' Engineer as provided in Paragraph 9.04. C. If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor finds a conflict, error, or, discrepancy • in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall so report to Engineer and Owner in writing ' at once and before proceeding with the Work affected thereby shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer; however, Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, or discrepancy in the Contract ' Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. ' D. Applicable codes and standards referenced in these Contract Documents establish minimum requirements for Equipment, Materials, and Work and are superseded by more stringent requirements of Contract Documents when and where they occur. E. The Specifications are separated into Divisions and Sections for convenience in defining the Work. Contract Drawings are separated according to engineering disciplines and other classifications. This sectionalizing and the arrangement of Contract Drawings shall not ' control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. ' 3.02 AMENDING AND SUPPLEMENTING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the following ways: 1. A formal Written Amendment. I. 2. A Change Order (pursuant to Paragraph 10.01D). B. As indicated in Paragraphs 11.01E and 12.01A, Contract Price and Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order or Written Amendment. ' C. In addition, the requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, in the following way: 1. A Field Order (pursuant to Paragraph 9.05). ' 2. Engineer's written interpretation or clarification (pursuant to Paragraph 9.04). 3.03 OWNERSHIP AND REUSE OF DOCUMENTS: ' A. All Contract Documents and copies thereof furnished by Engineer shall be the property of the Owner. ' B. Neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor or Supplier or other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Owner ' shall have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the 1 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 7 I SECTION 00700.- GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) ' seal of Engineer; and they shall not reuse any of the documents on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer. ARTICLE 4 -AVAILABILITY OF LANDS: PHYSICAL CONDTTIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS: A. Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the , Work is to be performed, rights -of -way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated forthe use of Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by Owner, unless • otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. B. If Contractor believes that any delay in Owner's furnishing these lands, rights -of -way, or ' easements entitles Contractor to an extension of the Contract Times, Contractor may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 12. C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required , for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. D. Contractor shall confine his operations to the construction limits indicated. E. Easements and side letters are attached to these specifications and all conditions set forth are binding upon the Contractor. ' 4.02 UNFORESEEN SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS: A. Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions encountered at the Site which differ materially from those specified or indicated, or which could be reasonably interpreted'from examination of the Site and available subsurface information at the time of bidding. B. Engineer will promptly investigate those conditions and advise Owner if further surveys or subsurface tests are necessary. Promptly thereafter, Engineer will obtain the necessary additional surveys and tests and furnish copies of results to Contractor, and Owner. C. If Engineer fords that the subsurface or latent physical conditions encountered at the Site differ materially from those specified or indicated, or which could have been reasonably interpreted from examination of the Site and available subsurface information at the time of bidding, then a Change Order will be issued by the Owner incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.03 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS- UNDERGROUND FACILITIES: A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided: 1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and, ' 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 8 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) 2. Contractor shall have full responsibility for reviewing and checking all such information and data, for locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, for coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, for the safety and protection thereof as provided in Paragraph 6.12 and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work; the, cost of all of which will be considered as having been included in the Contract Price. B. Not Shown or Indicated: If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and which Contractor could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before performing any Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as permitted by Paragraph 6.13), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice thereof to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility to determine the extent to which the Contract Documents should be modified to reflect and document the consequences of the existence of the Underground Facility, and the Contract Documents will be amended or supplemented to the extent necessary. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility as provided in Paragraph 6:12. Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and which Contractor could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of,. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or length thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. 4.04 4.05 A. Engineer will provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work_ Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), shall protect and preserve the established reference points, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires.relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel. Contractor shall be responsible for any mistakes or loss of time that may result from their loss or disturbance. B. Contractor shall make such surveys as are required for establishing pay limits and determining quantities for progress pay estimates. He shall furnish Engineer with one copy each of all field notes of such surveys. ASBESTOS; PCBS, PETROLEUM HAZARDOUS WASTE. OR RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL: A. Owner shall be responsible for any Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work and which may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work at the Site. Owner shall not be responsible 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 9 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) for any such materials brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractor, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible. B. Contractor shall immediately: (i) stop all Work in connection with such hazardous condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6:13), and (ii) notify Owner and Engineer (and thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such hazardous condition or take corrective action, if any. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such hazardous condition or in any such affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to Contractor special written notice: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or the amount or extent of an adjustment, if any, in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed by Contractor to be resumed, either party may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. C. If after receipt of such special written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order such portion of the Work that is in connection with such hazardous condition or in such affected area to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or the amount or extent of an adjustment, if any, in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 7. D. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, other consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or resulting from such hazardous condition, provided that: (i) any such claim, cost, loss or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) nothing in this subparagraph 4.05D shall obligate Owner to indemnify any person or entity from and against the consequences of that person's or entity's own negligence. E. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, other consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such hazardous condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this subparagraph 4.05E shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any person or entity from and against the consequences of that person's or entity's own negligence. F. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02 and 4.03 are not intended to apply to Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material uncovered or revealed at the Site. 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 10 , SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) ARTICLE 5- BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 PERFORMANCE AND OTHER BONDS: A. Contractor shall furnish separate performance, payment, and maintenance Bonds, each in ' an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance, payment' of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents, and maintenance. These Bonds shall remain in effect at least until one year (Maintenance Bond for two ' years) after the date when final payment is approved by Owner, except as otherwise provided by Law or Regulation or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also • furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. All Bonds shall be ' in the forms prescribed by Law or Regulation or by the Contract Documents and be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding • Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable 'J Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds • shall be signed by an Arkansas Agent. ' B. The Bonds shall be automatically increased in amount and extended in time without formal and separate amendments to cover full and faithful performance of the Contract in the event of Change Orders, regardless of the amount of time or money involved. It is 'Contractor's responsibility to notify his surety of any changes affecting the general scope of the Work or change in the Contract Price or Contract Times. ' C. Bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of the authority to act. D. Date of Bonds shall be the same as the Effective Date of the Agreement. E. If at any time during the continuance of the Contract, the surety on any Bond becomes unacceptable to Owner for financial reasons, Owner has the right to require additional and sufficient sureties which Contractor shall furnish to the satisfaction of Owner within ' ten days after notice to do so. 1.. If the surety on any Bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any I. part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.01A, Contractor shall within five days thereafter substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. ' 5.02 INSURANCE: A.' Contractor's Liability Insurance: 1. Contractor and all of his subcontractors shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being furnished and performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of ' or result from Contractor's furnishing and performance of the Work and Contractor'. s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or ' indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: a. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; ' 00700 -General Conditions 00700-11 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) b. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; c. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness; or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; d. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained: (i) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or (ii) by any other person for any other reason; e. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or • destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use therefrom; f. Claims arising out of operation of Laws or Regulations for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or for damage to property; and g. Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. 2. The insurance required by this paragraph shall include the specific coverages, and be written for not less than the limits of liability specified or required by Law, whichever is greater. a. Umbrella General Liability $5,000,000 b. Workers' compensation Statutory (State and Federal Limits) Employer's Liability $500,000 each accident c. Commercial General Liability 1) General Aggregate $2,000,000 2) Products -Completed Operations Aggregate $2,000,000 3) Personal & Advertising Injury Limit $1,000,000 4) Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000 5) Fire Damage Limit $ 100,000 6) Medical Expense Limit $ 5,000 d. Business Automobile Liability 1) Any one loss or accident $1,000,000 B. The policies of insurance so required by paragraph .5.02A to be purchased and maintained shall: 1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.02A.1.c through 5.02A. 1.g inclusive, include as:additional insureds by endorsement (subject to customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Owner, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby; 2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability. specified in Paragraph 5.02A.2 or required by Laws and Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. with respect to insurance required by paragraphs 5.02A1.c through 5.02A1.g inclusive, include premises/operations, products, completed operations, independent contractors, and personal injury insurance, with employment exclusion deleted; 4. include in the Commercial General Liability policy, contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.06, 00700 -General Conditions 00700- 12 I SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) 6.10, and 6.16, and written for not less than the limits of liability and coverages ' specified above; 5. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be cancelled, materially changed, or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior ' written notice by certified mail has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured to whom.a certificate of insurance has been issued; 6. provide Broad Form Property Damage coverage and contain no exclusion (commonly referred to as XC&U exclusion) relative to blasting, earthquake, flood, explosion, collapse of buildings, or damage to underground property; 7. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in ' accordance with Paragraph 13.07; 8. with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims -made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after final ' payment and Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other specified additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter; ,, 9. . include Independent Contractors Protective Liability coverage; and 10. with respect to the Commercial General Liability policy, the maximum deductible allowed shall be $5, 000. 11. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, ' arising out of, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies required by Paragraph 5.02A and any other liability insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against ' Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants, and all other individuals or entities endorsed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and I. any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. As required by Paragraph 6.05D, each subcontract between Contractor and a Subcontractor shall contain similar waiver provisions by the Subcontractor in favor of Owner, Contractor, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants, and all other parties endorsed as t insureds or additional insureds. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any of the insured parties may have to proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. C. Property Insurance: 1. Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the t Site in the amount of the full insurable value thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as follows) or as required by Laws or Regulations. This insurance shall: a. be on the completed value form and include the interests of Owner, 'Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agent, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured; ' b. be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and Equipment ' and Materials, and shall insure against at least the following perils or I00700 -General Conditions 00700-13 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, terrorism, and such other perils (as flood, earthquake, explosions, collapse, underground hazard) or causes of loss as may be specifically required in the Contract Documents; c. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other_ professionals); d. cover Equipment and Materials stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such Equipment and Materials have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Owner; e. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner; f. include testing and startup; g. be maintained in effect until final payment (or the Owner assumes beneficial occupancy and agrees to provide insurance coverage for the facilities so occupied) is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days' written notice to each other insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued; and have a deductible amount of $ 10,000. 2. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance or additional property insurance as required by Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants in the Work, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as insured or additional insured parties. 3. All policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with Paragraph 5.02D will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be cancelled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior notice by certified mail has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with Paragraph 5.02F below. 4. Copies of the policies shall be furnished for property insurance. Certificates will not be acceptable. D. Transit Insurance: 1. Transit. insurance shall be furnished by Contractor to protect Contractor and Owner from all risks of physical loss or damage to Equipment and Materials, DOCUMENT 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS: (continued) 00700 -General Conditions.doc 00700 -16 042204 not otherwise covered under other policies, during transit from point of origin to the Site of installation or erection. 2. This insurance shall be written on an "All Risk" basis with additional coverages applicable to the circumstances that may occur in the particular Work included in this Contact: 3. This insurance shall be in an amount not less than 100% of the manufactured or fabricated value of items exposed to risk in transit at any one time. 4. This insurance shall contain a waiver of rights of subrogation the insurer may have or acquire against Owner or Engineer. 00700 -General Conditions 00700- 14 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) I I II I II I I E. Waiver of Rights: 1. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.02D will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants, and other individuals or entities endorsed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other. consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insureds or additional insureds thereunder; and if the insurers require separate waiver forms to be signed by Engineer or Engineer's Consultants, Owner will obtain the same, and if such waiver forms are required of any Subcontractor, Contractor shall obtain the same. 2. . Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies required by Paragraph 5.02D and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants, and all other individuals or entities endorsed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, • partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and • any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. As required by Paragraph 6.05D, each subcontract between Contractor and a Subcontractor shall contain similar waiver provisions by the Subcontractor in favor of Owner, • Contractor, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants, and all other parties endorsed as insureds or additional insureds. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any of the insured parties may have to proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. F. Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds: 1. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.02D will be adjusted with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Paragraph 5.02G.2. Owner shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied to account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. 2. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to Owner's exercise of this power. If such objection is made, Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest, Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties upon the occurrence of an insured loss. G. Acceptance of Insurance: I 00700 -General Conditions 00700- 15 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) 1. If Owner has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the insurance required to be purchased and maintained by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.02 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, Owner shall so notify Contractor in writing thereof within 10 days of the date of delivery of such certificates and other evidence of insurance to Owner required by Paragraph 2.05C. 2. Owner and Contractor shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the other may reasonably request If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the insurance required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent insurance to protect such other party's interests at the expense of the party who was required to • provide such coverage;and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract • Price accordingly. H. Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer: 1. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.06, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 5.02D have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be cancelled or lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. ARTICLE 6- CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.01 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE: A. Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work, but Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or selection of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is indicated in and required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the finished Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. B. Contractor shall keep on the Work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. C. When manufacturer's field services in connection with the erection, installation, start-up, or testing of Equipment furnished under this Contract, or instruction of Owner's personnel thereon are specified, Contractor shall keep on the Work, during its progress or as specified, competent manufacturer's field representatives and any necessary assistants. 00700 -General Conditions • 00700 - 16 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) 6.02 LABOR, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIALS: A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. Except in connection with the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except, as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours, and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner's written consent given after prior written notice to Engineer. B. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all Equipment and Materials, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. ' I I I H I. I I C] I I C. All Equipment and Materials shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish to Owner satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the kind and quality of Equipment and Materials. All Equipment and Materials shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable Supplier except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents; but no provision of any such instructions will be effective to assign to Engineer or any of Engineer's consultants, agents, or employees, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.10C and 9.10D. D. All Equipment and Materials incorporated in the Work shall be designed to meet the applicable safety standards of federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations. E. Domestic Product Procurement: Not Applicable. F. Year 2000 Compliance: 1. Contractor warrants that all equipment, devices, items, systems, software, hardware, or firmware provided shall be Year 2000 compliant, meaning that they shall properly, appropriately, and consistently function and accurately process date and time data (including without limitation: calculating, comparing, and sequencing) on and after December 31, 1999, including leap year calculations. This warranty supersedes anything in the Specifications or other Contract Documents which might be construed inconsistently. This warranty is applicable whether the equipment, device, item, system, software, hardware, or firmware is specified with or without reference to a manufacturer's name, make, or model number. 6.03 ADJUSTING PROGRESS SCHEDULE: A. Contractor shall submit to Owner for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07) adjustments in the progress schedule to reflect the impact thereon of new developments; these will conform generally to the progress schedule then in effect and 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 17 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) additionally will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. 6.04 SUBSTITUTES OR "OR -EQUAL" ITEMS: A. Whenever an item of Equipment or Material is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or "or -equal" item or no substitute is permitted, other items of Equipment or Material of other Suppliers may be submitted by Contractor to Owner for review under the circumstances described below. 1. "Or -Equal" Items: If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of Equipment or Material proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an "or -equal" item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in Engineer's sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For purposes of this Paragraph 6.04A.1, a proposed item of Equipment or Material will be considered functionally equal to an item so named a. In the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that: (i) it is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; (ii) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole, and; b. Contractor certifies that: (i) there is no increase in cost to Owner; and (ii) it will conform substantially, even with deviations, to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. 2. Substitute Items: a. If in Owner's sole discretion an item of Equipment or Material proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or -equal" item under Paragraph 6.04A. 1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Owner to determine, after consultation with Engineer, that the item of Equipment or Material proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of • proposed substitute items of Equipment or Materials will not be accepted_ by Owner from anyone other than Contractor. c. The procedure for review by Owner will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.04A.2.d, as may be supplemented in the General Requirements and as Owner may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. d. Contractor shall first make written application to Owner for review of a • proposed substitute item of Equipment or Material that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application shall certify that the proposed substitute item will perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, be similar in substance to that specified, and be suited to the same use as that specified. The application will state the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute will prejudice Contractor's achievement of Substantial Completion on time; whether or not use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will ' 00700 -General Conditions 00700 -18 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for work on the Project) to adapt • the design to the proposed substitute item; and whether or not incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified will be identified in the application, and available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services will be indicated. The application will also contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits • that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change, all of which will be considered by Owner in evaluating the proposed substitute item. Owner may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. I I I I I I I C I I I B. If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or use a substitute means, method, sequence,. technique, or procedure of construction acceptable to Owner and Engineer, if Contractor. submits sufficient information to allow Owner to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that indicated or required by the • Contract Documents. The procedure for review by Owner will be similar to that provided in Paragraph 6.04A.2 as applied by Owner and as may be supplemented in the General Requirements. C. Owner will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposed substitute or "or -equal" item. Owner will be the sole judge of acceptability, and no substitute or "or -equal" will be ordered, installed, or used until Owner's review is complete, which will be evidenced.by either(i) a Change Order for a substitute, or (ii) an approved Submittal for an "or -equal." Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. D. Owner will record time required by Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants in evaluating substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.04A.2 and 6.04E and in making changes in the Contract Documents or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for work on the Project occasioned thereby. Whether or not Owner approves a substitute item so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants for evaluating each such proposed substitute. 6.05 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS: A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or organization (including those acceptable to Owner and Engineer as indicated in Paragraph 6.05B), whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or, organization to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. B. If the Contract Documents require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or organizations (including those who are to furnish the principal items of 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 19 I SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) ' Equipment and Materials) to be submitted to Owner within the required time after Bid opening prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement for acceptance by Owner and if Contractor has submitted a list thereof, Owner's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or organization so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation, in which case Contractor shall submit an acceptable substitute, the Contract Price will be increased by the difference in the cost occasioned by such substitution, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued or Written Amendment signed. No acceptance by Owner or Engineer of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or organization shall constitute a waiver of any right of Owner to reject defective Work C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of ' the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or organization, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or organization except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. D. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor will be'pursuant to an appropriate ' agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor which specifically binds the Subcontractor to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer and contains waiver provisions as required by Paragraphs 5.02B and 5.02F. Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance moneys received by Contractor on account of losses under policies issued pursuant to Paragraph 5.02D. 6.06 PATENT FEES AND ROYALTIES: A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use ' in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. B. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer and anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them from and against all claims, damages, losses, and expenses (including attorneys' fees and court and arbitration costs) arising out of any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. C 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 20 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) 6.07 PERMITS: A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the. prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all.charges of utility owners for connections fL to the Work, and Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. 6.08 LAWS AND REGULATIONS: A. Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. • B. If Contractor observes that the Specifications or Drawings are at variance with any Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice thereof, and any necessary changes will be authorized by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.02. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to such Laws or Regulations, and without such notice to Engineer, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom; however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with such Laws and Regulations. 6.09 TAXES: IA. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid or withheld by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. I6.10 USE OF PREMISES: I II II I I A.. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of Equipment and Materials, and the operations of workers to the Project Site and land and areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents and other land and areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, rights -of -way, permits, and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other equipment and materials. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any land or areas contiguous thereto, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made against Owner or Engineer by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly attempt to settle with such other party by agreement or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or at Law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and holdOwner and, Engineer harmless from and against all claims, damages, losses, and expenses (including, but not limited to, fees of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals, and court and arbitration costs) arising directly, indirectly or consequentially out of any action, legal or equitable, brought by any such other party against Owner or Engineer to the extent based on a claim arising out of Contractor's performance of the Work. I 00700 -General Conditions • 00700- 21 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish, and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials, and shall leave the Site clean and ready for occupancy by Owner. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. RECORD DOCUMENTS: Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Test Records, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications (issued pursuant to Paragraph 9.04) in good order and annotated to show all changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Submittals. shall be available to Owner and Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents and Submittals shall be delivered to Owner. Receipt and acceptance of record documents will be a prerequisite for final payment on the Contract. SAFETY AND PROTECTION: Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. All employees on the Work and other persons and organizations who may be affected thereby; 2. All the Work and Materials and Equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. Other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.12A.2 or 6.12A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor (except damage or loss I SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) ' attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner, Engineer or anyone. employed by either of them or anyone for whose acts either I. of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor). Contractor's duties and responsibilities for the safety and protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Owner has issued a notice to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph. 14.09A that'the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). ' C. Contractor shall designate a responsible representative at the Site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by Contractor to Owner. ' 6.13 EMERGENCIES: 'A. ' In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from Engineer or Owner, is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Owner prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If Owner determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken in response to an emergency, a Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of the changes or variations.., 6.14 SUBMITTALS: A. After checking and verifying all field measurements and after complying with applicable procedures specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review and acceptance, in accordance with the accepted schedule of submissions, copies of Submittals which will bear the required information that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's responsibilities under the Contract Documents with respect to the review of the submission. All submissions will be identified as Engineer may require. The ' , data shown on Submittals will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to enable Engineer • to review the information as required. ' B. Before submission of each Submittal, Contractor shall have determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, 'materials, catalog numbers, and similar data with respect thereto and reviewed or coordinated each Submittal with other Submittals and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. C. At the time of each submission, Contractor shall give Owner specific written notice of each variation that the Submittal may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, and in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Submittal submitted to Owner for review and approval by. Engineer of each such variation. D. - Engineer will review Submittals with reasonable promptness, but Engineer's review and I. acceptance will be only for conformance with the design concept of the Project and for compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents and shall not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is indicated in 00700 -General Conditions. 00700 - 23 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) or required by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Submittals and resubmit as required for review and acceptance. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous Submittals. E. Engineer's review and acceptance of Submittals shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall in writing call Owner's and Engineer's attention to each and every variation at the time of submission. Engineer will show acceptance of each such variation by a specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Submittal. Acceptance by Engineer shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors or• omissions in the Submittals. F. Where a Submittal is required by the Specifications, any related Work performed prior to Engineer's review and acceptance of the pertinent submission will be the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. 6.15 CONTINUING THE WORK: A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Engineer or Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.03 or as Contractor and Owner may otherwise agree in writing. rar.tU_0 ut�tl M • y A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, direct, indirect, or consequential (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals, and court and arbitration costs) arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss, or expense: 1. Is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and 2. Is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, supplier, any person, or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a partyindemnified hereunder or arises by or is imposed by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such party. B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their consultants, agents, or employees by any employee of Contractor, any Subcontractor, supplier, any person, or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 24 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) obligation under Paragraph 6.16A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or ' any such Subcontractor or other person or organization under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. I. C. The obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.16A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer, Engineer's Consultants, agents, or employees arising out of: 1. The preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, • Change Orders, designs, or specifications. 2. The giving of or the failure to give communications by Owner, Engineer, their agents, or employees provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause ' of injuryor damage. D. If necessary for enforcement of any indemnification and hold harmlessrequirement herein, or if applicable law requires the Contractor to obtain specified limits of insurance I. to insure any indemnity obligation; then Contractor shall obtain such applicable coverage with minimum limits not less than any specified in Paragraph 5.02B herein, the cost to be recovered and included in the Contract Price, and any indemnity attributable to the negligence of any indemnified party shall be limited to such insurance. ARTICLE 7- OTHER WORK ' 7.01 RELATED WORK AT SITE: IA. Owner may perform other work related to.the Project,at the Siteby Owner's own forces, have other work performed by utility owners, or let other direct contracts therefor which shall contain General Conditions similar to these. If the fact that such other work is to be ' performed was not noted in the Contract Documents, written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work, and, if Contractor believes that such performance will involve additional expense to Contractor or requires additional time and the parties are unable to agree as to the extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. B. Contractor shall afford each utility owner and other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract (or Owner, if Owner is performing the additional work with Owner's employees) proper and safe access to the Site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such work, and I. shall properly connect and coordinate the Work with theirs; Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger ' any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Owner and the others whose work will be affected. ' C. If any part of Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of any such other contractor or utility owner or Owner, Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to Owner in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such work that I. render it unavailable or unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Contractor's failure so to report will constitute an acceptance of the other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor's Work except for latent or nonapparent defects and ' deficiencies in the other work. 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 25 I SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) 7.02 COORDINATION: A. If Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the 1 Site, the person or organization who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified in the General Requirements, and the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized, and the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. ARTICLE 8- OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.01 CHANGE OF ENGINEER: , A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer against whom Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer. Any dispute in connection with such appointment shall be addressed as discussed in Article 16. 8.02 REQUIRED DATA: A. Owner shall furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly after they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.04A and 14.09A. 8.03 LANDS AND EASEMENTS: A. Owner's duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01. and 4.04. 8.04 INSURANCE: A. Owner's responsibilities in respect of purchasing and maintaining insurance are set forth in Paragraph 5.02. 8.05 CHANGE ORDERS: A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.01. 8.06 INSPECTIONS AND TESTS: A. Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.03B. - 8.07 STOPPING THE WORK A. In connection with Owner's right to stop Work or suspend Work, see Paragraphs 13.06, , 15.01, and 15.02. Paragraph 15.02A deals with Owner's right to terminate services of • Contractor under certain circumstances. , 1 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 26 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) 8.08 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES: A. Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9- ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE:. A. Engineer, will be Owner's Representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. I ' I I I I I I 9.02 VISITS TO SITE: A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine, in general, lithe Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -Site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer's efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and on -Site observations as an experienced and qualified design professional, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work 9.03 PROJECT REPRESENTATION: A. Engineer will furnish Resident Project Representative and assistants to assist Owner and Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. 1. Communications pertaining to Submittals, written interpretations, and Change Orders shall be directed to Owner and Engineer through the Resident Project Representative. 2. Communications pertaining to day-to-day operations at the Site shall be directed to Resident Project Representative. 3. Resident Project Representative and his assistants will conduct observations of the Work in progress to assist Owner and Engineer in determining that the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. - Resident Project Representative will not have authority to permit any deviation from the Contract Documents, except with concurrence of Owner and Engineer. 9.04 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS: A. Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of drawings or otherwise) as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with or ' 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 27 I SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) reasonably inferable from the overall intent of the Contract Documents. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11 or Article 12. 9.05 AUTHORIZED VARIATIONS IN WORK: A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are consistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner, and also on Contractor who shall perform the Work involved promptly. 9.06 REJECTING DEFECTIVE WORK: A. Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, and will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.05B, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. B. Resident Project Representative will have authority, subject to final decision of Engineer, to disapprove or reject any defective workmanship, Equipment, or Material. 9.07 SUBMITTALS. CHANGE ORDERS. AND PAYMENTS: A. In connection with Engineer's responsibility for Submittals, see Paragraph 6.14. B. In connection with Engineer's responsibilities as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. C. In connection with Engineer's responsibilities in respect of Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 9.08 DETERMINATIONS FOR UNIT PRICES: A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Quantities and classifications will be approved by Owner. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer's preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon to the Owner. Owner will provide approval of an Application for Payment or return Application to Engineer for further review. B. Owner's written decisions thereon will be final and binding upon Contractor, unless, within ten days after the date of any such decision, either Owner or Contractor delivers to the other party.to the Agreement written notice of intention to appeal such a decision. 9.09. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES: A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes, and other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work or the interpretation of the requirements of the I I I II II I 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 28 II SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) I I I I I I 11 1 I 1 I I I I Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the Work and claims under Articles 11 and 12 in respect of changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times will be referred to Owner in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this Paragraph, which Owner will render in writing within a reasonable time. Written notice of each such claim, dispute, and other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner and the other party.to the Agreement promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the:occurrence of the event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data shall be delivered to Owner and the other party within 60 days after such occurrence unless Owner allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim. Owner will request written review by Engineer of claims, disputes, and other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.10 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES: A. Neither Engineer's authority to act under this Article 9 or elsewhere in the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any other person or organization performing any of the Work, or to any. surety for any of them. B. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as directed", "as required", "as allowed", "as approved", or terms of like effect or import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable", "suitable", "acceptable", "proper", or "satisfactory" or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe a requirement, direction, review, or judgment of Engineer as to the Work, it is intended that such requirement, direction, review or judgment will be solely to evaluate the Work for compliance with the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.10C or 9.l OD. C. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work. E. . The presence or absence of Engineer, or any of its representatives will not act to relieve Contractor of any responsibility or of any guarantee of his performance. Neither will observation by Engineer or any of its representatives in any way be understood to relieve Contractor of any responsibility for proper supervision of the Work at all times. F. Review by Engineer of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 29 1 I SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) be delivered by Paragraph 14.08A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents. G. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 9.9 shall also apply to Engineer's Consultants, Resident Project Representative, and assistants. ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK 10.01 GENERAL: A. Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work; these will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document authorized and approved by Arkansas Natural Resources Conservation Commission, if applicable, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an increase or decrease in the Contract Price or an extension or a shortening of the Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in Article 11 or 12. C. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, and supplemented as provided in Paragraphs 3.02A and 3.02C, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.13 and except in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.05B. D. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders (or Written Amendments) covering: 1. Changes in the Work which are ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01A, are required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09 or correcting defective Work under Paragraph 13.10, or are agreed to by the parties; 2. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties; and 3. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of• any written decision rendered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 9.09A, provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.15. E. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the ' Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 30 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) ARTICLE 11- CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE 11.01 GENERAL: A. The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities, and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at his expense without change in the Contract Price. B. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner promptly (but in no event later than thirty (30) days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence (unless Owner allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that thefl amount claimed covers all known amounts (direct and indirect) to which the claimant is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 11.01 B. C. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be determined in one of the following ways: 1. Where the Work involved is covered by Unit Prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of Unit Prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 11.05A through 11.05C, inclusive). 2. By mutual acceptance of a lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.03A.2.b. 3. On the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraphs 11.02A and 11.028) plus a Contractor's Fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraphs 11.03A and 11.03B). 11.02 COST OF THE WORK: I A. The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items and shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.02B. 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise and payroll.taxes, workers' or workmen's compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation, and holiday pay applicable thereto. Such employees shall include superintendents and foremen at the Site. The expenses of performing Work after regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. I00700 -General Conditions 00700 -31 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) 2. Cost of all Equipment and Materials furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds, and all returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3. Payments made by Contractor to the Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids will be accepted. If a subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work Plus a Fee, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work. All subcontracts shall be subject to the other provisions of the Contract Documents insofar as applicable. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors; attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Costs, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost less market value of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery and the parts thereof whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, installation, dismantling, and removal thereof - all in accordance with terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. d. Sales, consumer; use, or similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations. e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages not compensated by insurance or otherwise, to the Work or otherwise sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance and furnishing of the Work provided they have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable; shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the cost of the Work for the purpose of 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 32 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) determining Contractor's fee. If, however, any such loss or damage requires reconstruction and Contractor is placed in charge thereof, Contractor shall be paid for services a fee proportionate to that stated in Paragraph 11.03A.2. g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such. as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, expressage, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. Cost of premiums for additional Bonds and insurance required because of changes in the Work and premiums for property insurance coverage within the limits of the deductible amounts established by Owner in accordance with Paragraph 5.02D.4. I IP1 I [I I I B. The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following: 1., :Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals (of partnerships, and sole proprietorships); general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed • by Contractor whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or a branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed • upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 11.02A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.02A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Expenses of Contractor's principal and branch offices other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work, and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Cost of premiums for all Bonds and for all insurance whether or not Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain the same (except for the cost of premiums covered by subparagraph 11.02A.5.i above). • 5. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may -be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to 'property. • 6. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 11.02A. 11.03 CONTRACTOR'S FEE: A. The Contractor's Fee allowed to Contractor for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: - 1. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or if none can be agreed upon, 2. rA fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor's Fee shall be fifteen (15) percent for payroll costs and the cost of materials and equipment as defined in paragraphs 11.02A.1 and 11.02A.2. b. The Contractor's Fee shall be five (5) percent on the work performed by Subcontractors as defined in paragraph 11.02A.3; and if a Subcontract is ' 00700 -General Conditions • 00700 - 33 I SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) on the basis of Cost -of -Work plus a Fee, the maximum allowable to the Subcontractor as a fee for overhead and profit shall be fifteen (15) percent: 1 c. No fee shall be payable on costs defined in paragraphs 11.02.A..4, 11.02.A.5, and 11.03 (costs associated with supplemental costs or special consultant); - d. The amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to City of Fayetteville for any such change which results in a net decrease in cost, will be the amount of the actual net decrease plus a deduction in Contractor's Fee by ' an amount equal to ten (10) percent of the net decrease; and e. When both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor's Fee shall be computed on the basis of the net ', change in accordance with paragraphs 11.03A.2.a. through 11.03.A.2.d. B. Whenever the cost of any Work is to be determined pursuant to Paragraph 11.02A or 11.02B, Contractor will submit in form acceptable to Owner an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 11.04 CASH ALLOWANCES: A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be done by such Subcontractors or Suppliers and for such sums within the limit of the allowances as may be acceptable to Owner. Contractor agrees that: 1. The allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of Equipment and Materials required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and 2. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the allowances. Costs to be included in allowances so named in the Contract Documents shall be as discussed in Specification SECTION 01210. B. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by , Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.05 UNIT PRICE WORK: A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established Unit Prices for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement_ The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the -actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work , performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 9.08. B. Each Unit Price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. C. Where the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor exceeds the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement by twenty-five percent or 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 34 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) more and there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work. and if Contractor believes that Contractor has incurred additional expense as a result thereof, Contractor may make a claim for an increase in the Contract Price in accordance with Article 11 if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase. 11.06 LIMITS OF AUTHORITY: A. The contractor shall note and abide by the following City of Fayetteville's and Engineer's limits of authority for changes in the Work which require a change in the Contract Price and Contract Time. Except in the case of extreme emergency to protect the public safety, public welfare or substantial Work, the following limits of authority to the City of Fayetteville and Engi- neer shall apply: Engineer's Representative - No authority Water/Sewer Maintenance Superintendent - No authority Public Works Director - No authority Mayor - $20,000.00 or any City Council pre -approved contingency. I I I I I I I I I .All accumulative changes which result in Contract Price changes in excess of $20,000.00 or any City Council pre -approved contingency shall require the formal approval of the Fayetteville City Council. 11.01 YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE: A. In no event shall Contractor be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price based upon any failure or delay by Contractor in supplying equipment, materials, work, or services that are Year 2000 compliant or failure or delay by Contractor's Subcontractors or Suppliers in providing equipment, materials, work, or services as a result of. Subcontractors' or Suppliers' lack of Year 2000 compliance in their own operations, systems, or processes used to provide or deliver equipment, material, work, or services. 11.08 RIGHT OF AUDIT: A. Owner,shall have the right to inspect and audit all of Contractor's books, records, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, payment records, vouchers, and memoranda relating to the Work, and Contractor shall preserve all such records and supporting documentation for a period of three years after date of Final Payment. Contractor hereby grants to Owner the authority to enter Contractor's premises for the purpose of inspection of such records and supporting documentation or, at Contractor's option, Contractor may make such records and supporting documentation available to Owner at a location satisfactory to Owner. B. All of the records and supporting documentation shall be open to inspection and subject to audit and reproduction by Owner or its authorized representative for any and all.. purposes, including but not limited to (i) compliance with the Contract Documents; (ii) proper pricing of Change Orders; and (iii) claims submitted by or against Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier in connection with any performance under the Contract Documents. 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 35 I SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT TICS 12.01 GENERAL: A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Contractor, in undertaking to complete the Work within the Contract Times, shall take into consideration and make allowances for all of the ordinary delays and hindrances incident to such Work, whether growing out of delays in securing equipment or materials or workmen or otherwise. B. Adjustments to the Contract Times will be made for delays in completion of the Work from causes beyond Contractor's control, including the following: 1. Federal embargoes, priority orders, or other restrictions imposed by the United States Government. 2. Unusual delay in fabrication or shipment of Equipment or Materials required in the Work, whether ordered by Contractor or furnished by Owner or others under. separate contract. 3. Strikes and other labor disputes. 4. Delays caused by court proceedings. 5. Change Orders. 6. Neglect, delay, or default of any other contractor employed by Owner. 7. Unusual construction delays resulting from weather conditions abnormal to the geographical area and to the season of the year such as above normal continuous days of precipitation, above normal amount of precipitation within a 24 hour period, or above normal days of extreme cold or hot temperature conditions affecting installation / application due to manufacturers or specifications limitations. These conditions will not be cause for extensions of time if abnormal weather conditions do not affect the stage of construction. All claims for extension of time due to abnormal weather conditions must be substantiated with evidence from a weather bureau or other authoritative source. Weather conditions normal to the geographical area and to the, season of the year shall be taken into consideration in the Bid. Normal conditions shall be defined as the average number of days, amounts, or both over a 5 -year period averaged per season. 8. Conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents reported to Owner or Engineer as provided in these General Conditions. 9. Any failure or delay by Contractor in supplying equipment, materials, work, or services that are Year 2000 compliant or failure or delay by Contractor's Subcontractors or Suppliers in providing equipment, materials, work, or services as a result of Subcontractors' or Suppliers' lack of Year 2000 compliance in their own operations, systems, or processes used to provide or deliver equipment, material, work, or services shall not be considered to be caused by events beyond Contractor's control. Such Year 2000 compliance problems shall not constitute a basis for delay in completion of the Work, adjustment to the Contract Times, or an excuse for Contract nonperformance. C. Owner shall award extensions of the Contract Times on account of such causes of delay, provided that adequate evidence is presented to enable Owner to determine with exactness the extent and duration of delay for each item involved I I I I I I I I I I n I I I I LI 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 36 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) D. No extension to the Contract Times will be granted for delays involving only portions of the Work, or which do not directly affect the time required for completion of the entire Work. E. Any claim for an extension to the Contract Times shall be delivered in writing to Owner within ten days of the occurrence of the event giving rise. to the claim. All claims for adjustment to the Contract Times will be determined by Owner and Contractor. Any change to the Contract Times resulting from any such claim will be incorporated in a Change Order or a Written Amendment. F. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. The provisions of this Article 12 shall not exclude recovery for damages (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals, and court and arbitration costs) for delay by either party. ARTICLE 13 - WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE; TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.01 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE: I I I I [II I I I A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner and Engineer that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Prompt notice of all defects shall be given to Contractor. All defective Work, whether or not in place, may be rejected, corrected or accepted as provided in this Article 13. B. " No provision in the Contract Documents nor any specified guarantee time limit shall be ,held to limit Contractor's liability for defects to less than the legal limit of liability in accordance with the Law. C. All Equipment and Materials furnished by Contractor for the Work shall carry a written guarantee from the manufacturer or Supplier of such items when called for in the Specifications. Written guarantees shall be submitted to Owner with other Submittals. 13.02 ACCESS TO THE WORK: A. Engineer and Engineer's representatives, Owner and Owner representatives, testing agencies, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspecting, and testing. Contractor shall provide proper and safe conditions for such access. 13.03 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS: A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel. B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03C and 13.03D below; 2. that costs incurred in connections with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph 13.05B shall be paid as provided in said Paragraph 13.05B; and 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 37 I SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) 3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) to specifically be inspected, tested, or approved, Contractor shall assume full responsibility therefor, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner the required certificates of inspection, testing, or approval. D. Contractor shall also be responsible for and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspection or testing required in connection with Owner's or Engineer's acceptance of a Supplier of Materials or Equipment proposed to be incorporated in the Work, or of Materials or Equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. E. All inspections, tests, or approvals other than those required by Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction shall be performed by organizations acceptable to Owner and Contractor (or by Engineer if so specified). F. If any Work (including the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for observation. Such uncovering shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. G. Neither observations by Owner or Engineer nor inspections, tests, or approvals by others shall relieve Contractor from Contractor's obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13.04 DEFECTIVE WORK: A. The term "defective" is used in these documents to describe Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, not in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, or not meeting the requirements of any inspection, test, approval, or acceptance required by Law or the Contract Documents. B. Any defective Work may be disapproved or rejected by Owner or Engineer at any time before final acceptance even though it may have been overlooked and included in a previous Application for Payment. C. Prompt notice will be given by Owner or Engineer to Contractor of defects as they become evident. 13.05 UNCOVERING WORK: A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner or Engineer, it shall, if requested by Owner or. Engineer, be uncovered for Owner's or Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. B. If Owner or Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner's or Engineer's request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Owner or Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment. If it is found that such Work is I I I I I I I I I rI C I I El I 00700 -General Conditions - 00700 - 38 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) defective, Contractor shall bear all direct, indirect, and consequential costs of such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing and of satisfactory reconstruction, (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both; directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. 13.06 OWNER MAY STOP THE WORK: A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any other party. 13.07 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK: I Li I I I I 11 I I A. If required by Owner or Engineer, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Owner, or Engineer, remove it from the Site and replace it with nondefective Work. Contractor shall bear all direct, indirect, and consequential costs of such correction or removal (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals) made necessary thereby. 13.08 ONE-YEAR CORRECTION PERIOD: A. If within one year after the Date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner's written instructions, either correct • such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Site and replace it with nondefective Work. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all direct, indirect, and consequential costs of such removal and replacement (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of Equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. I 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 39 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) 13.09 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK: A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner and, prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, also Engineer prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall bear all direct and indirect costs attributable to Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Owner as to reasonableness and to include but not be limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals). If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner's.recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner. 13.10 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK: , A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice of Owner or Engineer to proceed to correct and to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner or Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 13.07, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. B. To the extent necessary to complete corrective and remedial action; Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take possession of Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site and incorporate in the Work all Equipment and Materials stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. C. Contractor. shall allow Owner, Owner's representatives, agents, and employees such access to the Site as may be necessary to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph. D. All direct, indirect, and consequehtial costs of Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor in an amount approved as to reasonableness by Owner, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. Such direct, indirect, and consequential costs will include but not be limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals, all court and arbitration costs, and all costs of repair and replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. E. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay , in performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 1 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 40 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.01 SCHEDULE OF VALUES: A. The schedule of values established will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a.form, of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 1402 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT: A. Not later than the 15m day of each month, or on the next business day thereafter, (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. B. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor's legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. . I I I I P I I [] I C. If payment is requested on the basis of Equipment and Materials not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the Equipment and Materials free and clear of all liens, charges, security interests, and encumbrances (which are hereinafter in these General Conditions referred to as "Liens") and evidence that the Equipment and Materials are covered by appropriate property insurance and other arrangements to protect Owner's interest therein, all of which will be satisfactory to Owner. D. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in Paragraph 14.04G. 14.03 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE: A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, Materials, and Equipment covered:by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.04 REVIEW OF APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT: A. Owner will, within seven days after receipt of each Application For Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment (subject to the provisions of the last sentence of Paragraph 14.04D), or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Owner's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. After the required internal reviews and processing by the Owner, the Owner will diligently proceed to make payment to the Contractor, in accordance with the approved payment request, within 30 days. All efforts will be made to make payments within the 30 day period, but the Owner cannot guarantee the 30 days maximum time. 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 41 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) B. Engineer's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Owner, based on Owner's and Engineer's on -Site observations of the Work in progress as experienced and qualified design professionals and on Owner's and Engineer's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that, to the best of Owner's and Engineer's knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 9.08, and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and that Contractor is entitled to payment of the amount recommended. However, by recommending any such payment, Owner will not thereby be deemed to have represented that exhaustive or continuous on -Site inspections have been made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Owner in the Contract Documents, or that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or Owner to withhold payment to Contractor. C. Engineer's recommendation of final payment will constitute an additional representation by Engineer that the conditions precedent to Contractor's being entitled to final payment as set forth in Paragraph 14.09 have been fulfilled. D. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer's opinion, it would be incorrect to make such representations to Engineer. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner's opinion to protect Owner from loss because: 1. The Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement. 2. Written claims have been made against Owner or Liens have been filed in connection with the Work. 3. The Contract Price has been reduced by Written Amendment or Change Order 4. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.10, 5. Of Owner's actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph 15.028. 6. Of Contractor's unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 7. Contractor's failure to make payment to Subcontractors, or for labor, Materials, or Equipment, or 8. Owner shall not certify payments requesting more than eighty (80) percent of the Contract amount until such time as all operation, maintenance, repair, and replacement manuals,' and product data has-been furnished by the Contractor to the Owner. E. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount because claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor's performance of furnishing of the Work, or Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, or there are other items entitling I 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 42 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, but Owner must give Contractor immediate written notice stating the reasons for such action. F. When all grounds for withholding payment are removed, payment will be made in the amounts withheld because of them. G. Progress payments will be in the amount of 90 percent of the amount of the Work completed and 100 percent of Equipment and Materials suitably stored and documented as indicated on the Application for Payment less the sum of all previous payments. When the amount of work is equal to 50 percent of the contract, the amount of retainage will be reduced to 5 percent on the remaining work, provided Contractor's performance is satisfactory in the opinions of Engineer and Owner. Equipment and Materials suitably stored and documented as indicated on the Application for Payment will be paid at 100 percent less the sum of all previous payments. 14.05 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: f A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use, Contractor shall notify Owner in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Owner issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. B. Within a reasonable time thereafter, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Owner or Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Owner or Engineer will notify Contractor ' in writing giving his reasons therefor. If Owner and Engineer consider the Work substantially complete, Owner will prepare a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which will fix the Date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. ' C. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner will deliver to Contractor a written. recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending I. final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties. I. D. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Work after the Date of Substantial Completion, but Owner shall allow Contractor reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list. 14.06 PARTIAL UTILIZATION: A. Use by Owner of any finished part of the Work, which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and useable part of the Work that can be used by Owner without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may ' be accomplished prior to Substantial Completion of all.the Work subject to the following: 1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing fo permit Owner to use any such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and I. substantially complete. If Contractor agrees, Contractor will certify to Owner and Engineer that said part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 43 I SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.05 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 2. Owner may at any time request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to take over operation of any such part of the Work although it is not substantially complete. Within a reasonable time thereafter, Owner, Contractor and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion and will prepare a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected thereon before final payment. If Contractor does not object in writing to Owner that such part of the Work is not ready for separate operation by Owner, Owner will finalize the list of items to be completed or corrected and will deliver such list to Contractor together with a written recommendation as to the • division of responsibilities pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, utilities, insurance, warranties, and guarantees for that part of the Work, which will become binding upon Owner and Contractor at the time when Owner takes over such operation. During such operation and prior to Substantial Completion of such part of the Work, Owner shall allow Contractor reasonable access to complete or correct • items on said list and to complete other related Work. 3. No occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work will be accomplished prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 5.02I in respect of • property insurance. 14.07 FINAL INSPECTION: A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and Owner will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to remedy such deficiencies. 14.08 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT: A. After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner and Engineer and delivered all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates of inspection, marked -up record documents, and other documents - all as required by the Contract Documents, and after Owner has indicated that the Work is acceptable (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.11), Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. B. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied by all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, together with complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu thereof and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 11 I 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 44 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) releases in full; an affidavit of Contractor that the releases and receipts include all labor, services, Material, and Equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and that all payrolls, Equipment and Material bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or Owner's property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied; and consent of the surety, if any, to final payment. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish a release.or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien. 4 44.09 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE: A. If, on the basis of Owner's and Engineer's observation of the Work during construction • and final inspection, and Owner's review of the final Application for Payment and • accompanying documentation -- all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner is • satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner will give written notice to Contractor that the Work is acceptable (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.11). Otherwise, Owner will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Thirty days after presentation to Owner of the Application and accompanying documentation, in appropriate form and substance, and with Owner's recommendation and notice of acceptability, the amount recommended by Owner will become due and will be paid to Contractor. J El I I I I C I B. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner and Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for Payment, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. The written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. C. The Final Pay Estimate will include all sums remaining to be paid. 14.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONTINUING OBLIGATION: A. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. Neither recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner, nor the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion, nor any payment by Owner to Contractor under the Contract Documents, nor any use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, nor any act of acceptance by Owner nor any failure to do so, nor any review and approval of a Submittal, nor the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, nor any correction of defective Work by Owner will constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (except as provided in Paragraph 14.11). 14.11 WAIVER OF CLAIMS: A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 45 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) 1. A waiver of all claims by Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.07, or from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein; however, it will not constitute a waiver by Owner of any rights in respect of Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 2. A waiver of all claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 14.12 INTEREST: NOT APPLICABLE. , ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ' 15.01 OWNER MAY SUSPEND WORK: A. Owner may, at any time and without cause, suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a , period of not more than 90 days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. 15.02 OWNER MAY TERMINATE: , A. Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events: 1. If Contractor commences a voluntary case under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code (Title 11, United States Code), as now or hereafter in effect, or if Contractor takes any equivalent or similar action by filing a petition or otherwise under any other federal or state Law in effect at such time relating to the bankruptcy or insolvency; 2. If a petition is filed against Contractor under any chapter of the bankruptcy Code as now or hereafter in effect at the time of filing, or if a petition is filed seeking any such equivalent or similar relief against Contractor under any other federal or state Law in effect at the time relating to bankruptcy or insolvency; 3. If Contractor makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors; 4. If a trustee, receiver, custodian, or agent of Contractor is appointed under applicable Law or under contract, whose appointment or authority to take charge of property of Contractor is for the purpose of enforcing a Lien against such property or for the purpose of general administration of such property for the benefit of Contractor's creditors; 5. If Contractor admits in writing an inability to pay its debts generally as they become due; 6. If Contractor persistently fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable Equipment or Materials or failure to adhere to the progress schedule established under Paragraph 2.07 as revised from time to time); 7. If Contractor disregards Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 8. If Contractor disregards the authority of Owner or Engineer, or 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 46 I SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) C I Li I I I I H H I I I F I I C 9. If Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; B. ' Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if there be one) ten days' written notice and to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the Site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to • Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all Equipment and Materials stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as Owner may deem expedient. In such case, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct and indirect costs of completing the Work (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals, and court costs), such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such costs exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such costs incurred by Owner will be incorporated in a Change Order, but when exercising any rights or remedies under this Paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. C. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due to Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. D. Upon ten days' written notice to Contractor and Engineer; Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, elect to abandon the Work and terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for all Work executed and any expense sustained plus reasonable termination expenses, which will include, but not be limited to, direct and indirect costs (including, but not limited to, fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals, and court costs). 15.03 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE: A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than 90 days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or Owner fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon ten days' written notice to Owner and Engineer, terminate the Agreement and recover from Owner payment for all Work executed and any expense sustained plus reasonable termination expenses. In addition and in lieu of terminating the Agreement, if • Owner has failed to act on an Application for Payment or Owner has failed to make any payment as aforesaid, Contractor may upon ten days' written notice to Owner stop the Work until payment of all amounts then due. The provisions of this Paragraph shall not relieve Contractor of the obligations under Paragraph 6.15 to carry on the Work in accordance with the progressschedule and without delay during disputes and ••disagreements With Owner: 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 47 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) I ARTICLE 16 - RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 16.01 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES: A. Owner's claims against Contractor will be reviewed by Contractor who shall take one or more of the following actions within ten (10) days after receipt of the Claim: 1. Request additional supporting data from Owner; 2. Submit a schedule to the Owner indicating a reasonable time within which Contractor expects to take action; 3. Deny the claim in whole.or in part, -stating reasons for denial; 4. Recommend approval of the claim; or 5. Suggest a compromise. J J I B. If a claim has been resolved, the Owner will prepare or obtain appropriate documentation. , C. If a claim has been denied or ifno action has been taken in the manner provided in Paragraphs 16.01A or 16.01B, then the claimant, within ten (10) days thereafter, may notify the Owner, the other party, and Contractor's surety that Owner and Contractor have been unable to resolve the claim. In that event, the Owner, pursuant to Paragraph 16.01E shall review the claim and make a decision on the claim. D. If a claim is presented to the Owner, then the Owner shall review the claim and make a decision within fourteen (14) days. E. Disputes that cannot be settled through negotiation or the procedures in Paragraphs 16.01A through 16.01E above, shall be settled as mutually agreed or in a court of competent jurisdiction within the State of Arkansas. F. Arbitration shall not be used in the settlement of disputes. ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 GIVING NOTICE: A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.02 COMPUTATION OF TIME: A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be . computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the Law of• the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. B. A calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight shall constitute a day. I I I 00700 -General Conditions 00700 - 48 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (continued) 17.03 CLAIMS, CUMULATIVE REMEDIES: A. Should Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission, or act of the other party or of any of the other party's employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance. of such injury or damage. The provisions of this Paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. B. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto, and, in particular but without limitation, the warranties, guarantees and obligations imposed upon Contractor by Paragraphs 6.16A, 13.01, 13.08, 13.10, 14.03, and 15.02A and allof the rights and remedies available to Owner and Engineer thereunder, are in addition to, and are not to be• construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents, and the provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. All representations, warranties, and guarantees made in the Contract Documents will survive final payment and termination or completion of the Agreement. END OF DOCUMENT 00700 00700 -General Conditions 00700 -49 RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R-3/15/04) Arkansas Soil and Water ' Conservation Commission Water Resources Development Division 1 � i a , �• � cam 'DEVELOPMENT - CON[ERVATIO*1' ... •_ 1 A • SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS ' OF THE REVOLVING LOAN FUND• •1 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0. PROJECT FUNDING................................................................................................. 1. SUPERSESSION.......................................................................................... 2. ADVERTISING FOR BIDS........................................................................ 3. STATE TAX EXEMPTION........................................................................ 4, BIDDING AND CONTRACT AWARD .................................................... Contractor's Act of Assurance Form Substitutions of "Or Equal" Items Division Review of Bid Documents Contract Award Bid Protests 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE....................................................................................................4 Insurance Bid Bond Performance and Payment Bonds 6. MINORITY, WOMEN'S BUSINESS ENTERPRISES.......................:...................................5 Requirements During Bidding MBE/WBE Reporting Requirements 7. DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION......................................::::................ 8. PROCUREMENT PROHIBITIONS........................................................... 9. LABOR STANDARDS..........................................................:.::::.:............. 10. SAFETY STANDARDS............................................................................. OSHA Requirements Trench Safety 11. CIVIL RIGHTS........................................................................................... 12 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ........................................................... 13. COMPLETION SCHEDULE....................................................... I....... I............ 14. JOB BULLETIN BOARD.......................................................0......................... 15. PAYMENTS................................................................................................ I .... I ............................. .................... ... . .....2 .... ..... ....................6 ............................. 6 ...............6 .........................7 .......................8 ............ 1. .........8 ....................... 8 .......................8 .......................9 Preparation of the Monthly Estimate Retainage Request for Payment From the RLF Monthly Payment Cut-off Date Processing Payments Estimated Completion Date Final Construction Payment Request 16. CHANGE ORDERS............................................................................................. Defective Specifications Differing Site Conditions Time Extensions Field Changes Disputes and Remedies Change Order Documentation Division Approval of Change Orders TOC- I u I H I L I I I I ......11 ' I I I I fl RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R-3/15/04) 17. PROJECT INSPECTION........................................................................................................11 Contractor Supervision and Inspection • Resident Inspection Division Inspection . Audit and Access to Records • Final Inspection .18: AS=BUILT DRAWINGS.........................................................................................................12 19.OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL................................................................12 20, ARCHAEOLOGICAL, HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL REMAINS................................13 21. PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT...........................................................................13 22. STORM WATER PERMIT REQUIREMENTS....................................................................13 23. GRATUITIES.........................................................................................................................14 24. SUSPENSION OF WORK............................................................................:........................15 26. TERMINATION.....................................................................................................................15 APPENDIX A Labor Standards Provisions, EPA Form 5720-4 APPENDIX B Equal Employment Opportunity Provisions, Title 41, Chapter 60 TOC-2 RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R-3/15/04) PROJECT FUNDING This contract is funded in whole or in part by a loan from the Revolving Loan Fund (RLF). The RLF is administered by the Arkansas Soil and Water Conservation Commission, Construction Assistance Division (the Division), and the Arkansas Development Finance Authority (ADFA). The RLF is funded in part by a grant from the Environmental Protection Agency under Title VI of the Clean Water Act, Public Law 97-117 as amended by Public Law 100-4. The operation of the RLF is governed by Federal Regulations, 40 CFR 35, Subpart K and the Department of Environmental Quality Regulation Number 10. Compliance with the requirements of these Supplemental Conditions and applicable regulations and statutes by the loan recipient and the contractor is required. In accordance with Regulation Number 10, the Division and ADFA is not a partner, joint venturer or in any way party to the construction contract. The Loan Recipient and its contractors shall release and hold harmless the officers and employees of the Division and ADFA from claims arising in connection with the design, construction and operation of the project including any matter due solely to the contractor or borrowers negligence. 2. SUPERSESSION These Supplemental Conditions supersede any conflicting provisions of the Contract Documents. 3. ADVERTISING FOR BIDS For each construction contract estimated to be in excess of $10,000, the loan recipient shall advertise for construction bids at least 30 days before the scheduled date for bid opening and advertise a second time at least one week prior to bid opening. The advertisements shall be placed in a newspaper of general circulation published in the county in which the proposed improvements are to be made or in a trade journal reaching the construction industry. If no newspaper of general circulation is published in the county, publication may be made in any newspaper of general circulation in the county. Bidding documents shall be available to prospective bidders from the date the notice is first published. All addenda made to the Contract Documents must be approved by the Division prior to the date set for bid opening. r. Machinery and equipment purchased by the Contractor for installation under this contract may be exempt from Arkansas Sales Tax. Arkansas Department of Finance and Administration Regulation GR-66 states that the gross proceeds derived from the sale of pollution control machinery and equipment are exempt from the tax if: -1- L 1 I I I L n I I I II I I 11 11 ' RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R-3/15/04) I. The machinery and equipment is utilized, either directly or indirectly, by manufacturing or processing plants or facilities, or cities or towns in Arkansas to prevent or reduce air or water pollution or contamination which might otherwise result from the operation of the plant or facility; and, I. The machinery and equipment is required by Arkansas or federal law or regulations to be installed.and utilized to control pollution or contamination as evidenced by written [documentation from the Arkansas Soil and Water Conservation Commission or the ' Environmental Protection Agency. Supplies and chemicals used by pollution control machinery and equipment are ' taxable. Should the contract involve the installation of pollution control machinery and equipment at a ' treatment facility, the Division will furnish a written general certification to document that the machinery and equipment is required by Arkansas or federal law. A request for written documentation should be sent to: ' Arkansas Soil and Water Conservation Commission Construction Assistance Division 101 East Capitol, Suite 350 ' Little Rock, Arkansas 72201 Telephone Number: (501) 682-3923 ' Facsimile Number: (501) 682-0561 ' To claim the exemption, the Contractor must provide the vendor with a copy of the documentation. The invoice must show that the purchase is for pollution control machinery and equipment under Arkansas Code Annotated 26-53-114. Most ancillary items necessary to install '• the equipment do not qualify for tax exemption. Any questions involving the definition of machinery and equipment should be directed to: ' Arkansas Department of Finance and Administration Sales and Use Tax Section Post Office Box 1272 ' Little Rock, Arkansas 72203 Telephone Number: (501) 682-7104 5. BIDDING AND CONTRACT AWARD ' Awards shall be made only to responsive, responsible contractors possessing the ability to perform successfully under the terms and conditions of the proposed procurement. Bidders are required to comply with the requirements of these Supplemental Conditions in the preparation ' and submission of bids. Failure by the bidder to comply with the requirements outlined herein may result in the rejection of the bid as non -responsive. ' -2- RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R-3/15/04) Prospective bidders are advised that other sections of these Supplemental Conditions describe ' requirements pertaining to bidding and the performance of the RLF funded contract. The Supplemental Conditions should be thoroughly reviewed by prospective bidders prior to the preparation and submission of bids. Contractor's Act of Assurance Form Bidders shall submit with the bid proposal an executed Act of Assurance form as provided in these contract documents. Through execution of this form, the Bidder warrants its understanding of and compliance with these Supplemental Conditions and all relevant requirements pertaining to the RLF funded work. In addition, each prime contractor is required to submit an executed Act of Assurance form to the Owner for each subcontract awarded in excess of $2000.00. Substitutions of "Or Equal" Items Substitution of "Or Equal" Items shall be in accordance t with Article 6.04 of Document 00700, General Conditions. Division Review of Bid Documents The information described below shall be submitted to the ' Division by the Owner for review and approval within 30 days of bid opening. Construction contracts will not be awarded without Division concurrence.• Proposal of the lowest responsive responsible bidder. • Bid tabulation showing all bids and bid opening date. • Recommendation of award of contract by Engineer. Clear Site Certificate without exceptions. • Certified copies of the advertisements for bids. Bid bond for and name of Surety company that will underwrite the Payment and Performance Bonds for the lowest responsive responsible bidder. Itemized bid breakdown of lump sum bid from lowest responsive responsible bidder (if applicable). Resume(s) of the proposed resident inspector(s). Contractors Act of Assurance Form • MBE/WBE documentation from lowest responsive responsible bidder. Items (F), (G), and (J) shall be submitted by the lowest responsive responsible bidder to the Owner within 15 days of bid opening for transmittal to the Division. Contract Award No construction contract shall be awarded without Division concurrence in the award. -3- 1 II I. RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R-3/15/04) ' Bid Protests The Owner shall have written protest procedures to handle and resolve disputes relating to the award of contracts and shall in all instances disclose information regarding the bid ' protest to the Division. A protestor must exhaust all administrative remedies with the Owner before pursuing a protest with the Division. The review of protests by the Division will be limited to issues that concern: ' Violations of State law, Department of Environmental Quality Regulation Number 10, regulations issued pursuant to P.L. 100-4 and the requirements of these ' Supplemental Conditions. Violations of the Owner's protest procedures or failure to review a complaint or ' protest. Protests received by the Division involving issues other than those described above or where other avenues of remedy have not been exhausted by the protestor will be referred back to the ' Owner. The review of bid protests by the Arkansas Soil and Water Conservation Commission shall be in ' accordance with Regulation No. 8, Administrative Procedures. ' 6. BONDS AND INSURANCE Insurance Each Contractor must purchase and maintain the insurance required by the Contract ' Documents. A Certificate of Insurance shall be provided by the Contractor on a form acceptable to the Owner and the Division. ' Bid Bond A Bid Bond or cashiers check in the amount of 5% of the initial bid amount shall be required of all bidders. The release of bid bonds shall be in conformance with the Contract Documents, ' Performance and Payment Bonds The Contractor shall furnish separate Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to 100% of the contract price as security for the ' performance of the contract and security for the payment of labor and materials. The required bonds shall be made by surety companies which have qualified and are authorized Ito do business in Arkansas. Surety companies must be named in Circular 570 as published by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U. S. Treasury Department to be acceptable to the Owner and the Division. The bonds shall be made by a resident local agent licensed by the Insurance Commissioner of the State of Arkansas to represent the surety company executing the bonds. The mere countersigning of a bond will not be sufficient. The agent shall file with the bonds its power of attorney. 7. MINORITY, WOMEN'S BUSINESS ENTERPRISES ' Whenever subcontracts are solicited, the Contractor is required to take affirmative steps to assure that minority and woman business enterprises (MBE/WBE) are used when possible as sources of -4- 1 ...._._ RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R-3/15/04) materials, supplies, equipment, construction activities and professional services. MBE/WBE utilization is authorized by OMB Circular A-102, and Executive Orders 11625, 12432 and 12138. The Contractor shall at a minimum, take the following affirmative actions in the procurement of subcontracts for materials, supplies, equipment and services: A. Include small, minority and women's businesses on solicitation lists; B. Assure that small, minority and women's businesses are solicited whenever they are ' potential sources; C. Divide total requirements, when economically feasible, into small tasks or quantities ' to permit maximum participation by small, minority and women's businesses; D. Establish delivery schedules, when the requirements of the work permit, which will encourage participation by small, minority and women's businesses; E. Use the services of the Small Business Administration and the Office of Minority ' Business Enterprise of the U.S. Department of Commerce, as appropriate. F. Continue the above steps, including follow-up contact as necessary, throughout the ' performance of the contract. The Construction Assistance Division has an MBE/WBE participation objective of 7.8% of the t dollar amount of each contract awarded. This includes 3.3% for MBE utilization and 4.5% for WBE utilization. MBE/WBE Requirements During Bidding The apparent low bidder will, as a condition of contract award, be required to document to the Owner and to the Division that affirmative steps were taken in the preparation of bids to obtain MBE/WBE participation. Steps for Compliance are as follows: A. Solicit MBE/WBE quotes through direct mail and advertising and document that this was done. Indicate the source of the list(s) used. B. Document responses received. Document follow-up contact for firms not responding. C. Document contracts awarded, or intent to award, and indicate whether the contract is with anMBE or WBE certified firm. D. Document the basis on which the subcontractor/supplier was selected and/or rejected for all contracts awarded. I -5- ' I RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R-3/15/04) Lists of MBE/WBE firms are available from: A. Arkansas Department of Economic Development, Small and Minority Business Team; One Capitol Mall; Little Rock, AR 72201; Phone: (501) 682-1060; www.ahtd.state.ar.us/contract/program/letting B. Arkansas Highway and Transportation Department, Programs and Contracts Division; 10324 I-30; Post Office Box 2261; Little Rock, AR 72203 Phone: (501) 569-2288 C. Small Business Administration, Business Opportunity Section; 2120 Riverfront Drive, Suite 100; Little Rock, AR 72202-1747; Phone: (501) 324-5871; http://pro- net.sba.gov/ I I I I I En I I MBE/WBE Reporting Requirements In addition to the reporting and documentation requirements during bidding, the Contractor is required to report to the Owner within 15 days of the end of each calendar quarter, or to the Division as requested, all contracts awarded to MBE/WBE firms throughout the life of the contract, including the one (1) year Project Performance Period. The Owner is required to report to the Division within 30 days of the end of each calendar quarter, all contracts awarded by the Owner and subcontracts awarded by the Owner's Contractors to MBE/WBE firms. In accordance with 40 CFR 35, Subpart K, the Division must report to the Environmental Protection Agency all MBE/WBE participation in the RLF program, 2. DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION Individuals or organizations that have been debarred or excluded from participating in Federal Assistance programs under 40 CFR Part 32 are prohibited from participating in the RLF program. This prohibition applies for every contract and subcontract for materials, supplies, equipment, and services in excess of $25,000. Contractors and subcontractors shall execute the Contractors Act of Assurance Form as provided in the Contract Documents certifying compliance with 40 CFR Part 32. 3. PROCUREMENT PROHIBITIONS As required by Executive Order 11738, Section 306 of the Clean Air Act and Section 508 of the Clean Water Act, RLF loan recipients, prime contractors and subcontractors are prohibited from procuring goods and services from persons who have been convicted of violations of either law if the goods or services are to be produced by the facility that gave rise to the violation. 4. LABOR STANDARDS, The contractor and all subcontractors awarded subcontracts in excess of $2000.00 shall pay all laborers and mechanics employed on the project not less than the prevailing wage rates, as determined by the United States Secretary of Labor, in accordance with the Davis -Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a-7) as provided for in the contract documents. -6- I RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R-3/15/04) The wage decision identifies job classifications and minimum wages to be paid to all workers. ' Payrolls must be submitted weekly by the Contractor and all non-exempt Subcontractors to the Owner showing each worker's name, address, social security number, job classification, hourly rate of pay, daily regular and overtime hours, gross and net pay, and any fringe benefits where applicable. All workers are required to receive overtime pay in any week in which the hours worked exceed 40 hours per work week. Overtime is paid at a rate not less than I and 1/2 times the worker's base rate of pay. The Owner is responsible for monitoring contractor compliance with Davis -Bacon Act ' requirements. The Owner will check payrolls for compliance, maintain payroll files and make on -site interviews with the contractor's employees to verify payroll accuracy. 5. SAFETY STANDARDS OSHA Requirements The contractor is responsible for complying with the Department of ' Labor Safety and Health Regulations promulgated under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standard Act (40 U.S.C. 327-333). The contractor shall not require any laborer or mechanic employed in the performance of the•contract to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health or safety, as determined under construction safety and health standards promulgated by regulations of the ' Secretary of Labor. Job site situations which pose an immediate and serious threat to life or safety will be referred to ' the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). Trench Safety Act 291 of the 1993 Arkansas General Assembly applies to all public improvement construction projects that involve any trench or excavation which equals or exceeds five (5) feet in depth. Beginning March 1, 1993, Act 291 requires that: A. The current edition of Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standard for ' Excavation and Trenches Safety System, 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P, be specifically incorporated into the specifications for the project; and B. The contract bid form include a separate pay item for trench and excavation safety systems and be included in the base bid. In the event that a contractor fails to complete a separate pay item in accordance with the Act, the Owner shall declare that the bid fails to comply fully with the specifications and the bid will be considered invalid as a non -responsive bid. The Owner shall notify the Safety Division of the State Department of Labor of the award of a contract covered by this Act. -7- 1 I I RLF-53 (R -7/0l) (R-3/15/04) I I I I I I I I I L C I 6. CIVIL RIGHTS The Contractor and Subcontractors supplying materials, equipment and/or labor must comply with the Civil Rights Act of 1964 as amended- (42 U.S.C. 2000d et seq.), Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 as amended (29 U.S.C. 794), Section 13 of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of 1972 regarding sex discrimination (Public Law 92-500), and, the Age Discrimination Act of 1973. The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall provide equal employment opportunity for all qualified applicants and all contractor solicitations for employees must contain the Equal Employment Opportunity statement. The Prime Contractor must assure Subcontractor compliance with the Civil Rights Act for each subcontract by including the Act of Assurance form and these Supplemental Conditions in each Subcontract in excess of $10,000. Applicable Equal Employment Opportunity regulations and Nondiscrimination provisions are described in the Appendix to these.Supplemental Conditions. 7. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A Pre -Construction Conference (PCC) will be held following RLF loan closing, the review of bid documents by the Division and the award of the construction contract(s). Work orders will not be issued until after the PCC is held and the contractor has furnished an acceptable completion schedule as described by.these Supplemental Conditions. The•PCC shall be attended by the Owner, Engineer, Program Manager, Contractor(s), and representatives of the Division. The purpose of the conference will be to define the roles and responsibilities of the Owner, the Division, the Engineer, the Program Manager, and all Contractors during the performance of the Contract. 8. COMPLETION SCHEDULE The Contractor shall provide an estimated payment and work schedule prior to commencing work and shall modify it as necessary or as requested by the Owner throughout the construction period. One copy of the up-to-date schedule shall be maintained at the job site. 9. JOB BULLETIN BOARD . The contractor shall maintain a weather -tight job bulletin board in an area frequented by the contractor's employees for the duration of construction. The job bulletin board shall display at a minimum a copy of the wage decision, a notice to employees concerning minimum wage requirements, equal employment opportunity information, and a notice to labor unions as applicable. 10. PAYMENTS ' Disbursements from the Revolving Loan Fund shall be made monthly based upon actual work performed and materials stored on site less retainage. Funds will not be disbursed from the RLF I -8- I RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R-3/15/04) without approval by the Division. The Division will approve disbursements provided the Owner (loan recipient) and the Contractor are in compliance with the provisions of these contract documents and RLF regulations. Contract cost overruns approved by the Division but in excess of the loan amount must be funded by the Owner or through an additional loan. Contract cost overruns not approved by the Division must be funded by the Owner. Preparation of the Monthly Payment Estimate Each month the Contractor shall prepare and ' submit to the Program Manager through the Engineer a progress estimate acceptable in form and content to the Engineer and the Division. The estimate shall show a detailed breakdown of the amount of work completed to date, the amount of retainage, and the quantity and value of materials and equipment currently stored on site that have not been incorporated into the work. Attached to the estimate shall be invoices for stored materials and equipment delivered to the job since the last progress estimate and a labor standards certification as described below. The progress estimate shall include a certification by the contractor that it has complied with all labor standards. The Certification may be placed in the content of the progress estimate or Form RLF-74 (Certification by Contractor of Labor Standards Compliance) may be attached to the estimate. No disbursement request will be approved by the Division without this certification. The Engineer shall certify the construction contractor's progress estimate each month prior to presentation to the Owner. ' Retainage Retainage will be in accordance with state law (Arkansas Code of 1987 Annotated 22-9-604) and as described herein. An amount equal to 10% of the value of the work completed on each progress estimate shall be retained until the Engineer certifies that the work is. 50% complete. At 50% completion, an amount equal to 5% of the current contract amount shall be established as a fixed amount to be retained until the Engineer certifies that the contract is Substantially Completed. For purposes of this section, Substantial Completion shall be defined as the date in which all significant elements of the project have been constructed and tested as provided for in the Contract Documents and all significant elements have been or are ready to be placed into service for the Owner's benefit. Following certification by the Engineer that the work is substantially complete, the retainage shall be paid to the contractor on the next monthly payment estimate. Should the next monthly estimate not represent final payment on the contract, the Engineer shall not certify the estimate unless the balance due on the contract is of a sufficient amount to assure project completion. Retainage shall not be withheld on materials and equipment stored at the job site or in a bonded warehouse if approved by the Engineer. Request for Payment From the RLF The Owner shall request payment on RLF-76, Disbursement Request Form. The requested amount shall not exceed the current amounts approved for construction, engineering and other project costs on individual line items. Only those individuals authorized to represent the Owner and the Engineer shall sign the Disbursement Request Form. Documentation for costs incurred since the last disbursement request must -9- ' RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R-3/15/04) ' accompany each pay request including the Contractor's monthly pay estimate with attachments as described in these Supplemental Conditions and invoices for engineering, administrative, and ' legal services as well as approved equipment costs. Monthly Payment Cut-off Date The Owner is required to submit one copy of the completed ' RLF-76'and all supporting documentation to the Division for processing by the close of business on the third business day prior to the end of each month. Disbursement requests not received at ASWCC prior to this deadline will not be processed and paid until the following month. ' For the Owner to realize this deadline, contractor estimates should be received by the Engineer between the 15th to the 20th of each month. The actual due date for Contractor estimates shall ' be as established by the Contract Documents or by the Engineer. Processing Payments Disbursements from the RLF are generally received by the Owner (loan ' recipient) from ADFA within the first 10 working days of the month. The Owner shall promptly pay all bills due as disbursements are made from the RLF. ' Estimated Completion Date In addition to the Contract Time specified in these Contract Documents, the Bond Purchase Agreement between the Owner and the Division contains an estimated completion date beyond which no further loan disbursements will be made without ' specific written waiver by ADFA and the Division. ADFA and the Division will grant waivers only where there is sufficient documented evidence that project completion was delayed through no fault of the Contractor and the Owner. ' Regardless of the existence of circumstances where a delay in completion is beyond the control of the Contractor and the Owner, a waiver to the estimated completion date will not be granted should the granting of such waiver harm any commitments made to the purchasers of Revolving Loan Fund Bonds issued by ADFA. Should a wavier be denied, the Owner must complete the project with its own funds or apply for an additional loan from the RLF. ' Final Construction Payment Request Upon satisfactory completion of the work performed under this agreement and Division acceptance of the project, the Contractor shall execute and ' deliver to the Owner a release of all claims against the Owner arising under, or by virtue of, this agreement. No claim by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment to the Contract price or contract time shall be allowed if made after final payment under this agreement. ' Unless otherwise expressly agreed to by the parties to this agreement, final payment under this agreement or settlement upon termination of this agreement shall not constitute a waiver of the ' owner's claims against the Contractor or its sureties under this agreement. 11. CHANGE ORDERS ' Changes in the Work Changes in the Work shall be in accordance with Article 10 of Document 00700, General Conditions. - 1 I -10- RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R-3/15/04) I Division Approval of Change Orders All change orders modifying contract requirements must be approved by the Division. The Owner shall provide sufficient information such as a description and justification for the change, drawings, the contractor's proposal and the engineer's cost estimate and other supporting documentation to the Division for review. The Owner shall promptly notify the Division in writing of events or proposed changes which may substantially alter the design and scope of the project, alter the type of treatment provided or the location, size, capacity, or quality of any major item of equipment or treatment unit, or exceed the amount of funds available to complete the project. Should project changes increase the amount of funds necessary to complete the project beyond the initial loan amount, the Owner must fund the project changes or apply to the Division for a second loan to cover the cost overruns. 12. PROJECT INSPECTION 1 Contractor Supervision and Inspection The contractor will maintain an adequate inspection 1 and supervision system and perform required inspections and tests to assure that the work conforms to the contract requirements. The Contractor will make available to the Owner and the Division adequate records of such inspections and tests. Failed tests with passing retests will be clearly marked in the project records. Resident Inspection The Owner shall provide for full time inspection of the work by the Engineer to assure the work is being performed in accordance with the approved plans, specifications and change orders; and in accordance with sound engineering principles and building practices. The Resident Inspector(s) of the Owner will perform required inspections and tests and maintain on -site records as assurance that the work conforms to the contract requirements. The Resident Inspector shall make available to the Owner and Division representatives adequate records of such inspections and tests. Failed tests with passing retests will be clearly marked in the project records. Division Inspection The Division will make periodic engineering and administrative inspections of the project to examine project records, monitor progress and inspect the work for conformance with contract requirements. The Division shall notify the borrower and the consulting engineer of any observed deficiencies in the completed construction, procedures or materials used in construction, resident inspection, engineering supervision, financial management or any violation of loan program requirements. The Division will require the Owner to take such action as may be necessary to correct any such observed deficiency. Audit & Access to Records The Contractor shall maintain books, records, documents and other evidence directly pertinent to performance on RLF funded work under this agreement in accordance with the provisions of these Contract Documents. The Contractor shall also maintain the financial information and data used in the preparation or support of the cost submission required for a change order and a copy of the cost summary submitted to the Owner.•The Owner -11- ' I I. RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R-3/15/04) ' and the Division or any of their authorized representatives shall have access to all such books, records, documents and other evidence for the purpose of inspection, audit and copying during normal business hours. The Contractor will provide proper facilities for such access and inspection. ' Final Inspection Upon completion of all project construction, the Division will schedule a final ,inspection within 30 days of receipt of a written certification by the Owner that construction is complete and a final inspection is requested. Prior to approval of the final construction payment, ' the Division will verify that all construction is complete in accordance with plans, specifications and approved change orders, all equipment has been purchased and installed, the final contract amounts have been agreed to by Change Order, as -built drawings are complete, and the Owner ' has prepared an operation and maintenance manual that includes contractor supplied data as required by these Supplemental Conditions. Following an acceptable final inspection by the Division, the Division will provide written acceptance to the Owner of the project and the final construction payment shall be requested. The Division will not approve the final construction payment until the Owner and the Contractor ' has complied with the requirement for the release of final payment as outlined in the Contract Documents. 13. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS To assure quality control, the Contractor and the Resident Inspector shall each maintain a ' complete set of Plans and Specifications and approved shop drawings at the construction site. In addition, one set of Plans shall be maintained at the site solely for the purpose of marking authorized changes in the plans as the work progresses. These marked up drawings shall be used ' in the preparation of as -built drawings following project completion and shall be maintained in current condition at all times. ' 14. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL ' The Contractor shall furnish the number of copies specified elsewhere in these Contract Documents of all operation, maintenance, repair and replacement manuals, and product data for all equipment supplied by the contractor to the Owner. The Engineer shall not certify payments ' requesting more than 80% of the Contract amount until such time as all operation, maintenance, repair and replacement manuals, and product data has been furnished by the Contractor to the Owner. One copy shall be sent to and approved by Arkansas Soil and Water Conservation ' Commission at least two months prior to placing the item under contract into operation. TheOwner is required to obtain approval from the Division of the project operation and maintenance manual prior to the release of the final construction payment. I ' -12- I RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R-3/15/04) 15. ARCHAEOLOGICAL, HISTORICAL, AND CULTURAL REMAINS The Contractor shall immediately stop all work in any area where artifacts of archaeological, historical or cultural significance are found and notify the Engineer. The Owner shall notify the Division, the State Advisory Council on Historic Preservation and the Arkansas Natural Heritage Commission of the discovery. 16. PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ' The Contractor will provide for protection of the environment as required by the Contract Documents, Local Ordinance, State and Federal Law and these Supplemental Conditions. The ' Contractor shall: A. Limit the area of construction disturbance to areas within temporary and permanent easements and the land areas designated for the contractors use in performing the work. B. Provide for the protection of trees, shrubs and grass wherever possible. C. Provide for the prevention of air pollution through burning permits as required. The Contractor shall provide dust control on haul roads as site conditions dictate. I D. Control noise pollution by providing efficient mufflers on all machinery and limiting work hours if required by the Contract Documents. , E. Control excessive erosion and sedimentation at the job site through prompt seeding of disturbed areas and the construction of temporary control measures as required in the contract documents and by Storm Water Permits. F. Perform the work in coordination with the Owner and in a manner that will provide for the continuous transport and treatment of wastewater during construction. G. Cease all work in areas where species classified as threatened or endangered under the Endangered Species Act (Public Law .93-205 as amended) are discovered and promptly notify the Engineer. 17. STORM WATER PERMIT REQUIREMENTS The Contractor is advised that if this construction activity involves clearing, grading or excavation activities that result in the disturbance of five or more acres of total land area including areas which are part of the total RLF project, this activity is subject to Storm Water ' Permit requirements of the Arkansas Department of Environmental Quality. The contractor must obtain a site specific Storm Water Discharge Permit or apply for inclusion under the General Permit Number ARR1 0A000 covering construction activities. Most RLF projects are eligible for inclusion under the General Permit. -13- ' I ' RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R-3/15/04) ' To be included under the General Permit, the contractor must submit the Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours before the construction activity is to begin. An initial permit fee ($100.00 as of I1992) must accompany the NOI and the. Contractor will be billed for an annual renewal fee. A financial disclosure statement must accompany the NOI. ' The General Permit requires that the Contractor control the entrance of pollutants into the surface and:ground waters of the State. Temporary and permanent sediment and erosion control measures must be included in the work during the course of construction. These measures may ' include temporary and permanent seeding, construction of catch basins, the use of mulch, hay bales and silt fences to control sediments, the use of rip -rap at erosion prone areas, and other measures, ' The General Permit also requires the contractor to maintain "good housekeeping practices" that include items such as proper waste disposal, proper storage for hazardous materials and ' designating safe places for equipment maintenance and wash -down. The Contractor is required to maintain on site a Pollution Prevention Plan describing the storm ' water pollution prevention measures that will be taken at the construction site. The Plan must include a site description, a description of the nature of the activity, the intended sequence of the work, estimates of the total area involved in the activity, an estimate of the possible volume of ' run-off from the area, site maps showing drainage patterns, pollution prevention measures that will be taken and other items. Additional information and application materials may be obtained by calling or writing: Arkansas Department of Environmental Quality Storm Water Permits Section ' 8001 National Drive Post Office Box 8913 ' Little Rock, Arkansas 72219-8913 Telephone Number: (501) 682-0744 '• Facsimile Number: (501) 682-0910 18. GRATUITIES ' If the Owner finds after a notice and hearing that the Contractor or any of the Contractor's agents or representatives offered or gave gratuities (in the form of entertainment, gifts or otherwise) to ' any.official, employee or agent of the Owner, or the State, in an attempt to secure an agreement or favorable treatment in awarding, amending or making any determinations related to the performance of this agreement, the Owner may, by written notice to the Contractor, terminate ' this agreement. The Owner may also pursue other rights and remedies that the law or this agreement provides. However, the existence of the facts on which the Owner bases such findings shall be at issue and may be reviewed in proceedings under the Disputes and Remedies section of these Supplemental Conditions. ' -14- I RLF-53 (R-7/01) (R -3/I5/04) 19. SUSPENSION OF WORK Suspension of the Work shall be in accordance with Article 15 of Document 00700, General Conditions. 20. TERMINATION Termination of the Work shall be in accordance with Article 15 of Document 00700, General Conditions. -15- RLF-53 (R-7/01) Appendix A United States Environmental Protection Agency Washington, DC 20460 Labor Standards Provisions for Federally Assisted Contracts Davis -Bacon and Related Acts Section 5.5 Contract provisions and related matters. (a) The Administrator of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requires the contracting officer to insert in full in any contract in excess of $2,000 which is entered into for the actual construction, alteration and/or repair, including painting and decorating, of a public building or public work, or building or work financed in whole or in part from Federal funds or in accordance with guarantees of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or financed from funds obtained by pledge of any contract of a Federal agency to make a loan, grant, or annual contribution and which is subject to the labor standards provisions of any of the acts listed in section 5.1, the following clauses: (1) Minimum wages. H (i) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the ' work will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3)), the full ' amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual ' relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b) (2) of the Davis -Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered ' wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (a) (1) (iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly 'period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the ' wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in section 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification maybe compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually work therein: Provided, that the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section) and the Davis- ' ApA-1 F RLF-53 (R-7/01) Appendix A Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractor at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. (ii)(A) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (1) Except with respect to helpers as defined in 29 CFR 5.2 (n)(4), the classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (2) The work be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (4) With respect to helpers as defined in 29 CFR 5.2 (n)(4), such a classification prevails in the area in which the work is performed. (B) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration (W&H, ESA), U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator W&H, ESA, or an authorized representatives, will approve, modify, or disapproved every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30 -day period that additional time is necessary. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB control number 1215-0140.) (C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator W&H, ESA for determination. The Administrator W&H, ESA, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30 -day period that additional time is necessary. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB control number 1215-0140.) (D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determination pursuant to subparagraphs (1)(B) or (C) of this paragraph, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the ApA-2 RLF-53 (R-7/01) Appendix A classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or anhourlycash equivalent thereof. (iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as partof the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reason anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, provided, that the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis -Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting obligations under the plan or program. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB control number 1225-0140.) (2) Withholding. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this. contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other Federal assisted contract subject to Davis -Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work, all or part of the wages required by the contract, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. I I (3) Payrolls and Basic Records. (i) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work. Such records shall contain the name, address, and Social Security Number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis -Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section I (b)(2)(B) of the Davis -Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the ApA-3 I RLF-53 ' (R-7/01) Appendix A registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (Approved by the Office of Management of Budget under OMB control 1215-0140 and 1215-0017.) (ii)(A) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit the payrolls to the applicant, sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under section 5.5(a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR Part 5. This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form 347 is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents (Federal Stock Number 029-005-00014-1), U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB control number 1215-0149.) (B) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance," signed by the ' contractor or subcontractor or his or heragent who pays or.supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: (1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under section 5.5(a)(3)(i) of 29 CFR Part 5 and that such information is correct and complete; (2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR Part 3; (3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. (C) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form 347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the "Statement of Compliance" required by paragraph (a) (3) (ii) (B) of this section. (D) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 231 of Title 31 of the United States Code. (iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a) (3) (i) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the U.S. ApA-4 LI ' RLF-53 (R-7/01) Appendix A ' Environmental Protection Agency may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, ' advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. ' (4)' Apprentices and Trainees ;(i) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for ' the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State ' Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not ,individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of ' Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the. ' contractor as to entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of ' work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage deters ination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is ' performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program for the apprentice's level of ' progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits ' listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator W&H, ESA determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, "fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In event the Bureau of ' Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less ' than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The I ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed ' as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If ' ApA-5 RLF-53 (R-7/01) Appendix A the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provide for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (iii) Equal Employment Opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30. (5) Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR Part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract. (6) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a) (1) through (10) and such other clauses as the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5. (7) Contract termination: debarment. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. (8) Compliance with Davis -Bacon and Related Act requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis -Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3, and 5 are ' herein incorporated by reference in this contract. (9) Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. ' ApA-6 ' U U I I I I U RLF-53 (R-7/01) Appendix A (10) Certification of Eligibility. (i) By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm in a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR .5:12(a) (1). (ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for "award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR -5.12(a) (1).. (iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. (b) Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. The Administrator, EPA shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert the following clauses set forth in paragraph (b)(1), (2), d(3), and (4) of this section in full in any contract subject to the overtime provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. These clauses shall be inserted in addition to the clauses required by section 5.5(a) of this title. As used in this paragraph, the terms "laborers" and "mechanics" include watchmen and guards. ' (1) Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any work week in which he or she is employed Ion such work to in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. ' (2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section the contractor and any subcontractor I. responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. ' Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or ' permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section. (3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. The U.S. Environmental ' Protection Agency shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys ' payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other Federally -assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same ' prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. I ApA-7 I RLF-53 (R-7/01) Appendix A (4) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraph (b)(1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (b)(1) through (4) of this section. (c) In addition to the clauses contained in paragraph (b), in any contract subject only to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act and not to any of the other statutes cited in section 5.1, the Administrator of EPA shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert a clause requiring that the contractor or subcontractor shall maintain payrolls and basic payroll records during the course of the work and shall preserve them for a period of three years from the completion of the contract for all laborers and mechanics, including guards and watchmen, ' working on the contract. Such records shall contain the name and address of each such employee, social security number, correct classifications, hourly worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Further, the Administrator EPA shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert in any such contract a clause providing that the records to be maintained under this paragraph shall be made available by the contractor or subcontractor for inspection, copying, or ' transcription by authorized representatives of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the Department of Labor, and the contractor or subcontractor will permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. (Approved by the Office of Management ' and Budget under OMB control numbers 1215-0140 and 1215-0017.) I Li I I I ApA-8 t RLF-53 (R-7/01) Appendix B RULES AND REGULATIONS TITLE 41- PUBLIC CONTRACT AND PROPERTY MANAGEMENT CHAPTER 60 - OFFICE OF FEDERAL CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAMS, EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY, DEPARTMENT OF LABOR COMPLIANCE RESPONSIBILITY FOR EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY FINAL RULE PART 60-1 OBLIGATIONS OF CONTRACTORS AND SUB -CONTRACTORS §60-L4 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE (b) FEDERALLY ASSISTED CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS (1) Except as otherwise provided, each administering agency shall require the inclusion of the following language as a condition of any grant, contract, loan, insurance, or guarantee involving federally assisted construction which is not exempt from the requirements of the equal opportunity clause: The applicant hereby agrees that it will incorporate or cause to be incorporated into any contract for construction work, or modification thereof, as defined in the regulations of the Secretary of Labor at 41 CFR Chapter 60, which is paid for in whole or in part with funds obtained from the Federal Government or borrowed on the credit of the Federal Government pursuant to a grant, contract, loan insurance, or guarantee, or undertaken pursuant to any Federal program involving such grant, contract, loan, insurance, or guarantee, the following equal opportunity clause: During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: (1) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, or national origin, such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: Employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other form of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. J I (2) The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that al qualified applicants will receive considerations for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. ApB-1 Ti RLF-53 ' (R-7/01) Appendix B (3) The contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice to be provided advising the said labor union or workers' representatives of the contractor's commitments under this section, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. ' (4) The contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the ' Secretary of Labor. (5) The contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, his books, records, and accounts by the administering agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance ' with such rules, regulations, and orders, (6) In the event of the contractor's non-compliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any of the said rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts or t federally assisted construction contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may ' be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. (7) The contractor will include the portion of the sentence immediately preceding paragraph (1) and the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (7) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the administering agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance: PROVIDED, HOWEVER. That in the event a contractor becomes involved in or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the administering agency the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interest of the United States. The applicant further agrees that it will be bound by the above equal opportunity clause with respect to its own employment practices when it participates in federally assisted construction work: PROVIDED, That if the applicant so participating is a State or local government, the above equal opportunity clause is not applicable to any agency, instrumentality or subdivision of such government which does not participate in work on or under the contract. ApB-2 ' I RLF-53 (R-7/01) Appendix B The applicant agrees that it will assist and cooperate actively with the administering. agency and the Secretary of Labor in obtaining the compliance of contractors and subcontractors with the equal opportunity clause and the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor, that it will furnish the administering agency and the Secretary of Labor such information as they may require for the supervision of such compliance, and that it will otherwise .assist the administering agency in the discharge of the agency's primary responsibility for securing compliances. The applicant further agrees that it will refrain from entering into any contract or contract modification subject to Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, with a contractor debarred from, or who has not demonstrated eligibility for, Government contracts and federally assisted construction contracts pursuant to the Executive order and will carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of the equal opportunity clause as may be imposed upon contractors 'and subcontractors by the administering agency or the Secretary of Labor pursuant to Part II, Subpart D of the Executive order. In addition, the applicant agrees that if it fails or refuses to comply with these undertakings, the administering agency may take any or all of the following actions: Cancel, terminate, or suspend in whole or in part this grant (contract, loan, insurance, guarantee): refrain from extending any further assistance to the applicant under the program with respect to which the failure or refund occurred until satisfactory assurance of future compliance has been received from such applicant; and refer the case to the Department of Justice for appropriate legal proceedings. (c) SUBCONTRACTS. Each nonexempt prime contractor or subcontractor shall include the equal opportunity clause in each of its nonexempt subcontracts. (d) INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE. The equal opportunity clause may be ' incorporated by reference in all Government contracts and subcontracts, including Government bills of lading, transportation requests, contracts for deposit of Government funds, and contracts for issuing and paying U.S. savings bonds and notes, and such. other contracts and subcontracts ' as the director may designate. (e) INCORPORATION BY OPERATION OF THE ORDER. By operation of the ' Order, the equal opportunity clause shall be considered to be apart of every contract and subcontract required by the Order and the regulations in this part to include such a clause whether or not it is physically incorporated in such contracts and whether or not the contract between the agency and the contractor is written. (f) ADAPTATION OF LANGUAGE. Such necessary changes in language may be ' made in the equal opportunity clause as shall be appropriate to identify properly the parties and their undertakings. I I L ApB-3 L] RLF-53 ' (R-7/01) Appendix B Part 60-4 - CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTORS - AFFIRMATIVE ACTION ' REQUIREMENTS §60-4.2 SOLICITATIONS. ' (a) All Federal contracting officers and:.all applicants shall include the notice set forth in paragraph (d) of this section and the Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications set forth in §60-4.3 of this part in all solicitations for offers and bids on all Federal and federally assisted construction contracts or subcontracts to be performed in geographical areas designated by the Director pursuant to §60-4.6 of the part. Administering agencies shall require the inclusion of the notice set forth in paragraph (d) of this section and the specifications set forth in §60-4.3 of this part as a condition of any grant, contract, subcontract, loan, insurance or guarantee involving federally assisted construction covered by this part 60-4. (b) All nonconstruction contractors covered by Executive Order 11246 and the implementing regulations shall include the notice in paragraph (d) of this section in all construction agreements which are necessary in whole or in part to the performance of the covered nonconstruction contract. (c) Contracting officers, applicants and nonconstruction contractors shall given (SIC) ' written notice to the Director within 10 working days of award of a contract subject to these provisions. The notification shall include the name, address and telephone number of the contractor; employer identification number; dollar amount of the contract, estimated starting and completion dates of the contract; the contract number; and geographical area in which the contract is to be performed. (d) The following notice shall be included in, and shall be a part of, all solicitations for offers and bids on all Federal and federally assisted construction contracts or subcontracts in excess of $10,000 to be performed in geographical areas designed by the Director pursuant to §60-4.5 of this part (see 4) CFR 60-4.2 (a)): NOTICE OF REQUIREMENT FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION TO ENSURE EQUAL ' EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY (EXECUTIVE ORDER 11246) 1. The Offeror's or Bidder's attention is called to the "Equal Opportunity Clause" II and the "Standard Federal Equal Employment Specifications" set forth herein. 2. The goals and timetables for minority and female participation, expressed in ' percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate work force in each trade on all construction work in the covered area, are as follows: Time- Goals for minority Goals for female tables participation for participation in each trade each trade ApB-4 I I I I E L The Contractor's compliance with the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR ' Part 60-4 shall be based on its implementation of the Equal Opportunity Clause, specific affirmative action obligations required by the specification set forth in 41 CFR 60-4.3 (a), and its efforts to meet the goals. The hours of minority and female employment and training must be ' substantially uniform throughout the length of the contract, and in each trade, and the contractor shall make a good faith effort to employ minorities and women evenly on each of its projects. The transfer of minority or female employees or trainees from Contractor to Contractor or from ' project to project for the sole purpose of the meeting the Contractor's goals shall be a violation of the contract, the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR part 60-4, Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total work hours performed. ' 3. The Contractor shall provide.written notification to the Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs within 10 working days of award of any construction ' sub -contract in excess of $10,000 at any tier for construction work under the contract resulting from this solicitation. The notification shall list the name, address and telephone number of the subcontractor; employer identification number; estimated dollar amount of the subcontract; ' estimated starting and completion dates of the subcontract; and the geographical area in which the contract is to be performed. '• 4. As used in this Notice, and in the contract resulting from this solicitation, the "covered area" is (insert description of the geographical areas where the contract is to be performed giving the state, county and city, if any). §60-4.3 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSES; Insert goals for each year. Insert goals for each year. RLF-53 (R-7/01) Appendix B These goals are applicable to all the Contractor's construction work (whether or not it is Federal or federally assisted) performed in the covered area. If the contractor performs .construction work in a geographical area located outside of the covered area, it shall apply the •?goals established for such geographical area where the work is actually performed, with regard to this second area, the contractor also is subject to the goals for both its federally involved and nonfederally involved construction. I U II I I (a) The equal opportunity clause published at 41 CFR 60-1.4 (a) of this chapter is required to be included in, and is part of, all nonexempt Federal contracts and subcontracts, including construction contracts and subcontracts. The equal opportunity clause published at 41 CFR 60-1.4 (b) is required to be included in, and is a part of, all nonexempt federally assisted construction contracts and subcontracts. In addition to the clauses described above, all Federal contracting officers, all applicants and all nonconstruction contractors as applicable, shall include the specifications set forth in this section in all Federal and federally assisted construction contracts in excess of $10,000 to be performed in geographical areas designated by the Director pursuant to §60-4.6 of this part and in construction subcontracts in excess of $10,000 necessary in whole or in part to the performance of non -construction Federal contracts and subcontracts covered under the Executive Order. ApB-5 RLF-53 (R-7/01) Appendix B STANDARD FEDERAL EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS (EXECUTIVE ORDER 11246) 1. As used in these specifications: a. "Covered area" means the geographical area described in the solicitation from which this contract resulted: b. "Director" means Director, Office of Federal Contracts Compliance Programs, United States Department of Labor, or any person to who the Director delegates authority: c. "Employer identification number" means the Federal Social Security number used on the Employer' s Quarterly Federal Tax Return, U.S. Treasury Department Form 941. d. "Minority" includes: (i) Black (all persons having origins in any of the Black African racial ' groups not of Hispanic origin); (ii) Hispanic (all persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central or ' South American or other Spanish Culture or origin, regardless or race); (iii) Asian and Pacific Islander (all persons having origins in any of the original peoples of the Far East, Southeast Asia, the Indian Subcontinent, or the Pacific Islands): and (iv) American Indian or Alaskan Native (all persons having origins in any of the original peoples of North America and maintaining identifiable tribal affiliations through membership and participation or community identification). 2. Whenever the Contractor, or any Subcontractor at any tier, subcontracts a portion of the work involving any construction trade, it shall physically include in each subcontract in excess of $10,000 the provisions of these specifications and the Notice which contains the applicable goals for minority and female participation and which a set forth in the solicitations from which this contract resulted.' 3. If the Contractor is participating (pursuant to 41 CFR 60-4.5) in a Hometown Plan approved by the U.S. Department of Labor in the covered area either individually or through an association. Its affirmative action obligations on all work in the Plan area (including goals and timetables) shall be in accordance with that Plan for those trades which have unions participating in the Plan. Contractors must be able to demonstrate, their participation in and compliance with the provisions of any such Hometown Plan. Each Contractor or Subcontractor participating in a ApB-6 ' I RLF-53 (R -7l01) Appendix B approved Plan is individually required to comply with its obligations under the EEO clause, and to make a good faith effort to achieve each goal under the Plan in each trade in which it has employees. The overall good faith performance by other Contractors or Subcontractors toward a goal in an approved Plan does not excuse any covered Contractor's or Subcontractor's failure to take good faith efforts to achieve the Plan goals and timetables. 4. The Contractor shall implement the specific affirmative action standards provided in paragraphs 7a through p of these specifications. The goals set forth in the solicitation from which this contract resulted are expressed as percentages of the total hours of employment and training of minority and female utilization the Contractor should reasonably be able to achieve in each construction trade in which it has employees in the covered area. Covered construction contractors performing construction work in geographical areas where they do not have a Federal of federally assisted construction contract shall apply the minority and female goals established for the geographical area where the work is being performed. Goals are published periodically in the Federal Register in notice form, and such notices may be obtained from any Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs office or from Federal procurement contracting officers. The contractor is expected to make substantially uniform progress in meeting the goals in each craft during the period specified. Neither the provisions of any collective bargaining agreement, or the failure by a union with whom the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement, to refer either minorities or women shall excuse the Contractor's obligations under these specifications. Executive Order 11246, or the regulations promulgated pursuant thereto. 6. In order for the non -working training hours of apprentices and trainees to be counted in meeting the goals, such apprentices and trainees must be employed by the Contractor during the training period, and the Contractor must have made a commitment to employ the apprentices and trainees at the completion of their training, subject to the availability of employment opportunities. The trainees must be trained pursuant to training programs approved by the U.S. Department of Labor. The Contractor shall take specific affirmative actions to ensure equal employment opportunity. The evaluation of the Contractor's compliance with these specifications shall be based upon its effort to achieve maximum results from its actions. The Contractor shall document these efforts fully, and shall implement affirmative action steps at least as extensive as the following: a. Ensure and maintain a working environment free of harassment, intimidation, and coercion at all sites, and in all facilities at which the Contractor's employees are assigned to work. The Contractor, where possible, will assign two or more women to each construction project. The Contractor 'shall ApB-7 RLF-53 ' (R-7/01) Appendix B specifically ensure that all foremen, superintendents, and other on -site supervisory personnel are aware of and carry out the Contractor's obligation to maintain such a working environment, with specific attention to minority or female individuals working at such sites or in such facilities. b. Establish and maintain a current list of minority and female recruitment ' sources, provide written notification to minority and female recruitment sources and to community organizations when the Contractor or its unions have employment opportunities available, and maintain a record of the ' organizations responses. c. Maintain a current file of the names, addresses and telephone numbers of each minority and female off -the -street applicant and minority or female referral from a union, a recruitment source or community organization and of what action was taken with respect to each such individual. If such individual was sent to the union hiring hall for referral and was not referred back to the Contractor by the union or, if referred, not employed by the Contractor, this shall be documented in the file with the reason therefore, along with what -ever ' additional actions the Contractor may have taken. d. Provide immediate written notification to the Director when the union or unions with which the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement has not referred to the Contractor a minority person or woman sent by the Contractor, or when the Contractor has other information that the union referral process has impeded the Contractor's efforts to meets its obligations. e. Develop on-the-job training opportunities and/or participate in training ' programs for the area which expressly include minorities and women, including upgrading programs and apprenticeship and trainee programs relevant to the Contractor's employment needs, especially those programs funded or approved by the Department of Labor. The Contractor shall provide notice of these programs to the sources complied under 7b above. f. Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy by providing notice of the policy by providing notice of the policy to unions and training programs and requesting their cooperation in assisting the Contractor in meeting its EEO obligations; by including it in any policy manual and collective bargaining agreement; by publicizing it in the company newspaper, annual report, etc.; by specific review of the policy with all management personnel and with all minority and female employees at least once a year; and by posting the company EEO policy on bulletin boards accessible to all employees at each location where ' construction work is performed. g. Review, at least annually, the company's EEO policy and affirmative action obligations under these specifications with all employees having any responsibility for hiring, assignment, layoff, termination or other employment ApB-8 ' RLF-53 (R-7/01) Appendix B decisions including specific review of these items with onsite supervisory personnel such as Superintendents, General Foremen, etc., prior to the initiation of construction work at any job site. A written record shall be made and maintained identifying the time and place of these meetings, persons attending, subject matter discussed, and disposition of the subject matter. h. Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy externally by including it in any advertising in the news media, specifically including minority and female new media; and providing written notification to and discussing the Contractor's EEO policy with other Contractors and Subcontractors with who the Contractor does or anticipates doing business. I. 1 1 1 1 L II I E1 i. Direct its recruitment efforts, both oral and written, to minority, female and community organizations, to schools with minority and female students and to minority and female recruitment and training organizations serving the Contractor's recruitment area and employment needs. Not later than one month prior to the date for the acceptance of applications for apprenticeship or other training by any recruitment source, the Contractor shall send written notification to organizations such as the above, describing the openings, screening procedures, and tests to be used in the selection process. j. Encourage present minority and female employees to recruit other minority persons and women and, 'where reasonable, provide after school, summer and vacation employment to minority and female youth both on the site and in other areas of a Contractor's work force. k. Validate all tests and other selection requirements where there is an obligation to do so under 41 CFR part60-3. 1. Conduct, at least annually, an inventory and evaluation at least of all minority and female personnel forpromotional opportunities and encourage these employees to seek or to prepare for, through appropriate training, etc., such opportunities. m. Ensure that seniority practices, job classifications, work assignments and other personnel practices, do not have a discriminatory effect by continually monitoring all personnel and employment related activities to ensure that the EEO policy and the Contractor's obligation under these specifications are being carried out. n. Ensure that all facilities and company activities are nonsegregated except that separate or single -user toilet and necessary changing facilities shall be provided to assure privacy between the sexes. o. Document and maintain a record of all solicitations of offers for subcontracts from minority and female construction contractors and suppliers, including RLF-53 (R-7/01) Appendix B circulation of solicitations to minority and female contractor associations and other business associations. p. Conduct a review, at least annually, of all supervisors' adherence to and performance under the Contractor's EEO policies and affirmative action obligations. Contractors are encouraged to participate in voluntary associations which assist in fulfilling one or more of their affirmative action obligations (7a through p). The efforts of contractor association, joint contractor -union, contractor -community, or other similar group of which the contractor is a member and participating may be asserted as fulfilling any one or more to its obligations under 7a through p of these Specifications provided that the contractor actively participates in the group, makes every effort to assure that the group has a positive impact on the employment of minorities and women in the industry, ensures that the concrete benefits of the program are reflected in the Contractor's minority and female work force participation, makes a good faith effort to meet its individual goals and timetables, and can provide access to documentation which demonstrates the effectiveness of actions taken on behalf to the Contractor. The obligation to comply, however, is the Contractor's and failure of such a group to fulfill an obligation shall not be a defense for the Contractor's noncompliance. 9. A single goal for minorities and a separate single goal for women have been established. The Contractor, however, is required to provide equal employment opportunity and to take affirmative action for all minority groups, both male and female, and all women, both minority and non -minority. Consequently, the Contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a particular group is employed in a substantially disparate manner (for example, even though the Contractor has achieved its goals for women generally, the Contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a specific minority group of women is underutilized). 10. The Contractor shall not use the goals and timetables or affirmative action standards to discriminate against any person because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. 11. The Contractor shall not enter into any Subcontract with any person or firm debarred from Government contracts pursuant to Executive Order 11246. 12. The Contractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of these specifications and of the Equal Opportunity Clause, including suspension, termination and cancellation of existing subcontracts as may be imposed or ordered pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and its implementing regulations, by the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs. Any Contractor who fails to carry out such sanctions and penalties shall be in violation of these specifications and Executive Order 11246, as amended. ApB- 10 RLF-53 (R-7/01) Appendix B 13. The Contractor; in fulfilling its obligations under these specifications, shall implement specific affirmative action steps, at least as extensive as those standards prescribed in paragraph 7 of these specifications, so as to achieve maximum results from its efforts to ensure equal employment opportunity. If the Contract fails to comply with the requirements to the Executive Order, the implementing regulations, or these specifications, the Director shall proceed in accordance with 41 CFR 60-4.8. 14. The Contractor shall designate a responsible official to monitor all employment related activity to ensure that the company EEO policy is being carried out, to submit reports relating to the provisions hereof as may be required by the Government and to keep records. Records shall at least include for each employee the name, address, telephone numbers, construction trade, union affiliation, if any, employee identification number when assigned, social security number, race, sex, status (e.g., mechanic, apprentice trainee, helper, or laborer), dates of changes of status, hours worked per week in the indicated trade, rate of pay, and locations at which the work was performed. Records shall be maintained in an easily understandable and retrievable form; however, to the degree that existing records satisfy this requirement, contractors shall not be required to maintain separate records. 15. Nothing herein provided shall be construed as a limitation upon the application of other laws which establish different standards of compliance or upon the application of requirements for the hiring of local or other area residents (e.g., those under the Public Works Employment Act of 1977 and the Community Development Block Grant Program). (b) The notice set forth in 41 CFR 60-4.2 and the specifications set forth in 41 CFR 60-4.3 replace the New Form for Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Bid Conditions for Federal and Federally Assisted Construction published at 41 FR 32482 and commonly known as the Model Federal EEO Bid Conditions, and the New Form shall not used after the regulations in 41 CFR part 60-4 become effective. ApB- 11 ' Mike Huckabee Governor I I I U Mr. Michael J. Galluzzo, P.E. RJN Group, Inc. 727 N. 1" St., Ste. 240 St. Louis, MO 63102 STATE OF ARKANSAS ARKANSAS DEPARTMENT OF LABOR 10421 WEST MARKHAM • LITTLE ROCK, ARKANSAS 72205-2190 (501) 682-4500 • FAX: (501) 682-4535 • TDD: (800) 285-1131 March 16, 2006 James L. Salkeld Director MAR 2, 7 2006 Re: Hamestring Lift Station Fayetteville, Arkansas Washington County ' Dear Mr. Galluzzo: ' In response to your request, enclosed is Arkansas Prevailing Wage Determination Number 05-376 establishing the minimum wage rates to be paid on the above -referenced project. These rates were established pursuant to the Arkansas Prevailing Wage Law, Ark. Code Ann. §§ 22-9-301 to 22-9-315 and the administrative regulations promulgated thereunder. Please be advised that this determination supersedes #04-242 Issued January 31, 2005. I. If the work Is subject to the Arkansas Prevailing Wage Law, every specification shall include minimum prevailing wage rates for each craft or type of worker as determined by the Arkansas Department of Labor Ark. Code Ann. § 22-9-308 (b) (2). Also, the public body awarding the contract shall cause to be inserted in the ' contract a stipulation to the effect that not less than the prevailing hourly rate of wages shall be paid to all workers performing work under the contract. Ark. Code Ann. § 22-9-308 (c). ' Additionally, the scale of wages shall be posted by the contractor in a prominent and easily accessible place at the work site. Ark. Code Ann. § 22-9-309 (a). ' Also enclosed is a "Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages" form that should be put in your specifications along with the wage determination. The General/Prime Contractor is responsible for getting this form filled out and returned to this office within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed for this project. ' When you issue the Notice to Proceed for this project, please mail or fax a copy of the notice to my office. 1 If you have any questions, please call me at (501) 682-4536 or fax (501) 682-4508. ' Sincerely, e ' Don Cash Prevailing Wage Division ' Enclosures PREVAILING WAGE DETERMINATION . BUILDING RATES DATE: March 16, 2006 DETERMINATION #: 05-376 ' PROJECT: Hamestring Lift Station COUNTY: Washington Fayetteville, Arkansas EXPIRATION DATE: 9-16-06 ' SURVEY #: 705-AR05 ' BASIC HOURLY FRINGE CLASSIFICATION RATE BENEFITS ' Asbestos Worker/Insulator 9.50 Bricklayer/Pointer, Cleaner, Caulker 18.80 ' Carpenter 14.55 1.90 Concrete Finisher/Cement Mason 14.00 .54 Electrician/Alarm Installer: 'Electrical contracts under $500,000 18.80 7.56 Electrical contracts $500,000 & Over 20.30 7.56 Elevator Mechanic 24.30 12.18 'Glazier 12.55 .75 HVACR Mechanic (Excluding HVAC Duct Work) 14.25 Ironworker (Including Reinforcing Work) 13.95 2.95 • ' Laborer 9.35 Marble%Tle/Terrazzo Setter 12.69 Metal Building Erector (Includes all construction of pre -fabricated ' components supplied by the manufacturer) 12.55 Millwright 10.85 1.65 'Painter/Sheet Rock Finisher 12.00 Plasterer 13.60 Plumber/Pipefitter 17.95 1.10 'Roofer 12.65 2.60 Sheet Metal Worker (Including HVAC Duct Work) 14.80 3.55 Sprinkler Fitter 20.90 3.70 ' Truck Driver 11.00 Waterproofer 14.00 1.09 Power Equipment Operators: ' Group I 14.75 2.85 Group II 14.40 3.78 Group III 11.60 ' Group IV 10.25 ' Welders —receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Certified September 30, 2005 Classifications that are required, but not listed above, must be requested in writing from the Arkansas Department of Labor, Prevailing Wage Division. Please call (501) 682-4536 for a request form. -•....... ....-.v rr. .... ..-.&.r. . yr LMwa PREVAILING WAGE DETERMINATION - BUILDING RATES • DATE: March 16, 2006 PROJECT: Hamestring Lift Station Fayetteville, Arkansas Power Eauipment Operators: DETERMINATION #: 05-376 COUNTY: Washington EXPIRATION DATE: 9-16-06 SURVEY #: 705-AR0S Group I Operators engaged in operating the following equipment: Cranes, draglines, shovels and piledrivers with a lifting capacity of 50 tons or over, and operators of all tower climbing cranes and derricks required to work 25 feet or over from the ground, blacksmith and mechanics. Group II Operators engaged in operating the following equipment or performing work relative to the engineer's jurisdiction: Hydraulic cranes, cherry pickers, backhoes, and all derricks with a lifting capacity less than 50 tons, as specified by the manufacturer, all backhoes, tractor or truck type, all overhead & traveling cranes, or tractors with swinging boom attachments, gradealls, all above equipment irrespective of motive power, leverman (engineer), hydraulic or bucket dredges, irrespective of size. Group IGroppjll Heavy Equipment Operators. Operators engaged in operating the following equipment: all bulldozers, all front end loaders, all sidebooms, skytracks, forklifts, all push tractors, all pull scrapers, all motor graders, all trenching machines, regardless of size or motive power, all backfillers, all central mixing plants, 10S and larger,, finishing machines, all boiler fireman high or low pressure, all asphalt spreaders, hydro truck crane, multiple drum hoist, irrespective of motive power, all rotary, cable tool, core drill or churn drill, water well and foundation drilling machines, regardless of size, regardless of motive power and dredge tender operator. Group IV Light Equipment Operators. Operators engaged in operating the following equipment: Oilerdriver motor crane, single drum hoists, winches and air tuggers, irrespective of motive power, winch or A frame trucks, rollers of all types and pull tractors, regardless of size, elevator operators inside and outside when used for carrying workmen from floor to floor and handling building material, Lad-A- Vator Conveyor, batch plant, and mortar or concrete mixers, below 105, end dump euclid, pumperete spray machine and pressure grout machine, air compressors, regardless of size. All light equipment, welding machines, light plants, pumps, all well point system dewatering and portable pumps, space heater, irrespective of size, and motive power, equipment greaser, oiler, mechanic helper, drilling machine helper, asphalt distributor and like equipment, safety boat operator and deckhand. L. I I Z a 00 F - z W H z O f W R (A cc JQu gig d C �s E 10 Xis. I a — .5 C C ap in o ai C O I E z c ao c 3 .O U) 0) c 8 yL V 12 0 8 c y Ow On V) �o z� Q2o LU.1r. , D OO �z z W yF�j U zL <0 SaX Vo O �Qz O z�V) W .Oa co' z0� 0 y Q ~Mm OZS � �O LU OO CD �gw a OW 0 W LLJz w Q Q Wald Poi El I I I I AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Worker Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construction Safety Act) (40 ' U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), or 1-90 (55 FR 9033), as applicable. Section 1926.651 also issued under 29 CFR Part 1911. ' SOURCE: 54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, unless otherwise noted. [59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] tegulations (Standards - 29 CFRI Authority for 1926 Subpart P - 1926 Subpart P • Part Number: 1926 • Part Title: Safety and Health Regulations for Construction • Subpart: P • Subpart Title: Excavations • Standard Number: 1926 Subpart P • Title: Authority for 1926 Subpart P •Appendix: A,B,C2D,EIF ' Regulations (Standards - 29 CFR) Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart. - 1926.650 I. • Part Number: 1926 • Part Tide: Safety and Health Regulations for Construction •Subpart: P • Subpart Title: Excavations ' • Standard Number: 1926.650 • Tide: Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart. ' 1926.650(a) Scope and application. This subpart applies to all open excavations made in the earth's surface. Excavations are defined to include trenches. 1926.650(b) Definitions applicable to this subpart. "Accepted engineering practices" means those requirements which are compatible with standards of practice ' required by a registered professional engineer. "Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring" means a pre-engineered shoring system comprised of aluminum hydraulic cylinders (crossbraces) used in conjunction with vertical rails (uprights) or horizontal rails (wales). Such system is designed specifically to support the sidewalls of an excavation and prevent cave-ins. ' "Bell-bottom pier hole" means a type of shaft or footing excavation, the bottom of which is made larger than the cross section above to form a belled shape. "Benching (Benching system)" means a method of protecting employees from cave-ins by excavating the sides ' of an excavation to form one or a series of horizontal levels or steps, usually with vertical or near -vertical surfaces between levels. "Cave-in" means the separation of a mass of soil or rock material from the side of an excavation, or the loss of soil from under a trench shield or support system, and its sudden movement into the excavation, either by ' falling or sliding, in sufficient quantity so that it could entrap, bury, or other wise injure and immobilize a person. "Competent person" means one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings, or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. ' 29CFR - 1 of 55 I U "Cross braces" mean the horizontal members of a shoring system installed perpendicular to the sides of the ' excavation, the ends of which bear against either uprights or wales. "Excavation" means any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in an earth surface, formed by earth removal. "Faces" or "sides" means the vertical or inclined earth surfaces formed as a result of excavation work. "Failure" means the breakage, displacement, or permanent deformation of a structural member or connection so as to reduce its structural integrity and its supportive capabilities. "Hazardous atmosphere" means an atmosphere which by reason of being explosive, flammable, poisonous, corrosive, oxidizing, irritating, oxygen deficient; toxic, or otherwise harmful, may cause death, illness, or injury. "Kickout" means the accidental release or failure of a cross brace. "Protective system" means a method of protecting employees from cave-ins, from material that could fall or roll from an excavation face or into an excavation, or from the collapse of adjacent structures. Protective systems include support systems, sloping and benching systems, shield systems, and other systems that provide the necessary protection. "Ramp" means an inclined walking or working surface that is used to gain access to one point from another, and is constructed from earth or from structural materials such as steel or wood. "Registered Professional Engineer" means a person who is registered as a professional engineer in the state where the work is to be performed. However, a professional engineer, registered in any state is deemed to be a "registered professional engineer" within the meaning of this standard when approving designs for "manufactured protective systems" or "tabulated data" to be used in interstate commerce. "Sheeting" means the members of a shoring system that retain the earth in position and in turn are supported by other members of the shoring system. "Shield (Shield system)" means a structure that is able to withstand the forces imposed on it by a cave-in and thereby protect employees within the structure, Shields can be permanent structures or can be designed to be portable and moved along as work progresses. Additionally, shields can be either premanufactured or job -built in accordance with 1926.652(c)(3) or (c)(4). Shields used in trenches are usually referred to as "trench boxes" or "trench shields." "Shoring (Shoring system)" means a structure such as a metal hydraulic, mechanical or timber shoring system that supports the sides of an excavation and which is designed to prevent cave-ins. "Sides". See "Faces." "Sloping (Sloping system)" means a method of protecting employees from cave-ins by excavating to form sides of an excavation that are inclined away from the excavation so as to prevent cave-ins. The angle of incline required to prevent a cave-in varies with differences in such factors as the soil type, environmental conditions of exposure, and application of surcharge loads. "Stable rock" means natural solid mineral material that can be excavated with vertical sides and will remain intact while exposed. Unstable rock is considered to be stable when the rock material on the side or sides of the excavation is secured against caving -in or movement by rock bolts or by another protective system that has been designed by a registered professional engineer. "Structural ramp" means a ramp built of steel or wood, usually used for vehicle access. Ramps made of soil or rock are not considered structural ramps. "Support system" means a structure such as underpinning, bracing, or shoring, which provides support to an adjacent structure, underground installation, or the sides of an excavation. "Tabulated data" means tables and charts approved by a registered professional engineer and used to design and construct a protective system. "Trench (Trench excavation)" means a narrow excavation (in relation to its length) made below the surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater than the width, but the width of a trench (measured at the bottom) is not greater than 15 feet (4.6 m). If forms or other structures are installed or constructed in an excavation so as to reduce the dimension measured from the forms or structure to the side of the excavation to 15 feet (4.6 m) or less (measured at the bottom of the excavation), the excavation is also considered to be a trench. "Trench box." See "Shield. "Trench shield." See "Shield." "Uprights" means the vertical members of a trench shoring system placed in contact with the earth and usually positioned so that individual members do not contact each other. Uprights placed so that individual members are closely spaced, in contact with or interconnected to each other, are often called "sheeting." "Wales" means horizontal members of a shoring system placed parallel to the excavation face whose sides bear against the vertical members of the shoring system or earth. 29CFR - 2 of 55 , I Regulations (Standards -29 CFRI Specific Excavation Requirements. - 1926.651 __� • Part Number: 1926 •'Part Title: Safety and Health Regulations for Construction :Subpart: P :Subpart Title: Excavations Standard Number: 1926.65 1 •Tide: Specific Excavation Requirements. 1926.651(a) Surface encumbrances. All surface encumbrances that are located so as to create a hazard to employees shall be removed or supported, as necessary, to safeguard employees. 1926.651(b) Underground installations. 1926.651(b)(1) The estimated location of utility installations, such as sewer, telephone, fuel, electric, water lines, or any other underground installations that reasonably may be expected to be encountered during excavation work, shall be determined prior to opening an excavation. L U I I I I I 1926.651(b)(2) Utility companies or owners shall be contacted within established or customary local response times, advised of the proposed work, and asked to establish the location of the utility underground installations prior to the start of actual excavation. When utility companies or owners cannot respond to a request to locate underground utility installations within 24 hours (unless a longer period is required by state or local law), or cannot establish the exact location of these installations,the employer may proceed, provided the employer does so with caution, and provided detection equipment or other acceptable means to locate utility installations are used. ..I926.651(b)(3) 1926.651(b)(3) When excavation operations approach the estimated location of underground installations, the exact location of the installations shall be determined by safe and acceptable means. 1926.651(b)(4) While the excavation is open; underground installations shall be protected, supported or removed as necessary to':safeguard employees. 1926.651(c) Access and egress - 1926.651(c)(1) Structural ramps. 1926.651(c)(1)(i) Structural ramps that are used solely by employees as a means of access or egress from excavations shall be designed by a competent person. Structural ramps used for access or egress of equipment shall be designed by a competent person qualified in structural design, and shall be constructed in accordance with the design. 1926.651(c)(1)(ii) Ramps and runways constructed of two or more structural members shall have the structural members connected together to prevent displacement. 29CFR - 3 of 55 II 1926.651(c)(lxiii) Structural members used for ramps and runways shall be of uniform thickness. 1926.651(c)(1)(iv) Cleats or other appropriate means used to connect runway structural members shall be attached to the bottom of the runway or shall be attached in a manner to prevent tripping. ..1926.651(c)(1)(v) 1926.651(c)(1)(v) Structural ramps used in lieu of steps shall be provided with cleats or other surface treatments o the top surface to prevent slipping. 1926.651(c)(2) Means of egress from trench excavations. A stairway, ladder, ramp or other safe means of egress shall be located in trench excavations that are 4 feet (1.22 m) or more in depth so as to require no more than 25 feet (7.62 m) of lateral travel for employees. 1926.651(d) Exposure to vehicular traffic. Employees exposed to public vehicular traffic shall be provided with, and shall wear, warning vests or other suitable garments marked with or made of reflectorized or high -visibility material. 1926.651(e) Exposure to falling loads. No employee shall be permitted underneath loads handled by lifting or digging equipment. Employees shall be required to stand away from any vehicle being loaded or unloaded to avoid being struck by any spillage or falling materials. Operators may remain in the cabs of vehicles being loaded or unloaded when the vehicles are equipped, in accordance with 1926.601(b)(6), to provide adequate protection for the operator during loading and unloading operations. ..1926.651(J) 1926.651(f) Warning system for mobile equipment. When mobile equipment is operated adjacent to an excavation, or when such equipment is required to approach the edge of an excavation, and the operator does not have a clear and direct view of the edge of the excavation, a warning system shall be utilized such as barricades, hand or mechanical signals, or stop logs. If possible, the grade should be away from the excavation. 1926.651(g) Hazardous atmospheres - 1926.651(g)(1) Testing and controls. In addition to the requirements set forth in subparts D and E of this part (29 CFR 1926.50 - 1926.107) to prevent exposure to harmful levels of atmospheric contaminants and to assure acceptable atmospheric conditions, the following requirements shall apply: 1926.651(g)(1)(i) Where oxygen deficiency (atmospheres containing less than 19.5 percent oxygen) or a hazardous atmosphere exists or could reasonably be expected to exist, such as in excavations in landfill areas or excavations in areas where hazardous substances are stored nearby, the atmospheres in the excavation shall be tested before employees enter excavations greater than 4 feet (1.22 m) in depth. 1926.651(g)(1)(if) Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent employee exposure to atmospheres containing less than 19.5 percent oxygen and other hazardous atmospheres. These precautions include providing proper respiratory protection or ventilation in accordance with subparts D and E of this part respectively. 1926.651(g)(1)(iii) Adequate precaution shall be taken such as providing ventilation, to prevent employee exposure to an atmosphere containing a concentration of a flammable gas in excess of 20 percent of the lower flammable limit of the gas. 29CFR - 4 of 55 ..192 6.651 (g) (1) (1v) 1926.651(g)(1)(Iv) When controls are used that are intended to reduce the level of atmospheric contaminants to acceptable levels, testing shall be conducted as often as necessary to ensure that the atmosphere remains safe. 1926.651(g)(2) .Emergency rescue equipment. =4926.651(g)(2)(I) Emergency rescue equipment, such as breathing apparatus, a safety harness and line, or a basket stretcher, shall be readily available where hazardous atmospheric conditions exist or may reasonably be expected to develop during work in an excavation. This equipment shall be attended when in use. 1926.651(2)121(11) Employees entering bell-bottom pier holes, or other similar deep and confined footing excavations, shall wear a harness with a lifeline securely attached to it. The lifeline shall be separate from any line used to handle materials, and shall be individually attended at all times while the employee wearing the lifeline is in the excavation. 1926.651(h) Protection from hazards associated with water accumulation. 1926.651(h)(1) Employees shall not work in excavations in which there is accumulated water, or in excavations in which water is accumulating, unless adequate precautions have been taken to protect employees against the hazards posed by water accumulation. The precautions necessary to protect employees adequately vary with each situation, but could include special support or shield systems to protect from cave-ins, water removal to control the level of accumulating water, or use of a safety harness and lifeline. ..1926.651(h)(2) 1926.651(h)(2) If water is controlled or prevented from accumulating by the use of water removal equipment, the water removal equipment and operations shall be monitored by a competent person to ensure proper operation. ' 1926.651(h)(3) If excavation work interrupts the natural drainage of surface water (such as streams), diversion ditches, dikes, or other suitable means shall be used to prevent surface water from entering the excavation and to provide adequate drainage of the area adjacent to the excavation. Excavations subject to runoff from heavy rains will require an inspection by a competent person and compliance with paragraphs (h)(1) and (h)(2) of this section. 1926,651(i) Stability of adjacent structures. ' 1926.651(1)(1) Where the stability of adjoining buildings, walls, or other structures is endangered by excavation operations, • ' support systems such as shoring, bracing, or underpinning shall be provided to ensure the stability of such structures for the protection of employees. ' 1926.651(1)(2) Excavation below the level of the base or footing of any foundation or retaining wall that could be reasonably expected to pose a hazard to employees shall not be permitted except when: ' 1926.651(1)(2)(1) A support system, such as underpinning, is provided to ensure the safety of employees and the stability of the structure; or ' 1926.651(1)(2x11) E 29CFR•5of55 I I The excavation is in stable rock; or ..1926.651(i)(2)(d+) 1926.651(i)(2)(lii) A registered professional engineer has approved the determination that the structure is sufficiently removed from the excavation so as to be unaffected by the excavation activity; or 1926.651(i)(2)(iv) A registered professional engineer has approved the determination that such excavation work will not pose a hazard to employees. 1926.651(1)(3) Sidewalks, pavements and appurtenant structure shall not be undermined unless a support system or another method of protection is provided to protect employees from the possible collapse of such structures. 1926.651(1) Protection of employees from loose rock or soil. 1926.651(j)(1) Adequate protection shall be provided to protect employees from loose rock or soil that could pose a hazard by falling or rolling from an excavation face. Such protection shall consist of scaling to remove loose material; installation of protective barricades at intervals as necessary on the face to stop and contain falling material; or other means that provide equivalent protection. ..1926.651(j)(2) 1926.651(1)(2) Employees shall be protected from excavated or other materials or equipment that could pose a hazard by falling or rolling into excavations. Protection shall be provided by placing and keeping such materials or equipment at least 2 feet (.61 m) from the edge of excavations, or by the use of retaining devices that are sufficient to prevent materials or equipment from falling or rolling into excavations, or by a combination of both if necessary. 1926.651(k) Inspections. 1926.651(k)(1) Daily inspections of excavations, the adjacent areas, and protective systems shall be.made by a competent person for evidence of a situation that could result in possible cave-ins, indications of failure of protective systems, hazardous atmospheres, or other hazardous conditions. An inspection shall be conducted by the competent person prior to the start of work and as needed throughout the shift. Inspections shall also be made after every rainstorm or other hazard increasing occurrence. These inspections are only required when employee exposure can be reasonably anticipated. 1926.651(k)(2) Where the competent person finds evidence of a situation that could result in a possible cave-in, indications of failure of protective systems, hazardous atmospheres, or other hazardous conditions, exposed employees shall be removed from the hazardous area until the necessary precautions have been taken to ensure their safety. 1926.651(l) Fall protection. 1926.651(1)(1) Walkways shall be provided where employees or equipment are required or permitted to cross over excavations. Guardrails which comply with 1926.502(b) shall be provided where walkways are 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels. [59 FR 40730, Aug 9, 1994] 29CFR - 6 of 55 I I I I I I I I I I I I Ike ulations (Sta dl lards - 29 CFR) Requirements for protective systems. - 1926.652 • Part Number: 1926 • Part Title: Safety and Health Regulations for Construction • Subpart: P • Subpart Tide: Excavations • Standard Number: 1926.652 • Tide: Requirements for protective systems. ' 1926.652(a) Protection of employees in excavations. 1926.652(a)(1') ) Each employee in an excavation shall be protected from cave-ins by an adequate protective system designed in accordance with paragraph (b) or (c) of this section except when: I. 1926.652(a)(1xl) Excavations are made entirely in stable rock; or 1926.652(a)(1)(ii) I. Excavations are less than 5 feet (1.52 m) in depth and examination of the ground by a competent person provides no indication of a potential cave-in. 1926.652(a)(2) ' Protective systems shall have the capacity to resist without failure all loads that are intended or could reasonably be expected to be applied or transmitted to the system. ..1926.652(b) ' 1926.652(b) Design of sloping and benching systems. The slopes and configurations of sloping and benching systems shall be selected and constructed by the employer or his designee and shall be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (b)(1); or, in the alternative, paragraph (b)(2); or, in the alternative, paragraph (b)(3); or, in the alternative, paragraph (b)(4), as follows: 1926.652(b)(1) ' Option (1) - Allowable configurations and slopes. 1926.652(b)(1)(i) Excavations shall be sloped at an angle not steeper than one and one-half horizontal to one vertical (34 degrees ' measured from the horizontal), unless the employer uses one of the other options listed below. 1926.652(b)(1)(14) Slopes specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, shall be excavated to form configurations that are in accordance with the slopes shown for Type C soil in Appendix B to this subpart. 1926.652(b)(2) ' Option (2) - Determination of slopes and configurations using Appendices A and B. Maximum allowable slopes, and allowable configurations for sloping and benching systems, shall be determined in accordance with the conditions and requirements set forth in appendices A and B to this subpart. ' 1926.652(b)(3) Option (3) - Designs using other tabulated data. ' 1926.652(6)(3x1) 11 29CFR - 7 of 55 11 Designs of sloping or benching systems shall be selected from and in accordance with tabulated data, such as tables and charts. 1926.652(b)(3)(ii) The tabulated data shall be in written form and shall include all of the following: ..1926.652 (b) (3) (ii) (A) 1926.652(b)(3)(ii)(A) Identification of the parameters that affect the selection of a sloping or benching system drawn from such data; 1926.652(b)(3)(ii)(B) Identification of the limits of use of the data, to include the magnitude and configuration of slopes determined to be safe; 1926.652(b)(3)(ii)(C) Explanatory information as may be necessary to aid the user in making a correct selection of a protective system from the data. 1926.652(b)(3)(iii) At least one copy of the tabulated data which identifies the registered professional engineer who approved the data, shall be maintained at thejobsite during construction of the protective system. After that time the data may be stored off the jobsite, but a copy of the data shall be made available to the Secretary upon request. 1926.652(b)(4) Option (4) - Design by a registered professional engineer. 1926.652(b)(4)(i) Sloping and benching systems not utilizing Option (1) or Option (2) or Option (3) under paragraph (b) of this section shall be approved by a registered professional engineer. 1926.652(b)(4)(i[) Designs shall be in written form and shall include at least the following: 1926.652(b)(4)(ii)(A) The magnitude of the slopes that were determined to be safe for the particular project; ..1926.652 (b) (4)(i)(B) 1926.652(b)(4)(ii)(B) The configurations that were determined to be safe for the particular project; 1926.652(b)(4)(ii)(C) The identity of the registered professional. engineer approving the design. 1926.652(b)(4)(ill) At least one copy of the design shall be maintained at thejobsite while the slope is being constructed. After that time the design need not be at the jobsite, but a copy shall be made available to the Secretary upon request. 1926.652(c) Design of support systems, shield systems, and other protective systems. Designs of.support systems , shield systems, and other protective systems shall be selected and constructed by the employer or his designee and shall be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (c)(1); or, in the alternative, paragraph (c)(2); or, in the alternative, paragraph (c)(3); or, i the alternative, paragraph (c)(4) as follows: 1926.652(c)(1) Option (1) - Designs using appendices A, C and D. Designs for timber shoring in trenches shall be determined in accordance with the conditions and requirements set forth in appendices A and C to this subpart. Designs for aluminum hydraulic shoring shall be in accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this section, but if manufacturer's tabulated data cannot be utilized, designs shall be in accordance with appendix D. 29CFR-8of55 II II Ii I L L L I I ..1926.652(c)(2) 1926.652(c)(2) Option (2) - Designs Using Manufacturer's Tabulated Data. 1926.652(c)(2)(i) Design of support systems, shield systems, or other protective systems that are drawn from manufacturer's tabulated data shall be in accordance with all specifications, recommendations, and limitations issued or made bythe manufacturer. 1926.652(c)(2)(ii) -Deviation from the specifications, recommendations, and limitations issued or made by the manufacturer shall only be allowed after the manufacturer issues specific written approval. 1926.652(c)(2)(lii) Manufacturer's specifications, recommendations, and limitations, and manufacturer's approval to deviate from the specifications, recommendations, and limitations shall be in written form at the jobsite during construction of the protective system. After that time this data may be stored off the jobsite, but a copy shall be made available to the Secretary upon request. 1926.652(c)(3) Option (3) - Designs using other tabulated data. 1926.652(c)(3)(i) Designs of support systems, shield systems, or other protective systems shall be selected from and be in accordance with tabulated data, such as tables and charts. 1926.652(c)(3)(ii) The tabulated data shall be in written form and include all of the following: ' 1926.652(c)(3)(ii)(A) Identification of the parameters that affect the selection of a protective system drawn from such data; ..1926 652(c)(3)(ii)B) 1926.652(c)(3)(ii)(B) ' Identification of the limits of use of the data; 1926.652(c)(3)(ii)(C) Explanatory information as may be necessary to aid the user in making a correct selection of a protective system from the data. 1926.652(cx3)(iil) ' At least one copy of the tabulated data, which identifies the registered professional engineer who approved the data, shall be maintained at thejobsite during construction of the protective system. After that time the data may be.stored off thejobsite, but a copy of the data shall be made available to the Secretary upon request. ' 1926.652(c)(4) Option (4) - Design by a registered professional engineer. 1926.652(c)(4)(i) Support systems, shield systems, and other protective systems not utilizing Option 1, Option 2 or Option 3, above, shall be approved by a registered professional engineer. ' 1926.652(c)(4)(if) Designs shall be in written form and shall include the following: ' 1926.652(c)(4)(ii)(A) ' 29CFR - 9 of 55 I L A plan indicating the sizes, types, and configurations of the materials to be used in the protective system; and t 1926.652(c)(4)(ii)(B) The identify of the registered professional engineer approving the design. ..1926.652 (c) (4) (iii) 1926.652(c)(4)(iii) At least one copy of the design shall be maintained at the jobsite during construction of the protective system. After that time, the design may be stored off the jobsite, but a copy of the design shall be made available to the Secretary upon request. 1926.652(d) Materials and equipment. 1926.652(d)(1) Materials and equipment used for protective systems shall be free from damage or defects that might impair their proper function. 1926.652(d)(2) Manufactured materials and equipment used for protective systems shall be used and maintained in a manner that is consistent with the recommendations of the manufacturer, and in a manner that will prevent employee exposure to hazards. 1926.652(d)(3) When material or equipment that is used for protective systems is damaged, a competent person shall examine the material or equipment and evaluate its suitability for continued use. If the competent person cannot assure the material or equipment is able to support the intended loads or is otherwise suitable for safe use, then such material or equipment shall be removed from service, and shall be evaluated and approved by a registered professional engineer before being returned to service. 1926.652(e) Installation and removal of support - 1926.652(e)(1) General. 1926.652(e)(1)(i) Members of support systems shall be securely connected together to prevent sliding, falling, kickouts, or other predictable failure. .. I92 6.652 (e) (1) (ii) 1926.652(e)(1)(ii) Support systems shall be installed and removed in a manner that protects employees from cave-ins, structural collapses, or from being struck by members of the support system. 1926.652(e)(1)(iii) Individual members of support systems shall not be subjected to loads exceeding those which those members were designed to withstand. 1926.652(e)(1)(iv) Before temporary removal of individual members begins, additional precautions shall be taken to ensure the safety of employees, such as installing other structural members to carry the loads imposed on the support system. 1926.652(e)(1)(v) Removal shall begin at, and progress from, the bottom of the excavation. Members shall be released slowly so as to note any indication of possible failure of the remaining members of the structure or possible cave-in of the sides of the excavation. 29CFR - 10 of 55 , I ' 1926.652(e)(1)(vi) Backfilling shall progress together with the 'removal of support systems from excavations. ..1926.652(e)(2) ' 1926.652(e)(2) Additional requirements for support systems for trench excavations. ' 1926.652(e)(2Hi) Excavation of material to a level no greater than 2 feed (.61 m) below the bottom of the members of a support system shall be permitted, but only if the system is designed to resist the forces calculated for the full depth of the trench, and there are no indications while the trench is open of a possible loss of soil from behind or below ' the bottom of the support system. 1926.652(e)(2)(ii) ' Installation of a support system shall be closely coordinated with the excavation of trenches. 1926.652(1) Sloping and benching systems. Employees shall not be permitted to work on the faces of sloped or benched '• excavations at levels above other employees except when employees at the lower levels are adequately protected from the hazard of falling, rolling, or sliding material or equipment. 1926.652(g) ' Shield systems - 1926.652(g)(1) General. 1926.652(g)(1)(1) Shield systems shall not be subjected to loads exceeding those which the system was designed to withstand. ' 1926.652(a)(1)(ii) Shields shall be installed in a manner to restrict lateral or other hazardous movement of the shield in the event of the application of sudden lateral loads. 1926.652(g)(1)(tii) Employees shall be protected from the hazard of cave-ins when entering or exiting the areas protected by ' shields. ..1926.652(g)(1)(Iv) 1926.652(2N1Niv) Employees shall not be allowed in shields when shields are being installed, removed, or moved vertically. ' 1926.652(g)(2) Additional requirement for shield systems used in trench excavations. Excavations of earth material to a level not greater than 2 feet (.61 m) below the bottom of a shield shall be permitted, but only if the shield is designed Ito resist the forces calculated for the full depth of the trench, and there are no indications while the trench is open of a possible loss of soil from behind or below the bottom of the shield. 1 I IRegulations (Standards - 29 CFR) ' 29CFR - 11 of 55 J • Part Number: 1926 • Part Title: Safety and Health Regulations for Construction • Subpart: P • Subpart Title: Excavations • Standard Number: 1926 Subpart P App A • Tide: Soil Classification (a) Scope and application - (1) Scope. This appendix describes a method of classifying soil and rock deposits based on site and environmental conditions, and on the structure and composition of the earth deposits. The appendix contains definitions, sets forth requirements, and describes acceptable visual and manual tests for use in classifying soils. (2) Application. This appendix applies when a sloping or benching system is designed in accordance with the requirements set forth in 1926.652(b)(2) as a method of protection for employees from cave-ins. This appendix also applies when timber shoring for excavations is designed as a method of protection from cave-ins in accordance with appendix C to subpart P of part 1926, and when aluminum hydraulic shoring is designed in accordance with appendix D. This Appendix also applies if other protective systems are designed and selected for use from data prepared in accordance with the requirements set forth in 1926.652(c), and the use of the data is predicated on the use of the soil classification system set forth in this appendix. (b) Definitions. The definitions and examples given below are based on, in whole or in part, the following; American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standards D653-85 and D2488; The Unified Soils Classification System; The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) Textural Classification Scheme; and The National Bureau of Standards Report BSS -121. "Cemented soil" means a soil in which the particles are held together by a chemical agent, such as calcium carbonate, such that a hand -size sample cannot be crushed into powder or individual soil particles by finger pressure. "Cohesive soil" means clay (fine grained soil), or soil with a high clay content, which has cohesive strength. Cohesive soil does not crumble, can be excavated with vertical sideslopes, and is plastic when moist. Cohesive soil is hard to break up when dry, and exhibits significant cohesion when submerged. Cohesive soils include clayey silt, sandy clay, silty clay, clay and organic clay. "Dry soil" means soil that does not exhibit visible signs of moisture content. "Fissured" means a soil material that has a tendency to break along definite planes of fracture with little resistance, or a material that exhibits open cracks, such as tension cracks, in an exposed surface. "Granular soil" means gravel, sand, or silt (coarse grained soil) with little or no clay content. Granular soil has no cohesive strength. Some moist granular soils exhibit apparent cohesion. Granular soil cannot be molded when moist and crumbles easily when dry. "Layered system" means two or more distinctly different soil or rock types arranged in layers. Micaceous seams or weakened planes in rock or shale are considered layered. "Moist soil" means a condition in which a soil looks and feels damp. Moist cohesive soil can easily be shaped into a ball and rolled into small diameter threads before crumbling. Moist granular soil that contains some cohesive material will exhibit signs of cohesion between particles. "Plastic" means a property of a soil which allows the soil to be deformed or molded without cracking, or appreciable volume change. "Saturated soil" means a soil in which the voids are filled with water. Saturation does not require flow. Saturation, or near saturation, is necessary for the proper use of instruments such as a pocket penetrometer 29CFR - 12 of 55 III I ' or sheer vane. "Soil classification system" means, for the purpose of this subpart, a method of categorizing soil and rock deposits in a hierarchy of Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, and Type C, in decreasing order of stability. The ' categories are determined based on an analysis of the properties and performance characteristics of the deposits and the characteristics of the depositsand the environmental conditions of exposure. ' "Stable rock" means natural solid mineral matter that can be excavated with vertical sides and remain intact while exposed. "'Submerged soil" means soil which is underwater or is free seeping. "Type A" means cohesive soils with an unconfined, compressive strength ' of 1.5 ton per square foot (tsf) (144 kPa) or greater. Examples of cohesive soils are: clay, silty clay, sandy clay, clay loam and, in some cases, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. Cemented soils such as caliche and hardpan are also considered Type A. However, no soil is Type A if: '• (i) The . soil is fissured; or (ii-) The soil is subject to vibration from heavy traffic, pile driving, or similar effects; or ' - (iii) The soil has been previously disturbed; or (iv) The soil is part of a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the excavation on a slope of four horizontal to one vertical (4H:lV) or greater; or ' (v) The material is subject to other factors that would require it to be classified as a less stable material. "Type B" means: (i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength greater than ' 0.5 tsf (48 kPa) but less than 1.5 tsf (144 kPa); or (ii) Granular cohesionless soils including: angular gravel (similar to crushed rock), silt, silt loam, sandy loam and, in some cases, silty clay ' loam and sandy clay loam. (iii) Previously disturbed soils except those which would otherwise be classed as Type C soil. (iv) Soil that meets the unconfined compressive strength or cementation ' requirements for Type A, but is fissured or subject to vibration; or (v) Dry rock. that is not stable; or (vi) Material that is part of a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the excavation on a slope less steep than four horizontal to one ' vertical (4H:1V), but only if the material would otherwise be classified as Type B. "Type s:. means: ' jiy Cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tsf (48 kPa-)-.or less; or (ii) Granular soils including gravel, sand, and loamy sand; or (iii) Submerged soil or soil from which water is freely seeping; or ' (iv) Submerged rock that is not stable, or (v) Material in a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the excavation or aslope of four horizontal to one vertical (4H:1V) or steeper. ' "Unconfined compressive strength" means the load per unit area at which a soil will fail in compression. It can be determined by laboratory testing, or estimated in the field using a pocket penetrometer, by thumb penetration tests, and other methods. - "Wet soil" means soil that contains significantly more moisture than moist soil, but in such a range of values that cohesive material will slump or begin to flow when vibrated. Granular material that would exhibit cohesive properties when moist will lose those cohesive properties when twet. ' 29CFR - 13 of 55 I (c) Requirements - (1) Classification of soil and rock deposits. Each soil and rock deposit shall be classified by a competent person as Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, or Type C in accordance with the definitions set forth in paragraph (b) of this appendix. (2) Basis of classification. The classification of the deposits shall be made based on the results of at least one visual and at least one manual analysis. Such analyses shall be conducted by a competent person using tests described in paragraph (d) below, or in other recognized methods of soil classification and testing such as those adopted by the American Society for Testing Materials, or the U.S. Department of Agriculture textural classification system. (3) Visual and manual analyses. The visual and manual analyses, such as those noted as being acceptable in paragraph (d) of this appendix, shall be designed and conducted to provide sufficient quantitative and qualitative information as may be necessary to identify properly the properties, factors, and conditions affecting the classification of the deposits. (4) Layered systems. In a layered system, the system shall be classified in accordance with its weakest layer. However, each layer may be classified individually where a more stable layer lies under a less stable layer. (5) Reclassification. If, after classifying a deposit, the properties, factors, or conditions affecting its classification change in any way, the changes shall be evaluated by a competent person. The deposit shall be reclassified as necessary to reflect the changed circumstances. (d) Acceptable visual and manual tests. - (1) Visual tests. Visual analysis is conducted to determine qualitative information regarding the excavation site in general, the soil adjacent to the excavation, the soil forming the sides of the open excavation, and the soil taken as samples from excavated material. (i) Observe samples of soil that are excavated and soil in the sides of the excavation. Estimate the range of particle sizes and the relative amounts of the particle sizes. Soil that is primarily composed of fine-grained material material is cohesive material. Soil composed primarily of coarse -grained sand or gravel is granular material. (ii) Observe soil as it is excavated. Soil that remains in clumps when excavated is cohesive. Soil that breaks up easily and does not stay in clumps is granular. (iii) Observe the side of the opened excavation and the surface area adjacent to the excavation. Crack -like openings such as tension cracks could indicate fissured material. If chunks of soil spall off a vertical side, the soil could be fissured. Small spans are evidence of moving ground and are indications of potentially hazardous situations. (iv) Observe the area adjacent to the excavation and the excavation itself for evidence of existing utility and other underground structures, and to identify previously disturbed soil. (v) Observed the opened side of the excavation to identify layered systems. Examine layered systems to identify if the layers slope toward the excavation. Estimate the degree of slope of the layers. (vi) Observe the area adjacent to the excavation and the sides of the opened excavation for evidence of surface water, water seeping from the sides of the excavation, or the location of the level of the water table. (vii) Observe the area adjacent to the excavation and the area within the excavation for sources of vibration that may affect the stability of the excavation face. (2) Manual tests. Manual analysis of soil samples is conducted to determine quantitative as well as qualitative properties of soil and to provide more information in order to classify soil properly. (i) Plasticity. Mold a moist or wet sample of soil into a ball and attempt to roll it into threads as thin as 1/8 -inch in diameter. Cohesive material can be successfully rolled into threads without crumbling. For example, if at least a two inch (50 mm) length of 1/8 -inch thread can be held on one end without tearing, the soil is cohesive. (ii) Dry strength. If the soil is dry and crumbles on its own or with moderate pressure into individual grains or fine powder, it is granular (any combination of gravel, sand, or silt). If the soil is dry and falls into clumps which break up into smaller clumps, but the smaller clumps can only be broken up with difficulty, it may be clay in any combination with gravel, sand or silt. If the dry soil breaks into clumps which do not break up into small clumps and which can only be broken with difficulty, and there is no visual indication the soil is fissured, the soil may be considered unfissured. (iii) Thumb penetration. The thumb penetration test can be used to estimate the unconfined compressive strength of cohesive soils. (This test is based on the thumb penetration test described in American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard designation D2488 - "Standard Recommended Practice for Description of Soils (Visual - Manual Procedure).") Type A soils with an unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 tsf can be readily indented by the thumb; however, they can be penetrated by the thumb only with very great effort. Type C soils with an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tsf can be easily penetrated several inches by the thumb, 29CFR - 14 of 55 ' I. and can be molded by light finger pressure. This test should be conducted on an undisturbed soil sample, such as a large clump of spoil, as soon as practicable after excavation to keep to a minimum the effects of exposure to drying influences. If the excavation is later exposed to wetting influences (rain, flooding), the classification of the soil must be changed accordingly. (iv) Other strength tests. Estimates of unconfined compressive strength of soils can also be obtained by use of a pocket penetrometer or by using a hand -operated shearvane. (v) Drying test. The basic purpose of the drying test is to differentiate between cohesive material with fissures, unfissured cohesive material, and granular material. The procedure for the drying test involves drying a sample of soil that is approximately one inch thick (2.54 cm) and six inches (15.24 cm) in diameter until it is ,thoroughly dry: (A) If the sample develops cracks as it dries, significant fissures are indicated. (B) Samples that dry without cracking are to be broken by hand. If considerable force is necessary to break a sample, the soil has significant cohesive material content. The soil can be classified as an unfissured cohesive material and the unconfined compressive strength should be determined. • (C) If a sample breaks easily by hand, it is either a fissured cohesive material or a granular material. To • distinguish between the two, pulverize the dried clumps of the sample by hand or by stepping on them. If the clumps do not pulverize easily, the material is cohesive with fissures. If they pulverize easily into very small fragments, the material is granular. Regulations (Standards - 29 CFR) Sloping and Benching - 1926 Subpart P App B • Part Number: 1926 • Part Title: Safety and Health Regulations for Construction • Subpart: P • Subpart Title: Excavations • Standard Number: 1926 Subpart P App B • Title: Sloping and Benching I I I fI I hI (a) Scope and application. This appendix contains specifications for sloping and benching when used as methods of protecting employees working in excavations from cave-ins. The requirements of this appendix apply when the design of sloping and benching protective systems is to be performed in accordance with the requirements set forth in 1926.652(b)(2). (b) Definitions. "Actual slope" means the slope to which an excavation face is excavated. "Distress" means that the soil is in a condition where a cave-in is imminent or is likely to occur. Distress is evidenced by such phenomena as the development of fissures in the face of or adjacent to an open excavation; the subsidence of the edge of an excavation; the slumping of material from the face or the bulging or heaving of material from the bottom of an excavation; the spalling of material from the face of an excavation; and ravelling, i.e., small amounts of material such as pebbles or little clumps of material suddenly separating from the face of an excavation and trickling or rolling down into the excavation. "Maximum allowable slope" means the steepest incline of an excavation face that is acceptable for the most favorable site conditions as protection against cave-ins, and is expressed as the ratio of horizontal distance to vertical rise (H:V). - • "Short term exposure" means a period of time less than or equal to 24 hours that an excavation is open. • (c) Requirements - (1) Soil classification. Soil and rock deposits shall be classified in accordance with appendix A to subpartP of part 1926. (2) Maximum allowable slope. The maximum allowable slope for a soil or rock deposit shall be determined from Table B-1 of this appendix. (3) Actual slope. (i) The actual slope shall not be steeper than the maximum allowable slope. (ii) The actual slope shall be less steep than the maximum allowable slope, when there are signs of distress. If that situation occurs, the slope shall be cut back to an actual slope which is at least 1/2 horizontal to one vertical (1/2H:1 V) less steep than the maximum allowable slope. 29CFR - 15 of 55 I (iii) When surcharge loads from stored material or equipment, operating equipment, or traffic are present, a competent person shall determine the degree to which the actual slope must be reduced below the maximum allowable slope, and shall assure that such reduction is achieved. Surcharge loads from adjacent structures shall be evaluated in accordance with 1926.651(1). (4) Configurations. Configurations of sloping and benching systems shall be in accordance with Figure B-1. TABLE B-1 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SLOPES SOIL OR ROCK TYPE I MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SLOPES (H:V)(1) FOR I EXCAVATIONS LESS THAN 20 FEET DEEP(3) I STABLE ROCK I VERTICAL (90 Deg.) TYPE A (2) 1 3/4:1 (53 Deg.) TYPE B 11:1 (45 Deg.) TYPE C I 1 1/2:1 (34 Deg.) Footnote(1) Numbers shown in parentheses next to maximum allowable slopes are angles expressed in degrees from the horizontal. Angles have been rounded off. Footnote(2) A short-term maximum allowable slope of 1/2H:1V (63 degrees) is allowed in excavations in Type A soil that are 12 feed (3.67 m) or less in depth. Short-term maximum allowable slopes for excavations greater than 12 feet (3.67 m) in depth shall be 3/4H:1V (53 degrees). Footnote(3) Sloping or benching for excavations greater than 20 feet deep shall be designed by a registered professional engineer. Figure B-1 - Slope Configurations (All slopes stated below are in the horizontal to vertical ratio) B - 1.1 Excavations made in Type A soil. 1. All simple slope excavation 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3/4:1. Exception: Simple slope excavations which are open 24 hours or less (short term) and which are 12 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1/2:1. 12' flax. _ 1/2 Figure B -1.1b SIMPLE SLOPE - SHORT TERM 29CFR - 16 of 55 2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3/4 to I and maximum bench dimensions as follows: 1 1 1 • 1 1 1 1 I. 1 1 1 1 1 1;. Figure B -1.1c SIMPLE BENCH i i A Max. 3/4 i 4' Mat. o ' Figure B -1.1d MULTIPLE BENCH 3. All excavations 8 feet or less in depth which have unsupported vertically sided lower portions shall have a maximum vertical side of 3 1/2 feet. J A 8' Max. 3/4 3½' Max. Figure B-1.1 e UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION - MAXIMUM 8 FEET IN DEPTH) All excavations more than 8 feet but not more than 12 feet in depth with unsupported vertically sided lower 29CFR - 17 of 55 I portions shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1 and a maximum vertical side of 3 1/2 feet. I I "N /// a= 1 12' Mn. 1 Figure B1.lf UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION - MAXIMUM 12 FEET IN DEPTH) All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions that are supported or shielded shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3/4:1. The support or shield system must extend at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. SuflPCtt or ihjeU tyatau 20, lMaz. � 15" min. Total height of vertical aide Figure B-l.lg SUPPORTED OR SHIELDED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION) 4. All other simple slope, compound slope, and vertically sided lower portion excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted under 1926.652(b). I Li n B - 1.2 Excavations Made in Type B Soil 1 29CFR -18 of 55 1 LI 1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1. 20' Maw. Figure B -1.2a SIMPLE SLOPE .2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows: This bench allowed in cohesive soil only. 20'1 lax 1 Max ► i Figure B -1.2b SINGLE BENCH 20' Max. This beach allowed in cohesive soil only 4' Figure B -1.2c MULTIPLE BENCH 3. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or 29CFR - 19 of SS supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1. Support or shield system 20' Hai. - - 8" Yin. at height of vertical side Figure B -1.2d VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION 4. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in 1926.652(b). B - 1.3 Excavations Made in Type C Soil 1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1 1/2:1. 4t Figure B -1.3a SIMPLE SLOPE 2. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or 29CFR - 20 of 55 supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1 1/2:1. Support or shield System 2Q' Hex. 18" Yi. Total hsigbt of vertical side Figure B -1.3b VERTICAL SIDED LOWER PORTION 3. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in 1926.652(b). B - 1.4 Excavations Made in Layered Soils 1. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth made in layered soils shall have a maximum allowable slope for each layer as set forth below. AU 3/4 Figure B -1.4a B OVER A - w - - - - - li A �1 3/4 Figure B -1.4b C OVER A 29CFR - 21 of 55 l - r - �� w .w - -L l'1' •� ' Figure B-1 Ac C OVER B e 41 0 At 1 'Figure B -1.4d A OVER B 4 T T W- J C a 1 t Figure B -1.4e A OVER C I ' a 1 ' Figure B -1.4f BOVERC 2. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in 1926.652(b). 1 1 29CFR - 22 of 55 ' Regulations (Standards - 29 CFRI Timber Shoring for Trenches - 1926 Subpart P App C • Part Number: 1926 • Part Title: Safety and Health Regulations for Construction •Subpart: P • Subpart Title: Excavations • Standard Number: 1926 Subpart P App C • Title: Timber Shoring for Trenches L I I H I (a) Scope. This appendix contains information that can be used when timber shoring is provided as a method of protection from cave-ins in trenches that do not exceed 20 feet (6.1 in) in depth. This appendix must be used when design of timber shoring protective systems is to be performed in accordance with 1926.652(c)(1). Other timber shoring configurations; other systems of support such as hydraulic and pneumatic systems; and other protective systems such as sloping, benching, shielding, and freezing systems must be designed in accordance with the requirements set forth in 1926.652(b) and 1926.652(c). (b) Soil Classification. In order to use the data presented in this appendix, the soil type or types in which the excavation is made must first be determined using the soil classification method set forth in appendix A of subpart P of this part. (c) Presentation of Information. Information is presented in several forms as follows: (1) Information is presented in tabular form in Tables C-1.1, C-1.2 and C-1.3, and Tables C-2.1, O.2.2 and C- 2.3 following paragraph (g) of the appendix. Each table presents the minimum sizes of timber members to use in a shoring system, and each table contains data only for the particular soil type in which the excavation or portion of the excavation is made. The data are arranged to allow the user the flexibility to select from among several acceptable configurations of members based on varying the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces. Stable rock is exempt from shoring requirements and therefore, no data are presented for this condition. (2) Information concerning the basis of the tabular data and the limitations of the data is presented in paragraph (d) of this appendix, and on the tables themselves. (3) Information explaining the use of the tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of this appendix. (4) Information illustrating the use of the tabular data is presented in paragraph (i) of this appendix. (5) Miscellaneous notations regarding Tables C-1.1 through C-1.3 and Tables C-2.1 through C-2.3 are presented in paragraph (g) of this Appendix. (d) Basis and limitations of the data. - (1) Dimensions of timber members. (i) The sizes of the timber members listed in Tables C-1.1 through C-1.3 are taken from the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) report, "Recommended Technical Provisions for Construction Practice in Shoring and Sloping of Trenches and Excavations." In addition, where NBS did not recommend specific sizes of members, member sizes are based on an analysis of the sizes required for use by existing codes and on empirical practice. (ii) The required dimensions of the members listed in Tables C-1.1 through C-1.3 refer to actual dimensions and not nominal dimensions of the timber. Employers wanting to use nominal size shoring are directed to Tables C- 2.1 through C-2.3, or have this choice under 1926.652(c)(3), and are referred to The Corps of engineers, The Bureau of Reclamation or data from other acceptable sources. (2) Limitation of application. (i) It is not intended that the timber shoring specification apply to every situation that may be experienced in the field. These data were developed to apply to the situations that are most commonly experienced in current trenching practice. Shoring systems for use in situations that are not covered by the data in this appendix must be designed as specified in 1926.652(c). (ii) When any of the following conditions are present, the members specified in the tables are not considered adequate. Either an alternate timber shoring system must be designed or another type of protective system designed in accordance with 1926.652. (A) When loads imposed by structures or by stored material adjacent to the trench weigh in excess of the load imposed by a two -foot soil surcharge. The term "adjacent" as used here means the area within a horizontal distance from the edge of the trench equal to the depth of the trench. (B) When vertical loads imposed on cross braces exceed a 240 -pound gravity load distributed on a one -foot section of the center of the crossbrace. (C) When surcharge loads are present from equipment weighing in excess of 20,000 pounds. (D) When only the lower portion of a trench is shored and the remaining portion of the trench is sloped or benched unless: The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less steep than three horizontal to one vertical; or the members are selected from the tables for use at a depth which is determined from the top of the overall trench, and not from the toe of the sloped portion. (e) Use of Tables. The members of the shoring system that are to be selected using this information are the cross braces, the uprights, and the wales, where wales are required. Minimum sizes of members are specified for use in different types of soil. There are six tables of information, two for each soil type. The soil type must first be determined in accordance with the soil classification system described in appendix A to subpart P of part 1926. Using the appropriate table, the selection of the size and spacing of the members is then made. The selection is based on the depth and width of the trench where the members are to be installed and, in most instances, the selection is also based on the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces. Instances where a choice of horizontal spacing of crossbracing is available, the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces must be chosen by the user before the size of any member can be determined. When the soil type, the width and depth of the trench, and the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces are known, the size and vertical spacing of the crossbraces are known, the size and vertical spacing of the crossbraces, the size and vertical spacing of the wales, and the size and horizontal spacing of the uprights can be read from the appropriate table. (f) Examples to Illustrate the Use of Tables C-1.1 through C-1.3. (1) Example 1. A trench dug in Type A soil is 13 feet deep and five feet wide. From Table C-1.1, for acceptable arrangements of timber can be used. Arrangement #1 Space 4X4 crossbraces at six feet horizontally and four feet vertically. Wales are not required. Space 3X8 uprights at six feet horizontally. This arrangement is commonly called "skip shoring." Arrangement #2 Space 4X6 crossbraces at eight feet horizontally and four feet vertically. Space 8X8 wales at four feet vertically. Space 2X6 uprights at four feet horizontally. Arrangement #3 Space 6X6 crcssbraces at 10 feet horizontally and four feet vertically. Space 8X10 wales at four feet vertically. Space 2X6 uprights at five feet horizontally. Arrangement #4 Space 6X6 crossbraces at 12 feet horizontally and four feet vertically. Space 10X10 wales at four feet vertically. Space 3X8 uprights at six feet horizontally. 29CFR - 24 of 55 (2) Example 2. A trench dug in Type B soil is 13 feet deep and five feet wide. From Table C-1.2 three acceptable arrangements of members are listed. Arrangement #1 +;Space 6X6 crossbraces at six feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space 8X8 wales at five feet vertically. Space 2X6 uprights at two feet horizontally. Arrangement #2 Space 6X8 crossbraces at eight feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space 10X10 wales at five feet vertically. Space 2X6 uprights at two feet horizontally. Arrangement #3 Space 8X8 crossbraces at 10 feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space 10X12 wales at five feet vertically. Space 2X6 uprights at two feet vertically. (3) Example 3. A trench dug in Type C soil is 13 feet deep and five feet wide. From Table C-1.3 two acceptable arrangements of members can be used. Arrangement #1 -Space 8X8 crossbraces at six feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space 10X12 wales at five feet vertically. • Position 2X6 uprights as closely together as possible. If water must be retained use special tongue and groove uprights to form tight sheeting. Arrangement #2 Space 8X10 crossbraces at eight feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space 12X12 wales at five feet vertically. 29CFR - 25 of 55 L Position 2X6 uprights in a close sheeting configuration unless water pressure must be resisted. Tight sheeting must be used where water must be retained. (4) Example 4. A trench dug in Type C soil is 20 feet deep and 11 feet wide. The size and spacing of members for the section of trench that is over 15 feet in depth is determined using Table C-1.3.Only one arrangement of members is provided. Space 8X10 crossbraces at six feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space 12X12 wales at five feet vertically. Use 3X6 tight sheeting. Use of Tables C-2.1 through C-2.3 would follow the same procedures. (g) Notes for all Tables. 1. Member sizes at spacings other than indicated are to be determined as specified in 1926.652(c), "Design of Protective Systems." 2. When conditions are saturated or submerged use Tight Sheeting. Tight Sheeting refers to the use of specially - edged timber planks (e.g., tongue and groove) at least three inches thick, steel sheet piling, or similar construction that when driven or placed in position provide a tight wall to resist the lateral pressure of water and to prevent the loss of backfill material. Close Sheeting refers to the placement of planks side -by -side allowing as little space as possible between them. 3. All spacing indicated is measured center to center. 4. Wales to be installed with greater dimension horizontal. 5. If the vertical distance from the center of the lowest crossbrace to the bottom of the trench exceeds two and one-half feet, uprights shall be firmly embedded or a mudsill shall be used. Where uprights are embedded, the vertical distance from the center of the lowest crossbrace to the bottom of the trench shall not exceed 36 inches. When mudsills are used, the vertical distance shall not exceed 42 inches. Mudsills are wales that are installed at the tow of the trench side. 6. Trench jacks may be used in lieu of or in combination with timber crossbraces. 7. Placement of crossbraces. When the vertical spacing of crossbraces is four feet, place the top crossbrace no more than two feet below the top of the trench. When the vertical spacing of crossbraces is five feet, place the top crossbrace no more than 2.5 feet below the top of the trench. I I I I Li 29CFR - 26 of 55 n n ' TABLE C-1.1 TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS " SOIL TYPE A P(a) = 25 X H + 72 psf (2 ft Surcharge) II SIZE (ACTUAL) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS DEPTH I CROSS BRACES I I I I HORIZ.I WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET) I VERT. .TRENCHISPACINGI I SPACING I I I I I I I II I UP TO I UP TO I UP TO I UP TO I UP TO I (FEET)I (FEET)I 4 I 6 I 9 I 12 I 15 I (FEET) I I I I UP TO I I I I I I I. I 6 I 4X4 14X4 14X6 I 6X6 I 6X6 I 4 5 I II I I I I To IUPTOI I I I I I 8 1 4X4 14X4 14X6 I 6X6 I 6X6 1 4 II I I I I I I 10 I I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I 1 10 1 4X6 14X6 14X6 I 6X6 I 6X6 1 4 ' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I 12 1 4X6 14X6 16X6 I 6X6 I 6X6 1 4 I I I ' I UP TO I I I I I I I 6 I 4X4 14X4 14X6 I 6X6 I 6X6 I 4 I I I I 10 I I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I II 8 I 4X6 14X6 16X6 I 6X6 I 6X6 1 4 I I TO I I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I I 10 1 6X6 16X6 16x6 I 6X8 I 6X8 1 4 II__ I I I I I I 15 I I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I I 12 1 6X6 16X6 16X6 I 6X8 I 6X8 I 4 1 I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I 6 I 6X6 16X6 1 6X6 I 6X8 I 6X8 I 4 I -15 I I I I I I I ' 1 UP TO I I I I I I I 8 I 6X6 16X6 16X6 I 6X8 I 6X8 1 4 I I I I ,TO I I I I I I I ' I UP 0O I I I I 1018X8 8X8 .183(8 18X8 I 8X8 I 8X10 I 4 I 20 1 1 I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I ' 1 12 1 8X8 18X8 18X8 1 83(8 183(101 8X10 1 4 I I I :OVER I SEE NOTE 1 20 1 1 U 29CFR - 27 of 55 0. L TABLE C-1.1 TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS * SOIL TYPE A P(a) = 25 X H + 72 pef (2 ft Surcharge) [Continued] I SIZE (ACTUAL) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS ** DEPTH I I I WALES I UPRIGHTS OF I I I TRENCHI I VERT. I MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE HORIZONTAL SPACING I ISPACINGI (FEET) I SIZE I I I I I I I I I (FEETH (IN) ((FEET) I CLOSE 1 4 I 5 I 6 1 8 I I I I I I I I Not I I I I I I I Req'd I--- I I I I 2X6 1 5 I I I I I I I I TO I Not I I I I I I I Req'a I--- I I I I I 2X8 10 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I 8X8 I 4 I I I 2X6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I —1 8X8 I 4 I I 2X6 I I I I I I I I Not I I I I I I I Req'd I I I I I 3X8 I I 10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 6X8 I 4 I 12x6 I I I I I TO I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I 8x10 I 4 I I I 2X6 I I I I I 15 I I I I I I I I I I I I I 110X10 I 4 I I I 13%8 I I I I I I I I I 6X8 1 4 13X6 I I I I I I 1 I I 15 I I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 8X8 I 4 1 3X6 I I I I I I TO I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 6X10 1 4 1 3X6 I I I I I 20 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 10X10 1 4 1 3X6 I I I I _I I OVER I SEE NOTE 1 20 I I * Mixed oak or equivalent with a bending strength not less than 850 psi. ** Manufactured members of equivalent strength may be substituted for wood. 29CFR - 28 of 55 ' Li TABLE C-1.2 TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS ' SOIL TYPE B P(a) = 45 X H + 72 psf (2 ft Surcharge) SIZE (ACTUAL) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS " DEPTH I CROSS BRACES OF I I I I I HORIZ.I WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET) I VERT. U TRENCH ISPACINGI I SPACING I I I I I I I I I UP TO I UP TO I UP TO I UP TO I UP TO I (FEET)I (FEET)I 4 I 6 I 9 I 12 1 15 I (FEET) UP TO I I I I I I 1 6 I 4X6 14X6 16X6 I 6X6 1 6X6 1 5 5 I I I I 1 I I I I I I I TO I UP TO I I I I I I 8 I 6X6 16X6 16X6 I 6X8 I 6X8 I 5 I I I I 10 I I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I I 10 1 6X6 16X6 16X6 I 6X8 I 6X8 I 5 I I I I I I I I I I I See I I I I I I Nate 11I I I I I I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I I 6 I 6X6 16X6 16X6. I 6X8 I 6X8 1 5 I I I I 10 I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I 8 I 6X8 16X8 16X8 I 8X8 I 8X8 I 5 I I I TO I I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I I 10 1 8X8 1 8X8 18X8 I 8X8 I 8X10 I 5 I 15 I I I I I I II I I I I See I I I I I I I Note 11 I I I I I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I I6 I 6X6 16X8 16X8 1 8X8 I 8X8 I 5 I I I I I 15 I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I I 8 I 8x8 18x8 18x8 I 8X8 I 8X101 5 I I I I I I TO I I I I 1 I I I UP TO 1 I I I I I I 10 I 8x10 18X10 18x10 I 8X10 110x10 I 5 I I I I I I I 20I I I I I I I I I I I I I See I I I I I I Note 11 I I I I I I I I I I I OVER I SEE NOTE 1 20 I 1 29CFR - 29 of 55 TABLE C-1.2 TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS SOIL TYPE B P(a) = 45 x H + 12 psf (2 ft Surcharge) (Continued] SIZE (ACTUAL) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS '° DEPTH I I I WALES I UPRIGHTS OF I I TRENCHI I VERT. I MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE HORIZONTAL SPACING I ISPACINGI (FEET) I SIZE I I I I 1 (FEET)I (IN) I(FEET) I CLOSE I 2 I 3 I I I I I I I I I 6X8 I 5 1 I I 2X6 I I 5 I 1 I 1 1 I I I I I I I I I TO I I 1 I I I I I 8X10 I 5 I I 1 2X6 I I I 10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 110x10 1 5 I I I 2X6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 axe 1 5 I 1 2X6 I I I I I 10 I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I 110X10 I 5 I I 2X6 I I I I I I I I I TO I I I I I I I 1 1 I 1 1 I I 110X12 I 5 I I 2X6 I I I 1 I I I 15 t I I I ! I I I I I I I I 1 1 I 1 1 I 1 I I I I I ' I 8X101 5 13X6 I I I I I I I 15 I I 1 I I I 1 I 1 I I 1 I 10X121 S 13X6 I I I I ' I I TO I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I 112X12 I 5 1 3X6 I I I I I 20 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I OVER I SEE NOTE 1 ' 201 Mixed oak or equivalent with a bending strength not less than 850 psi. p Manufactured members of equivalent strength may be substituted for wood. 29CFR - 30 of 55 ' TABLE C-1.3 TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS SOIL TYPE C P(a) = 80 X H + 72 psf (2 ft Surcharge) SIZE (ACTUAL) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS •* DEPTH I I CROSS BRACES OF II I I I I I HORIZ.I WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET) 1 I VERT. TRENCHISPACINGI I I SPACING I I I UP TO I UP TO I I I UP TO I I UP TO I UP TO I (FEET)I (FEET)I I 4 I 6 I 1 9 I 12 I 15 1 (FEET) _1 UPTO I I I I I I 1 I 1 6 I 6X8 16X8 1 6x8 1 8x8 1 8X8 1 5 5 I I I TO I I UP TO I I I I I I I I I I 1 8 I 8X8 1 8X8 1 8X8 1 8X8 I 8X10 1 5 10 I I I 1 I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I 1 10 I I 8x10 18X10 18X10 I 8X10 110X10 I 5 I See I I I I I I I I 1 I I Note 11 I I I I I I I I I I I I UP TO 1 I 1 I I 1 6 1 8X8 18X8 18X8 I 8X8 I axial 5 10 I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I 1 8 I 8x10 18x10 18x10 I Bx10 110x10 1 5 TO I I I I I I I 1 I I See I I I I I I I Note 11 I I I I 15 I I I I I 1 I I I I I See I I I I I I I Note 11 I I I I I I I I I I I i UP TO I I I I 6 I 8X1018X10 8X10 18X10 I BX10 110x10 I 5 I I 1 1 1 1 See I I • I I I Note 11 I I I I TO I I I I I I I I I I I I See I 1 I I I - I I Note 11 1 I I I I 20. I I I I I 1 1 See I I I I Note 11 I I I I I _I I I SEE NOTE 1 I I I OVER I 20 I 29CFR - 31 of 55 TABLE C-1.3 TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS * SOIL TYPE C P(a) = 80 X H + 72 psf (2 ft Surcharge) [Continued] SIZE (ACTUAL) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS ** DEPTH I I I WALES I UPRIGHTS OF I I I I TRENCHI I VERT. I MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE HORIZONTAL SPACING I ISPACINGI (FEET) I SIZE I I I I I I I I I (FEET)I (IN) I(FEET) I CLOSE I I I I I I I I I I I I I 8X10 I 5 12X6 I I I 5 I I I I I I I I TO I I I I I I I 110X12 I 5 12X6 I I I I 10 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I I I 112X12 1 5 12X6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 10X12 1 5 12X6 I I I I I I I I 10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 12X12 I 5 12X6 I I I I I I TO I f I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I 15 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 112X12 I 5 13X6 I I I I I 15 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I TO I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I 20 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I _I I I OVER I SEE NOTE 1 20 I * Mixed oak or equivalent with a bending strength not less than 850 psi. *4 Manufactured members of equivalent strength may be substituted for wood. 29CFR - 32 of 55 TABLE C-2.1 TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS * SOIL TYPE A P(a) = 25 X H + 72 psf (2 ft Surcharge) SIZE (S4S) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS ** DEPTH, CROSS BRACES OF I I Il I I I I I I HORIZ.1 WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET) I VERT. TRENCH ISPACINGI I I _ I SPACING • I I UP TO I I UP TO I I I UP TO I I UP TO I I UP TO I (FEET)I I (FEET)I 4 I 6 I 9 I 12 I 15 I (FEET) • I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I I 6 1 4X4 14X4 14x4 I 4X4 I 4X6 I 4 S I • I TO I I UP TO I I I I I I I I I I I 8 I 4X4 14X4 14X4 I 4X6 I 4X6 1 4 10 I I I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I I 10 1 I 4X6 14X6 14X6 I 6X6 I 6X6 1 4 I I I UP TO I I I I I I 1 I I I I 12 I 4X6 14X6 14X6 I 6X6 I 6X6 1 4 _I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I 6 I 4X4 14X4 14X4 I 6X6 I 6X6 I 4 I 10 I I I I I I I, I I UP TO I I I I I I 8 I 4X6 14X6 14X6 I 6X6 I 6X6 I 4 TO I I I I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I I 10 1 6X6 16X6 16X6 I 6X6 I 6X6 1 4 15 I 1 I I I I 1 I I UP TO I I I I I I I 12 1 6X6 16X6 16X6 I 6X6 I 6X6 1 4 _ I I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I 6 I 6X6 16X6 16X6 I 6X6 I 6X6 I 4 15 •I I I I I I I I 1 1 I UP TO I I I I I I 1 I 8 I 6X6 16x6 16X6 I 6x6 I 6X6 1 4 TO I I I I I I I I II I UP TO I I I .1 I I 1 10 1 6X6 16X6 16X6 I 6X6 I 6X8 1 4 I .20 I I I I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I 1 I 12 I 6X6 16X6 16X6 1 6x8 I 6X8 1 4 I I SEE NOTE 1 I I AVER I 20 I 29CFR - 33 of 55 I TABLE C-2.1 TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS * SOIL TYPE A P(a) = 25 X H + 72 psf (2 ft Surcharge) [Continued) I SIZE ($4S) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS •* DEPTH I I WALES I UPRIGHTS OF I I I TRENCHI I VERT. I MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE HORIZONTAL SPACING ISPACINGI (FEET) SIZE I I I I I I I I I (FEET)I (IN) I(FEET) I CLOSE 1 4 I 5 I 6 I 8 _I I I I Not t Not I I I I I I Req'd I Req'd I I 1 I 4X6 I 5 I I I I I I I I TO I Not I Not I I I I I I Req'd I Req'd I I I I I 4X8 I I I 10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 8X8 I 4 I I I 4X6 I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I 8X8 1 4 1 I I I 4X6 I ' I I I I I I I Not I Not I I I I Req'd I Req'd I I I I 4X10 I I I I I I 10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 6X8 I 4 I 14X6 I I I I I TO I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I BX8 I 4 I I I 4X8 I 15 I I I I I I I I I I I I I 8Xl0 I 4 I 14X6 I I 4X10 I I I I I I I I I I 6X8 I 4 13X6 I I I I I I I I 15 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 8X8 I 4 13X6 14x12 I I I I I I I I I TO I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 8x10 I 4 13X6 I I I I I I I I I I 20 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 8X12 I 4 1 3X6 I 4x12 I I I I I I OVER I SEE NOTE 1 20 I * Douglas fir or equivalent with a bending strength not less than 1500 psi. ** Manufactured members of equivalent strength may be substituted for wood. 29CFR - 34 of 55 TABLE C-2.2 TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS * SOIL TYPE B P(a) = 45 X H + 72 psf (2 ft Surcharge) SIZE ($4S) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS •• ..DEPTH CROSS BRACES OF I HORIZ.I WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET) I VERT. TRENCHISPACINGI I SPACING II I I I I I IIUPTOIUPTOIUPTOIUPTOIUPTOI (FEET)I (FEET)I 4 I 6 I 9 I 12 I 15 I (FEET) I I I I UP TO I. I I I I I I6 I 4X6 14X6 14X6 I 6X6 I 6X6 I 5 5 I I I I I I I I I TO I UP TO I I I I I I I 8 I 4X6 14X6 1 6X6 I 6X6 I 6X6 I 5 10 I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I 1 10 1 4X6 14X6 1 6X6 I 6X6 I 6X8 I 5 I I I I I I I I I I I I See I I I I Note 11 I I I 1 I I I I UP TO 1 I 6 1 6X6 16X6 16X6 1 6X8 I 6X8 1 5 I I I 10 I I I I I I I OP TO I I I I I I B I 6X8 16X8 16X6 I BXB I 8X8 I 5 I I TO I I I I I I I I UP TO I I 1 I I I I 10 1 6X8 16X8 18X8 I 8X8 I BXS I 5 I 15 I I I I I 1 1 I I I I I I I Noe 1 I I I I I I Note 11 1 I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I I 6 I 6X8 16X8 16X8 I 6X8 I 8X8 1 5 I 1 I I I I 15I I I I1 I I I UP TO I I I I I 8 1 6XB 16X8 16X8 I BXB I 8x8 1 5 I I To I I I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I I I •10 I 8X8 18X8 18X8 I 8X8 I 8XB I 5 I I I 20 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I • See I I I 1 I I Note 11 I I I 1• I I I OVER I SEE NOTE 1 20 I ii d 29CFR - 35 of 55 P TABLE C-2.2 TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS SOIL TYPE B P(a) = 45 X H + 72 psf (2 ft Surcharge) (Continued) SIZE (S4S) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS ** DEPTH I I I WALES I UPRIGHTS OF I I TRENCHI I I VERT. I MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE HORIZONTAL SPACING I ISPACINGI (FEET) I SIZE I I I I I (FEET)I I (IN) I(FEET) I I I CLOSE 1 I 2 I 3 1 I I I 3X12 I 1I 6X8 I 5 I I I 4X8 I 14X12 5 I I I I I I I I TO I I I I I I I 8X8 I 5 I I 3X8 I I 4X8 I I I I 10 I I I I I I I I I I I axial I 5 1 I I I I 4X8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 4X10 I I I I I 3)16 14)1101 8X8 I I I 5 I 10 I I I I I I I I I I 110X10 I I 1 5 I 3X6 I I 4X10 I I I I I TO I I I I I I I I I 10X12 I 1 5 I I 3X6 I 1 I 4x10 I I I I 15 I I I I I I 1 I I 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I 1 4X6 I 5 I I axial 15 I I I I I 1 I I 1 10X12 I 1 5 I 1 4X6 I I I I I TO I I 1 I I I I I I I 12X12 I 1 5 I 14X6 I I I I 20 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I NOTE 1 OVER I SEE 20 I * Douglas fir or equivalent with a bending strength not less than 1500 psi. ** Manufactured members of equivalent strength may be substituted for wood. 29CFR - 36 of 55 1 1 1 I I n I I I LI 11 I I7 TABLE C-2.3 TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS " SOIL TYPE C P(a) = 80 X H + 72 psf (2 ft Surcharge) SIZE ($4S) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS '• I I fl I I I I I DEPTH I I CROSS BRACES OF I I I I HORIZ.I WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET) 1 I VERT. TRENCHISPACINGI I I I SPACING I I UP TO I I UP TO I I I UP TO I UP TO I I I UP TO I (FEET)I (FEET)I I 4 I 6 I I 9 1 12 1 15 I (FEET) UP TO I I I I I I I 6 I 6X6 16X6 16X6 I 6X6 I 8X8 1 5 5 I I I I TO I I I UP TO I I I I I I I I'. I I. I 8 I 6X6 16X6 16X6 I 8X8 1 8X8 I 5 I 10 I I I 1 I I 1 I I I UP TO I I I I I I I 10 1 I 6X6 16X6 1 8X8 I I 8X8 I I 8X8 I I 5 I I I See I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 Note 11 I I 1 I I I I I I UP TO I I I I I 1 6 16X8 16X8 1 6X8 I 8x8 I 8X8 1 5 10 1 1 I I I I I 1 I UP TO 1 I I 1 I I I 8 18X8 1 8X8 1 8x8 I 8X8 I 8X8 I 5 TO I I I I I I I I I I I I See I I I I I I I Note 11 I I 1 I I 15 -1 I I I I 1 I 1 I see 1 I I I I Note 11 I I I I I 1 I I I UP TO I I I I I 6 18X8 •I 8X8 18X8 1 8X10 18X10 I 5 I 15 I I I I I I I 1 I I See I I I I I I Note 11 I I I I I TO I I 1 I I I I I I I I See I I I I I I I Note 11 1 I I I I 20 1 I I I I I I I I •I See I I I I I Note 11 I I I I I SEE NOTE 1 I I I OVER I 20 1 29CFR - 37o155 I TABLE C-2.3 TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS I SOIL TYPE C P(a) = 80 X H + 72 psf (2 ft Surcharge) (Continued] I SIZE (S4S) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS •" DEPTH I I I WALES I UPRIGHTS OF I I I I TRENCHI I VERT. I MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE HORIZONTAL SPACING I (SPACING( (FEET) I SIZE I I I I I I I I I I FEET)I (IN) I (FEET) I CLOSE I I I I I I I I I I I I I 18X8 I 5 13X6 I I I I 5 I I 1' I I I I I I I TO I I I I I I I 110X10 1 5 13x6 I I I I I I I I 10 I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I 10X12 I 5 13X6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 10X10 I 5 14X6 I I I I I I I 10 I I I 1 I I I I I I I I 1 112X12 I 5 1 4x6 I I I I I TO I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I 1 I I I I I I I 15 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I 1 I 110X12 I 5 14X6 I I I I I I 15 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I TO 1 I I I I I 1 I 1 I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I 20 I I 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I OVER I SEE NOTE 1 20 I * Douglas fir or equivalent with a bending strength not less than 1500 psi. ** Manufactured members of equivalent strength may be substituted for wood. 29CFR - 38 of 55 I 1 I I Ti I I I I I I • Part Number: 1926 • Part Tide: Safety and Health Regulations for Construction • Subpart: P • Subpart Title: Excavations • Standard Number: 1926 Subpart P App D • Title: Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring for Trenches II I Ll • (a) Scope. This appendix contains information that can be used when aluminum hydraulic shoring is provided as a method of protection against cave-ins in trenches that do not exceed 20 feet (6.1 m) in depth. This appendix • must be used when design of the aluminum hydraulic protective system cannot be performed in accordance with 1926.652(c)(2). (b) Soil Classification. In order to use data presented in this appendix, the soil type or types in which the excavation is made must first be determined using the soil classification method set forth in appendix A of subpart P of part 1926. (c) Presentation of Information. Information is presented in several forms as follows: (1) Information is presented in tabular form in Tables D-1.1, D-1.2, D-1.3 and D-1.4. Each table presents the maximum vertical and horizontal spacings that may be used with various aluminum member sizes and various hydraulic cylinder sizes. Each table contains data only for the particular soil type in which the excavation or portion of the excavation is made. Tables D-1.1 and D-1.2 are for vertical shores in Types A and B soil. Tables D-1.3 and D-1.4 are for horizontal walet systems in Types B and C soil. (2) Information concerning the basis of the tabular data and the limitations of the data is presented in paragraph (d) of this appendix. (3) Information explaining the use of the tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of this appendix. (4) Information illustrating the use of the tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of this appendix. (5) Miscellaneous notations (Footnotes) regarding Table D- 1.1 through D- 1.4 are presented in paragraph (g) of this appendix. . (6) Figures, illustrating typical installations of hydraulic shoring, are included just prior to the Tables. The illustrations page is entitled "Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring: Typical Installations." (d) Basis and limitations of the data. (1) Vertical shore rails and horizontal wales are those that meet the Section Modulus requirements in the D-1 Tables. Aluminum material is 6061-T6 or material of equivalent strength and properties. .(2) Hydraulic cylinders specifications. (i) 2 -inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2 -inch inside diameter with a .minimum safe working capacity of no less than 18,000 pounds axial compressive load at maximum extension. Maximum extension is to include full range of cylinder extensions as recommended by product manufacturer. (ii) 3 -inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3 -inch inside diameter with a safe working capacity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial compressive load at extensions as recommended by product manufacturer. (3) Limitation of application. (i) It is not intended that the aluminum hydraulic specification apply to every situation that may be experienced in the field. These data were developed to apply to the situations that are most commonly experienced in current .trenching practice. Shoring systems for use in situations that are not covered by the data in this appendix must .be otherwise designed as specified in 1926.652(c). (ii) When any of the following conditions are present, the members specified in the Tables are not considered adequate. In this case, an alternative aluminum hydraulic shoring system or other type of protective system must be designed in accordance with 1926.652. (A) When vertical loads imposed on cross braces exceed a 100 Pound gravity load distributed on a one foot section of the center of the hydraulic cylinder. (B) When surcharge loads are present from equipment weighing in excess of 20,000 pounds. (C) When only the lower portion of a trench is shored and the remaining portion of the trench is sloped or 29CFR - 39 of 55 1 benched unless: The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less steep than three horizontal to one vertical; or the members are selected from the tables for use at a depth which is determined from the top of the overall trench, and not from the toe of the sloped portion. (e) Use of Tables D-1.1, D-1.2, D-1.3 and D-1.4. The members of the shoring system that are to be selected using this information are the hydraulic cylinders, and either the vertical shores or the horizontal wales. When a waler system is used the vertical timber sheeting to be used is also selected from these tables. The Tables D-1.1 and D-1.2 for vertical shores are used in Type A and B soils that do not require sheeting. Type B soils that may require sheeting, and Type C soils that always require sheeting, are found in the horizontal wale Tables D-1.3 and D-1.4. The soil type must first be determined in accordance with the soil classification system described in appendix A to subpart P of part 1926. Using the appropriate table, the selection of the size and spacing of the members is made. The selection is based on the depth and width of the trench where the members are to be installed. In these tables the vertical spacing is held constant at four feet on center. The tables show the maximum horizontal spacing of cylinders allowed for each size of wale in the waler system tables, and in the vertical shore tables, the hydraulic cylinder horizontal spacing is the same as the vertical shore spacing. (1) Example to Illustrate the Use of the Tables: (1) Example 1: A trench dug in Type A soil is 6 feet deep and 3 feet wide. From Table •D-1.1: Find vertical shores and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced 8 feet on center (o.c.) horizontally and 4 feet on center (o.c.) vertically. (See Figures 1 & 3 for typical installations.) (2) Example 2: A trench is dug in Type B soil that does not require sheeting, 13 feet deep and 5 feet wide. From Table D-1.2: Find vertical shores and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced 6.5 feet o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically. (See Figures 1 & 3 for typical installations.) (3) A trench is dug in Type B soil that does not require sheeting, but does experience some minor raveling of the trench face. the trench is 16 feet deep and 9 feet wide. From Table D-1.2: Find vertical shores and 2 inch diameter cylinder (with special oversleeves as designated by Footnote #2) spaced 5.5 feet o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically. Plywood (per Footnote (g)(7) to the D- 1 Table) should be used behind the shores. (See Figures 2 & 3 for typical installations.) (4) Example 4: A trench is dug in previously disturbed Type B soil, with characteristics of a Type C soil, and will require sheeting. The trench is 18 feet deep, and 12 feet wide 8 foot horizontal spacing between cylinders is desired for working space. From Table D-1.3: Find horizontal wale with a section modulus of 14.0 spaced at 4 feet o.c. vertically and 3 inch diameter cylinder spaced at 9 feet maximum o.c. horizontally, 3 x 12 timber sheeting is required at close spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for typical installation.) (5) Example 5: A trench is dug in Type C soil, 9 feet deep and 4 feet wide. Horizontal cylinder spacing in excess of 6 feet is desired for working space. From Table D-1.4: Find horizontal wale with a section modulus of 7.0 and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced at 6.5 feet o.c. horizontally. Or, find horizontal wale with a 14.0 section modulus and 3 inch diameter cylinder spaced at 10 feet o.c. horizontally. Both wales are spaced 4 feet o.c. vertically, 3 x 12 timber sheeting is required at close spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for typical installation.) (g) Footnotes, and general notes, for Tables D-1.1, D-1.2, D-1.3, and D-1.4. (1) For applications other than those listed in the tables, refer to 1926.652(c)(2) for use of manufacturer's tabulated data. For trench depths in excess of 20 feet, refer to 1926.652(c)(2) and 1926.652(c)(3). (2) 2 inch diameter cylinders, at this width, shall have structural steel tube (3.5 x 3.5 x 0.1875) oversleeves, or structural oversleeves of manufacturer's specification, extending the full, collapsed length. (3) Hydraulic cylinders capacities. (i) 2 -inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2 -inch inside diameter with a safe working capacity of not less than 18,000 pounds axial compressive load at maximum extension. Maximum extension is to include full range of cylinder extensions as recommended by product manufacturer. (ii) 3 -inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3 -inch inside diameter with a safe work capacity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial compressive load at maximum extension. Maximum extension is to include full range of cylinder extensions as recommended by product manufacturer. (4) All spacing indicated is measured center to center. (5) Vertical shoring rails shall have a minimum section modulus of 0.40 inch. (6) When vertical shores are used, there must be a minimum of three shores spaced equally, horizontally, in a group. (7) Plywood shall be 1.125 inch thick softwood or 0.75 inch thick, 14 ply, arctic white birch (Finland form). Please note that plywood is not intended as a structural member, but only for prevention of local raveling 29CFR - 40 of 55 ' 7 (sloughing of the trench face) between shores. (8) See appendix C for timber specifications. (9) Wales are calculated for simple span conditions. (10) See appendix D, item (d), for basis and limitations of the data. ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS Figure No. 1 - Vertical aluminum hydraulic shoring (spot bracing) FIGURENO. VERTICAL ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING (SPOT BRACING) HORIZONTAL SPACING 18" MAX, HYDRAULIC CYLINDER VERTICAL SPACING 4' MAX 2' MAX 29CFR - 41 of 55 m I Figure No. 2 - Vertical aluminum hydraulic shoring (with plywood) ' FIGURE NO.2 VERTICAL ALUMINUM ' HYDRAULIC SHORING (WITH PLYWOOD) HORIZONTAL SPACING ///, VERTICAL RAIL HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ■rr ■ • PLYWOOD 18" MAX. ■ ■ ' ■ • VERTICAL • ■ I. SPACING ■ ■ 4' MAX. r • ' r r 2' MAX. r r 1 1 1 1 ii 29CFR - 42 of 55 , di Figure No. 3 - Vertical aluminum hydraulic shoring (stacked) FIGURE NO.3 VERTICAL ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING (STACKED) HORIZONTAL SPACING VERTICAL SPACING VERTICAL RAIL HYDRAULIC CYLINDER 2' MAX 29CFR - 43 of 55 Figure No. 4 - Aluminum hydraulic shoring - Waler System (typical) ' FIGURE NO.4 UPRIGHT SHEETING ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING WALER SYSTEM (TYPICAL) ' HORIZONTAL SPACING WALE ■■ 1 a ' HYDRAULIC ■ ■ CYLINDER• I. 2' MAX ■ • ■ ■ U I ■ ■ VERTICAL ■ + ' SPACING ■ L� s ' 4' MAX. ■ ■ 1 1 1 I. 29CFR - 44 of 55 if Ii I 1 II El I I I I II I F F I I TABLE D - 1.1 ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING VERTICAL SHORES FOR SOIL TYPE A DEPTH I MAXIMUM OF I HORIZONTAL TRENCH I SPACING (FEET) I (FEET) OVER I 5 I 8 UP TO I 10 I OVER I 10 I 8 UP TO I 15 I OVER I 15 I 7 UP TO 20 OVER 20 HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS MAXIMUM VERTICAL SPACING (FEET) U N0TE(1) WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET), UP TO 8 2 INCH DIAMETER I I I OVER 8 I OVER 12 I UP TO 12 I UP TO 15 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2 INCH I 3 INCH I DIAMETER I DIAMETER I N0TE(2) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Footnotes to tables, and general notes on hydraulic shoring, are found in Appendix D, Item (g) Note(1): See Appendix D, Item (g)(1) •Note(2): See Appendix D, Item (g)(2) ' 29CFR - 45 of 55 n I DEPTH I OF I TRENCH I (FEET) I OVER 5 I UP TO I 10 I I OVER I 10 UP TO I 15 I OVER I 15 UP TO I 20 I OVER 20 TABLE D - 1.2 ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING VERTICAL SHORES FOR SOIL TYPE B MAXIMUM HORIZONTAL SPACING (FEET) ri LJ 6.5 5.5 HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS MAXIMUM I WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET) VERTICAL I SPACING I I I I UP TO 8 I OVER 8 I OVER 12 (FEET) I I I I I I I I UP TO 12 I I I I I UP TO 15 4 I I I I I I I I I I 12 INCH 12 I I I I INCH I 3 INCH I DIAMETER I DIAMETER I DIAMETER I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I NOTE(2) I I I I I NOTE(1) Footnotes to tables, and general notes on hydraulic shoring, are found in Appendix D, Item (g) Noted): See Appendix D, Item (g)(1) Note(2): See Appendix D, Item (g)(2) 29CFR - 46 of 55 I I I U I U I I I I II I I I n TABLE D - 1.3 ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING WALER SYSTEMS FOR SOIL TYPE 8 I I I WALES I I HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS I I I ;DEPTH I I I (VERTICAL( * I WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET) I I OF (SPACING ISECTIONI I TRENCH I IMODULUSI I I I I I UP TO 8 1 OVER 8 UP I TO 12 I I I I I I I I HORIZ I I CYLINDER I I I HORIZ I I CYLINDER I (FEET) I (FEET) I(IN(3))I I SPACING I DIAMETER I I SPACING I DIAMETER I I - I I I I I 3.5 1 - 8.0 I 1 2 IN I I I 8.0 I I 2 IN I OVER I I I I I I NOTE (2) I 5 I I 4 I I I I I I I I I I I 7.0 I 9.0 1 2 IN I 9.0 I 2 IN I UP TO I I 1 I I I NOTE (2) I 10 I I I I I I i I I I 1 14.0 I I I I 12.0 I 3 IN I 12.0 I 3 IN I I I I I I 3.5 I I 6.0 I 2 IN I I I 6.0 I I 2 IN I OVER I I I I I I NOTE (2) I 10 I I 4 I I I I I I I I I 7.0 I 8.0 1 3 IN I 8.0 I 3 IN I UP TO I I I I I I I 15 I I I I I I I I I I 1 14.0 I 10.0 1 3 IN 1 10.0 1 I 3 IN I I I I I I 3.5 I I 5.5 I 2 IN I I I 5.5 I 2 IN OVER I I I I I I NOTE (2) I 15 I I I. 4 I I I I I I I I 7.0 I 6.0 1 3 IN I 6.0 1 3 IN I 'UP TO I I I I I I I 20 I I I I I I I I I I I 1 14.0 I 9.0 I I 3 IN I 9.0 I I 3 IN I I OVER I I I I 20 I NOTE (1) I I l 1 I ' 29CFR - 47 of 55 I ' I TABLE D - 1.3 ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING WALER SYSTEMS FOR SOIL TYPE B (Continued] - I I I WALES I HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS TIMBER UPRIGHTS I I I I WIDTH OF TRENCH I MAX. HORIZ SPACING DEPTH IVERTICALI * I (FEET) I (ON CENTER) OF ISPACING ISECTIONI TRENCH I IMODULUSI I I I OVER 12 UP TO 15 I I I I I I 1 I I I ISOLIDI 2 FT 1 3 FT I I HORIZ I CYLINDER ISHEETI I (FEET) I (FEET) I(IN(3))I SPACING I DIAMETER I I I I I ____ II I I I I I I I ' I I 3.5 I 8.0 I 31N I I I OVER I I I I I I I I I I 5 I 4 I I I I I 1 1 7.0 1 9.0 I 3 IN I --- I --- 13x12 OP TO I I I I I I I 1 I I I 10 I I I 1 I I I 1 14.0 1 12.0 1 3 IN I I I I I I I I I 1 { 3.5 I 6.0 1 3 IN I I I OVER I I I I I I I 1 I I I 1 10 I 4 I I I I I I 1 7.0 1 8.0 1 3 IN I--- 13x12 I --- UP TO I I I I I I I I I I 1 15 II I I I I I 114.0 I 10.0 I 31N I I I I ____ I_I_____ I I 1 1 I I 3.5 I 5.5 I 3 IN I I I OVER I I I I I I I I I I 1 15 I 4 I I I I I I I 7.0 I 6.0 I 3 IN 13x121 --- I --- UP TO I I I I I I I I I I I I I 20 I 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 14.0 I 9.0 I 3 IN I I I OVER I 20 I NOTE (1) Footnotes to tables, and general notes on hydraulic shoring, are found in Appendix D, Item (g) Note(1): See Appendix D. Item (g)(1) Note(2): See Appendix D, Item (g)(2) Consult product manufacturer and/or qualified engineer for Section Modulus of available wales. 1 1 29CFR - 48 of 55 t II II Ii II I P I I I P I [1 I P I I TABLE D - 1.4 ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING WALER SYSTEMS FOR SOIL TYPE C I I I WALES - I HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS I I I DEPTH I I I (VERTICAL( * I WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET) I .OF. (SPACING (SECTION( I TRENCH I IMODULUSI I I I I I UP TO 8 1 OVER 8 UP I TO 12 I I I I I I I HORIZ I I CYLINDER I I I HORIZ I I CYLINDER I (FEET) I (FEET) 1(IN(3))I I SPACING I DIAMETER I I SPACING I DIAMETER I I I 1 3.5 1 6.0 I 1 2 IN I I I. 6.0 I I 2 IN I OVER I I I I 1 I NOTE (2) I 5 I 4 I I I I 1 I I I I I 7.0 1 6.5 I 2 IN 1 6.5 I 2 IN I UP TO I I I I I I NOTE (2) 1 10 I I 1 1 I I I I I I 1 14.0 I I 10.0 I 3 IN I 10.0 I I I 3 IN I 1 I I I 1 I 3.5 I 4.0 I I 2 IN I I I 4.0 I 1 2 IN I OVER I I I I I I NOTE (2) I 10 I I 4 I I I I I I 1. I I I I 1 7.0 I 5.5 I 3 IN 1 5.5 1 3 IN I UP TO I I I I I I I 15 I I I 1 I I H 1 I 1 I 1 14.0 1 I 8.0 I 3 I IN I 8.0 I I I 3 IN I I I I I I 3.5 I 3.5 I I 2 IN 1 I 1. 3.5 I I 2 IN I OVER I I I I I I NOTE (2) 1 15 I I 4 1 I I I I I I I 1 7.0 1 5.0 I 3 IN I 5.0 I 3 IN I UP TO I I I I I I I 20 I I I I I I I I I I 114.0 I I 6.0 I 3 IN 1 6.0 I I 3 IN I I OVER 1 I I I "20"- 1 NOTE (1) 29CFR - 49 of 55 Fl I TABLE D - 1.4 ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING WALER SYSTEMS FOR SOIL TYPE C (Continued] I WALES I HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS I TIMBER UPRIGHTS I I I I I I I I I I WIDTH OF TRENCH I MAX. HORIZ SPACING DEPTH IVERTICALI * I (FEET) I (ON CENTER) OF ISPACING ISECTIONI I TRENCH I IMODULUSI I I I I I OVER 12 UP TO 15 I I I I I I I I I II I I (SOLIDI 2 FT 13 FT I I I HORIZ I CYLINDER ISHEETI I (FEET) I (FEET) I(IN(3))I SPACING I DIAMETER I I I I ____P I I I I 1 1 I I 3.5 I 6.0 I 3 IN I I I OVER I I I I I I I I I I 5 I 4 I I I I I I ' I 7.0 I 6.5 I 3 IN 13x121--- I --- UP TO I I I I I I I I I I I I 10 I I I I I I I 1 14.0 1 10.0 I 3 IN I I I I I I I_II I I I I I I 1 3.5 I 4.0 I 3 IN I I OVER I I I I I I I I 1 I I 10 I 4 I I I I I I 1 7.0 I 5.5 1 3 IN 13x12 I--- I --- UP TO I I I I I I I I I I 15 1 I 1 I I 1 I I 114.01 8.0 I 3 IN I I I 1 I I_II 1 I I I I I 1 3.5 I 3.5 I 3 IN I I I OVER I I I I I I I I. I 1 I I 15 I 4 I I I I I I I I 7.0 I 5.0 1 3 IN 13x121 --- I--- UP TO I I I I I I I I I I I 20 I I I 'I I I I I 1 14.0 1 6.0 I 3 IN I I I OVER I 20 I NOTE (1) Footnotes to tables, and general notes on hydraulic shoring, are '1 found in Appendix 0, Item (g) Note (1) See Appendix D, Item (q)(1) Note(2): See Appendix D, Item (g)(2) * Consult product manufacturer and/or qualified engineer for Section Modulus of available wales. 1 29CFR - 50 of 55 ' C Regulations (Standards - 29 CFRI Alternatives to Timber Shoring - 19)6 Subpart P App E • Part Number: 1926 • Part Title: Safety and Health Regulations for Construction • Subpart: P • Subpart Title: Excavations • Standard Number: 1926 Subpart P App E • Title: Alternatives to Timber Shoring Alternatives to Timber Shoring .Figure 1 - Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring I II I I RAIL Figure 1. Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring VERTI SPACI ure 2 - Pneumatic/hydraulic R � .i 1.,.(j'•Ir Figure 2. Pneumafc/hydralic Shoring 29CFR - 51 of 55 Ii U Figure 3 - Trench Jacks (Screw Jacks) Figure 3. Trench Jacks (Screw Jacks) Figure 4. Trench Shields Figure 4 - Trench Shields 29CFR - 52 of 55 I I n I I El I I I I II II eeulations (Standards - 29 CFRI Selection of Protective Systems - 1926 Subpart P App F • Part Number: 1926 . • Part Title: Safety and Health Regulations for Construction • Subpart: P • Subpart Title: Excavations • Standard Number: 1926 Subpart P App F • Tide: Selection of Protective Systems The following figures are a graphic summary of the requirements contained in subpart P for excavations 20 feet or less in depth. Protective systems for use in excavations more than 20 feet in depth must be designed by a registered professional engineer in accordance with 1926.652(b) and (c). I Ii IH L I fl I I I Is there potential for cave-in? Is the excavation more I than 5 feet in depth? I NO I YES I Is the excavation entirely in stable rock? I I I I NO I I YES I I Excavation may be made I I I with vertical sides. I I I I I I I I I I 1 I YES I I NO I I I Excavation must be I I I sloped, shored, or I shielded. I I I Sloping I Shoring or shielding I selected. selected. I I F I I_ I I I I Go to Figure 2 I I Go to Figure FIGURE 1 - PRELIMINARY DECISIONS 29CFR - 53 of 55 fl I I I Sloping selected as the I I method of protection I I I I I I Will soil classification I I be made in accordance I with Sec. 1926.652(b)? I I I YES I NO I I 1 I I I I I I ' I Excavation must comply with I I Excavations must comply I one of the following three I I with Sec. 1926.652(b)(1) I I options: I I which requires a slope I I I of 1 1/2 H:1V (34 deg.). I I I I Option 1: I I I I Sec. 1926.652(b)(3) which I requires Appendices A and B to be followed Option 2: I Sec. 1926.652(b)(3) which I requires other tabulated I data (see definition to I be followed. Option 3: I Sec. 1926.652(b)(4) which I requires the excavation to I be designed by a registered professional engineer. I LJ I FIGURE 2 - SLOPING OPTIONS ' I I I I 29CFR - 54 of 55 ' I I I I Shoring or shielding selected I I as the method of protection. I I I .. I Soil Classification is required I .when shoring or shielding is I used. The excavation must comply I with one of the following four I options: I Option 1 :Sec. 1926.652(c)(1) which requires Appendices A and C to be followed (e.g. timber shoring). Option 2 Sec. 1926.652(c)(2) which requires manufacturers data to be followed (e.g. hydraulic shoring, trench jacks, air shores,. shields). Option 3 Sec. 1926.652(c)(3) which requires tabulated data (see definition) to be followed (e.g. any system as per the tabulated data). Option 4 Sec. 1926.652(c)(4) which requires .the excavation to be designed by a registered professional engineer (e.g. any designed system). FIGURE 3 - SHORING AND SHIELDING OPTIONS 29CFR - 55 of 55 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION Project Number: WL-6 Contract Title: Hamestring Lift Station ELF Project Number: CS -050808-03 Contractor RFI Number Date From: To: ' Re: ' Spec. Sec. Ref: Paragraph: Drawing Ref: Detail: C I II I I ' OAttachments ' Response From: To: Date Transmitted: Date •' Signed: Engineer Distribution: UDwner ' _ O ontractor QEngineer Qonsultant Dthc I. 00930 -Request for Interpretation Form 00930 - I RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 FIELD ORDER Project Number: WL-6 Contract Title: Hamestring Lift Station RLF Project Number: CS -050808-03 To From: SDI No Issue Date: The Work shall be carried out in accordance with the following supplemental instructions issued in accordance with the Contract Documents without change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Proceeding with the Work in accordance with these instructions indicates your acknowledgement that there will be no change in the Contract Price or Contract Times. Description: I I IOAttachments (List) ' (Signature) Engineer Date Distribution: UDwner ' OConttactor Engineer Cxonsultant ODther 1 00931 -Field Order 00931-1. RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL Project Number: WL-6 Contract Title: Hamestring Lift Station ELF Project Number. CS -050808-03 To Contractor From: RFP No Issue Date: Please submit an itemized proposal for changes in the Contract Price and Contract Times for proposed modifications to the Contract Documents described herein. Submit proposal within days, or notify the Owner in writing of the date on which you anticipate submitting your proposal. This is NOT a Change Order, a Work Change Directive or a direction to proceed with the work described in the proposed modifications. I L I I I I OAttachments ' Prepared by Engineer ' REQUESTED by OWNER'S Representative Distribution: U)wna U onttactor OPnginea ' OConsuhaot U tha 1 1 00932 -Request for Proposal 00932 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I CHANGE ORDER Project Number: WL-6 Contract Title: Hamestring Lift Station RLF Project Number: CS -050808-03 Change Order No Date of Issuance TO CONTRACTOR: ORDINANCE NO: / RESOLUTION NO: The Contract is changed as follows: EFFECTIVE Not valid until signed by the Owner. Theoriginal Contract Price was..........................................................................................................$ Net change by previously authorized Change Orders.........................................................................$ The Contract Price prior to this Change Order was.............................................................:..............$ The Contract Price will be (Oincreased) (Odecreased) (Qrnchanged) by ..........................................$ The new Contract Price including this Change Order will be.............................................................$ The Contract Times will be (Uncreased) (Odecreased) (Uunchanged) by ........................................ ( ) days Required date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is ................ NOTE: This summary does not reflect changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which have been authorized by Work Change Directives not incorporated in this or previous Change Orders. • ENGINEER BY DATE ' CONTRACTOR BY DATE I certify there is a balance otherwise unencumbered to the credit of the appropriation to which the above amount is chargeable, ' and a cash balance otherwise unencumbered in the treasury to the credit of the fund from which payment is to be made, each sufficient to meet the above obligation. ' Distribution: Obwner (4) Txontractor QEngineer 00940 -Change Order Form 00940 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 1pr- . t„ b t..' '. Y� x�• r' WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE Y � i F, -, - Project Number: WL-6 5�'- •'`,� r{JSA' Contrac[Title: HamestringLiftStation $;�`� �^,ARKA RLF Project Number: CS -050808-03 1 (Instructions on Reverse Side) No Date of Issuance 1• TO: (CONTRACTOR) CONTRACT FOR: 1 You are directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s): 1 Description: Purpose of Work Change Directive: 1 Attachments: (List documents supporting change) If a claim is made that the above change(s) have affected Contract Price or Contract Times any claim for a Change Order based thereon will involve one or more of the following methods of determining the effect of the change(s). _ Method of determining change in Method of determining change in Contract Price: Contract Times: QUnit Prices LICONTRACTOR's Records OLump Sum ❑ENGINEER'S Records 1 DAs Stipulated in General Conditions UDWNER's Records ODther ODther 1 Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Price: Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Times: $ Substantial Completion: days; 1 If the change involves an increase, the estimated Ready for Final Payment: . days. Amount is not to be exceeded without further If the change involves an increase, the estimated times authorization, are not to be exceeded without further authorization. Recommended: Recommended: ENGINEER OWNER 1 By (Authorized Signature) By (Authorized Signature) By (Authorized Signature) Distribution: ODwner QEngineer 1 Ocontractor OConsultant ODther 00945 -Work Change Directive . 00945 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE INSTRUCTIONS A. GENERAL INFORMATION This document was developed for use in situations involving changes in the Work which, if not processed expeditiously, might delay the Project These changes are often initiated in the field and may affect the Contract Price or the Contract Times. This is not a Change Order, but only a directive to proceed with Work that may be included in a subsequent Change Order. For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a possible change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times a Field Order may be used. B. COMPLETING THE WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE FORM ' Based on conversations between Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor, Engineer completes the following: METHOD OF DETERMINING CHANGE, IF ANY, IN CONTRACT PRICE: Mark the method to be used in determining the final cost of Work involved and the estimated net effect on the Contract Price. If the change involves an increase in the Contract Price and the estimated amount is approached before the additional or changed Work is completed, another Work Change Directive must be issued to change the estimated price or Contractor may stop the changed Work when the estimated price is reached. If the Work Change Directive is not likely to change the Contract Price, the space for estimated increase (decrease) should be marked "Not Applicable". METHOD OF DETERMINING CHANGE, IF ANY, IN CONTRACT TIMES: Mark the method to be used in determining the change in Contract Times and the estimated increase or decrease in Contract Times. If the change involves an increase in the Contract Times and the estimated times are approached before the additional or changed Work is completed, another Work Change Directive must be issued to change the times or Contractor may stop the changed Work when the estimated times are reached. If the Work Change Directive is not likely to change the Contract Times, the space for estimated increase (decrease) should be marked "Not Applicable". Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to Owner for authorization because Engineer does not have authority to authorize changes in Price or Times. Once authorized by Owner, a copy will be sent by Engineer to Contractor. Price and Times may only be changed by Change Order signed by Owner and Contractor. Once the Work covered by this directive is completed or final cost and times are determined. Contractor shall submit documentation for inclusion in a Change Order. THIS IS A DIRECTIVE TO PROCEED WITH A CHANGE THAT MAY AFFECT THE CONTRACT PRICE OR THE CONTRACT TIMES. A CHANGE ORDER, IF ANY, SHALL BE CONSIDERED PROMPTLY. L L I Li 00945 -Work Change Directive 00945-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 , ISECTION 01110 - SUMMARY OF WORK I. PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: 'A. This Section summarizes the Work covered in detail in the complete Contract Documents. B. Owner: The City of Fayetteville, Arkansas, 113 West Mountain Street, Fayetteville, AR 72701 is contracting for Work described in the Contract Documents. 1. Contract Identification: Hamestring Lift Station, Project WL-6 2. Work Site Location: West Jess Anderson Road and Sunshine Road ' 3. Engineer: The Contract Documents were prepared by RJN Group, Inc., 26 E. Meadow, Suite 8, Fayetteville, AR 72701. C. Engineer: RJN Group, Inc., 26 E. Meadow, Suite 8, Fayetteville, AR 72701 and has been engaged as Engineer to serve in a design capacity, and prepare and seal the Drawings and Specifications. ' 1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION: A. Description of Project: The City of Fayetteville, Arkansas is undertaking a project to redirect sewer flows U. from portions of the City in the Illinois River drainage basin to a new wastewater treatment plant on the west side of the City and upgrade sewers in the City which are in the White River drainage basin and upgrade the existing.wastewater treatment plant on the east side of the City. The project is known as the Wastewater System Improvement Project and includes but may not be limited to four areas of improvements as follows: I1. Westside Wastewater Treatment Plant. 2. Westside Collection System Improvements. 3. Paul R. Noland Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements. ' 4. Eastside Collection System Improvements. B. Work Covered by Contract Documents: 1. Hamestring Lift Station ' 1.03 WORK BY OTHERS: A. Work Under Other Contracts, See drawing C-5 for connection points: I. Contract WL-3, Hamestring to Porter. 2. Contract WL-4, Hamestring to Gregg. 3. Contract WL-5, Force Mains to West Side Treatment Plant, B. Work by Owner: None C. Other Activities: None ' 1.04 FUTURE WORK: Wastewater treatment plants and sewer lines will be upgraded or expanded as needed to meet the needs of City of Fayetteville, AR in the future. 1 1 01110-Summaryof Work 01110-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 H SECTION 01110 - SUMMARY OF WORK (continued) 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.08 1.09 1.10 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES: A. Exclusive Use: During the construction period, Contractor shall have full use of the premises for execution of the Work. Use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform duties and functions as stated in the GENERAL CONDITIONS and in this Section. OWNER'S USE OF PREMISES: A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building, prior to Substantial Completion provided that such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. WORK SEQUENCE: A. General: Construction sequence shall be determined by Contractor. OWNER -FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS: A. None MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT: A. Lump Sum Contracts: All Work indicated and specified in the Contract Documents shall be included in the Lump Sum Contract Price. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS: A. Furnished Copies: After execution of Agreement, Contractor will be furnished at no cost, a maximum of three (1) sets of Contract Documents consisting of full-size Contract Drawings including revised Drawings (and schedules), and the Project Manual, in addition to those used in execution of the Agreement. B. Additional Copies: Additional copies of above documents will be supplied by Engineer upon request at one hundred dollars ($100.00) per one set of Drawings and one copy of Project Manual. LIST OF DRAWINGS (AND SCHEDULES): A. Contract Drawings: 1. Each sheet of the Contract Drawings bears the following general title: Hamestring Lift Station. 2. Individual sheet numbers and titles are as stated on drawing index sheet. B. Reference Drawings: 1. No Reference Drawings are included with this contract. I Li I L L I I I I C I I II U 01110-Summaryof Work 01110-2 RJN Project 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 01110 - SUMMARY OF WORK (continued) PART 2- PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3- EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 01110 01110-Summaryof Work 01110-3 RJN Project 11-1875-00 SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Minor changes in the Work. 2. Proposal request. 3. Work Change Directive. B. Related Sections: 1. DOCUMENT 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS. 2. Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Engineer will advise Contractor of minor changes in Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Times as authorized by the DOCUMENT 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS, Subparagraph 9.05 by issuing Field Orders. 1.03 PROPOSAL REQUEST A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests III I I I I 1. Engineer may issue a Proposal Request, including detailed descriptions of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time. a. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. b. Proposal Requests issued by Engineer are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop Work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Contractor shall submit cost proposal, including any request for an extension in Contract Times, within 14 days of receipt of Proposal Request. 3. In order to facilitate checking of Contractor's proposals for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of cost including labor, materials, and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. Document each proposal for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to support computations, including the following: a. Include list of quantities of products, labor, and equipment required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Indicate amounts for insurance and bonds. d. Indicate amounts for Contractor's overhead and profit. e. Include justification for any change in Contract Time. f. Include credit for deletions from Contract, similarity documented. g. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the 01250 -Contract Modification Procedures 01250 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 7 I SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES (continued) effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. (1) Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 4. On Owner's approval of a proposal request, Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures by Owner and Contractor as provided in the DOCUMENT 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS. a. Upon execution of a Change Order, Contractor shall promptly revise Construction Progress Schedule and Schedule of Values accordingly. 1.04 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Engineer may issue a Work Change Directive, signed by Owner and Engineer, including detailed descriptions of changes and identifying method for determining ' any change in Contract Price or Contract Time, instructing Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Contractor shall promptly execute the change. 2. Work Change Directives shall be issued on Owner's standard form. B. Contractor shall maintain detailed records for changes in the Work performed on a time and material basis. 1. Submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. C. Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures by Owner and Contractor as provided in DOCUMENT 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS. D. Upon execution of a Change Order, Contractor shall promptly revise Construction ' Progress Schedule and Schedule of Values accordingly. PART 2- PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3- EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 01250 I I I I I 01250 -Contract Modification Procedures 01250-2 RJN Project No. 11-18875-00 ' SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES IPART1- GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY • A. Section Includes: l.. Schedule of values. • :2;' Applications for payment. ' B. Related Sections: 1. DOCUMENT 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS. 2. DOCUMENT 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. I1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Within 20 days of after the Effective Date of the Agreement, submit 5 copies of U. typed Schedule of Values DOCUMENT 01290.02. 1. Owner will provide Contractor an electronic copy of DOCUMENT 01290.02. B. Format: Table of Contents of Project Manual. t 1. Identify each line item with number and title of Project Manual Section. a. Include a separate line item for each of the following. (1) Bonds. (2) Insurance. 2. Dollar amounts shall include material, labor, overhead, and profit applicable to each individual item indicated. ' 1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 1 A. Format: Document 01290.01 supported by Document 01290.02. 1. Owner will provide Contractor an electronic copy of Documents 01290.01 and 01290.02. ' B. Payment Period: As specified under DOCUMENT 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS Article 14. C. Preparation of Applications: '• 1. Present required information in typewritten form consistent with the approved Schedule of Values. 2. Execute application by signature of authorized officer of Contractor's firm. 3. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. a. Indicate dollar value in each column of each line item for portion of Work completed through the last day of the application period, and for products properly stored in accordance with the Contract Documents through the last day of the previous application period. b. Round off dollar values to nearest dollar. ' c. Complete every entry on form. 4. Indicate each authorized Change Order as separate items on continuation sheet. a. List by appropriate Change Order Number. b. Indicate dollar value breakdown of each Change Order by each applicable Project Manual Section. 01290 -Payment Procedures 01290-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES (continued) D. Submittal Procedure: 1. Comply with DOCUMENT 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS Article 14. 2. Submit 5 copies of each Application for Payment. 3. Submit an updated Construction Progress Schedule with each Application for Payment. 4. Substantiating data: a. When Owner or Engineer requires substantiating;information to support Contractor's application for payment, submit data justifying dollar amounts which are in question. b. Provide 1 copy of data with cover letter for each copy of Application for Payment. (1) Indicate application number and date. (2) List each item in question by continuation sheet identification. 5. Submit application for fmal payment in accordance with DOCUMENT 00700 — GENERAL CONDITIONS Article 14. PART2- PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3- EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 01290 I I I I I '' I 01290 -Payment Procedures 01290-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT Project Number: WL-6 Contract Title: Hamestring Lift Station RLF Project Number: CS -050808-03 Application Number: Date: ':CONTRACTOR: Ordinance/Resolution Number: raAddress: Effective: Encumbrance No: Application for Work Accomplished Through the Date of:. Original Contract Price............................................................................[1]$ Net Change by Change Orders _ through.............................[2]$ Current Contract Price (1 + 2).................................................................[3]$ Completed Work ......................... [41$ Stored Material ........................... [51$ Total Completed and Stored to Date (4+5) Previous Payments ..................... [7]$ Previous Retainage .................... [8]$ Total Previous Applications (7+8) ..................................... Amount This Application (6-9) .......................................... Less Retainage This Application* ..................................... Release of Retainage....................................................... Due This Application (10-11+12) ...................................... [6]$ .............0........ [9]$ ......0 ............. (103$ ................ [-][11]$ [12]$ [13]$ Retainage on Completed Work Only Accompanying Documentation: Attached Schedule of Values CONTRACTOR's Certification: The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that (1) all previous progress payments received from OWNER on account of Work done under the Contract referred to above have been applied on account to discharge CONTRACTOR'S legitimate obligations incurred in connection with Work covered by all prior Applications for Payment; (2) title of all Work, materials and equipment incorporated into said Work or otherwise listed in or covered by this Application for Payment will pass to OWNER at time of payment free and clear of all 'Liens, security interests and encumbrances (except such as are covered by a Bond acceptable to OWNER indemnifying OWNER against any such Lien, security interest or encumbrance); (3) all Work covered by this Application for Payment is in accordance with the Contract Documents and not defective, and (4) all labor standards contract requirements have been complied with by CONTRACTOR and by each subcontractor employing mechanics or laborers at the site of the work. Dated: By: STATE OF COUNTY OF ) Subscribed and Sworn to before me this day of My commission expires: Notary Public CONTRACTOR 01290 -Application For Payment . 01290.01 - 1 RUN Project No. 11-1875-00 ENGINEER'S Certification for Payment In accordance with the Contract Documents, based on on -site observations and the data comprising this application, the Engineer certifies to the Owner that to the best of the Engineer's knowledge, information and belief the Work has progressed as indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the Contractor is entitled to payment of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED. AMOUNT CERTIFIED....................................................................... (Attach explanation if amount certified differs from the amount applied for. Initial all figures on this Application and on the Schedule of Values that are changed to conform to the amount certified.) ENGINEER: By: Date: Printed Name: Firm: OWNER's Approval The amount previously certified is approved for payment. By: . Date: Approved By: Date: Distribution: ❑ Owner (4) ❑ Contractor ❑ Engineer ❑ Other 01290 -Application For Payment 01290.01.- 2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 O 00 00 0 In 0 CO J z F Z �d Q 6 w Q 9z >O Q F 6 - oa � Y ow �?o N � � OH _ Q La 0 O 0 uIa S N 6 U � 0 N Q Q Is. — oz� W U o I' M U U Q W m a O O U U I V• O O N 0 I asC+'+.. -u ,-� •n' ��¢'.4 . A �' a..v. "3�+�� v � '� CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION • } F „� '; # Project Number: WL-6 .r ,r Contract Title: Hamestring Lift Station 'r ''k *'` °A R'K'ANSAS"�' ,:_.� ,_A,v.. _s^��. t.,_.. _ ,;.... �. ,; RLF Project Number: CS -050808-03 ' CONTRACT FOR: CONTRACTOR: ' DATE OF ISSUANCE: L L_ L C Li I I PROJECT OR DESIGNATED PORTION SHALL INCLUDE: The Work performed under this Contract has been reviewed and found, to the Engineer's best knowledge, information and belief, to be substantially complete. Substantial Completion is the state in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. The date of Substantial Completion of Project or portion thereof designated above is hereby established as which is also the date of commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below: A list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER BY DATE The Contractor will complete or correct the Work on the list of items attached hereto within days from the above date of Substantial Completion. CONTRACTOR BY DATE The Owner accepts the Work or designated portion thereof as substantially complete and will assume full possession thereof at (time) on (date). OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE BY DATE Distribution: ❑Owner ❑Contractor OEngineer ❑Consultant OOther 01290.12 -Certificate of Substantial Completion 01290.12 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 CONTRACTOR AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT Project Number: WL-6 Contract Title: Hamestring Lift Station RLF Project Number: CS -050808-03 STATE OF )SS COUNTY OF The Undersigned, (Name) age, being first duly sworn, states under oath as follows: 1. Iamthe of (Title) (Contractor) contractor for the City on Project No. and Project Title of lawful is the general 2. All payrolls, material bills, use of equipment and other indebtedness connected with the Work for this Contract have been paid and all claims of whatever nature have been satisfied, as required by the Contract. 3. (v) _Prevailing wage does not apply; or All provisions and requirements set forth pertaining to the payment of wages to workmen employed on public works projects have been fully satisfied and there has been no exception to the fill and complete compliance with these provisions and requirements and the Annual Wage Orders contained in the Contract in carrying out the Contract and Work. Contractor has fully complied with the requirements of the prevailing wage law as required in the Contract and has attached affidavits from all Subcontractors on this Contract, regardless of tier, affirming compliance with the prevailing wage law as stipulated in the Contract. 4. Contractor certifies that each Subcontractor has received full payment for its respective work in connection with the Contract. 5. This affidavit is made in behalf of the Contractor for the purpose of securing from the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas, the certification of completion of the Contract and receiving payment therefor. 01290.14 -Contractor Affidavit 01290.14-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 CONTRACTOR By (Signature) Title On this day of , beforeme appeared , to me personally known to be the and who executed the foregoing instrument and acknowledged that (s)he executed the same on behalf of the as its free act and deed. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my official seal on the day and year first above written. My commission expires: Notary Public CONSENT OF SURETY Final Payment to: for work performed on the above Contract No, ATTEST: (SEAL) By_ Title is hereby authorized. STATE OF ) )SS COUNTY OF ) On this day of , before me appeared the of the Surety, and who executed the foregoing instrument and acknowledged that (s)he executed the same on behalf of the as its free act and deed. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my official seal on the day and year first above written. My commission expires: Notary Public 01290.14 -Contractor Affidavit 01290.14-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I • SUBCONTRACTOR AFFIDAVIT " FOR FINAL PAYMENT ProjectNumber: WL-6 ,'.,, r�� 3; ,,,w,s, ,R KA_N5AS�y Contract Title: Hamestrinp. Lift Station RLF Project Number: CS -050808-03 STATE OF )SS COUNTY OF The Undersigned, of lawful age, being first duly sworn, (Name) states under oath as follows: 1. I am the of hereinafter "Subcontractor" (Title) (contractor) to , general contractor on . (Name of Contractor) (Contract Number and Title) 2. All payrolls, material bills, use of equipment and other indebtedness connected with the work for this project have been paid and all claims of whatever nature have been satisfied. 3. (v) _Prevailing wage does not apply; or All provisions and requirements set forth pertaining to the payment of wages to workmen employed on public works projects have been fully satisfied and there has been no exception to the full and complete compliance with these provisions and requirements and the Annual Wage Order contained in the Contract between General Contractor and Fayetteville in performing and furnishing Subcontractor's work, and Subcontractor certifies that it has fully complied with the requirements of the prevailing wage law. 4. A total of $ bas been received as full compensation for. performed in connection with the contract. (area / scope of work) 5. This affidavit is made in behalf of the Contractor for the purpose of securing from Fayetteville, Arkansas, the certification of completion of the project and receiving payment therefor. ISUBCONTRACTOR By (Signature) Title On this day of . before me appeared , to me personally known to be the of the and who executed the foregoing instrument and acknowledged that (s)he executed the same on behalf of the as its free act and deed. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my official seal on the day and year first above written. My commission expires: Notary Public I I01290.15 -Subcontractor Affidavit For Final Payment 01290.15-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 C C L I L L L L I I I 1 I 11 I SECTION 01320 - PROJECT MEETINGS, SCHEDULES & REPORTS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 Summary: This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: A. Project Meetings: 1. Preconstruction conference. 2. Coordination schedules. 3. Progress meetings. 4. Preinstallation conferences. 5. Coordination meetings. B. Schedules and Reports: 1. Initial coordination schedules. 2. Construction progress schedule. 3. Construction progress reports. 4. Schedule of values. 5. Special reports. C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. For CPM Schedules: SECTION 01321. 2. For Submittal Requirements: SECTION 01330. 1.02 PROJECT MEETINGS: A. Preconstruction Conference: 1. Engineer will conduct a meeting within 20 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement, to review items stated in the following agenda and to establish a working understanding between the parties as to their relationships during performance of the Work. 2. Preconstruction conference shall be attended by: a. Contractor and his superintendent. b. Engineer and Resident Project Representative if any. c. Representative(s) of Owner. d. At Engineer's option, representatives of principal Subcontractors and Suppliers. e. Arkansas Soil and Water Conservation Commission, Water Resources Development Division representative 3. Meeting Agenda: a. Construction schedules. b. Critical Work sequencing. c. Designation of responsible personnel. d. Project coordination. e. Procedures and Processing of: (1) Field decisions. (2) Substitutions.. (3) Submittals. (4) Change Orders. (5) Applications for Payment. (6) Proposal Requests. (7) Contract Closeout. 01320 -Project Meetings, Schedules & Reports 01320- 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I SECTION 01320 - PROJECT MEETINGS, SCHEDULES & REPORTS (continued) (8) Requests for Interpretation. ' (9) Field Orders. (10) Work Change Directives. f. Procedures for testing. g. Procedures for maintaining record documents. h. Use of Premises: (1) Office, work, and storage areas. (2) Owner's requirements. i. Construction facilities, controls, and construction aids. j. Temporary utilities. k. Safety and first -aid. 1. Security. m. Requirements for start-up of equipment. n. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. o. Distribution of Contract Documents 4. Location of Meeting: At or near the Project Site. 5. Reporting: a. Within 5 working days after the meeting, Engineer will prepare and distribute minutes of the meeting to Owner and Contractor. b. Contractor shall provide copies to Subcontractors and major Suppliers. B. Coordination Schedules: 1. Preliminary coordination schedule meeting shall be administered as specified in SECTION 01321. 2. The meeting shall be attended by: a. Contractor and his superintendent. b. At Engineer's option, representatives of principal Subcontractors and Suppliers. c. Engineer and Resident Project Representative if any. d. Owner's representative. C. Progress Meetings: 1. Engineer shall schedule and conduct a.meeting at least monthly and at other times requested by Engineer. Representatives of the Engineer, Resident Project Representative, and Contractor shall be present at each meeting. With Engineer's concurrence, Contractor may request attendance by representatives of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities concerned with current program or involved with planning, coordination, or performance of future activities. All participants in the meeting shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Contractor and each Subcontractor represented shall be prepared to discuss the current construction progress report and any anticipated future changes to the schedule. Each Subcontractor shall comment on the schedules of Contractor and other Subcontractors and advise if their current progress or anticipated activities are compatible with that Subcontractor's Work. 3. If one Subcontractor is delaying another, Contractor shall issue such directions as are necessary to resolve the situation and promote construction progress. ' 01320 -Project Meetings, Schedules & Reports 01320-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' I H I I Li n I H H I [1 I I I I I I SECTION 01320 - PROJECT MEETINGS, SCHEDULES & REPORTS (continued) 4. Meeting Agenda: a. Review of construction progress since previous meeting. b. Field observations, interface requirements, conflicts. c. Problems which impede construction schedule. d. Off -site fabrication. e. Delivery schedules. f. Submittal schedules and status: g. Site use. h. Temporary facilities and services. i. Hours of Work. j. Hazards and risks. k. Housekeeping. 1. Quality and Work standards. m. Change Orders. n. Documentation of information for payment requests. o. Corrective measures and procedures to regain construction schedule if necessary. p. Revisions to construction schedule. q. Review of proposed activities for succeeding Work period. r. Review proposed Contract modifications for: (1) Effect on construction schedule and on completion date. (2) Effect on other contracts of the Project. s. Other business. 5. Location of Meetings: At or near Project Site. 6. Reporting: a. Within 5 working days after each meeting, Engineer shall prepare and distribute minutes of the meeting to Owner and Contractor. b. Contractor shall distribute copies to principal Subcontractors and Suppliers. 1.03 SCHEDULES AND REPORTS: A. Initial Coordination Schedules: 1. Within 20 days of Effective Date of Agreement, submit preliminary network diagram into Engineer in accordance with SECTION 01321, and include: a. Preliminary cash requirement prediction. b. Preliminary schedule of Submittals as described in SECTION 01330. B. Construction Progress Schedule: 1. Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule development and updating shall be as specified in SECTION 01321. C. ;Construction Progress Reports: •1. Submit a report on actual construction progress to Engineer on a monthly basis. More frequent reports may be required should the Work fall behind the accepted schedule. a. Submit a weekly report to coordinate with and supplement the monthly construction progress report and which details Work scheduled for the following one -week interval. Refer to SECTION 01321 for weekly schedule requirements. 01320 -Project Meetings, Schedules & Reports 01320-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I SECTION 01320 - PROJECT MEETINGS, SCHEDULES & REPORTS (continued) II b. Format shall be on 11 x 17 -inch paper, submitted to Engineer in 3 copies. 2. Construction progress reports shall consist of the revised construction progress schedule and a narrative report which shall include but not' be limited to the following: a. Comparison of actual progress to planned progress shown on originally accepted schedule. b. Summary of activities completed since the previous construction progress report. c. Identification of problem areas. d. A description of current and anticipated delaying factors, if any. e. Impact of possible delaying factors. f. Proposed corrective actions. 3. Submit a construction progress report to Engineer with each application for partial payment. Work reported complete .but not readily apparent to Engineer must be substantiated with supporting data when requested by Engineer. 4. If a schedule update reveals that, through no fault of Owner, the Work is likely -to be completed later than the Contract completion date, Contractor shall: a. Establish a plan for making up lost time. b. Submit plan to Engineer before implementing the plan. c. Take actions as necessary to get the Work back on schedule at no additional cost to Owner. D. Schedule of Values: I 1. Submit as an output of the CPM Schedule described in SECTION 01321 as "Value Summaries." The "Value Summaries" shall have as their basis the "Preliminary Cash Requirement Prediction" specified above under Initial Coordination Schedules. E. Special Reports: 1. When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at the site, prepare and submit a special report. List the chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, an evaluation of the results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise the Engineer in advance when such events are known or predictable. 2. Submit original report to Engineer. PART2- PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3- EXECUTION NOT USED ' END OF SECTION 01320 I I 01320 -Project Meetings, Schedules & Reports 01320-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' I ISECTION 01321- CPM SCHEDULE PART1- GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section covers the schedule submittal(s) and scheduling requirements for ' performance and completion of the Work included under this Contract. B. The time of completion of the Work is of the essence of the Contract. The Work 'shall be executed to prevent any delay to other contractors, the Contract Milestones, and the general completion of the Contract. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Contractor shall retain the services of at least one scheduler qualified and experienced in CPM scheduling for the duration of the Contract. Employment by ' Contractor of a scheduling Subcontractor shall not in any way alter or reduce Contractor's obligations under this Section. B. Within twenty (20) days after the Effective Date of the Agreement, the Contractor ' shall submit, for review by Engineer, descriptive information on CPM software and personnel Contractor intends to use in compliance with requirements of this Section. The responsible scheduling personnel will be evaluated by Engineer prior to ' commencement of Work. If Owner or Engineer has reasonable objection to qualifications of Contractor's nominated scheduling personnel, Contractor shall, at no additional cost to Owner, assign acceptable personnel or employ a qualified ' Subcontractor, subject to review of his/her qualifications by Engineer. 1.03 Within twenty (20) days after Effective Date of Agreement, Engineer will convene a meeting regarding use of schedules for the Contract. Contractor shall make certain that its Project I Manager(s), and Superintendent(s), and those of major Subcontractors, as well as any scheduling consultants they may employ, attend this meeting. During this meeting, Engineer will describe objectives of using CPM schedules, procedures and requirements for ' preparation and use of Contractor's construction schedule, and any special needs Engineer has for'Contractor's schedule submittals. A. In accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS, within 20 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement, Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review and approval six copies of a detailed mobilization construction progress schedule which identifies the Contractor's proposed means and methods for accomplishing the Work for the ' first 120 days of this Contract. 1. Engineer will review Contractor's mobilization construction progress schedule and provide written comments within seven days of receipt. ' Contractor shall revise the schedule according to the comments received from Engineer and submit six copies of the revised schedule to Engineer within five days after receipt of comments. The returned schedule shall then I. be considered the "Accepted Mobilization Schedule." B. Within 45 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement, Contractor shall submit a detailed construction schedule which accurately represents Contractor's proposed ' means and methods for accomplishing the Work for the remainder of the Contract Times. 01321-CPM Schedule 01321-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I SECTION 01321- CPM SCHEDULE (continued) 1. Engineer will review Contractor's construction schedule and return comments within 14 days as either "Corrections Noted" or "No Exceptions Taken." If a resubmittal is required, Contractor shall revise the schedule and resubmit within 14 days after receipt. If a schedule submittal is not acceptable to Engineer, the schedule shall be revised and resubmitted as many times as necessary until the schedule is acceptable. 2. Once Contractor's original construction schedule is accepted by Engineer with "No Exceptions Taken", it becomes the baseline schedule for the Work, referred to as the "Contract Schedule." All activities in the Contract Schedule may not be changed, added, or deleted without the consent of both Owner and Contractor. Contract Times, including all Contract Milestones, can not be changed without a formal Change Order. 3. Engineer's review and comments will be for conformance with Contract Times and those sequences of work indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, for conformance with the requirements of this Section, and for other information which may be deemed appropriate. Engineer's review will also be for reasonableness and consistency in the schedule activities. Engineer's review will not extend to Contractor's means, methods, or techniques, which shall remain the sole responsibility of Contractor. 4. Upon approval of the construction schedule by Engineer, the status of procurement and Shop Drawing review related activities shall be provided on a separate report. These activities shall be properly correlated to Contractor's construction schedule. 5. Neither Engineer's review nor acceptance of Contractor's schedule shall relieve Contractor from responsibility required by the Contract Documents including, but not limited to, complying with the Contract Times or Milestones, adhering to any sequences of work required by the Contract Documents, or from completing any omitted work within the Contract Times. C. Contractor shall provide construction schedule and update schedule data using a hard copy report and a 3-1/2 inch disk or compact disc with CPM software files duplicating Contractor's files. D. Contractor's schedule submittal shall bear Contractor's stamp and signature and shall represent to Owner and Engineer that Contractor has verified all data in its schedule, and that Contractor has reviewed and coordinated the sequences in its schedule with the Work. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Engineer will maintain the overall Project construction schedule, of which Contractor's schedule shall be a part. Engineer will update Project schedule based on the status of all Project contractors and the input of Contractor. Engineer will monitor and optimize the use of Contract Float for the benefit of the Project. B. Contractor shall refer to the Project schedule to ensure that project site coordination and work by others at the site properly depicts Contractor's planning. Contractor shall monitor the current Project schedule for current status of Equipment and Materials furnished by others and progress of construction work being performed under separate contracts. 01321-CPM Schedule 01321 -2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I I 1 I '1 :1 I I 11 I I I SECTION 01321- CPM SCHEDULE (continued) ' 1.05 I I I I I C. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating its own schedule including Subcontractors. In preparing all Contract schedules, it shall be the responsibility of Contractor to work with each Subcontractor and Supplier to obtain information pertinent to the planning and updating of their respective activities and schedules. Contractor shall coordinate its schedule with other Prime Contractors. DEFINITIONS A. Early Completion. An early completion schedule is one which anticipates completion of all or specified part of the Work ahead of the corresponding Contract Times. Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension in Contract Times, or recovery for any delay incurred because of extensions of an early completion date, until all Contract Float is used or consumed and performance or completion of the Work extends beyond the corresponding Contract Times. B. Float. Total Float is the number of days by which a part of the Work in the contract schedule may be delayed without extending the Contract Times. Contract Float is the number of days between Contractor's anticipated date for early completion of the Work, or specified part, and the corresponding Contract Times. Total Float and Contract Float belong to the Project and are not for the exclusive benefit of any party. They shall be available to Owner, Engineer, their consultants, or Contractor, to accommodate changes in the Work, or to mitigate the effect of events which may delay performance or completion. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 SOFTWARE/INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS A. The Work under this contract shall utilize a computerized Critical Path Method (CPM) of planning, scheduling and reporting, supplemented as required by manual scheduling techniques. The precedence diagram method shall be used in planning and scheduling the Work. B. Contractor shall use the current version of Primavera Project Planner or Primavera SureTrak project management software to produce the Contract schedule submittals as specified herein. Contractor shall provide all schedules, updates, and revisions in the Primavera format on 3-1/2 inch disks or compact disc. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS A. Mobilization Schedule 1. The mobilization schedule shall show the division of Work into activities and specify the progression from the Notice to Proceed through the first 120 days of the Contract Times. The mobilization schedule once received and accepted by Engineer, shall be the basis for construction planning and updating until it is superseded by the accepted construction schedule. The accepted mobilization schedule submittal shall be used as a basis for the initial Applications for Payment, but shall not be used as a basis for progress payments beyond the first three (3) months of the Contract Times. 01321-CPM Schedule 01321-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 01321- CPM SCHEDULE (continued) ' B. Construction Schedule: 1. The detailed construction schedule shall show the division of Work into activities and specify the progression from the Notice to Proceed to the end of the Contract Times. Contractor's schedule shall expressly identify the Contract Times and Milestones, and shall include appropriate time allowances and constraints for all items of Work specified in the Contract Documents, 2. The progress of the Work shall conform to the Milestones and the Contract Times listed in the Agreement. The Milestones represent only the major items of construction work or interface dates. Milestones indicated are considered essential to the satisfactory performance of this Contract and to the coordination of all Work on the Project. Milestones listed are not intended to be a complete listing of all Work under this Contract or of all interfaces with other Project Contracts, Contractors, Engineers, or Owner. 3. Delivery dates of Owner -furnished Equipment and Material deliveries represent the best information available at time Contract is advertised for Bid. Failure of Owner -furnished Equipment and Materials to arrive as scheduled or failure of other construction contractors to meet their schedules shall not be justification for extra compensation or an extension of time, until such failure causes the Work to extend beyond the corresponding Contract Times. 4. Contractor's construction schedule, updates, and revision submittals shall consist of the time -scaled logic diagram, schedule reports, and a diskette or compact disc containing the CPM computerized files. The construction schedule shall expressly identify the Contract Times, Milestones, and critical path(s). Contractor's schedule shall account for all statutory holidays and planned non -working days. Contract Times shall constrain the late finish dates. Contract Milestones, Owner -furnished Equipment and Material deliveries, and other Contract dates shall constrain the appropriate activities. Other schedule constraints shall be approved by Engineer. 5. Contractor's schedule shall not combine work located in separate structures, work corresponding to different Divisions of the Specifications, or work performed by different Subcontractors in summary activities. Unless authorized by Engineer, an activity shall not span more than 20 days, or have a value not exceeding $100,000, except for Equipment or Material costs. 6. Contractor's schedule shall include appropriate time allowances and constraints for all specified construction sequences, start-up and performance tests. 7. Contractor's schedule shall include all Contractor -furnished procurement ' related activities which lead to the timely delivery of Materials to the Site. Procurement activities shall include, but not be limited to, preparation of Shop Drawings, review and acceptance of Shop Drawings, materials fabrication, materials delivery, inspection, testing, and installation. Contractor shall include Owner -furnished Equipment and Material deliveries. 8. Contractor's schedule shall contain activities to fully represent the Shop Drawing review process required for all Contractor -supplied Materials and Equipment items listed in the Specifications. Sufficient time shall be allowed for initial review, correction and resubmission, and final review of all Shop Drawings. 01321-CPM Schedule 01321-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1I I SECTION 01321- CPM SCHEDULE (continued) I I 10. 1 13. I. 14. I 1 t J I I Li I II Contractor shall schedule those requisite duties and responsibilities of Owner, Engineer, and others performing work for the Owner indicated in or required by the Contract Documents within the Contract Times. Contractor shall include requirements applicable for all data and information required from Owner. Contractor's construction schedule plot shall identify the Contract Times, Milestones, and critical path(s). Activities shall be plotted on their early dates, and indicate remaining duration and Total Float for each activity. Connections between activities, whether on the plot or on schedule reports, shall identify both predecessor and successor work. Contractor's construction schedule reports shall include activity ID, activity description, both early and late dates, any constraint dates, original and remaining duration, percent complete, preceding and succeeding activity listing, and the Total Float for each activity. Durations shall be stated in working days. A schedule narrative shall accompany the construction schedule submittal and shall describe the approach to the Work, any assumptions made, and the rationale used to develop the schedule relationships and logic. Contractor shall use the work breakdown structure and guidelines for developing the activity number and coding structures provided by the Engineer shown in Appendix A to this Section. Non -Compliance: a. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or part of any payment if, in Engineer's opinion, Contractor's failure or refusal to provide appropriate schedule information precludes a proper evaluation of Contractor's progress. Owner may withhold additional retainage from any payment, if in Owner's opinion, Contractor's failure or refusal to provide the required schedule information preclude a proper evaluation of whether or not Contractor is prosecuting the Work with the diligence required by the Contract Times. b. Owner reserves the right to have Engineer assist Contractor in the preparation of schedule submittals which are overdue by more than 10 days, and Contractor shall reimburse Owner for all associated costs. In the event Contractor fails to pay those costs within 30 days after receipt of an invoice from Owner, the Owner shall be entitled to a decrease in Contract Price or to withhold an amount equal to Engineer's costs from the recommended payment. Engineer's assistance with schedule preparation shall not relieve Contractor of its responsibilities for determination of the methods, techniques, and sequences for the performance of the Work. 3.02 COST LOADED SCHEDULE A. Contractor shall assign to each schedule activity a corresponding budget value. The budget value shall be the cost of the Work and sum including allocation for materials, labor, equipment, overhead, and profit. The sum of all budget values assigned shall equal the Contract Price. B. Contractor shall prepare a Summary of Values which lists all activities and their respective budget values that were developed in the cost loading process. The 01321-CPM Schedule 01321 -5 RIM Project No. 11-1875-00 7 Li SECTION 01321- CPM SCHEDULE (continued) budgets shown in the Summary of Values will be the basis for determining the values earned as the Work is accomplished, wherein "Percent (or units) complete this month," multiplied by "total budget value (or unit costs) per activity" shall equal the budget value earned. The Summary of Values shall be reported as a part of Contractor's monthly progress payment request. Contractor shall provide to Engineer upon request, Contractor's cost information including unit prices for the allocation of costs. 3.03 PROGRESS SCHEDULE UPDATES A. The Contract schedule is the basis for (a) the monitoring of Contractor's progress against Milestones and Contract Times, and (b) the evaluation and reconciliation of extensions in Contract Times, if any. B. A schedule update shall be submitted by Contractor every month. Each schedule update, prepared by Contractor, shall include actual and forecast data. Actual data shall record when work was performed. The forecast data shall show Contractor's intended plan for the remainder of the Contract duration. Each schedule update shall include: 1. Actual start and finish date of each activity in progress or completed 2. The remaining duration and percent complete of each current activity 3. The estimated start of each future activities 4. Any new or proposed sequencing of work, or changes in duration of future activities 5. A critical path float report sorted by ascending Total Float and early start values, as required 6. A schedule report of all updated and revised activities sorted by activity ID 7. Other reports as requested by Engineer 8. A narrative and shall provide sufficient detail to allow verification of progress of Work, identify the assumptions made in incorporating work related to Change Orders, and describe actual or potential delays, including related causes, and the steps taken or anticipated to mitigate their impacts. C. Contractor's schedule update shall be furnished monthly with (attached to) each Application for Payment. Receipt by Engineer of a schedule update submittal will be a condition precedent to processing each Application for Payment. D. Contractor shall submit monthly cost reports indicating the budget value accomplished to date and the forecast of the remaining Contract Price. Budget values accomplished shall be reviewed by Contractor and Engineer. Payments will not be made until the schedule of budgeted values is approved by Engineer. E. Engineer and Contractor shall agree on an updating method for physical progress. The methods for determining physical progress of the different activities shall be based on a bottom -up calculation of the status of completion of individual Work items, to include quantities of materials installed and Contract Milestones reached, not a subjective gross percentage of Work completed. F. Neither the updating of the Contract schedule nor the updating of any report or schedule submittal to Engineer by Contractor under this Section shall have the effect of amending or modifying, in any way , the Contract Times or Contract Milestone dates. 01321-CPM Schedule 01321-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 01321- CPM SCHEDULE (continued) G. Additional reports to be submitted by Contractor shall include a listing of all ' personnel, actual number of workers (direct labor only), actual labor hours, and construction equipment engaged on the Contract, including Subcontractors. 3.04 PROGRESS SCHEDULE REVIEW MEETINGS ' A. Review meetings between Engineer and Contractor will be held to review current actual schedule data against field and submittal records, evaluate actual physical 'progress and make recommendations as to payment for Work performed, review the schedule status, identify problem areas, address critical issues, determine causes for delay, and formulate recommendations for corrective action. ' B. Monthly review meetings between Engineer and Contractor will be held. Contractor shall provide the following to support each review: 1. Time -scaled Summary bar chart including the baseline and current schedules '• as required by Engineer. 2. Current three-week daily schedules for the current month. 3. Proposed recovery or change order revision schedules. IC. Contractor shall make appropriate revisions in the schedule update submittal as may be required at the meeting, and shall include the updated schedule with Contractor's • submittal of the Application of Payment within 5 days from the date of the monthly ' meeting. 3.05 THREE-WEEK DAILY SCHEDULE ' A. Contractor shall develop three-week daily work schedule after commencement of field mobilization which shall cover the current week and the following two weeks. Three-week schedules shall be in agreement with Contractor's detailed schedule. ' This schedule shall be submitted to Engineer prior to each scheduled meeting between Engineer and Contractor. ' 3.06 SCHEDULE REVISION A. A schedule revision shall be submitted when recovery plans require a change in the baseline schedule, when Contractor's schedule is no longer useful as a status and control mechanism as determined by Engineer, or when a Change Order impacts Contractor's timing and sequence of the Work. B. All schedule revisions must be coordinated and approved by Engineer. Scheduling of ' changes is the responsibility of Contractor. Contractor shall identify all changes arising from a Change Order and submit a revised construction schedule to Engineer for review. The schedule revision shall incorporate all changes which have been agreed upon in Change Orders approved since the last revision. C. Contractor shall submit with proposed changes, a schedule showing the proposed ' activities and activity durations... Contractor's schedule revision shall accurately represent all changes and adjustments in the sequencing and timing of the Work remaining. If proposed changes are related to the original scope of the Contract, then the manner in which proposed changes interface with the Contract Schedule shall be shown on this diagram. I 01321-CPM Schedule 01321-7 RJNProjectNo. No. 11-1875-00 I u SECTION 01321- CPM SCHEDULE (continued) D. Contract Time, including all contracted Milestones, cannot be changed without a formal Change Order approved by Owner. Once the schedule revision is approved by Engineer, the detailed Contract schedule shall supersede all previous schedules and progress submittals. E. Each Contract schedule revision shall be assigned a revision number, starting with "Revision 0" on the Contract schedule of the Work as awarded. F. Contractor shall adjust or remove any float suppression techniques, including ' preferential sequencing (crew movements, equipment usage, form reuse), extended durations, imposed dates, and others as a prerequisite to a request for an increase in Contract Price or Contract Times. Use of restraint dates shall be minimized to Contract dates and require approval of Engineer. 3.07 SCHEDULE RECOVERY A. If at any time Contractor's Work is behind the schedule (or if any activity is not completed by its latest scheduled completion date), Contractor shall promptly submit a written recovery statement to Engineer describing the cause of the schedule problem and the actions planned by Contractor to recover schedule. B. Contractor shall promptly undertake appropriate action at no additional cost to Owner ' to recover schedule whenever the current schedule shows that Contractor did not/cannot achieve a Milestone established on the Contract schedule. C. Engineer may require Contractor in its recovery actions to include, but not be limited to, assignment of additional labor, Subcontractors, equipment, shift or overtime work, expediting of Submittals or deliveries, or any combination of them. Overlapping of activities or sequencing changes to increase activity concurrence shall be deemed appropriate only if properly substantiated in the submittal. Recovery plans that require a change in the baseline schedule must be properly substantiated in a submittal. Recovery plans that require a change in the baseline schedule must be handled as a schedule revision. ' D. Contractor's refusal, failure, or neglect to take appropriate recovery action to correct schedule delays or to submit a written recovery Statement shall constitute reasonable evidence that Contractor is not prosecuting`the Work, or separable part, with the diligence that will ensure its completion within the applicable Contract Times. Such lack of action shall constitute sufficient basis for Engineer to recommend the ' withholding of some or all of any payment otherwise due. END OF SECTION 01321 I I [1 01321-CPM Schedule 01321-8 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 01321.01- CPM APPENDIX A 1.01 GENERAL - ACTIVITY NUMBERS AND CODES: A. Contractor shall use the following minimum requirements for the activity numbers and codings used in developing Contractor's construction schedule. 1. The minimum requirements herein are based on the capabilities of Primavera Project Planner and Suretrak, and are required to coordinate Contractor's schedule with the Engineer's Project schedule of all contracts, in which this Contract is a part. 1.02 ACTIVITY NUMBERING: A. Primavera CPM scheduling software identifies Master/Sub-project schedules by the first two digits of a ten -digit Activity Number. Contractor's schedule ID shall not be more than 8 characters in length. The first two digits of the Activity number shall be assigned by Engineer. 1.03 ACTIVITY CODES: A. Primavera CPM scheduling software allows the user to define activity code structures and activity codes to identify specific activities in the schedule. The activity code structure must be defined in the Primavera program, and the corresponding codes must be assigned to the appropriate activities. The activity codes are required to coordinate project reports of all contracts, in which this Contract is a part. Engineer will specify activity code structures and coordinate and finalize the required activity codes with Contractor during the Pre -Construction Scheduling Conference. Activity Code Structures that shall be required, but not be limited to, are: 1. Activity Code Structure: RESP. RESP identifies the Contract responsible for each activity. Four characters in length. 2. Activity Code Structure: PROC. PROC.identifies activities associated with specific procurement items. Four characters in length. 3. Activity Code Structure: SUBM. SUBM identifies all activities associated with required submittal items. Four characters in length. 4. Activity Code Structure: INTF. INTF identifies interfaces with the Owner, Engineer, and others performing work for Owner such as plant shut down activities. Four characters in length. END OF SECTION 01321.01 I Li 01321.01-CPM Appendix A 01321.01 - 1 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 01325 - CONSTRUCTION PHOTOS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for construction photographs. 1.02 " SUBMITTALS: A. Submit photographs, tapes, films and electronic media as specified in SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTALS and in PART 3 —this Section. 1.03 DUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Photographs may be taken by Contractor personnel provided the photographs are of sufficient quality, clarity, and content to adequately indicate the status and detail of the Work. If the quality and detail of the photographs taken by Contractor personnel is not adequate to clearly show the condition of the Work, the Contractor shall retain the services of a qualified and established commercial photographer experienced in construction photography. Engineer will make the final determination of the adequacy of the photographs. B. Audiovisual tapes or digital recordings may be taken by Contractor personnel provided they are of sufficient quality, clarity, and content to adequately and clearly indicate the status and detail of the Work as well as conditions before and after the construction activities. If the quality and detail of the recordings is not adequate to clearly show the condition and detail of the Work as well as conditions before and after the construction activities, Contractor shall retain the services of an established professional electrographer experienced in the production of color audio/video tape documentation of the construction industry. Engineer will make the final determination of the adequacy of the tapes and recordings. PART 2-. PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHIC REQUIREMENTS: Specified in PART 3, this Section. PART 3- 3.01 PROGRESS SITE PHOTOGRAPHS A. Contractor shall be responsible for photographs of the Site to show the existing and general progress of the Work. Engineer will advise as to which views are of interest. Photographs shall be taken of the following areas and at the following times. 1. Existing Site conditions before Site work is started. Number of views shall be adequate to cover the Site. 2. Progress of the Work from (clearing) throughout construction. There shall be four (4) different views taken no more than five days before the date of the periodic Payment Application. 3. Finished Project after completion of Work. Number of views shall be adequate to show the finished Work. 01325 -Construction Photos 01325 - 1 I. RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 01325 - CONSTRUCTION PHOTOS (continued) 4. If Project is not completed during the Contract Times or authorized extensions, photographs shall continue to be taken at no increase in Contract Price. B. Construction photographs may be either photographic prints or digital images. ' C. Photographic Prints: 1. All prints shall be color, smooth glossy finish, 5" x 7" in size taken with full frame 35 mm camera, and inserted into archival quality polypropylene photographic binder pages punched for insertion into a standard 3 -ring binder. Provide binders identified by Contract name and Contract number. D. Digital images: ' 1. Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files with each submittal of photographic prints. ' a. Provide images in JPEG format, with minimum sensor size of 2.0 megapixels. b. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped. E. Print Negatives: 1. Negatives for 5" x 7" prints shall be protected by roll in negative sleeves. Negative sleeves shall be identified with Contract name and Contract number, date of exposure, roll number, or other general identifying information, and name of Contractor. F. Identification: 1. Identify each photographic print on the reverse side with a label which contains the Contract name and Contract number, date of exposure, and description of view. Prints shall also bear the photographer's name or trademark. 2. Identify electronic media with date digital photographs were taken. Provide a separate reference document which contains the Contract name and Contract number, date of exposure, and description of each referenced view. G. Provide three prints of each view. H. Deliver prints and electronic media files to Engineer. ' I. Deliver photographic negatives to Engineer. 3.02 AUDIO / VIDEO TAPE RECORDINGS: I A. Audio / video recordings shall be made (of the entire Site) (along the entire construction route) showing the condition of the Site or terrain previous to any alterations by Contractor and before disturbing of the Site is started. Existing utilities shall be marked and construction staking shall be in place before taping begins. A second audio / video recording shall be produced after completion of all construction operations, showing the same view or views as close as possible, to illustrate "before" and "after" conditions. This is the responsibility of Contractor. Three days' notice shall be given to Engineer and Owner prior to this Work to allow them to ' accompany electrographer. B. The principal reason for producing video tapes is so that (items such as cracked or broken curbs, pavement, or sidewalks; plugged culverts in driveways; condition of 01325 -Construction Photos 01325 -2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 ' SECTION 01325 - CONSTRUCTION PHOTOS (continued) shrubs or lawns) (conditions of site) or other problems along the construction route ' may be more clearly shown and recorded. This will to some degree preclude the possibility of post construction litigation with property owners adjacent to the Work. IC. All required equipment, accessories, materials, and labor for the timely production of this documentation shall be arranged/furnished through Contractor. • 1...... The audio / video system camera -recorder used by the electrographer shall . _ have the following capabilities and features: ' a. VHS format for use with T-120 video tapes. b. Playback capability (in -the -field) with a B/W viewfinder built-in. • c. Built-in microphone. ' d. 6:1 zoom lens ratio with automatic focusing system and automatic iris. e. Electronic CCD or MOS image sensing system. f. Minimum Required Illumination: 7 lux or less. '• g. Television System Video EIA: 525 lines, 60 fields NTSC color signal. h. Video Horizontal Resolution: Color; more than 250 TV lines. i. Geometric Distortion shall not exceed 1.5 percent of picture height at any '• point in picture area. 2. The audio / video system shall be capable of producing bright, sharp, clear visual images which render accurate colors free from imperfections and I distortions that might obscure recorded information during playback. The simultaneous audio record shall be made directly onto the original tapes, and shall record narration of the electrographer clearly and audibly, with adequate volume, free from unnecessary interruptions and distortions that might eliminate recorded information during playback. • D. Zone of Influence: Unless otherwise indicated by Engineer or Owner, the "Zone of Influence" which might be affected by the construction operations and, therefore, '' shall be documented in these tape recordings, shall be whichever of the following includes the greatest area. ' 1. All areas within the temporary construction right-of-ways and grading limits, as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. The permanent easement for the completed improvements, as indicated on the Contract Drawings. ' 3. All areas within 35 feet of the proposed improvements with an additional 20 feet of supplemental coverage in residential areas. 4. . All areas within the Project Site. IE. Audio / Video Tape Production Procedures: 1. It is required that the audio / video tape recordings be produced while ' actually walking the construction route or site - NOT through the use of • wheeled vehicles. 2. All video tape recordings shall display digital information continuously; this information shall include the current time and date, showing the month, day, I. and year. This information shall be audibly acknowledged by the electrographer at appropriate times during recording sequences. 3. Each recording tape shall begin with a visual of the professional ' electrographer's name or business trademark, followed by the current date and time on digital display, plus audible (and visual, if possible) indication of • Contract name and numbers, municipality, name of Contractor, and other I 01325 -Construction Photos 01325 -3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00. I SECTION 01325 - CONSTRUCTION PHOTOS (continued) pertinent information. Thereafter, each recording sequence shall begin with the current time and date, followed by the location of the electrographer, direction of view, and description of the scene being recorded. Continuous updates of this information, plus other pertinent comments, shall be given throughout the recording sequence. Such audio and video records shall include, but not be limited to, conditions of existing pavement, curbs, sidewalks, driveways, culverts, headwalls, retaining walls, ditches, roadways, mailboxes, fences, trees, shrubs and landscaping, major structural conditions of residences and commercial buildings, fences, signs, headwalls, general terrain, and similar items. Particular and detailed attention shall be given to any defects noted, such as cracks, disturbed areas, damaged areas, or as may be required by Engineer. Excavation areas shall be physically marked with high -visibility fluorescent paint prior to video taping. The markings shall include the job number and stationing. 4. Representatives of Engineer and Contractor shall accompany the electrographer during recording sessions, to assist with location of the alignment and areas of construction activity, and identification of items and conditions to be recorded. A log sheet showing the recording sequences shall be maintained and shall list the start and stop time / date for each sequence, plus a brief description of the areas documented. The end of each recording tape shall include a visual record of the original log sheet to preserve this information in the event of loss or damage. 5. All recordings shall be completed during periods of adequate lighting and visibility. Sufficient lighting must be available to provide proper illumination of shadowed areas, and proper exposure adjustments shall be made where required. No taping shall be completed during precipitation, mist, fog, or when more than 10% of the ground surface has snow cover. 6. Houses and buildings shall be identified visually by house number, when visible, in such a manner that structures of the proposed system, i.e., manholes on a sewer system and hydrants on a water system, may be located by reference. 7. Original audio / video tape recordings shall be furnished to Owner and a copy furnished to Engineer before the start of any construction. One copy shall be retained by Contractor. 8. Any portion of the videotape recording not conforming to the Specifications will be rejected. 9. Any taped coverage not acceptable to Owner shall be refilmed at no additional cost to Owner within five (5) days after notification of taping inadequacy. F. Ownership and Authenticity of Original Tapes: 1. All original audio / video tape recordings shall become the property of Owner, plus one duplicate of each shall be provided to Engineer. Each tape shall be provided in a protective sleeve or case, identified :as to Contract name and number, production date of original recording, name of Contractor, and electrographer's name or trademark. A legible copy of the log shall be included. 2. The electrographer shall also furnish a notarized affidavit, attesting to the production of the original audio/video tapes, and their authenticity. I I IJ U L I I I I I 7 LJ I 11 I I I 01325 -Construction Photos 01325-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 01325 - CONSTRUCTION PHOTOS (continued) 3.03 ADDITIONAL PHOTOGRAPHS: A. From time to time Engineer may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order, and are not included in the Contract Price or an Allowance. 1. Engineer will give the photographer 3 days' notice, where feasible. • 2. In emergency situations, the photographer shall take additional photographs • within 24 hours of Engineer's request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to: • a. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of Work. b. Owner's or Engineer's request for special publicity photographs. c. Special events planned at Project Site. d. Immediate follow-up when on -site events result in construction damage or losses. e. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project Site. f. Extra record photographs at time of fmal acceptance. END OF SECTION 01325 I 01325 -Construction Photos 01325 -5 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTALS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes definitions, descriptions, transmittal, and review of Submittals. ' B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Project Meetings, Schedules, and Reports: SECTION 01320. 2. CPM Schedules: SECTION 0132L 1: 3. Construction Photographs: SECTION 01325. 4. Contract Closeout: SECTION 01780. ' 1.02 GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Definitions: ' 1. Shop Drawings, product data, and Samples are technical Submittals prepared by Contractor, Subcontractor, manufacturer, or Supplier and submitted by Contractor to Engineer as a basis for approval of the use of Equipment and Materials proposed for incorporation in the Work or needed to describe ' installation, operation, maintenance, or technical properties. a. Shop Drawings include custom -prepared data of all types including drawings, diagrams, performance curves, material schedules, templates, '• instructions, and similar information not in standard printed form applicable to other projects. b. Product data includes standard printed information on materials, products; and systems; not custom -prepared for this Project, other than the designation of selections from available choices. • c. Samples include both fabricated and unfabricated physical examples of materials, products, and Work; both as complete units and as smaller portions of units of Work; either for limited visual inspection or (where indicated) for more detailed testing and analysis. Mock-ups are a special form of Samples which are too large to be handled in the specified manner for transmittal of Sample Submittals. 2. Informational Submittals are those technical reports, administrative Submittals, certificates, and guarantees not defined as Shop Drawings, ' product data, or Samples. a. Technical reports include laboratory reports, tests, technical procedures, technical records, and Contractor's design analysis. • b. Administrative Submittals are those nontechnical Submittals required by the Contract Documents or deemed necessary for administrative records. These Submittals include maintenance agreements, Bonds, Project I. photographs, physical work records, statements of applicability, copies of industry standards, Project record data, security/protection/safety data, • and similar type Submittals. c. Certificates and guarantees are those Submittals on Equipment and Materials where a written certificate or guarantee from the manufacturer or Supplier is called for in the Specifications. 3. Refer to ARTICLES 1.03 and 1.04 of this Part for detailed lists of documents ' and specific requirements. 01330 -Submittals 01330-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTALS (continued) B. Quality Requirements: 1. Submittals such as Shop Drawings and product data shall be of suitable quality for legibility and reproduction purposes. Every line, character, and letter shall be clearly legible. Drawings such as reproducibles shall be useable for further reproduction to yield legible hard copy. 2. Documents submitted to Engineer that do not conform to specified requirements shall be subject to rejection. Contractor shall resubmit conforming documents. If conforming Submittals cannot be obtained, such documents shall be retraced, redrawn, or photographically restored as may be necessary to meet such requirements. Contractor's (or his Subcontractor's) failure to initially satisfy the legibility quality requirements will not relieve Contractor (or his Subcontractors) from meeting the required schedule for Submittals. C. Language and Dimensions: I . All words and dimensional units shall be in the English language. 2. Metric dimensional unit equivalents may be stated in addition to the English units. However, English units of measurement shall prevail. D. Submittal Completeness: I. Submittals shall be complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria, materials of construction, and other information specified to enable Engineer to review the information effectively. 2. Where standard drawings are furnished which cover a number of variations of the general class of Equipment, each drawing shall be annotated to indicate exactly which parts of the drawing apply to the Equipment being furnished. Use hatch marks to indicate variations that do not apply to the Submittal. The use of "highlighting markers" will not be an acceptable means of annotating Submittals. Annotation shall also include proper identification of the Submittal permanently attached to the drawing. 3. Reproductions or copies of Contract Drawings or portions thereof will not be accepted as complete fabrication or erection drawings. Contractor may use a reproduction of Contract Drawings for erection drawings to indicate information on erection or to identify detail drawing references. Whenever the Drawings are revised to show this additional Contractor information, Engineer's title block shall be replaced with a Contractor's title block, and Engineer's professional seal shall be removed from the drawing. The Contractor shall revise these erection drawings for subsequent Engineer revisions to the Contract Drawings. 1.03 TECHNICAL SUBMITTALS: A. Items shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturer's specifications. 2. Catalogs, or parts thereof, of manufactured Equipment. 3. Shop fabrication and erection drawings. 4. General outline drawings of Equipment showing overall dimensions, location of major components, weights, and location of required building openings and floor plates. 01330 -Submittals 01330-2 RTN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 01330 - SUBNHTTALS (continued) 5. Detailed Equipment installation drawings, showing foundation details, anchor bolt sizes and locations, baseplate sizes, location of Owner's ' connections; and all clearances required for erection, operation, and disassembly for maintenance. 6. Schematic diagrams for electrical items, showing external connections, ' terminal block numbers, internal wiring diagrams and one -line diagrams. 7. Bills of material and spare parts list. 8. Instruction books and operating manuals. ' 9. Material lists or schedules. 10. Performance tests on Equipment by manufacturers. 11. Concrete mix design information. ' 12. Samples and color charts. 13. All drawings, catalogs or parts thereof, manufacturer's specifications and • data, samples, instructions, and other information specified or necessary: ' a. For Engineer to determine that the Equipment and Materials conform with the design concept and comply with the intent of the Contract Documents. b. For the proper erection, installation, operation, and maintenance of the ' Equipment and Materials which Engineer will review for general content but not for basic details. c. For Engineer to determine what supports, anchorages, structural details, ' connections, and services are required for the Equipment and Materials, and the effects on contiguous or related structures and Equipment and Materials. '• B. Schedule of Submittals: 1. Prepare for Engineer's concurrence, a schedule for submission of all Submittals specified or necessary for Engineer's approval of the use of ' v Equipment and Materials proposed for incorporation in the Work or needed for proper installation, operation, or maintenance. Submit the schedule with the procurement schedule and construction progress schedule. Schedule ' submission of all Submittals to permit review, fabrication, and delivery in time so as to not cause a delay in the Work of Contractor or his Subcontractors or any other contractors as described herein. '• 2. In establishing schedule for Submittals, allow 22 days after submittal to Engineer for reviewing original Submittals and 17 days after submittal to Engineer for reviewing resubmittals. 3. The schedule shall indicate the anticipated dates of original submission for ' each item and Engineer's approval thereof, and shall be based upon at least one resubmission of each item. 4. Schedule all Submittals required prior to fabrication or manufacture for U•. submission within 90 days of the Notice to Proceed. Schedule Submittals pertaining to storage, installation, and operation at the Site for Engineer's approval prior to delivery of the Equipment and Materials. ' 5. Resubmit Submittals the number of times required for Engineer's "Submittal Approved." However, any need for resubmittals in excess of the number set forth in the accepted schedule, or any other delay in obtaining approval of I Submittals, will not be grounds for extension of the Contract Times, provided Engineer completes his reviews within the times specified. ' 01330 -Submittals 01330-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTALS (continued) I C. Transmittal of Submittals: 1. All Submittals for Equipment and Materials furnished by Contractor, Subcontractors, manufacturers, and Suppliers shall be submitted to Engineer by Contractor. Engineer will log the Submittals and forward them to Engineer. 2. After checking and verifying all field measurements, transmit all Submittals to Engineer for approval as follows: a. Submittal Information Block: (1) Affix to all paper copies whether Submittal is prepared by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier. Use transparent decal type Submittal Information Blocks for Shop Drawings and use gummed paper type for product data Submittals. (2) An example of the Submittal Information Block is included as an appendix to this Section. b. Mark each Submittal by Project name and number, Contract title and number, and the applicable Specification Section and Article number. Include in the letter of transmittal the Drawing number and title, sheet number (if applicable), revision number, and electronic filename (if applicable). Unidentified Submittals will be returned for proper identification. c. Check and include Contractor's approval for Submittals of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and manufacturers prior to transmitting to Engineer. Contractor's approval shall constitute a representation to Owner and Engineer that Contractor has either determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, or Contractor assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor has coordinated each Submittal with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. d. At the time of each submission, call to the attention of Engineer in the letter of transmittal any deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. e. Make all modifications noted or indicated by Engineer and return revised Submittals until approved. Direct specific attention in writing, or on revised Submittals, to changes other than the modifications called for by Engineer on previous Submittals. After paper copy Submittals have been approved, submit copies thereof for final distribution. Previously approved Submittals transmitted for final distribution will not be further reviewed and are not to be revised. If errors are discovered during manufacture or fabrication, correct the Submittal and resubmit for review. f. Following completion of the Work and prior to final payment, furnish record documents and approved Samples and Shop Drawings necessary to indicate "as constructed" conditions, including field modifications, in the number of copies specified. Furnish additional copies for insertion in Equipment instruction books and operating manuals as required. All such copies shall be clearly marked "PROJECT RECORD." g. Keep a copy or sample of each Submittal in good order at the Site. I 01330 -Submittals 01330-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' ' SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTALS (continued) 3. Quantity Requirements: a. Except as otherwise specified, transmit all Shop Drawings in the following quantities: (1) Initial Submittal: I. (a) Paper - 6 copies to Engineer. 3 copies will be returned to Contractor. (2) Resubmittals: ' (a) Paper — 6 copies to Engineer. 3 copies will be returned to Contractor. (3) Submittal for final distribution: ' (a) Paper — 3 copies plus the number required by Contractor, to Engineer. (4) As -constructed documents: ' (a) Paper — 3 copies to Engineer. b. Transmit Submittals of product data as follows: (1) Initial Submittal: (a) Paper — 6 copies to Engineer. 3 copies will be returned ' to Contractor. (2) Resubmittals: (a) Paper — 6 copies to Engineer. 3 copies will be returned Ito Contractor. (3) Submittal for final distribution: (a) Paper — 3 copies plus the number of copies required by 'Contractor, to Engineer. . c. Transmit Submittals of Material Samples, color charts, and similar items as follows: (1) Initial Submittal — 5 to Engineer. (2) Resubmittal — 5 to Engineer. (3) Upon approval, — 2 Samples will be returned to Contractor. ' d. Transmit Submittals of Equipment instruction books and operating manuals as follows: (1) Initial Submittal: (a) Paper —S 5 copies to Engineer. One copy will be returned ' to Contractor: (2) Resubmittals: (a) Paper — 5 copies to Engineer. One copy will be returned to Contractor. (3) Submittal for Final Distribution — 4 paper copies to Engineer. e. Transmit Submittals for reference only: ' (1) Paper — 4 copies to Engineer. f. Owner may copy and use for internal operations and staff training purposes any and all document Submittals required by this Contract and approved for final distribution, whether or not such documents are copyrighted, at no additional cost to Owner. If permission to copy any such Submittal for the purposes stated is unreasonably withheld from Owner by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, or Supplier, Contractor shall provide to Engineer 30 copies plus the number of copies required by Contractor at each final distribution issue. 1 01330 -Submittals 01330-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTALS (continued) D. 4. Equipment erection drawings and other Submittals required for the installation of Equipment furnished by others under separate contract for installation under this Contract will be transmitted to Contractor by Engineer in the final distribution of such Submittals. 5. Information to Manufacturer's District Office: Contractor shall arrange for manufacturers and Suppliers of Equipment and Materials to furnish copies of all agreements, drawings, specifications, operating instructions, correspondence, and other matters associated with this Contract to the manufacturer's district office servicing the Owner. Insofar as practicable, all business matters relative to Equipment and Materials included in this Contract shall be conducted through such local district offices. Engineer's Review: i. Engineer will review and return Submittals with appropriate notations. Engineer will return Submittals and notations to Contractor. Instruction books and similar Submittals will be reviewed by Engineer for general content but not for basic details. 2. Work requiring a Submittal shall not be commenced or shipped until the Submittal has been marked "Submittal Approved" or "Submittal Approved as Noted" by Engineer. 3. Engineer's approval of Submittals will not relieve Contractor from Contractor's responsibility as stated in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. E. Submittal Action Stamp: 1. Engineer's review action will appear on all Submittals of Contractor when returned. Review status designations listed on submittal action stamp are defined as follows: A — SUBMITTAL APPROVED: Signifies Equipment or Material represented by the Submittal conforms with the design concept and complies with the intent of the Contract Documents and is approved for incorporation in the Work. Contractor is to proceed with fabrication or procurement of the items and with related Work. Copies of the Submittal are to be transmitted to Engineer for final distribution. B — SUBMITTAL APPROVED AS NOTED (RESUBMIT): Signifies Equipment and Material represented by the Submittal conforms with the design concept and complies with the intent of the Contract Documents and is approved for incorporation in the Work in accordance with Engineer's notations. Contractor is to proceed with fabrication or procurement of the items and with related Work in accordance with Engineer's notations and is to submit a revised Submittal responsive to notations marked on the returned Submittal or written in the letter of transmittal. C — SUBMITTAL RETURNED FOR REVISION (RESUBMIT): Signifies Equipment and Material represented by the Submittal appears to conform with the design concept and comply with the intent of the Contract Documents but information is either insufficient in detail or contains discrepancies which prevent Engineer from completing his review. Contractor is to resubmit revised information responsive to Engineer's annotations on the returned Submittal or written in the letter of transmittal. I I I r1 C I I IT I U II I 01330 -Submittals 01330-6 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 n ' SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTALS (continued) Fabrication or procurement of items represented by the Submittal and related ' Work is not to proceed until the Submittal is approved. D — SUBMITTAL NOT APPROVED (SUBMIT ANEW): Signifies 'Equipment and Material represented by. the Submittal does not conform with the design concept or comply with. the intent of the Contract Documents and • is disapproved for use in the Work. Contractor is to provide Submittals ' responsive to the Contract Documents. E - PRELIMINARY SUBMITTAL: Signifies Submittals of such preliminary nature that a determination of conformance with the design ' concept or compliance with the intent of the Contract Documents must be deferred until additional information is furnished. Contractor is to submit such additional information to permit layout and related activities to proceed. t• F — FOR REFERENCE, NO APPROVAL REQUIRED: Signifies Submittals which are for supplementary information only; pamphlets, general information sheets, catalog cuts, standard sheets, bulletins and similar data, ' all of which are useful to Engineer or Owner in design, operation, or maintenance, but which by their nature do not constitute a basis for determining that items represented thereby conform with the design concept t or comply with the intent of the Contract' Documents. Engineer reviews such Submittals for general content but not for basic details. G — DISTRIBUTION COPY, (PREVIOUSLY APPROVED): Signifies Submittals which have been previously approved and are being distributed to Contractor, Owner, Resident Project Representative, and others for coordination and construction purposes. ' F. Instruction Books and Operating Manuals: 1. Equipment instruction books and operating manuals prepared by the manufacturer shall include the following: I. a. Index and tabs. b. Instructions for installation, start-up, operation, inspection, maintenance, parts lists and recommended spare parts, and data sheets showing model numbers. c. Applicable drawings. d. Warranties and guarantees. '• e. Address of nearest manufacturer -authorized service facility. f. All additional data specified. 2. Information listed above shall be bound into hard -back binders of Bok-Hinge ' Split Prong Binder or McBee Swing Hinge type. Sheet size shall be 8-1/2 x 11. Binder color shall be black. Capacity shall be a minimum of 1 -1/2 -inches, but sufficient to contain and use sheets with ease. a. Provide with following accessories: (1) Label holder. (2) Business card holder. (3) Sheetlifters. (4) Horizontal pockets. J 01330 -Submittals I 01330 -7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 01330 -SUBMITTALS (continued) I b. The following information shall be imprinted, inserted or affixed by label on the binder front cover: (1) Equipment name. (2) Manufacturer's name. (3) Project name. (4) Contract name and number. c. The following information shall be imprinted, inserted, or affixed by label on the binder spine: (1) Equipment name. (2) Manufacturer's name. (3) Volume number (if -applicable). , G. Samples: 1. Office Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate the following: a. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. b. Full range of color, texture, and pattern. ' 2. Field Samples and Mock-ups: a. Contractor shall erect field Samples and mock-ups at the Project Site and at a location acceptable to Engineer. ' b. Size or area shall be as specified in the respecti• ve Specification Section. c. Fabricate each Sample and mock-up complete and finished. d. Remove mock-ups at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to the Engineer if not a permanent part of construction. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS: A. Informational Submittals are comprised of technical reports, administrative Submittals, and guarantees which relate to the Work, but do not require Engineer approval prior to proceeding with the Work. Informational Submittals include: 1. Welder qualification tests. 2. Welding procedure qualification tests. 3. X-ray and radiographic reports. 4. Hydrostatic testing of pipes. 5. Field test reports. 6. Concrete cylinder test reports. 7. ASME pressure vessel test reports. 8. Certification on Materials: a. Steel mill tests. b. Roofing lab tests. c. Brick and concrete masonry unit lab tests. d. Paint lab tests. e. Metal paneling lab tests. f. Cement tests. 9. Soil test reports. 10. Air handling balancing reports. 11. Temperature records. 12. Piping stress analysis. 13. Shipping or packing lists. 01330 -Submittals 01330-8 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTALS (continued) 14. Job progress schedules. 15. Equipment and Material delivery schedules. 16. Progress photographs. 17. Warranties and guarantees. 18. Fire protection and hydraulic calculations. B. Transmittal of Informational Submittals: 1. All informational Submittals furnished by Subcontractors, manufacturers, and Suppliers shall be submitted to Engineer by Contractor unless otherwise specified. a. Identify each informational Submittal by Project name and number, Contract title and number, and the Specification Section and Article number marked thereon or in the letter of transmittal. Unidentifiable Submittals will be returned for proper identification. b. At the time of each submission, call to the attention of Engineer in the letter of transmittal any deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Quantity Requirements: a. Technical reports and administrative Submittals except as otherwise specified: (1) Engineer: Three copies. b. Written Certificates and Guarantees: (1) Engineer: 6 copies. 3. Test Reports: a. Responsibilities of Contractor, Owner, and Engineer regarding tests and inspections of Equipment and Materials and completed Work are set forth elsewhere in these Contract Documents. b. The party specified responsible for testing or inspection shall in each case, unless otherwise specified, arrange for the testing laboratory or reporting agency to distribute test reports as follows: (1) Engineer: Two copies. (2) Resident Project Representative: One copy. (3) Contractor: Two copies. (4) Manufacturer or Supplier: One copy. C. Engineer's Review: 1. Engineer will review informational Submittals for indications of Work or Material deficiencies. 2. Engineer will respond to Contractor on those informational Submittals which indicate Work or Material deficiency. PART2- PRODUCTS NOT USED PART3- EXECUTION NOT USED 01330 -Submittals END OF SECTION 01330 01330-9 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 01330.01 - SUBMITTAL INFORMATION BLOCK Contractor fill in all blanks without preprinted information For the use Project Name Fayetteville, Arkansas Wastewater System Improvement Project Number CS -050808-03 Contract Title: Hamestring Life Station Contract No.: WL-6 Spec. Sect. No. Art. No. Contractor's Approval (See Contract Documents) Contractor Approved By Date (Do not send drawing to Engineer without Contractors prior Approval Contractor fill in this on all Submittals Engineer Record Stamp Engineer's Action (See Contract Documents) Date Received Initials & Date Initials & Date For the use of the 1. Use this Submittal Information Block on all Shop Drawings, whether prepared by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier. Place as near as possible to the drawing title in the lower right corer. 2. Affix the Submittal Information Blocks to all "product data" type Submittals immediately inside the front cover. 01330.01 -Submittal Information Block 01330.01-1 RTN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I P P L P P L P C P P I L II I I II I 01420 -Definitions & Standards 01420 - 1 I SECTION 01420 - DEFINITIONS & STANDARDS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Definitions: 1. Basic contract definitions used in the Contract Documents are defined in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. Definitions and explanations are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the Work. 2. General Requirements are the provisions or requirements of DIVISION 1 Sections, and which apply to the entire Work of the Contract. B. Related Information Specified Elsewhere: Specification standards and associations applicable to the Work are specified in each Section. 1.02 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATIONS: A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute's (CSI) Section Format and MasterFormat numbering system. Some portions may not fully comply and no particular significance will be attached to such compliance or noncompliance. 1. Divisions and Sections: For convenience, a basic unit of Specification text is a "Section," each unit of which is numbered and named. These are organized with related Sections, into "Divisions," which are recognized as the present industry consensus on uniform organization and sequencing of Specifications. The Section title is not intended to limit meaning or content of Section, nor to be fully descriptive of requirements specified therein, nor to be an integral part of text. 2. Section Numbering: Used for identification and to facilitate cross-references in Contract Documents. Sections are placed in numeric sequence; however, numbering sequence is not complete, and listing of Sections in Table of Contents at beginning of the Project Manual must be consulted to determine numbers and names of Specification Sections in these Contract Documents. 3. Page Numbering: Numbered independently for each Section. Section number is shown with page number at bottom of each page, to facilitate location of text. 4. Parts: Each Section of Specifications generally has been subdivided into three basic "parts" for uniformity and convenience (PART I - GENERAL, PART 2- PRODUCTS, and PART 3 - EXECUTION). These "Parts" do not limit the meaning of text within. Some Sections may not contain all three "Parts" when not applicable, or may contain more than three "Parts" to add clarity to organization of Section. 5. Underscoring of Titles: Used strictly to assist reader of Specification in scanning text for key words in content. No emphasis on or relative importance is intended except where underscoring may be used in body of text to emphasize a duty, critical requirement, or similar situation. 6. Project Identification: Project file number and identification are recorded at bottom of each page of Specifications to minimize possible misuse of Specifications, or confusion with other Project Specifications. RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 01420 - DEFINITIONS & STANDARDS (continued) I B. Specification Content: 1. These Specifications apply certain conventions in the use of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows: a. Imperative and Streamlined Language: These Specifications are written in imperative and abbreviated form. This imperative language of the technical Sections is directed at the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. Incomplete sentences shall be completed by inserting "shall," "the Contractor shall," and "shall be," and similar mandatory phrases by ' inference in the same manner as they are applied to notes on the Drawings. The words "shall be" shall be supplied by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases. Except as worded to the contrary, fulfill (perform) all indicated requirements whether stated imperatively or otherwise. b. Specifying Methods: The techniques or methods of specifying requirements varies throughout text, and may include "prescriptive," "compliance with standards," "performance," "proprietary," or a combination of these. The method used for specifying one unit of Work has no bearing on requirements for another unit of Work. c. Overlapping and Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more industry standards or sets of requirements is specified, and overlapping of those different standards or requirements establishes different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, notify Engineer for a decision as specified in GENERAL CONDITIONS. d. Abbreviations: Throughout the Contract Documents are abbreviations implying words and meanings which shall be appropriately interpreted. Specific abbreviations have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in schedules. These are normally defined at first instance of use. Organizational and association names and titles of general standards are also abbreviated. C. Assignment of Specialists: In certain instances,'Specification text requires that specific Work be assigned to specialists in the operations to be performed. These specialists shall be engaged for performance of those units of Work, and assignments are requirements over which Contractor has no choice or option. These assignments shall not be confused with, and are not intended to interfere with, enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the Work, local trade and union jurisdictions, and similar conventions. Nevertheless, final responsibility for fulfillment of Contract requirements remains with Contractor. D. Trades: Except as otherwise specified or indicated, the use of titles such as "carpentry" in Specification text, implies neither that the Work must be performed by an accredited or unionized tradesperson of corresponding generic name (such as `carpenter"), nor that specified requirements apply exclusively to work by tradespersons of that corresponding generic name. 01420 -Definitions & Standards 01420-2 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 01420 - DEFINITIONS & STANDARDS (continued) 1.03 DRAWING SYMBOLS: I U I I A. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols used on Drawings are those symbols recognized in the construction industry for purposes indicated. Refer instances of uncertainty to Engineer for clarification. '1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS: A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction. industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference and are stated in each Section. 1. Referenced standards, referenced directly in Contract Documents or by governing regulations, have precedence over nonreferenced standards which are recognized in industry for applicability to the Work. 2. Where compliance with an industry standard is required, standard in effect shall be as stated in GENERAL CONDITIONS. 3. Where an applicable code or standard has been revised and reissued after the date of the Contract Documents and before performance of Work affected, the Engineer will decide whether to issue a Change Order to proceed with the updated standard. 4. In every instance the quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum to be provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly, within specified tolerances, with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum values, as noted, or appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Engineer for a decision before proceeding. 5. Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. a. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction activity, Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. B. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. PART2- PRODUCTS NOT USED RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 01420 -Definitions & Standards 01420 -3 I ' SECTION 01520 - FIELD OFFICES & SHEDS PART!- GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY: I PART 2- I 2.01 I Li I I I I LI I I U A. This Section includes requirements for temporary field offices and other structures .required for office and storage space required by Contractor and Engineer. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Equipment and Materials: SECTION 01600. 2. Temporary Utilities and Facilities: SECTION 01560. FIELD OFFICES: A. General: 1. Provide trailers, mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised aboveground, with steps, landings, and railings at entrance doors. 2. Buildings shall be structurally sound, secure, and weathertight. 3. Provide appropriate type fire extinguishers at each office and storage area. 4. Maintain offices during progress of the Work. 5. Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date stated in Notice to Proceed. B. Contractor's Office: 1. Provide a field office for Contractor's superintendent on the Site. 2. It shall be of size required for general use, with lights, heat, furnishings, telephone service, and other necessary facilities and utilities required by Contractor's operations. C. ,Resident Project Representative's Office: 1. Provide a separate field office for Engineer's Resident Project Representative on the Site. 2. Provide the following minimum requirements: a. 150 -square -foot minimum, with minimum dimension of 8 feet. b. Secure entrance doors - one set of keys. c. Windows with operable sash and insect screens. d. Lockable storage closet. e. Resilient floor covering. f. Furnishings: (1) One standard size desk with three drawers, swivel desk chair with arms. 01520 -Field Offices & Sheds (2) One throw table of sufficient size for full size Drawings and Submittals. (3) One plan rack to hold a minimum of six racks of Drawings. (4) One standard 4 -drawer legal -size metal filing cabinet with lock and key. (5) Six linear feet of bookshelves, 10 -inch minimum depth. (6) Two straight chairs. (7) One waste basket per desk and table. (8) One tackboard, 36" x 30". 01520-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 U I SECTION 01520 - FIELD OFFICES & SHEDS (continued) g. Services: (1) Lighting: 50 foot-candles at desktop height. Exterior lighting at entrance door. (2) Heating and air conditioning. (3) Electrical Service: Minimum of two circuits, 110V, 60 hertz. Minimum of four 110V duplex convenience outlets. (4) Toilet facilities. ' (5) Separate line telephone. See SECTION 01560. (6) Electric water cooler. 2.02 STORAGE SHEDS AND TRAILERS: ' A. On Site: ' 1. Provide temporary buildings or trailers needed for storage of Equipment and Materials installed under this Contract and those furnished by Owner or others under separate contract. 2. Provide ventilation and heating as required by Equipment and Material stored. B. Off Site: 1. Advise Engineer of any arrangements made for storage of Equipment and ' Materials in a place other than Owner's Site. Furnish evidence of insurance coverage with Application for Payment in conformance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS. ' PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION, INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE: A. General: 1. Place temporary buildings, trailers, and stored materials in locations acceptable to Owner or Engineer. 2. Install field offices and sheds to resist winds and elements of the locality where installed. 3. Remove when no longer needed at the Site or when Work is completed. 4. Keep approach walks free of leaves, mud, water, ice, or snow. 5. At completion of Work, remove temporary buildings and trailers, foundations (if any), utility services, and debris. 6. Prepare ground or paved areas as specified in applicable Sections. END OF SECTION 01520 I 1 I 01520 -Field Offices & Sheds 01520-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 01530 - BARRIERS & TEMPERATURE CONTROLS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes General Requirements for: 1. Safety and protection of Work. 2. Safety and protection of existing property. 3. Barriers. 4. Security. 5. Environmental controls. 6. Access roads and parking areas. 7. Traffic control and use of roadways. 8. Railroad service. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1: Temporary Utilities and Facilities: SECTION 01560. PART2- PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 SAFETY AND PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY: A. General 1. Provide for the safety and protection of the Work as set forth in GENERAL CONDITIONS. Provide protection at all times against rain, wind, storms, frost, freezing, condensation, or heat so as to maintain all Work and Equipment and Materials free from injury or damage. At the end of each day, all new Work likely to be damaged shall be appropriately protected. 2. Notify Engineer immediately at any time operations are stopped due to conditions which make it impossible to continue operations safely or to obtain proper results. 3. Construct and maintain all necessary temporary drainage and do all pumping necessary to keep excavations, floors, pits, trenches, manholes, and ducts free of water. 4. Protect floors from damage by proper covering and care when handling heavy equipment, painting, or handling mortar or other such materials. Use proper cribbing and shoring to prevent overloading of floors while moving heavy equipment. Provide metal pans under pipe -threading machines and clean such pans daily, keeping oil off floors. Restore floors to former condition where damaged or stained. 5. Concrete floors less than 28 days old shall not be loaded without written permission from Engineer. 6. Restrict access to roofs except as required by the Work. Where access is required, provide protection with plywood, boards, or other suitable materials. 01530 -Barriers & Temperature Controls 01530-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Pl I SECTION 01530 - BARRIERS & TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (continued) ' B. Property Other than Owner's: 1. Provide for the safety and protection of property as set forth in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. Report immediately to the owners thereof and promptly repair damage to existing facilities resulting from construction operations. 2. Names and telephone numbers of representatives of agencies and utilities having jurisdiction over streets and utilities in the Work area are listed below for Contractor's convenience can be obtained from Engineer for the agencies listed below. Concerned agencies or utilities shall be contacted a minimum of 24 hours prior to performing Work, closing streets and other traffic areas, or excavating near underground utilities or pole lines. a. Water. b. Gas. c. Sanitary sewers. d. Storm drains. e. Pipeline companies. f. Telephone. g. Electric. h. Municipal streets. i. State highways. j. City engineer. ' k. Fire. 1. Police. 3. Operation of valves or other appurtenances on existing utilities, when required, shall be by or under the direct supervision of the owning utility. 4. Where fences are to be breached on private property, the owners thereof shall be contacted and arrangements made to ensure proper protection of any livestock or other property thus exposed. 5. The applicable requirements specified for protection of the Work shall also apply to the protection of existing property of others. 6. Before acceptance of the Work by Owner, restore all property affected by Contractor's operations to the original or better condition. 3.02 BARRIERS: I A. General: 1. Furnish, install, and maintain suitable barriers as required to prevent public entry, protect the public, and to protect the Work, existing facilities, trees, and plants from construction operations. Remove when no longer needed or at completion of Work. 2. Materials may be new or used, suitable for the intended purpose, but shall not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards or regulatory agencies. 3. Barriers shall be of a neat and reasonable uniform appearance, structurally adequate for the required purposes. 4. Maintain barriers in good repair and clean condition for adequate visibility. Relocate barriers as required by progress of Work. 5. Repair damage caused by installation and restore area to original or better condition. Clean the area. I 01530 -Barriers & Temperature Controls 01530-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 01530 - BARRIERS & TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (continued) B. Fences: I E I1. Preserve and protect existing trees and plants at the Site which are designated to remain and those adjacent to the Site. ' 2. Provide temporary barriers around each, or around each group of trees and plants. Construct to a height of 6 feet around trees, and to a height to adequately protect plants. I. 3. Consult with Engineer and remove agreed -on roots and branches which will interfere with construction. Employ qualified tree surgeon to remove and to treat cuts. 4. Protect root zones of trees and plants as follows: ' a. Do not allow vehicular traffic or parking. b. Do . not store materials or products..:, c. Prevent dumping of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids. ' d. Prevent puddling or continuous running water. 5. Carefully supervise excavating, grading and filling, and subsequent construction operations to prevent damage. I. 6. Remove and replace, or suitably repair, trees and plants which are damaged or destroyed due to construction operations, and which were designated to remain. ' 3.03 SECURITY: A. General: 1. Contractor is responsible for site security. 3:04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS: ' A. Noise Control: 1. OSHA regulations shall govern site noise levels. B. Dust Control: 1. Provide positive methods and apply dust control materials to minimize raising dust from construction operations; and to prevent airborne dust from dispersing into the atmosphere. ' 2. Clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as -needed basis until painting is finished. 3. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly -coated surfaces. 01530 -Barriers & Temperature Controls 01530:3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1. Prior to the start of Work at the Project Site, install enclosure fence with suitably locked entrance gates. 2. Locate fence to enclose the entire Project Site, or that portion the Contractor establishes as required to encompass the construction operation. 3. Locate vehicular entrance gates in a suitable relation to construction facilities and to avoid interference with traffic on public thoroughfares. 4. Locate pedestrian entrance gates as required to provide controlled personnel entry, in a suitable relation to construction parking facilities. 5. Fence construction shall be chain -link type as specified in DIVISION 2, SECTION 02821. C. Tree and Plant Protection: E SECTION 01530 - BARRIERS & TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (continued) I C. Water and Erosion Control: ' 1. Provide methods to control surface water to prevent damage to the Project, the Site, or adjoining properties. 2. Plan and execute construction and earthwork by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, and from borrow and waste disposal areas, to prevent erosion and sedimentation. a. Hold the areas of bare soil exposed at one time to a minimum. ' b. Provide temporary control measures such as berms, dikes, and drains. 3. Control fill, grading, and ditching to direct surface drainage away from excavations, pits, tunnels, and other construction areas; and to direct drainage to proper runoff. 4. Provide, operate, and maintain hydraulic equipment of adequate capacity to control surface and groundwater. 5. Dispose of drainage water in a manner to prevent flooding, erosion, or other damage to any portion of the Site or to adjoining areas. 6. Provide temporary drainage where the roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed prior to the connection and operation of the permanent drainage piping system. D. Debris Control and Clean -Up: 1. Keep the premises free at all times from accumulations of debris, waste materials, and rubbish caused by construction operations and employees. Responsibilities shall include: a. Adequate trash receptacles about the Site, emptied promptly when filled. b. Periodic cleanup to avoid hazards or interference with operations at the Site and to maintain the Site in a reasonably neat condition. c. The keeping of construction materials such as forms and scaffolding neatly stacked. d. Immediate cleanup to protect the Work by removing splattered concrete, asphalt, oil, paint, corrosive liquids, and cleaning solutions from walls, ' floors, and metal surfaces before surfaces are marred. 2. Prohibit overloading of trucks to prevent spillages on access and haul routes. Provide periodic inspection of traffic areas to enforce requirements. 3. Final cleanup is specified in SECTION 01780 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. E. Pollution Control: 1. Provide methods, means, and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of hazardous or toxic substances from construction operations. Contractor shall adhere to Owner's Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures Plan (SPCC) as required by 40 CFR Part 112. 2. Provide equipment and personnel, perform emergency measures required to contain any spillages, and remove contaminated soils or liquids. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off -Site in approved locations, and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil. 3. Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering public waters, sanitary, or storm sewers. 4. Comply with Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures Plan (SPCC) as stated in 40 CFR Part 112. I 01530 -Barriers & Temperature Controls 01530 -4 RUN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 01530 - BARRIERS & TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (continued) 3.05 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS: A. New Temporary On -Site Roads and Parking Areas: 1. Locate roads, drives, walks, and parking facilities to provide access to construction offices, mobilization, Work, storage areas, and other areas required for execution of the Contract. a. Consult with Engineer regarding any desired deviation therefrom. b. Size of parking facilities shall be adequate to provide for needs of Contractor's personnel, Resident Project Representatives, and visits to Site by Engineer and Owner. 2. Provide access for emergency vehicles. Maintain driveways a minimum of 15 feet wide between and around combustible materials in storage and mobilization areas. 3. Maintain traffic areas free of excavated materials, construction equipment, snow, ice, and debris. 4. Construct temporary bridges and culverts to span low areas and allow unimpeded drainage. 5. Keep fire hydrants and water control valves free from obstruction and accessible for use. 6. Construction: a. Clear areas required. b. Fill, compact, and grade areas as necessary to provide suitable support for vehicular traffic under anticipated loadings. Materials and construction shall be as specified in DIVISION 2. c. Provide for surface drainage of facilities and surrounding areas. d. Maintain roads, walks, and parking areas in a sound, clean condition. Repair or replace portions damaged during progress of Work. 7. Removal: a. Completely remove temporary materials and construction when construction needs can be met by use of permanent installation, unless construction is to be integrated into permanent construction. Remove and dispose of compacted materials to depths required by various conditions to be met in completed Work. b. Restore areas to original, better, or specified condition at completion of Work. 3.06 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND USE OF ROADWAYS: A. Traffic Control: 1. Provide, operate, and maintain equipment, services, and personnel, with ' • traffic control and protective devices, as required to expedite vehicular traffic flow on haul routes, at Site entrances, on -Site access roads, and parking areas. This includes traffic signals and signs, flagmen, flares, lights, • barricades, and other devices or personnel as necessary to adequately protect ' the public. 2. Remove temporary equipment and facilities when no longer required. Restore grounds to original, better, or specified condition when no longer required. ' 01530 -Barriers & Temperature Controls 01530 -5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 H SECTION 01530 - BARRIERS & TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (continued) I 3. Provide and maintain suitable detours or other temporary expedients.if necessary. 4. Bridge over open trenches where necessary to maintain traffic. 5. Consult with governing authorities to establish public thoroughfares which will be used as haul routes and Site access. All operations shall meet the approval of owners or agencies having jurisdiction. B. Maintenance of Roadways: 1. Repair roads, walkways, and other traffic areas damaged by operations. Keep traffic areas as free as possible of excavated materials and maintain in a manner to eliminate dust, mud, and hazardous conditions. 2. All operations and repairs shall meet the approval of owners or agencies having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 01530 ' I H I L I I H I I H 01530 -Barriers & Temperature Controls 01530-6 RUN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' I SECTION 01560 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES & FACILITIES PART1- GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY: IA. This Section includes requirements of a temporary nature not normally incorporated into:fmal Work. It includes the following: 1. Utility services. ' 2. Construction and support facilities. 3. Construction aids. 4. Safety and health. 5. Fire protection. ' B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Field Offices and Sheds: SECTION 01520. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): I. 1. A10 Series — Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition: B. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 1. Electrical Design Library — Temporary Electrical Facilities. ' C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 10 —Portable Fire Extinguishers. 2. 70 — National Electrical Code. ' 3. 241— Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). ' E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Temporary Utilities: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar 1 procedures performed on temporary utilities. ' B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of each temporary utility within 15 days of the date established for commencement of the Work. ' 1.04 DUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to: ' 1. Building Code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. ' 4. Police, Fire Department, and rescue squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. B. Standards: ' 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241, and ANSI Al 0 Series standards "Temporary Electrical Facilities." 01560 -Temporary Utilities & Facilities 01560 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I SECTION 01560 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES & FACILITIES (continued) ' 2. Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70. C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and ' termination of each temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of the permanent service. ' B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the Site. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. Provide new materials and equipment. If acceptable to Engineer, undamaged previously used materials and equipment in serviceable condition may be used. Provide materials and equipment suitable for the use intended, of capacity for required usage, and meeting applicable codes and standards. Comply with requirements of DIVISIONS 2 through 16. B. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. C. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4 -inch (19 -mm), heavy-duty, abrasion -resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet (30 m) long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge. D. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120V plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground -fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment. E. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard -service cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single lengths will.not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length -voltage ratio. F. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered -glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. G. Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed. 01560 -Temporary Utilities & Facilities 01560-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 01560 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES & FACILITIES (continued) H. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand -carried, portable, UL -rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand -carried, portable, UL -rated, Class ABC, dry -chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the exposures. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. PART 3- 3.01 TEMPORARY UTILITIES: A. General: 1. Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. 2. Provide adequate utility capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to availability of temporary utilities at the site, provide trucked -in services as required for start-up of construction operations. 3. Obtain and pay for temporary easements required to bring temporary utilities to the Project Site, where the Owner's permanent easement cannot be used for that purpose. 4. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary utilities required for adequate construction, safety, and security. Modify, relocate, and extend systems as Work progresses. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Grade the areas of Site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and grades, and clean the area. Remove on completion of Work or until service or facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 5. The types of temporary construction utilities and facilities required include, but not by way of limitation, water distribution, drainage, dewatering equipment, enclosure of Work, heat, ventilation, electrical power distribution, lighting, hoisting facilities, stairs, ladders, and roads. 6. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for required inspections and tests by governing authorities, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 7. Materials used for temporary service shall not be used in the permanent system unless so specified or acceptable to Engineer. 3.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING: A. Use of Existing System: 1. Owner's existing system shall be used for temporary electricity. I B. Use of Permanent System: 1. Prior to use of permanent system (facilities being constructed by Contractor) for construction purposes, obtain written permission of Owner. 2. Maintain permanent system as specified for temporary facilities. C. Costs of Installation and Operation: 1. Pay fees and charges for permits and applications. 01560 -Temporary Utilities & Facilities 01560-3 RIN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 01560 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES & FACILITIES (continued) ' 2. Pay costs of installation, maintenance, removal of temporary services, and restoration of any permanent facilities used. 3.03 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION: A. General: 1. Provide temporary heat, ventilation and cooling as required to maintain adequate environmental conditions to facilitate progress of the Work, to meet specified minimum conditions for the installation of materials, and to protect materials and finishes from damage. Protect from adverse affects of low temperatures or high humidity, and to prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 2. Methods of heating and fuel shall be suitable for particular purposes. Portable heaters shall be standard approved units with controls. B. Costs of Installation and Operation: ' 1. Pay fees and charges for applications, permits, and inspections. 2. Pay costs of installation, operation, maintenance, removal of equipment, and restoration of existing or permanent facilities if used. 3. Pay cost of power and fuel used. 3.04 TEMPORARY WATER: A. Contractor will be allowed to use site water for construction purposes. 3.05 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE: A. General: 1. Minimum: provide telephone service for use by Contractor and so Contractor can be reached at construction site during normal working hours. a. Arrange with local telephone service company and provide direct line telephone service at the construction Site and/or, b. Arrange with local cellular/mobile telephone service company and provide mobile telephone service. B. Costs of Installation and Operation: ' 1. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges for local calls. Toll charges shall be paid by the party who places the call. 3.06 TEMPORARY GAS: NOT USED 3.07 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES: A. Contractor -Furnished Facilities: 1. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary sanitary facilities for use through construction period. Remove on completion of Work. 2. Provide for all construction workers under this Contract and representatives at the Site. 01560 -Temporary Utilities & Facilities 01560-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 01560 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES & FACILITIES (continued) ' 3.09 I 1 3. Toilet facilities shall be of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type, properly vented, and fully enclosed with a glass- fiber -reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. a. Provide separate toilet facilities for male and female construction personnel as required. 4. Wash Facilities: Install potable water -supplied wash facilities at locations convenient to construction personnel involved in the handling of compounds and materials where wash-up is necessary to maintain a safe, healthy and sanitary condition. Where recommended or required by governing authorities and regulations or recognized standards provide emergency safety showers, emergency eye -wash fountains, showers, and similar facilities. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply soap and other cleaning compounds appropriate for each condition. 5. Drinking Water Fixtures: Provide containerized tap -dispenser type drinking water units. Provide drinking water fountains if piped potable water is reasonably accessible from permanent or temporary lines. 6. Supply and maintain toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups and similar disposable materials as appropriate for each facility. Provide appropriate covered waste containers for used material. SEWERS AND DRAINAGE: A. General: Where sewers or drainage facilities are not available for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and, dispose of effluent off the Site in a lawful manner. If existing sewers are available for temporary drainage near the Site prior to completion of permanent sewers, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be lawfully discharged into the sewers. If existing sewers cannot be used for discharge, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, waste stabilization ponds, and similar discharge facilities to remove effluent that can be lawfully discharged in that manner. B. Connect temporary sewers to the municipal sewer systems in the manner directed by the sewer department officials. C. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. Following heavy usage, restore to normal conditions promptly. Provide and maintain temporary earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around construction excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rain storms. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AIDS: A. General: 1. Provide construction aids and equipment required by personnel and to facilitate the execution of the Work; scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes, and other such facilities and equipment. 2. Materials may be new or used, must be suitable for the intended purpose, and meet the requirements of applicable codes, regulations, and standards. 3. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms, and railings for use by construction personnel. 01560 -Temporary Utilities & Facilities 01560 - 5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 L I SECTION 01560 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES & FACILITIES (continued) ' 3.10 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES: A. New Construction: 1. Provide temporary enclosure of exterior walls as Work progresses, to provide ' acceptable working conditions, weather protection for interior materials, allow for effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. a. Provide temporary exterior doors with hardware, including being lockable. b. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for Work and for handling of materials. 2. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified condition. 3.11 TEMPORARY SAFETY AND HEALTH: A. General: Contractor shall be responsible for development of safety and health programs for personnel at Project Site. 3.12 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION: A. General: 1. Contractor shall be responsible for development of a fire prevention and protection program for all Work under this Contract. 2. The program shall comply with the applicable provisions for safety and protection as set forth in the GENERAL CONDITIONS and with applicable parts of the NFPA 10 and 241. 3. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near such usable stairwell. 4. Store combustible materials in containers in fire -safe locations. 5. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire exposure areas. 6. Provide supervision of welding operations and similar sources of fire ignition. 7. Post warning and instructions at each extinguisher location, and instruct construction personnel on proper use of extinguishers and other available facilities at Project Site. Post local fire department telephone number on or near each telephone instrument at Project Site. B. Permanent Fire Protection: 1. Complete each fire protection facility at earliest reasonable date, place into operation, and make ready for emergency use. 2. Instruct personnel at Site on availability and proper use. 3.13 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL: A. Relocation: Relocate construction aids as required by progress of construction, storage limitations, or Work requirements and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors at the Site. 01560 -Temporary Utilities & Facilities 01560 - 6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 01560 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES & FACILITIES (continued) B. Removal: Remove temporary materials, equipment, and services when construction ' needs can be met and allowed by use of permanent construction, or at completion of the Project. C. Repair: Clean and repair damage caused by installation or by use of temporary '• facilities. 1. Remove foundations and underground installations for construction aids. 2. Grade the areas of the Site affected by temporary installations to required ' elevations and clean the area. END OF SECTION 01560 IF I I I I 1 I I 01560 -Temporary Utilities & Facilities 01560 -7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I II ' SECTION 01580 - PROJECT IDENTIFICATION & SIGNS PART1- GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes basic requirements for temporary Project identification and informational signs required during construction. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Submittals: SECTION 01330. 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Design sign and structure to withstand wind and environmental conditions of locality. Provide with finish adequate to withstand weathering, fading, chipping, and peeling for duration of construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit as specified in SECTION 01330. B. Includes, but not limited to, the following: 1. Shop Drawings and product data as applicable. 2. Show content, layout, lettering, colors, structure, and foundation. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS: A. Project Identification: ' 1. Construct to design, size, and material indicated. 2. Construct structure and framing of wood or metal, structurally adequate to resist design requirements of locality. 3. Construct sign surface of minimum 3/4 -inch thickness exterior grade I. plywood with medium density overlay. Panels shall be of size to minimize joints. Overall size shall be 8' X 8'. 4. Rough hardware shall be galvanized or aluminum. ' 5. Information Content: a. Project title, logo, and name of Owner as shown on Contract Documents. '• b. Names and titles of authorities. c. Name and title of Engineer. d. Name of prime Contractor and major Subcontractors. 2.02 INFORMATIONAL SIGNS: A. Construction: I1. This includes signs for traffic, construction workers, and general public in regards to directions, warnings, hazards, locations of areas, facilities, equipment, and others of a similar nature. 2. Provide signs of design, size, color, and lettering as required by regulatory agencies. Signs shall be painted metal, wood, plastic, or fiberglass and of 1 01580 -Project Identification & Signs 01580- 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 Fl SECTION 01580 - PROJECT IDENTIFICATION & SIGNS (continued) materials suitable for the conditions in which they are placed, such as weathering and fading. 3. Construct structure and framing of wood or metal, structurally adequate to ' resist design requirements of area of Project. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: I A. Project and Contractor Identification Sign: ' 1. Install in appropriate location so as not to obstruct traffic, pedestrians, or construction operations. 2. Erect on framing or foundation, and rigidly brace. 3. Maintain sign in good repair, in a clean and neat condition. 4. Remove upon completion of Project. B. Informational Signs: 1. Install at appropriate locations and in sufficient quantities to assure visibility. Relocate as required by progress of Work. 2. Maintain signs in good repair, in a neat, clean, readable condition. 3. Remove all signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of Project. END OF SECTION 01580 U Li C:1 I I 01580 -Project Identification & Signs 01580-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 01600 - EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project. 1. Multiple Prime Contracts: Provisions of this Section apply to the construction activities of each prime contractor. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. For the applicability of industry standards to products specified: DIVISIONS 2 through 16. 2. - For submittal of Contractor's construction progress schedule and the Submittal schedule: SECTIONS 01320 and 01330. 3. For handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract: SECTION 01631. 1.02 A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in these Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structures," "finishes," "accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well -recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "Material," "Equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. a. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. 2. "Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. 3. "Equipment" is a product with operational or nonoperational parts, whether motorized, or manually operated, that may require service connections, such as wiring or piping. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submittals for products are specified in SECTION 01330 and in applicable Sections of DIVISIONS 2 through 16. 1.04 DUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single source. 1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not, or cannot, produce a quantity adequate to complete Project requirements in a timely manner, consult with Engineer to determine the most important 01600 -Equipment & Materials 01600-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 01600 - EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS (continued) product qualities before proceeding. Qualities may include attributes, such as visual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from sources producing products that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent possible. ' B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between 2 or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be ' compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each prime contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods that are compatible with products and construction methods of other prime or separate contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between prime contractors over concurrently selectable, but incompatible products, Engineer will determine which products shall be retained and which are incompatible and must be replaced. C. Nameplates: Along with required labels and operating data, manufacturer or producer's nameplates, imprints, or trademarks may be placed on surfaces exposed to view. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surfaces or, where required for observation after installation, on accessible surfaces that are not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service -connected or power -operated Equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer including address (and telephone number). b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. D. Year 2000 Compliance: 1. Contractor warrants that all equipment, devices, items, systems, software, hardware, and firmware provided shall be Year 2000 compliant, meaning that they shall properly, appropriately, and consistently function and accurately process date and time data (including without limitation: calculating, comparing, and sequencing) on and after December 31, 1999, including leap year calculations. This warranty supersedes anything in the Specifications or other Contract Documents which might be construed inconsistently. This warranty is applicable whether the equipment, device, item, system, software, hardware, or firmware is specified with or without reference to a manufacturer's name, make, or model number. 1.05 TRANSPORTATION AND SHIPMENT: A. Shipment Preparation: 1. Contractor shall require manufacturers and Suppliers to prepare products for shipment in a manner to facilitate unloading and handling, and to protect 01600 -Equipment & Materials 01600 -2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I F I SECTION 01600 - EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS (continued) against damage, deterioration, or unnecessary exposure to the elements in transit and storage. Provisions for protection shall include the following: a. Crates or other suitable packaging materials. b. Covers and other means to prevent corrosion, moisture damage, mechanical injury, and accumulation of dirt in motors, electrical equipment, and machinery. c. Suitable rust -preventive compound on exposed machined surfaces and unpainted iron and steel. d. Grease packing or oil lubrication in all bearings and similar items. B. Marking: Each product item shall be tagged or marked as identified in the delivery schedule or on Submittals. Complete packing lists and bills of material shall be included with each shipment. Each piece of every item need not be marked separately, provided that all pieces of each item are packed or bundled together and the packages or bundles are properly tagged or marked. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING: A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's ' recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the Site and to prevent ' overcrowding of construction spaces. Allow ample time to avoid delay of the Work. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to the Site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and ' instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly ' protected. Inspect shipment to assure: a. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed Submittals. • b. Quantities are correct. c. Containers and packages are intact and labels are legible. d. Products are properly protected and undamaged. 1 5. Store products at the Site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Mark deliveries of component parts of Equipment to identify the Equipment, to permit easy accumulation of ' parts, and to facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 6. Store heavy Materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction: ' 7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, and with ventilation adequate to prevent • condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. 01600 -Equipment & Materials 01600-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 01600 - EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS (continued) 1.07 8. Protect motors, electrical Equipment, plumbing fixtures, and machinery of all kinds against corrosion, moisture deteriorations, mechanical injury, and accumulation of dirt or other foreign matter. 9. Protect exposed machined surfaces and unpainted iron and steel as necessary with suitable rust -preventive compounds. 10. Protect bearings and similar items with grease packing or oil lubrication. 11. Handle and store steel plate, sheet metal, and similar items in a manner to prevent deformation. 12. For storage of pipe and other products on easements and rights -of -way in residential and commercial areas, do not exceed the minimum required by scheduled laying operations, and conform to all requirements of public authorities. Store or place pipe along roads, set back from shoulder or curb, and at an angle tending to deflect vehicles if struck. Place or block pipe to preclude its accidental movement. B. Handling: 1. Provide equipment and personnel necessary to unload and handle products, by methods to prevent damage or soiling to products, or packaging. 2. Handle by methods to prevent bending or overstressing. Where lifting points are designated, lift components only at those points. 3. Provide additional protection to surrounding surfaces as necessary to prevent damage. C. Maintenance of Storage: 1. Inspect stored products on a scheduled basis. 2. Verify that storage facilities comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements, including environmental conditions continually maintained. 3. Verify that surfaces of products exposed to elements are not adversely affected; that any weathering of finishes is acceptable under requirements of Contract Documents. 4. For mechanical and electrical Equipment in long-term storage, provide manufacturer's service instructions to accompany each item, with notice of enclosed instructions on exterior of package. Service Equipment on a regularly scheduled basis. D. Protection After Installation: Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from subsequent construction operations. Remove coverings when no longer needed or as specified. PRODUCTS FURNISHED BY OWNER: 1. No products supplied by Owner. 1 I I I I Li Li n L Li L1 I I 01600 -Equipment & Materials 01600-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 01600 - EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS (continued) PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT SELECTION: A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise specified or indicated, new at • the time of installation. P I I I L 1: Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect. 2. Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Continued Availability: Where, because of the nature of its application, Owner is likely to need replacement parts or additional amounts of a product at a later date, either for maintenance and repair or replacement, provide standard products for which the manufacturer has published assurances that the products and its parts are likely to be available to Owner at a later date. 4. Conform to applicable Specifications, codes, standards, and regulatory agencies. 5. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by Engineer. 6. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: a. Design, fabricate, and assemble in accordance with the best engineering and shop practices. b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages, to be interchangeable. c. Equipment and Materials shall be suitable for service conditions intended. d. Equipment capacities, sizes, and dimensions indicated or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing by Engineer. e. Provide labels and nameplates where required by regulatory agencies or to state identification and essential operating data. 7. Do not use products for any purpose other than that for which designed. 8. To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single source. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS: A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place except as required for proper movement and performance, and accurately located and aligned with other Work. 1. Obtain and distribute copies of manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations if not a part of Submittals, containers, or packaging to parties involved in the installation, including a copy to Engineer and Resident Project Representative. 1 01600 -Equipment & Materials 01600-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 01600 - EOUIPMENT & MATERIALS (continued) 2. Maintain one complete set of instructions at the Site during installation and until completion. 3. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust products in accordance with such instructions and in conformance with specified requirements. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for further instructions. B. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 01600 01600 -Equipment & Materials 01600-6 RIN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 01631- SUBSTITUTIONS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Requirements for submitting Contractor's construction schedule and the Submittal schedule: SECTION 01320. 2. Requirements governing Contractor's selection of products: SECTION 01600. 1.02 A. Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, Materials, Equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered to be requests for substitutions. The following are not considered to be requests for substitutions: 1. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by Owner or Engineer. 2. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract Documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: I Li 1l I I A. Substitution Request Submittal: Engineer will consider written requests for substitution if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 60 days after commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of Engineer. 1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the form and according to procedures required for Change Order proposals. Requests for substitution shall not be submitted in the form of a Request for Interpretation (RFI). 2. Identify the Equipment or Material, the fabrication, or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section/Article and Drawing numbers. 3. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a. Statement indicating why specified product or method of construction cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 01631 -Substitutions 01631 -1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 C] I SECTION 01631- SUBSTITUTIONS (continued) 4. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 d. Product data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Identification of available sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services. g. A statement indicating the effect of the substitution on Contractor's construction progress schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on the overall Contract Times. If specified product cannot be provided within the Contract Times, provide letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delay in delivery. h. An itemized estimate of costs that will result directly or indirectly from approval of the substitution, including: (1) A proposal of the net change, if any, in the Contract Price. (2) Costs of redesign required by the proposed change. (3) Costs of resulting claims as determined in coordination with other contractors having work on the Project affected by the substitution. i. Statement indicating whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. j. Contractor's certification that the proposed. substitution conforms to requirements in the Contract Documents, will perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, is similar in substance to that specified, and is suitable for same use as that indicated and specified. k. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. Engineer's Action: Engineer may request additional information or documentation for evaluation. Engineer will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection. Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order. A. Conditions: Engineer will receive and consider Contractor's request for substitution when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by Engineer. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Extensive revisions to the ContractDocuments are not required. 2. Proposed substitution is in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 3. Substitution request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted. 4. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Times. Engineer will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. I I I I I I I I I U 01631 -Substitutions 01631 -2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 01631- SUBSTITUTIONS (continued) 5. The requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. _ 6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved. 7. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility. 8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials and where Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. 9. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty. 10. Where a proposed substitution involves more than one prime contractor, each contractor shall cooperate with the other contractors involved to coordinate the Work, provide uniformity and consistency, and assure compatibility of products. 7 F I El I I I I 01631 -Substitutions 01631-3 1 B. Engineer's review and acceptance of Submittals shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for anyvariation from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Engineer's acceptance of Submittals not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval of a substitute. Acceptance by Engineer shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Submittals. PART 3- EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 01631 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' Re: ' Specification Title: Section: I I I I I I I I Page: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Trade Name: Installer: Address: History: ❑ New Product ❑ 2-5 years old ❑ 5-10 years old ❑ More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: SUBSTITUTION REQUEST Project Number WL-6 Project Title Hamestring Lift Station RLF Project Number: CS -050808-03 Authorization Number: From: Date: Contract For: Article/Paragraph: Phone No. dodel No. Phone No. O Point -by -point comparative data attached — REQUIRED Undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. • Same maintenance, service, and availability of replacement parts, as applicable, are available. • Proposed substitution will not affect or delay Progress Schedule, except as stated below. • Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances, except as stated below. • Payment will be made for changes to building design, including architectural or engineering design, detailing, licenses, royalties, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. • Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be completed in all respects Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation: Project: Design Professional: Address: Owner: Date Installed: U 01631.01 -Substitution Request Form 01631.01 - 1 RIN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ❑No ❑Yes; explain I Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: DNo ❑Yes; add/deduct days. ' Supporting Data Attached: ❑Product Data Drawings Attachments: 1 Submitted by: ' Signature: IFirm: _ Address: Li I Li Telephone: ❑Pests DReports samples Fax: E-mail: Additional Comments: ❑Contractor L]Subcontractor llSupplier Oablanufacturer 1DP ❑_ ENGINEER'S REVIEW AND ACTION ❑Substitution approved — Make Submittals in accordance with Specification SECTION 01330. ❑Substitution approved as noted - Make Submittals in accordance with Specification SECTION 01330. 11Substitution rejected — Use specified materials. ClSubstitution Request received too late — Use specified materials. Signed by: Date: Distribution: ❑owner ' ❑Engines U ontractor Uonsultant UDther I I I I Li ' 01631.01 -Substitution Request Form 01631.01-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 U ' SECTION 01700 - TRAINING PART 1- GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY IA. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: I1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training videotapes. B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections. ' 1.02 SUBMITTALS ' A. Instruction Program: Submit 3 copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. ' B. Demonstration and Training Videotapes: Submit 3 copies within 7 days of end of each training module. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE '• A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. ' B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory -authorized service representative, experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at location to be determined by Engineer. Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training. D. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART2=PRODUCTS 2.01 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1700 -Training 01700-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 01700 - TRAINING (continued) I 1. PLC and all instrumentation 2. Odor Control Chemical Feed System 3. Carbon Adsorber 4. Pump Discharge Check Control Valve System 5. Variable -Frequency Drives B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include system and equipment descriptions, operating standards, regulatory requirements, equipment function, operating characteristics, limiting conditions, and performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review emergency, operations, and maintenance manuals; Project Record Documents; identification systems; warranties and bonds; and maintenance service agreements. 3. Emergencies: Include instructions on stopping; shutdown instructions; operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits; instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 4. Operations: Include startup, break-in, control, and safety procedures; stopping and normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; operating procedures for emergencies and equipment failure; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Adjustments: Include alignments and checking, noise, vibration, economy, and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include diagnostic instructions and test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include inspection procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, procedures for preventive and routine maintenance, and instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include diagnosis, repair, and disassembly instructions; instructions for identifying parts; and review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's' personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 1 1700 -Training 01700-2 RJNProjectNo. No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 01700 - TRAINING (continued) C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner through the Engineer with at least 14 days advance notice. D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance -based test. 3.02 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEOTAPES • A. General: Engage a qualified commercial photographer to record demonstration and training videotapes. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. 1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline. B. Videotape Format: Provide high -quality VHS color videotape in full-size cassettes. C. Narration: Describe scenes on videotape by audio narration during and/or after videotape is recorded. Include description of items being viewed. Describe vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. END OF SECTION 01700 1700 -Training 01700-3 RJNProjectNo. No. 11-1875-00 P L P L 7 Hi Cl Li L L I I Fl I I II I I II L SECTION 01750 - MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: This section includes requirements of manufacturers for services to be performed at the project site in regards to erection, start-up, and testing of equipment. 1.02 SERVICES REQUIRED: A. Services with Equipment and Materials Furnished Under this Contract: 1. Furnish the services of qualified field personnel from the Suppliers or manufacturers of Equipment furnished and installed under this Contract, as required to perform all manufacturer's Field Services called for in the Specifications. Field personnel shall be certified by the Supplier or manufacturer of the specific product or system as having the necessary knowledge and experience to perform the required functions. 2. Where such service is specified, Contractor shall not perform any Work related to the installation or operation of Equipment furnished and installed under this Contract without direct observation and guidance of the Supplier's or manufacturer's field personnel unless Engineer concurs otherwise. 3. Contractor shall arrange for the Supplier's or manufacturer's field personnel to perform the following: a. Observe the erection, installation, start-up, and testing of Equipment. b. Instruct and guide Contractor in proper procedures. c. Supervise the initial start-up, operational check, and any required adjustments of Equipment. d. Instruct Owner's designated personnel in proper operation and maintenance of all Equipment. e. Furnish a written report to Engineer covering all Work done at least once each week and when Work on each item of Equipment or system is completed. 4. Advise Engineer of arrival at the Site of all Supplier's and manufacturer's field personnel. PART2- PRODUCTS Specified in applicable Sections. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 OPERATION AND TESTING: A. Placing Equipment in Operation: 1. Place all Equipment installed under this Contract (and those furnished by Owner or others under separate contract) into successful operation according to instructions of the Supplier, manufacturer, or field representative, including making all required adjustments, tests; operation checks, and the following: a. Cleaning, sounding, blowing -out, and flushing of lubricating oil and water systems, and other pipelines. b. Lubrication: all rotating and moving parts shall be properly lubricated per the manufacture's recommendations. , 01750 -Manufacturer's Field Services 01750- 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 7 H L SECTION 01750 - MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES (continued) c. Tests of lubrication system safety interlocks and system performance. d. Final alignment checks and measurements made under observation of Engineer and Owner. Alignment checks shall include opening connections, if required, to ensure there are no abnormal stresses on Equipment from pipes, ducts, or other attachments. Alignment shall be within tolerances specified by the manufacturer, and measurements shall be recorded and furnished to Engineer. e. Motor rotation checks before connecting couplings. f. Inspection of sleeve bearings for adequate contact. g. Checking of anchor -bolt tensions, grout, and shims. Tighten anchor bolts with calibrated torque wrenches using care not to over stress bolts. 2. After "run-in" and acceptance of alignment, affix major Equipment in place using standard tapered dowels with jack -out nuts at head end to facilitate removal. 3. Record all above operations on forms furnished by Engineer. 4. Furnish all necessary attendants and personnel as part of the Work to accomplish the above operations until such time as individual items, systems, Equipment, or sections of the plant are acceptable for operation by Owner. 5. Provide: attendants on a continuous' basis as required to complete events such as pump start-up at PLC commissioning without interruption once they have been started. 6. Contractor shall provide fuel, electricity, water, and lubricants for placing Equipment in operation. Owner's operating personnel will assist. B. Performance Tests: 1. Equipment Furnished Under this Contract: a. Owner will conduct acceptance tests after installation to determine if the Equipment installed as part of the Work performs in accordance with Contract Documents and as guaranteed. Final acceptance of Equipment will be based on acceptable results of such tests. b. No tests will be conducted on Equipment for which Supplier's or manufacturer's Field Service is specified unless Supplier's or manufacturer's field representative is present and declares in writing that the Equipment is ready for such test. c. Contractor will be notified by Owner so that Contractor can have a representative or manufacturer's representative present during any tests of Equipment for which Supplier's or manufacturer's Field Service is not specified. d. The tests will be made as set forth in the Contract Documents unless the interested parties mutually agree upon some other manner of testing. END OF SECTION 01750 I I I 01750 -Manufacturer's Field Services 01750-2 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 01780 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Contract closeout including, but not limited to, the following: 1. . Inspection procedures. 2.: Project record document submittal. 3. Instruction book and operating manual submittal. 4. Submittal of warranties. 5. Final cleaning. B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections of the Specifications.' •C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Prerequisites to Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance: GENERAL CONDITIONS. 2. Submittals: SECTION 01330. 3. Manufacturer's Field Service: SECTION 01750. 4. Warranties: SECTION 01785. 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. Provide documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Price. a. If 100% completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete Work, and reasons the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner and Engineer of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship Bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Submit record drawings, instruction books and operating manuals, final project photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete start-up testing of systems and instruction of Owner's operation and maintenance personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the Site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements: 9. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes. B. Inspection Procedures: Inspection procedures for Substantial Completion shall be as stated in GENERAL CONDITIONS 00700 Paragraphs 14.05A through 14.05F 01780 -Contract Closeout 01780-1 RJNProjectNo. No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 01780 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (continued) 1.03 1.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE: A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. Provide insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required. 2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Price. 3. Submit a certified copy of Substantial Completion list of items to be completed or corrected, including items added after the inspection for Substantial Completion, endorsed and dated by, Engineer. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by Engineer. 4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the Date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 5. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 6. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 7. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement. RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS: A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for Engineer's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white -prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 2. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. Mark each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. 3. Mark new information that is important to Owner but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. 4. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. 5. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable -paper cover sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set. 6. Upon completion of the Work, submit record drawings to Engineer for Owner's records. 7. Include the following: a. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. U Li I I I U I I I El I U 01780 -Contract Closeout 01780-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 01780 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (continued) ' b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. c. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. Id. Where Submittals are used for mark-up, record a cross-reference at corresponding location on Drawings. e. Field changes of dimension and detail. f. Changes made by Change Order or other Modifications. g. Details not on original Contract Drawings. C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Contract Documents ' including Addenda. Include with the Contract Documents one copy of other written construction documents, such as Change Orders and Modifications issued in printed form during construction. '1. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work • performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. 2. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and ' information on concealed construction that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. 3. Note related record drawing information and product data. ' 4. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to Engineer for Owner's records... 5. Include the following: ' a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of Equipment actually installed, particularly optional and substitute items. ' b. Changes made by Addendum, Change Order, or other Modifications. c. Related Submittals. D. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each product data Submittal. Note ' related Change Orders and markup of record drawings and specifications. 1. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in ' products delivered to the Site and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. 2. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. 3. Upon completion of markup, submit complete set of record product data to Engineer for Owner's records. ' E. Record Samples Submitted: Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, Contractor shall meet with Engineer and Owner's personnel at the Project Site to determine which Samples are to be transmitted to Owner for record purposes. ' Comply with Owner's instructions regarding packaging, identification, and delivery to Owner. F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for ' requirements of miscellaneous record keeping and Submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial 01780 -Contract Closeout 01780-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I SECTION 01780 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (continued) ' Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly and bind or file, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to Engineer for Owner's records. G. Instruction Books and Operating Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size as specified in SECTION 01330. H. Warranties and Bonds: Specified in GENERAL CONDITIONS, SECTION 01330, and SECTION 01785. ' 1.05 SPARE PARTS: A. Products Required: 1. Provide to Owner the quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance materials specified in individual Sections, in addition to that required for completion of Work. 2. Products shall be identical to those installed in the Work. Include quantities required from Supplier or manufacturer of original purchase to avoid variations in manufacture. B. Storage, Maintenance: 1. Coordinate with Owner. Deliver and unload spare products to Owner at Project Site and obtain receipt prior to final payment. 2. For portions of the Work accepted and occupied by Owner prior to Substantial Completion, deliver the applicable spare products to Owner at time of acceptance. Obtain receipt. 3. Maintain spare products in original containers with labels intact and legible, until delivery to Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' NOT USED PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES: A. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of Equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with Owner's personnel at Project Site to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives if installers are not experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following items: 1. Instruction books and operating manuals. 2. Record documents. 3. Spare parts and materials. 4. Tools. 5. Lubricants. 6. Fuels. 7. Identification systems. 8. Control sequences. 9. Hazards, hazardous chemicals data sheets. 10. Cleaning. ' 01780 -Contract Closeout 01780-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 01780 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (continued) 3.02 I I 01780 -Contract Closeout 01780-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I. 11. Warranties and bonds. 12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. B. As part of instruction for operating Equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: 1. Start-up. 2. Shutdown. 3. Emergency operations. 4. Noise and vibration adjustments. 5. Safety procedures. 6. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 7. Effective energy utilization. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Specified in SECTION 01750. FINAL CLEANING: A. General: The GENERAL CONDITIONS require general cleaning during construction. Regular Site cleaning is included in SECTION 01530. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion. a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dust -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Clean concrete floors to a "broom clean" condition. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical Equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. e. Remove debris and surface dirt from limited -access spaces including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, and similar spaces. f. Clean the Site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even -textured surface. g. Clean and polish plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those resulting from water exposure. h. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency. Remove temporary structures, tools, equipment, supplies, and surplus materials. I SECTION 01780 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (continued) I 3. Remove temporary protection devices and facilities which were installed to ' protect previously completed Work. 4. Special Cleaning: Cleaning for specific units of Work is specified in applicable Sections of Specifications. ' C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. D. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the Site and dispose of lawfully. 1. Extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work become Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by Owner. E. Repairs: 1. Repair damaged protective coated surfaces. 2. Repair roads, walks, fences, and other items damaged or deteriorated because of construction operations. 3. Restore all ground areas affected by construction operations. END OF SECTION 01780 ' I I I I I 01780 -Contract Closeout 01780-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 r SECTION 01785 - WARRANTIES PART1- GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers' standard warranties on products and special warranties. ' 1. Refer to the GENERAL CONDITIONS for terms of the Contractor's period for correction of the Work. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this •' Section: 1. Procedures for submitting warranties: SECTION 01330. 2. Contract closeout procedures: SECTION 01780. ' 3. Specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted: DIVISIONS 2 through 16. 4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services ' to Owner: Specified throughout the Contract Documents. C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates ' the products. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Suppliers, manufacturers, and Subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with Contractor. ID. Separate Prime Contracts: Each prime contractor is responsible for warranties related to its own contract. 1.02 WARRANTY REOUIREMENTS: 1 A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of ' such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or I. rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. Li I L D. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit•the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the Law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 01785 -Warranties 01785- 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 J I SECTION 01785 - WARRANTIES (continued) 1.03 PART 2- Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. E, Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or part of the Work, Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit written warranties to Engineer prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the Date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of Engineer. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by Owner, by separate agreement with Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to Engineer within 15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. B. When the Contract Documents require Contractor, or Contractor and a Subcontractor, Supplier, or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by required parties. Submit a draft to Owner, through Engineer, for approval prior to final execution. C. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion, compile 2 copies of each required warranty properly executed by Contractor, or by Contractor and a Subcontractor, Supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Contract Documents. D. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial -quality, durable 3 -ring, vinyl - covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8 -1/2 -by -1l -inch (I15 -by -280 -mm) paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone number of the installer. 2. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," and as required by SECTION 01330. 3. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. NOT USED I I I I I I L I I 1J U 11 I I Li I 01785 -Warranties 01785-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02100 - SITE PREPARATION PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY:. A. This Section includes the following: 1. Maintenance of Traffic 2. Utilities 3. Existing Improvements 4. Protection of Existing Trees 5. Clearing and Grubbing 6. Disposal of Waste Materials 7. Topsoil Stripping 8. Fence and Gate Removal and Replacement 1.02 RELATED SECTION: A. Section 02161 — Excavation Safety B. Section 02200 — Excavation, Embankment, Backfill and Grading C. 29 CFR, 1926 Subpart P, OSHA Standards ' 1.03 GENERAL: A. The Contractor shall clear a construction right-of-way as narrow as possible and avoid unnecessary removal or damage to the trees, shrubs, and other landscaping. B. The Contractor shall not remove or disturb any vegetation except that required for the execution of the work. The Contractor shall limit all his operations to the areas of the permanent and temporary easements; therefore, any/all damage to vegetation done by the Contractor outside these areas shall be repaired at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the Owner and the affected property owner. C. Where the presence of livestock, pets or other conditions exist that require continuous confinement, the Contractor shall construct temporary fencing adequate to contain such livestock, etc. D. The area of construction shall be kept clean and well maintained with special emphasis given to the area of lawns and maintained grass areas. Construction debris, paper, trash, and other items shall be picked up at the end of each day's construction work. Restoration work shall be done each day as the applicable sewer main work is completed to the extent that driveways, access roads, etc. are usable. Whether temporary or permanent, the daily restoration work shall be approved by the Owner. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Authority for performing removal and alteration work on property adjoining permanent or temporary construction easements, or properties to which the Owner has no legal rights, will be obtained by Contractor prior to beginning work. B. Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated or directed. 02100 -Site Preparation 02100-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02100 - SITE PREPARATION (continued) 1.05 EXISTING SERVICES: A. Indicated locations are approximate; determine exact locations before beginning work. B. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping, and plugging utility services. Notify affected utility companies in advance and obtain approval before staring this Work. C. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines and capping locations on Project Record Documents. PART2- PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: A. Before beginning clearing and grubbing operations, call the Arkansas One -Call ' system at 1-800-482-8998. Allow at least two working days advance notification. 3.02 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC: A. Conform to the requirements in Section 01530, Part 3. 3.03 UTILITIES: A. The location and/or elevation of existing utilities as shown on the Drawings is based on documents provided by others. The information is not to be relied on as being exact or complete. Call the Arkansas One -Call system at 1-800-482-8998 and/or the utility Owner (if not a member of the One -Call service), at least two working days before any excavation to request exact field location of utilities. B. Protect utilities encountered during excavation. C. All existing water or sewer services are to remain active until the new lines are put into service. If an existing service line interferes with the installation of a new water or sewer line such that the planned grade and alignment of the new line cannot be met, as determined by the Owner, 'the Contractor shall provide a temporary service line for the continuation of service. At the beginning of this project, in advance of any construction, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner and the Engineer to establish routes of temporary service lines. Connection of the temporary service lines to existing lines shall also be coordinated such that shutdown of the existing service will be minimal. D. All temporary service lines, fittings, and appurtenances shall be constructed of materials approved by the Owner and shall be of sufficient length and location to permit installation of the new service line. Temporary lines may be routed through existing driveway culverts if approved by the Owner. All temporary service lines shall be maintained in safe and operational condition until the new service line enters service. All other aspects of materials and construction of temporary service lines, 02100 -Site Preparation 02100 - 2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02100 - SITE PREPARATION (continued) including cutting, plugging, and blocking the existing lines, shall conform to the plans and specifications pertaining to the permanent service lines for this project. E. After the new service line enters service, all piping materials and valves, fittings, etc. used for temporary service lines shall be removed and shall remain the property of the Contractor. All open trenches shall be properly backfilled and compacted as approved by the Engineer. F. If utilities are damaged or utility service is interrupted by work under this section, the utility owner has the first right to repair. If public health or safety is at risk, the Contractor shall take appropriate, prudent action to repair damage and service interruption. Costs of utility protection and repair shall be borne by the Contractor. G. If existing utilities are found to interfere with the permanent facility being constructed, notify the Engineer for instructions. H. Do not proceed with permanent relocation of utilities without written instructions from the Engineer. 3.04 EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS: A. Conform to the requirements in Section 01530, Part 3 3.05 PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREES: A. Trees, shrubs, or other items located in or adjacent to maintained yards shall not be removed or damaged by the Contractor without specific authorization from the Owner for each item. The Contractor shall remove from the area and properly dispose of all trees, stumps, limbs, piles of excess excavation, or any other items removed so as to allow construction. B. Protect trees designated to remain. I. Erect suitable barrier around trees, as approved by Engineer. 2. Do not allow heavy pedestrian or any vehicular traffic over root zone of trees to be saved. 3. Do not place construction materials or stockpiles within the tree drip line. C. Water trees and other vegetation indicated to remain, or as directed by Engineer, as required to maintain their health during course of construction options. D. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch in diameter that are cut during construction operations. Coat cut faces with emulsified asphalt or other acceptable coating formulated to use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible. E. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Employ a licensed arborist to repair damage to trees and shrubs. F. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full -growth status, as determined by City's Landscape Administrator. 02100 -Site Preparation 02100-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 _..._�-�.-�-.- SECTION 02100 - SITE PREPARATION (continued) 3.06 CLEARING AND GRUBBING: A. After tree protection barricades are installed, remove all trees, shrubs, grass, or other ' vegetation, improvements, and obstructions that interfere with new construction unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. B. Completely remove stump, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface. C. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. D. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain. E. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. F. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth, and thoroughly compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. G. Removal of improvements: Remove existing above -grade and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. H. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on mechanical or electrical drawings and is included under work of related Division 15 and 16 Sections. Removing abandoned underground piping or conduits interfering with construction are included under this Section. 3.07 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS: A. Burning of material shall only be done when allowed by local authorities. B. When allowed, the burning shall be done in accordance with all applicable local, state, and federal regulations. C. When perishable material is burned, it shall be under the constant care of a competent watcher. D. Burning shall be accomplished at such times and in such manner that the surrounding vegetation, adjacent property, or anything designated to remain on the project site will not be jeopardized. E. Contractor shall cease all burning operations when Federal, State, or local government agencies declare that the meteorological conditions are unsuitable for , burning. Contractor may resume burning operations when conditions are again suitable for burning. F. Unless allowed otherwise by regulatory authorities, materials to be burned shall be ' placed in an incineration pit and an acceptable forced air device is used that will minimize the emission of smoke, fly ash, or other pollutants. This device shall be constructed so that the forced air is directed over the fire by the use of plenums or ducts. Open fans or mulch blowers are not acceptable and will not be allowed for burning operations. G. Contractor shall comply with all Federal, State, County and local laws, regulations, or ordinances applicable to the disposal of clearing and grubbing material. Under no 02100 -Site Preparation 02100-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02100 - SITE PREPARATION (continued) circumstances will the airborne emission of live sparks or burning debris be allowed from the burning operations. H. Materials and debris that cannot be burned shall be removed from the construction limits and disposed of as directed by Engineer. Any extra costs incurred by Contractor in obtaining disposal sites, hauling, and final cleanup will be at Contractor's expense. 3.08 3.09 TOPSOIL STRIPPING: A. Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in depth of not less than 4 inches. B. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. C. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. D. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines to prevent damage to root system. E. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to prevent wind erosion. F. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil as specified for disposal of waste material. FENCE AND GATE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT: A. Remove all wood, wire, block, or other type of fencing or gates that will interfere with new construction unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of fencing removed from the site. B. Contractor shall be responsible for replacing all fencing and gates removed during construction activities to same or better condition unless so directed otherwise by Engineer. 02100 -Site Preparation END OF SECTION 02100 02100 - 5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02161 - EXCAVATION SAFETY PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. This section covers the trench and excavation safety system required for constructing improvements that necessitate open excavations on the project. All work under this item shall be in accordance with the current edition of the OSHA Standard for Excavation and Trench Safety Systems, 29 CFR 1926 Subpart P. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 02200 — Excavation, Embankment, Backfill and Grading B. Section 02221 — Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS: A. 29 CFR 1926 Subpart P — Occupational Safety and Health Standards — Excavations B. 29 CFR 1926 Subpart U — Occupational Safety and Health Standards — Blasting and Use of Explosives. 1.04 NOTIFICATION REQUIRED: A. The Contractor, before beginning any excavation, shall notify the State Department of Labor (Safety Division) that work is commencing on a project which has excavations five feet. deep or deeper. The Contractor shall provide written documentation of the notification to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall notify all utility companies and owners in accordance with the OSHA requirements given in 29 CFR 1926.651(b)(2) for the purpose of locating utilities and underground installations. 1.05 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES: A. Where the trench or excavation endangers the stability of a building, wall, street, highway, utilities, or other installation the Contractor shall provide support systems such as shoring, bracing, or underpinning to ensure the stability of such structure or utility. I I I I B. The Contractor may elect to remove and replace or relocate such structures or utilities with the written approval of the Utility and the Owner. PART 2- MATERIALS NOT USED PART3- EXECUTION NOT USED 02161 -Excavation Safety END OF SECTION 02161 02161 - UN Project No. 11-1875-00 II II SECTION 02200 - EXCAVATION, EMBANKMENT, BACKFILL AND GRADING II I1 II I I I I I PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Excavation, embankment, backfilling, and grading required for structures, includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: I. Excavation for footings, foundations, manholes, and other structures. 2. Structure backfill. 3. Subgrade preparation for structures, footings, etc. 4. Controlled fill. 5. Embankments and site grading. 1.02 GENERAL: A. Except for undercut, all excavation is unclassified and includes excavation of all materials encountered and shall be subsidiary to other items. B. Ovetexcavation, whether by Contractor's negligence or at direction of the Engineer, shall be repaired to required lines and grades. C. Provide and install trench bracing and shoring that conforms to the requirements of 29CFR Part 1926 Subpart P of OSHA Standards. Bracing shall be so arranged as not to place any strain on portions of completed work until the construction has proceeded far enough to provide ample strength. 1.03 UTILITIES: IA. Contractor shall call "ARKANSAS ONE CALL" two working days before starting excavation. The ONE CALL phone number is 1-800-482-8998. B. The location and/or elevation of existing utilities as shown on the site plans is based on records of the various utility companies and, where possible, measurements taken in the field. The information is not to be relied upon as being exact or complete. The Contractor must call each utility owner at least ' two working days before any excavation to request exact field location of utilities. C. Protect utilities encountered during excavation. D. Do not interrupt service in utilities encountered during excavation without approval of the utility Owner. ' E. If utilities are damaged or utility service is interrupted by work under this section, the utility owner has the first right to repair. If public health or safety is at risk, Contractor shall take appropriate prudent action, to repair damage and service interruption. Costs of utility protection and repair shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. F. If existing utilities are found to interfere with the permanent facility being constructed, notify the Engineer for instructions. Do not proceed with permanent relocation of utilities without written instructions from the Engineer. 1 02200 -Excavation, Embankment, Backfill, and Grading 02200 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I SECTION 02200 - EXCAVATION, EMBANKMENT, BACKFILL, AND GRADING ' (continued) 1.04 RELATED WORK: A. Section 02100 — Site Preparation B. Section 02161 — Excavation Safety C. Section 02221 — Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting D. Section 02223 — Explosives and Blasting E. Section 02240 — Dewatering ' F. Section 02261 — Site Restoration 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Testing Laboratory 1. Soil compaction testing and other required testing will be performed ' by a testing laboratory selected by the Owner. See Section 00700 — General Conditions, Paragraph 13.03. 2. Frequency of testing and location of tests shall be determined by the Owner's representative and testing laboratory personnel to assure compliance with specification requirements. B. Standards (Tests shall comply with the latest revisions) 1. ASTM Cl 36, Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates. 2. ASTM D2922, Density of Soil in Place and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods. 3. ASTM D1557, Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil - Aggregate Mixtures. 4. ASTM D2487, Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. C. Compliance: Contractor shall correct all deficiencies disclosed by test results promptly. 1.06 PROTECTION OF WORK: A. Protect materials and preserve specification requirements in previously ' accepted materials. B. Remove and replace all materials that do not meet specification requirements. C. Control dust or mud that may interfere with operations or become a nuisance to the surrounding area. 1.07 LINES AND GRADES: A. Excavations and embankments shall be constructed to the lines and grades ' indicated unless otherwise directed. B. Final grades shall be within 1/2 inch of indicated elevations. Horizontal alignments shall be within 3 inches of theoretical location but, in no case, shall be less than design location and dimension. 02200 -Excavation, Embankment, Backfill, and Grading 02200 - 2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02200 - EXCAVATION, EMBANKMENT, BACKFILL, AND GRADING ' (continued) C. Finished surfaces shall be bladed and aligned to drain and to present a neat and ' uniform appearance. 1.08 LIMITS OF EXCAVATION: IA. Excavation shall extend a sufficient distance from any manhole walls or other structures to allow for placing and removing forms, installation of piping, and for inspection. Excavation shall not exceed the width of any permanent and ' temporary easements provided to the Contractor. PART 2- MATERIALS ' 2.01. GENERAL: A. Fill materials shall be obtained from excavated materials or approved borrow sources. B. Fill material shall be free of trash, debris, cinders, organic matter, or other deleterious materials. C. All fill materials shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. 2.02 FILL MATERIALS: A. Controlled structural fill material I. Soil fill material shall be clay soils of medium to low plasticity (CL), non frost susceptible, with a liquid limit less than 45 percent, a plasticity index less than 20 and containing less then 10 percent shale, or rock particles larger than 6 inches in any dimension. 2. Crushed stone shall be AHTD Class 1, 2, or 7. B. Non-structural fill material 1. Non-structural fill material may be clay soils of medium to low plasticity (CL or ML), non -frost susceptible soils excavated from site or borrow area. 2.03 OTHER MATERIALS: A. Materials not specifically described above, but required for construction, or proposed substitutions for materials described above, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to incorporation into the work. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: A. Except for undercutting directed by the Engineer, all excavation is unclassified and includes excavation of all materials encountered and shall be subsidiary to other items. Overexcavation, whether caused by Contractor's negligence or as directed by Engineer, shall be repaired to required lines and grades. B. Excavated materials not suitable for backfill or embankment shall not be incorporated into the project but shall be disposed of by the Contractor: 1 02200 -Excavation, Embankment, Backfill, and Grading 02200 - 3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02200 - EXCAVATION, EMBANKMENT, BACKFILL, AND GRADING 1 (continued) C. In general, the sheeting and bracing shall be removed as the excavation is backfilled, and in such a manner as to avoid the caving in of the bank or disturbance of adjacent areas or structures. The voids left by the withdrawal of sheeting shall be backfilled the same as trench excavations. D. Stockpile satisfactory materials for reuse. Stockpiles shall not extend to within ' the drip line of trees and shall be graded to allow for proper drainage. Surplus materials shall be disposed of at the Contractor's expense or as approved by Engineer. E. Prior to backfilling or construction of embankment, manipulate materials, by aeration or wetting, to attain ± 3% of the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D1557. F. Place acceptable materials in layers not more than 12 inches loose depth for materials compacted by heavy equipment and not more than 8 inches loose depth for materials compacted by hand equipment. G. Grade to within 1/2 inch above or below required subgrade and within a tolerance of 1/2 inch to 10 feet. H. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Recompact and regrade settled, disturbed and damaged areas as necessary to restore quality, appearance, and condition of work. I. Control erosion and wind blown dust. Dispose of waste and unsuitable materials off site in a legal manner. J. Care shall be taken during excavation and construction of the structures to minimize disturbance to the bearing soils. The base of all excavations shall be free of water and loose soil prior to placing concrete. Concrete shall be placed as soon as possible after excavation. 3.02 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES: A. Perform all excavation to the dimensions and elevations indicated. B. Do not excavate below elevations or depth indicated unless directed by the Engineer. Where excavations are made below indicated depths or elevations without authorization, the excavations shall be restored to the proper grade with lean concrete at Contractor's expense. C. Excavations shall extend a sufficient distance from walls and footings to provide room for forms, installation of services, and inspection. Footings or walls shall not be poured directly against excavated surfaces. D. All existing structures, foundations, or other subsurface structures, along with any poorly compacted fill, within the structure construction limits shall be removed to a minimum distance of 5 -feet outside the structure limits. ' E. Approved overexcavation, as directed by the Engineer, shall extend to the underlying natural lean clay soils or as directed by Engineer. Any low density, soft or unsuitable material shall be removed. F. When rock is encountered, excavate to an elevation 9 inches below the pipe. 02200 -Excavation, Embankment, Backfill, and Grading 02200-4 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02200 - EXCAVATION, EMBANKMENT, BACKFILL, AND GRADING (continued) G. Equipment and excavated materials are to be placed a sufficient distance away ' from the excavation limits to as not to cause soil disturbance. Areas around excavation shall be graded to keep surface water from entering the excavation. H. Backfilling of structures shall not proceed until the work is inspected and ' accepted by the Engineer. • '3.03 SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND STABILIZATION: IA. Subgrades for concrete structures, floor slabs, footings, and pavements, shall be firm, dense, and properly compacted in accordance with applicable specification requirements. All subgrades shall be sufficiently stable to remain ' firm and intact under construction traffic. B. Excessively dry subgrades shall be scarified and moistened to within optimum limits and recompacted prior to placement of footings, slabs, or pavements. ' C. Subgrade soils that are excessively wet and mucky are to be removed. Free draining crushed stone or gravel shall be used to bring the subgrade to grade. ' This material shall be compacted as it is placed. D. Prior to placement of fill material, the subgrade shall be scarified to a depth of 8 inches and recompacted to at least 95 percent of maximum density as ' determined by ASTM D1557. Areas which cannot be recompacted to this degree shall be undercut and replaced with stable material. Care shall be taken to maintain the prepared condition of the subgrades prior to construction. If ' the subgrades become saturated, frozen, or disturbed, they shall be reworked prior to construction. 3.04 BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES: ' A. Backfill structures only after concrete has attained design strength based on laboratory results from concrete cylinder breaks. ' B. Remove all forms, trash, debris, and other unsuitable materials before backfilling. ' C. Soil backfill shall be placed in loose layers not exceeding 8 inches in depth and compacted by mechanical tampers or rollers. D. Pervious backfill shall be placed in level layers with a loose depth not ' exceeding 8 inches. Compact with vibratory rollers or vibrating plate compacting equipment adequate to reach specified density with a reasonable number of passes. Flooding or jetting to compact pervious backfill is ' prohibited. Protect structures from damage due to excessive vibration. E. Backfilling and construction of fills and embankments during freezing weather shall not be permitted except by permission of the Engineer. No backfill, fill, ' or embankment materials shall be installed on frozen surfaces nor shall frozen materials, snow or ice be placed in any backfill, fill or embankments. 1 ' 02200 -Excavation, Embankment, Backfill, and Grading 02200 - 5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02200 - EXCAVATION, EMBANKMENT, BACKFILL, AND GRADING (continued) 3.05 EMBANKMENTS AND AREA FILL: A. All areas to receive compacted fill shall be stripped of topsoil, organic or excessively wet soil, or other unsuitable soils prior to placing fill. Stockpile topsoil and other usable materials for reuse in final site grading. B. Place approved fill materials in uniform layers not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness. Compact with suitable equipment to a minimum of 90 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557. C. After final finish rolling and blading, the surface shall be smooth and even and conform to the indicated lines and grades within specified tolerances. 3.06 FILL UNDER STRUCTURES, FOOTINGS. AND SLABS: A. All areas to receive compacted fill shall be stripped of topsoil, organic or excessively wet soil, or other unsuitable soils prior to placing fill. Stockpile topsoil and other usable materials for reuse in final site grading. B. Soil material shall be placed in layers not exceeding 8 inches in depth and compacted by mechanical tampers or rollers to a minimum of 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557. C. Pervious material shall be placed in level layers with a loose depth not exceeding 6 inches. Compact with vibratory rollers or vibrating plate compacting equipment adequate to reach specified density. Flooding or jetting to compact pervious fill is prohibited. Protect structures from damage due to excessive vibration. 3.07 BORROW MATERIAL: A. If borrow material is required, the Contractor shall supply this material from an off -site borrow area. Testing of, access to, development of, and restoration of any borrow areas shall be at the Contractor's expense. Prior to incorporation into the project, the borrow materials shall be approved by the Engineer. B. Soils showing high swell potentials will not be approved. 3.08 DRAINAGE: A. Control grading in vicinity of excavations to prevent surface drainage into the excavation. B. Provide for the immediate removal of surface drained or ground water from excavations by pumping from sumps or other appropriate means. C. Excavations shall be kept dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until construction is complete, to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other causes will result. 3.09 BLASTING: A. Blasting is permitted as approved by Owner and Engineer and as specified in Section 02223 — Explosives and Blasting. 02200 -Excavation, Embankment, Backfill, and Grading 02200-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02200 - EXCAVATION, EMBANKMENT, BACKFILL, AND GRADING (continued) 3.10 DISPOSAL: A. Unsuitable or extra excavated material shall be disposed of off -site of the work by and at the expense of the Contractor. Disposal shall be the sole responsibility and at the sole expense of the Contractor. B. Protection of subgrade: The Contractor shall protect the subgrade by not allowing delivery vehicles of excess weight and by varying the path of delivery vehicles so as not to cause excessive rutting. Heaving or rutting damage to subgrade caused by delivery vehicles during asphalt paving operation shall be immediately repaired and brought back to specified elevation prior to placing asphaltic concrete base. 3.11 CLEANUP: A. Remove all rubbish, trash, debris, stones, concrete waste, crushed rock, sand pockets, and all other undesirable materials from site and further conform to the requirements of Section 02261 — Site Restoration. END OF SECTION 02200 02200 -Excavation, Embankment, Backfill, and Grading 02200 - 7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02221 - TRENCHING. BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. This section includes earthwork required for the construction of utility pipes and appurtenances. Included are excavation, backfilling, and compaction of embedment and backfill of utility pipes and appurtenances. 1.02 GENERAL: A. Provide and install trench bracing and shoring that conforms to the requirements of 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P of the OSHA Standards. Bracing shall be so arranged as not to place any strain on portions of completed work until the construction has proceeded far enough to provide ample strength. B. Except for undercut, all excavation is unclassified and includes excavation of all materials encountered and shall be subsidiary to other items. Overexcavation, whether by Contractor's negligence or at direction of the Engineer, shall be repaired to required lines and grades. C. It is understood that the top of the bedding layer is the same line as the bottom of the backfill layer. D. Backfilling sewer line trenches shall include the refilling and consolidation of the fill in the excavation up to the elevations specified herein. It is essential that the complete backfill be done in such a manner to minimize voids in the backfill. I L I I II I E. Other methods of backfill than those given herein may be used if approved by the Owner and the Contractor can accomplish the required results without damage to the pipe. Trenches shall be dug to the alignment and depth required and shall not advance more than 100 feet ahead of the completed pipe, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. 1.03 UTILITIES: A. Contractor shall call "ARKANSAS ONE CALL" two working days before starting excavation. The ONE CALL phone number is 1-800-482-8998. B. The location and/or elevation of existing utilities as shown on these plans is based on records of the various utility companies and, where possible, measurements taken in the field. The information is not to be relied upon as being exact or complete. The Contractor must call each utility owner at least two working days before any excavation to request exact field location of utilities. C. Protect utilities encountered during excavation. D. Do not interrupt service in utilities encountered during excavation without approval of the utility owner. E. If utilities are damaged or utility service is interrupted by work under this section, the utility owner has the first right to repair. If public health or safety is at risk, Contractor shall take appropriate prudent action to repair damage and service interruption. Costs of utility protection shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. 02221 -Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting 02221 - I RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I P SECTION 02221 - TRENCHING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING (continued) F. If existing utilities are found to interfere with the permanent facility being constructed, notify the Engineer for instructions. Do not proceed with permanent relocation of utilities without written instructions from the Engineer. 1.04 RELATED WORK: A. Section 02161 — Excavation Safety B. Section 02200 — Excavation, Embankment, Backfill and Grading C. Section 02223 — Explosives and Blasting D. Section 02227 — Aggregate Materials E. Section 02229 - Rock Removal F. Section 02261 — Site Restoration G. Section 02730 — Ductile Iron Pipe 1.05 DUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Testing Laboratory 1. Soil compaction testing and other required testing will be performed by a testing laboratory selected by the Owner. See Section 00700 - General Conditions, Paragraph 13.03. 2. Frequency of testing and location of tests shall be determined by the Owner's representative and testing laboratory personnel to assure compliance with specification requirements. B. Standards (Tests shall comply with the latest revisions) 1. ASTM C136, Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates. 2. ASTM D2922, Density of Soil in Place and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods. 3. ASTM D1557, Moisture Density Relocations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures. 4. ASTM D2487, Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. C. Compliance 1. Contractor shall correct all deficiencies disclosed by test results promptly. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Backfill materials shall be obtained from excavated materials or approved borrow sources. B. Backfill material shall be free of trash, debris, cinders, organic matter or other deleterious materials. C. All backfill materials shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. 1 1 E I I I I Li H I 02221 -Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting 02221 -2 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 02221 - TRENCHING. BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING (continued) 2.02 MATERIAL: A. Material excavated from the job site shall be used for backfill to the maximum extent possible. Backfill materials shall be free of rock, man-made debris, and organic material larger than 3 inches, in any dimension, in the first 12 inches above the pipe bedding and 6 inches, in any dimension, for the remaining backfill. B. Materials used for bedding shall be AHTD Class I unless allowed otherwise by the Engineer. C. Materials used for trench bottom stabilization or in lieu of dewatering shall be as allowed by the Engineer but shall have no dimension larger than 6 inches in any dimension. In no case shall this material be placed closer than 6 inches to the bottom of the pipe. PART3- - EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCH EXCAVATION: A. General 1. Notify property residents two working days prior to beginning excavation on property. - 2. Excavated materials not suitable for backfill or embankment shall not be incorporated into the project but shall be disposed of by the Contractor. 3. Excavate with caution so that structures and underground conduits can be protected. 4. Excavate every type of material encountered to the lines and elevations necessary to complete the project. 5. Reroute surface water before excavating and protect excavated trench from entrance of surface water. 6. In general, the sheeting and bracing shall be removed as the trench or excavation is backfilled, and in such a manner as to avoid the caving in of the bank or disturbance of adjacent areas or structures. The voids left by the withdrawal of sheeting shall be backfilled the same as trench excavations. 7. Provide "before and after" color photographs of lawns and gardens to Engineer in accordance with Section 01325. B. Trench Depth 1. Excavate to the elevation necessary to provide the depth of bedding material under the barrel of the pipe, noted on the plans or in these specifications, whichever is greater. 2. All over -excavation up to 2 feet shall be backfilled with bedding material in 6 -inch layers and tamped to a bearing capacity equal to the adjacent undisturbed earth. Over excavation greater than 2 feet will require excavation operation to stop until an engineered backfill is determined. Over excavation shall not proceed until approved by Engineer. Contractor shall bear all expense involved if he fails to obtain prior approval from the Engineer. 02221 -Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting 02221 -3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02221 - TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING (continued) C. Trench Width 1. Excavate to the width shown in detail drawings. Specified width dimensions must be maintained from trench bottom to an elevation 12 inches above barrel of pipe. Over width excavation will require excavation operation to stop until additional earth loads can be compared to strength of pipe. Costs of unauthorized deviation from the specified width will be borne by the Contractor. D. Trench Length I. Excavation shall extend a maximum distance of 100 feet from the pipe jointing operations. Longer distances will be considered when conditions warrant. E. Excavation in Rock I. When rock is encountered, excavate to an elevation 9 inches below the pipe. F. Excavation in Unsuitable Soil I. Where, in the judgment of the Engineer, the planned bottom of trench is found to be unstable, excavation shall stop until engineered subgrade stabilization is determined. G. Excavation in Wet Conditions 1. Where the planned bottom of trench contains water or the trench bottom is soft from excess water, excavation depth shall increase a minimum of 6 inches or as directed by the Engineer. H. Excavation at Unforeseen Structure 1. Preserve unforeseen structures encountered in excavation. 2. Advise Engineer when unforeseen structure interferes with planned work. Engineer will determine if plan will change or if structure will be abandoned. I. Unauthorized Excavation 1. Unauthorized excavation is defined as removal of materials beyond specified elevations or dimensions, because of Contractor's actions or neglect. J. Unsuitable and Excess Excavated Material I. Excavated material not suitable for backfill and excess excavated material shall be disposed of by Contractor in a manner approved by the Engineer and applicable governmental regulations. K. Excavation Dewatering I. Wellpointing or deep wells, where required to keep the excavation dry and the subgrade stable, shall be installed when the excavation extends to within two (2) feet of the water table, except as herein provided, and shall be in continuous operation until backfill is completed to this level. 2. When construction equipment is to be operated in an area that has been excavated, and wellpointing or deep wells are required to keep the excavation dry and the subgrade stable, the wellpointing or deep wells shall be installed when the excavation extends to within five (5) feet of the water table. 3. There shall be sufficient pumping equipment, in good working order, readily available at all times to remove any water that accumulates in excavation to the extent that a stable subgrade is obtained. 02221 -Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting 02221 -4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I SECTION 02221 - TRENCHING. BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING (continued) 1 4. Where the excavation crosses natural drainage channels, the work shall be conducted in such a manner that unnecessary damage or delays in the ' prosecution of work will be prevented. 5. Trench dewatering shall discharge to an approved location in conformance with the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. ' 6. Wellpoint dewatering for the sewer line construction will not be mandatory where a properly stabilized subgrade can be obtained by use of granular bedding. If granular bedding is utilized by the Contractor for stabilization of ' the trench bottom in lieu of wellpointing, such bedding material will not be measured for separate payment but will be considered subsidiary to the pipe installation. 7. Where dewatering might be necessary to properly install the sewer line, such ' as at drainage channel crossings and tunnel or boring locations, the Contractor shall submit his proposal for this dewatering to the Owner for approval. P8. Dewatering operations shall continue until pipe has been backfilled and sufficient cover depth has been reached to prevent flotation of pipe. ' 3.02 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION: A. Backfilling shall closely follow pipe laying and be within 20 feet of the end of the last pipe at the end of the workday. ' B. Backfill where ground surface is not graveled or paved for vehicle or pedestrian use. I. Initial backfill, for the 12 -inch distance above pipe embedment shall be free of rock, organic material, man made debris, or frozen lumps with a dimension greater than three inches measured in any direction. 2. Backfill for the remainder of the trench shall be free of rock or organic ' material with a maximum dimension of 6 inches, measured in any direction, or man made debris of any size. 3. All backfill above pipe embedment shall be placed in 12 -inch layers, loose measurement, and mechanically compacted to not less than 90% of the ' maximum density as measured by Method of Test for the Compaction and Density of Soils, AASHTO T-99. Contractor shall backfill trench settlement until Engineer determines settlement is complete. I. C. Backfill where ground surface is graveled for vehicle use or paved for pedestrian use only. 1. Backfill shall be placed from the top of the pipe bedding to the bottom of gravel or paving improvements as specified. 2. Backfill material shall be AHTD Class 7 and shall be placed in 12 -inch layers, loose measurement, and mechanically compacted to not less than 95% I. of the maximum density as measured by Method of Test for the Compaction and Density of Soils, AASHTO T-99. ' 1. D. Backfill where ground surface is paved for vehicle use. 1. Backfill material shall be placed from the top of the pipe bedding to the bottom of the street repair section as detailed. 2. Backfill material shall be AHTD Class 7 and shall be placed in 12 -inch ' layers, loose measurement, and mechanically compacted to not less than 95% 02221 -Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting 02221 -5 RJN Project No. I 1-1875-00 I SECTION 02221- TRENCHING, BACKFILLING.AND COMPACTING (continued) of the maximum density as measured by Method of Test for the Compaction and Density of Soils, AASHTO T-99. E. Backfill Unstable Trench Bottom 1. Provide and place crushed aggregate, compacted to 95% standard maximum density, to bottom elevation of pipe bedding. F. Backfill Wet Condition Trench Bottom 1. Provide and place crushed aggregate, compacted to 95% standard maximum density, to bottom elevation of pipe bedding. G. Backfill of Unauthorized Excavation 1. The over -excavated space shall be refilled with the material addressed in 2.02.B herein, and in the. manner directed by the Owner, and at the Contractor's expense, so as to ensure the stability of the affected trench. END OF SECTION 02221 ' I H I I I I 02221 -Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting 02221 -6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02223 - EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. This section includes the use of explosives in rock excavation. • .1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 00700 — General Conditions B. Section 00800 — Supplementary Conditions C. Section 02100 — Site Preparation D. Section 02161 — Excavation Safety E. Section 02200 — Excavation, Embankment, Backfill and Grading F. Section 02221 — Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting G. Section 02229 — Rock Removal 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS: A. NFPA 495 — Code for Explosive Materials B. The Contractor shall conduct all blasting operations in conformance with the State and Local city ordinances. 1.04• ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Determine all environmental effects associated with proposed work and safeguard those concerns as regulated by law and all others by reasonable and practiced methods. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS: A. The blasting subcontractor shall employ a qualified blasting specialist, experienced and trained in the types of blasting required for this project. The blasting specialist must have at least 10 years of experience in blasting specifically applicable to this job. The blasting subcontractor shall submit the specialist's resume citing experience, training and other pertinent information of the blasting specialist to the Engineer. Acceptable examples of qualifications will be state or federal certifications and/or licenses, or certifications by organizations recognized by the construction blasting industry. The submittal shall detail the specific projects and extent of responsibility and work on those projects, which the blasting subcontractor believes qualifies the specialist for work under this contract. The acceptability of the blasting specialist shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. B. Certified Blaster Qualifications I. Any person performing blasting activities must have a valid, current blasters certificate issued by the Arkansas Department of Labor. 2. The blaster certification shall be carried by the blaster or shall be on file at the blasting area during the blasting operation. 3. A blaster shall be able to understand and -give written and oral orders. 02223 -Explosives and Blasting 02223- 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02223 - EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING (continued) 4. A blaster shall be capable of carrying out the duties and not be addicted to narcotics, intoxicants, or similar type of drugs. 5. A blaster shall be qualified, by reason of training, knowledge, or experience, in the field of transporting, storing, handling, or use of explosives, and have a working knowledge of State and local laws and regulations which pertain to explosives. 6. Blasters shall be required to furnish satisfactoryevidence of 10 years experience in the construction -blasting field. The blaster shall have training in the safe handling of explosives. 7. The blaster shall be knowledgeable and competent in the use of each type of blasting' method used. C. Seismograph Operator Qualifications I. The blasting subcontractor shall employ a qualified individual with at least ten years of experience in vibration monitoring specifically applicable to this job. The seismograph operator must be able to provide a resume citing experience, training, and education. The acceptability of the seismograph operator shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The seismograph operator shall be on the job site at all times when blasting is occurring and capable of electronic evaluation of the seismic data immediately after each blast. 1.06 REQUIREMENTS: ' A. Before starting any drilling and blasting, the blasting subcontractor shall submit a proposed blasting plan for such operations to the Project Engineer. Proper notifications shall be given to all regulating authorities. A permit from Fire Marshall of the City of Fayetteville shall be obtained. B. The blasting subcontractor shall submit a certificate issued by an insurance company authorized to do business in the United States certifying that the applicant has a public liability insurance policy in force for the blasting operation for each particular project. Such policy shall provide for personal injury and property damage protection with a minimum of (5) five million dollars. Insurance shall cover blasting with XCU coverage on a per occurrence basis. The policy shall be maintained in full force during the life of the project. C. The blasting subcontractor must provide copies of the city permit, individual blaster license and proof of liability insurance to the project engineer. ' PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 EXPLOSIVES: A. Explosives required for blasting shall be of a suitable character, and the quantity kept on the job and the storage of same shall be in accordance with State laws, and County and local ordinances. The magazine or locker shall be so constructed as to be secure from theft and kept locked at all times with the key in possession of Contractor or Foreman. Proper appliances and equipment shall be used for thawing frozen dynamite and this shall not be done within 200 feet of work or any occupied building. ' 02223 -Explosives and Blasting 02223 -2 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I SECTION 02223 - EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING (continued) 2.02 MATERIAL REMOVED BY BLASTING: A. All blasted material shall be less than 24 inches in any dimension. Material shall be blasted free to the lines and grades as indicated in the construction documents. Contractor shall be responsible for hauling and disposal of blasted material. PART 3- EXECUTION 101 GENERAL: A. Exercise the utmost care not to endanger life or property, including new work. Comply with all laws and ordinances regarding the use of explosives. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY AND ALL DAMAGE RESULTING FROM THE USE OF EXPLOSIVES. B. The blasting specialist shall design, implement and monitor the blasting program and be present for each blast. The explosives shall be detonated only by specific order of the blasting specialist, and after his confirmation that all safety controls are in effect. C. The Contractor shall take such precautions as are necessary to prevent cracking or damaging the rock or concrete outside the prescribed limits of excavation. The use of bulk explosives such as ammoniated prills will not be permitted unless positive measures are taken to prevent its mixing with water and the uncontrolled spread of the blasting agent into subsurface cracks, caverns, or cavities. When sufficient natural cover is not available to contain flyrock, or if excessive flyrock occurs outside the blasting area, the contractor shall cover all shots with woven cable or rubber tire blasting mats of adequate size to contain the blasts. 3.02 CLEARING OF MISFIRES: A. In the event of a misfire, all work in the area shall be stopped. The blast area shall then be cleared in accordance with industry standards, and in accordance with the explosive manufacturer's recommendations. The blaster in charge or the blaster designing and detonating the blast shall clear the misfire. Only the individuals necessary for clearing the misfire shall be present until the misfire is cleared. The misfire shall be documented with the blast record including the manner in which the misfire was cleared and any corrective actions. 3.03 STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION: A. All explosives shall be stored in a secure manner in compliance with all laws and ordinances, and all such storage places shall be clearly marked. Where no local laws or ordinances apply, storage shall be provided satisfactory to Engineer and in accordance with the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) regulations as defined in the Federal Register, but not closer than 200 feet from any road, building, or camping area or place of human occupancy. No explosives or caps shall be stored in the common toolbox. B. Observe all local, state, and federal laws in purchasing, handling, and transporting explosives. Transportation, handling, storage, and use of dynamite and other explosives shall be directed and supervised by a person of proven experience and 02223 -Explosives and Blasting 02223 -3 RJN Project No. 11-] 875-00 SECTION 02223 - EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING (continued) ability in blasting operations and who meets the requirements of applicable regulations and is certified for such work. 3.04 STEMMING: ' A. All blast holes shall be stemmed from the top of the explosive charge to the collar of the blast hole. Holes shall be stemmed with angular crushed stone chips having a maximum size of 1/2 inch. Drill cuttings, clay or dirt shall not be used as stemming. 3.05 NOTICE TO UTILITIES: A. Notify all public utility companies having structures in proximity to the site of the work of any intention to use explosives. Such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from damage or injury. Contractor is solely responsible for providing any such notification. 3.06 PRE -BLAST SURVEYS: A. Prior to commencing drilling, the blasting subcontractor shall complete a pre -blast survey, which shall include at a minimum the following: I. Any structure with a concrete slab, poured concrete footings, or block foundation within 500 feet of any blast on the project. 2. The pre -blast survey shall include the condition, type, construction, and condition of the exterior and interior of each structure. Still color photographs shall be used for visual documentation. The use of video cameras will not be permitted. ' 3.07 BLAST VIBRATION AND MONITORING: A. Vibration monitoring and air blast monitoring of all blasts is required of the blasting ' subcontractor. The blasts shall be monitored to ensure that the peak particle velocity measured at any nearest inhabited structure does not exceed 2.0 inches per second (ips). No blasting shall occur without at least one (1) recording seismograph capable of producing a printed record of each blast. B. Blasting shall be conducted to avoid all types of blasting (vibration, air blast, and flyrock) damage to adjacent structures and the exposed final rock surface. Each and every blast will be monitored for air blast overpressure and particle velocity at the monitoring locations. Monitoring locations will include but not be limited to nearby buildings and structures. The blasts shall be monitored to ensure that the peak particle velocity measured at the nearest structure does not exceed 2.0 inches per second. Peak particle velocity and overpressure will be recorded and interpreted by qualified personnel for every blast and a copy of all records for each blast shall become a permanent attachment to the blasting logs 3.08 RECORDS OF BLASTING OPERATIONS: A. A record of each blast, including seismograph reports shall be completed and retained for at least three (3) years. The record shall contain as a minimum the following data: ' 02223 -Explosives and Blasting 02223 - 4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 L I SECTION 02223 - EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING (continued) I. Name of the blasting company or contractor. 2. Exact location of the blast, date, and time of the detonation. ' 3. Name, signature and license number of the blaster in charge. 4. Type of material blasted. 5. Number of holes; burden and spacing. 6. Diameter and depth of holes. 7. Types of explosives used 8. Total amount of explosives used. 9. Maximum amount of explosives per delay period of eight (8) milliseconds or greater. 10. Method of firing and type of Circuit 11. Direction, distance in feet, and identification of nearest dwelling house, I. public building, school, church, commercial or institutional building neither owned nor leased by the person conducting the, blast. 12. Weather conditions including temperature, wind velocity, and direction. ' 13. Type and height or length of stemming. 14. A statement as to whether mats or other protections against flyrock were used. ' 15. Type of delay electric blasting caps used and delay periods used. 16. The person taking the seismograph reading shall accurately indicate exact location of seismograph if used and shall also show the distance of ' seismograph from blast and the distance from the nearest seismograph and the nearest structure. 17. Seismograph reading 18. Maximum number of holes per delay period of eight (8) milliseconds or greater. 19. Sketch of blast pattern including number of holes, burden and spacing distance delay pattern, and if decking is used, a hole profile. ' 3.09 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF PROPERTY AND LANDSCAPE: A. Preserve public and private property, and protect, from disturbance or damage, or reference and reestablish all land monuments and property marks. B. Contractor shall be solely responsible for all damage or injury to property of any ' character: 1. During the prosecution of work, resulting from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the manner or method of executing the work, or I. 2. At any time, due to defective work or materials. Said responsibility will not be released until the project shall have been completed and accepted by the Engineer and the Owner. C. Should it become evident that any item is in conflict with the proposed work, notify ENGINEER so that proper steps can be taken to adjust, remove, or otherwise eliminate the conflict. ID. Do not create a public nuisance while performing the various operations of the work. Excessive noise, between the hours of 10 p.m. and 6 a.m., and airborne dust resulting from blasting operations will be considered by Owner to be a public nuisance. 'Operations resulting in excessive noise will be limited to between the hours of 6 a.m. and 10 p.m. 02223 -Explosives and Blasting 02223-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02223 - EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING (continued) E. When or where any damage or injury is done to public or private property by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the work, or in consequence of the nonexecution thereof, the Contractor shall restore, or bear the ' expense of restoring, such property to a condition similar or equal to that existing before such damage or injury was done, by repairing, rebuilding, or otherwise restoring as may be directed, or shall make good such damage or injury in an acceptable manner. Failure to do so within a reasonable period of time will contribute noncompliance and Owner may cause then entire cost of the restoration to be deducted from moneys due or to become due on the Contract. 3.10 BLASTING OPERATIONS: A. The Contractor shall handle explosives in a safe manner and will be totally responsible for any damages resulting from the use of explosives. The Contractor shall obtain the services of a qualified seismograph operator prior to any blasting to mitigate damage to structures, property, springs, or other natural features due to vibration or shock. The Seismograph operator shall provide and operate seismic monitoring equipment in areas where structures, springs or other features may be affected during the use of any explosives, and shall provide to the Engineer a report describing the vibrations and forces which were exerted in the areas described above during blasting. B. Where traffic must be maintained in the vicinity, take precautions to protect the public during blasting operations. This includes the proper use of signage along roadways in the vicinity of the blasting operations. Comply with Federal, State and local laws and regulations pertaining to the storage and use of explosives. 3.11 ENGINEER'S AUTHORITY TO HALT BLASTING OPERATIONS: A. Engineer shall, at all times, have the authority to prohibit or halt blasting operations if it is apparent that, through the methods being employed, the required slopes are not being obtained, the resulting slopes are in an unstable condition, or the safety and convenience of the public is being jeopardized. END OF SECTION 02223 n I 02223 -Explosives and Blasting 02223 -6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 02227 - AGGREGATE MATERIALS PART I- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: • Aggregate Materials 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 02100 — Site Preparation B. Section 02200 — Excavation, Embankment, Backfill and Grading C. Section 02221 — Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting D. Section 02270 — Environmental Specification E. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) latest edition. ASTM Cl 36 — Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates. ASTM D698 — Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort. ASTM D1557 — Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). ASTM D2922 — Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) latest edition. AASHTO T180 — Moisture -Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 -Kg (10-Ib) Rammer and a 457 -mm (18 -in.) Drop. AASHTO Ml 47 — Materials for Aggregate and Soil -Aggregate Subbase, Base and Surface Courses. 1.04 DUALITY ASSURANCE: Tests and analysis of aggregate material will be performed in accordance with standard ASTM and AASHTO procedures listed herein. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit in air tight containers a 10 pound sample of each aggregate or mixture that is to be incorporated into the project to the testing laboratory designated by the Owner. 02227 -Aggregate Materials 02227- 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02227 - AGGREGATE MATERIALS (continued) B. Submit the name of each material supplier and specific type and source of each material. Any change in source throughout this job requires approval of the Owner I or Engineer. C. Submit materials certificate to on -site independent testing laboratory, which is signed by material producer and Contractor, certifying that materials comply with, or exceed, the requirements herein. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: ' A. All construction and materials shall meet or exceed the requirements of this section and any state highway department specification section referred to or noted on the drawings, which pertain to paving base course design, materials, preparation, and/or execution. All materials shall be as indicated on Drawings and shall comply with applicable state highway specification regarding source, quality, gradation, liquid limit, plasticity index, and mix proportioning. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 STOCKPILING: Stockpile on site in such a manner that there will be no standing water or mixing with other materials. 3.02 BORROW SITES: Upon completion of borrow operations, clean up borrow areas as indicated on the plans and in a neat and reasonable manner to the satisfaction of the property owner or the Engineer. 3.03 TRANSPORTATION: Off -site materials shall be transported to the project using well maintained and operating vehicles. Once on the job site, all transporting vehicles shall stay on designated haul roads and shall at no time endanger any of the improvements by rutting, overloading or pumping the haul load. END OF SECTION 02227 I I I 02227 -Aggregate Materials 02227-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' 11 SECTION 02229 - ROCK REMOVAL PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Removal of rock anticipated or discovered during excavation. B. Use of explosives to aid in removal of rock. C. Disposition of removed rock. 1.02 RELATED SECTION: A. Section 00700 — General Conditions B. Section 00800 — Supplementary Conditions C. Section 02100 — Site Preparation D. Section 02161 — Excavation Safety E. Section 02200 — Excavation, Embankment, Backfill and Grading F. Section 02221 — Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting G. Section 02223 — Explosives and Blasting H. Geotechnical report for boring locations and findings of subsurface materials and conditions I. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS: NFPA 495 — Code For Explosive Materials 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: Determine all environmental effects associated with proposed work and safeguard those concerns as regulated by law and all others by reasonable and practiced methods. 1..05 OUALIFICATIONS: Contractor to remove rock by blasting shall submit documentation of prior experience to the Engineer before commencing with blasting operations. The documentation shall include at least three projects comparable to this project and shall include, but shall not be limited to: A. Project name, location, and description. B. Volume, width, depth, and description of rock removed. C. Description of techniques, measuring devices, and materials used and size of resultant shot -rock. D. Proximity to residential or commercial structures. E. Legal claims made against blasting Contractor and disposition or resolution of claim. F. Name, address, and telephone number of representative of owner of each described project who will verify documentation. I' 02229 -Rock Removal 02229 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 II SECTION 02229 - ROCK REMOVAL (continued) PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: See Section 02223 — Explosives and Blasting. PART 3- 3.01 PREPARATION: A. Verify site conditions and note subsurface conditions affecting work of this section. B. Identify required lines, levels, and elevations that will determine the extent of the proposed removals. 3.02 ROCK EXCAVATION: A. Cut rock to form level bearing at bottom of trench. In utility trenches, excavate to 9" below bottom of pipe. When excavating for a structure or expansion of a structure, remove shattered layers to provide a sound base for footings or foundations. Reuse excavated materials on -site in accordance with section 02200, if applicable. B. Comply with all laws, rules, and regulations of Federal, State and local authorities and insurer, which govern storage, use, manufacture, sale, handling, transportation, licensing, or other disposition of explosives. Take special precautions for proper use of explosives to prevent harm to human life and damage to surface structures, all utility lines, or other subsurface structures. Do not conduct blasting operations until persons in vicinity have had ample notice and have reached positions of safety. C. Contractor shall hold harmless Owner and Engineer from any claim growing out of use of such explosives. Removal of materials of any nature by blasting shall be done in such a manner and such time as to avoid damage to any new or existing structure included in or adjacent to work. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to determine method of operation to ensure desired results and integrity of completed work. D. Perform rock excavation in a manner that will produce material of such size as to permit it being placed in embankments in accordance with Section 02200. Remove rock -to limits as indicated. Remove loose or shattered rock, overhanging ledges and boulders, which might dislodge. E. Use lean concrete or suitable materials to replace rock overblast or over excavation in any building area or in any expansion area to facilitate placement of utilities and future footings. END OF SECTION 02229 02229 -Rock Removal 02229-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Il SECTION 02240 - DEWATERING PARTI- GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY: A. This section includes construction dewatering. ' 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and ' maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control ground- water flow into excavations and permit construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades. ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings for Information: For dewatering system. Show arrangement, ' locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of headers and discharge lines; and means of discharge and disposal of water. 1. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional • engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.04 DUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with water disposal requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. PART2- PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3- 3.01 PREPARATION: A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations. I. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site and surrounding area. 2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal and surface -water controls. B. Before excavating below ground -water level, place system into operation to lower water to specified levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and 02240-Dewatering 02240 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I SECTION 02240 - DEWATERING (continued) structures have been constructed and fill materials have been placed, or until dewatering is no longer required. C. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water -bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1. Do not permit open -sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade softening, and slope instability. D. Reduce hydrostatic head in water -bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1 Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches below surface of excavation. E. Dispose of water removed by dewatering inca manner that avoids endangering public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow -control devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction. F. Provide standby equipment on -site, installed and available for immediate operations, to maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner. 1. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches (900 mm) below overlying construction. G. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations. END OF SECTION 02240 1 I I Li II 02240-Dewatering 02240-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 02261- SITE RESTORATION PART1- GENERAL 1.01 Restore the project site to conditions not less than that existing prior to starting construction unless otherwise required by these specifications. A. Restore public property with strict adherence to the requirements of the public body having jurisdiction therein. if B. No restoration shall occur until testing is complete and reviewed by the Engineer. C. Complete final surface restoration within thirty days of the installation unless otherwise allowed by the Owner. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS: A. Surface restoration including pavement, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutters shall be in accordance with Sections 02751 Concrete Paving, 02771 Integral Curb and 02775 Concrete Sidewalks. ' PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL: A. Topsoil shall be free from large roots, sticks, weeds, brush, or stones larger than one inch in diameter or other litter and waste products. It shall be a loamy mixture having at least 90 percent passing the No. 10 sieve. A sample, free from extraneous materials, shall comply with the following requirements. 1. Contain not less than 1.0 percent organic matter as determined by the test for organic matter in accordance with AASHTO T 194. 2. Contain not less than 12 percent clay as determined in accordance with AASHTO T 83. 3. Sand content shall not exceed 55 percent as determined in accordance with AASHTOT88. 88. 4. The pH of the sample shall not be lower.than 5.0 nor higher than 8.0. The pH shall be determined with an acceptable pH meter, on that portion of the sample passing the No. 10 sieve in accordance with the "Suggested Methods of Tests for Hydrogen Ion Concentration (pH) of Soils" included in the procedures for Testing Soils issued December, 1964, by ASTM. 2.02 FERTILIZER: A. Fertilizer shall be a standard commercial 10-8-6 or 10-6-4 grade, uniform in composition, free flowing and suitable for application with reviewed equipment, delivered to the site in bags or other convenient containers each fully labeled, conforming to applicable State laws. 2:03 SEED: A. Grass seed shall be fresh and made of the following mixture: 02261 -Site Restoration 02261-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02261 - SITE RESTORATION (continued) Seeds Percentage ' Kentucky Bluegrass 50% Perennial Ryegrass 20% ' Creeping Red Fescue 10% Ladino or White Dutch Clover 5% PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 CLEANUP: A. Upon completion of installation and backfill operations, clean and dress up the work area as follows. 1. Remove construction debris and litter from the site. 2. Remove excess excavation material from the site including material which has washed into stream beds, storm water facilities, streets, culverts, etc. 3. Remove tools, equipment and construction materials except for designated storage areas along the pipeline route. Maintain designated storage areas in a neat appearing manner. 4. Restore surface and subsurface drainage and provide drainage wash checks necessary to prevent soils from being washed downstream. 5. Machine grade the area in preparation of final grading, seeding, sodding, pavement replacement, etc. 6. Maintain adequate safety signs, barricades and lights until final restoration of work area is completed. 3.02 FINISH GRADING: A. Finish grade the area to lines and grades which existed prior to the area being disturbed, with special attention directed to proper surface drainage, and the refilling of settled excavations with earth compacted to densities required. The area shall be smoothed by raking or dragging. 3.03 RESTORATION OF PAVEMENT SURFACES: A. General I. Restore (unless otherwise specified or ordered by the Engineer) permanent type pavements, sidewalks, driveways, curbs, gutters, and surface structures removed or disturbed during or as a result of construction operations to a condition which is equal in appearance and quality to the condition that existed before the work began. The surface of all improvements shall match the appearance of the existing surface. 2. Pour concrete only after inspection by the Engineer of the pouring site to verify proper forms and reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be equivalent in quantity and type of materials to reinforcement that existed prior to the work, ' or as indicated in the contract documents. 3. Saw cut existing paved surfaces to provide a straight joint between the existing and new surface. Saw cutting shall be full depth and square or rectangular in shape. 4. Cure and protect all exposed concrete installed under this contract in accordance with Section 625 of the reference standard. 02261 -Site Restoration 02261- 2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 02261 - SITE RESTORATION (continued) 5. Allow concrete to attain a minimum 7 -day strength before allowing traffic or construction equipment on the concrete. B. Concrete Sidewalks 1. Concrete sidewalks shall consist of a minimum of five inches of non - reinforced Portland cement concrete over six inches of compacted granular base material CA6, Grade 8 crushed limestone. 2. Increase sidewalk thickness to six inches when crossing driveways. 3. Place preformed bituminous expansion joints at junctions with existing work and at intervals not exceeding 50 feet. 4. Sawcut existing sidewalks at construction joints. Patching existing sidewalk squares damaged during construction activities shall not be allowed. 5. Tool joints shall be marked off 1/4 -inch deep at spacing equal to the width of the walk. 6. Concrete sidewalks shall be removed and replaced as directed by the Engineer. C. Dust Control 1. The contractor shall provide dust control at the site at all times by means of sweeping or wetting methods. D. Fences and Guardrails I. Fences shall be carefully removed, as necessary, prior to construction. Fences shall be stored in a safe place and replaced after construction is complete. Any fences that are damaged during construction shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost. 2. Re -install existing fencing or replace with approved equal. END OF SECTION 02261 02261 -Site Restoration 02261-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS PART1- GENERAL The Arkansas Department of Environmental Quality (ADEQ) has adopted the EPA storm water regulations at 40 CFR 122.26 that require National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permits for storm water discharges from construction activities. ADEQ has developed the NPDES General Permit ARR150000 pertaining to storm water discharges associated with construction activities. The permitting requirement applies to sites where construction activities began after October 1, 1992, and result in a surface disturbance that exceeds one acre. As a requirement of the general permit, controls to reduce pollutant loading in storm water shall be developed and implemented. For areas where construction will cross the streams and wetlands, authorization under the Army Corps of Engineers (COE) Section 404 Individual Permit, as described in 33 CFR Appendix A to Part 330, will be issued to the City of Fayetteville. The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing all applicable requirements of the ADEQ General Storm Water Permit for Construction Activity and the COE Section 404 Permit that are associated with the construction activities that they are contracted to perform. The City of Fayetteville has filed a Notice of Intent (NOI) for general permit coverage" of the project and has been assigned the permit tracking number (ARR150541). Notification for coverage under COE Section 404 Individual Permit has been submitted to the Little Rock District Corps of Engineers and the File Number (14207-1) has been assigned to the project. PART 2- OBJECTIVES By definition, Best Management Practices (BMPs) are schedules of activities, prohibition of practices, maintenance procedures, and other management practices to prevent or reduce the pollution of waters of the State. BMPs also include treatment requirements, operating procedures, and practices to control site runoff, spillage or leaks, sludge or waste disposal, or drainage from raw material storage. BMPs can be structural (such as a temporary retention pond) or non-structural (such as materials handling practices). PART 3- REGULATORY REFERENCES 3.01 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP): As required by ADEQ NPDES general storm water permit (ARRR 150000) for construction activity. 3.02 COE EROSION CONTROL PLAN: As required by Little Rock District Corps of Engineers for Individual Section 404 Permit and the Little Rock District Corps of Engineers Sedimentation and Erosion Control Guidelines for Pipeline Projects shall be implemented. 3.03 WATER DUALITY CERTIFICATION CONDITIONS: As required by Section 401 of the Clean Water Act and COE Section 404 Permit. Section 401 Water Quality Certification issued by the ADEQ requires the implementation of BMPs and all other reasonable measures during construction to minimize impacts to water quality via implementation of a BMP plan. 3.04 CAVE SYSTEM CONTINGENCY PLAN: As recommended by USFWS correspondence. 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270- 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 L SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) Complete copies of these documents are contained within the Comprehensive Best Management Practices Plan for the City of Fayetteville for this Project. ' PART 4- CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall comply with all provisions set forth in the environmental specifications contained herein. 4.01 CERTIFICATIONS: The SWPPP (BMP Plan) shall be certified by both the owner (City of Fayetteville) and ' operator (Contractor) and retained on -site at the locations where storm water discharges are generated, from the time of project commencement to the date of final stabilization. All Contractors and subcontractors shall be required to sign the following certification statements prior to conducting any construction activities at the site: "I certify under penalty of,law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general ' National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site identified as a , part of this certification." "The applicant's activity was considered as part of a larger, more comprehensive site specific assessment of impacts on endangered and threatened species by the Owner that has certified eligibility under Part I.3.h.i of the General Permit." Contractor shall complete and sign a Construction Site Notice, located in Attachment A of the general storm water permit, prior to commencement of construction activities. Contractor shall post the signed Construction Site Notice at the construction site in a prominent,place for public viewing (such as alongside a building permit). 4.02 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES (EROSION CONTROL): The structural erosion controls designated on Plan and Profile Sheets and/or Typical Drawings indicate the minimum erosion control structures that shall be initially implemented by Contractor. The Contractor shall be aware of the dynamics of a linear project; and, Contractor shall be required to implement additional erosion control and pollution prevention measures not indicated on Plan and Profile Sheets necessary to maintain compliance with the ADEQ Storm Water Permit for Construction Activities (ARRI 50541), which reads in part as follows: Part I, Section C, Item 3, (page 17). Responsibilities of Operators. "Permittees with operational control are responsible for compliance with all applicable terms and conditions of this permit as it relates to their activities on the construction site, including protection of endangered species and implementation of BMPs and other controls required by the SWPPP." Part II, Section A, Item 4 b. i. B. (3), (page 22). "For drainage locations serving less than 10 acres, sediment traps, silt fences, or equivalent sediment controls are required for all side slope and down slope boundaries of the construction area unless a sediment basin providing storage based on either the smaller of 3,600 cubic feet per acre, or a size based on the runoff volume of a 10 year, 24 hour storm is provided." 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 II SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) II I Part II, Section A, Item 4 b. i. B. (page 23). "Velocity dissipation devices (e.g., rock check dam, straw bales, etc.) shall be placed at discharge locations and along the length of any outfall channel as necessary to provide a non -erosive velocity flow from the structure to a water course so that the natural physical and biological characteristics and functions are maintained and protected." As project operator, Contractor shall have day-to-day control over construction activities and shall be responsible for implementing, adding, relocating, and/or maintaining erosion control structures and best management practices, as necessary, to maintain compliance with the ADEQ Storm Water Permit for Construction Activities (ARRI50541), the Section 404 permit, the Comprehensive BMP Plan, and any Spill Prevention, Control, and Countermeasures Plan (SPCCP) applicable to the Contractor's work. This includes activities that are contracted by the Contractor to subcontractors. Regarding the sequencing of erosion controls, perimeter silt fences, and/or straw bales (and other necessary erosion control structures) shall be installed by Contractor prior to any surface disturbance activity, such as clearing and grubbing. As various phases of construction take place, Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining necessary structural erosion controls from the time of initial surface disturbance until final stabilization has been achieved, and as specified in Part II. Section A. Item 4 b. (page 21) of the ADEQ Storm Water Permit for Construction Activities (ARR150541), which reads in part as follows: "Perimeter controls shall be actively maintained until final stabilization of those portions of the site upward of the perimeter control. Temporary perimeter controls shall be removed after final stabilization." The Contractor shall follow applicable State and/or local sanitary sewer, septic system, and waste disposal regulations. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the following temporary measures for sediment and erosion control are used where practicable, and/or required. 4.03 GENERAL EROSION CONTROL REQUIREMENTS: IA. At a minimum, silt fences or equivalent sediment controls shall be installed for all sideslope and downslope boundaries of the construction area. B. Natural vegetation shall be preserved and used to filter silt from surface runoff wherever possible. C. Straw bale filters or silt fencing shall be anchored below ground surface at the foot of slopes. D. Earthen interceptor dikes on the upgradient side of all areas of construction shall be used to divert runoff flow away from the area of excavation/surface disturbance and t into an area of natural vegetation, or filtered at the downslope end by straw bales or silt fencing wherever practicable. T. E. Vegetative buffer strips shall be maintained at the top and bottom of slopes outlining the area of construction or adjacent to streams. These zones may consist of planted vegetation. F. Periodic removal of trapped sediment shall be conducted to maintain the operating ' condition of structural controls. Structural controls shall be promptly repaired or restored as needed. 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) 4.04 G. The Contractor shall be responsible for achieving temporary soil stabilization and pollution prevention during the period of active construction and achieving final stabilization where construction activities have ceased. H. Temporary and/or permanent stabilization at line work locations shall be done in a progressive manner, meaning that short segments of completed line work shall undergo stabilization as quickly as possible. The Contractor shall comply with the requirement of the general storm water permit that soil stabilization shall be initiated on disturbed areas as soon as practicable, but no more than 14 days after construction activity on a.particular portion of the site has temporarily or permanently ceased. I. The Contractor shall comply with the requirement that areas that are initially disturbed by grading or clearing where work will not take place until some time later in the project, the establishment of vegetative cover for temporary stabilization during construction activities shall take place by temporary seeding. J. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that permanent seeding takes place to establish a sustainable ground cover at areas that are initially cleared or graded and will have no additional construction activities throughout the course of the project and/or where specific phases of construction have been completed that have resulted in exposed unstable soils. K. Contractor shall be responsible for "Final Stabilization" meaning that all soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and a uniform (e.g., evenly distributed, without large bare areas) perennial vegetative cover with a density of 70% on the native background vegetation cover for the area has been established on all unpaved areas and areas not covered by permanent structures, or equivalent permanent stabilization measures, have been employed. L. Upon final stabilization, all structural controls shall be removed from the site. Trapped sediment and other disturbed areas resulting from the disposition of the structural controls shall be stabilized to prevent further erosion and sedimentation. SILT FENCES: In areas where silt fencing is required, Contractor shall use the following installation specifications: A. The slope length is the distance from the fence to the drainage divide or the nearest upslope channel. Slope length shall not be increased by use of multiple rows of silt fence. The maximum slope length above silt fence shall not exceed the following dimensions: Maximum Slope Length (ft) Above Fence Slope Percent 18" -High Fence 30" -Hi h Fence 2 (or Less) 150 500 5 100 250 10 50 150 15 35 100 20 25 70 I Li I I I I I I I I Li II 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) 25 20 55 30 15 45 35 15 40 40 15 35 45 10 30 50 10 25 B. Posts for silt fences shall be 4 -inch -diameter pine, 2 -inch -diameter oak, or 1.33lb/linear-fl. steel with a minimum length of 4 feet. C. Super silt fence with wire backing shall be sued to control runoff from small distributed areas where the maximum slope lengths for reinforced filter fabric fence cannot be met and sufficient room for construction of sediment traps or basins does not exist. D. The maximum slope length above any super silt fence should not exceed the following dimensions: Slope Percent Maximum Slope Length (ft) 2 (or less) 1,000 5 500 10 300 20 200 30 100 40 75 50 50 E. Super silt fence shall not be used in areas where rock or rocky soils prevent the full and uniform anchoring of the fence or proper installation of the fence posts. It shall be used only where the access exists or can be made for the construction equipment required to install and remove the chain link fencing. F. Super silt fence shall be installed at level grade. Both ends of each fence section shall be extended at least 8 feet upslope at 45 degrees to the main fence alignment to allow for pooling of water.• G. Wire reinforcement for super silt fence shall be a minimum 14 gauge and a maximum mesh spacing of 6 inches. H. Poles for super silt fence shall be 2.5 inch diameter galvanized or aluminum posts set up at 6 -feet maximum spacing. Poles shall be driven a minimum of 36 inches below the ground surface and extend a minimum of 33 inches above the ground surface. I. An 8" deep trench should be excavated, minimizing the disturbance on the down slope side. The bottom of the trench should be at level grade. Maximum deviation from the level grade should be 5%, and not extend for more than 50 feet. J. Filter fabric should be stretched and securely fastened to the fence with wire fasteners, staples, or preformed clips. K. Silt fence shall be installed so as to serve a 10 -year peak storm event. L. Ensure that the depth of impounded water does not exceed 1.5 feet at any point along the fence. 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) M. The design of life of a synthetic silt fence should be 6 months. N. Tie the ends of a silt fence into the landscape to prevent flow around the end of the fence before the pool reaches design level. Provide stabilized outlets to protect the fence system and release the storm flows that exceed the design storm. At fabric ends, both ends shall be overlapped a minimum of 6", folded, and secured to the fence. The fabric toe should be placed in the bottom of the trench, backfilled, and compacted. O. Silt accumulations shall be removed before they reach 1/3 of the silt fence height. P. Contractor shall use silt fence geotextile fabric specifications, in accordance with Section 625 of the Arkansas 2003 Standards Specifications for Highway Construction: Type 3 or Type 4. Only those fabric types specified for use as silt fence by the manufacturer shall be used. 4.05 STRAW BALE CHECK DAMS: A. Contractor shall use straw bale check dams indicated on Erosion Control Plan when the following conditions apply: t 1. Where contributing area is approximately 1/2 acre, or less. 2. Where there is not concentration of water in a channel above the barrier. 3. Where length of slope above the barrier isles than 100 feet. B. Straw bales shall not be used on high silt producing areas, above high risk areas, ' where water concentrates, or where there would be a possibility of a washout. C. Straw bales should not be used in excess of a three month time. period. If construction continues beyond that period, the existing straw bales shall be replaced with new bales. D. Contractor shall install straw bales to the following specifications: I. Anchors shall be #5 reinforcing bars, 2"x2" oak stakes, or steel pickets. 2. A trench shall be excavated along the areas that the straw bales shall be used as erosion control to a depth of 4 inches and to the width of one straw bale. The straw bales then shall be placed in the trench. Place excavated material on upstream side of the trench. 3. Straw bales shall be anchored with a minimum of 2 stakes or rebars driven into the underlying soil, making sure that the binding wire or twine is facing the sides and not touching the soil. The first stake into each bale shall be driven toward the previously laid bale to force them together. 4. Spacing between the bales shall be tightly chinked with loose straw. 5. After straw bales are in place the excavated soil shall be backfilled against the upslope side of the straw bales to a height of 4 inches after compacting. 6. Straw bales shall be inspected after each rainfall to determine if any repairs or replacements to the straw bales are needed. If it is determined that the straw bales need to be repaired or replaced, the work will occur immediately. Silt accumulations shall be removed before they reach 1/2 the barrier height. 4.06 TRENCH DEWATERING: Water removed from open trenches shall have silt removed prior to entering a natural water body, by either natural vegetation or a straw bale trench dewatering inlet device, and 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued). ' sediment trap/basin. Water filtered through a basin shall not violate any water quality standard, and shall have efficient sediment/silt removal prior to discharge to receiving stream. ' PART 5- SEEDING SPECIFICATIONS *The Contractor shall be responsible for labor, materials, tools and equipment, and related items required ' •Jfor preparing ground, providing for sowing of seeds and fertilizing, mulching/top dressing, and other management practices required for erosion control and to achieve final stabilization. 5.01 REPAIRS ' A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the soil seedbed is not blown, washed, or otherwise removed form the site. The Contractor shall make ' repairs (including replacement of lost topsoil and/or mulch) to the seedbed preparation site in the event of heavy rain, wind, or other natural events that cause damage. ' B. Seedbed Preparation: The Contractor shall maintain finish grades on areas to be seeded in true and even condition without ruts or tracks. Seedbed cultivation shall be done to a state of good tilth so that soil particulates on the surface are small enough, ' and lie close enough together, to prevent seed from being covered too deep for optimum germination. Prior to seeding, area shall be cleared of surface stone, stumps, or other objects larger than 1 1/2 inches in thickness or diameter, and roots, brush, wire, grade stakes, and other objects that might be a hindrance to maintenance operations. The Contractor shall remove and stockpile existing 6-12" of topsoil for ' reapplication after site grading. If existing topsoils are not suitable, the Contractor shall be responsible for placement of imported topsoil. Imported topsoil shall be from naturally drained areas and fertile, friable loam that is ' free of subsoil, stiff or lumpy clay, hard clods, hardpan, rocks, disintegrated debris, plants, roots and other materials that would be toxic to plant growth. C. Fertilizing/Seeding/Mulching (Dry Method): For finish slopes less than 3 units ' - horizontal to I unit vertical, fertilizer, seed, and mulch may be applied separately (dry method). Should adequate seeding not be achieved, the Contractor shall be responsible for additional reseeding and/or seedbed preparation, as necessary. Fertilizers and/or lime shall be applied at appropriate agronomic rate. Soil shall be tested to determine agronomic rate. Fertilizer shall be applied 24 ' hours in advance of tilling/seedbed preparation operations. The fertilizer distributor box shall be equipped with baffle plates to prevent downward movement of fertilizer when operating on a slope. The fertilizer shall be raked in and thoroughly mixed with the soil to a depth of approximately 2 'inches prior to the application of seed or mulch. Seeding equipment shall be calibrated for appropriate application rate. If ' unplanted skips are noted after germination, Contractor shall be responsible for seeding unplanted areas identified by owner. Seed shall be planted to a depth of 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch by use of approved grain drills, native grass seed drills, cultipacker seeder, spreader, hydraulic seeder or other acceptable equipment, to ensure uniform distribution and coverage at specified rates. 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I U SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) Appropriate seeding methods include: broadcasting, harrowing, and/or raking lightly. ' Utilizing a mixture of various annuals can produce vegetation that will be available for longer periods as compared to a single crop. The Contractor shall select the type of seed appropriate for the season of construction and the area. A mixture of three to five species is best. For wetland areas, seed mixes shall be used based on the wetness of the area. Seed mixture shall consist entirely of native grasses and herbaceous broadleafs. For wet meadow sites, a mix (at least three species) of big blue stem, blue vervain, boneset, calico aster, flat-topped aster, ironweed, small - flowered agrimony, purple coneflower, goldenrod and switch grass, fox sedge, Virginia wild rye and/or prairie cord grass should be used. For marsh type areas, a mix (at least three species) of rice cutgrass, spike rush, prairie cord grass and/or bottlebrush sedge shall be used. Seeding rate shall be 120 to 150 lbs/acre. After the seed has been distributed, it shall be incorporated into the soil by raking or other approved methods. Use of fescue, ryegrass, redtop seeding and/or mulching in or near a wetland area is prohibited. Lime ' and fertilizer should not be applied. Straw mulch should be used, at the rate of 3 T/acre and without binding agents. For upland areas, seed shall be a fast germinating and growing variety such as common rye grass, the cereal grasses (wheat, barley, oats), brown top millet, Bermuda grass, love grass, blue stem, £oxtail millet, crown vetch, lespedeza, or Sudan grass. Seeding rate shall be 120 to 150 lbs/acre. After the seed has been distributed, it shall be incorporated into the soil by raking or other approved methods. Mulching shall be used in conjunction with both temporary and permanent seeding practices to enhance their success by providing erosion protection prior to the onset of vegetative growth. Straw mulching shall be of oat, wheat, or rice straw mulch. Hay mulch shall be prairie grass, Bermuda grass, or other hay as approved. The mulch shall be free of Johnson grass or other noxious weeds and foreign materials. It shall be kept in dry condition and shall not be molded or rotted. ' Mulching shall be spread in a uniform continuous blanket, at a rate of I ton per acre (air dried weight) or to a uniform 2 -inch depth. Mulch shall be spread by hand or by an approved blower type mulch spreader. Care shall be taken to remove all wire and/or twine from baled hay/straw when the control structures are removed from the site. Mulch shall be anchored in the soil to a depth of two to three inches to form a soil -binding mulch to prevent loss or bunching, or held in place with a tackifier. Mulch shall be kept moist by daily application of water until seeds have germinated. D. Fertilizing/Seeding/Mulching (Hydraulic Method): For finish slopes steeper than 3 units horizontal to I unit vertical, fertilizer, seed, and mulch shall be applied and stabilized by the hydraulic method (hydromulching/seeding). The hydraulic method consists of the uniform application by spraying of a homogenous mixture of water, seed, fertilizer, and mulch. It can be utilized 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270-8 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) during both temporary and permanent stabilizations. The slurry shall be prepared by mixing the ingredients in the same proportions as specified above. The slurry shall have the proper consistency to adhere to earthen slopes without lumping or running. Mixing time of materials shall not exceed 45 minutes from the time the seeds come into contact with water in the mixer to complete discharge of the slurry onto the slopes, otherwise the batch shall be recharged with seed. The mixture shall be applied using equipment containing a tank having a built-in, continuous agitation and recirculation system, and a discharge system that will allow application of the slurry to the slopes at a continuous and uniform rate. The nozzle shall produce a spray that does not concentrate the slurry nor erode the soil. Slurry shall be applied at appropriate rate specific to the product specifications and slope (Example: 3,000 lbs/acre for 4:1 to 3:1 slopes and 4,000 lbs/acre for 2:1 to 1:1 slopes.) PART 6- CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES AT STREAM AND WETLAND CROSSINGS (SECTION 404 INDIVIDUAL PERMIT #14207-1) 6.01 FOR AREAS WHERE THE CONSTRUCTION WILL CROSS STEAMS AND WETLANDS, THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS AS REQUIRED BY COE SECTION 404 PERMIT APPLY: A. The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing all applicable requirements of ' the COE Section 404 Permit that are associated with the construction activities that Contractor is contracted to perform. B. The Contractor shall implement the Little Rock District Corps of Engineers ' Sedimentation and Erosion Control Guidelines for Pipeline Projects. C. The Contractor shall use and maintain appropriate soil erosion and sedimentation ' controls during construction, and all exposed soil and other fills, as well as work below the ordinary high water mark of the stream, must be permanently stabilized at the earliest practicable date. ID. The Contractor may temporarily sidecast (up to three months) materials resulting from trench excavations into "waters of the United States," provided that the material is not placed in a manner that it is dispersed by currents or other forces. ' E. The Contractor shall limit areas of "waters of the United States" that are disturbed, to the minimum necessary to construct the utility line. IF. The Contractor shall implement appropriate measures to maintain near normal downstream flows and to minimize flooding. G. The Contractor shall use materials for backfill that will not be eroded by expected ' high flows. H. Plan #1, specified in the COE Guidelines shall be implemented for conventional open -cut trenching techniques across small streams with solid rock and silt or mud I. present. Prior to the commencement of construction activities, the Contractor shall install straw bales/silt screening across the entire width of the stream at a location that is downstream from the area of excavation. Wire cables and/or stakes shall be ' utilized to secure the straw bales/silt screening until construction activities within the streambed are completed. In the event the flow of the stream is of sufficient 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270-9 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 I 1 _ _ SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) magnitude to preclude the use of silt screening, water dams and/or turbidity curtains shall be utilized. It shall be noted that general conditions and restrictions within the Section 404 Permit take precedence over these recommended guidelines where The Contractor shall install straw bales/silt fencing along the stream bank prior to the commencement of construction activities, to prevent the introduction of silt into the stream where practicable. The straw bales/silt fencing shall be maintained until sufficient vegetative cover has been established to prevent excessive siltation. The Contractor shall conduct excavation activities in a manner as to not result in the relocation of an existing stream channel or a restriction of stream flow. The Contractor shall keep dredged or excavated material at a minimum. Excess excavated materials from a stream shall be removed and disposed of in an approved The Contractor shall remove any temporary fills in their entirety and the affected areas shall be returned to their preexisting elevation. In the event that the Contractor constructs a haul road for construction access across stream crossings, culverts shall be placed in the stream channel to maintain low flow The Contractor shall comply with all General Permit conditions within COE Section 404 Permit as contained within the Comprehensive BMP Plan. Cofferdams shall not be used to dewater wetlands or other aquatic areas so as to change their use. BMPs, (e.g., trench plugs) shall be taken, as necessary, to prevent the trench from draining the wetlands or changing its hydrology. Wetlands adjacent to streams and/or areas of active construction shall not be used for storage, waste, access, parking, borrow material, or other construction support activity. Staging areas shall be located at least 50 feet from the edge of the wetland. Movement of vehicles across wetlands shall be minimized. Wh moved across wetlands, the use of pads or mats should be used. Heavy equipment working in wetlands shall be placed on mats or other measures must be taken to minimize soil disturbance, where practicable. Where use of mats/mudboards is not practicable, an alternative approach shall be utilized, in order to prevent damage to the wetland topsoil, and to facilitate post -construction restoration. The top 6 to 12 inches of excavated wetland topsoil (with the vegetative seeds/root mass) shall be carefully removed and stockpiled separately from the subsoil (unless there is standing water or the soil is too saturated or segregate) into a dedicated wetland topsoil deposition area. The topsoil removal width shall be done in a manner to accommodate the width of disturbance of heavy equipment. Continued trench excavations subsequently occur until reaching the desired trench depth. After the sewer line is installed, the trench shall be backfilled with excavated subsoil to within approximately one foot of the surface contour. The remaining trench depth shall then be backfilled with soil from the wetland topsoil deposition 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270-10 RJN Project No. SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) 6.02 SPECIAL CONDITIONS: Because of the presence of karst geology in the project area and ecologically sensitive species, the Contractor shall exercise caution during construction to avoid any breakthrough into any cave system, subterranean conduit, or tunnel, as follows: A. Where surface fractures or cave openings are encountered during construction, the Contractor shall immediately halt all excavation activities within the immediate vicinity and notify the resident project representative. The resident project representative shall immediately notify USFWS, as appropriate to conduct a survey to determine if the cave is inhabited by any listed species. Construction activities within the immediate vicinity of the cave or tunnel shall not resume until a determination of the necessary action is reached after conferral with the USFWS. B. The Contractor shall not perform equipment fueling or transfer of liquid chemicals within 100 yards of any open excavation, streambed, or any observable surface fracture. C. The Contractor shall not store fuels and/or chemicals within 100 yards of any open excavation, streambed, or any observable surface fracture. D. Contractor shall immediately discontinue use of heavy equipment that exhibits excessive fluid leakage and make necessary repairs prior to reuse of equipment. E. Contractor shall not conduct equipment repairs or maintenance involving the draining of fluids within 100 yards of any open excavation, streambed, or any observable surface fracture. I L I I I F. Discharges to waters for which there is a total maximum daily load (TMDL) allocation are not eligible for coverage under the Arkansas General Storm Water Permit unless a SWPPP has been developed and certified that is consistent with the assumptions and requirements in the approved TMDL. Consequently, if at any time during the course of the project, a TMDL is developed and approved for the receiving stream(s) the Contractor shall be responsible for implementation of additional BMPs as determined necessary by the ADEQ to meet the. requirements of the TMDL. G. As a protective measure, 401 Water Quality Certification has been issued by the ADEQ for COE Section 404 Permit, as required by the Clean Water Act. If at any time after construction has commenced, it is determined by the ADEQ that the storm water discharge from the site has caused or may cause an excursion above an applicable water quality standard, the Contractor shall be responsible for • implementing additional BMPs determined necessary to maintain water quality standards within the streams. 6,03 PERMANENT STREAM CROSSING RESTORATION MEASURES: The Contractor shall initiate permanent restoration measures for the area where the pipeline crosses any stream as soon as possible following construction. The Contractor shall complete the final restoration within 14 days of pipeline installation, as described below: A. Subsequent to completion of the pipeline stream crossing, ground contours shall be restored to their original condition as practicable. 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270-11 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 [I I SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) B. Revegetation methods shall be initiated as rapidly as possible after pipeline crossings at streams are completed. ' C. Construct interceptor dikes, where needed, by either maintaining existing temporary dikes or installation of additional dikes. D. Fertilize and/or lime slopes where needed. E. Select seed appropriate for the season of construction and the area. A mixture of three to five species is best. ' F. Employ matting with stapling on extremely steep slopes where vegetative stabilization alone is insufficient. G. Place additional straw bales/silt fences where drains and ditches allow sediment to enter the waterway. H. If necessary, stabilize stream banks with the appropriate material, such as riprap. I. Remove temporary structures, which are not necessary and not biodegradable, such as silt fences installed across a stream downstream of the construction site. J. Monitor and maintain erosion control measures until final stabilization has been achieved 6.04 WETLAND CROSSING RESTORATION MEASURES A. Excess excavated material shall be removed to upland areas immediately upon completion of the construction. ' B. Wetlands shall be restored to pre -construction contours in wetland vegetation. C. Post -construction seeding with native vegetation shall be implemented for erosion control. D. Seed mixture shall consist entirely of native grasses and herbaceous broadleafs, as discussed in 5.0 Item 3. PART 7- INSPECTIONS/RECORDKEEPING ' 7.01 INSPECTIONS/RECORDKEEPING A resident project representative shall conduct site evaluations at a minimum of once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours after any storm event of greater than 0.5 inch. Where sites have been temporarily or permanently stabilized, site evaluations shall be conducted at a minimum of once per month. A. Written records of the inspections shall be provided to the Contractor. Any inadequacies on the part of the Contractor shall be corrected as soon as practicable, or within seven calendar days following the evaluations. B. A resident project representative shall conduct site evaluations for the implementation and effectiveness of stream bank stabilization where pipelines cross streams. As required by the Section 404 Permit, evaluations shall be made at stream crossings daily, until final stabilization has been achieved. Written records of all site evaluations shall be maintained by the City of Fayetteville and the Contractor. 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270-12 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) • C. The Contractor shall maintain an inventory list of the type and amount of all hazardous and/or toxic chemicals that will be used at the site. ID. The Contractor shall maintain all Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for these chemicals. The MSDS shall be reviewed to determine if hazardous and/or toxic constituents are present, which may be within wastes that may be generated from the ' chemical. This includes, but is not restricted to any insecticide, herbicide, other pesticide, lubricating fluids, paints, epoxies, solvents, adhesives, and fuels. Construction personnel shall be trained for the proper storage and use of such chemicals. E. The Contractor shall provide a dedicated chemical storage area that does not allow runoff of contaminated storm water. Containers shall be properly labeled as to their ' contents. Chemicals shall be stored in containers constructed of materials compatible with the contents. F. The Contractor shall ensure that all hazardous materials at the construction site are ' stored, handled, and applied per manufacturer's printed instructions and per all applicable Federal, State, and local codes. ' G. The Contractor shall ensure that onsite work crews and subcontractors are trained and knowledgeable in the proper handling of hazardous materials and disposal of wastes. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all waste materials by a waste ' management firm licensed to dispose of the specific type of waste generated. H. In the event of a chemical or fuel spill, the Contractor shall immediately halt construction activities in the immediate vicinity. The Contractor shall notify the ' resident project representative and initiate immediate efforts to contain the spill with earthen dikes to prevent runoff or migration of the spilled chemical. The Contractor shall review MSDS to determine appropriate spill response measures. The Contractor I shall be required to follow the appropriate regulatory requirements for disposal of contaminated soil. I. Construction personnel shall not access any area outside of the designated sites of ' construction with any vehicle, light or heavy equipment, or use any of these areas for storage of materials. J. The City of Fayetteville and the Contractor are required to retain records of reports required by the general storm water permit, including the SWPPP, site evaluation reports, and the NOI for a period of at least three years from the date of final stabilization. The Contractor shall maintain the following written records and copies ' shall be submitted to the City of Fayetteville: 1. Contractor certification(s) 2. Chemical use inventory ' 3. Hazardous/toxic chemical inventory 4. Waste disposal records 5. Reporting of incidents I. 6. Documentation of pollution prevention training/meetings 7. Releases in excess of reportable quantities 8. Records of construction activities 9. List of the sources of non -storm water '10. MSDS of toxic/hazardous materials ' 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270-13 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) 11. Representative soil test results and quantities and types of seeds, mulch, and fertilizers applied and seeding/mulching method. A binder containing the recordkeeping forms will be provided to the Contractor. ' PART 8- CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS 8.01 SUBMITTALS I A. Prior to commencement of construction activities, the Contractor shall provide the following submittals to the City of Fayetteville within 10 days of the Bid Opening: 1. The specific intended sequence of major construction activities 2. Contact information for Contractor's designated spill coordinator 3. Projected oil/fuel inventory and volume of containers having a capacity of 55 gallons or more, including equipment fuel tanks. This shall include projected oil/fuel inventory of all subcontractors. ' 4. Contractor Certification(s) of Master Comprehensive BMP Plan and applicable Addendum Comprehensive BMP Plan 5. Contractor local or on -site contact information 6. Subsequent to commencement of construction, Contractor shall submit copies of all records specified in 7.0, Item 10. PART 9- SPILL PREVENTION CONTROL AND COUNTERMEASURES PLAN CERTIFICATION AND IMPLEMENTATION 9.01 SPILLS A. Should Contractor maintain onsite, an aggregate storage capacity of oil or oil ' products exceeding 1,320 gallons, Contractor shall be responsible for Professional Engineer Certification of Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures Plan contained within Master Comprehensive BMP Plan. B. Any container, including drums, equipment fuel tanks, above ground storage tanks (ASTs),.and fluid reservoirs; having a storage capacity of 55 gallons or more for oil ' or oil products shall be counted toward the 1,320 -gallon threshold. C. Should Contractor's aggregate storage capacity of oil or oil products not exceed 1,320 gallons, Contractor shall be responsible for implementation of Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures Plan contained within Master Comprehensive BMP Plan, without Professional Engineer Certification of the Plan. PART 10 - SLURRY/FLUID HANDLING AND DISPOSAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR DRILLING/BORING/TUNNELING 10.01 DRILLING/BORING/TUNNELING A. Portions of the proposed line work may involve drilling, boring, and/or tunneling under streams, wetlands, miscellaneous structures, and/or roadways. Contractor shall be responsible for complying with the following specifications during drilling/boring/tunneling activities: 1. All drilling/boring/tunneling activities shall be in accordance with laws, permits, and the requirements of governing authorities and ROW owner. 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270-14 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) 2. Contractor shall provide Owner (City of Fayetteville) with any and all information pertaining to the use of any drilling slurry or fluid. Owner (City of Fayetteville) shall approve only specified slurries/fluids for use. 3. No toxic or hazardous additives shall be co -mingled with drilling slurries/fluids, such as diesel fuel and/or oil. 4. Contractor shall provide owner with all Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any drilling slurries/fluids to be used, including, but not restricted to, bentonite, Con-Det, Polybore, and/or Diamond -Seal. 5. There shall not be discharges or releases of any slurry/fluid into waterways. Contractor shall be responsible for seeing that slurry/fluid tank capacities are of the appropriate size to hold excess slurry material without spillage. The drilling/boring/tunneling entry point shall be appropriately enclosed and/or contained within earthen berms, and equipped with a sump pump to reclaim or discharge excess mud to a reuse or disposal tank. Earth spoiled or contaminated by drilling slurry shall be removed and disposed of properly by Contractor and the site restored with clean material to a condition equal to or 1 1 • better than its original condition. 6. During an active drilling/boring/tunneling operation, containment structures shall be constructed with a design developed on a site -specific basis. Structural controls include earthen berms, silt fencing, and/or straw bale check dams, either individually or in combination. Where possible, upgradient diversion dikes shall be constructed to divert storm water runoff away from the area of the active bore. 7. Drilling fluids/slurries shall be disposed of in an acceptable manner at specified locations that are adequately contained to prevent the migration of bentonite to water bodies. 8. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining sufficient personnel, equipment, and materials to contain drilling/boring/tunneling slurry/fluid that upwells to the surface as a "frac out" and/or is discharged into a body of water onsite during all drilling/boring/tunneling operations. 9. Contractor shall be responsible for notifying drilling/boring/tunneling Subcontractors regarding requirements for spill response equipment and personnel. In areas where drilling/boring/tunneling slurries/fluids have been released, either due to recirculation pit overflows or fugitive escape through subterranean fractures, drilling/boring/tunneling Subcontractors shall cease operations notify Contractor and Owner (City of Fayetteville) immediately. 10. Contractor shall maintain a record of the drilling/boring/tunneling pressures and the quantities of drilling/boring/tunneling fluid/slurry used during the entire operation. The record shall correlate to both time of day and the station of the bore head. These records shall be available to the Owner (City of Fayetteville) at all times during the drilling/boring/tunneling operations and submitted as record at the conclusion of the operation. When a reduction in drilling/boring/tunneling slurry/fluid recirculation pressure is observed, drilling/boring/tunneling operators shall be instructed by Contractor to perform a site reconnaissance of the immediate area in order to determine if the fugitive escape of slurry/fluid through bedrock fractures to the surface (or to water bodies) is occurring. 11. Contractor shall maintain continuous visual inspection of the drilling/boring/tunneling alignment at all times when the operation is 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270-15 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 TI SECTION 02270 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued) 12. 13. proceeding without return of drilling slurry/fluid to the entry site. When the alignment is beneath a body of water, a visual inspection shall be made at the most accessible point immediately downstream of the bore alignment for changes in turbidity or color, which may indicate a slurry/fluid discharge into the waterway. Unusual conditions, including excessive loss of slurry/fluid, shall be reported promptly to the Owner (City of Fayetteville) by the Contractor. Following completion of drilling/boring/tunneling activities all drilling/boring/tunneling pits/shafts shall be backfilled with native materials and compacted in 8" lifts, or in accordance with Owner (City of Fayetteville) or ROW owners, or to achieve a similar compaction of surrounding soil. Surfaces shall be restored to original or better condition and to the satisfaction of the Owner (City of Fayetteville), and ROW owners. All excess/spilled slurry/fluid shall be removed from the site, and the contours shall be restored as close to the original condition as practicable. Seeding, mulching, and/or matting shall be promptly initiated. Should any drilling/boring/tunneling slurry/fluid be released to a stream or waterway, Contractor shall be responsible for all cleanup activities and associated costs. Removal of slurry/fluid from streams is accomplished on a site -specific basis, and shall be determined by Owner (City of Fayetteville). Contractor shall conduct cleanup activities in a manner to prevent damage to the riparian/streamside vegetation as much as practicable. Contractor shall be responsible for any slurry/fluid disposal off site and associated costs. END OF SECTION 02270 El 1' .1 I L L H I 02270 -Environmental Specifications 02270-16 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02271 - GEOTEXTILE FABRIC ' PART 1- GENERAL I1.01 SCOPE: A. This work shall consist of the installation of a non -woven geotextile fabric below the ' ;, riprap. :1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: I. A. Section 02200 - Excavation, Embankment, Backfill and Grading B. Section 02221 — Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting IC. Section 02272 - Riprap 1.03 DUALITY ASSURANCE: IA. The installation shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as directed by Engineer. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRIC SPECIFICATIONS: IA. The non -woven geotextile fabric shall be an 8 -ounce fabric; Supac SNP or equal. The fabric shall be of non -woven needle punched construction and consist of long - chain polymeric filaments or fibers composed of polypropylene, polyethylene, or ' polyamide. The filaments and fibers shall be oriented whereby they retain their relative positions with each other and allow the passage of water as specified. B. The fabric shall be mildew, insect, and rodent resistant and shall be inert to chemicals ' commonly found in soil. The non -woven fabric shall conform to the physical property requirements below: Physical Property Test Method Test Results ' Tensile strength, wet, lbs. ASTM D 4632 175 Elongation, wet, % ASTM D 4632 50 Coefficient of Permeability, cm/sec ASTM D 4491 0.10 Constant Had (50 mm) ' Puncture Strength, lbs ASTM D 4833 110 Mullen Burst Strength, psi ASTM D 3786 360 ' Abrasion Resistance, % Strength Retention ASTM D 4886 90 Apparent Opening Size (AOS) ASTM D 4751 40 ' Ultraviolet Resistance, ASTM D 4355, % Strength Retention (After 500 Xenon 70 Weatherometer Hours) 1 ' 02271-Geotextile Fabric 02271 - I RJN Project No, 11-1875-00 II r SECTION 02271 - GEOTEXTILE FABRIC (continued) PART 3- 3.01 C. The non -woven geotextile fabric shall be furnished in a protective wrapping which shall protect the fabric from ultraviolet radiation and from abrasion due to shipping and handling. EXECUTION PLACEMENT AND REPAIRS A. Fabric Exposure Following Placement — Exposure of the geotextile filter fabric to the elements between lay down and cover shall be a maximum of 7 days to minimize damage potential. B. The non -woven geotextile fabric shall be placed in the manner and at the locations shown on the drawings. The surface to receive the fabric shall 'be prepared to a smooth condition free of obstructions, depressions, and debris. The fabric shall be placed loosely, not in a stretched condition. C. The Contractor shall anchor the geotextile fabric at both outer ends of the riprap courses by embedding the fabric down, across, and up 2 -foot deep by 2 -feet wide by 10 -feet long trench dug at 90 degrees to the centerline of pipe. The trench shall be centered on the pipe. The anchoring trench shall be backfilled with rock material, generally sized from 2 -inches to 4 -inches, approved by Engineer. There will be no separate payment for Geotextile Fabric, it shall be subsidiary to the bid price. D. The fabric shall be placed so as to provide a minimum 24 -inch overlap. The fabric shall be placed transverse to the direction of the flow with the upstream panel overlapping the downstream panel. All installations shall be subject to approval by Engineer. E. Repairs — A geotextile patch, of the same material, shall be placed over any damaged area and shall extend 12 -inches beyond the perimeter of the tear or damaged area. Patch shall be either glued on sewn to the mother fabric or as approved by Engineer. 02271-Geotextile Fabric END OF SECTION 02271 El I I I I n C I U I I C 02271-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' 11 F SECTION 02272 - RIPRAP PARTI- GENERAL ' 1.01 SCOPE: A. This Section includes the procurement and installation of riprap. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 02200 — Excavation, Embankment, Backfill and Grading ' B. Section 02221 — Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting C. Section 02273 — Explosives and Blasting ID. Section 02229 — Rock Removal E. Section 02270 — Environmental Specification IF. Section 02271 — Geotextile Fabric PART 2- MATERIALS 2.01 SPECIFICATIONS: A. The riprap shall be hard, sound, and durable. It shall be reasonably free of fines and ' shall be well graded between the maximum and minimum rock sizes so as to produce a minimum of voids. No riprap shall be placed on the project until it has been accepted by Engineer. ' B. The minimum density of stone shall be 130 pounds per cubic foot and the maximum absorption shall be 6 percent. C. The maximum size shall not be greater than 12 -inches in any dimension and approximately 50 percent of the material shall consist of pieces weighing 20 pounds or more. The stones shall be predominantly angular in shape and with not more than 25 percent having a length exceeding 3.0 times its breadth or thickness. ' D. Geotextile fabric must match Mirafi 600X or equal, as specified in Section 02271. E. Contractor shall obtain and submit certification that the proposed rock meets density ' and absorption requirements specified herein. Testing for certification shall be in accordance with ASTM C97. Certified test results shall be submitted to Engineer prior to the use of the proposed material as riprap. PART3- EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT AND REPAIRS: ' A. The riprap layer shall be a minimum of 24 -inches thick when placed over the geotextile fabric. ' B. When placed on the embankment, the smaller stones shall be well distributed throughout the mass. Hand placing may be required to obtain the results specified above. 02272-Riprap 02272 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I. I SECTION 02272 - RIPRAP (continued) C. The areas to be protected with riprap shall be dressed to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings and covered with the geotextile fabric prior to placing the riprap. D. Riprap graded so that the smaller stones are uniformly distributed throughout the mass shall then be placed starting at the toe of the slope with a maximum vertical drop onto the geotextile fabric of 2 feet. In no case shall stones be allowed to roll down the fabric covered slope. Placement of the riprap over the fabric shall proceed so that the upper boundary of the riprap layer is essentially the same level for the entire length of the fabric. E. Care shall be taken so that the geotextile fabric is not damaged during riprap installation. Any rips or tears shall be repaired by Contractor, as specified in Section 02271, before proceeding with further riprap installation. END OF SECTION 02272 I I I I I 1 I I I U I U 02272-Riprap 02272-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 02451- ROCK ANCHORS PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section covers the fabrication, handling, installation and testing of bonded rock ' or soil anchors with (MCP I) Multiple Corrosion Protection. The post -tensioning material specification of ACI 318 (latest revision) and the Post Tensioning Institute's Post Tensioning Manual apply and shall be part of this specification. ' B. Materials and equipment provided by the contractor shall include, but shall not be limited to, anchorage assemblies, pre -stressing steel, corrosion protection materials and grout surrounding a high strength All -Thread -Bar which is cement grouted and centered in an oversized hole. C. The MCP I Bonded Anchorages shall have multiple corrosion protection layers (two internal barriers consisting of a non -shrink cement grout encased in a waterproof, ' protective smooth plastic sleeve in the free stressing zone) surrounding a high strength All -Thread -Bar which is cement grouted and centered in an oversized drill hole. The Anchors shall be pro-vided as shown on the plans and as specified herein. ID. MCP I Anchors shall be installed under supervision of a person experienced with rock or soil anchor installation. The contractor shall provide high quality work and materials meeting the requirements of this specification and the industry standards. E. Subsurface Investigation and Design 1. The project designers shall be responsible for the subsurface investigation of ' rock or soil and the pertinent related structure design to establish the basic requirements and application of the anchorage system. 2. An engineering geological consultant or a soils engineering consultant who is ' regularly engaged in the design of bonded anchorage requirements will determine the necessary drill hole diameters, bond and free stressing lengths • that are dependent on the design and that are unique to the project's ' anchorage load requirements and the specific geological area. 3. The project's contract drawings will show the location, procedures and layouts of the required anchors, as well as final tension loads, basic ' diameters, type and lengths of the MCP I anchor to be used. 1.02 RELATED WORK The following sections prescribe items of related work. Coordinate the work prescribed by this section with the work prescribed by these sections: A. Section 03100 - Concrete Forms & Accessories B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete 1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this section. Each publication shall be the latest revision and addendum in effect at the date of the subcontract award, unless noted otherwise. Except as specifically modified by the requirements specified herein or the details on the 02451 - Rock Anchors 02451-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02451 - ROCK ANCHORS (continued) drawings, the work included under this section shall conform to the applicable provisions if these ASTM (American Society for Testing Materials) publications: A. ASTM A 36 - Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. B. ASTM A 194 - Specification for Carbon Steel and Alloy Nuts for Bolts for High - Pressure and High -Temperature Service. C. ASTM A 325 - Specification for High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. D. ASTM A 615 - Specification for Rail Steel Deformed and Plain Billet Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. E. ASTM C109 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using two-inch or 50 -mm Cube Specimens). F. ASTM C150 - Specification for Portland Cement. G. ASTM C 845 - Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement. H. ASTM C1107 - Specification for Packaged, Dry, Hydraulic Cement Grout (Nonshrink). ' I. ASTM F 436 - Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to starting the work, the contractor shall submit complete details of the proposed anchor system and the qualifications of the installation supervisor. The anchor system manufacturer will furnish shop drawings, as well as related data such as catalog cuts, product details, and brochures. Mill certifications for the prestressing bar and the calibrations for the testing equipment will be submitted prior to the anchor installation. B. See Exhibit A, Section 12.0 Submittals, Shop Drawings and Material Samples for number and manner of submittals. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS ' General — MCP I Anchor materials shall conform to the following requirements. The MCP I Anchor System shall be furnished complete with all accessories and shall be a standard product of a company regularly engaged in their manufacture such as Williams Form Engineering Corporation, 280 Ann Street, N.W., Grand Rapids, MI 49504. A certificate of compliance and copies of certified mill reports, when required, will verify that the anchors conform to all requirements of these specifications. A. Anchor Bars: Anchor bars shall be 150 KS! All -Thread -Bar Prestressing Steel conforming to ASTM A-311 and ASTM A-722 Type II or AASHTO No. M275. All -Thread -Bars shall have a concentric rolled thread deformation pattern that ensures a consistent cross-sectional area and resultant strength at any point along the 02451 - Rock Anchors 02451-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02451 - ROCK ANCHORS (continued) steel bar. Non -concentric thread forms will not be acceptable. The thread deformation shall be a close tolerance design that deters loosening of internally threaded components such as nuts and couplings when the bar is subjected to vibration. The 150 KSI prestressing steel bars shall be cold stressed to a maximum of 80% of the guaranteed ultimate strength of the prestressing steel and then stress relieved to produce the prescribed mechanical properties of ASTM A-722. B. Bearing Anchorage Plates: Plates shall be one of the following types of material: A standard carbon steel conforming to ASTM A -36/A -36M with a minimum yield strength of 36 KSI; a high strength low alloy steel conforming to ASTM A -572/A - 572M with a minimum yield strength of 50 KSI; or a high strength low, alloy steel with additional corrosion resistance properties conforming to ASTM A -588/A -588M with a minimum yield strength of 50 KSI. Bearing plates shall be complete with a clearance hole for the All -Thread -Bar, a steel duct retainer (trumpet) welded to the plate to overlap the smooth sleeve, and a keyhole or round hole(s) as necessary for the grout tube for injecting grout and de -air in the drill hole and/or in the free - stressing sleeve. When spherical nuts or spherical bearing washers are used with the system, the bearing plates will have a matching dished radius machined in the plate to provide the maximum bearing load transfer of the anchor nut. The minimum plate size(s) and thickness(es) shall be according to the manufacturer's requirements. C. Anchor Nuts: Anchor nuts for the MCP system will be a heavy duty hexagonal pattern machined from and conforming at ASTM A-29 Grade C-1045 Hardened Steel material as a regularly used with the All -Thread -Bar. They shall develop an ultimate strength of not less than 100% of the guaranteed ultimate strength of the All -Thread - Bar. D. Washers: All washers shall be capable of providing full compression bearing between the hex nut and bearing plate up to the ultimate tension load of the prestressing steel. Flat Hardened Washers: Flat hardened washers will be manufactured of a through hardened or carburized steel conforming to ASTM F-436 commonly used with high strength structural bolts. E. Mechanical Couplings: When required, mechanical couplings may be used to splice All -Thread -Bars of the MCP system together and shall be capable of developing 100% of the guaranteed ultimate strength of the prestressing steel. They shall be of a round stop type design to ensure a positive indication that the minimum required thread engagement of the All -Thread -Bar into the coupling has been met. Couplings will conform to ASTM A-29 Grade 1045 Hardened Steel material. F. Corrosion Protection Materials Smooth plastic sleeving used in the free stressing zones as a bond breaker and protective water barrier shall be a waterproof plastic material, be non - reactive to the cement grout and free of harmful amounts of chlorides that could depassivate the pre -stressing steel. The sleeve material will conform tc either•a P.V.C. of ASTM D-1785 and AASHTO No. R6 or a polyethylene of. ASTM D-1248. Diameters and schedule sizes are as noted on shop drawings. 02451 - Rock Anchors 02451-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 fl SECTION 02451- ROCK ANCHORS (continued) 2. Corrosion preventative grease when specified in lieu of cement grout in the free stressing sleeve, will be specifically formulated lubricant for coating tendons in the post -tensioning industry to meet the standards set forth by the Post Tensioning Institute for corrosive environments. This grease will conform to ASTM B-117 and ASTM D-1743. 3. Cement Grout for use both in the bond zone and internally in the free stressing sleeve shall be an expansive hydraulic cement (K) which is chemically compensated for shrinkage, has a high bond and compressive strength value and is crack resistant for permanent anchor installations. It shall be mixed with potable water only (without sand and other additives) which is clear, free of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, or injurious quantities of chlorides, fluorides, sulfites and nitrates which may be harmful to Portland cement and prestressing steel. The grout shall conform to ASTM C-845 Type E-1. 4. Optional coatings if required by the designers can be bonded to the prestressing steel and tension components (nuts, couplings, and bearing plates) for additional corrosion protection of the MCP I system. Nuts and couplings for use on coated All -Thread -Bars shall be oversized tapped. These coatings shall be either epoxy coating conforming to ASTM A-775, A- 884, D-3963, and AASHTO No. M284, or hot dip galvanizing conforming to ASTM A-1 53 and AASHTO No. M232. Components of the MCP system that are to be coated will be as noted on the contract and shop drawings. G. Accessory Components 1. Centralizers are typically used in the bond zone to insure that a minimum ' grout cover of %z" encapsulates the prestressing steel. Centralizers may not be necessary in the free stressing zone dependent on the diameters of the smooth plastic sleeve and the drill hole. Centralizers are to be manufactured from P.V.C. Class 200, ASTM D-2241, Schedule 40, ASTM D-1785, and AASHTO No. R6 which is non -detrimental to the prestressing steel. 2. External plastic end caps are used for encasing the outer end of the All - Thread -Bar and hex nut with either grout or corrosion preventative grease when it will be permanently exposed to the environment. Some MCP bar sizes can use a Williams Black Fiber. Reinforced Nylon End Cap with o -ring seal. This end cap meets ASTM D4066 material specifications and Florida DOT Specification 462-4.2.4 for Permanent End Caps including minimum pressure rating. The standard end caps are tapped for threading directly onto the end of the All -Thread -Bar. A push -on version of the end cap is available for applications where the bolt is on an angle to the bearing plate. The end cap material shall conform to a P.V.C. Schedule 40, P.V.C. 1120, ASTM D- 1785. 3. Miscellaneous Accessory Components such as low density polyethylene grout tube(s), duct tape, and nylon cable ties are used for securing the assembly during insertion into the drill hole and the grouting operation. They shall be non -detrimental to the other MCP components or the grout. 02451 - Rock Anchors 02451-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02451- ROCK ANCHORS (continued) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING PROCEDURES A. MCP anchor systems are shipped with pregrouted and/or greased sleeve sections and should be handled with additional care to insure that no damage results to external coatings, sleeves, or internal grout. B. The MCP systems are normally shipped lying horizontal without blocking on a flatbed carrier (if possible) or in bundles of not more than three bolts each. Bundles have multiple banding points to help prevent bending of the bolt that could cause cracking of the internal grout layer. The use of the multiple pickup points (a spreader beam is recommended for this purpose) is required to decrease the possibility of cantilever deflections and sagging between pickup points during transportation loading/unloading operations, movement to installation sites and insertion into prepared anchorage holes. Neither MCP anchors shipped in bundles nor as • individual anchors should be dropped, dragged, or pulled off a transportation vehicle. C. If the exposed threaded section of the MCP anchor is to be field cut, it is recommended that it be sawn with a portable handsaw or cut with an abrasive cutoff wheel which will not generate overheating of the area of the anchor where internal threaded tension components are intended for use. The use of torch cutting is not recommended. 3.02 ANCHOR INSTALLATION A. Anchor Preparation Holes for installation of bonded rock or soil anchors shall be drilled at the locations and orientations indicated on the contract drawings. Hole lengths and diameters shall be according to the Manufacturer's recommendations. Holes are to be over -drilled at least 1'-0" in length. 2. Drilling equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Construction Manager. The holes shall be drilled using properly sharpened bits operated in such a manner as to produce straight holes. Unacceptable holes shall be completely filled with fast -setting grout. 3. All drill holes shall be blown clean with compressed air at a minimum pressure of 25 PSI introduced at the bottom of the hole upon completion of drilling and again immediately before installation of the anchors. The length of each drill hole shall be checked to ensure the anchor will have the required embedment and will project the required length from the surface. 4. Anchors shall be cleaned of all loose materials prior to installation in the hole. All threads, both on the bar and connector(s), shall be free of rust and burrs, and nuts and couplings shall be free running on the threads of the bar. A thread lubricant shall be applied over the entire exposed external thread and contact surfaces. 5. Bar sections shall be joined (when applicable) together with high -strength stop -type couplings and threaded together until each section stops in the approximate middle of the couplings. ' 02451 - Rock Anchors 02451-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 J IF SECTION 02451 - ROCK ANCHORS (continued) 6. Centralizers shall be installed at approximately 10'-0" o.c. within the bonded length of the anchor. Grout tubes shall be fastened along the length of the bolt. 7. During installation, bars shall not be unduly forced or impacted into holes which might cause even temporary bends to occur anywhere along the length of the bolts resulting in abrasive damage to coatings or to the exposed threaded section of the anchor that is intended for use with an internally threaded (nut or coupling) component. 8. The water -cement ratio of the grout shall be between 0.40 and 0.45 by weight. Grout shall be thoroughly mixed in a grout plant approved by the Construction Manager, shall be free from lumps, and shall be pumped in to the hole. Placement methods shall ensure that the entire annular space surrounding each anchor is completely filled. Pumping shall continue until a steady stream is noted flowing from around the bearing plate hole. 9. Grout for anchoring the rock anchor shall attain a compressive strength of 3,000 PSI before testing. B. Anchor Testing A performance test will be performed on one anchor and shall be load tested using the following procedures. 1. Load shall be applied using a center pull jack. The jack shall have been calibrated within 60 days prior to the work. The load shall be applied using a suitable load frame. 2. Creep and extension movement shall be measured with a dial indicator graduated on 0.001 inch increments and recorded. 3. An alignment load of 10% of the test load shall be applied, the dial gauge read, recorded and then the load shall be increased steadily and uniformly, using the standard load increments for performance testing as defined in Section 4.3.7.1 of the Post Tensioning Institute's (PTI) Post Tensioning Manual to the required test load. Acceptable performance is defined as total movement between the alignment load and test load being less than the elastic extension assuming one-half of the bonded length de -bonds during testing. 4. The test load shall be held for 60 minutes. Creep movements greater than 0.040 inch between 6 minutes and 60 minutes will require a sustained creep test to be performed. 5. Any anchor failing to hold its load or failing its creep test shall be replaced. Replacement anchors shall be installed as designated by the Engineer. 6. A liftoff test shall be performed a minimum of 48 hours after the initial lock - off load and to be within 5% of the specified lock -off load of the anchor. The liftoff test shall show an anchor load within 10% of the specified transfer load. I L 4 Li I I I I II I FT I I I 02451 - Rock Anchors 02451-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' FT SECTION 02451 - ROCK ANCHORS (continued) C. Final Grouting After testing and final lock off loads are prestressed on the anchor, grout shall be injected into the free -stressing zone through a grout tube from the lowest gravitational point. Grouting shall continue until a steady flow of grout is noted exiting around the grout tube. Grout shall also be placed into the PVC end cap and the cap fixed into place. END OF SECTION 02451 02451 - Rock Anchors 02451-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02535 - MANHOLE TESTING Ii I U I PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Description I. This section describes manhole testing to effectively confirm the watertight integrity of new manholes. B. Testing Observations and Guarantee Period 1. The testing required shall be performed by the Contractor at all new manholes and documented to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 2. Any new manholes that are observed to be leaking by the Engineer shall be subject to additional repairs and retested by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Related Sections 1. Section 02601 — Cast -in -Place Manholes 2. Section 02602 — Pre -Cast Concrete Manholes PART 2- MATERIALS II NOT USED I U T I I I I PART 3- 3.01 INFILTRATION TESTING: A. All new manholes shall be vacuum tested by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer for sources of infiltration. Testing will be made during high groundwater conditions, wherever possible. B. Manholes shall be tested after installation with all connections (existing and/or proposed) in place. Drop -connections and gas sealing connections shall be installed prior to testing. The lines entering the manhole shall be temporarily plugged with the plugs braced to prevent them from being drawn into the manhole. The plugs shall be installed in the lines beyond drop -connections, gas sealing connections, etc. The test head shall be placed inside the frame at the top of the manhole and inflated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A vacuum of 10 inches of mercury shall be drawn, and the vacuum pump will be turned off. With the valve closed, the level of vacuum shall be read after the required test time. If the drop in the level is less than 1 -inch of mercury (final vacuum greater than 9 -inches of mercury), the manhole will have passed the vacuum test. After a successful test, the temporary plugs will be removed. The required test time is determined from Table I. I02535 -Manhole Testing 02535- 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02535 - MANHOLE TESTING (continued) 3.02 Table I MINIMUM TIME REQUIRED FOR A VACUUM DROP OF 1" H (10"Hg- 9"Hg) (MIN:SEC) DEPTH OF M.H. (DEPTH IN FT.) 48" M.H. 60" M.H. 72" M.H. 0-20' :40 :50 1:00 22' :44 :55 1:06 24' :48 100 1:12 26' :52 1:05 1:18 28' :56 1:10 1:24 30' 1:00 1:15 1:30 ADDITIONAL 2' DEPTHS -ADD FOR EACH 2' :04 :05 :06 C. Manhole vacuum levels observed to drop greater than 1 inch of mercury (Final vacuum less than 9 inches of mercury) will have failed the test and will require additional rework. The Contractor shall make the necessary repairs at no additional compensation. The manhole shall then be retested as described above until a successful test is made. INFLOW TESTING: A. All new manholes shall be dyed water tested. Manholes shall be dye water tested in the presence of the Engineer. The dye test shall consist of applying a concentrated dye solution around the manhole frame. Dyed water shall be applied for at least ten (10) minutes. B. Manholes observed to be actively leaking will have failed the test and will not be acceptable. Manholes failing the test will require the necessary repairs at no additional compensation. The manhole shall then be retested as described above until a successful test is made. PART 4- MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.01 CONTRACT PRICES: A. No contract unit prices are established for manhole testing. However,'specific, sections of the Contract Documents indicate that certain percentages of various contract prices will not be eligible for payment unless testing has been performed. END OF SECTION 02535 1 I I I1 .1 U I I L [l I I 02535 -Manhole Testing 02535-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 02601 - CAST -IN -PLACE MANHOLES PART1- GENERAL ' 1.01 SCOPE: A. This section covers work for the construction of manholes. The Contractor shall be ' responsible for the correct final elevations and slopes of manholes and the proper setting and elevations of manhole rings and covers. B. Manholes of different diameters are required on this project. See the Plans for ' manhole locations and sizes. C. The top surface of the barrel shall be constructed truly plumb and level and shall have a light broom finish. There shall be no exposed aggregate on the top edge of the ' barrel. D. Manholes where the top elevation is greater than 2 feet above the adjacent ground t shall use frames and covers conforming to Paragraph 2.5 of this specification. Manholes where the top elevation is less than 2 feet above adjacent ground shall use frames and covers conforming to either Paragraph 2.4 or 2.5 of this specification, at the Contractor's discretion. ' 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: IA. Section 02200 — Excavation, Embankment, Backfill, and Grading B. Section 03300 — Cast -In -Place Concrete 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: ' A. Manhole testing is specified in Section 02535. ' B. Concrete testing is specified in Section 03300. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS: IA. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) latest edition ASTM A48 — Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings 4.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Section 01330- Submittals: Procedures for submittals ' B. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. PART 2- MATERIALS 2.01 CONCRETE: A. Concrete is specified in Section 03300 — Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1 I 02601 -Cast -In -Place Manholes 02601 -1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I SECTION 02601 - CAST -IN -PLACE MANHOLES (continued) 2.02 INVERTS: A. Inverts shall be formed as shown in the detail drawings. B. Concrete for inverts shall be Class A as specified in Section 03300 — Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2.03 STEPS: A. Manhole steps are not allowed. 2.04 NON -BOLTED FRAMES AND COVERS: A. Frames 1. Frame material shall be cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 35B or better. The frame shall exhibit a tensile strength of not less then 35,000 psi. 2. Frames for standard manholes shall be Neenah R -1726-A, or approved equal, and shall have 4 -3/4 -inch diameter holes drilled in the bottom flange. The holes shall be centered in the flange and shall be equally spaced 90 -degrees apart. 3. Bearing surfaces between the ring and cover shall be machine finished or ground to assure non -rocking fit in any position, and interchangeability. B. Covers 1. The cover shall form a water resistant seal between the frame and manhole cover surface. The cover shall have concealed pick holes and a machined bearing surface on the bottom of the casting. The cover shall conform to ASTM A48, Class 35B or better, for Gray Iron. The cover shall have a tensile strength of 35,000 psi. 2. A typical standard manhole cover design shall be Neenah R -1726-A or approved equal. 3. Covers shall set flush with the rim of the frame and shall have no larger than a 1/8 -inch gap between the frame and cover. 4. Bearing surfaces shall be machine finished. 5. Manhole lids shall have "SANITARY SEWER" cast on the lids. 2.05 HINGED MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS: A. Covers and frames shall conform to ASTM A48, Class 35B or better, for Gray Iron or equivalent ISO standard. Contractor shall provide verification of equivalency. B. Covers shall be hinged and incorporate a 90 degree blocking system to prevent accidental closure. C. Covers shall be one man operable using standard tools. D. Frames shall be circular with a 24" clear opening. E. The frame depth shall not exceed 4 inches, and the flange shall incorporate bedding slots, bolt holes and lifting eyes. F. Lids shall be lockable and lock/unlock hardware and tools shall be provided with each lid. G. Lids shall have "SANITARY SEWER" cast on the surface. 02601 -Cast -In -Place Manholes 02601-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I 1 I I 1 1 I I .1 I 11 I SECTION 02601 - CAST -IN -PLACE MANHOLES (continued) 2.06 COATING: A. The manhole, frame and cover shall be coated with material as determined by the Contractor. The material shall be certified to withstand chemical attacks from the sewage flow. 2.07 MANHOLE FRAME GASKET, FRAME SEAL, AND PIPE CONNECTIONS: A. The manhole frame -to -lid gasket, the seal between the frame and the concrete, and the gasket for pipe connections shall be as determined by the Contractor and shall be of a material that is certified to withstand chemical attacks from the sewage flow. B. The sealing device shall be capable of a 7° pipe deflection after installation without loss of sealing. The sealing device shall be manufactured expressly for embedment in the wall of concrete manholes. .2.08 STRUCTURAL GROUT: A. Grout proposed for use to adjust manhole rings to critical grades, such as those located in streets or parking lots, shall conform to Section 03600 — Grout. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION: A. Excavate to planned depth in accordance with Section 02200. B. Place concrete base. C. Place gaskets or water stops around pipe penetrations. D. Set forms to proper location and grades and in a truly vertical plane with appropriate blockouts and water stop seals for pipe penetrations. E. Place transit mix Class A concrete in accordance with Section 03300. F. Place approved water stops between concrete pours. G. Bolt manhole frame to manhole as shown in details when concrete has cured 24 hours. Place cover in frame and bolt down, if applicable. H. Place coating over all exposed metal and concrete surfaces. Manhole frame and cover are to be coated prior to installation on manhole taking care that lid and frame still fit. I. Backfill in accordance with Section 02200 after concrete has cured at least 48 hours. J. Test manhole in accordance with Section 02535. END OF SECTION 02601 L 02601 -Cast -In -Place Manholes 02601-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 [II SECTION 02602 - PRE -CAST CONCRETE MANHOLES PART I- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. This section covers work for the construction of pre -cast manholes. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct final elevations and slopes of manholes and the proper setting and elevations of manhole rings and covers. B. Manholes of different diameters are required on this project. See the Plans for manhole locations and sizes. C. The top surface of the barrel shall be truly plumb and level and shall have a light broom finish. There shall be no exposed aggregate on the top edge of the barrel. D. Manholes where the top elevation is greater than 2 feet above adjacent ground shall use frames and covers conforming to Paragraph 2.5 of this specification. Manholes where the top elevation is less than 2 feet above adjacent ground shall use frames and covers conforming to either Paragraph 2.4 or 2.5 of this specification, at the Contractor's discretion. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 01110— Summary of Work. B. Section 02200 — Excavation, Embankment, Backfill, and Grading C. Section 03300 — Cast -in -Place Concrete 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manhole testing is specified in Section 02535. B. Concrete testing is specified in Section 03300. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) latest edition ASTM A48 — Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings ASTM C478 — Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Section 01330 — Submittals: Procedures for submittals B. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. PART2- GENERAL 2:01 PRE -CAST MANHOLE: A. Pre -cast manholes shall conform to the specifications for Pre -Cast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections, ASTM C478. B. The top section shall be an eccentric cone section conforming to ASTMC478. 02602 -Pre -Cast Concrete Manholes 02602 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02602 - PRE -CAST CONCRETE MANHOLES (continued) C. Integral pre -cast floors shall be allowed, subject to the approval of the Owner. Cast - in -place floors shall be allowed. D. Inverts may be pre -cast or field formed into the base section of the manhole, but in either case, shall meet the proper sewer line gradient and alignment shown in the Plans. E. Precast concrete manhole section shall notbe delivered to the site until .the sections are at least ten (10) days old. Two lift holes shall be cast into each cone or riser section for the purpose of handling and laying. The Contractor shall provide and install water plugs into lift holes after laying the sections. F. Cutouts in the bottom sections shall be appropriate for the pipe being laid. I. Bottom sections shall have clear identifying markings to assure their being used in the right locations. 2. Suitable openings for the inlet and outlet pipe shall be cored into the base section (and into the riser sections for drop or "pass -through" manholes). 3. These openings shall be true size, circular and located as needed to maintain the proper sewer gradient for each manhole. G. Manufactured pipe -to -manhole connectors shall be installed at each opening to assure a flexible watertight seal of the pipe to the manhole. 1. The connector shall be specifically designed for the pipe material and size being utilized on the project. 2. No adhesives or lubricants shall be employed in the installation of the connector into the manhole. 3. Joint seals will be as determined by the Contractor and shall be of a material that is certified to withstand chemical attacks from the sewage flow. 4. All stainless steel parts of the connector shall be totally non-magnetic Series 304 Stainless except the worm screw for tightening the steel band which shall be Series 305 Stainless. The worm screw shall be torqued by a break- away type torque wrench set for 60 - 70 in/lbs. 5. The connector shall be installed in the manhole so that it shall have a minimum cover of 3" of concrete at all points and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. H. Each manhole shall be made up with as few risers as possible. The joints between risers shall be leak proofed with a mechanical water stop seal as determined by the Contractor and shall be of a material that is certified to withstand chemical attacks from sewage flow. The mechanical seals shall meet the requirements of ASTM C- 443 and C-361. There shall be a suitable spigot cast into the tongue of each component to contain the seal. The seal shall consist of a supporting compression section and a thin sliding flap which has been pre -lubricated. When the sections are fitted together, the edge of the bell shall encounter the flap which then slides towards the compression section. I. No more than eight inches of concentric rings shall be allowed to bring the manhole to finished grade. 2.02 INVERTS: A. Inverts shall be formed as shown on the detail drawings. 025602 -Pre -Cast Concrete Manholes 02602-2 1 1 I I I U I I IT 1 I I I I RN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I SECTION 02602 - PRE -CAST CONCRETE MANHOLES (continued) B. Concrete for inverts shall be Class A as specified in Section 03300 — Cast -in -Place Concrete. 2.03 STEPS: A. Manhole steps not required. 2.04 NON -BOLTED FRAMES AND COVERS: A. Frames: 1. Frame material shall be cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 35B or better. The frame shall exhibit a tensile strength of not less than 35,000 psi. 2. Frames for standard manholes shall be Neenah R -1726-A, or approved equal, and shall have 4 -3/4 -inch diameter holes drilled into the bottom flange. The holes shall be centered in the flange and shall be equally spaced 90 -degrees apart. 3. Bearing surfaces between the ring and cover shall be machine finished or ground to assure nonrocking fit in any position, and interchangeability. B. Covers I I [J I 1. The cover shall form a water resistant seal between the frame and manhole cover surface. The cover shall have concealed pick holes and a machined bearing surface on the bottom of the casting. The cover shall conform to ASTM A48, Class 35B or better, for Gray Iron. The cover shall have a tensile strength of 35,000 psi. 2. A typical standard manhole cover design shall be Neenah R -1726-A or approved equal. 3. Covers shall set flush with the rim of the frame and shall have no larger than a 1/8 -inch gap between the frame and cover. 4. Bearing surfaces shall be machine finished. 5. Lids shall have "SANITARY SEWER" cast on the surface. 2.05 HINGED MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS: A. Covers and frames shall conform to ASTM A48, Class 35B or better, for Gray Iron or equivalent ISO standard. Contractor shall provide verification of equivalency. B. Covers shall be hinged and incorporate a 90 degree blocking system to prevent accidental closure. C. Covers shall be one man operable using standard tools. D. Frames shall be circular with a 24" clear opening. E. The frame depth shall not exceed 4 inches, and the flange shall incorporate bedding slots, bolt holes, and lifting eyes. F. Lids shall be lockable and lock/unlock hardware and tools shall be provided with each lid. G. Lids shall have "SANITARY SEWER" cast on the surface. 025602 -Pre -Cast Concrete Manholes 02602-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I SECTION 02602 - PRE -CAST CONCRETE MANHOLES (continued) 2.06 COATING: A. The manhole, frame, and cover shall be coated with material as determined by the ' Contractor. The material shall be certified to withstand chemical attacks from the sewage flow. 2.07 MANHOLE FRAME GASKET, FRAME SEAL, AND PIPE CONNECTIONS: ' A. The manhole frame -to -lid gasket, the seal between the frame and the concrete, and ' the gasket for pipe connections shall be as determined by the Contractor and shall be of a material that is certified to withstand chemical attacks from the sewage flow. B. The sealing device shall be capable of a 7° pipe deflection after installation without loss of sealing. The sealing device shall be manufactured expressly for embedment in the wall of concrete manholes. 2.08 STRUCTURAL GROUT: A. Grout proposed for use to adjust manhole rings to critical grades, such as those located in streets or parking lots, shall conform to Section 03600 — Grout. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION: A. Excavate to planned depth in accordance with Section 02200. B. Place concrete base. ' C. Place pre -cast manhole in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, plumb, and to grade. D. Plug lifting holes on inside and outside. Grout lift holes on both sides. E. Manhole ring may be cast into top section or may be cast -in -place. F. Place concrete and form invert. G. Bolt manhole frame to manhole as shown in details when concrete has cured 24 hours. Place cover in frame and bolt down, if applicable. H. Place coating over all exposed metal and concrete surfaces. Manhole frame and cover are to be coated prior to installation on manhole taking care that lid and frame still fit. I. Backfill in accordance with Section 02200. J. Test manhole in accordance with section 02535. END OF SECTION 02602 Il 025602 -Pre -Cast Concrete Manholes 02602-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02616 - POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. This Section covers polyethylene encasement of iron pipe and fittings. • B. Two layers of polyethylene material, either in tubing form or flat sheets or rolls, shall be placed around all Ductile Iron pipe, fitting, valves, and any other appurtenances as directed by the Owner. Ductile iron pipe and appurtenances shall be completely encased in polyethylene tubing materials. C. It is not necessary that the polyethylene material should form an enclosure that is absolutely air or water tight, but rather that it should prevent direct contact between the pipe and the soil. 1.02 RELATED SECTION: A. Section 02730 — Ductile Iron Pipe. 1.03 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Comply with manufacturers' recommendations. B. Protect polyethylene encasements from prolonged exposure to sunlight. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 POLYETHYLENE: A. Comply with ANSIIAWWA CI 05, latest revision. B. The material shall be made from virgin polyethylene and shall have the following characteristics: Minimum Thickness 8 mils ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C (black) Grade E-1 Maximum Flow Index 0.4 Minimum Tensile Strength 1,200 psi Minimum Elongation 300% Dielectric Strength (Raw Material) Volume Resistivity Minimum Dielectric Strength (Sheet Material) 800V/mil 2.02 TAPE: A. Tape for field application shall be Polyken #900 or Scotchwrap #50 or equal and shall be at least two (2) inches wide. 02616 -Polyethylene Encasement 02616 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 L SECTION 02616 - POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT (continued) PART3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: ' A. Contractor shall take care to ensure there are no holes in the polyethylene encasement before pipe is laid -on bedding and before backfilling commences. B. Any tears or holes in the polyethylene encasement are to be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. All pipe shall be wrapped with two (2) layers of polyethylene encasement. ' 3.02 POLYETHYLENE TUBE INSTALLATION: A. Assemble tube on pipe or fitting as specified in ANSUAW W A C 105. B. In dry trench conditions, tube may be assembled on pipe in trench. ' C. In wet trench conditions, tube must be assembled on pipe before lowering into trench. D. Seal any opening in tube with tape as specified. E. Wrap odd -shaped iron appurtenances with a split length of polyethylene tube. 3.03 INSTALL POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT: A. Use Method A or B as specified in ANSI/AWWA C105, and as described below, for slip-on joints. B. Use Method A as specified in ANSUAW W A C105, and as described below, for slip- on joints. C. Method Descriptions: 1. Method A: Cut the polyethylene tube to a length about two (2) feet longer than the length of the pipe section. Slip the tube around the pipe, centering it to provide a one (1) foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section, and bunching it accordion fashion lengthwise until it clears the pipe ends. Lower the pipe into the trench and make up the pipe joint with the preceding section of pipe. A shallow bell hole must be made at joints to facilitate installation of the polyethylene tube. After assembling the pipe joint, make the overlap of the polyethylene tube. Pull the bunched polyethylene from the preceding length of pipe, slip it over the end of the new length of pipe and secure it in place. Then, slip the end of the polyethylene from the next pipe section over the end of the previous wrap until it overlaps the joint at the end of the preceding length of pipe. Secure the overlap in place. Take up the slack width to make a snug, but not tight, fit along the barrel of the pipe, securing the fold at quarter points with tape. C I 02616 -Polyethylene Encasement 02616-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02616 - POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT (continued) 2. Method B: Cut the polyethylene tube to a length about one (1) foot shorter than the length of the pipe section. Slip the tube around the pipe, centering it to provide six (6) inches of bare pipe at each end. Make the polyethylene snug, but not tight, and then secure the ends. Before making up a joint, slip a three (3) foot length of polyethylene over the joint, overlapping the polyethylene previously installed on each adjacent section of pipe by at least one (1) foot; make snug and secure each end. END OF SECTION 02616 02616 -Polyethylene Encasement . 02616 - 3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02622 - PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. This Section covers polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe for potable water and wastewater ' systems. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: IA. Section 00700 — General Conditions B. Section 00800 — Supplementary Conditions IC. Section 02200 - Excavation, Embankment, Backfill and Grading D. Section 02221 - Trenching, Backfill, and Compaction E. Section 02640 — Valves, Hydrants, and Accessories ' 1.03 OUALITY ASSURANCE: IA. No field testing of pipe, except pressure testing of completed systems will be required unless evidence develops that material is not as specified or as certified by manufacturer. ' B. Affidavits of Compliance and Independent Laboratory Inspection 1. All PVC pipe fittings furnished and installed on this project shall be inspected and tested by the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall furnish to ' the Engineer, prior to delivery, certificates stating that all pipe will be manufactured in compliance with these Specifications. The certificate shall also fully describe the pipes proposed to be furnished. ' 2. If evidence appears that all provisions of the applicable ASTM/AWWA Standards have not been complied with after the pipe has been delivered, the Owner will require such field testing and sampling as necessary for certified statements of compliance to the provisions of said standards to be furnished ' by an approved independent laboratory. The cost for the testing and sampling or job delay will be the responsibility of the pipe supplier if the pipe is not in compliance. The Owner will pay the cost of the testing and ' sampling if the pipe is in compliance with the Specifications. However, the Owner will not be responsible for job delay. The independent laboratory may be chosen by the Owner or the pipe manufacturer, as approved by ' Engineer, and shall be approved by Engineer. C. Joint lubricant containers must be labeled with manufacturer's name and must be labeled as pipe joint lubricant. ' D. Stamp manufacturer's name or trademark, ASTM standard, SDR, and Cell Class on each pipe. 1.04 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. ' B. Minimize handling of pipe below 25° F. 02622 -Plastic Pipe and Fittings 02622 - RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I SECTION 02622 - PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS (continued) PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Potable Water System 1. PVC pipe 2 inches in size shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D2241 and shall have an SDR of 17. PVC pipe 4 inches through 12 inches in size shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA Specification C900 and shall have a DR of 14; PVC pipe 14 inches through 36 inches in diameter shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C905 and shall have a DR of 25. 2. The plastic material used in making the pipe shall be clean, virgin, Cell Classification 12454B PVC compound conforming to ASTM Resin Specification D1784, latest revision. Clean, reworked material generated from the manufacturer's own production shall be acceptable as long as the pipe produced meets all the requirements of the Specifications. Nominal laying length shall be 20 feet. 3. Joints for 2 -inch plastic pipe shall conform to ASTM Specification D3139. Joints for plastic pipe 6 inches and larger shall conform to AWWA C900 or C905, as applicable. 4. Fittings for PVC pipe 2 inches in diameter shall comply with ASTM Specification D3139, "Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Electrometric Seals". 5. Fittings for PVC pipe 3 inches and larger shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C153/A2 1.53. B. Elastomeric Gaskets 1. Supply gaskets manufactured in compliance with ASTM F447 and with markings as follows: a. Year of manufacture. b. Color striped on the side of the gasket that faces open bell. I I H I H I C. Trace wire shall be 14 -gauge coated copper for underground burial and shall be looped around the pipe at least once per joint and connected to all valves and fittings. D. Detectable tape shall be "Detect Tape" as manufactured' by Allen Systems, Inc., or approved equal, and shall consist of a minimum thickness of .035 mils solid aluminum foil encased in a productive inert jacket that is impervious to all known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents, and solvents found in the soil. The minimum overall thickness of unit weight of 2-1/2 pounds/1 inch x 1,000 feet. The tape shall be color coded and imprinted with the message as follows: Type of Color Utility Code Legend I I I Water Safety Precaution Blue Caution, Buried Water Line Below Sewer Safety Precaution Green Caution, Buried Sewer Line Below 02622 -Plastic Pipe and Fittings 02622 - 2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 02622 - PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS (continued) PART 3- 3.01 GENERAL: A. Pipe Detection Tape shall be provided in all trenches for water and sewer line • construction. Installation shall be per manufacturer's recommendation and shall be as close as practical to finished grade while maintaining a required minimum of • 18 inches between the detection tape and the top of any pipe line. B. Trace wire shall be laid adjacent to all PVC installations and shall be looped around the pipe at least once per joint and connected to all valves and fittings. At valves and meter box settings, the trace wire shall be brought up into the valve of the meter box. A tracing test shall be required prior to final acceptance. I C. -Pipe shall be laid in conformance with the standard, details and as recommended by manufacturer. D. Plastic pipe shall be kept shaded and shall be covered with bedding material immediately after installation. Pipe shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. No rock or debris shall be placed in trench within 6 inches of pipe. F. The interior of all pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter before being installed and shall be kept clean until the work has been accepted. All joint contact surfaces shall be kept clean until the jointing is completed. G. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being installed. No debris, tools, clothing, or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. H. Whenever pipe laying is stopped, the open end of the line shall be sealed with a watertight plug. All water that may have entered the trench shall be removed prior to removing the plug. It is essential that no mud, trench water, or other foreign matter be permitted to enter the pipe line at any time. I. Pipe lines or runs intended to be straight shall be installed straight. Deflections from .a straight line taken in joints or in pipe shall not be greater than that recommended :by the pipe manufacturer. J. Either shorter pipe sections or special bends shall be installed where the alignment or grade requires them. K. Pipe shall be protected from lateral displacement by means of pipe embedment material installed as provided in the trench backfill specification. L. Under no circumstances shall pipe be installed in water and no pipe shall be installed ,in unsuitable weather or trench conditions. M. Pipe shall be installed with the bell ends facing the direction of run except when making closures. N. Mechanical joints shall be carefully assembled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If effective sealing is not obtained, the joint shall be disassembled, thoroughly cleaned, and reassembled. Over tightening bolts to compensate for poor or improper installation practice shall not be permitted. 02622 -Plastic Pipe and Fittings 02622 -3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 LJ SECTION 02622 - PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS (continued) O. Boltless gasketed joints shall be assembled following all instructions and recommendations of the pipe manufacturer, relative to gasket installation and other jointing operations, and shall be lubricated with heavy vegetable soap solution immediately before joint is completed. END OF SECTION 02622 02622 -Plastic Pipe and Fittings 02622-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' I II SECTION 02640 - VALVES & ACCESSORIES PART1. GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Valves B. Valve Boxes C. Related Items 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 02221 — Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting B. Section 02622 — Plastic Pipes and Fittings 1.03 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Comply with manufacturers' recommendations. B. Protect polyethylene encasements from prolonged exposure to sunlight. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVES: A. Gate valves 16 inches and smaller 1. Gate valves shall be resilient seated type, non -rising stem gate valves, in conformance with the requirements of the latest revision of AWWA C509 — Resilient Seated Gate Valves, 3 Through 12 NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems. 2. All gate valves shall be designed for a minimum of 200 -psi working pressure. 3. All gate valves shall be M&H, AWWA C509 Resilient Seated Gate Valves or approved equal. Approved equals are Waterous, Mueller, Clow, M&H, ' American Valve & Hydrant, Kennedy, or equal. 4. All gate valves shall have O-ring stem seals. The O-ring stem seal shall be so designed that the seal above the stem collar can be replaced with the valve I. under pressure in the full -open position. 5. Gate valves shall have standard mechanical joint ends unless indicated on the Plans. ' 6. Tapping valve ends shall be flanged by MJ. 7. Buried gate valves shall be designed for operation with a nominal 2 -inch square -operating nut. Operators shall be designed to open with a ' counterclockwise rotation of the operator nut. All buried valves shall have operator extensions installed to bring the operator nut to within 1 foot of grade. The operator extensions shall be secured with set screws and shall have a guide, 8. Handwheels for gate valves shall be in conformance with AWWA C509. 9. The interior and exterior of the valve body, bonnet, and seal plate shall have factory applied fusion bonded epoxy coating meeting AWWA C550, latest ' revision. 10. The valve shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C509, latest revision. 02640 -Valves & Accessories 02640 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I SECTION 02640 - VALVES & ACCESSORIES (continued) B. Butterfly valves 18 inches and larger: 1. Butterfly valves shall be Class 250B in conformance with the requirements , of AWWA C504, latest revision, for "Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves." All butterfly valves shall be groundhog type, as furnished by Henry Pratt Company, or approved equal. 2. The valve body shall be constructed of cast iron ASTM A126, Class B, and shall have integrally cast mechanical joint ends unless alternate valve ends are indicated on the Plans. Body thickness shall be in strict accordance with AWWA C504, latest revision, Class 250B. 3. All butterfly valves shall be of tight closing, synthetic rubber -seat type, as follows: a. Valves 20 inches (normal diameter) and smaller shall have bonded seats which are simultaneously molded in, vulcanized, and bonded to the body. Seat bond must withstand 75 pounds pull under test procedure ASTM D429, Method B. b. On valves 24 -inches and larger, all seats shall be of a synthetic rubber compound. Seals shall be retained in the valve body by mechanical means without retaining rings segments, screws, or hardware of any kind in the flow stream. Seats shall be field adjustable around the full 360° without interruption and have a plurality of grooves mating with a spherical disc edge -sealing surface. Valve seats shall be field adjustable around the full 360° circumference and replaceable without dismantling operator, disc, or shaft and without removing the valve from the line. 4. Valve discs shall be as follows: a. Valves 12 inches through 20 inches nominal diameter. Valve discs shall be constructed of alloy cast iron ASTM A436, Type I. b. Valves 24 inches nominal diameter. Valve discs shall be cast iron with a stainless -steel seating edge. 5. The valve shaft shall be constructed of stainless steel and the bearings shall be corrosion resistant and self-lubricating. The valves shall be equipped with a totally enclosed type operator, fully gasketed and grease packed, suitable for direct burial. The operator shall be designed for operation with a nominal 2 -inch square operating nut for use with a T -wrench. Operators shall be designed to open with a counterclockwise rotation of the operator nut. 6. All valves shall have factory applied fusion bonded epoxy coating meeting AWWA C550 latest revision. ' 7. Where valves are specifically shown and detailed on the plans to be painted, the valves shall be delivered to the job site factor blasted, cleaned, and primed with one coat of Kop-Coat 340 gold primer or Kop-Coat 633 LCF Primer, or approved equal. 2.02 VALVE BOXES: A. Valve boxes shall be constructed of cast iron. The valve box and appurtenances shall ' consist of a base, extensions as required, and a top section with a drop lid. The lid shall be marked as appropriate for the application.. All valve boxes shall be compatible with the gate, ballcentric plug or butterfly valves for which they are provided and shall be manufactured for use in roadways. 02640 -Valves & Accessories 02640 - 2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02640 - VALVES & ACCESSORIES (continued) 2.03 TAPPING SLEEVES: A. Tapping sleeves shall be designed for 200 psi and shall be JCM Type 432 for pipe 6 - inches through 12 -inches and JCM 412 for pipe greater than 12 -inches, or approved equal. B. Tapping sleeves shall be vinyl coated. .:2.04 TRACER WIRE: A. Tracer wire shall be 14 -gauge coated copper for underground burial. 2.05 SERVICE CONNECTIONS: A. Materials for water main taps, service lines, and meter box assemblies shall be as follows: 1. Copper Pipe Type K soft copper 2. Polyethylene Pipe 200 psi, DR -9, Driscopipe 3. 3/4" Corporation Stop Mueller B-25008 4. 3/4" U Branch, 7.5" width Mueller H-1 5363 5. 5/8" X 3/4" X 12" meter yoke Mueller B-2404 6. 3/4" Tail Piece Mueller H-14222 7. 18" Cast Iron Flat Meter Lid C-109, Crouch Foundry 8. 18" x 24" PVC Meter Box Mueller/McCullough 9. #501824.30T 0.275 wall thickness B. Tapping saddles for PVC and Ductile Iron shall be as manufactured by Mueller and Romac, respectively. C. The meter shall be provided by OWNER. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: 11 PT II I1 A. Valves and valve boxes shall be set plumb. B. Each valve shall be inspected before installation to ensure that all foreign substances have been removed from within the valve body, and shall be opened and closed to see that all parts are in first-class working condition. C. A valve box as specified shall be provided for each valve used in a buried service application. The valve box shall be installed so as not to transmit shock or stress to the valve. The valve box shall be centered and plumb over the operating nut of the valve with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished surface. The valve box shall be backfilled evenly around its perimeter with the select material. The backfill material shall be hand tamped so that the ground will not settle after placement of the concrete collar. 02640 -Valves & Accessories 02640 - 3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02640 - VALVES & ACCESSORIES (continued) D. All valve box lids shall have an 18 -inch square concrete collar placed around them. The collar shall be centered on the valve box lid and shall be 6 inches thick. The top of the pad shall be flush with the top of the box and the surrounding ground or roadway surface. Valve box collars shall not be constructed until every item of cleanup has been completed. END OF SECTION 02640 02640 -Valves & Accessories 02640 - 4 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' I SECTION 02665 - WATER SYSTEMS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. This section covers the actions necessary to maintain the existing and expanded system. Interruption to the existing system's quality and pressure must be kept at a minimum. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 02622 — Plastic Pipes and Fittings B. Section 02640 — Valves, Hydrants & Accessories PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL GAUGES, METERS PUMPS AND OTHER EQUIPMENT NECESSARY TO MAINTAIN THE TEST PRESSURE AS SPECIFIED. PART 3- 3.01 GENERAL: A. This section outlines the testing of pipe materials, joints, and/or other materials incorporated into the construction of water mains to determine leakage and watertightness. All pressure pipeline shall be tested in accordance with the latest revision of Section 4 of AWWA C600 and as specified herein. B. Fire hydrant valves shall be open during the testing. 3.02 TESTING: A. After water line and service lines have been laid, including all taps and meter ' settings, all newly installed pipe or any valved section thereof shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of at least 150 percent of the working pressure at the point of testing and not less than 125 percent of the working pressure at the highest point t along the test section or 200 psi, whichever is greater. The test shall be performed for a period of at least 2 hours. B. The leakage test shall be conducted concurrently with the pressure test. Leakage is ' defined as the quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipeline, or any valved section thereof, to maintain pressure within 5 psi of the specified test pressure after the air in the pipeline has been expelled and the pipeline has been filled ' with water. Leakage shall not be measured by a drop in pressure in a test section over a period of time. 1 I 02665 -Water Systems 02665 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 II SECTION 02665 - WATER SYSTEMS (continued) No pipeline installation will be accepted if the leakage is greater than that determined by the following formula: ' L _ SDV P 133200 1 where: L = allowable leakage, (gallons per hour) S = length of pipe tested, (feet) ' D = nominal diameter of pipe, (inches) P = average test pressure during test (psig) C. If leakage is greater than specified above, Contractor shall, at his own expense, locate and make repairs as necessary until leakage is within specified allowance. D. Repair visible leaks regardless of the amount of leakage. 3.03 DISINFECTION: A. All newly installed water mains shall be disinfected in accordance with ANSI/AW W A C651, Section 4.4.3 (Continuous Feed Method), and as specified herein. ' B. All pipes are to be disinfected after installation and successful pressure testing is completed by holding a chlorine solution of at least 50 mg/l strength in the pipe for 24 hours. At the end of the 24 hour period, the treated water shall contain no less than 25 mg/] of chlorine throughout the length of the main. C. As the heavily chlorinated water flows past fittings and valves, related valves and hydrants shall be operated so as to disinfect new appurtenances and pipe branches. Extreme care should be taken by the Contractor to prevent heavily chlorinated water from flowing back into water mains in active service. The cost of chemicals shall be borne by the Contractor. D. After the lines have been disinfected, they shall be thoroughly flushed until chlorine residual measurements show that the concentration in the water leaving the main is no higher than that generally prevailing in the system or is acceptable for domestic use, or less than lmg/I. E. Bacteriological samples shall then be collected from each respective section of the new main on two consecutive days and shall be submitted to the Arkansas Department of Health for analysis. The samples shall be collected by the Owner. F. The lines shall not be placed in service until 'the results of two consecutive daily samples showing negative reports for coliform bacteria (safe) are received by the Engineer or Contractor and are submitted to the City Water and Sewer Department. .1 02665 -Water Systems 02665 - 2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 02665 - WATER SYSTEMS (continued) 3.04 CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER LINES: A. Make all valved connections to existing water lines prior to disinfection and testing. B. Disconnect existing water lines at points indicated on Drawings when notified by Engineer. Notification will occur after new water lines are approved. END OF SECTION 02665 02665 -Water Systems 02665 -3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02730 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE PART]- GENERAL ' 1.01 SCOPE: A. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and incidentals required to install forcemain and gravity sewer pipe where shown on the plans. Principal items shall include: excavation, pipe bedding, and installation, valve and fitting installation and backfilling, all as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 02221 — Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting B. Section 02640 — Valves, Hydrants & Accessories 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Compliance with specifications: 1. Furnish proof acceptable to the Owner, when called for during construction, that all sewer pipe installed equals or exceeds all requirements specified for ' this work. 2. If such work is not submitted or is unacceptable, replace all such items to conform to the specifications, and repair any damage, all at no cost to the I Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.01 PIPE MATERIAL: A. Sewer pipe material (forcemain and gravity lines) used on the project is designated on the plans as ductile iron pipe (DIP). 2.02 PIPE JOINTS: ' A. Pipe joints on new construction shall be standard joints for pipe material used. 2.03 DUCTILE IRON PIPE: ' A. Push -On Joint or Mechanical Joint Pipe 1. Pipe for gravity sewers and force mains shall conform to ANSI A21.51 (AWWA C151) and shall have a ceramic epoxy lining as described in the ' following section. Joints shall conform to ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C111) and may be either mechanical joint or push -on joint in sizes 24" or smaller. Ductile iron pipe 30" and larger shall have push -on type joints. I 2. Pipe shall have an outside bituminous coating with an inner ceramic epoxy lining unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER in writing. 3. Minimum pressure classes for ductile iron pipe shall be as follows, unless ' noted otherwise on the plans: 4"— 12" diameter: Pressure Class 350 14" — 24" diameter: Pressure Class 250 ' 30" diameter and over: Pressure Class 200 02730 -Ductile Iron Pipe 02730- 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02730 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE (continued) All pipe shall be designed for the working pressures listed above and shall have an additional surge allowance of at least 100 psi. 4. Pipe joints shall be boltless gasket type, American "Fastite", Clow "Bell- Tite", U.S. "Tyton" or equal. 5. All fittings shall be mechanical joint with Mega -lug restrainer glands or approved equal unless otherwise shown on plans. Fittings shall meet the requirements of ANSUAWWA C1 I0/A21.10 for full -body fittings or ANSI/AWWA CI53/A21.53 for compact fittings. Joints shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA Cl I I/A21.11. Thickness shall be in accordance with AWWA CI00, Class D. Fittings shall have an outside bituminous coating with an inner ceramic epoxy lining. B. Flanged Pipe 1. Pipe within wet wells and valve vaults shall be flanged pipe unless otherwise shown on the plans. 2. Ductile iron flanged pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA Specification A21.15, latest revision, for threaded on flange pipe. Minimum class of ductile iron pipe to be used for flanging shall be Class 53. Threaded on flanges shall be ductile iron only, in accordance with A21.10, and shall have "Ductile Iron" and country of origin cast on each flange. Linings and coatings shall be in accordance with ANSI A21.4. Flanges shall be ASA Class 125 and faced and drilled in accordance with ASA Specification B16.1. 3. Flange fittings shall be ductile iron Class 350 in accordance with ASTM A21.10 latest revision with ASA125 flange drilling unless otherwise noted on the plans. 4. The class or nominal thickness, net weight without lining and name of manufacturer shall be clearly marked on each length of pipe. The letters "D.I" or "Ductile" shall be cast or stamped on each length of pipe. ' C. Ball Joint Pipe I. Ductile iron ball joint pipe and fittings shall be installed in a portion of the sewerage forcemain as shown on the Plans or where otherwise specified. Pipe and joints shall be manufactured by American Ductile Iron Pipe, "Flex- Lok Boltless Ball Joint Pipe" or approved equal. 2.04 CERAMIC EPDXY LINING: A. Condition of Ductile Iron Prior to Surface Preparation All ductile pipe and fittings shall be delivered to the application facility without asphalt, cement lining, or any other lining on the interior surface. Because removal of old linings may not be possible, the intent of this specification is that the entire interior of the ductile iron pipe and fittings shall not have been lined with any substance prior to the application of the specified lining material and no coating shall have been applied to the first six inches of the exterior of the spigot ends. B. Lining Material ' The material shall be amine cured novalac epoxy containing at least 20% by volume of ceramic quartz pigment. Any request for substitution must be accompanied by a successful history of lining pipe and fittings for sewer service, a test report verifying 02730 -Ductile Iron Pipe 02730-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02730 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE (continued) 1 the following properties, and a certification of the test results. The lining material shall be Protecto 401 Ceramic Epoxy or approved equal. I1. A permeability rating of 0.00 when tested according to Method A of ASTM E-96-66, Procedure A with a test duration of 30 days. 2. The following test must be run on coupons from factory lined ductile iron '• pipe: a. ASTM B-117 Salt Spray (scribed panel) — Results to equal 0.0 undercutting after two years. ' b. ASTM G-95 Cathodic Disbondment 1.5 volts @ 77°F. Results to equal no more than 0.5mm undercutting after 30 days. c. Immersion Testing rated using ASTM D-714-87. ' (1) 20% Sulfuric Acid — No effect after two years. (2) 140°F 25% Sodium Hydroxide — No effect after two years. (3) 160°F Distilled Water — No effect after two years. (4) 120°F Tap Water (scribed panel) — 0.0 undercutting after I. two years with no effect. 3. An abrasion resistance of no more than 3 mils (0.075 mm) loss after one million cycles using European Standard EN 598: 1994 Section 7.8 Abrasion ' Resistance. C. Application I. Applicator. The lining shall be applied by a competent firm with a ' successful history of applying linings to the interior of ductile iron pipe and fittings. 2. Surface Preparation. Prior to abrasive blasting, the entire area to receive the I. protective compound shall be inspected for oil, grease; etc. Any areas with oil, grease, or any substance, which can be removed by solvent, shall be solvent cleaned to remove those substances. After the surface has been made ' free of grease, oil or other substances, all areas to receive the protective compounds shall be abrasive blasted using sand or grit abrasive media. The entire surface to be lined shall be struck with the blast media so that all rust, I. loose oxides, etc., are removed from the surface. Only slight stains and tightly adhering oxide may be left on the surface. Any area where rust reappears before lining must be reblasted. ' 3. Lining. After the surface preparation and within 8 hours of surface preparation, the interior of the pipe shall receive 40 mils nominal dry film thickness of Protecto 401 or approved equal. No lining shall take place when ' the substrate or ambient temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. The surface must also be dry and dust free. If flange pipe or fittings are included in the project, the lining shall not be used on the face of the flange. 4. Coating of Bell Sockets and Spigot Ends. Due to the tolerances involved, the ' gasket area and spigot end up to 6 inches back from the end of the spigot end must be coated with 6 mils nominal, 10 mils maximum using Protecto Joint Compound. The Joint Compound shall be applied by brush to ensure ' coverage. Care should be taken that the Joint Compound is smooth without excess buildup in the gasket seat or on the spigot ends. Coating of the gasket seat and spigot ends shall be done after the application of the lining. ' 5. Number of Coats. The number of coats of lining material applied shall be as recommended by the lining manufacturer. However, in no case shall this 02730 -Ductile Iron Pipe 02730-3 RJN Project No. I 1-1875-00 I. I SECTION 02730 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE (continued) material be applied above the dry thickness per coat recommended by the lining manufacturer in printed literature. The maximum or minimum time between coats shall be that time recommended by the lining material manufacturer. To prevent delamination between coats, no material shall be used for lining which is not indefinitely recoatable with itself without roughening the surface. 6. Touch -Up & Repair. Protecto-Joint Compound or approved equal shall be used for touch-up or repair in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Inspection and Certification 1. Inspection a. All ductile iron pipe and fitting linings shall be checked for thickness using a magnetic film thickness gauge. The thickness testing shall be done using the method outlined in SSPC-PA-2 Film Thickness Rating. b. The interior lining of all pipe barrels and fittings shall be tested for pinholes with a nondestructive 2,500 -volt test. Any defects found shall be repaired prior to shipment. c. Each pipe joint and fitting shall be marked with the date of application of the lining system along with its numerical sequence of application on that date and records maintained by the applicator of this work. 2. Certification a. The pipe or fitting manufacturer must supply a certificate attesting to the fact that the applicator met the requirements of this specification, and that the material used was as specified. 2.05 2.06 E. Handling 1. Ceramic epoxy lined pipe and fittings must be handled only from the outside of the pipe and fittings. No forks, chains, straps, hooks, etc. shall be placed inside the pipe and fittings for lifting, positioning or laying. TRACE WIRE: A. When called for the plans, trace wire shall be 14 gauge coated copper for underground burial and shall be taped to the top of the pipe at 10 foot intervals. DETECTABLE TAPE: A. Detectable tape shall 'be "Detect Tape" as manufactured by Allen Systems, Inc., or approved equal, and shall consist of a minimum thickness of 0.35 mils solid aluminum foil encased in a protective inert jacket that is impervious to all known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents, and solvents found in the soil. The minimum overall thickness of the tape shall be 5.5 mils and the width shall not be less than 2 inches with a medium unit weight of 2-1/2 pounds/l inch x 1,000 feet. 02730 -Ductile Iron Pipe 02730-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I .1 [1 I I L SECTION 02730 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE (continued) The tape shall be color coded and imprinted with the message as follows: Type of Utility Color Code Legend Water Safety Precaution Blue Caution, Buried Water Line Below "Sewer Safety Precaution Green Caution, Buried Sewer Line Below 2;07 MECHANICAL JOINT RETAINER GLANDS OR MEGALUGS: A. Where used, retainer glands shall be designed to resist pull-out by use of individually activated wedges that increase their resistance to pull-out as pressure or external forces increase. The joint restraining ring and wedging components shall be made from Grade 60-42-10 ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536 and shall be designed for a working pressure of at least 350 psi for sizes 4"-16" and at least 250 psi for sizes 18"-36". The glands shall be designed to accommodate standard mechanical joint fittings (AWWA A C 11 I). The minimum number of wedges and bolt holes for mechanical joint fittings shall be as follows. Size No. Wedges No. MJ Bolt Holes 6" 3 6 8" 4 6 10" 6 8 12" 8 8 14" 10 10 16" 12 12 18" 12 12 20" 14 14 B. Megalugs shall be used where directed for joint and fitting restraint. Megalugs shall be the Series 1100 Megalug by EBAA Iron Sales, Inc., or equal. 2.08 POLYETHYLENE MATERIAL FOR PIPE PROTECTION: A. Two layers of polyethylene material, either in tubing form or in flat sheets or rolls, as specified herein, shall be placed around all Ductile Iron pipe and fitting joints and all valves and fire hydrants with mechanical joint ends, and all saddles, sleeves, couplings, tapping saddles and any other appurtenances with exposed bolts, as directed by the Owner. ,This shall be done in accordance with Section 02616 Polyethylene Encasement. PART 3- EXECUTIOT 3:01 HANDLING: A. Pipe and accessories shall be handled in a manner that will ensure their installation in the work in sound, undamaged condition. Equipment, tools and methods used in unloading, reloading, hauling and laying pipe and fittings shall be such that they are not damaged. No hooks or forks shall be allowed to be inserted in the ends of pipe. 02730 -Ductile Iron Pipe 02730-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 11 SECTION 02730 -DUCTILE IRON PIPE (continued) B. Pipe having premolded joint rings shall be handled in such a manner that no weight, including the weight of the pipe itself, will bear on or be supported by the spigot rings at any time. Care shall be taken to avoid dragging the spigot ring on the ground or allowing it to come in contact with gravel, crushed stone, rocks, or other hard objects. Joint rings, which have been damaged in any way, will not be accepted and shall not be incorporated into the work. 3.02 INSTALLING PIPE: A. Pipe shall be protected from lateral displacement by means of pipe embedment ' material installed as provided in the trench backfill specification. Under no circumstances shall pipe be installed in water and no pipe shall be installed in unsuitable weather or trench conditions. B. When jointed in the trench, the pipe shall form a true and smooth line. Pipe shall not be trimmed except for closures, and pipe not making a good fit shall be removed. Permissible defects shall be placed in the top of the pipe. C. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the installation of pipe shall begin at the lowest point, and the pipe shall be installed so that the spigot ends point in the direction of flow. D. Pipe, which is part of a gravity sewer line, shall be aligned and constructed to grades ' as shown on the plans. E. Pipe lines or runs intended to be straight shall be installed straight. F. During installation each pipe and fitting shall be inspected for defects. All defective, damaged, or unsound pipe and fittings shall be rejected and removed from the site of the work. G. All pipe and fittings shall be installed to the line and grade as detailed in the Plans. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, other fittings may be added or substituted for those shown on the Plans, should the need therefore arise during construction. This permissive stipulation in no way shall relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for ' furnishing and installing all fittings required for a complete and proper installation of the lines as detailed on the Plans. All ductile iron pipe shall be encased with polyethylene protection material. H. All dirt and other foreign matter shall be removed from the inside of pipe fittings before they are lowered into the trench. They shall be kept clean during and after installation; care shall be taken to keep dirt out of the jointing space. At the end of each day's work, and when pipe laying is discontinued for an appreciable period, open ends of the pipe shall be closed with a cast pplug or cap firmly secured in place by tamped jute or hemp. I. All pipelines shall be installed on gravel or crushed stone pipe bedding cradle to the dimensions indicated on the Plans. ' J. Excavated material shall be piled adjacent to the work to be used for backfilling as required. Where required, desirable topsoil shall be piled separately in a careful manner and replaced in its original position. K. Excavated material, which is unsuitable for backfilling, and excess material, shall be disposed of in a matter approved by the Engineer. 1 02730 -Ductile Iron Pipe 02730-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02730 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE (continued) L. All pipe and fittings shall be lowered carefully into the trench in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe, fittings, or linings. Neither pipe nor fittings shall be dropped or dumped in the trench. M. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, pipe shall be installed with bell ends facing in the direction of laying. For lines on an appreciable slope, bells shall, at the direction of the Engineer, face upgrade. Wherever necessary to avoid obstructions, • or for other allowable reasons, the degree of deflection at any joint shall not be greater than that which will provide adequate gasket space entirely around the spigot end of pipe. The joint opening shall be approximately 1/8 inch. Maximum allowable deflections shall be as limited by the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE: A. All pipe shall be installed straight between changes in alignment and at a uniform grade between changes in grade. All lines shall be installed so that each section between manholes will lamp. 3.04 JOINTING: A. Boltless gasketed joints. All instructions and recommendations of the pipe manufacturer, relative to gasket installation and other jointing operations, shall be observed and followed by the Contractor. All joint surfaces shall be lubricated with heavy vegetable soap solution immediately before the joint is completed. B. Mechanical joints. Mechanical joints shall be carefully assembled in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. If effective sealing is not obtained, the joint shall be disassembled, thoroughly cleaned and reassembled. Over tightening bolts to compensate for poor installation practice will not be permitted. U I I I I 3.05 CUTTING PIPE: A. Cutting of pipe shall be done in a neat manner, without damage to the pipe or to the lining therein. Pipe cuts shall be smooth, straight and at right angles to the pipe axis. All cutting of pipe shall be done with mechanical pipe cutters of an approved type except that in locations where the use of mechanical cutters would be difficult or impracticable, existing pipe may be cut with diamond point chisels, saws, or other tools which will cut the pipe without damaging impact or shock. .3.06 CLEANING: A. The interior of all pipe shall be cleaned of all foreign matter before being installed and shall be kept clean until the work has been accepted. All lumps, blisters and excess coating shall be removed from exterior spigot and interior bell surfaces. Such surfaces shall be wire brushed and wiped clean, dry and free from oil or grease before placing the spigot in the bell. All joint contact surfaces shall be kept clean until the jointing is completed. B. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being installed. No debris, tools, clothing, or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. ' 02730 -Ductile Iron Pipe 02730 -7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 U SECTION 02730 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE (continued) C. Whenever pipe installation is stopped, the open end of the pipe shall be sealed with a watertight plug. 3.07 TESTING - GRAVITY SEWERS: A. General All sewers shall be visually inspected, infiltration leakage tested, and exfiltration leakage tested. At the Contractor's option and with approval of the methods by the Engineer, the Contractor may provide air leakage testing in substitution for the exfiltration test. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, tools, materials, and water, and shall perform all acceptance tests. All tests are to be witnessed and recorded by the Engineer. B. Visual Inspection I. All pipes shall be cleaned of excessive mortar, dirt, and debris prior to visual inspection. The sewer shall be inspected by flashing a light between manholes or by physical passage where space permits. Determine by illumination or physical inspection the presence of any misaligned, displacement or broken pipe and the presence of visible infiltration and other defects. 2. Correct defects as required prior to conducting leakage tests. C. Leakage Tests 1. The leakage tests shall be performed on the full length of all sewer lines prior to acceptance. a. Infiltration leakage test. All sections of sewer lines shall be checked for infiltration. At each manhole where flow exists in the pipe, measurements shall be made to determine the quantity by capture or by inserting "V" notch weirs in the pipe. Repair leaks and defects until the leakage, as measured, in any section does not exceed 200 gallons per inch of pipe diameter per day per mile of pipe. (0.15 gallon per inch of pipe diameter per hour per 100 feet of pipe) The infiltration check and repairs shall be completed on any section prior to making the exfiltration test. b. Exfiltration leakage test. All sections of sewer line shall be tested by exfiltration on the sewer pipe and manholes. Exfiltration tests shall be conducted by blocking all manhole openings except those connected to the section being tested, filling the line with water, and measuring the water required to maintain a constant level in the manholes. During the test, the average water depth above the pipe invert shall be 10 feet, unless manhole depths are such that that is not possible. Maximum depth at the lower end shall not exceed 25 feet and minimum depth at the upper end shall be at least 5 feet above the crown of the pipe. Maintain test as necessary to determine leakage but not less than 2 hours. Repeat as necessary after repairs until leakage does not exceed 200 gallons per inch of pipe diameter per day per mile of 02730 -Ductile Iron Pipe 02730-8 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I IJ I I I I I I I I I I I H SECTION 02730 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE (continued) pipe. (0.15 gallon per inch of pipe diameter per hour per 100 feet of pipe). For the purposes of determining the maximum allowable leakage, manholes shall be considered as sections of pipe of the diameter and height of the manhole. c. Air Leakage Testing: The Contractor, at his option,'may perform low pressure air testing of the sewer lines in substitution for the exfiltration testing, with approval of equipment and methods by the Engineer. The general testing procedure shall be as follows: Raise pressure to 4.0 psi, throttle the air supply to maintain between 4.0 and 3.5 psi for at least 2 minutes in order to allow equilibrium between air temperature and pipe walls to be reached. After temperature has stabilized, allow the pressure to decrease to 3.5 psi. At 3.5 psi begin timing to determine the time required for pressure to drop to 2.5 psi. If the time, in seconds, for the air pressure to decrease from 3.5 to 2.5 psi is greater than that shown in the table below, the pipe shall be presumed free of defects. Required Time Pipe Size per 100 L.F. 8 in. 70 sec. 10 in. 110 sec. 12 in. 158 sec. 15 in. 248 sec. 18 in. 356 sec. 21 in. 485 sec. 24 in. 634 sec. 27 in. 765 sec. 30 in. 851 sec. 33 in. 935 sec. If air test fails to meet the above requirements, repeat test as necessary after all leaks and defects have been repaired. In areas where ground water is known to exist, increase the test pressure by 0.43 psi for each foot of depth that the groundwater is above the top of the pipe. 3.O8 TESTING -SEWER FORCEMAIN: I Li A. General I. The Contractor shall provide all necessary piping connections, pumping equipment, pressure gauges, flow meters, and other equipment necessary for the required test. 02730 -Ductile Iron Pipe 02730-9 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02730 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE (continued) 2. All pipe, fittings and other materials found to be defective, shall be removed and replaced with new materials by the Contractor. 3. All lines that fail to meet tests shall be repaired and retested as necessary until test requirements are complied with. 4. During the contract or 1 year guarantee period, testing before backfilling in no way relieves the Contractor of the responsibility of repairing leaks which become evident after the main is put into service. B. Testing After Backfill 1. If the Contractor chooses to test after backfilling, he shall comply with all requirements shown for testing before backfilling, except that the duration of the test shall be for 24 hours. All surface indications of leaks shall be immediately corrected even though the total leakage is less than allowed. 2. In the event the leakage is more than permissible, the system shall be corrected as found necessary to bring it within the allowed limits. It shall be subject to as many 24 -hour tests as necessary to obtain the desired results. C. Testing Before Backfill 1. All backup blocks and anchors shall have been in place at least 48 hours prior to testing. 2. The test pressure shall be maintained for 2 hours or longer as is necessary for time to inspect the pipeline for visible leaks and as is required to obtain a reasonable time for leakage measurement. D. Hydrostatic Leakage Test (Warning: The testing methods described in this section are specific for water pressure testing. These procedures should not be applied for air pressure testing because of serious safety hazards involved) 1. Test restrictions 02730 -Ductile Iron Pipe a. Test pressure shall not be less than 1.25 times the working pressure at the highest point along the test section. If pump is part of system then pump shut off head should be considered. b. Test pressure shall not exceed pipe or thrust -restraint design pressures. c. The hydrostatic test shall be of at least 2 -hour duration. d. Test pressure shall not vary by more than ± 5 psi (34.5 kPa) for the duration of the test. e. Valves shall not be operated in either direction at a differential pressure exceeding the rated valve working pressure. Use of a test pressure greater than the rated valves pressure can result in trapped test pressure between the gates of a double -disc gate valve. For tests at these pressures, the test setup should include a provision, independent of the valve, to reduce the line pressure to the rated valve pressure on completion of the test. The valve can then be opened enough to equalize the trapped pressure with the line pressure, or fully opened if desired. f. The test pressure shall not exceed the rated pressure of the valves when the pressure boundary of the test section includes closed, resilient -seated gate valves or butterfly valves. 02730-10 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I I I II I I I I II I I L TI II 11 II I Li I Li I I 1 L I SECTION 02730 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE (continued) 2. Pressurization a. After the pipe has been installed, all newly installed pipe or any valved section thereof shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of at least 1.5 times the working pressure at the time of testing. Each valved section of pipe shall be slowly filled with water, and the specified test pressure (based on the elevation of the lowest point of the line or section under test and corrected to the elevation of the test gauge) shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe. Valves shall not be operated in either the opening or closing direction at differential pressures above the rated pressure. It is good practice to allow the system to stabilize at the test pressure before conducting the leakage test. 3. Air Removal a. Before applying the specified test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from the section of piping under test. If permanent air vents are not located at all high points, corporation cocks shall be installed at such points that the air can be expelled as the line is filled with water. b. After all the air has been expelled, the corporation cocks shall be closed and the test pressure applied. At the conclusion of the pressure test, the corporation cocks shall be removed and plugged or left in place as required by the specifications. 4. Examination a. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and joints shall be examined carefully during the test. Any damaged or defective pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or joints that are discovered following the pressure test shall be repaired or replaced with sound material, and the test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Leakage Defined a. Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly installed pipe or any valve section thereof to maintain pressure within 5 psi (34.5 kPa) of the specified test pressure after the pipe has been filled with water and the air has been expelled. Leakage shall not be measured by a drop in pressure in a test section over a period of time. 6. Allowable Leakage a. No pipe installation will be accepted if the leakage is greater than that determined by the following formula: L=SDP 133,200 (Eq. 1) Allowable leakage per 1,000 ft. of pipeline* - gpht 02730 -Ductile Iron Pipe 02730- 11 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02730 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE (continued) Nominal Pipe Diameter - in. Avg Test Press ure Psi 1 1 1 60 450 0.48 0.64 0.95 1.27 1.59 1.91 2.23 2.55 2.87 3.18 3.82 4.78 5.73 6.69 7.64 8.60 9.56 400 0.45 0.60 0.90 1.20 1.50 1.80 2.10 2.40 2.70 3.00 3.60 4.50 5.41 6.31 7.21 8.11 9.01 350 0.42 0.56 0.84 1.12 1.40 1.69 1.97 2.25 2.53 2.81 3.37 4.21 5.06 5.90 6.74 7.58 8.43 275 0.37 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.24 1.49 1.74 1.99 2.24 2.49 2.99 3.73 4.48 5.23 5.98 6.72 7.47 250 0.36 0.47 0.7] 0.95 1.19 1.42 1.66 1.90 2.14 2.37 2.85 3.56 4.27 4.99 5.70 6.41 7.12 225 0.34 0.45 0.68 0.90 1.13 1.35 ].58 1.80 2.03 2.25 2.70 3.38 4.05 4.73 5.41 6.03 6.76 200 0.32 0.43 0.64 0.85 1.06 I;28 1.48 1.70 1.91 2.12 2.55 3.19 3.82 4.46 5.09 5.73 6.37 175 0.30 0.40 0.59 0.80 0.99 1.19 ].39 1.59 1.79 1.98 2.38 2.98 3.58 4.17 4.77 5.36 5.96 150 0.28 0.37 0.55 0.74 0.92 1.10 1.29 1.47 1.66 1.84 2.21 2.76 3.31 3.86 4.41 4.97 5.52 125 0.25 0.34 0.50 0.67 0.84 1.01 1.18 1.34 1.51 1.68 2.01 2.52 3.02 3.53 4.03 4.53 5.04 100 0.23 0.30 0.45 0.60 0.75 0.90 1.05 1.20 1.35 1.50 1.80 2.25 2.70 3.15 3.60 4.05 4.50 If the pipeline under test contains sections of various diameters, the allowable leakage will be the sum of the computed leakage for each size. +Calculated on the basis of Eq. 1 Where L = allowable leakage, in gallons per hour S = length of pipe tested, in feet D = nominal diameter of the pipe, in inches P = average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch (gauge) Acceptance of installation a. Acceptance shall be determined on the basis of allowable leakage. If any test of installed pipe discloses leakage greater than that specified, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, locate and repair the defective material until the leakage is within the specified allowance. 3.09 PIPE EMBEDMENT AND'TRENCH BACKFILL: A. All pipe embedment and trench backfill material shall be as specified in Section 02221 and the construction plans. 3.10 PIPE CONNECTION TO MANHOLE: A. General I. Connection at manhole walls shall be made by "O" ring type couplings set in the wall and having a manhole water stop assembly between the coupling and the manhole wall. The exact type of "O" ring seal shall be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. 2. Grouting pipe in place will require Engineer approval. 02730 -Ductile Iron Pipe END OF SECTION 02730 I I I !1 I I I I I 1 I I II 02730-12 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02751 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Description 1. Portland cement concrete paving. B. Related Sections 1. Section 02100 - Site Preparation 2. Section 02752 — Concrete Paving Joints 3. Section 02753 — Concrete Paving Curing 4. Section 02771 - Curb and Gutter 1.02 REFERENCES: A. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement B. ASTM A185 - Standard Specifications for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement C. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet - Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement D. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field E. ASTM C33 - Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates F. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens G. ASTM C40 - Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete H. ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete I. ASTM C78 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete J. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete K. ASTM C131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small -Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine L. ASTM C136 - Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates M. ASTM C138 - Standard Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete N. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete O. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement P. ASTM C174 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Length of Drilled Concrete Cores Q. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method 02751 -Concrete Paving 02751-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02751 - CONCRETE PAVING (continued) ' R. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete S. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ' T. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01330 - Submittals. B. Submit proposed mix design and test data for each type and strength of concrete in the Work. Include proportions and actual compressive strength obtained from design mixes at required test ages. ' C. Submit for approval manufacturer's description and characteristics for mixing equipment, and for traveling form paver, if proposed for use. D. Submit manufacturer's certificates giving properties of reinforcing steel. Include certificate of compliance with ASTM A82. Provide specimens for testing when required by Engineer. 1.04 HANDLING AND STORAGE: A. Do not mix different classes of aggregate without written permission of Engineer. B. Class of aggregate being used may be changed before or during Work with written permission of Engineer. New class shall comply with specifications. C. Segregated aggregate will be rejected. Before using aggregate whose particles are ' separated by size, mix them uniformly to grading requirements. D. Aggregates mixed with dirt, weeds, or foreign matter will be rejected. ' E. Do not dump or store aggregate in roadbed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Portland Cement: ' I. Sample and test cement to verify compliance with Standards of ASTM Cl 50, Type IA or Type IIIA. 2. Bulk cement which meets referenced standards may be used if the method of handling is approved by the Engineer. When using bulk cement, provide satisfactory weighing devices. 3. Fly ash which meets standards of ASTM C618 may be used as mineral fill if the method of handling is approved by the Engineer. B. Water: Conform to requirements for water in ASTM C94. C. Coarse Aggregate: Crushed stone or gravel, or combination thereof, which is clean, hard, durable, conforms to requirements of ASTM C33, and has abrasion loss not more than 45 percent by weight when subjected to Los Angeles Abrasion Test (ASTM C131). 1 02751 -Concrete Paving 02751-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 02751 - CONCRETE PAVING (continued) 1. Maximum percentage by weight of deleterious substances shall not exceed following values: Percent by Weight of Total Item Sample Maximum Clay lumps and friable particles 3.0 - Material finer than 75-µm (No. 200) sieve: Concrete subject to abrasion 3.0* All Other concrete 5.0* Coal and lignite: Where surface appearance of concrete is of importance 0.5 All other concrete 1.0 * In case of manufactured sand, if material finer than 75-µm (No. 200) • sieve consists of dust of fracture, essentially free from clay or shale, these limits may be increased to 5 and 7 percent, respectively. 2. Coarse aggregate (size 1-1/2 inch to No. 4 sieve) shall conform to requirements of ASTM C33. Gradation shall be within following limits when graded in accordance with ASTM C136: Sieve Designation (Square Openings) Percentage by Weight Retained on 1 3/4" sieve 0 Retained on 1 1/2" sieve 0 to 5 Retained on 3/4" sieve 30 to 65 Retained on 3/8" sieve 70 to 90 Retained on No. 4 sieve 95 to 100 D. Fine Aggregate: Sand, manufactured sand, or combination thereof, composed of clean, hard, durable, uncoated grains, free from loams or other injurious foreign matter. Fine aggregate for concrete shall conform to requirements of ASTM C33. Gradation shall be within following limits when graded in accordance with ASTM C136: Sieve Designation (Square Openings) Percentage by Weight Retained on 3/8" sieve 0 Retained on No. 4 sieve 0 to 5 Retained on No. 8 sieve 0 to 20 Retained on No. 16 sieve 15 to 50 Retained on No. 30 sieve 35 to 75 Retained on No. 50 sieve 65 to 90 Retained on No. 100 sieve 90 to 100 Retained on No. 200 sieve 97 to 100 I I 1. When subjected to color test for organic impurities (ASTM C40), fine aggregate shall not show color darker than standard color. E. Mineral Filler: Class C fly ash of acceptable quality and meeting requirements of ASTM C618 may be used as mineral admixture in concrete mixture. When fly ash 02751 -Concrete Paving 02751-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02751 - CONCRETE PAVING (continued) mineral filler is used, it shall be stored and inspected in accordance with ASTM C618. Fly ash shall not be used in amounts to exceed 30 percent by absolute volume of cementitious material in mix design. Cement content may be reduced if strength requirements can be met. Note: When fly ash is used, the term "cement" is defined as cement plus fly ash. F. Air Entraining Agent: Furnish an air entraining agent conforming to requirements of ASTM C260. G. Water Reducer: Water reducing admixture conforming to requirements of ASTM ' C494 may be used if required to improve the workability of concrete. Amount and type of such admixture shall be subject to approval by Engineer. H. Reinforcing Steel: 1. Provide new billet steel manufactured by open hearth process and conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60. Store steel to protect it from mechanical injury and rust. At time of placement, steel shall be free from dirt, scale, rust, paint, oil, or other injurious materials. 2. Cold bend reinforcing steel to shapes shown. Once steel has been bent, it may not be rebent. 3. Provide wire fabric conforming to ASTM A82. Use fabric in which longitudinal and transverse wires have been electrically welded at points of intersection. Welds shall have sufficient strength not to be broken during handling or placing. Welding and fabrication of fabric sheets shall conform to ASTM A185. 2.02 EOUIPMENT: ' A. Equipment shall conform to requirements of ASTM C94. 2.03 MIXING: A. Compressive strength shall be as specified using test specimens prepared in accordance with ASTM C31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C39. Contractor shall determine and measure batch quantity of each ingredient, including water for batch designs and all concrete produced for Work. Mix shall conform to these specifications and other requirements indicated on Drawings. ' B. Mix design to produce concrete which will have compressive strength of 2800 psi at 7 days and 3600 psi at 28 days. Slump of concrete shall be at least 1 inch, but no more than 4 inches, when tested in accordance with ASTM O43. 1. Concrete pavement, including curb, curb and gutter, and saw -tooth curb, shall contain at least 5-1/2 sacks (94 pounds per sack) of cement per cubic yard, with not more than 6.5 gallons of water, net, per sack of cement (water - cement ratio maximum 0.57). Cement content shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C138. Addition of mineral filler may be used to improve workability or plasticity of concrete to limits specified. 2. Coarse dry aggregate shall not exceed 85 percent of loose volume of concrete. 3. Add air -entraining admixture to ensure uniform distribution of agent throughout batch. Base air content of freshly mixed air -entrained concrete upon trial mixes with materials to be used in Work, adjusted to produce concrete of required plasticity and workability. Percentage of air entrainment I 02751 -Concrete Paving 02751-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02751- CONCRETE PAVING (continued) in mix shall be 4-1/2 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent. Air content shall be determined by testing in accordance with ASTM C23 1. 4. Use retardant when temperature exceeds 90 degrees F. Proportion shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Use same brand as used for air -entraining agent. Add and batch material using same methods as used for air -entraining agent. C. Concrete sidewalk and slope paving shall contain at least 5 sacks (94 pounds per sack) of cement per cubic yard, with not more than 6.25 gallons of water, net, per sack of cement. Cement content shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 138. Additions of mineral filler may be used to improve workability or plasticity of concrete to limits specified. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3:01 EXAMINATION: A. Verify compacted base is ready to support imposed loads and meets compaction requirements. B. Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. Properly prepare, shape and compact each section of subgrade before placing forms, reinforcing steel or concrete. After forms have been set to proper grade and alignment, use subgrade planer to shape subgrade to its final cross section. Check contour of subgrade with template. B. Remove subgrade that will not support loaded form. Replace and compact subgrade to required density. 3.03 EQUIPMENT: A. Alternate equipment and methods, other than those required by this Section, may be used provided the Contractor demonstrates that equal or better results will be obtained. Maintain equipment for preparing subgrade and for finishing and compacting concrete in good working order. B. Subgrade Planer and Template I I I 2. 02751 -Concrete Paving Use subgrade planer with adjustable cutting blades to trim subgrade to exact section shown on Drawings. Select planer mounted on visible rollers which ride on forms. Planer frame must have sufficient weight so that it will remain on form, and have such strength and rigidity that, under tests made by changing support from wheels to center, planer will not develop deflection of more than 1/8 inch. Tractors used to pull planer shall not produce ruts or indentations in subgrade. When slip form method of paving is used, operate subgrade planer on prepared track grade or have it controlled by electronic sensor system operated from string line to establish horizontal alignment and elevation of subbase. Provide template for checking contour of subgrade. Template shall be long enough to rest upon side forms and have such strength and rigidity that, when 02751-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00. II SECTION 02751 - CONCRETE PAVING (continued) supported at center, maximum deflection shall not exceed 1/8 inch. Fit template with accurately adjustable rods projecting downward at 1 -foot intervals. Adjust these rods to gauge cross sections of slab bottom when template is resting on side forms. C. Machine Finisher: Provide a power -driven, transverse finishing machine designed and operated to strike off and consolidate concrete. Machine shall have two screeds accurately adjusted to crown of pavement and with frame equipped to ride on forms. Use finishing machine with rubber tires if it operates on concrete pavement. D. Hand Finishing 1. Provide mechanical strike and tamping template 2 feet longer than width of pavement to be finished. Shape template to pavement section. 2. Provide two bridges to ride on forms and span pavement for finishing expansion and dummy joints. Provide floats and necessary edging and finishing tools. I E. Burlap Drag for Finishing Slab: Furnish four plies of 10 -ounce burlap material fastened to bridge to form continuous strip of burlap full width of pavement. The 3 -foot width of burlap material shall be in contact with pavement surface. Keep burlap drags clean and free of encrusted mortar. F. Vibrators: Furnish mechanically -operated, synchronized vibrators mounted on tamping bar which rides on forms and hand -manipulated mechanical vibrators. Furnish vibrators with frequency of vibration to provide maximum consolidation of concrete without segregation. G. Traveling Form Paver: Approved traveling form paver may be used in lieu of construction methods employing forms, consolidating, finishing and floating equipment. Requirements of this specification for subgrade, pavement tolerances, pavement depth, alignments, consolidation, finishing and workmanship shall be met. If traveling form paver does not provide concrete paving that meets the compaction, finish, and tolerance requirements of this Specification, its use shall be immediately discontinued and conventional methods shall be used. 1. Equip traveling paver with longitudinal transangular finishing float adjustable to crown and grade. Float shall be long enough to extend across pavement to side forms or edge of slab. 2. Ensure that continuous deposit of concrete can be made at paver to minimize starting and stopping. Use conventional means of paving locations inaccessible to traveling paver, or having horizontal or vertical curvature that traveling paver cannot negotiate. 3. Where Drawings require tie bars for adjacent paving, securely tie and support bars to prevent displacement. Tie bars may be installed with approved mechanical bar inserter mounted on traveling -form paver. Replace any pavement in which tie bars assume final position other than that shown on Drawings. 3.04 FORMS: A. Side Forms: Use metal forms of approved shape and section. Preferred depth of form shall be equal to required edge thickness of pavement. Forms with depths greater or less than required edge thickness of pavement will be permitted, provided difference I 02751 -Concrete Paving 02751-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02751 - CONCRETE PAVING (continued) 3.05 between form depth and edge thickness if not greater than 1 inch, and further provided that forms of depth less than pavement edge are brought to required edge thickness by securely attaching wood or metal strips to bottom of form, or by grouting under form. Bottom flange of form shall be same size as thickness of pavement. Aluminum forms are not allowed. Flexible or curved forms of wood or metal of proper radius shall be used for curves of 200 -foot radius or less. Forms shall have ample strength and shall be provided with adequate devices for secure setting so that when in -place they will withstand, without visible springing or settlement, impact and vibration of finishing machine. In no case shall base width be less than 8 inches for form 8 inches or more in height. Forms shall be free from warp, bends or kinks and shall be sufficiently true to provide straight edge on concrete. Provide sufficient forms for satisfactory placement of concrete. For short radius curves, forms less than 10 feet in length or curved forms may be used. For curb returns at street intersections and driveways, wood forms of good grade and quality may be used. B. Form Setting 1. Rest forms directly on subgrade. Do not shim with pebbles or dirt. Accurately set forms to required grade and alignment and, during entire operation of placing, compacting and finishing of concrete, do not deviate from this grade and alignment more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet of length. Do not remove forms for at least 8 hours after completion of finishing operations. Provide supply of forms that will be adequate for orderly and continuous placing of concrete. Set forms and check grade for at least 300 feet ahead of mixer or as approved by Engineer. 2. Adjacent slabs may be used instead of forms, provided that concrete is well protected from possible damage by finishing equipment. These adjacent slabs shall not be used for forms until concrete has aged at least 7 days. REINFORCING STEEL AND JOINT ASSEMBLIES: A. Place reinforcing steel and joint assemblies and position securely as indicated on Drawings. Wire reinforcing bars securely together at intersections and splices. Bars and coatings shall be free of rust, dirt or other foreign matter when concrete is placed. Secure reinforcing steel to chairs. B. Position pavement joint assemblies at required locations and elevations, and rigidly secure in position. Install dowel bars in joint assemblies, each parallel to pavement surface and to center line of pavement, as shown. C. Cut header boards, joint filler, and other material used for forming joints to receive each dowel bar. D. Secure in required position to prevent displacement during placing and finishing of concrete. E. Drill dowels into existing pavement, secure with epoxy, and provide paving headers as required to provide rigid pavement sections. F. Chairs for steel reinforcement bars shall be of sufficient number to maintain position of bars within allowable tolerances. Reinforcement shall be placed as shown on Drawings. In plane of steel parallel to nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than 1/12 of spacing between bars. In plane of steel 02751 -Concrete Paving 02751-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02751- CONCRETE PAVING (continued) perpendicular to nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than 1/4 inch. 3.06 PLACEMENT: A. Place concrete only when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. Concrete shall not be placed when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. B. Place concrete within 90 minutes after initial water had been added. Remove and dispose of concrete not placed within this period. C. Concrete slump during placement shall be I to 4 inches, except when using traveling - form paver, slump shall be maximum of 2 inches. D. Deposit concrete continuously in successive batches. Distribute concrete in manner that will require as little rehandling as possible. Where hand spreading is necessary, distribute concrete with shovels or by other approved methods. Use only concrete rakes in handling concrete. At placement interruption of more than 30 minutes, place transverse construction joint at stopping point. Remove and replace sections less than 10 feet long. E. Take special care in placing and spading concrete against forms and at longitudinal and transverse joints to prevent honeycombing. Voids in edge of finished pavement will be cause for rejection. 3.07 COMPACTION: A. Consolidate the concrete using mechanical vibrators as specified herein. Extend a vibratory unit across the pavement, not quite touching side forms. Space individual vibrators at close enough intervals to vibrate and consolidate entire width of pavement uniformly. Mount mechanical vibrators to avoid contact with forms, reinforcement, transverse or longitudinal joints. B. Furnish enough hand -manipulated mechanical vibrators for proper consolidation of concrete along forms, at joints and in areas not covered by mechanically controlled vibrators. 3.08 FINISHING: ' A. Finish concrete pavement with power -driven transverse finishing machines or by hand finishing methods. 1. Use transverse finishing machine to make at least two trips over each area. Make last trip continuous run of not less than 40 feet. After transverse screeding, use hand -operated longitudinal float to test and level surface to required grade. 2. Hand finish with mechanical strike and.tamping template in same width as pavement to be finished. Shape template to pavement section shown on Drawings. Move strike template forward in direction of placement, maintaining slight excess of material in front of cutting edge. Make minimum of two trips over each area. Screed pavement surface to required section. Work screed with combined transverse and longitudinal motion in I 02751 -Concrete Paving 02751-8 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02751 - CONCRETE PAVING (continued) direction work is progressing. Maintain screed in contact with forms. Use longitudinal float to level surface. B. On narrow strips and transitions, fmish concrete pavement by hand. Thoroughly work concrete around reinforcement and embedded fixtures. Strike off concrete with strike -off screed. Move strike -off screed forward with combined transverse and longitudinal motion in direction work is progressing, maintaining screed in contact with forms, and maintaining slight excess of materials in front of cutting edge. Tamp concrete with tamping template. Use longitudinal float to level surface. C. After completion of straightedge operation, make first pass of burlap drag as soon as construction operations permit and before water sheen has disappeared from surface. Follow with as many passes as required to produce desired texture depth. Permit no unnecessary delays between passes. Keep drag wet, clean and free from encrusted mortar during use. 3.09 JOINTS AND JOINT SEALING: A. Conform to requirements of Section 02752 - Concrete Paving Joints. 3.10 TOLERANCES: A. Test entire surface before initial set and correct irregularities or undulations. Bring surface within requirements of following test and then fmish. Place 10 -foot straightedge parallel to center of roadway to bridge any depressions and touch all high spots. Do not permit ordinates measured from face of straight edge to surface of pavement to exceed 1/16 inch per foot from nearest point of contact. Maximum ordinate with 10 -foot straightedge shall not exceed 1/8 inch. Grind spots in excess of required tolerances to meet surface test requirements. Restore texture by grooving concrete to meet surface finishing specifications. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: I I I I A. Compressive Strength Test Specimens: Four test specimens for compressive strength test will be made in accordance with ASTM C31 for each 150 cubic yards or less of pavement that is placed in one day. Two specimens will be tested at 7 days. The remaining two specimens will be tested at 28 days. Specimens will be tested in accordance with ASTM C39. Minimum compressive strength shall be 2800 pounds per square inch at 7 days and 3600 pounds per square inch at 28 days. B. When compressive test indicates failure, yield test will be made in accordance with ASTM C138 for cement content per cubic yard of concrete. If such cement content is found to be less than that specified per cubic yard, increase batch weights until amount of cement per cubic yard of concrete conforms to requirements. C. Minimum of one 4 -inch core will be taken at random locations per 200 square yards of.pavement to measure in -place depth. Depth shall be measured in accordance with ASTM C174. Each core may be tested for 28 -day compressive strength according to methods of ASTM C42. The 28 -day compressive strength of each core tested shall be a minimum of 3600 pounds per square inch. 02751 -Concrete Paving 02751-9 RJN Project No.,11-1875-00 L I SECTION 02751 - CONCRETE PAVING (continued) D. Contractor may, at his own expense, request three additional cores in vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in -place depths. In -place depth at these locations shall be average depth of four cores. E. Fill cores and density test sections with new concrete paving or non shrink grout. 3.12 PAVEMENT MARKINGS: ' A. Restore pavement markings to match those existing in accordance with details and the ' Engineer's requirements. 3.13 PROTECTION: A. Barricade pavement section to prevent use until concrete'has attained minimum ' design strength. Cure barricaded pavement section for minimum 72 hours before use. Do not open pavement to traffic until concrete is at least 10 days old. Pavement may be open to traffic earlier provided Contractor pays for testing to ensure compressive strength is reached. B. To provide access at driveways, city street intersections, esplanades, and other locations approved by Engineer; Contractor may use high -early -strength cement at no additional cost to Owner. C. On those sections of pavement to be opened to traffic, seal joints, clean pavement, and place earth against pavement edges before permitting use by traffic. Such opening of pavement to traffic shall not relieve Contractor from his responsibility for the Work. D. Maintain concrete paving in good condition until completion of Work. ' E. Repair defects by replacing concrete to full depth. END OF SECTION 02751 ' I II I I I' I I 02751 -Concrete Paving 0275 ] -10 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 02752 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Description 1. Joints for concrete paving; concrete sidewalks; concrete driveways, curbs, and curb and gutters. 2. Saw -cutting existing concrete or asphalt pavements for new joints. B. Related Sections 1. Section 01330— Submittals. 2. Section 02751 — Concrete Paving. 3. Section 02771 — Curb, Curb And Gutter, And Headers. 1.02 A. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. B. ASTM D 994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). C. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). D. ASTM D 3405 - Standard Specification for Joint Sealants, Hot -Poured, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit product data and samples in accordance with requirements of Section 01330 - Submittals. B. Submit product data for joint sealing compound and proposed sealing equipment. C. Submit samples of dowel cup, metal supports, and deformed metal strip. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Board Expansion Joint Material: Filler board of selected stock. Use wood of density and type as follows: 1. Clear, all -heart cypress weighing no more than 40 pounds per cubic foot, after being oven dried to constant weight. 2. Clear, all -heart redwood weighing no more than 30 pounds per cubic foot, after being oven dried to constant weight. B. Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Bituminous fiber and bituminous mastic composition material conforming to ASTM D 994 and ASTM D 1751. C. Joint Sealing Compound: Hot -poured rubber -asphalt compound conforming to ASTM D 3405. 02752 -Concrete Paving Joints 02752-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02752 - CONCRETE PAVEMENT JOINTS (continued) D. Load Transmission Devices 1. Smooth, steel dowel bars conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60. When indicated on Drawings, encase one end of dowel bar in approved cap having inside diameter 1/16 inch greater than diameter of dowel bar. 2. Deformed steel tie bars conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60. E. Metal Supports for Reinforcing Steel and Joint Assembly: Employ metal supports of approved shape and size that will secure reinforcing steel and joint assembly in correct position during placing and finishing of concrete. Space supports as directed by Engineer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT: A. When new work is adjacent to existing concrete, place joints at same location as existing joints in adjacent pavement. B. If the limit of removal of existing concrete or asphaltic pavement does not fall on existing joint, saw cut existing pavement minimum of 2 inches deep to provide straight, smooth joint surface without chipping, spalling or cracks. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: A. Place transverse construction joint wherever concrete placement must be stopped for more than 30 minutes. Place longitudinal construction joints at interior edges of pavement lanes using No. 6 deformed tie bars, 30 inches long and spaced 18 inches on centers. 3.03 EXPANSION JOINTS: A. Place 3/4 -inch expansion joints at radius points of curb returns for cross street intersections, or as located in adjacent pavement but no further than 80 feet apart. Use no boards shorter than 6 feet. When pavement is 24 feet or narrower, use not more than 2 lengths of board. Secure pieces to form straight joint. Shape board filler accurately to cross section of concrete slab. Use load transmission devices of type and size shown on Drawings unless otherwise specified or shown as No Load Transfer Device. Seal with joint sealing compound. 3.04 CONTRACTION JOINTS: A. Place contraction joints at same locations as in adjacent pavement or at spaces indicated on Drawings. Place smoothed, painted and oiled dowels accurately and normal to joint. Seal groove with joint sealing compound. 3.05 LONGITUDINAL WEAKENED PLANE JOINTS: A. Place longitudinal weakened plane joints at spaces indicated on Drawings. Seal groove with joint sealing compound. 3.06 SAWED JOINTS: A. Use sawed joints as an alternate to contraction and weakened plane joints. Circular cutter shall be capable of cutting straight line groove minimum of 1/2 -inch wide. Depth shall be one quarter of pavement thickness plus 1/2 -inch. Commence sawing 02752 -Concrete Paving Joints 02752-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02752 - CONCRETE PAVEMENT JOINTS (continued) as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without chipping, spalling or tearing and prior to initiation of cracks. Once sawing has commenced, it shall be continued until completed. Make saw cut with one pass. Complete sawing within 24 hours of concrete placement. Saw joints at required spacing consecutively in sequence of concrete placement. B. Concrete Saw: Provide sawing equipment adequate in power to complete sawing to required dimensions and within required time. Provide at least one standby saw in good working order. Maintain an ample supply of saw blades at work site at all times during sawing operations. Sawing equipment shall be on job at all times during concrete placement. 3.07 JOINTS FOR CURB, CURB AND GUTTER: A. Place 3/4 -inch preformed expansion joints through curb and gutters at locations of expansion and contraction joints in pavement; at end of radius returns at street intersections and driveways; and at curb inlets. Maximum spacing shall be 120 -foot centers. 3.08 JOINTS FOR CONCRETE SIDEWALKS: A. Provide 3/4 -inch expansion joints conforming to ASTM D 1751 along and across sidewalk at back of curbs, at intersections with driveways, steps, and walls; and across walk at intervals not to exceed 36 feet. Provide expansion joint material conforming to ASTM D 994 for small radius curves and around fire hydrants and utility poles. Extend the expansion joint material full depth of the slab. 3.09 JOINTS FOR CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS: A. Provide 3/4 -inch expansion joints conforming to ASTM D 1751 across driveway in line with street face of sidewalks, at existing concrete driveways, and along intersections with sidewalks and other structures. Extend expansion joint material full depth of slab. 3.10 JOINT SEALING: I L I A. Seal joints only when surface and joints are dry, ambient temperature is above 50 degrees F and less than 85 degrees F, and weather is not foggy or rainy. B. Joint sealing equipment shall be in like new working condition throughout the joint sealing operation, and be approved by Engineer. Use concrete grooving machine or power -operated wire brush and other equipment such as plow, brooms, brushes, blowers or hydro or abrasive cleaning as required to produce satisfactory joints. C. Clean joints of loose scale, dirt, dust and curing compound. The term joint includes wide joint spaces, expansion joints, dummy groove joints or cracks, either preformed or natural. Remove loose material from concrete surfaces adjacent to joints. D. Fill joints neatly with joint sealer to depth shown. Pour sufficient joint sealer into joints so that, upon completion, surface of sealer within joint will be 1/4 -inch above level of adjacent surface or at elevation as directed. - 3.11 PROTECTION: A. Maintain joints in good condition until completion of Work. 02752 -Concrete Paving Joints 02752-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02752 - CONCRETE PAVEMENT JOINTS (continued) B. Replace damaged joint material with new material as required by this Section (no separate bid item). END OF SECTION 02752 02752 -Concrete Paving Joints 02752-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02753 - CONCRETE PAVEMENT CURING PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Description 1. Curing of Portland cement concrete paving B. Related Sections 1. Section 01270— Unit Prices 2. Section 01330 - Submittals 3. Section 02751 — Concrete Paving 4. Section 02752 — Concrete Paving Joints 1.02 A. ASTM C171 - Standard Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. B. ASTM C309 - Standard Specifications for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01330 - Submittals. B. Submit manufacturer's product data for cover materials and liquid membrane -forming compounds. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 COVER MATERIALS FOR CURING: A. Curing materials shall conform to one of the following: 1. Polyethylene Film: Opaque pigmented white film conforming to requirements of ASTM C171. 2. Waterproofed Paper: Paper conforming to requirements of ASTM C171. 3. Cotton Mats: Single layer of cotton filler completely enclosed in cover of cotton cloth. Mats shall contain not less than 3/4 of a pound of uniformly distributed cotton filler per square yard of mat. Cotton cloth used for covering materials shall weigh not less than 6 ounces per squaie yard. Mats shall be stitched so that mat will contact surface of pavement at all points when saturated with water. 2.02 LIQUID MEMBRANE -FORMING COMPOUNDS: A. Liquid membrane -forming compounds shall conform to ASTM C309. Membrane shall restrict loss of water to not more than 0.55 kg/m2 of surface in 72 hours. I ' 02753 -Concrete Paving Curing 02753-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 u SECTION 02753 - CONCRETE PAVEMENT CURING (continued) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 CURING REQUIREMENT: A. Concrete pavement shall be cured by protecting it against loss of moisture for period of not less than 72 hours immediately upon completion of finishing operations. Do not use membrane curing for concrete pavement to be overlaid by asphaltic concrete. H I B. Failure to provide sufficient cover material shall be cause for immediate suspension of concreting operations. 3.02 POLYETHYLENE FILM CURING: A. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply water in the form of a fine spray. Cover surface with polyethylene film so film will remain in direct contact with surface during specified curing period. B. Cover entire surface and both edges of pavement slab. Joints in film sheets shall overlap minimum of 12 inches. Immediately repair tears or holes occurring during curing period by placing acceptable moisture -proof patches or by replacing. 3.03 WATERPROOFED PAPER CURING: A. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply water in form of fine spray. Cover surface with waterproofed paper so paper will remain in direct contact with surface during specified curing period. B. Prepare waterproofed paper to form blankets of sufficient width to cover entire surface and both edges of pavement slab, and not be more than 60 feet in length. Joints in blankets caused by joining paper sheets shall lap not less than 5 inches and shall be securely sealed with asphalt cement having melting point of approximately 180 degrees F. Place blankets to secure an overlap of at least 12 inches. Tears or holes appearing in paper during curing period shall be immediately repaired by cementing patches over defects. 3.04 COTTON MAT CURING: A. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, completely cover surface with cotton mats, thoroughly saturated before application, in such manner that they will contact surface of pavement equally at all points. B. Mats shall remain on pavement for specified curing period. Keep mats saturated so that, when lightly compressed, water will drip freely from them. Keep banked earth or cotton mat covering edges saturated. 3.05 LIQUID MEMBRANE -FORMING COMPOUNDS: A. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply liquid membrane -forming compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 02753 -Concrete Paving Curing END OF SECTION 02753 02753-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I I I C I P I Li I I I SECTION 02771 - INTEGRAL CURB PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Reinforced concrete curb and gutter 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01330 - Submittals B. Submit details of proposed formwork for approval. C. Related Sections 1. Section 02751 — Concrete Paving 2. Section 02752 — Concrete Paving Joints 3. Section 02753 — Concrete Paving Curing PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Concrete: Conform to material and proportion requirements for concrete of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. B. Reinforcing Steel: Conform to material requirements for welded wire fabric of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. C. Grout: Nonmetallic, nonshrink grout containing no chloride producing agents conforming to the following requirements. 1. Compressive strength a. at 7 days: 3,500 psi b. at 28 days: 8,000 psi 2. Initial set time: 45 minutes 3. Final set time: 1.5 hours D. Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Conform to material requirements for preformed expansion joint material of Section 02752 - Concrete Paving Joints. E. Expansion Joint Filler: Conform to material requirements for expansion joint filler of Section 02752 - Concrete Paving Joints. F. Mortar: Mortar finish composed of one part Portland cement and 1-1/2 parts of fine aggregate. Use only when approved by Engineer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: • A. Prepare subgrade in accordance with applicable portions of sections on excavation and fill, embankment, and subgrade and roadbed. 3.02 PLACEMENT: A. Guideline: Set to follow top line of curb. Attach indicator to provide constant comparison between top of curb and guideline. 02771 -Curb and Gutter • 02771-1 RJN Project No. 1-1875-00 L SECTION 02771 - INTEGRAL CURB (continued) B. Forms: Brace to maintain position during pour. Use metal templates cut to section shown on Drawings. C. Reinforcement: Secure in position so that steel will remain in place throughout placement. Reinforcing steel shall remain at approximate center of base or pavement as indicated on Drawings. D. Joints: Place in accordance with Section 02752 - Concrete Paving Joints. Place dummy groove joints at 6 -foot centers at right angles to curb lines. Cut dummy ' grooves 1/4 inch deep using an approved edging tool. E. Place concrete in forms to required depth. Consolidate thoroughly. Do not permit rock pockets in form. Entirely cover top surfaces with mortar. 3.03 MANUAL FINISHING: A. After concrete is in place, remove front curb forms. Form exposed portions of curb, and of curb and gutter, using mule which conforms to curb shape, as shown on Drawings. B. Thin coat of mortar may be worked into exposed face of curb using mule and two - handled wooden darby at least 3 feet long. C. Before applying final finish move 10 -foot straightedge across gutter and up curb to back form of curb. Repeat until curb and gutter are true to grade and section. Lap straightedge every 5 feet. D, Steel trowel finish surfaces to smooth, even finish. Make face of finished curb true and straight. E. Edge outer edge of gutter with 1/4 -inch edger. Finish edges with tool having 1/4 -inch radius. F. Finish visible surfaces and edges of finished curb and gutter free from blemishes, form marks and tool marks. Finished curb or curb and gutter shall have uniform color, shape and appearance. 3.04 MECHANICAL FINISHING: A. Mechanical curb forming and finishing machines may be used instead of, or in ' conjunction with, previously described methods, if approved by Engineer. Use of mechanical methods shall provide specified curb design and finish. 3.05 CURING: A. Immediately after finishing operations, cure exposed surfaces of curbs and gutters in accordance with Section 02753 - Concrete Paving Curing. 3.06 TOLERANCES: A. Top surfaces of curb and gutter shall have uniform width and shall be free from ' humps, sags or other irregularities. Surfaces of curb top, curb face and gutter shall not vary more than 1/8 inch from edge of straightedge laid along them, except at grade changes. 02771 -Curb and Gutter 02771-2 RJN Project No. 1-1875-00 1 SECTION 02771 - INTEGRAL CURB (continued) 3.07 PROTECTION: A. Maintain curbs and gutters in good condition until completion of the Work. B. Replace damaged curbs and gutters to comply with this Section (no separate pay item). END OF SECTION 02771 02771 -Curb and Gutter 02771-3 RJN Project No. 1-1875-00 SECTION 02775 - CONCRETE SIDEWALKS PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Reinforced concrete sidewalks. 1.02 A. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. B. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. C. ASTM C42 - Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. D. ASTM C138 - Standard Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. E. ASTM C143 - Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. F. ASTM C172 - Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. G. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture - Density Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5 -Pound Rammer and 12 -inch Drop. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01330 - Submittals. B. Submit certified testing results and certificates of compliance. 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 02751 — Concrete Paving B. Section 02752 — Concrete Paving Joints PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Concrete: Conform to material and proportion requirements for concrete of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. B. Reinforcing Steel: Conform to material requirements for welded wire fabric of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. C. Forms: Use straight, unwarped wood or metal forms with nominal depth equal to or greater than the proposed sidewalk thickness. The use of 2" by 4" lumber as forms will not be allowed. D. Sand Bed: Uniformly graded bank run sand. 02775 -Concrete Sidewalks 02775-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 El SECTION 02775 - CONCRETE SIDEWALKS (continued) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 REPLACEMENT: ' A. Replace sidewalks which are removed or damaged during construction with sidewalk of thickness and width equivalent to those removed or damaged. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. Identify and protect utilities which are to remain. B. Protect living trees, other plant growth, and features designated to remain. C. Excavate subgrade to the line, grade, and cross section shown on Drawings. Remove soft spots and pumping soils and replace with fill material having a Plasticity Index between 7 and 20. D. Immediately after subgrade is prepared, cover with compacted sand bed to depth as ' shown on Drawings. Lay concrete when sand is moist but not saturated. 3.03 PLACEMENT: ' A. Setting Forms: Securely stake forms to line and grade. Maintain position during concrete placement. B. Reinforcement: Install 6x6, W2.9 x W2.9 welded wire fabric or No. 3 reinforcing steel bars on 18 -inch centers longitudinally and transversely. Lay longitudinal bars in walk continuously, except through expansion joints. Support reinforcement in manner to maintain reinforcement in center of slab vertically during placement. C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints in accordance with Section 02752 - Concrete Paving Joints. D. Place concrete in forms to specified depth and tamp thoroughly with "jitterbug" tamp, or other acceptable method. Bring mortar to surface. E. Strike off to smooth finish with wood strike board. Finish smoothly with wood hand float. Brush across sidewalk lightly with fine -haired brush. F. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, mark off joints 1/8 inch deep; at spacing equal to width of walk. Use joint tool equal in width to edging tool. G. Finish edges with tool having 1/4 -inch radius. 3.04 FIELD OUALITY CONTROL: A. Compressive Strength Test Specimens: Four test specimens for compressive strength test shall be made in accordance with ASTM C31 for each 30 cubic yards or less of sidewalk that is placed in one day. Two specimens shall be tested at 7 days. The remaining two specimens shall be tested at 28 days. Specimens shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C39. Minimum compressive strength shall be 2500 pounds per square inch at 7 days and 3000 pounds per square inch at 28 days. B. Yield test for cement content per cubic yard of concrete will be made in accordance with ASTM C138. If such cement content is found to be less than that specified per 02775 -Concrete Sidewalks 02775-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I ' SECTION 02775- CONCRETE SIDEWALKS (continued) cubic yard, reduce batch weights until amount of cement per cubic yard of concrete conforms to requirements. ' C. If the Contractor places concrete without notifying the laboratory, the Owner may have the concrete tested by means of a core test as specified in ASTM C42. If the ' concrete does not meet the specification, the cost of the test will be deducted from payment due the Contractor. D. Sampling of fresh concrete shall be in accordance with ASTM C172. ' E. Take slump tests when cylinders are made and when concrete slump appears excessive. F. Concrete shall be acceptable if the average of the two 28 -day compression tests is equal to or greater than the minimum 28 -day strength specified. G. If either of the two tests is less than the average of the two tests by more than ' 10 percent, that entire test shall be considered erratic and not indicative of the concrete strength. Core samples will be required of this concrete. H. If any 28 -day laboratory test indicates that concrete of low strength has been placed, ' the concrete in question shall be tested by taking cores as directed by the Engineer. At least three representative cores shall be taken and tested as specified in ASTM C42 and the cost deducted from payment due the Contractor. ' 3.05 NONCONFORMING PAVEMENT: A. Remove and replace areas of sidewalk that fail compressive strength tests, with ' concrete of thickness shown on Drawings. B. Nonconforming sidewalk sections shall be replaced at no additional cost to the ' Owner. 3.06 PROTECTION: IA. Maintain sidewalks in good condition until completion of the Work. B. Replace damaged sidewalks in accordance with Paragraph 3.01, Replacement. END OF SECTION 02775 I • I 02775 -Concrete Sidewalks 02775-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I ' SECTION 02830 - CHAIN LINK FENCE & GATES PART1- GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Provide chain link fence and gate units including erection accessories, fittings, and t• fastenings as indicated on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Construction Drawings B. Manufacturer's technical data and installation requirements ' 1.03 REFERENCES: A. ANSI/ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel ' Products B. ANSI/ASTM F567 — Installation of Chain Link Fence IC. ASTM Al 16 — Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric D. ASTM Al20 — Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded and seamless, for Ordinary Uses ' E. ASTM A121 - Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Barbed Wire F. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ' G. ASTM A392 — Zinc -Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric H. ASTM A428 — Weight of Coating on Aluminum -Coated Iron or Steel Articles '• I. ASTM A491 — Aluminum -Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric J. ASTM A569 — Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality K. ASTM A585 — Aluminum Coated Steel Barbed Wire L. ASTM,C94 - Ready -mix Concrete ' M. ASTM F573 — Residential Zinc -Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric N. ASTM F668 — Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric ' O. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI) — Product Manual P. FS RR -F-191— Fencing, Wire, and Post Metal (and Gates, Chain Link Fence Fabric, and Accessories) ' 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: ' A. Record actual locations of property perimeter posts relative to property lines and easements. B. Product data from manufacturer. 1 02830 -Chain Link Fence and Gates 02830-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 L SECTION 02830 - CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES (continued) PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: I. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation 2, Anchor Fence, Inc. 3. United States Steel 2.02 MATERIALS: ' A. Fabric: 1. No. 9 gage (0.148"±0.005") finished size galvanized steel wires, 2" mesh, with both top and bottom selvages twisted and barbed. 2. Furnish one-piece fabric widths for fencing. B. End, Comer, and Pull Posts: Galvanized steel, minimum sizes and weights as follows: 1. Up to 6'-0" Fabric Height: 2.375" OD pipe, 3.65 lbs. /1 in. ft., or 3.5"x3.5" roll -formed sections, 4.85 lbs. /lin. ft. 2. Over 6'-0" Fabric Height: 2.875" OD pipe, 5.79 lbs. /lin. ft., or 3.5"x3.5" roll -formed sections, 4.85 lbs. /Iin. ft. ' C. Line Posts: Galvanized steel, minimum sizes and weights as follows: 1. Up to 6'-0" Fabric Height: 1.90" OD steel pipe, 2.70 lbs. /lin. ft., or 1.875"x1.625" C -sections, 2.28 lbs. /lin. ft. 2. 6'-0" to 8'-0" Fabric Height: 2.375" OD steel pipe, 3.65 lbs. /lin. ft., or 2.25"x1.875" H -sections, 2.64 lbs. /1 in. ft. 3. Over 8'-0" Fabric Height: 2.875" OD steel pipe, 5.79 lbs. /lin. ft. or 2.25"x1.875" H -sections, 3.26 lbs. /1in. ft. D. Gate Posts: Galvanized steel, posts for supporting single gate leaf, or one leaf of double gate insulation, for nominal gate widths as follows: 1. Up to 6'-0": 3.5"x3.5" roll -formed section, 4.85 lbs. /1in. ft., or 2.875 OD pipe, 5.79 lbs. /lin. ft. 2. Over 6'-0" to 13'-0": 4.000" OD pipe, 9.11 lbs. /tin. ft. E. Top Rail: Rails: 1.66" OD pipe, 2.27 lbs. /ft. or 1.625"xl.25" roll -formed sections, 1.35 lbs. /ft.: galvanized steel, manufacturer's longest lengths. F. Couplings: Expansion type, approximately 6" long, for each joint. II G. Attaching Devices: Provide means for attaching top rail securely to each gate comer, pull and end post. H. Sleeves: Galvanized steel pipe not less than 6" long and with inside diameter not less than 1/2" greater than the outside diameter of the pipe. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve of width and length not less than 1" greater than outside diameter of sleeve. I. Tension Wire: 7 gage galvanized steel, coated coil spring wire, located at bottom of fabric. J. Wire Ties: 11 gage galvanized steel. 02830 -Chain Link Fence and Gates 02830 - 2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 02830 - CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES (continued) I I I I I I I K. Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace at end of gate posts and at both sides of comer and pull posts, with horizontal brace located at mid -height of fabric. Use same material as top rail for brace, and truss to line posts with 0.375" diameter rod and adjustable tightener. L. Post Tops: Galvanized steel, weathertight closure cap for each tubular post. Furnish caps with openings to permit passage of top rail. M. Stretcher Bars: Galvanized steel, one piece lengths equal to full height of fabric, with minimum cross-section of 3/16"x3/4". Provide one stretch bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post. N. Stretch Bar Bands: Manufacturer's standard. O. Gate Cross -Bracing: 3/8" diameter galvanized steel adjustable length truss rods. P. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150. Q. Aggregates: ASTM C 33. R. Water: Clean. S. Non -Shrink, Non -Metallic Grout: Premixed, factory -packaged, noncorrosive, nonstaining, nongaseous, exterior grout complying with CE CRD-C62 1. T. Swinging Gate Hardware: 1. Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non -lift-off type, offset to permit 180 degree.gate opening. Provide 1-1/2" pair of binges for each leaf over 6'-0" nominal height. 2. Latch: Forked type or plunger -bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as integral part of latch. U. Double Gates Hardware: Provide gate stops for double gates, consisting of mushroom type of flush plate with anchors set in concrete, to engage center drop rod or plunger bar. Include locking device and padlock eye as integral part of latch, using one padlock for locking both gate leaves. V. Sliding Gate Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard heavy-duty track, ball - bearing hanger sheaves, overhead framing and supports, guides, stays, bracing, and accessories as required. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GATE FABRICATION: A. Fabricate swing gate perimeter frames of 1.90" OD pipe, galvanized steel. Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and for attachment of fabric, hardware and accessories. Space frame members maximum of 8'-0" apart. B. Assemble gate frames by welding or special fittings and rivets, for rigid connections. Install same fabric as for fence with stretcher bars at vertical edges. Install diagonal cross -bracing on gates as required to ensure rigid frame without sag or twist. Bars may be used at top and bottom edges. Attach stretchers to gate frame at 15" o.c. maximum. C. Attach hardware to provide security against removal or breakage. 02830 -Chain Link Fence and Gates 02830-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 02830 - CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES (continued) D. Electric Gate Operator - Provide electric gate openers, Elite or equal, gate opener shall include an exit loop detector, safety loop with detector, fire box, strobe eye beam safety stop and safety edge. 3.02 FINISH: A. Fabric Finish: Galvanized, ASTM A 392, Class I, with not less than 1.2 oz. zinc/ ' sq. ft. of surface B. Framing: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 120 or A 123, with not less than 1.8 oz. zinc/sq. ft. of surface C. Hardware and Accessories: Galvanized, ASTM A 153 with zinc weights in accordance with Table I 3.03 CONCRETE MIXING: A. Mix materials to obtain concrete with minimum 28 -day compressive strength of ' 2,500 psi; I" maximum size aggregate, maximum 3" slump, and 2-4% entrained air. 3.04 INSTALLATION: ' A. Comply with recommended procedures and instructions of fencing manufacturer. Provide secure, aligned installation with line posts spaced at 10'-0" o.c. maximum. B. Grade Set Posts: Drill or hand excavate using post hole digger in firm undisturbed or compacted soil. C. Excavate hole for each post to minimum diameter recommended by fence ' manufacturer but not less than four times largest cross-section of post. Excavate hole depths approximately 3" lower than post bottom with bottom of posts set not less than 36" below finish grade surface. ' D. Center and align posts in holes 3" above bottom of excavation. E. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations. Extend concrete footing 2" above grade and trowel to crown to shed water. F. Sleeve Set Posts: Anchor posts by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with nonshrink, non-metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. G. Top Rails: Run rail continuously, bending to form radius for curved runs. Provide ' expansion couplings as recommended by manufacturer. H. Center Rails: Provide center rails where indicated. Install one piece'between posts and flush with post on fabric side, using special offset fittings where necessary. I. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. 1 02830 -Chain Link Fence and Gates 02830-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 02830 - CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES (continued) J. Tension Wire: Install tension wires through post cap loops before stretching fabric and tie to each post cap with not less than 6 gage galvanized wire. Fasten fabric to tension wire using 11 gage galvanized steel hog rings spaced at 24" o.c. K. Fabric:. Leave approximately 2" between finish grade and bottom selvage. Pull fabric'taut and tie to posts, rails and tension wires. Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released. L. Stretcher Bars: Secure at end, corner, pull, and gate posts by threading through or clamping to fabric at 4" o.c., and secure to posts with metal bands spaced at 15" o.c. M. Tie Wires: 1. Use U-shaped wire, conforming with diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping pipe and fabric firmly when ends twisted to at least two full turns. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. 2. Tie fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced 12" o.c. Tie fabric to rails and braces with wire ties spaced at 24" o.c. Tie fabric to tension wires with hog rings spaced 24" o.c. 3. Manufacturer's standard procedure will be accepted if of equal strength and durability. N. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. O. Gates: Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground -set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubrication. END OF SECTION 02830 J F II P I ' 02830 -Chain Link Fence and Gates 02830 -5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I] SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, equipment, transportation, supervision and services necessary for the design and installation of permanent or temporary forms and falsework for cast -in -place concrete complete with form liners, coatings, form ties, manufactured joints, anchors, inserts and waterstops as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: A. Design of formwork. B. Materials and fabrication of formwork. C. Shoring, bracing, ties and anchorage of formwork. D. Forming for openings, inserts and embedments. E. Formwork accessories. F. Formwork removal. 1.02 RELATED WORK: The following sections prescribe items of related work. Coordinate work prescribed by this section with work prescribed by these sections: A. Section 03200 — Concrete Reinforcement B. Section 03300 — Cast -in -Place Concrete C. Section 05511 — Metal Stairs, Landings, Platforms, Catwalks, Ladders and Railings 1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS: The publications listed below form part of this section. Each publication shall be the latest revision and addendum in effect on the date of the award, unless noted otherwise. Except as specifically modified by the requirements specified herein or the details on the drawings, the work included under this section shall conform to the provisions of these publications: A. ACI (American Concrete Institute) I. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings 2. AC1350 Environmental Structures 3. ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork B. APA (American Plywood Association) I. "Plywood for Concrete Forming" 2. "Plywood Design Specification" C. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) 1. A 446 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot - Dip Process, Structural Quality 2. A525 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot - Dip Process, General Requirements D. NFPA (National Forest Products Association) I' 03100 -Concrete Forms and Accessories 03100-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 , SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES (continued) E. "National Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastenings" F. SSI (Scaffolding and Shoring Institute) 1. "Recommended Horizontal Shoring Beam Erection Procedure" 2. "Recommended Safety Requirements for Shoring Concrete Formwork" 3. "Wood Structural Design Data" 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL: A. General: Perform work according to the recommendations of ACI 347 and referenced documents. B. Requirements 1. Design formwork to support vertical and lateral loads as recommended in Chapter 2 of ACI 347 and loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure and to resist forces due to placing and vibrating concrete. 2. Construct formwork so that concrete slabs, walls and other members shall be of correct dimensions, shape, alignment, elevation and position. C. Tolerances 1. Control points and benchmarks shall be established and maintained in an undisturbed condition until final completion and acceptance of work so that they are adequate for reference to establish tolerances. 2. The formwork shall be set and maintained so that the tolerances of the completed work shall not vary from the drawings by more than the requirements of Table 4.3.1 of ACI 301 and Chapter 3 of ACI 347. D. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork. E. Contractor is responsible for quality control and construction inspection. F. All work is subject to the final acceptance by the Owner. Strict conformance to the drawings and sections shall be required. 1.05 FIELD OUALITY CONTROL: A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design; and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties and items are secure. B. Ensure that formwork is anchored to shores below so that movement of formwork system will be prevented during concreting. C. During concreting, check elevations, camber and plumbness of formwork. D. Do not reuse wood formwork more than three times for exposed concrete surfaces; do not patch formwork. E. Check gradual irregularities with a 5'-0" template. F. Provide positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) to permit realignment or readjustment of shores if settlement occurs. 03100 -Concrete Forms and Accessories 03100-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I. SECTION 03100- CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES (continued) 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING: ' A. Store formwork materials off ground. B. Ventilate and protect to prevent deterioration from moisture. IC. Protect from dirt and grease. D. Protect from damage. ' PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ALL FORMWORK shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 4 of ACI 347. 2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS: A. Plywood shall be Structural I C -C Ext-APA or B -B Plyform Class I Ext-APA; 5/8", ' minimum, thickness. B. Lumber shall be sound, free from loose knots, of uniform thickness, dressed, straight ' and true, without twists or bends. C. Exposed Surfaces 1. Use smooth faced plywood or steel forms for exposed surfaces. ' 2. For exposed surfaces in prominent public view, tape joints with waterproof tape to prevent bleeding and honeycombing at joints. D. Non -exposed Surfaces ' I . Use lumber, plywood or steel forms for non -exposed surfaces. 2. Neat excavation cuts to form sides of footings below grade will be allowed when soil character permits and with prior approval of the Owner's ' Representative. a. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil before placing concrete. ' b. When using earth forms, provide additional concrete beyond the minimum design dimensions to the side of the earth cut at no additional cost. ' 2.03 STEEL FORMS shall be galvanized and minimum 16 -gauge matched, tight -fitting and stiffened to support weight of wet concrete plus construction loads without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. ' 2.04 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES: A. Form ties shall be the water -seal coil type, constructed so that the tie remains ' embedded in the wall, except for a removable portion at each end. Form ties shall be constructed so that no metal is within one inch of the concrete surface after the forms, inserts, and tie ends are removed. Wire ties will not be permitted. Ties shall ' withstand all pressures and limit deflection of forms to acceptable limits. B. Form release oil shall be colorless mineral oil that will not stain concrete or absorb moisture. 03100 -Concrete Forms and Accessories 03100 - 3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES (continued) C. Comers shall be chamfered, rigid plastic, rubber (neoprene) or wood type; '/<" x '/<" in size; and maximum possible lengths. D. Nails, spikes, lag bolts, through bolts and anchorages shall be sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. PART3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Examine the substrate, formwork and the conditions under which formwork is to be placed. Do not place formwork until the Owner Representative has approved the sub -grade preparation. B. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings. I C. Provide chamfer strips on external corners of beams, girders and columns unless shown otherwise on drawings. D. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. E. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to the exact sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown and as required to obtain accurate alignments, location, grades, level and plumbness in the finished structure. 3.02 FORM RELEASE OIL: A. Apply form release oil on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; wipe off excess oil to leave surface of forms just oily to the touch. B. Apply oil before placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent wherever concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or wherever applied coverings are affected by agent; soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water; keep surfaces coated before placing concrete. 3.03 INSERTS. EMBEDDED ITEMS AND OPENINGS: ' A. Provide formed openings wherever required for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors and other inserts. D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to lines and elevations shown on drawings; ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. 3.04 CLEANUP: FORM CLEANING: A. Clean and remove foreign matter from forms as erection proceeds. 03100 -Concrete Forms and Accessories 03100 - 4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I1 SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES (continued) B. Clean debris from formed cavities before placing concrete. C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter; ensure 3.05 that water and debris drain to exterior through clean -out ports and drains. D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow within forms; do not use de-icing salts; do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure; use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. REMOVAL OF FORMS: A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and the imposed construction and live loads. Time of form removal shall follow the guidelines of ACI 301 and ACI 347. B. Loosen forms carefully; do not wedge pry bars, hammers or tools against finish concrete surfaces. C. Store removed forms in such a manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged; discard damaged forms. D. After completion of work of this section, remove from job -site associated debris, tools and equipment. END OF SECTION 03100 03100 -Concrete Forms and Accessories 03100 - 5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 II SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Ii PARTI- GENERAL ' 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, supervision and ' services necessary for the detailing, fabrication, delivery and installation of reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric for cast -in place concrete work as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: IA. Furnishing of reinforcing materials B. Detailing of reinforcement IC. Fabrication of reinforcement D. Installation of reinforcement ' E. Providing and installing supports for reinforcing F. Providing and installing reinforcing accessories G. Reinforcing steel shall include reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric. All ' accessories, tie wire, chairs and bolsters required for the installation of the reinforcing shall also be provided. I1.02 RELATED WORK: The following sections prescribe items of related work. I Coordinate work prescribed by this section with work prescribed by these sections: A. Section 03100 — Concrete Forms & Accessories 1 B. Section 03300 — Cast -in -Place Concrete 1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS: ' The publications listed below form part of this section. Each publication shall be the latest revision and addendum in effect on the date of the award, unless noted otherwise. Except as specifically modified by the requirements specified herein or the details on the drawings, the ' work included under this section shall conform to the provisions of these publications: A. AC] (American Concrete Institute) I. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings ' 2. ACI 315 Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures 3. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 4. ACI 350 Environmental Structures ' B. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) 1. A82 Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement 2. A185 Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete ' Reinforcement 3. A497 Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement I. 4. A615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 03200 -Concrete Reinforcement 03200- 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ll SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT (continued) C. CRSI (Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute) I. "Manual of Standard Practice" 2. "Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars" 3. "Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specification and Nomenclature" 1.04 SUBMITTALS: The following items shall be submitted to Owner for review. Review and release of submittals does not relieve Contractor of any of the responsibilities and requirements of this section and the design drawings. Review of the Contractor's plans and methods of construction shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor in any way of his responsibility for the successful performance of the work. A. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance: Certifies that products supplied meet or exceed specified requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings for fabrication, bending and setting of reinforcing steel. Comply with the requirements of ACI 315 and CRSI showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bending schedule and placement of reinforcement and supports. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL: A. The detailer and fabricator shall have not less than five years experience in the detailing and fabrication of concrete reinforcing steel. B. The installer shall have a minimum of five years experience in the placement of concrete reinforcing steel. C. All work is subject to the fmal acceptance by the Owner. Strict conformance to the drawings and sections shall be required 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, TAGGING AND HANDLING: A. Deliver reinforcement to the job -site bundled and tagged in accordance with CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice. Use metal tags indicating bar size, lengths and other information corresponding to the markings shown on the placement drawings. B. Reinforcing materials shall be shipped to the job -site new, undamaged and free of rust. C. Reinforcing materials shall be stored on blocks and cribbing and protected to ensure that no damage or impurities will occur from moisture, dirt, grease or other sources. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCING BARS: ' ASTM A615, Grade 60, new deformed billet -steel bars, unfinished. 2.02 WELDED WIRE FABRIC: A. Smooth steel welded wire fabric shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Al 85 and is denoted by the letter "W" followed by a number indicating cross-sectional area in hundredths of a square inch. 03200 -Concrete Reinforcement 03200 - 2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I` SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT (continued) ' B. Deformed steel welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A497 and is denoted by the letter "D" followed by a number indicating cross-sectional area in hundredths of a square inch. C. All welded wire fabric shall be furnished in flat sheets and shall be tagged with manufacturer's name, size and designation. Rolled material is unacceptable. ' 2.03 BAR SUPPORTS: I. A. Wire Bar Supports: Fabricate from cold drawn carbon steel wire or stainless steel wire to the geometry and gauges specified in Table II in the CRSI Manual of • Standard Practice. ' B. Sand plates (wherever required) of 20 -gauge sheet steel welded to support legs. • C. Plastic coating, plastic legs or plastic tips shall be used where legs of supports are in contact with forms or exposed to view concrete surfaces. ' D. Pre -cast Concrete Block Bar Supports: Cast from concrete with design strength at least equal to specified strength of structure, provided with two (2) 16 gage tie wires ' or hole for No. 4 dowel as appropriate, minimum 4" square, thickness as required for concrete cover. 2.04 WELDED WIRE FABRIC SUPPORTS: - ' A. Molded Plastic Supports: Sized and shaped to support welded wire fabric at the specified depth during concrete placement without breaking or dislodging with ' bottom pad, where required, to prevent puncture of vapor barrier, if used. B. Pre -cast Concrete Supports: Cast from concrete with design strength at least equal to specified strength of slab, provided with two (2) 16 -gauge tie wires, minimum 4" I. square, thickness, as required, to position wire fabric at specified depth. 2.05 TIE WIRE: ' ASTM A82, double annealed, minimum 16 -gauge. 2.06 SPACERS: ' Molded plastic, ferrous metal or concrete, sized and shaped to firmly hold reinforcing bars in place and to maintain specified minimum clearance from inside face of forms during concrete placement, without breaking, dislodging or deforming. ' 2.07 EPDXY ADHESIVE: Manufactured adhesive for anchoring reinforcement into existing concrete. ' A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. , HILTI HIT HY 150 ' , 2. Epcon Granite 5 3. Simpson Acrylic -Tie 1 03200 -Concrete Reinforcement 03200-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT (continued) 2.08 MECHANICAL CONNECTIONS OF REINFORCING BARS: Mechanical couplers shall conform to the requirements of ACI 318 and ACI 439.3R for tension compression mechanical connections. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 DETAILING: A. The Contractor shall prepare shop fabrication and field placement drawings for all reinforcing steel in accordance with ACI 315, ACI 318 and CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice. Placement drawings shall show the locations and spacing of all reinforcement in the structure. Placement drawings shall be complete so that the reinforcement can be placed without reference to the drawings. B. Detailing shall account fora minimum cover as shown on the drawings. C. All horizontal bars and horizontal portions of bent bars shall be considered "top bars". D. Splices shall be staggered and Class B, unless noted otherwise. E. Full development length shall be provided across joints, unless noted otherwise. 3.02 FABRICATION: A. Fabricate reinforcing in accordance with ACI 315, the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and from reviewed and released shop detail drawings. B. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately bent and cut as detailed. 1. Bars shall be bent cold. 2. Bars shall be shear cut. 3. Heating of bars shall not be permitted. 4. Bars shall not be bent, cut or handled in any manner that could damage the integrity of the material. 5. Shearing and bending tolerances shall conform to the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 3.03 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION: A. Verify that reinforcing is free from twists, dirt, loose rust, scale, oil, grease or other coatings. B. Verify mark number on tag against field placement drawing. C. Verify reinforcing size and type against field placement drawings. D. Examine the substrate, formwork and the conditions under which reinforcement is to be placed. Do not place reinforcing until the subgrade preparation has been approved. 3.04 PLACEMENT: A. Place reinforcement according to reviewed and released drawings and in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 315. 03200 -Concrete Reinforcement 03200-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 II I I Li I I L I L El I I [1 I I SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT (continued) ' B. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement from formwork construction or concrete placement and consolidation. Support reinforcing Ion metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers. C. Locate reinforcing to provide concrete cover and spacing shown on the drawings. II. Location of bars with respect to spacing and effective depth shall be '4" (t) of that shown. 2. Lateral spacing of bars shall be 1' (t) of that shown on the drawings, except where inserts, etc. may require shifting of bars. 3. Where bars are required to be shifted, cut, etc. due to inserts, openings, etc. and these are not detailed on the drawings, then approval shall be obtained from the Owner's Representative before proceeding. In no case shall the ' total area of steel provided in a cross section be reduced and typically additional steel will be required. D. Install sheets of welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining ' pieces at least one (1) full mesh plus 2" and a minimum of 8". Lace with tie wire. E. Do not insert dowels into fresh concrete; do not float welded wire fabric down into ' fresh concrete. F. Support all slab reinforcement at the required depth and secure prior to placing concrete; do not pull welded wire fabric up into fresh concrete as it is placed. ' G. Welding of and to any reinforcing materials including tack welding of crossing bars is strictly prohibited. ' H. Do not cut, bend or straighten bars partially embedded in concrete without specific case -by -case approval of the Owner's Representative. Wires and bars shall be shear cut only. Heat shall not be allowed for cutting or bending of bars. II. Bars protruding from joints shall be covered and adequately protected from damage. Plastic caps shall be installed on the ends of all protruding bars as required by OSHA. 3.05 CLEANUP: 1 After completion of work of this section, remove from jobsite associated debris, tools and cleanup of this trade. ' END OF SECTION 03200 I I I I 03200 -Concrete Reinforcement 03200 - 5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART1-GENERAL ' 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, supervision and ' services necessary for the construction and curing of field cast -in -place concrete. The work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: A. Lower Level mat slab, foundation walls, slabs on grade, grade beams, counterforts, ' shield walls and piers. 1.02 RELATED WORK: I. The following sections prescribe items of related work. Coordinate work prescribed by this section with work prescribed by these sections: IA. Section 03100— Concrete Forms & Accessories B. Section 03200 — Concrete Reinforcement 1 C. Section 05511 — Metal Stairs, Landings, Platforms, Catwalks, Ladders and Railings 1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS: ' The publications listed below form part of this section. Each publication shall be the latest revision and addendum in effect on the date of the award, unless noted otherwise. Except as specifically modified by the requirements specified herein or the details on the drawings, the ' work included under this section shall conform to the provisions of these publications: A. ACI (American Concrete Institute) 1. ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, ' Heavyweight and Mass Concrete 2. ACI 212.1 Admixtures for Concrete 3. ACI 212.2 Guide for Use of Admixtures in Concrete I. 4. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings 5. ACI 302 Guide for Concrete Floor & Slab Construction 6. ACI 304 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and ' Placing Concrete 7. ACI 304.2 Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods 8. ACI 305 Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting 9. ACI 306 Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting 10. ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete 11. ACI 309 Standard Practice for Consolidation of Concrete 12. ACI 311 Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection ' 13. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 14. ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork 15. ACI 350 Environmental Structures ' B. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) 1. C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates 2. C70 Standard Test Method for Surface Moisture in Fine Aggregate '• 3. C94 Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete 4. C143 Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete 03300 -Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (continued) 1.04 I 5. C150 Specification for Portland Cement 6. C171 Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete 7. C173 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method 8. C227 Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement - Aggregate Combinations 9. C231 Test Method for Air Content or Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method 10. C260 Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete ' 11. C309 Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete 12. C494 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 13. C566 Standard Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying 14. C618 Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzalan for Use as a Mineral Admixture In Portland Cement Concrete 15. D994 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type) 16. D1190 Standard Specification for Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot -Applied Elastic Type 17. D1751 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) 18. D1752 Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction ' 19. E329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction C. NRMCA (National Ready Mixed Concrete Association) - Checklist for Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Products. D. USACE US Army Corps of Engineers - CRD-0572 SUBMITTALS: The following items shall be submitted to the Owner for review. The Owner's review will be made to verify that the general scope of work is adequate and that the Contractor is qualified to perform the work. Review and release of submittals does not relieve the Contractor of any of the responsibilities and requirements of this section and the design drawings. Review of the Contractor's plans and methods of construction shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor in any way of his responsibility for the successful performance of the work. A. Proposed concrete design mix proportions and supporting documentation as required by ACI 301 and ACI 318. The Contractor shall submit the proposed concrete mixes and supporting documentation forming the basis of the mix design not less than 40 days before any concrete is to be delivered. A separate concrete mix shall be submitted for each type of concrete and for each strength of concrete required by the sections. Only concrete mixes reviewed and released by Owner shall be used in the work. 03300 -Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 -2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I I I I I U SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (continued) B. Copy of current NRMCA Certificate of Conformance for Concrete Production • ' Facilities for supplier's plant(s). C. Manufacturer material certifications and qualifying test reports confirming that the materials meet the requirements of the sections shall be submitted for the following: ' 1. Cement - include brand, source and type. 2. Admixtures 3. Aggregates - include source, gradation, specific gravities, saturated -surface ' dry weights and other test results conforming aggregate to ASTM C 33. 4. Bond breaker 5. Curing materials, waterstops, joint fillers 6. Caulking and Patching material '7. Non-metallic shrinkage resistant grout D. Batch Ticket: A delivery ticket with a serial number shall be supplied with each batch of concrete before unloading at the site. The delivery ticket shall show all information required by Section 16 of ASTM C 94. E. Manufacturer's data sheets on waterstops, curing compounds and joint fillers. ' 1.05 OUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL: A. Ready -mix concrete supplier shall hold current NRMCA Certificate of Conformance ' for Concrete Production Facilities. B. There shall be a pre -construction meeting held at the Owner site with the Contractor, ' his concrete supplier, and the Owner's Representative to review the specifications and requirements for the concrete work. This meeting will be scheduled by Owner and major items of review will include: specification review; concrete materials and mix design; inspection and testing responsibilities; sampling and testing t requirements; sign -off requirements; authority to accept or reject fresh concrete; pouring schedule; pouring procedures; and curing and finishing procedures. IC. All testing and inspection agencies shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329. Tests of concrete will be performed by ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician 1 or equivalent certification. D. Tolerances: 1. Tolerances for formed concrete surfaces shall be in accordance with Table 4.3.1 of ACI 301 and Chapter 3 of ACI 347. '• 2. Embedded items shall be within 'A" of their required location. E. The Owner's Representative shall be notified at least 48 hours prior to any concrete placement to permit time for review of reinforcing and formwork, and observation of ' concrete placement. F. All concrete structures shall be constructed at the locations and in conformance with the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the drawings. The strength of concrete. ' shall be as indicated on the'drawings or'as specified in this section. G. All surfaces receiving concrete shall be inspected and accepted by the Owner's Representative prior to placing concrete. 1 03300 -Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300- 3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (continued) ' 1.06 TESTING: A. The Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring, sampling, testing, and inspecting ' all phases of the work. 1. Field testing shall be performed by the Contractor's independent testing lab. All testing and inspection agencies shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329. Tests of concrete shall be performed by an ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician 1, or equivalent certification. Tests of the mix design shall also be by the Contractor's independent testing lab. 2. Sampling and testing of delivered concrete shall be conducted by the Contractor's independent testing service. 3. Concrete shall be sampled, cured, and tested for compressive strength, air content and slump. Compressive test cylinders shall be prepared in sets of three cylinders for each test. Specimens for each test shall be obtained from the same batch of concrete, after about one half of the batch has been deposited. 4. The minimum rate of sampling shall be one set per 50 cubic yards of concrete of each mixture design placed in the day and at least one set for each structure or foundation. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all expenses related to the testing and inspection of work not evidencing compliance with the specifications and work done without prior notice of the Owner's Representative. This shall include taking and testing a minimum of three concrete cores in each area of non-compliance. C. The presence of the Owner's Representative on the jobsite and/or verification testing ' by Owner is not to be presumed to relieve in any degree the responsibilities of the Contractor. Any work that does not meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications shall be repaired or removed and replaced solely at the Contractor's ' expense. D. Field records, in the form of concrete pour cards, shall be maintained for each concrete placement. As a minimum the following information shall be kept: 1. Concrete Placement: date, time, location, delivery ticket, test samples taken, date of form removal, method of curing and length of curing. ' 2. Weather conditions: air temperature, relative humidity and wind speed. E. The Contractor shall provide assistance and allow the Owner to perform sampling and verification testing of any phase of the work. 1.07 COLD -WEATHER TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENTS: A. Cold -weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 306 and the requirements specified herein. B. Concrete shall not be mixed or placed when the temperature is below 40°F or when conditions indicate that the temperature will fall below 40°F within 24 hours after placing, unless cold weather concreting procedures and precautions are followed. C. The concrete, formwork and air temperature must be kept at a temperature of not less than 50°F for not less than 72 hours after placing. 1 03300 -Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 -4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (continued) 1.08 HOT -WEATHER TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENTS: 6 ' A. Hot -weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 305 and the requirements specified herein. ' B. The maximum placing temperature of the concrete as it is being discharged from the delivery vehicle shall not exceed 90°F. The concrete supplier shall employ effective means, such as pre -cooling the aggregate or pre -cooling the mixing water, to t maintain the delivered temperature of concrete at or below 90°F. 1.09 BATCHING, MIXING AND TRANSPORTATION of concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 304 and ASTM C94. ' A. The batch plant and scales shall meet the standards established by the NRMCA, "Certification of Ready -Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." I. B. The batch plant shall be capable of ready adjustment to compensate for the varying moisture content of the aggregates and to change the weights of the materials being batched. Adjustments to the mix shall be made based on a moisture content ' determined by ASTM C-70 for fine aggregates and ASTM C-566 for coarse aggregates. C. The concrete shall be delivered as close to the area of placement as is safely possible. ID. The concrete shall be discharged from the delivery equipment within a maximum of 90 minutes or before the drum has made 300 revolutions.. Timing for the concrete ' discharge shall start with the introduction of the mixing water. E. The concrete trucks shall be continuously rotated at the agitating speed while awaiting discharge. If the truck stops agitating for 15 minutes or longer, the concrete ' shall be re -blended by rotating the drum at the mixing speed for a minimum of ten (10) revolutions prior to discharging. PART2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 CEMENT: IA. Portland cement shall be Type II, conforming to ASTM C-150. B. Only one (1) brand and source of cement shall be used for all work on the Contract, unless otherwise specifically authorized. The brand and source shall provide a ' uniform color for all exposed concrete. 2.02 AGGREGATES: ' A. Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C-33. B. Fine aggregate shall be uniformly graded, clean, sharp, washed natural or crushed sand, free from organic impurities. C. Coarse aggregate shall be natural washed gravel or washed crushed rock having hard, strong, durable pieces, free from adherent coatings. 1 03300 -Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 - 5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (continued) Maximum sizes of coarse aggregates shall be increase size for 36" & 60" concrete mat slab. And also for walls & counter forts 24" thick in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C-33 gradation size no. 67. Water used in the concrete mix shall be potable, clean and free from oils, acids, salts, chlorides, alkali, sugar, vegetable or other injurious substances. ADMIXTURES: The concrete shall contain an air -entraining admixture and a water -reducing admixture. No other admixtures shall be used unless reviewed and approved by the Owner. Admixtures shall be purchased and batched in liquid solution. The use of calcium chloride or an admixture containing calcium chloride is prohibited. Admixtures shall be of the same manufacturer to assure compatibility. Sika Corp. Master Builders Euclid Chemical Co. D. The air -entraining admixture shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C-260 and ACI 212.1R. E. The water -reducing admixture shall be Type A or Type D complying with the requirements of ASTM C-494 and ACI 212.18. Type A shall generally be used throughout unless increased setting time is required, in which case Type D shall be used. REINFORCING STEEL shall conform to Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. CURING MEMBRANE shall be non -staining paper conforming to ASTM C-171 or 6 -mil - thick polyethylene film. CURING AND SEALING COMPOUNDS shall be a clear acrylic -based compound. Acceptable products are: BOND BREAKER shall be Williams Tilt -Up compound as manufactured by Williams Distributors, Inc., Silcoseal 77 as manufactured by Superior Concrete Accessories, or equal. WATERSTOPS: Waterstops in slab construction joints shall be PVC Base Seal of the size shown on the drawings, Greenstreak Style 771 or equal. RJN Project No. SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (continued) B. Waterstops in vertical and horizontal wall construction joints shall be PVC of the size shown on the drawings, Greenstreak Style 702 or equal. 2.10 EMBEDS AND INSERTS: Embedded plates, sleeves, inserts and other` items shall be provided as shown on the drawings. ' 2.11 PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER for expansion or isolation joints shall be preformed sheets or strips of durable, elastic rubber or clean granulated cork particles securely bonded together by an insoluble synthetic resin meeting the requirements of ASTM D1752 Types I or II. Acceptable products are: A. A. C. Horn Darktone Sponge Rubber or Horn Cork B. W. R. Meadows Sponge Rubber or Cork 1 C. Williams Products SBR Sponge Rubber D. Sonnebom Sonoflex 2.12 CAULKING AND PATCHING MATERIAL for grout holes, nipples, joints, and cracks shall be epoxy grout or rapid setting structural mortar suitable for overhead applications, or other suitable materials subject to approval by Owner. 2.13 CONCRETE MIX: I1 Li A. Separate mix designs are required for each type and change in mix materials. Separate mix designs are also required for concrete that is to be placed by pumping methods. B. The guidelines of ACI-350 and ACI-21 1.1 shall be adhered to in design and proportioning of the concrete mix. Proportioning shall be on the basis of field experience and/or trial mixtures: C. The cement content and water cement ratio shall be within the following limits for each strength class, with these requirements adhered to even though test cylinder results may show higher strengths. Strength Class Minimum Cement Content Maximum Water/Cement Ratio Application 2000 psi @ 28 Days 376 lbs/C.Y. 0.74 Mud slab, Wet well sloped floor 4000 psi @ 28 Days 1 ''/z" Coarse Agg.: 0.45 Structural Concrete 517 lbs/C.Y. 1" Coarse Agg.: 536 lbs/C.Y. '/a" Coarse Agg.: 564 lbs./C.Y. D. The water -cement ratio shall be the weight of water divided by the weight of cement and flyash entering the mixture. The total quantity of water shall be adjusted for the , 03300 -Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 -7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Ii I SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (continued) �I free moisture contributed by the fine and coarse aggregates. No water shall be added to the concrete after it has left the mixer. ,I E. The concrete mix shall be designed for a maximum slump of 4" at the point of II discharge. Slump for pumped concrete may be higher but in no case greater than 6". In no case shall the water/cement ratio be increased. Mixes of the stiffest consistency that can be efficiently placed shall be used. F. All concrete shall have 5%-7% entrained air. G. All structural concrete shall contain a water -reducing agent. H. Fly ash may be incorporated in the concrete mix design under the following conditions: 1. Class C fly ash may be used as a replacement for cement at a ratio of 1'h parts fly ash to 1.0 part cement replaced up to a maximum of 15% replacement. I. 2. Class F fly ash may be used as a replacement for fine aggregate only. Total cement shall remain the same as the design without fly ash. 3. The use of fly ash is subject to Owner's approval. I. No changes in the concrete mix may be made by the Contractor during the progress of the work without prior review and release by Owner. To obtain review and release of a mix change, the Contractor shall provide conclusive evidence that the proposed ,1 concrete mix will meet the specified requirements. J. If during the progress of the work it is found impossible to achieve concrete of the required workability and strength with the materials being furnished, the Owner may order, without additional cost, such changes in proportions or materials, or both, as may be deemed necessary to achieve concrete of the specified quality. 2.14 NONMETALLIC SHRINKAGE RESISTANT GROUT Premixed, nonmetallic, non t corrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents complying with ASTM C1107, �l of consistency suitable for application and 30 -minute working time. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION BEFORE PLACING: I A. Placement surfaces shall be accepted by the Owner's Representative before placing concrete. B. Prior to placing concrete, the forms and reinforcement shall be thoroughly inspected. All wood chips, dirt, etc., shall be removed; all temporary bracing, ties and cleats removed; all openings for utilities properly boxed; all forms properly secured in their correct position and made tight. All reinforcement, anchor bolts and other embedded items shall be secured in their proper locations. All old and dry concrete and dirt shall be cleaned off and all standing water and other foreign matter removed. I I 03300 -Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 - 8 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 II SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (continued) 3.02 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: A. Construction joints shall be placed at the locations indicated on the drawings. Joints that have to be made at locations other than those shown on the drawings shall be approved by Owner and located to least impair the strength of the structure. B. Reinforcement shall be continued across joints with. full development length provided, unless the drawings show otherwise. Construction joints shall be keyed as shown. The joint surfaces shall be cleaned of scale and laitance. C. When specified as a "bonded construction joint", the joint shall be thoroughly wetted and washed with a coat of neat cement grout prior to the new pour. 3.03 ISOLATION AND EXPANSION JOINTS: A. Isolation and expansion joints shall be located and constructed as shown on the drawings. When reinforcing dowels are shown extending through a joint, they shall be smooth and the protruding end greased to prevent bonding. B. Joints shall be installed with the top edge of the joint filler '/z" below the top of the concrete. The edges of the joint shall be tooled to a 1/8" radius and the remaining joint space cleaned, dried and filled to the top edge of the surface with approved joint sealant. 3.04 EMBEDDED ITEMS: A. All anchorage devices, inserts, sleeves anti other embedded items shall be set and built into the work in accordance with the drawings. B. Embedded items shall be set accurately in location, alignment, elevation and plumbness. Locate and measure from established surveyed reference benchmarks. C. Embedded items shall be anchored into place in a manner to prevent movement during concrete placement and consolidation. Components forming a part of a complete assembly shall be aligned before anchoring into place. Provide temporary bracing, anchorage and templates as required to maintain the setting and alignment. D. Sleeves and other embedded items shall not be set on main reinforcing steel and shall have a minimum 1" gap to the steel. Threads and open areas of sleeves shall be protected from damage and intrusion of concrete. 3.05 HANDLING AND DEPOSITING A. Placing of concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 304 and shall be carried out at such a rate that the concrete previously placed is still plastic and integrated with the freshly placed concrete. Concreting, once started, shall be carried on as a continuous operation until the section is completed. No cold joints shall be allowed. I B. Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods that will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practical in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling. 03300 -Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 - 9 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (continued) C. Pumped concrete shall follow the recommendations of ACI 304.2. Aluminum alloy pipeline shall not be used. After a pour has been completed, any concrete remaining in the pipeline shall be wasted. D. Concrete shall not be dropped freely onto reinforcing, thereby causing segregation, nor shall it be dropped freely more than 5'-0". Concrete shall be deposited in a manner to maintain an approximately level horizontal surface. E. Concrete that has partially hardened shall not be deposited in the work, Concrete shall not be retempered nor used after having stood for 15 minutes after leaving the truck or mixer. F. Concrete that is delivered with a slump below that suitable for proper placing, as indicated by the sections, may have additional water authorized only if neither the maximum permissible water -cement ratio nor the maximum slump is exceeded. The water shall be incorporated by additional mixing equal to at least half of the total mixing required. Any addition of water above that permitted by the limitation on water -cement ratio shall be accompanied by a quantity of cement sufficient to maintain the proper water -cement ratio. Any additional water shall only be as authorized in writing by the Owner's Representative. In no case shall water be added after the concrete has left the mixer. 3.06 VIBRATING AND COMPACTING: A. All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated and compacted by vibration, spading, rodding or forking during the operation of placing and depositing in accordance with ACI 309. The concrete shall be thoroughly worked around reinforcement, embedded items and into the corners of the forms to eliminate all air and stone pockets. Internal vibrators shall be the largest size and the most powerful that can be properly used as described in Table 5.1.4 of ACI 309. They shall be used by experienced workers under experienced supervision and shall be kept from bearing against reinforcement and forms. Vibrators shall not be used in a manner that forces mortar between individual form members. Vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete within the forms. Form vibrators shall not be used. B. Vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn in points approximately 18 inches apart. At each point the duration shall be sufficient to consolidate the concrete but not cause segregation. The time of insertion shall generally be 5 to 15 seconds. Vibration shall be close to the forms, but shall not be continued at one spot to the extent that large areas of grout are formed or the heavier aggregates are caused to settle. Care shall be taken not to disturb the concrete after it has taken its initial set. 3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING: A. Provide formed concrete surfaces to be exposed with a hand -troweled finish, except as scheduled in this Section. B. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301. C. Finish top slab with a light broom finish. D. In dry well, maintain floor elevation at south wall; pitch surface uniformly at 1/8 inch per foot toward the north. 03300 -Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 -10 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (continued) 3.08 FORMWORK REMOVAL: A. Time of formwork removal shall be determined by the Contractor in accordance with the guidelines given in ACI 347, except that for deep foundations walls and structural slabs, shoring and formwork shall not be removed until the concrete has gained at least 75% of its design compressive strength. 3.09 PATCHING A. After removing all forms and attachments, all tie holes, pour and form joints, voids, pockets, honeycombs and other aesthetic defects shall be patched in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 9. B. Defects impairing the structural integrity or strength of the structure shall require special repairs or removal as determined and directed by the Owner's Representative. 3.10 PROTECTION AND CURING: A. Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from injurious action of the elements and defacement of any kind during the construction operations in accordance with ACI 308. B. Exposed concrete edges shall be carefully protected from traffic or use that may cause damage. C. Curing: 1. The concrete shall be kept in a thoroughly moist condition from the time of placement until it has cured for at least seven (7) days. 2. All forms shall be kept sufficiently wet to prevent drying of the concrete. Continue curing concrete for remainder of curing period upon removal of forms. 3. The use of liquid -membrane curing compounds must be approved by the Owner's Representative for each specific location. When used, they shall be applied in two (2) coats, sprayed in perpendicular directions. D. Surfaces of floor slabs shall have a broom finish and receive two (2) coats of a clear sealer/hardener. .3.11 SETTING BASE PLATES AND BEARING PLATES: A. After being properly positioned, bearing plates for beams and similar structural members and machinery, column base plates, and equipment base plates shall be set to the proper line and elevation with non-metallic shrinkage resistant grout. The thickness of the grout shall be as shown on the drawings. Concrete and metal surfaces in contact with grout shall be clean and free of oil and grease, and concrete surfaces in contact with grout shall be damp and free of laitance when grout is placed. B. Mixing and placing shall be in conformance with the material manufacturer's instructions and as specified therein. Ingredients shall be thoroughly dry -mixed before adding water. Batches should be of size to allow continuous placement of freshly mixed grout.. Grout not used within 30 minutes after mixing shall be discarded. The space between the top of the concrete or machinery -bearing surface 03300 -Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 - 11 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 C I' h SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (continued) ' and the plate shall be filled solid with the grout. Forms shall be of wood or other equally suitable material for completely retaining the grout on all sides and on top and shall be removed after the grout has set. The placed grout shall be carefully worked by rodding or other means to eliminate voids; however, overworking and breakdown on the initial set shall be avoided. Grout shall not be retempered or subjected to vibration from any source. Where clearances are unusually small, grout shall be placed under pressure with a grout pump. Temperature of the grout, and of surfaces receiving the grout, shall be maintained at 65 to 85 degrees F until after setting. END OF SECTION 03300 1 1 1 II 1 03300 -Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 - 12 RTN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 03414 - PRECAST CONCRETE STAIRS PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. This section covers precast concrete stairs and stair platforms where shown on drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to General Provision, Supplementary Provisions and Sections in General Requirements of these Specifications. B. Section 03100 — Concrete Forms and Accessories C. Section 03200 — Concrete Reinforcement D. Section 03300 — Cast -in -Place Concrete E. Section 03600 — Grout F. Section 05511 — Metal Stairs, Landings, Platforms, Catwalks, Ladder and Railings 1.03 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Precast stair manufacturer shall have facilities to produce specified items in sufficient volume and type required to insure proper job progress. Manufacturer shall have has a minimum of five years experience in fabrication and erection and shall have adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of the Section. B. Design 1. Precast stair units are to be designed in accordance with ACI 318. 2. Stairs shall be designed to support the full unit dead load, plus 100-psf live load. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Comply with pertinent provision of Sections 01330. B. Calculations I. Submit design calculations for precast stair units. 2. It will be the responsibility of this Contractor to provide additional reinforcing for any stresses in the precast unit due to handling, transportation, and erection. 3. Calculations shall be prepared by a Structural Engineer Registered in Arkansas. C. Shop Drawings 1. Drawings shall show dimensions necessary for proper fabrication; reinforcing steel sizes, grades and locations; inserts, accessories and handling methods; calculations for reinforcing; details, sections, 03414 -Precast Concrete Stairs 03414 - I RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 -.I I SECTION 03414 - PRECAST CONCRETE STAIRS (continued) a jointing, anchoring; and all other necessary information, all in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. 2. Indicate each piece by number on setting drawings, and mark units with corresponding non -staining numbers. 3. General Contractor shall review, check and stamp "approved" all Shop Drawings prior to submitting them to Construction Manager. Shop Drawings, which have not been stamped "approved", or which have been stamped but have not been checked, or which do not conform to requirements of Contract Documents, will be rejected. General •Contractors approval represents that he has determined and verified all materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and that he has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. D. Tests and Reports 1. Submit standard strength tests on concrete and reinforcing elements taken at time of manufacture, for owner's approval. 2. Refer to Section - 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete, Paragraph 1.03 Submittals - c. Tests & Reports, for information to be submitted by this Contract. 3. Perform all testing in accordance with ACI requirements. In-house testing lab to do testing. Submit results to owner for review. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Carefully transport and handle precast concrete stairs so as to prevent soiling 1 or damage. Store clear of ground in manner to prevent cracking, distortion, warping and to protect from damage, dirt, and rain. Soiling or staining of precast units shall be cause for rejection of units, if in Architect's opinion units cannot be adequately cleaned. B. Lift and support units only at designated lifting points or supporting points as shown on approved Shop Drawings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Cement, Aggregate, Water, Admixtures, Reinforcing Steel, Curing Membrane, Curing Compounds, Bond Breaker, Waterstops, Embeds and Inserts, Pre -molded Joint Filler, Caulking and Patching Materials, Shall comply with Section 03300 Cast -in -Place concrete B. Grout: Shall comply with Section 03600 Grout C. Non -Slip Nosings 1. Non -slip feature on each tread shall be manufacturer's standard 2" wide "Traction Strip" or substitute: Wooster Type 101 abrasive nosing, each tread. 03414 -Precast Concrete Stairs 03414-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 03414 - PRECAST CONCRETE STAIRS (continued) 2.02 STRENGTH: A. Concrete strength shall be 5,000 psi in 28 days. 2.03 FABRICATION: A. Casting shall be done in rigidly constructed forms designed to produce dimensionally correct member with uniform surfaces per approved Shop • Drawings. B. At time of casting, the Contractor shall incorporate all accessories, reinforcing steel and handling devices required for proper installation and handling of units. C. Welding shall be continuous with Low -Hydrogen rods per latest AWS A5.1 • or A5.5. D. Provide additional temporary or permanent steel hangers to support stairs during construction and until permanent structural supports are in place. E. Provide finished units, which are straight, true to size and shape, and within specified casting tolerances. F. Make exposed edges sharp, straight, and square. Make flat surfaces into a true plane. G. Warped, cracked, broken, spalled, stained, and otherwise defective units will not be acceptable. H. Place and secure in the forms all anchors, clips, stud bolts, inserts, lifting devices, shear ties, and other devices required for handling and installing the precast units and for attachment of subsequent items indicated or specified. I. Curing I. Form cure the work of this Section for a minimum of 20 hours. 2. Precast units shall be cured to the required 28 -day strength prior to shipment. 3. Following the curing period, allow the units to air dry for at least four days before being erected. J. Casting tolerances: Maintain casting, bowing, warping, and dimension tolerance within the following maximums: 1. Overall dimensions for height and width of units: a. Plus zero of unit dimension to minus 3/32" for 10'-0" and over. 2. Insert locations: a. Place within plus or minus Y" in each direction. 3. Opening dimensions to figured dimensions: a. Accurate within a tolerance of plus 1/8" to minus zero. 03414 -Precast Concrete Stairs 03414-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 03414 - PRECAST CONCRETE STAIRS (continued) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use. B. Welding of precast units shall not be permitted after fabrication. C. Power -Actuated Fasteners 1. Do not use power -actuated fasteners for surface attachment of accessory items except as specifically approved by the Architect and specifically accepted by the precast unit manufacturer. D. Handling and Erection 1. Precautions shall be taken to prevent damage warpage and cracking or staining of the precast concrete units. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for temporarily stabilizing all precast work until permanent connections and/or adjoining cast -in - place concrete work or masonry has been completed and the framework is stable. 3. Remove hoisting loops after setting stairs and platforms and floor plank provided by others. E. Grouting 1. After precast units have been placed and secured, grout open spaces at connections and joints between platforms and stairs, and between platforms provided by others. 2. Provide forms or other acceptable method to retain the grout in place until it is sufficiently hard to support itself. 3. Place the grout in a manner to finish smooth, plumb, and level with adjacent concrete surfaces. 4. Keep grouted surfaces damp for not less than 24 hours after grout has taken its initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it hardens. 5. Mix for grout shall conform to ASTM C-476 course grout, with a minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days and have an 8" minimum to 10" maximum slump. Mortar shall not be used for grout. F. Patching of damaged precast units shall be allowed if strength and appearance of member, in the opinion of owner, has not been impaired. Manufacturer of precast units shall point up all chopped areas. It shall be done in such a way that there is a minimum variation in texture and color. 03414 -Precast Concrete Stairs 03414-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 03414 - PRECAST CONCRETE STAIRS (continued) Amount of variation to be considered acceptable is subject to Engineer's approval. 3.03 REJECTION: A. Damaged or structurally questionable precast stair and platform units shall be subjected to load test in accordance with Building Code of American Concrete Institute (ACI 318). Units failing to pass load test shall be rejected. The cost of such failed test and replacement of defective unit shall be borne by this Contractor. The cost of testing units, which pass tests, shall be paid by owner. B. Precast units, which require patching, shall be rejected if patching does not restore the damaged unit to its original intended strength and original appearance with minimum variations in color and texture permitted, subjected to Engineer's approval. END OF SECTION 03414 03414 -Precast Concrete Stairs 03414-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 03600 - GROUT PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. All pumps, stairs and ladders pads, structural steel or precast members and other equipment supported directly on concrete foundations shall be grouted in place. In addition, miscellaneous pipe supports and other items which require a full and level bearing area not provided by the original concrete surface shall be grouted in place. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 1.03 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The installation shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 INORGANIC GROUT: A. Inorganic grout shall be provided, except as noted in Paragraph 2.02 or specified elsewhere in the specifications or on the drawings. B. Acceptable grout materials are: 1. Five Star — Nonshrink 2. Sauereisen No. F100 3. Embeco 636 4. Masterflow 713 5. Crystex 2.02 PART 3- 3.01 ORGANIC EXPOY OR POLYMETRIC GROUT: A. Organic epoxy or polymeric grout shall be provided for centrifugal pumps greater than 100 hp and other machinery that have dynamic loads or heavy vibration, high impact and where accurate alignment is critical and good chemical resistance is required. B. Acceptable grout materials are: 1. Escoweld 7505 with 7510 Aggregate (epoxy) 2. Dudick High Strength (epoxy) 3. Ceilcote 748 (epoxy) 4. Chockfast (epoxy) 5. Five Star Epoxy (epoxy) PLACEMENT: A. Grout shall be placed in a manner that does not interfere with the movement of equipment and piping design expansion. 03600 -Grout 03600 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 03600 - GROUT (continued) B. C. D. E. 03600 -Grout Equipment manufacturer's recommendations for grouting their respective equipment shall be followed. Grout shall be mixed, placed and cured in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Grout depth thickness shall be a minimum of I" and not exceed 3". Leveling wedges used to level the baseplate or soleplate should be left in place after grouting. Leveling screws or shims shall be removed after the grout has cured, and the voids shall be filled with grout. The items which are to be removed should be coated with grease or similar nonbonding material to prevent the grout from adhering. END OF SECTION 03600 03600-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' II SECTION 05511 - METAL STAIRS, LANDINGS, PLATFORMS, CATWALKS, LADDERS, AND RAILINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. All metal stairs, landings, platforms, catwalks, ladders and railings outlined herein shall be designed, fabricated and installed by the contractor. B. This Section includes the following: 1. Preassembled steel stairs with abrasive -coating -finished formed -metal treads 2. Industrial -type stairs with steel grating treads 3. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs 4. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs 5. Steel tube guardrails attached to concrete walls at the perimeter of the top slab, openings in the top slab, and the perimeter of all stair landings 6. Industrial -type stair landings. 7. Catwalks and platforms with steel grating floors 8. Steel bar ladders attached to concrete walls C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for concrete type and strength relating to post installed anchor designs for these metal fabrications 2. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: A. Structural Performance of Stairs, Landings, Catwalks and Platforms: Provide metal stairs, landings, catwalks, and platforms capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: I. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to U360. B. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: I. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently, 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. 05511 -Metal Stairs 05511 - 1 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 LJ SECTION 05511- METAL STAIRS, LANDINGS, PLATFORMS, CATWALKS, LADDERS, AND RAILINGS (continued) c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: d. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of ' 1 sq. ft. e. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. C. Seismic Performance: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads". 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following: 1. Abrasive nosings 2. Grout B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. I . Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 2. For all installed metal fabrications outlined in this section and indicated to ' comply with design loads, include structural analysis data and design plans signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 3. All Fabrication drawings for stairs, landings, catwalks, platforms and rail- ings. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or ' design: 1. Grating treads 2. Abrasive nosings ' D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for stairs and railings: 1. Test railings according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 1.04 DUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual", for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. I. Industrial -Type Stairs: Industrial class C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: I. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code —Steel" ' 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel" I 05511 -Metal Stairs 05511 -2 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 II SECTION 05511 METAL STAIRS, LANDINGS, PLATFORMS, CATWALKS, LADDERS AND• RAILINGS (continued) 1.05 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: I. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manu- facturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.02 METALS. GENERAL: A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.03 FERROUS METALS: A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) C. Abrasive -Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel by a proprietary process 1. Available Products: a. IKG Industries, a Harsco company; Mebac b. W. S. Molnar Company; SlipNOT D. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36/A 36M. E. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510. F. Iron Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads 2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M G. Uncoated, Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed. 05511 -Metal Stairs 05511 -3 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 U SECTION 05511- METAL STAIRS LANDINGS, PLATFORMS, CATWALKS. LADDERS. AND RAILINGS (continued) H. Uncoated, Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 10.11/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads. I. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 33, unless another grade is required by design loads. 2.04 ABRASIVE NOSINGS: A. Cast -Metal Units: Cast gray iron, Class 20 aluminum, with an integral abrasive finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in sizes and configurations indicated and in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. b. Balco Inc. c. Barry Pattern & Foundry Co., Inc. d. Granite State Casting Co. e. Safe -T -Metal Co. f. Wooster Products Inc. 2. Configuration: Cross -hatched angle -shaped units, same depth as bar -grating treads and Ito 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm) wide. B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with manufacturer. C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of cast -metal units set into concrete. D. Apply clear lacquer to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of extruded units set into concrete. 2.05 FASTENERS: A. General: Provide zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 1. Provide hot -dip or mechanically deposited, zinc -coated anchor bolts for stairs. D. Machine Screws: ASME BI 8.6.3. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. F. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1. G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME 818.21.1. 05511 -Metal Stairs 05511 -4 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 05511 METAL STAIRS. LANDINGS, PLATFORMS. CATWALKS, LADDERS AND RAILINGS (continued) H. Expansion Anchors: Post installed concrete anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc - plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.07 FABRICATION GENERAL: A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value ofjoined pieces. B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed comers and seams continuously, unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. 05511 -Metal Stairs 05511 - 5 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 05511- METAL STAIRS, LANDINGS PLATFORMS CATWALKS, LADDERS, AND RAILINGS (continued) G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat- head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. ' Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 2.08 STEEL -FRAMED STAIRS: A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Alfab, Inc. 2. American Stair, Inc. 3. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The). B. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers. 2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. 3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on fin- ished surfaces. C. Metal Bar -Grating Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from metal bar grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual". 1. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded steel grating with 1 -1/4 -by -3/16 - inch bearing bars at 15/16 inch o.c. and crossbars at 4 inches o.c., NAAMM designation: W-15-4 (1-1/4 x 3/16) STEEL. 2. Surface: Serrated 3, Finish: Galvanized 4. Fabricate grating treads with cast abrasive nosing and with steel angle or steel plate carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts. ' 5. Fabricate grating platforms with nosing matching that on grating treads. Provide toeplates at open -sided edges of grating platforms. Weld grating to platform framing. 2.09 STEEL TUBE RAILINGS: t A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage,' but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. Configuration: 1 -5/8 -inch -diameter top, bottom, and intermediate rails and 1 -1/2 -inch- square posts. Space intermediate rails less than 21 inches clear. ' B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. C. Form changes in direction of railings as follows: 05511 -Metal Stairs 05511 -6 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 1 Ii I SECTION 05511 - METAL STAIRS, LANDINGS, PLATFORMS, CATWALKS LADDERS AND RAILINGS (continued) , 1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. ' D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise ' deforming exposed surfaces of components. E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. IF. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, ' flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. I. 1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding. 2. For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous -metal components. ' H. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush -resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce ' adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. 2.10 STAIR RAILINGS: I [ F [ [ F I A. Fabricate newels of square steel tubing and provide newel caps of gray -iron castings, as shown. B. Rails may be bent at corners, rail returns,, and wall returns, instead of using prefabricated fittings. C. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding. D. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. E. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable _ standard listed below: 2.11 STEEL LADDERS: A. Fabricate ladders and cages for locations shown with dimensions, spacings, details and anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of OSHA and ANSI A14.3, except as otherwise indicated. B. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. C. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points detailed on the drawings. Use welded or bolted steel brackets as indicated, designed for adequate support and anchorage, and to hold the ladder clear of wall surface as detailed on the drawings. 05511 -Metal Stairs 05511 -7 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 05511 - METAL STAIRS LANDINGS PLATFORMS, CATWALKS, LADDERS, AND RAILINGS (continued) 2.12 FINISHES: I A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs, landings, catwalks and platforms to in -place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through - bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. ' B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld ' connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Do not field weld any hot dip galvanized components. 3.02 INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASE PLATES: A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base plates. B. Set steel stair base plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have been positioned and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. I. Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.03 INSTALLING STEEL TUBE RAILINGS: A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows: 1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members. 2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored with post -installed anchors and bolts. L I Li II I 05511 -Metal Stairs 05511 - 8 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 t II SECTION 05511 -METAL STAIRS. LANDINGS, PLATFORMS. CATWALKS LADDERS AND RAILINGS (continued) B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1 -1/2 -inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. 3. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 4. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 5. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing be- tween studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 6. For steel -framed gypsum board assemblies, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 7. For steel -framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed steel reinforcements using self -tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. 3.04 INSTALLING STEEL LADDERS: A. Fastening to In -Place Construction I. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing mis- cellaneous metal items to in -place construction; including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. B. Cutting, Fitting and Placement I. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal items. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and lev- els. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. C. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. D. No field welding or cutting. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05511 05511 -Metal Stairs 05511 - 9 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 07140 -FLUID -APPLIED ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Provide a complete polyurethane waterproofing membrane system including all applicable sealants and elastomeric flashings needed to prevent water penetration at locations indicated. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01330. B. Product data: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings or catalog illustrations in sufficient detail to show installation and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; 4. Manufacturer's current recommended installation procedures which, when reviewed by Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 5. Written documentation of applicator's qualifications, including reference projects of similar scope and complexity, with current phone contacts of architects and owners for verification. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Applicator qualifications: 1. Applicator shall have at least three years experience in installing materials of types specified and shall have successfully completed at least three projects of similar scope and complexity. 2. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during installation. C. Convene a pre -installation job -site conference three weeks prior to commencing work of this Section: 1. Secure attendance Contractor, applicator, and authorized representatives of the membrane system manufacturer and interfacing trades. FLUID -APPLIED ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING 07140-1 SECTION 07140 - FLUID -APPLIED ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING ' 2. Examine Drawings and Specifications affecting work of this Section, verify all conditions, review installation procedures, and coordinate scheduling with interfacing •1 portions of the Work. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. B. Maintain the products in accord with manufacturer's recommendations with proper precautions to ensure fitness of material when installed. C. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600. 1.05 SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS A. General: 1. Provide applicator with surfaces that are broom clean, dry, sound and free of voids, bugholes, rockpockets, honeycombs, protrusions, excessive roughness, foreign matter, frost, ice and other contaminants which may inhibit application or performance of the waterproofing membrane system. 2. Using suitable abrasive methods, remove residue of form release, curing ' compound, chemical retarders and other surface treatments, laitance, mortar smear, sawcutting residue, mill scale, rust, loose material and other contaminants from concrete, masonry and ferrous metal surfaces to receive the work of this Section. B. Concrete: Where work of this Section will be applied to concrete, provide surfaces that are smooth with finish equal to one that is light steel troweled followed by a fine hair broom. C. Decks: 1. Slope deck surfaces to drains that have flanges at membrane level which are flush with deck surfaces. 2. Rigidly install pipe, vents and other surface protrusions, properly flash them, and cover to prevent entry of membrane materials. D. Metal flashings: Where metal flashings are substrate to waterproofing membrane, set the flashings in continuous bedding bead of urethane sealant; install sealant S -bead between metal laps and mechanically fasten to substrate along leading edges at every 4" on center, staggered linearly, to lay flat without fishmouths. E. Joints: Configuration shall be consistent with this Section and with all other requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.06 WARRANTY ' A. Deliver to the Architect signed copies of the following written warranties against defective materials and workmanship for a period of two years following date of completion. Warrant that installed waterproofing membrane system shall be free of defects including ' adhesive failure, cohesive failure, and waterproofing failure resulting from substrate cracking up to 1/16 inch. 1. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering materials; 2. Applicator's standard warranty covering workmanship. FLUID -APPLIED ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING 07140-2 SECTION 07140 - FLUID -APPLIED ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide a complete fluid applied elastomeric waterproofing membrane system having the following minimum attributes: 1. Acceptable products: a.TremProof 250 GC 2. Coal -tar free polyurethane designed for concealed building components subject to hydrostatic head; 3. Complying with ASTM C836 -89a. 2.02 A. Primer: As recommended by waterproofing membrane system manufacturer; B. Joint backing: Closed -cell, polyethylene rod as recommended by membrane manufacturer; C. Reinforcing fabric: Woven fiberglass scrim cloth; D. Elastomeric sheet flashing: 1/16 inch thick by 12 inch wide uncured neoprene sheeting; E. Joint Treatment: 1. Acceptable products a. Vulkem 227 b. TremProof 201T c. Tremco Dymeric 240 d. Or equal F. Protection board: Inorganic asphalt composition hardboard or other as approved by membrane manufacturer. 1. Protection Mat, by Tremco Incorporated, or equal 2.03 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor and approved by the membrane system manufacturer as compatible, subject to review of the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. B. Applicator shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. 1. Verify conformance with manufacturer's requirements; 2. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Architect; FLUID -APPLIED ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING 07140-3 SECTION 07140 - FLUID -APPLIED ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING ' 3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface preparation and detailing procedures to be In accord with waterproof membrane system manufacturer's instructions and recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Clean all deck surfaces to receive membrane system in accord with manufacturer's ' instructions; vacuum clean or blow clean with oil -free compressed air all surfaces to receive sealants, detailing materials or membranes immediately prior to Installation. C. Rout, clean, prepare and detail surface cracks in accord with manufacturer's instructions; install backer rod where required. D. Clean metal surfaces to bright metal by wire brushing or mechanical etching; scuff -sand lead flashing and plastic surfaces. E. Prime surfaces in accord with manufacturer's instructions. F. Install 1/4" diameter backer rod into corner of all horizontal -to -vertical junctures subject to movement and cover with 1" detail cant of approved sealant; install V detail cants at projections, curbs and other horizontal -to -vertical junctures. G. Install detail coats, joint and crack treatments, and liquid flashings in accord with manufacturer's instructions. H. Allow detail applications to cure in accord with manufacturer's instructions prior to general application of membrane. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: Install waterproofing system in accord with manufacturer's recommendations ' and instructions as applies to the Work except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Waterproofing membrane shall have a minimum of 120 mil dry -film thickness. 2. Grid deck surfaces to assure proper coverage rates and verify membrane wet -film mil thickness with gauges as work progresses. 3. Retain empty product containers during course of work to aid in determining whether completed membrane complies with required average dry -film thickness. B. Verify proper dry condition of substrate using method recommended by membrane ' system manufacturer; perform adhesion checks prior to general application of membrane system using field adhesion test method recommended by manufacturer. C. Mask off adjoining surfaces not to receive membrane system. D. Wipe clean all detail coats with white rags wetted with Xylene solvent; do not saturate detail coat. E. Apply membrane uniformly and allow to cure in accord with manufacturer's instructions. F. Feather terminating edge when entire area cannot be completed in one day; clean area 6" wide along terminating edge of membrane with Xylene solvent on clean white rags prior to startup on next working day; use interlaminary primer per manufacturer's Instructions as needed; overlap existing work by 6" with new work. G. Flood test: Plug drains on deck surfaces and use sand bags or other means to restrict runoff. Flood deck with water to depth of 2" and allow to stand at least 48 hours; repair leaks if occurs and retest. H. Install protection board over cured membrane in accord with manufacturer's instructions. FLUID -APPLIED ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING 07140-4 SECTION 07140 - FLUID -APPLIED ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP A. Promptly remove primer or membrane system material from adjacent surfaces with MEK, Toluene or Xylene; leave work area in broom clean condition. B. Prohibit traffic over completed work and protect against work overhead until protection course is installed; protect from damage until protected beneath overlaying work. END OF SECTION 07140 FLUID -APPLIED ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING 07140-5 SECTION 07180 - TRAFFIC COATINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes traffic coatings for the following applications:. I. Top of Lift Station 1.02 SUBMITTALS: I U I I I I I I I A. Product Data: For each product indicated B. Shop Drawings: Show extent of traffic coating. Include details for treating substrate joints and cracks, flashings, deck penetrations, curbs and other termination conditions. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of product indicated. I. Provide stepped samples on backing large enough to illustrate build-up of traffic coatings. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of traffic coatings with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations within the last three years. E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that traffic coatings comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations within the last three years. F. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Identify substrates and types of traffic coatings applied. Include recommendations for periodic inspections, cleaning, care, maintenance, and repair of traffic coatings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer (Applicator) Qualifications: An experienced applicator who has specialized in installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: As follows: 1. Use traffic coatings of a single manufacturer. 2. Obtain primary traffic coating materials, including primers, from traffic coating manufacturer. Obtain secondary materials including aggregates, sheet flashings, joint sealants, and substrate repair materials of type and from source recommended by traffic coating manufacturer. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For traffic coatings as follows: 1. Fire -response testing was performed by UL, ITS, or another independent testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that performs testing and follow-up services. 2. Provide materials identical to those of traffic coatings tested according to ASTM E 108 for deck type and slopes indicated and that comply with requirements for roof -covering Class indicated. ' 07180 -Traffic Coatings 07180-I RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 07180 - TRAFFIC COATINGS (continued) D. Mockups: Architect will select one representative surface for each traffic coating and each substrate to receive traffic coatings. Apply each coating to at least 200 sq. ft. of each substrate to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment, thickness, texture, color, and standard of workmanship. 1. Remove and reapply mockups until they are approved by Architect. 2. Keep approved mockups undisturbed during construction as a standard for judging completed traffic coatings. Undamaged mockups may be incorporated into the Work. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I Section "Project Meetings". 1. Before installing traffic coatings, meet with representatives of authorities having jurisdiction, manufacturer's technical representative, Owner, Architect, consultants, independent testing agency, and other concerned entities. Review requirements for traffic coatings. Notify participants at ' least seven days before conference. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels showing the following information: 1. Manufacturer's brand name 2. Type of material 3. Directions for storage 4. Date of manufacture and shelf life 5. Lot or batch number 6. Mixing and application instructions 7. Color B. Store materials in a clean, dry location protected from exposure to direct sunlight. In storage areas, maintain environmental conditions within range recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS: ' A. Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coatings within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not apply traffic coatings to damp or wet substrates, when temperatures are below 40 deg F, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point. 1. Do not apply traffic coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during the application and curing period. Apply only when frost -free conditions occur throughout the depth of the substrate. 1.06 WARRANTY: A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by ' Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 07180 -Traffic Coatings 07180-2 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 07180 - TRAFFIC COATINGS (continued) B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by traffic coating manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace traffic coatings that do not comply with requirements or that deteriorate during the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of traffic coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate, formation of new substrate cracks exceeding 1/16 inch in width, fire, vandalism, or abuse by snowplow, maintenance equipment, and • truck traffic. 1. Deterioration of traffic coatings includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Adhesive or cohesive failures b. Abrasion or tearing failures c. Surface crazing or spalling d. Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into deck substrate C. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Physical Requirements: Provide traffic coatings complying with ASTM C 957. B. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base, intermediate, and top coats; and miscellaneous materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2.02 TRAFFIC COATING: A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Tremco Vulkem 350/351 B. Aggregate: 40-50 mesh silica sand; local aggregate approved by coating manufacturer 1. Spreading Rate: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service conditions indicated, but not less than the following: a. Top Coat, as required to achieve slip -resistant finish C. Sealant 1. Dymeric 240-240FC 2. THC 900-901 3. Vulkem 227 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Sheet Flashing: 60 -mil -minimum, nonstaining sheet material recommended by manufacturer B. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive C. Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh 07180 -Traffic Coatings 07180-3 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 07180 - TRAFFIC COATINGS (continued) PART 3- 3.01 EXAMINATION: A. Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and for other conditions affecting performance of traffic coatings. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Applicator, listing conditions detrimental to performance. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates. 3. Begin coating application only after minimum concrete curing and drying period recommended by traffic coating manufacturer has passed, after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, and after surfaces are dry. 4. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for moisture by method recommended in writing by manufacturer. 5. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. Clean and prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to produce clean, dust -free, dry substrate for traffic coating application. B. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings, deck drains, and other deck substrate penetrations to prevent spillage, leaking, and migration of coatings. C. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically abrade concrete surfaces to a uniform profile according to ASTM D 4259. Do not acid etch. I. Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete. 2. Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections. 3. Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, form -release agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating adhesion. 4. Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258. 3.03 TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS: A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic coatings and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced and nonreinforced deck -to - wall butt joints. C. Terminate edges of deck -to -deck expansion joints with preparatory base -coat strip. D. Install sheet flashings at deck -to -wall expansion and dynamic joints, and bond to deck and wall substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.04 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT: A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and traffic coating manufacturer's written recommendations. Before 07180 -Traffic Coatings 07180 -4 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 07180 - TRAFFIC COATINGS (continued) coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTMD4258. I. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint -sealant installation. 3.05 TRAFFIC COATING APPLICATION: A. Apply traffic coating material according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. I. Start traffic coating application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. 2. Verify that wet film thickness of each component coat complies with requirements every 100 sq. ft. 3. Apply traffic coatings to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to height indicated and omit aggregate on vertical surfaces. B. Apply traffic paint for striping and other markings with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates for a 15 -mil minimum wet film thickness. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality - control testing: I. Samples of material delivered to Project site shall be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency shall perform tests for characteristics specified, using applicable referenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using tests cited in manufacturer's product data. 3. Testing agency shall verify thickness of coatings during traffic coating application. B. If test results show traffic coating materials do not comply with requirements, remove noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces, and reapply traffic coatings. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.07 . CURING AND PROTECTING: A. Cure traffic coatings according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Prevent contamination and damage during application and curing stages. B. Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 07180 07180 -Traffic Coatings 07180 - 5 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 08311- ACCESS HATCHES ' PART1- GENERAL ' 1.01 SCOPE: A. This Section includes covers the Access Hatches and Telescoping Safety Post to be ' installed on the ladder openings and the level indicator opening on the roof of the lift station. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: 1 A. Division I — Basic Requirements B. Section 01330 — Submittals 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1 A. The access hatches shall be supplied by one manufacturer who shall be responsible for all components. The access hatches shall be standard products and shall be ' provided by a manufacturer who has at least 10 years of history of manufacturing access hatches. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: 1 A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01330— Submittal Procedures. ' B. Submittals to include technical information, materials of construction, accessory equipment as specified here in. Submittals to also include operation and maintenance manuals as specified in Division 1. ' PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: ' A. Acudor Products Inc. Model G4444 B. Acudor Telescoping Safety Post Model TSP-1 I C. Or equal 2.02 MANWAY HATCH REQUIREMENTS: ' A. Cover: 0.125 aluminum in box -type design with ridged fiberglass insulation and 0.040 aluminum cover liner. Continuous santoprene weather seal attached to inside of cover to provide a flush, tight fit. The cover is designed to support a live load of ' 40 pounds/sq ft. B. Curb: 0.125 aluminum with 1" ridged fiberglass insulation a curb exterior. Curb is ' 12" high, and has 3-1/2" wide mounting flange with pre -drilled holes. C. Hinge: Stainless -steel butt hinges with brass pin. D. Opening device: Fully enclosed compression spring operators allow top cover to ' open and close easily. Automatic hold open arm with vinyl grip release control when• closing hatch cover. 08311 -Access Hatches 08311 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 08311- ACCESS HATCHES (continued) E. Latch: Self -latching outside turn handle with inside lever handle F. Inside and outside padlock provision G. Finish: aluminum mill finish 2.03 TELESCOPING SAFETY POST REQUIREMENTS: A. Design & Construction: Aluminum (Type 6061-T6, ASTM 8241) with stainless steel (Type 304) hardware. Designed with a telescoping tubular section that is pulled up by a fixed loop at the top. This section must hook securely over a ladder rung when fully extended. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install according to manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 08311 08311 -Access Hatches 08311-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I ' SECTION 08950 - SKYLIGHT SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. This section covers the procurement and fabrication of Skylights that are used to cover ' the pump access openings over the 7 pumps and the I wet well cleanout opening. B. Section includes the insulated translucent sandwich panel skylight system as shown and specified. Work includes providing and installing: 1. Flat factory prefabricated structural insulated translucent sandwich panels 2. Aluminum installation system 3. Aluminum flashing attached to skylight 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's product data. Include construction details, material tdescriptions, profiles and finishes of skylight components. B. Submit shop drawings. Include plans, details, dimensions and attachments to other ' work. C. Submit product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating each type and class of skylight panel system complies with the project performance ' requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. Previously completed test reports will be acceptable if for current manufacturer and indicative of products used on this project. '• 1. Test reports required are: a. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed (UL 723) — Submit UL Card b. Bum Extent (ASTM D-635) t c. Color Difference (ASTM D-2244) d. Abrasion/Erosion Resistance (ASTM D-4060) e. Impact Strength (UL 972) If: Bond Tensile Strength (ASTM C-297 after aging by ASTM D- 1037) g. Bond Shear Strength (ASTM D-1002) h. Beam Bending Strength (ASTM E-72) i. Insulation U -Factor (NFRC-100) ' j. NFRC System Certification k. Condensation Resistance Factor (AAMA 1503) 1. Class A Roof Covering Burning Brand (ASTM E -l08) ' D. Submit current documentation indicating regular, independent quality control monitoring under a nationally recognized building code review and listing program. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications I1. Material and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly employed in the manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least ten (10) consecutive years and which can show evidence of those ' materials being satisfactorily used on at least six (6) projects of similar size, scope and location. At least three (3) of the projects shall have been in successful use for ten (10) years or longer. 08950 -Skylight System 08950-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 08950 - SKYLIGHT SYSTEM (continued) 2. Skylight system must be listed by the International Code Council — Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) which requires quality control inspections and fire, structural and water infiltration testing of sandwich panel systems by an approved agency. 3. Quality control inspections and required testing shall be conducted at least once each year and shall include manufacturing facilities, sandwich panel components and production sandwich panels for conformance with "Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panels" as regulated by the ICC-ES. B. Performance Requirements: The manufacturer shall be responsible for the configuration and fabrication of the complete skylight panel system. I. When requested, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.04 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver skylight system, components and materials in manufacturer's standard protective packaging. B. Store skylight panels on the long edge, several inches above the ground, blocked and under cover in accordance with manufacturer's storage and handling instructions. 1.05 WARRANTY: A. Submit manufacturer's and installer's written warranty agreeing to repair or replace skylight system work which fails in materials or workmanship within one (1) year of the date of delivery. Failure of materials or workmanship shall include leakage, excessive deflection, deterioration of finish on metal in excess of normal weathering and defects in accessories, insulated translucent sandwich panels and other components of the work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Kalwall Corporation. B. Structures Unlimited, Inc. C. Or Equivalent 2.02 PANEL COMPONENTS: A. Face Sheets I. Translucent faces: Manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins, formulated specifically for architectural use a. Thermoplastic (e.g. polycarbonate, acrylic) faces are not acceptable. 2. Flammability of interior face sheets a. Flamespread. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, which requires periodic unannounced retesting, with flamespread rating no greater than 50 (20) and smoke developed no greater than 250 (200) when tested in accordance with UL 723. b. Bum extent by ASTM D-635 shall be no greater than 1". ' 08950 -Skylight System 08950-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 11 SECTION 08950 - SKYLIGHT SYSTEM (continued) ■ c. Face sheets shall not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or flame. Face sheets shall not delaminate when exposed to 200°F for 30 ' minutes per IBC and NBC (300°F for 25 minutes per UBC and SBC). 3. Weatherability of exterior face sheets a. Color stability: Full thickness of the exterior face sheet shall not ' change color more than 3.0 (7.0) CIE Units DELTA E by ASTM D- 2244 after 5 years (30 months) outdoor South Florida weathering at 5 degrees facing south, determined by the average of at least three (3) ' white samples with and without a protective film or coating to ensure long-term color stability. Color stability shall be unaffected by abrasion or scratching. ' b. Erosion barrier: Exterior face shall have a permanent glass erosion barrier embedded beneath the surface to provide long-term resistance to reinforcing fiber exposure. Exterior face surface loss shall not ' exceed .7 mils and 40 mgs when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 4060 employing CSI7 abrasive wheels at a head load of 500 grams for 1000 cycles. Sacrificial surface films or coatings are not acceptable erosion barriers. ' 4. Appearance a. Exterior face sheets: Smooth, 0.070" thick and white in color. b. Interior face sheets: Smooth, 0.045" thick and white in color. ' c. Face sheets shall not vary more than +/- 10% in thickness and be uniform in color. 5. Strength. Exterior face sheet shall be uniform in strength, impenetrable by ' hand held pencil and repel an impact equal to 70 (230) ft. lbs. without fracture or tear when impacted by a 3-1/4" diameter, 5 lb. free -falling ball per UL 972. ' B. Grid Core 1. Aluminum I-beam grid core shall be of 6063-T6 or 6005-T5 alloy and temper with provisions for mechanical interlocking of multi -mullion and perimeter. Width of I- beam shall be no less than 7/16". The I-beam grid shall be machined to tolerances of not greater than +/- 0.002". C. Laminate Adhesive II. Heat and pressure resin type adhesive engineered for structural sandwich panel use, with minimum 25 -years field use. Adhesive shall pass testing requirements specified by the International Code Council "Acceptance Criteria ' for Sandwich Panel Adhesives". 2. Minimum tensile strength of 750 PSI when the panel assembly is tested by ASTM C-297 after two (2) exposures to six (6) cycles each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D-1037. ' 3. Minimum shear strength of the panel adhesive by ASTM D-1002 after exposure to five (5) separate conditions: a. 50% Relative Humidity at 68° F: 540 PSI '• b. 182° F: 100 PSI c. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D-1037 at room temperature: 800 PSI d. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D-1037 at 182°F: 250 PSI e. 500 Hour Oxygen Bomb by ASTM D-572: 1400 PSI 1 08950 -Skylight System 08950 -3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Li SECTION 08950 - SKYLIGHT SYSTEM (continued) D. Lift Lugs 1. Panels shall be provided with lifting lugs, designed to support the full weight of the panel, for one piece removal and installation of the complete assembly. 2.03 PANEL CONSTRUCTION: A. Provide sandwich panels of flat fiberglass reinforced translucent face sheets resin laminated to a grid core of mechanically interlocking thermally broken (aluminum) I - beams. The adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I- beam and have a neat, sharp edge. 1. Thickness: 2-3/4" 2. Complete insulated panel system shall have NFRC certified U- factor of 0.53. 3. Grid pattern. Nominal 12" x 24" shoji. B. Panels shall deflect no more than 1.9" at 30 psf in 10' 0" span without a supporting frame by ASTM E-72. C. Panels shall withstand 1200°F fire for minimum one (1) hour without collapse or exterior flaming. D. Skylight system shall pass Class A Roof Burning Brand Test by ASTM E-108, 2.04 BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM: A. Closure system. Extruded aluminum 6063-T6 and 6063-T5 alloy and temper clamp- tite screw type closure system. 1. Skylight perimeter closures shall be factory sealed to panels. B. Sealing tape. Manufacturer's standard, pre -applied to closure system at the factory under controlled conditions. C. Fasteners. 300 series stainless -steel screws for aluminum closures, excluding final fasteners to the building. D. Finish. Exposed aluminum to be manufacturer's factory applied finish that meets the performance requirements of AAMA 2604 (Mill). 1. Color: White 2.05 STRUCTURAL SUPPORT: A. Aluminum curb cap extrusions and flashing shall be supplied. See "Typical Sill Detail for Removable Roof'. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: A. Examine substrates, supporting structure and installation conditions. Do not proceed with skylight erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 08950 -Skylight System 08950-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 08950 - SKYLIGHT SYSTEM (continued) 3.02 PREPARATION: IA. Metal Protection 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. ' 2. . Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or method recommended by ' manufacturer. 3. Where aluminum will contact pressure -treated wood, separate dissimilar materials by methods recommended by manufacturer. ' 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. Install the skylight system in accordance with the manufacturer's installation ' recommendations and approved shop drawings. 1. Anchor component parts securely in place by permanent mechanical attachment system. 2. Accommodate thermal and mechanical movements. 3. Set sill and curb members with gaskets to provide weather -tight construction. B. Install joint sealants at perimeter joints and within the skylight system in accordance ' with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.04 FIELD DUALITY CONTROL: IA. Water Test. Test skylights according to procedures in AAMA 501.2. B. Repair or replace work that does not pass testing or that is damaged by testing and retest work. ' 3.05 CLEANING: ' A. Clean the skylight system inside and outside, immediately after installation, according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 08950 1 I I I Ii 08950 -Skylight System 08950-5 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 a Q5 tN If. SI izi QI s Va Wo\ OJZ U'JOIaJ D� M '301° v �C2�a+ N 00h x1 ay GtT 3 � N C ry W / I �� I( • • 3 Q ;W0 O Xt JDLa -a xGu $O rJJ VI�' m z� �.i op ni.,t mm in x • °1 O ZI-R Z 3 K.1 (.� U Z g k.J. CS J J J K� �_—� ^ =fr N11 NQ I I N XIOJN> ry� Un Q h. O ov yl v N ,X k m ce Z w r J¼J — I— taJ < 'I W o I- n -In Li O5 z 0 ix' Ls O (} 0 a $ Q ot m � W W0 G a I J n ti Q \ z I a S V p Q W N N O < \� r d J —' n I' a SECTION 09703 - WET WELL CONCRETE LINING PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section covers all workmanship, materials and quality requirements for concrete lining work. Provide and apply epoxy coating materials as specified and as indicated on the drawings. B. Coatings are to be applied to the wet well ceiling and all vertical walls. The floor and trough are not coated. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 1— General Requirements. B. Section 01330 — Submittals. 1.03 A. ASTM D 4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull -Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers B. ASTM D 4787 - Standard. Practice for Continuity Verification of Liquid or Sheet Linings Applied to Concrete Substrates C. ASTM D638 - Tensile Properties of Plastics. D. ASTM D790 - Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics. E. ASTM D695 - Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. F. - ASTM D4541 - Pull -off Strength of Coatings Using a Portable Adhesion Tester. G. ASTM D2584 - Volatile Matter Content. H. ASTM D2240 - Durometer Hardness, Type D. I. ASTM D543 - Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents. J. ASTM C109 - Compressive Strength Hydraulic Cement Mortars. K. ACI 506.2-77 - Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete. 09703 Wet Well Concrete Lining 09703-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 09703 - WET WELL CONCRETE LINING I L. ASTM C579 - Compressive Strength of Chemically Setting Silicate and Silica ' Chemical Resistant Mortars. M. NACE - The published standards of National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE International), Houston, TX. N. SSPC - The published standards of the Society of Protective Coatings, Pittsburgh, PA. O. ASTM D4414 — Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notched Gages. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The following items shall be submitted in compliance of Section 01330 - Submittals: I 1. Technical data sheet on each product used, including ASTM test results indicating the product conforms to and is suitable for its intended use per these specifications. 2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each product used. I 3. Project specific guidelines and recommendations. 4. Coating manufacturer's instructions and recommendations on surface preparation, application, and repair of discontinuities. 5. Contractor Qualifications: ' a. Manufacturer certification that Contractor has been trained and approved in the handling, mixing and application of the products to be used. b. Certification that the equipment to be used for applying the products ' has been manufactured or approved by the protective coating manufacturer and Contractor personnel have been trained and certified for proper use of the equipment. c. Five (5) recent references of Contractor (projects similar size and scope) indicating successful application of a high -build solvent -free epoxy coating by plural component spray application. d. Proof of any necessary federal, state or local permits or licenses necessary for the project. 6. Design details for any additional ancillary systems and equipment to be used in site and surface preparation, application and testing. I 09703 Wet Well Concrete Lining 09703-7 RUN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 09703 - WET WELL CONCRETE LINING 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall initiate and enforce quality control procedures consistent with applicable ASTM, NACE and SSPC standards and the protective coating manufacturer's recommendations. 1.06 DELIVERY. STORAGE,' AND HANDLING A. Materials are to be kept dry, protected from weather and stored under cover. B. Protective coating materials are to be stored between 50 deg F and 90 deg F. Do not store near flame, heat or strong oxidants. C. Protective coating materials are to be handled according to their material safety data sheets. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Contractor shall conform with all local, state and federal regulations including those set forth by OSHA, RCRA and the EPA and any other applicable authorities. B. Contractor shall submit design and safety procedures to Engineer when confined space entry, flow diversion or bypass is necessary in order for Contractor to perform the specified work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Standard Portland cement or new concrete (not quick setting high strength cement) must be well cured prior to application of the protective coating. Generally, 28 days is adequate cure time for standard Portland. If earlier application is desired, compressive or tensile strength of the concrete shall be tested to determine if acceptable cure has occurred. B. Cementitious patching and repair materials shall not be used unless their manufacturer provides information as to its suitability and procedures for topcoating with an epoxy coating. Project specific submittals shall be provided including application, cure time and surface preparation procedures which permit optimum bond strength with the epoxy coating. 2.02 WALL CLEANING MATERIALS A. Water Abrasive or Wet Abrasive Blast: Type and size of abrasive shall be selected to produce a surface profile that meets the coating manufacturer's recommendations. B. High Pressure Water: Water at 3500 psi minimum pressure. C. Cleaners: Cleaners shall be per coating manufacturer's recommendations. 09703 Wet Well Concrete Lining 09703-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 09703 — WET WELL CONCRETE LINING (continued) I 2.03 REPAIR MATERIALS I A. Repair materials shall be used to fill voids, structurally reinforce and/or rebuild surfaces, etc. as determined necessary by the Engineer and protective coating Contractor. Repair materials must be compatible with the specified epoxy coating and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The following products may be accepted and approved as compatible repair basecoat materials for epoxy topcoating for use within the specifications: 1. 100% solids, solvent -free epoxy grout specifically formulated for epoxy ' topcoating compatibility. The epoxy grout manufacturer shall provide instructions for trowel or spray application and for epoxy topcoating procedures. 2. Factory blended, rapid setting, high early strength, fiber reinforced, non - shrink repair mortar that can be trowelled or pneumatically spray applied may be approved if specifically formulated to be suitable for epoxy topcoating. Such repair mortars shall not be used unless their manufacturer provides information as to their suitability for topcoating with an epoxy coating. ' Project specific submittals shall be provided including application, cure time and surface preparation procedures which permit optimum bond strength with the epoxy coating. 1 2.04 PROTECTIVE COATING MATERIAL A. A 100% solids, solvent -free two -component epoxy resin system thixotropic in nature ' and filled with select fillers to minimize permeability and provide sag resistance acceptable to these specifications (up to 125 mils in a single application). Use Raven ' Lining Systems' Raven 405 epoxy coating system, or approved equal. 2.05 PROTECTIVE COATING APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer approved heated plural component spray equipment shall be used in the application of the specified protective coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEANING AND SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove dirt, grease, and debris from floor and interior walls of manhole using high pressure water and abrasive, and cleaners as necessary to prepare a roughened, bondable surface as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.02 ACCEPTABLE CONTRACTORS. A. Protective coating must be applied by a Certified Contractor of the protective coating manufacturer and according to manufacturer specifications. 09703 Wet Well Concrete Lining 09703-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 09703 - WET WELL CONCRETE LINING (continued) 3.04 EXAMINATION A. All structures to be coated shall be readily accessible to Contractor. B. Comply with local, state and federal regulatory and other applicable agencies with regard to environment, health and safety. C. Any active flows shall be dammed, plugged or diverted as required to ensure that the liquid flow is maintained below the surfaces to be coated. Flows shall be totally plugged and/or diverted when coating the invert. All extraneous flows into the manhole or vaults at or above the area coated shall be plugged and/or diverted until the epoxy has set hard to the touch. As an option, hot air may be added to the manhole to accelerate set time of the coating. D. Installation of the protective coating shall not commence until the concrete substrate has properly cured in accordance with these specifications. E. Temperature of the surface to be coated shall be maintained between 40 deg F and 120 deg F during application. Prior to and during application, care should be taken to avoid exposure of direct sunlight or other intense heat source to the structure being coated. Where varying surface temperatures do exist, care should be taken to apply the coating when the temperature is falling versus rising (ie. late afternoon into evening vs. morning into afternoon). 3.05 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Contractor shall inspect all surfaces specified to receive a protective coating prior to surface preparation. Contractor shall notify Engineer of any noticeable disparity in the surfaces which may interfere with the proper preparation or application of the repair mortar and protective coating. B. All contaminants including: oils, grease, incompatible existing coatings, waxes, form release, curing compounds, efflorescence, sealers, salts, or other contaminants shall be removed. C. All concrete or mortar that is not sound or has been damaged by chemical exposure shall be removed to a sound concrete surface or replaced. D. Surface preparation method(s) shall be based upon the conditions of the substrate, service environment and the requirements of the epoxy protective coating to be applied. E. Surfaces to receive protective coating shall be cleaned and abraded to produce a sound surface with adequate profile and porosity to provide a strong bond between the protective coating and the substrate. Generally, this can be achieved, with a high pressure water cleaning using equipment capable of 5,000 psi at 4 gpm. Other methods such as high pressure water jetting (refer to NACE Standard No. 5/SSPC- SP12), abrasive blasting, shotblasting, grinding, scarifying or acid etching may also be used. Detergent water cleaning and hot water blasting may be necessary to remove oils, grease or other hydrocarbon residues from the concrete. Whichever method(s) are 09703 Wet Well Concrete Lining 09703-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 09703 — WET WELL CONCRETE LINING (continued) I used, they shall be performed in a manner that provides a uniform, sound clean ' neutralized surface that is not excessively damaged. F. Standard Portland cement or new concrete (not quick setting high strength cement) must be well cured prior to application of the protective coating. Generally, 28 days is adequate cure time for standard Portland. If earlier application is desired, compressive or tensile strength of the concrete can be tested to determine if acceptable cure has occurred. 3.06 APPLICATION OF PROTECTWE COATING A. Application procedures shall conform to the recommendations of the protective coating manufacturer, including material handling, mixing, environmental controls ' during application, safety, and spray equipment. B. The spray equipment shall be specifically designed to accurately ratio and apply the ' specified protective coating materials and shall be regularly maintained and in proper working order. C. The protective coating material must be spray applied by a Certified Contractor of the protective coating manufacturer. D. Specified surfaces shall be coated by spray application of a moisture tolerant, solvent - free, 100% solids, epoxy protective coating as further described herein. For new manhole structures, spray application shall be to a minimum wet film thickness of 100 mils. ' E. Airless spray application equipment approved by the coating manufacturer shall be used to apply each coat of the protective coating. Air assisted spray application equipment may be acceptable, especially for thinner coats (<10 mils), only if the air source is filtered to completely remove all oil and water. F. If necessary, subsequent topcoating or additional coats of the protective coating should occur as soon as the basecoat becomes tack free, ideally within 12 hours but no later than the recoat window for the specified products. Additional surface preparation procedures will be required if this recoat window is exceeded. 3.07 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. During application a wet film thickness gage, such as those available through Paul N. 1 Gardner Company, Inc. meeting ASTM D4414 - Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness of Organic Coatings by Notched Gages, shall be used to ensure a monolithic coating and uniform thickness during application. B. After the protective coating has set hard to the touch it shall be inspected with high - voltage holiday detection equipment. Surface shall first be dried, an induced holiday shall then be made on to the coated concrete surface and shall serve to determine the minimum/maximum voltage to be used to test the coating for holidays at that particular area. The spark tester shall be initially set at 100 volts per 1 mil (25 microns) of film thickness applied but may be adjusted as necessary to detect the 1 09703 Wet Well Concrete Lining 09703-7 RIN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 09703 — WET WELL CONCRETE LINING (continued) ' induced holiday (refer to NACE RPO188-99). All detected holidays shall be marked and repaired by abrading the coating surface with grit disk paper or other hand tooling method. After abrading and cleaning, additional protective coating material shall be ' hand applied to the repair area. All touch-up/repair procedures shall follow the protective coating manufacturer's recommendations. IC. Measurement of bond strength of the protective coating to the substrate can be measured in accordance with ASTM D4541. Any areas detected to have inadequate bond strength shall be evaluated by the Engineer. Further bond tests shall be ' performed in that area to determine the extent of potentially deficient bonded area and repairs shall be made by Contractor in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END SECTION 09703 I L I Li I I II I I 09703 Wet Well Concrete Lining 09703-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 II I SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART1- GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY: A. This section covers surface preparation, furnishing, and application of paint and '• protective coatings. B. It is the intent that all new exposed ferrous surfaces be painted, whether specifically mentioned or not, except as modified herein. I C. All new exposed piping is to be painted. D. Factory primed surfaces are to receive finish coats. ' 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) I1. D 16 — Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) I1. Title 29 Pan 1910— Labor - Occupational Safety and Health Standards 2. Title 29 Part 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal Procedures": 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, label analysis, volatile organic compound (VOC) content, and application instructions for each material proposed for use. a. List the VOC content of each product. b. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's t catalog number and general classification. c. Samples for initial color selection shall be in the form of manufacturer's color charts. ' 2. Qualification Data: For applicator. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: IA. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer of the finish coats. B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total coating systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information. on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. ' 1. Notify the engineer of problems anticipated using the materials specified. C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not acceptable. 09900 -Painting 09900 - 1 RJN Project No. I I-1875-00 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING (continued) Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products named are required, or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers. Applicator Qualification: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name, label, and the following information: 0. Product name or title of material 0. Product description (generic classification or binder type) 0. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture 0. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents 0. Thinning instructions 0. Application instructions 0. Color name and number 0. VOC content Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45°F. Store all flammable materials not in use in Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., NFPA or other approved flammable storage cabinet. Reference OSHA 29 CFR 1926 if storage of combustible of flammable liquids exceed 25 gallons. Maintain containers and cabinets used for storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.06 Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50°F and 90°F. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45°F and 95°F. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5°F above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature and humidity limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS: A. The following compounds shall not be used in paints or primers: 09900 -Painting 09900 - 2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 09900 — PAINTING (continued) I. Prohibited organic compounds a. Methylene chloride k. Di -n -butyl phthalate b. 1,1,1 -Trichloroethane 1. Di-noctyl phthalate c. Benzene m. Diethyl phthalate d. Toluene (methylbenzene) n. Dimethyl phthalate e. Ethylbenzene o. Isophorone f. Vinyl chloride p. Formaldehyde g. Naphthalene q. Methyl ethyl ketone h. 1,2-Dichlorobenzene r. Methyl isobutyl ketone i. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate s. Acrolein j. Butyl benzyl phthalate t. Acrylonitrile 2. Prohibited metals (including their oxides) a. Antimony d. Lead b. Cadmium e. Mercury c. Hexavalent chromium 2.02 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG) 2. Benjamin Moore and Co. (BM) 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (S -W) 4. Tnemec Company, Inc. (T) 2.03 PRIMERS/SEALERS: A. Rust -Inhibiting Primer: Quick -drying, rust -inhibiting primer used for priming ferrous metal. 2.04 PAINT MATERIAL: A. Interior Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel: Semi -gloss, latex enamel used over a primer on ferrous and zinc -coated (galvanized) metal surfaces. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in places that are not to be painted, or provide surface -applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove 09900 -Painting 09900-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 09900 - PAINTING (continued) these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly -painted surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, items shall be reinstalled in the same manner that they were removed. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify engineer in writing when problems are anticipated in using the specified finish -coat material with substrates primed by others. ' C. Ferrous Metals: Clean nongalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop -coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. 1. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. Use odorless thinner with alkyd enamel. 3.03 APPLICATION: A. General ' 1. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Spray applications will require prior approval from the ENGINEER. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even, smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 5. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, comers, crevices, welds and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 09900 -Painting 09900 -4 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING (continued) 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 7. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop -primed and touch up painted. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. Allow time between successive coats to permit proper drying per manufacturer's recommendations. C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer or as specified, whichever is greater. D. Mixing and Thinning: Unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer, paints may be thinned immediately prior to application with an approved manufacturer's thinner and used only within recommended limits when necessary to suit conditions of surface temperature, weather and application methods. The use of thinner shall not relieve the Contractor from obtaining complete hiding, full film thickness, or required gloss. Paints of different manufacturers shall not be mixed. E. Mechanical Work: Color -coding of mechanical piping systems is limited to those items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and as noted on drawings. Paint shall be applied directly to the insulation and pipe on systems which are not insulated. Label pipe systems appropriately after painting. Painting of other mechanical items is limited to those exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and occupied spaces except as otherwise indicated. Use paint and color specified or other manufacturer's equivalent. F. Items to be painted and color -coded include the following: 1. Wastewater lines, white 2. Potable water, dark blue G. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no bum -through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 3.04 CLEANING: A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, completely remove empty cans, rags, tools, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the project site. B. Do not clean tools, brushes, applicators, and equipment at the project site unless specifically authorized by the Engineer. Do not use sinks in restrooms, janitors' closets, or in locations where food is prepared. C. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 09900 -Painting 09900 -5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 09900 - PAINTING (continued) 3.05 3.06 PROTECTION: A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to the Engineer. A. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. PAINT SCHEDULE: 09900 -Painting Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop -primed items. 0. Alkyd Enamel: Two (2) finish coats over primer. Total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Rust -Inhibiting Primer b. First Coat: Alkyd Enamel c. Second Coat: Alkyd Enamel END OF SECTION 09900 09900- 6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 .1 I I Li Li I U U I I I I I SECTION 10520 - EMERGENCY SHOWER AND EYE WASH PARTI-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide a stand alone combination emergency shower and eye/face wash. B. System shall be freeze protected and provide an alarm, if in use. Water is supplied from the bottom. 1.02 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS: A. Certified by CSA to meet ANSI Z358.1 Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for evaluation and approval in accordance with Section 01330. B. The shop drawings shall include at least the following: 1. Certified shop and erection drawings. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3. A complete bill -of -materials. 4. Complete installation and assembly drawings with detailed specifications covering materials used and other accessories. 1.04 SHIPPING: A. All parts shall be properly protected to prevent any damage in shipping. B. Each box or crate shall be properly marked to show the contents and the net weight. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 2.02 MANUFACTURERS: The manufacturers shall be Haws, Speakman or approved equal. COMBINATION SHOWER AND EYE/FACE WASH: A. The unit shall be Haws Model 8317CTFPB or Speakman Model SE6100, freeze resistant, 120 VAC, combination shower and eye/face wash, or approved equal. B. The unit shall be thermostatically controlled cable heated with insulation and an ABS plastic jacket that prevents freezing down to -30°F. The freeze protection shall include a bleed valve that automatically opens to flush water during freezing conditions during power failures. C. A high visibility yellow stainless steel pull rod activates shower and a push flag activates eye/face wash. D. Pipe stanchion is 1 -in. or 1'/.". Schedule 40 stainless steel. Bottom supply is 1 -in. or 1 %" IPS. 10520 -Emergency Shower and Eye Wash 10520-1 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 10520 - EMERGENCY SHOWER AND EYE WASH (continued) ' 2.03 DESIGN CRITERIA: A. An 8 or 10 -in, shower head with 20 gpm capacity. B. Shower valve is stay -open ball valve, reaching full flow with the lever pulled. C. Eye/face wash (no bowl) shall have a flow control of 2.5 gpm. Eyewash valve shall be chrome plate stainless steel stem stay -open ball valve. Spray outlets are ABS with flip top duct caps. D. A hose ball valve shall be provided. E. The bleed valve provides freeze protection and is thermally actuated when internal shower temperature drops below 35°F and closes at 45°F. F. Provide a universal Emergency Shower and Eyewash Sign and a green, waterproof Test This Week tag. G. Finish is safety green paint. 1 - 2.04 ACCESSORIES: A. Provide a flow switch to indicate when emergency shower is in use. B. This discrete signal shall be sent to a remote PLC. Provide a local emergency alarm light and buzzer, activated from the flow switch as well. C. Provide a NEMA watertight green area light for continuous illumination of the , shower. 2.05 ELECTRICAL: A. Unit shall be 120 VAC, single phase, 2 -wire and ground, 2A electrical supply. ' B. Provide a NEMA 4X water tight power connection for the unit from the electrical panel. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: ' The unit shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 START-UP AND O&M: A. It shall be demonstrated that it functions as designed, relative to water supply, alarms, lights and freeze protection. B. O&M manual shall be prepared in accordance with Section 01330. 10520 -Emergency Shower and Eye Wash 10520-2 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 10520 - EMERGENCY SHOWER AND EYE WASH (continued) 3.03 WARRANTY: The manufacturer shall warrant that the combination shower and eye/face wash shall be free of defects in design, materials and workmanship for a period of 18 months from the date of arrival at the plant site. The manufacturer's warranty shall be in a form acceptable to and for the benefit of the owner and shall be submitted with the shop drawings. The manufacturer shall repair or replace any work found to be defective within three (3) weeks of notification. END OF SECTION 10520 10520 -Emergency Shower and Eye Wash 10520-3 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 11349 - FRP DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemen- tal Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section. 1.02 SCOPE: A. Provide and install all fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) ductwork and accessories as shown on the drawings and specified herein. B. Provide services and testing associated with the equipment. C. All items furnished by the equipment supplier under this section are for installation by the Contractor. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The manufacturer shall furnish a statement of experience regarding the number of in - place installations of FRP ductwork for similar applications. B. The manufacturer shall be recognized in the design and production of FRP ductwork and accessories. C. The ductwork systems shall be installed by firms with at least five (5) years of suc- cessful experience with FRP systems in similar applications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit information to establish compliance with the specifications in accordance with the provisions of Section 01330 Submittals. I. Complete specifications, detailed dimensional drawings and catalog cuts for all FRP duct and fittings. Duct design calculations indicating pressure and vacuum ratings and support spacing requirements. Design calculations shall be signed and stamped by a licensed Professional Engineer. 2. List of materials to be furnished, the names of the suppliers and the date of delivery of materials to the site. 3. One complete, detailed shop drawing of all FRP pipe, including the location of all fittings, joints and connection to structures. 4. Manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storing and installing pipe and fittings. 5. Name, address and telephone number for manufacturer and distributor. B: All deviations and/or exceptions to this specification must be detailed and explained with the reason for the deviation and the affect of the deviation on the operation and/or performance of the equipment. C. Equipment booklet including: 1. Equipment data sheets. 2. Performance data. 3. Descriptive literature and bulletins. 4. Customer contact list with telephone numbers (minimum of 10 contacts from similar facilities). 11349-FRP Ductwork and Accessories 11349 - 1 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 11349 - FRP DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES (continued) ' 5. Operation and maintenance manual with installation and maintenance in- structions. Submit after approval of equipment and prior to shipment. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Contractor shall furnish FRP ductwork as shown on the drawings. The contractor shall base his bid on the scaled drawings, but they are approximations only and must be field verified prior to fabrication. B. FRP duct shall be corrosion resistant, ultra violet light inhibited and designed for 120°F temperatures. All ductwork shall be designed for negative and positive pres- sures as high as 10 inches water column (w.c.). C. FRP ductwork and appurtenances shall conform to all requirements of the National Bureau of Standard Voluntary Product Standard PS 15-69, Custom Contact Molded Reinforced — Polyester Chemical Resistant Process Equipment, latest edition and/or ASTM-D3299 Standard Specification for Filament Glass Fiber Reinforced Thermo- set Resin Chemical Resistant Tanks. 2.02 RESIN: A. Vinyl ester resin used for duct and appurtenances shall be suitable for continuous ex- posure to hydrogen sulfide gas and shall be equal to Corezon VE8300 or equal with Nexus surfacing veil. B. An ultraviolet inhibitor/adsorber such as 1.0% Cyasorb UV -9 ultraviolet screener will be added to the exterior of the exposed surfaces of the vinyl resin. C. Duct color shall be selected by the owner. Gel coat shall be Lilly 03 series or equal. ' 2.03 LAMINATE CONSTRUCTION: A. Duct shall have a minimum 4 -ply 1-1/2 ounce mat as well as one ply of twenty-four (24) ounce roving or otherwise be structurally reinforced against deflections exceed- ing 0.5 inches under a maximum pressure/vacuum. B. Non -continuous glass strands shall account for between twenty (20) and thirty (30) percent of each layer by weight. C. Strands shall be 0.05 inches to 2.0 inches in length. 2.04 FIBERGLASS DUCTWORK FITTINGS: A. Elbows and transitions shall be constructed in the same manner as straight duct sec- tions. B. Standard elbows shall have a minimum centerline radius of one duct diameter (i.e., rid = 1.0), unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. C. Lengths of standard reducer transitions shall be five times the difference in diameters unless otherwise specified. The transitions shall have the same number of layers as the larger duct. D. Flanged connections shall conform to the following: 1 11349-FRP Ductwork and Accessories 11349-2 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 1 II ' SECTION 11349 - FRP DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES (continued) 1. Use flanged connections when connecting to flexible connectors and damp- ' ers. 2. Flange dimensions and thickness shall conform to those shown in Table 2 of the National Bureau of Standards Voluntary Product Standard PS 15-69. Flange thickness and width for rectangular duct shall correspond to those for ' round duct having the same diameter as the longer side of the rectangular duct. 3. The faces of the flanges shall have no depressions or projections and shall be ' perpendicular to the centerline of the duct. 4. Bolt holes shall straddle the centerline of the duct. The number and size of bolt holes shall conform to those shown in Table 2 of the National Bureau of ' Standard Voluntary Product Standard PS 15-69. Rectangular duct flange width and bolt spacing shall be same as that for the diameter corresponding to the longer sides. ' 5. Contractor to provide all required bolts, nuts and washers for flange connec- tions. All hardware to be 316 stainless steel. E. Ductwork shall be capable of being supported on 12 feet centers without the deflec- t tion exceeding 1/360 of the span. If deemed necessary by the manufacturer, addi- tional layers of unidirectional glass fibers shall be added to the ductwork to provide the necessary degree of stiffness. The manufacturer shall provide duct support re- ' quirements with shop drawings including hanger type, required spacing and materi- als. F. Control Dampers: Provide quadrant type control center pivoted dampers where ' shown on the drawings. The dampers shall have flanges and be constructed of FRP materials. The dampers shall be Swartout Model 912 (Kansas City, Missouri), Daniel Mechanical, Model 203 or equal and have a full circumference blade stop, ' shaft seal and adjustable hand quadrant type, locked position lever operator. Crank lever and hand seal shall be 316 SS. Dampers shall be certified to AMCA to have a leakage rate equal to or less than 2 cfm/sq. ft. at 30 inches w.c. IC. Expansion Joints: Expansion joints shall be installed on the ductwork where indi- cated on the drawings. The expansion joints shall be made of virgin PVC and shall not harden. Series 300 stainless steel adjustable clamps shall be used to fasten the ' expansion joint to duct. Joint shall slide over the ends of the two sections of duct. A 1'/2" gap shall be left between the duct ends. Expansion joints shall be Femco Series 1056 flexible couplings or equal. I H. Hangers and Supports I. Above ground duct shall be supported as shown on the drawings and as rec- ommended by the duct manufacturer. Ducts shall be supported at no more ' than 12 feet on center. 2. Duct hangers and supports shall be constructed of corrosion resistant fiber- glass, aluminum or 316 stainless steel and as shown on the drawings. ' 3. Duct supports shall be fastened to new or existing structures using 316. stainless steel adhesive capsule anchors. Anchors shall be a two-part stud and capsule chemical resin anchoring system. Stud assemblies shall consist ' of an all -thread anchor rod with nut and washer. Adhesive capsule anchors shall be HILTI HVA Adhesive Anchor or equal. 11349-FRP Ductwork and Accessories 11349 -3 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 1 El SECTION 11349 - FRP DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES (continued) I PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: ' A. Installation shall be done in accordance with recognized industry standards and with guidelines in the Thermoplastic Duct Construction Manual. B. All joining materials shall be supplied by the installing contractor. C. All joints shall be butt wrapped (except where flanged joints are shown on the Draw- ' ings or indicated herein) and made water -tight. D. Flanged joints shall be provided at all expansion joints, dampers and connections where dismantling maybe required. E. Duct at field connections shall be provided with six inches of trim. Flanges shall be provided with one loose side to accommodate field adjustment. Field drilling of flanges will be required. All field joints shall match the color of the main duct. F. Duct shall be continuously pitched to prevent condensate buildup inside the duct. G. Dust and debris shall be removed from inside the ductwork as it is installed. Tempo- ' rary closures shall be used to prevent entrance of dust and debris until such time that all connections have been complete. 3.02 WARRANTY: A. The duct manufacturer shall provide a warranty against manufacturing defects of ma- terials and workmanship for a period of ten years after the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. The manufacturer shall replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any defective pipe material within the warranty period. END OF SECTION 11349 I I I h I I Li 11349-FRP Ductwork and Accessories 11349-4 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 I n I I I I I I I I I I I I f1 I I SECTION 11357 - CARBON ADSORBER PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemen- tal Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section. 1.02. SCOPE: A. Provide one (1) activated carbon adsorber odor control system for the control of odors at the Fayetteville, AR Hamestring Lift Station, as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. The odor control system shall treat 5,000 cfm of air drawn from the lift station wet well structure. The carbon adsorber shall be a ten- (10-) foot -diameter, single -bed vessel with one (1) three -foot -deep carbon layer. B. Provide start-up, training and construction services and performance testing associ- ated with the equipment. C. All items furnished by the equipment supplier under this section are for installation by the Contractor. D. The odor control system shall consist of the following major components: I. Air exhaust fan 2. Exhaust fan inlet and outlet flexible connectors 3. Vessel inlet volume control damper 4. Fan outlet/adsorber inlet transition 5. Interconnecting duct work from fan to vessel 6. Air flow switch in duct between fan and vessel 7. Carbon adsorber vessel 8. Activated carbon media 9. Control panel 10. Outlet exhaust stack E. The odor control system will interface and must be compatible with the with the PLC controlling the Hamestring Lift Station, see Section 16900. F. The odor control system shall have one single point of contact for providing power to the unit. 1.03 DUALITY ASSURANCE: A. All components of the carbon adsorber system shall be provided by a single manufac- turer who shall have sole -source responsibility for the equipment elements detailed herein. B. The manufacturer of the system shall be recognized in the design and production of carbon adsorption air treatment systems. Upon request, the manufacturer shall pro- vide with the submittal data, a list of five (5) carbon adsorption air treatment installa- tions associated with the treatment of hydrogen sulfide and other malodorous com- 11357-Carbon Adsorber 11357 - 1 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 11357 - CARBON ADSORBER (continued) pounds. The list shall include contact names, telephone numbers and length of ser- vice for each named installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit information to establish compliance with the specifications in accordance with the provisions of Section 01330 Submittals. I. Dimensional drawings showing plan and elevation views of the systems and all applicable connections. 2. Details of all external termination points. 3. List of Materials of Construction. 4. Statement of warranty in accordance with Section 3.03. B. All deviations and/or exceptions to this specification must be detailed and explained with the reason for the deviation and the affect of the deviation on the operation and/or performance of the equipment. C. Equipment booklet including: 1. Equipment data sheets. 2. Performance data. 3. Descriptive literature and bulletins. 4. Customer contact list with telephone numbers (minimum of 10 contacts from similar facilities). 5. Operation and maintenance manual with installation, start-up and mainte- nance instructions. Submit after approval of equipment and prior to ship- ment. 1.05 OPERATING CONDITIONS: A. The carbon adsorber unit shall be designed and manufactured based on the following operating conditions: Parameter Units Requirement Capacity cfm 5,000 H2S Loading (Average) ppmv 5 H2S Loading (Peak) my 10 Minimum HZS Removal Efficiency % 99 Inlet Air Temperature Degrees F 45 - 100 Inlet Air Relative Humidity % 40 - 100 Number of Units Count 1 Number of Carbon Layers Per Unit Count 1 Vessel Diameter Feet 10 Carbon Bed Depth Per Layer Feet 3.0 Velocity Through Carbon Beds fpm 64 Pressure Drop Across Unit, Start -Up: Max: Inches W.C. 4 6 B. All components of the system shall be compatible with the conditions and chemicals to which they will be subjected during normal operation. Compounds with which the materials of construction must be compatible include, but are not limited to: 1. Hydrogen sulfide 11357 -Carbon Adsorber 11357 -2 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 11 I 1 I I I I I I I I I L r - E SECTION 11357 - CARBON ADSORBER (continued) 2. Sulfuric acid 1.06 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REOUIREMENTS: A. When loaded under average and peak H2S concentrations, the carbon adsorber shall provide at least 99% removal of hydrogen sulfide when operated at 5,000 cfm. B. When inlet odor concentrations are greater than 3,000 dilutions to threshold (DT), the carbon adsorber shall provide 95% reduction in odors. For inlet odor concentrations less than 3,000 DT, the maximum outlet concentration from the carbon unit shall not exceed 150 DT. PART 2- PRODUCTS 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 2.02 .2.03 A. The carbon adsorber unit shall be U.S. Filter, or equal. The carbon shall be MidasTM carbon, or equal. MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION: A. Carbon Adsorber Vessel: The carbon adsorber vessel shall be constructed of Fiber- glass Reinforced Plastic (FRP). No other materials of construction shall be accept- able. The vessel shall be designed for the following design criteria: Parameter Units Requirement Wall Thickness, Minimum Inches 0.25 Wind Load mph 80 Seismic Zone N/A B Internal Positive Pressure Inches W.C. 15 Maximum Operating Temperature °F 150 I. The vessel shall be fabricated from premium grade vinyl ester resin FRP con- struction. 2. Resin used in fabrication shall be a premium vinyl ester resin such as Hetron 922 by Ashland Chemical, Derakane 411 Dow Chemical, or approved equal. The resin shall be reinforced with an inner veil of a suitable synthetic organic fiber such as Nexus 111-00010. It shall have U.V. inhibitors. ACTIVATED CARBON MEDIA: A. The activated carbon shall be virgin, pelletized, derived from high-grade bituminous coal, vapor phase type, suitable for the control of sewage odors. The carbon shall meet the following specification: Parameter Units Requirement Iodine Number, Minimum mg I2/g 1050 Particle Diameter mm. 3.9-4.1 Apparent Density /cc 0.46 - 0.52 Hardness No., Minimum N/A 95 Butane Activity, Minimum N/A 26 H2S Capacity, Minimum * g H2S/cc 0,30 11357 -Carbon Adsorber 11357-3 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 I I SECTION 11357 - CARBON ADSORBER (continued) ' " Determined using ASTM standard method D6646-01. Prior to testing, the test sample should be completely humidified by exposing the sample to a flow of humid air (> 85% RH) for at least 4 hours. Testing is accomplished by passing a moist (85% RH) stream of air containing 1% HZS through a I inch diameter tube with a nine inch deep bed of closely packed carbon at a ' rate of 1,450 cc/min and monitoring to a 50 ppm breakthrough. 2.04 ACCESSORIES: A. Manometer and Pressure Taps: Two (2) %" pressure taps shall be provided on the 1 carbon bed of the adsorber vessel to fit a Dwyer Instruments Magnahelic 2000 differ- ential pressure gauge that will continuously monitor the pressure drop across each carbon bed. B. Sample Probes: Three (3) 1" diameter sample probes which shall extend into the carbon bed a minimum of twelve inches. The sample ports shall be adequate to pro- vide suitable extraction of carbon samples from the carbon bed. The sample ports shall extend outside the vessel wall and shall be blocked off with a ball valve con- structed of CPVC. A sampling tool for extraction of carbon samples shall be pro- vided. C. Grounding Rod: A stainless -steel rod shall be provided within the carbon bed to ade- quately ground the bed. An external mechanical connection shall be provided for grounding and bonding by the installer. Details shall be provided in submittals to demonstrate that the carbon bed will be adequately grounded. D. Carbon Support System: The carbon bed shall be supported on a polypropylene screen through an FRY support grating system. The screen and grating shall be re- movable through access manways. The support system shall consist of grating, beams and columns. Pall rings or other dumped packing media as a means of carbon support will not be acceptable. The support system shall be designed to withstand a load of at least 150 lbs/fl2 with a minimum deflection of under all conditions. The manufacturer shall submit calculations verifying compliance of this requirement. All calculations of the carbon support system shall be stamped by a licensed Profes- sional Engineer. E. Overflow and drain connections furnished with CPVC pipe, fittings and ball valves. ' F. Blind flanges, material same as vessel, with 316 stainless -steel nuts, bolts and wash- ers with EPDM gasket for connection during long periods of shut down. G. Exhaust Stacks: The adsorber shall be provided with a straight outlet with a rain cap to prevent rain water from entering into the system. H. Anchor Bolts: The vessel shall be provided with properly sized 316 stainless -steel ' epoxy HILTI anchor system. 1. The vessel shall have the access manways and flanged inlet and outlet connection as shown on the drawings along with a vessel I.D. tag. J. Installation of the system shall be completed by the contractor in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. A manufacturer's technical representative shall be available for consultation during the installation, and shall visit the site for a minimum of two (2) days. 11357 -Carbon Adsorber 11357 -4 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 1 U Ii I I II I SECTION 11357 - CARBON ADSORBER (continued) 2.05 EXHAUST FAN: A. Exhaust fan shall have fiberglass reinforced plastic centrifugal backward inclined impeller. The.wheel shall be dynamically balanced. Resin shall be suitable for expo- sure to the specific service conditions. The shaft shall be carbon steel and shall have a stainless -steel sleeve. The shaft seal shall be Teflon or Viton. B. Bearings shall be heavy duty, self aligning grease lubricated ball type with a mini- mum of 100,000 hour B- 10 life. OSHA approved belt guard and shaft guard shall be provided. Motor shall be high -efficiency, TEFC, 1800 RPM with a 1.15 service fac- tor and suitable for 3/60/230-460V. Fan shall be belt driven. C. Fan housing shall be constructed of fiberglass and reinforced with rigid bracing to in- crease structural integrity. Bearing support brackets shall be positioned to directly oppose belt tension forces. Fan housing shall be a curved scroll design with a I -inch drain connection at the bottom of the fan scroll. The fan inlet shall be slip type and the fan outlet shall have a flanged nozzle. D. E. The fan shall be designed for the following specifications: Air Flow Rate, cfm 5,000 S.P. Up to Fan Inlet, in WC 2.0 Adsorber Pressure Drop, in WC 8.0 Total S.P., in WC 10.0 Minimum Motor HP 15.0 Flexible Connectors: Provide flanged expansion joint for fan inlet and outlet of fan to FRP vessel inlet transition piece. The flange drilling shall be coordinated with fan and transition. Type: W -design configuration with integral flanges suitable for service with FRP duct. The properties of the flexible connectors shall be as follows: Material shall be EPDM. Material shall be resistant to ultraviolet light degradation and shall be suitable for contact with odorous air as specified herein. The backing rings shall be '/<-inch thick, 2" wide, type 304 stainless steel. The length from flange -to -flange shall be 6" unless shown otherwise. The extension shall be 1 inch, compression shall be 2 inches, lat- eral offset shall be 2.5 inches and the thickness shall be 'A -inch minimum. Flexible connectors shall be air and water tight. Manufacturer shall be Senior Flexonics or approved equal. F. Air Flow Switch: Provide a flow switch powered by 120 VAC in the transition duct- work downstream from the fan. The flow switch shall be a single -point flow moni- tor, probe -type sensor with no moving parts mountable in process streams without the need for expansion fittings or tees. Unit shall have a 3/4" NPT monitoring head and a 316 SS sensor with an adjustable 60 second "power -on" delay and a 10 second set - point switching delay. Manufacturer shall be E -T -A Flow Monitor, Model SU 1003 or approved equal. ' 11357 -Carbon Adsorber 11357-5 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 11357 - CARBON ADSORBER (continued) 2.06 G. The motor shall be manufactured by WEG, Baldor, Reliance or approved equal. H. Fan shall be New York Blower, Hartzell or equal. The fan shall have an AMCA seal. I. Control Panel: The fan shall be field wired to a FRP control panel of Nema 4X con- struction by the contractor. The control panel shall have a fan control switch with a pilot lamp to indicate the fan running status. The contractor shall mount the control panel next to the adsorber vessel, as shown on the drawings. The power supplied to the panel shall be 480V, 3 phase, 60 Hz. The panel shall be provided with a power disconnect switch, motor starter and control transformer. A contact shall be provided for the air flow switch. Fuse protection shall be provided for all motor circuits. SPARE PARTS: A. The manufacturer shall supply the following spare parts: 1. One spare fan belt 2. One set of spare fan bearings 3. Recommended lubricants PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 3.02 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES. START-UP AND TRAINING SERVICES: A. Installation of the system shall be completed by the Contractor in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions. A manufacturer's technical representative shall be available for consultation during the installation and shall visit the site at least once for a minimum of two (2) days. B. Start-up of the system shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer who shall fur- nish competent personnel to complete this activity. Start-up will commence follow- ing a visual inspection and check out of the system by the manufacturer's technical representative. The start-up person shall be on -site for a minimum of two (2) days. I I i I I I I C. Operator training on the carbon adsorber system shall be conducted in accordance with Section 01700, PERFORMANCE TESTING: A. A performance test shall be conducted within thirty (30) days of the completion of start-up to demonstrate compliance with the performance criteria stated herein. The results of the test will be furnished to the Engineer in writing within twenty (20) days of completion of the performance test. B. Successful completion of the performance test shall be defined as demonstrating the following: 1. At the normal air flow rate, the carbon adsorber system shall have a mini- mum H2S removal efficiency of 99%, or maximum H2S concentration at the outlet of 100 parts -per -billion (ppb), whichever concentration is higher. H2S measurements shall be taken at fifteen (15) minute intervals at the adsorber inlet and outlet with a recently calibrated Arizona Instruments Jerome 631-X H2S Analyzer for duration of four (4) hours. The average of all measure- ments will be used to calculate H2S removal efficiency. 2. The adsorber system shall also have a maximum odor Dilution to -Threshold I I C] II I 11357 -Carbon Adsorber 11357-6 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 I I ' SECTION 11357 - CARBON ADSORBER (continued) (DT) value at the adsorber outlet of 150. Concurrently with H2S testing, two ' sets of air samples from both the adsorber inlet and outlet (total of 4 air sam- ples) shall be collected and sent by overnight delivery to St. Croix Sensory, Inc. for odor panel analysis of DT to be performed by certified odor panelists 1 using the European standard (EN 13725) of 20 liters -per -minute (lpm) odor presentation air flow rate. The two sets of air samples shall be taken at least four (4) hours apart. The average of the two outlet samples will be used to determine the DT value. ' C. Performance testing shall be completed by an independent testing firm hired by the Contractor that is skilled and experienced with industry -standard air testing proce- ' dures, following the methods specified in the WEFTEC Manual of Practice 25, Con- trol of Odors and Emissions from Wastewater Treatment Plants. The testing firm must also meet the following requirements: I. Provide a list of five (5) similar performance tests ' 2. Be a registered Professional Engineer 3. Possess all necessary air testing equipment ID. The testing protocol shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer prior to running the test and the Engineer shall be given a three week notice prior to running the test. The test protocol shall be prepared by the testing firm conducting the testing. A ' complete Performance Test Report shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval as to acceptance of the test. The report shall include an Executive Summary and a certification page, signed by the independent testing firm, that the unit met all the criteria of the performance test. ' E. If the carbon adsorber system fails to achieve the required H2S removal efficiencies, the Contractor shall make all necessary corrections and/or improvements and the sys- ' tems shall be retested at the Contractor's expense. If the system fails the retest, then the equipment shall be modified or. replaced until the required H2S removal efficien- cies are achieved. IF. The manufacturer shall include the cost of testing five (5) carbon samples collected by the Owner. A carbon sample shall be collected by the Owner from the adsorber once per year for five years and sent to the adsorber manufacturer for testing. The ' samples shall be tested for % Carbon Tetrachloride Activity per ASTM-D3467-89 and for H2S Adsorption Capacity per ASTM D6646-01. 3.03 WARRANTY: ' A. The manufacturer shall warrant that the system shall be supplied in accordance with these specifications and shall perform as described herein. The manufacturer shall ' warrant the systems to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a pe- riod of one (1) year after installation. B. The manufacturer shall warrant the integrity of the FRP vessel shell for a period of ' five (5) years from the date of installation. END OF SECTION 11357 1 11357 -Carbon Adsorber 11357-7 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 11360 - GREASE ELIMINATOR PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division I Specification Sections apply to this Section. 1.02 SCOPE: A. Supply one (1) grease removal system with housing at the inlet to the carbon adsorber fan, as shown on the drawings. B. Furnish all equipment as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. D. Provide services and testing associated with the equipment. E. All items furnished by the equipment supplier under this section are for installation by the Contractor. 1.03 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. All equipment furnished under this section shall be of a design and manufacture that has been used in similar applications and it shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner that the quality is equal to equipment made by that manufacturer specifically named herein. B. All equipment and other specified' accessories and appurtenances shall be furnished by the same manufacturer to ensure compatibility and integrity of the individual components, and provide the specified warranty for all components. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: ' 1.05 I I A. Submit information to establish compliance with the Specifications in accordance with the provisions of Section 01330 Submittals. B. Detailed list of any exceptions taken to these Specifications. Include specification reference and proposed alternative with reason stated for exception. C. Shop drawings shall include grease pad details, housing dimensions, details of removable sections, layout plans, mounting details and other information pertinent to the design and installation. DESIGN PERFORMANCE: A. The grease removal unit shall be designed to remove grease from the air collection duct. The design air flow rate is 5,000 cfm. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER: A. The fabricator shall be Diamond Fiberglass, Inc. or equal. B. The grease mesh pad shall be provided by ACS Industries, Inc (Houston, TX) or equal. 11360 -Grease Eliminator 11360 - 1 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 11360 - GREASE ELIMINATOR (continued) I 2.02 GREASE REMOVAL SYSTEM DESIGN: A. Type: 4" thick 304 stainless -steel mesh pad, ACS Industries Style 7CA. ' B. Provide 1" thick 304 SS support grid on each side of mesh pad. ' C. Provide FRP structure housing with Hetron 922 Vinyl ester.resin in accordance with PS -15-69. It shall be gel -coated white after fabrication. D. Two (2) %z" pressure taps, %l" stainless -steel tubing and a Dwyer Instruments Magnahelic 2000 differential pressure gauge shall be provided to indicate pressure drop across the mesh pad section. E. Unit to be shipped with mesh pad installed. ' F. The housing shall have a side access door with SS bolts and washers with a door flange. G. The unit shall have flanged inlet and outlets with 304 SS bolting and 1/8" neoprene gaskets for all flanges. H. The unit shall have a drain tap at the bottom with a 1" CPVC ball valve included. ' 1. The contractor shall install and support the unit. 2.03 SPARE PARTS: ' A. Provide two (2) spare 4" thick stainless -steel mesh pads. PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSTALLATION, START-UP AND TRAINING: A. Installation shall be done in accordance with recognized industry standards and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. The systems shall be installed in the horizontal ductwork as shown on the drawings. ' C. Start-up and training by a manufacturer's representative shall be provided during one site visit at the time of the contractor's request. 3.02 WARRANTY: A. The fabricator shall warrant the system to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year after start-up. B. The fabricator shall warrant the FRP housing for a period of five (5) years from the date of installation. END OF SECTION 11360 1 11360 -Grease Eliminator 11360- 2 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 13121 - PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes. Furnishing and installing a pre-engineered metal building including structural frame, metal roofing, steel siding, personnel doors and accessories to provide a complete weatherproof enclosure. The building shall be rigid frame, beam -and -column or self -framing frame structure of steel rafter beams and columns. B. Pre-engineered metal buildings shall have minimum inside dimensions of 16 ft high by 15 ft wide by 35 ft long with no interior columns. Door opening and wall penetrations shall be as show on drawings E-7 and V-4. A floor pad for the building is represented on Drawing S-16. Foundation and anchor bolt requirements shall be installed as recommended by the building manufacturer. C. This specification shall be followed to install a pre-engineered cover over the stair opening in the roof of the lift station. See Drawing S-19 1.02 RELATED WORK: A. Div 3 - Concrete 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submittals shall be according to Section 01330 - Submittals. ' B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit calculations and complete erection drawings showing anchor bolt settings, sidewall, end wall, and roof framing, transverse cross sections, ' covering and trim details, flashing details, and accessory installation details to clearly indicate proper assembly and installation coordination of building components. Include steel framing members and details as well as all steel ' bracing required to meet applicable codes. 2. Submit drawings showing developed loads on major structural elements, including bracing and anchorages, and the methods of transferring developed ' loads to the concrete structural elements. 3. All drawings shall bear the stamp of a registered professional engineer in the State of Arkansas. C. Samples 1. Submit samples of the following. Engineer's review will be for color, configuration, quality and texture. Compliance with other requirements is ' responsibility of the Contractor. a. 12 -inch long by actual width of wall panels, roofing, fascia and soffit panels, with required finishes. ' b. Fasteners for application of wall panels, roofing, fascia and soffit panels. c. Sealants and closures. ID. Certification. Submit written certification prepared and signed by a Professional Engineer, registered to practice in the State where building is to be erected, verifying 13121 -Pre -Engineered Metal Buildings 13121- 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 13121 - PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS (continued that building design meets indicated loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Design Criteria 1. Structural Framing. Design primary and secondary structural members and exterior covering materials for applicable loads and combinations of loads in accordance with the current edition Metal Building Manufacturer's Association's (MBMA) "Design Practices Manual". 2. Structural Steel. For the design of structural steel members, comply with the requirements of the current edition American Institute of Steel Construction's (AISC) "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" for design requirements and allowable stresses. 3. Light Gauge Steel. For the design of light gauge steel members, comply with the requirements of the current edition American Iron and Steel Institute's (AISI) "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members" and "Design of Light Gauge Steel Diaphragms" for design requirements and allowable stresses. 4. For welded connections, comply with current edition American Welding Society's (AWS) "Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" for welding procedures. B. Design Loads Basic design loads, as well as auxiliary and collateral loads, shall be as follows: Snow Load = 20 psf Wind Load = 100 mph Seismic Zone = I 1. Basic design loads include, in addition to dead load, live load, wind load and seismic load. 2. Auxiliary loads include dynamic live loads such as those generated by cranes and materials handling equipment. 3. Collateral loads include additional dead loads over and above the weight of the metal building system such as conduits and mechanical systems. a. Design each•member to withstand stresses resulting from combinations of loads the produce the maximum allowable stresses in that member as prescribed in MBMA "Design Practices Manual". C. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Material and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly employed in the manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least ten (10) consecutive years and which can show evidence of those materials being satisfactorily used on at least six (6) projects of similar size, scope and location. At least three (3) of the projects shall have been in successful use for ten (10) years or longer. 1.05 WARRANTY: A. See Section 01785 - Warranties. 13121 Pre -Engineered Metal Buildings 13121-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 13121 - PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS (continued 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING` ' A. Deliver and store prefabricated components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so they will not be damaged or deformed. ' B. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight ventilated covering. Store metal sheets or panels so that water accumulations will drain freely. Do not store sheets or panels in contact with other ' materials which might cause staining. PART 2 -PRODUCTS •' .2,01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES: A. Heritage Building Systems, North Little Rock, Arkansas I. B. Innovative Building Solutions, LLC, Glenshaw, PA 15116 2.02 MATERIALS: IA. Hot -Rolled Structural Shapes: Comply with the requirements of ASTM A36 or A529. ' B. Tubing or Pipe: Comply with the requirement of ASTM A500 -Grade B, A501, or A53. C. Members Fabricated from Plate of Bar Stock: Provide 42,000 psi minimum yield ' strength. Comply with the requirements of ASTM A529, A570, or A572. D. Members Fabricated by Cold Forming: Comply with the requirements of ASTM A607, Grade 50. ' E. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Comply with the requirements of ASTM A446 with G90 coating. Class to suit building manufacturer's standards. IF. Wind Bracing: Provide adjustable threaded steel rods, 1/2 -inch diameter minimum, ASTM A36 or A572, Grade D. G. Bolts: ASTM A307 or A325 as necessary for design loads and connection details. ' Shop painted, except provide zinc or cadmium -plated units when in direct contact with panels. ' H. Roofing and Fascia: Pre -finished roll -formed versatile standing seam roof (VSR) interlocking panels with 2 -inch high longitudinal corrugations at 20 -inches on -center and minor stiffening corrugations in the transverse direction. Roof panel deflection ' shall not exceed 1/180 of its span when supporting the applicable vertical live loads listed above. 1. Zinc -coated steel sheets shall be structural quality hot -dip galvanized steel sheets, complying with the requirements of ASTM A446, Grade C, with G90 coating conforming to ASTM A525. 2. Metal thickness not less than 26 -gauge hot -dipped galvanized steel (50,000 psi yield). 3. Provide flashings, closers, fillers, metal expansion joints, ridge covers, and other sheet metal formed of the same metal or metal compatible with the roofing. Paint finish shall match the roofing. 1 13121 Pre -Engineered Metal Buildings 13121-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 13121 - PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS (continued 4. Panel Fasteners. Galvanized and stainless -steel clip assembly designed to bolt to structural members and interlock with MR -24 panel seams for concealed connection allowing thermal movement of the roof panels. 5. Roof/fascia shall carry UL wind uplift classification Class 90 rating. 6. Finish. Provide shop -applied fluoropolymer finish to galvanized steel roofing, fascia, trim and accessories. a. Clean galvanized steel with alkaline compound, then treat with a zinc phosphate conversion coating, and seal with a chromic acid rinse. b. Apply a 2 -coat fluoropolymer coating system to retreated steel. Coating shall consist of a primer applied to a dry film thickness of 0.15 mil to 0.25 mil, and a finish coat of polyvinyl fluoride or polyvinylidene fluoride applied to a dry film thickness of 0.80 mils to 1.3 mils. c. Colors as selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standards. d. Interior finish (not exposed to weather) shall be manufacturer's standard polyester paint finish. 1. Wall Panels 1. Metal thickness not less than 24 -gauge hot -dipped galvanized steel (50,000 psi yield) 2. Side seams shall be interlocking or concealed. Lap seams are not acceptable. Fasteners shall be galvanized or stainless -steel clips, screws, or bolts and shall be concealed. 3. a. Clean galvanized steel with alkaline compound, then treat with a zinc phosphate conversion coating, and seal with a chromic acid rinse. b. Apply a 2 -coat fluoropolymer coating system to retreated steel. Coating all consist of a primer applied to a dry film thickness of 0.15 mil to 0.25 mil, and a finish coat of polyvinyl fluoride or polyvinylidene fluoride applied to a dry film thickness of 0.80 mils to 1.3 mils. c. Colors as selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standards. J. Roof Insulation and Interior Finish: Providing an overall heat transfer (U) value of not more than 0.033, the insulation systems shall be applied under the metal roofing panels. The insulation of required thickness and density shall be placed in the roof cavity between the purlins and supported by a sloped, unpierced or pierced ceiling of noncombustible material. Other systems incorporating vinyl or aluminum foil faced, rigid insulation boards suspended from clips applied to bottom faces of purlins shall also be acceptable. The vapor membrane shall always be placed nearest the interior of the building, whether it be exposed or unexposed. All joints shall be lapped or folded and stapled in accordance with building manufacturer's standard. Exposed insulation shall have a white vinyl finish. 1. Except at each concealed structural fastener, a thermal (break) spacer shall separate the roof purlin from the roof panel. The spacer shall be of material having a density of not less than 2 pcf and, if of a combustible material, shall be classified (ASTM E84) as having a flame spread rating no greater than 25. 2. Noncombustible roof insulation shall be flexible fiberglass blankets with a vapor resistant membrane. The vapor resistant membrane may be laminated to the insulation as a composite unit or added as a separate component of the insulation system. The insulation and vapor membrane, if supplied as a 13121 Pre -Engineered Metal Buildings 13121-4 RJN Project Na. 11-1875-00 SECTION 13121 - PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS (continued laminated composite unit, shall carry an Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (U.L. Label) fire hazard classification indicating a flame spread rating of 25 or less, as a tested assembly. If supplied as separate components, each (tested separately) shall carry the previously specified fire hazard classification. K. Wall Insulation: The wall insulation shall be batts, blanets and/or rigid material of required thickness and density to provide an overall heat transfer (U) value not exceeding 0.05. Where no interior wall finish is indicated on the drawings, the exposed insulation, if any, shall be faced with a white vinyl vapor barrier, placed towards and nearest the interior of the building. Wall insulation need not be faced with a vapor barrier if the interior finish material is of steel or aluminum. L. Windows. None required. M. Accessories •I. Interior (Liner) Panel. Provide building manufacturer's standard ribbed profile liner panel of not less than 24 gauge galvanized steel. a. Finish liner panel with building manufacturer's standard interior polyester paint finish. b. Provide perforated liner panel at locations indicated with panel profile to match non -perforated panels adjacent. Perforate to provide manufacturer's standard ventilation holes but of not over 3/16 -inch diameter perforations or less than 15 square inches of ventilation area per square foot of sheet area. 2. Fascia/Soffit System. Provide Widespan Fascia system to provide eave projection indicated. Finish fascia with VSR roof panel system as indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard metal pan soffit closure complete with flashings. Perforate soffit pans where indicated to provide ventilation openings as specified for liner panels. Perforation shall be similar to perforated liner panel. 3. Gutters and Downspouts. Galvanized steel shaped to manufacturer's standard design, gauge and size for the area of roof to be drained, and the anticipated precipitation at the site. Gutters shall be watertight. Locate • downspouts at building comers. Provide a 12 -inch x 36 -inch precast concrete splashblock at each downspout outlet. 4. . Flexible Closure Strips. Closed -cell, expanded cellular rubber, self- • extinguishing, cut or premolded to match corrugation configuration of roofing and siding sheets. 5. Sealing Tape. 100 percent solids, pressure sensitive grey polyisobutylene compound tape with release paper backing. Not less than 1/2 -inch wide and 1/8 -inch thick, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining and permanently elastic. • 6. Joint Sealant. As recommended by building manufacturer. 7. Sheet Panel Fasteners. Manufacturer's standard system of self -tapping screws, bolts, and nuts, self locking rivets, self-locking bolts, end welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide metal backed neoprene washers under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of panels. 13121 Pre -Engineered Metal Buildings 13121-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 13121 - PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS (continued ' 8. Personnel Doors a. Exterior Doors. Heavy duty, 1-3/4 inch hollow metal, constructed according to HMMA 861 and SDI 100. Doors shall be flush panel with 18 -gauge face sheets, chemically treated for paint adhesion. The core shall consist of a solid insulating material of either polystyrene of polyurethane foam with an "R" value of not less than 7. All door leaves, frames, astragals and louvers shall be manufactured from zinc -coated steel. The door leaves, frames, and louvers shall be given a shop applied, baked -on prime coat of paint. Two finish coats of paint shall be field applied. b. Hardware. Provide heavy-duty, rust -resistant hardware, with galvanized, cadmium -plated or stainless -steel fasteners. Each door shall have a keyed lock, equipped with panic hardware for emergency exit. c. Each door shall be equipped with an overhead door closer. d. Reinforcement. Factory prepare and reinforce exterior doors for hardware. Provide reinforcement, stops, and glazing for lights where shown. Glazing shall be tempered glass in accordance with Uniform Building Code requirements. (1) All door sizes, swing and hand shall be as shown on the drawings. (2) Weatherstripping shall be applied at the top and sides of all doors. Provide weatherstripped sills that meet UFAS requirements at bottom of all exterior doors. 2.03 BUILDING FABRICATION: A. Fabrication. Shop fabricate to the indicated size and section, complete with base plates, bearing plates, and other plates as required for erection, welded in place. Provide all required holes for anchoring or connections shop drilled or punched to template dimensions. I . Shop connections power riveted, bolted or welded. 2. Field connections bolted. B. Rigid Frames. Fabricate from hot -rolled structural steel. Provide factory -welded and shop painted built-up ]-shape or open rigid frame consisting of tapered or parallel flange beams and tapered columns. Furnish complete with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill frames for bolted field assembly. Provide length of span and spacing of frames as indicated except slight variations acceptable to meet manufacturer's standard. C. End Wall Columns. Provide factory -welded, built-up ]-shape, cold -formed sections, or C sections, shop painted. D. Secondary Framing. Purlins, cave struts, end wall beams, flange and sag bracing; ' minimum 16 gauge rolled formed sections. Shop painted. Base channel, sill angle, end wall structural members (except columns and galvanized beams), purlin spacers; minimum 14 -gauge cold -formed steel. E. Shop Painting. Clean surfaces to be primed of loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil, grease, and other matter precluding paint bond. 1 13121 Pre -Engineered Metal Buildings 13121- 6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 U ' SECTION 13121- PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS (continued 1. Prime structural steel primary and secondary framing members with manufacturer's standard rust -inhibitive primer. 2. Prime galvanized members, after phosphoric acid pretreatment, with zinc - dust zinc -oxide primer. ' :PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01ERECTION: IA. Framing: Erect structural framing true to line, level and plumb, rigid and secure. Level base plates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double -nutted anchor bolts. Use a nonshrinking grout to obtain uniform bearing ' and to maintain a level base line elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than 7 days after placement. B. Purlins and Girls: Provide rake or hip purlins with tight fitting closure channels and ' fascias. Locate and space wall girts to suit door and window arrangements and heights. Secure purlins and girts to structural framing and hold rigidly to a straight line by sag rods. ' C. Bracing: Provide diagonal rod or angle bracing in both roof and sidewalls as indicated or required. I1. Movement resisting frames may be used in lieu of sidewall rod bracing, to suit manufacturer's standards. 2. Where diaphragm strength of roof or wall covering is adequate to resist wind 'forces, rod or other forms of bracing will not be required. I. D. Framed Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce opening and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under ' mechanical or electrical work. Securely attach to building structural frame. 3.02 ROOFING AND FASCIA: IA. General. Arrange and nest sidelap joints so that prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid panel creep or ' application not true to line. Protect factory finishes from damage. Provide weather seal under ridge cap. Flash and seal roof panels at eave and rake with rubber, neoprene or other closures to exclude weather. ' B. Standing Seam Roof Panel System. Fasten roof panels to purlins with manufacturer's standard concealed clip in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. I1. Install clips at each support using self -drilling fasteners. 2. At end laps of panels install tape caulk between panels. 3. Install factory -caulked cleats at standing seam joints. Machine seam cleats to the panels to provide a weathertight joint. ' C. Sheet Metal Accessories. Install gutters, soffits, louvers, and other sheet metal accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for positive I. anchorage to building and weathertight mounting. Adjust operating mechanism for precise operation. 13121 Pre -Engineered Metal Buildings 13121-7 RJN Project No. I I-1875-00 ii SECTION 13121 - PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS (continued ' D. Overhead Doors. Set doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold stops, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Adjust moving hardware for proper operation. 3.03 TOUCH-UP FINISH: ' Finishes damaged during construction shall be replaced or prepared using methods and materials recommended by Building Component Manufacturer. ' END OF SECTION 13121 II II II 11 II 13121 Pre -Engineered Metal Buildings 13121-8 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 ACORDN, INSURANCE BINDER DATE o7/n/loos THIS BINDER IS A TEMPORARY INSURANCE CONTRACT, SUBJECT TO THE CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE REVERSE SIDE OF THIS FORM. PRODUCER PHONE (205)879-1945 COMPANY BINDERS A/C Nc FAX St. Paul/Travelers TBD No Hines, Ridolphi & Associates, Inc. EFFECTIVE EXPIRATION Suzi Philpot DATE M To be T TIME PO Box 531310 X AM To be 1201 AM •Determined 12:01 PM Determined NOON Birmi ngham, AL 35253 THIS BINDER'S ISSUED TO EXTEND COVERAGE IN THE ABOVE NAMED COMPANY CODE: SUB CODE:I PER EXPIRING POLICY N: AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSNEHICLES/PROPERTY (Including Location) INSURED Hamstring Lift Station, Fayetteville, AR. City Of Fayetteville, Arkansas 113 West Mountain Street Fayetteville, AR 72701 TYPE OF INSURANCE COVERAGE/FORMS DEDUCTIBLE LIIYII COINS % 10 AMOUNT PROPERTY CAUSES OF LOSS BASIC BROAD SPEC GENERAL UABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE OCCUR 0CP Contract Amount - $6,130,000. Contractor - Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE: EACH OCCURRENCE s7,000,000 DAMAGETORENTED PREMISES $ MED EXP (Any one Person) S X PERSONAL& ADV INJURY $ GENERAL AGGREGATE $7,000,000 PRODUCTS- COMP/OP AGG $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS COMBINED SINGLE UMIT $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per acddant) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE $ MEDICAL PAYMENTS $ PERSONAL INJURY PROT $ UNINSURED MOTORIST $ E AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE DEDUCTIBLE COLLISION: OTHER THAN COL: ALL VEHICLES SCHEDULED VEHICLES ACTUAL CASH VALUE $ STATED AMOUNT OTHER GARAGE LIABILITY ANY AUTO AUTO ONLY- EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: EACH ACCIDENT AGGREGATE $ EXCESS LIABILITY UMBRELLA FORM OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE: EACH OCCURRENCE $ AGGREGATE $ SELF -INSURED RETENTION $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY WC STATUTORY LIMITS E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ E.L. DISEASE- EA EMPLOYEE $ E.L. DISEASE - POUCY LIMIT $ SPECIAL CONDITIONS! OTHER COVERAGES FEES $ TAXES $ ESTIMATED TOTAL PREMIUM $ NAME & ADDRESS MORTGAGEE ADDITIONAL INSURED X LOSS PAYEE Named Insureds RJN Group, Inc. LOAN# 26 E. Meadow, Suite 8 Fayetteville AR T2701- AUTHORIZE REPRESENTA ACORD 75 (2001/01) NOTE: IMPORTANT STATE INFORMATIO8 ON REVERSE BIDE ® ACORD CORPORATION 1993 CONDITIONS This Company binds the kind(s) of insurance stipulated on the reverse side. The Insurance is subject to the terms, conditions and limitations of the policy(ies) in current use by the Company. This binder may be cancelled by the Insured by surrender of this binder or by written notice to the Company stating when cancellation will be effective. This binder may be cancelled by the Company by notice to the Insured in accordance with the policy conditions. This binder is cancelled when replaced by a policy. If this binder is not replaced by a policy, the Company is entitled to charge a premium for the binder according to the Rules and Rates in use by the Company. Applicable In California When this form is used to provide insurance in the amount of one million dollars ($1,000,000) or more, the title of the form is changed from "Insurance Binder" to "Cover Note". Applicable in Delaware The mortgagee or Obligee of any mortgage or other instrument given for the purpose of creating a lien on real property shall accept as evidence of insurance a written binder issued by an authorized insurer or its agent if the binder includes or is accompanied by: the name and address of the borrower; the name and address of the lender as loss payee; a description of the insured real property; a provision that the binder may not be canceled within the term of the binder unless the lender and the insured borrower receive written notice of the cancel- lation at least ten (10) days prior to the cancellation; except in the case of a renewal of a policy subsequent to the closing of the loan, a paid receipt of the full amount of the applicable premium, and the amount of insurance coverage. Chapter 21 Title 25 Paragraph 2119 Applicable in Florida Except for Auto Insurance coverage, no notice of cancellation or nonrenewal of a binder is required unless the duration of the binder exceeds 60 days. For auto insurance, the insurer must give 5 days prior notice, unless the binder is replaced by a policy or another binder in the same company. Applicable in Nevada Any person who refuses to accept a binder which provides coverage of less than $1,000,000.00 when proof is required: (A) Shall be fined not more than $500.00, and (B) is liable to the party presenting the binder as proof of insurance for actual damages sustained therefrom. ACORDW CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE D7/17//DD/YYYY) 7/17/loos PRODUCER (205)879-1945 Hines, Ridolphi & Associates, Inc. Suz i Phil pot PO Box 531310 Birmingham, AL 35253 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAICI INSURED Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC P.O. Box 10383 Birmingham, AL 35201-0383 INSURER A:Travelers Property Casualty Co. INSURER R: Charter Oak Fire INSURERc:Great American Insurance Company INSURER o:Westchester Fire Insurance Company INSURER E: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR DDL NSR E OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE WDD/YV POLICY EXPIRATION DATE MMA)O/VY LIMITS A GENERAL LIABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERALLIABI TV CLAIMS MADE I X OCCUR CO 78528663 07/01/2006 07/01/2007 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 X PREMISES Eno urence $50,000 MED EXP (My one person) $5,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE s2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY X PRO- D C OC PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGO s2,000,000 A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS CAP 5449B876 07/01/2006 07/01/2007 (Eaaccdent) EOSINGLELIMIT 51,000,000 X BODILY INJURY (Per Person) E X BODILY owdern) (Peroxidenp $ X PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ GARAGE LIABILITY ANY AUTO AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC AUTO ONLY: AGO $ $ D EXCESSNMBRELLALIABILITY OCCUR CLAIMSMADE DEDUCTIBLE RETENTION $ G22053231001 07/01/2006 07/01/2007 EACH OCCURRENCE $5,000,000 X AGGREGATE $5,000,000 $ $ g WORKERS COMPENSATION AND X I WCSTATU- 0TH - B EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY UM 70058775 07/01/2006 07/01/2007 E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $1 ,000,000 PRO TOROR/rPARTNEP/EXEGUnVE ANY PROPRIEIE E.L DISEASE- EA EMPLOYEE E 1 ODD 000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? No It yes, describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $1 000 000 OTHER PROJECT LIMIT $6,130,000 BUILDER'S RISK C COMPLETED VALUE FORM IMP 704-23-53 08/01/2005 08/01/2006 W/$5,000 DEPT. DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS! LOCATIONS/VEHICLES 'EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT! SPECIAL PROVISIONS w/$25,000 Dedt. Owner, Engineer & Engineer's Consultants, respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents & other consultants & subcontractors of each are Add'I Insureds on General Liability, Excess Liability & Builder's Risk for the Hamestring Lift Station, Fayetteville, AR. General Liability poi Icy is primary. Rights of Subrogation are waived against the Additional Insureds. Blanket Add'] Insured End applies. Builder's Risk includes Boiler & Machinery CERTIFICATE HOLDER CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE WASTE & WASTEWATER DEPT 113 WEST MOUNTAIN STREET FAYETTEVILLE AR 72701 - SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL T V MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, y�A7Fa�LL OR IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25 (2001/08) AAACO. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) 7/n/loos PRODUCER (205)879-1945 Hines, Ridolphi & Associates, Inc. Suzi Phil pot PO Box 531310 Birmingham, AL 35253 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC P.O. Box 10383 Birmingham, AL 35201-0383 INSURERA:Travelers Property Casualty Co. INSURERB:Charter Oak Fire INSURERc:Great American Insurance Company INSURERD:Westchester Fire Insurance Company INSURER E: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAYBE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR DDL NSR OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER T POLICY EFFECVE ATE M)DD/Y POLICY EXPIRATION DATE WOD/YY LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 X DAFMGETO RENTED PREMISES Eaoccurence $50,000 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE F OCCUR CO 76528663 07/01/2006 07/01/2007 MEDEXP(Myoneperson) $5,000 A PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE s2,000,000 GENL AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS. COMP/OP AGG s2,000,000 POLICY X j�7 LOC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO CAP 5449B876 07/01/2006 07/01/2007 COMBINED SINGLE OMIT (Eaaoddon1) 51,000,000 X A ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ X X HIRED AUTOS NON .OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY -EA ACCIDENT $ ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $ $ AUTO ONLY: AGG EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $5 • 000,000 AGGREGATE s5,000,000 X OCCUR CLAIMS MADE 622053231001 07/01/2006 07/01/2007 D $ DEDUCTIBLE $ RETENTION $ $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND X I WCt STATU- I TORY UMITS I 0TH - E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $1 000 • 000 B EMPLOYERSLIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? No UM 7005B775 07/01/2006 07/01/2007 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $1 ,000 000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY OMIT S1 000 000 lives, describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below OTHER PROJECT LIMIT $6,130,000 C BUILDER'S RISK COMPLETED VALUE FORM ALL RISK IMP 704-23-53 0 _ 8/01/2006 OB/O1/2007 W/$5,000 DEDT. FLOOD & QUAKE $6.130.000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS! LOCATIONS / VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS w/$25,000 Dedt. Owner, Engineer & Engineer's Consultants, respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents & other consultants & subcontractors of each are Add'I Insureds on General Liability, Excess Liability & Builder's Risk for the Hamestring Lift Station, Fayetteville, AR. General Liability poilcy is primary. Rights of Subrogation are waived against the Additional Insureds. Blanket Add'I Insured End applies. Builder's Risk includes Boiler & Machinery CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE WASTE & WASTEWATER DEPT 113 WEST MOUNTAIN STREET FAYETTEVILLE AR 72T01 - SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL I D YXT) MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, �LL NTS OR IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. AGOHU 25(2091/05) COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED (CONTRACTORS) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART 1. WHO IS AN INSURED - (Section II) is amended to include any person or organization that you agree in a "written contract requiring insurance" to include as an additional insured on this Coverage Part, but: a) Only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property damage' or "personal injury"; and b) If. and only to the extent that, the injury or damage is caused by ads or omissions of you or your subcontractor in the performance of your work' to which the 'written contract requiring insurance' applies. The person or organization does not qualify as an additional insured with respect to the independent acts or omissions of such person or organization. 2. The insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is limited as follows: a) The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal injury' arising out of the rendering of, or failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering or surveying services, including: I. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders of change orders, or the preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, drawings and specifications; and Ii. Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. b) The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" caused by "your work" and included in the "products -completed operations hazard" unless the "written contract requiring insurance" specifically requires you to provide such coverage for that additional insured, and then the insurance provided to the additional insured applies only to such "bodily injury" or "property damage' that occurs before the end of the period of time for which the "written contract requiring insurance" requires you to provide such coverage or the end of the policy period, whichever is earlier. 3. The insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is excess over any valid and collectible "other insurance", whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, that is available to the additional insured for a loss we cover under this endorsement. However, if the "written contract requiring insurance' specifically requires that this insurance apply on a primary basis or a primary and non-contributory basis, this insurance is primary to "other insurance' available to the additional insured which covers that person or organization as a named insured for such loss, and we will not share with that "other insurance". But the insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement still is excess over any valid and collectible "other insurance", whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, that is available to the additional insured when that person or organization is an additional insured under such "other insurance". 4. As a condition of coverage provided to the additional insured by this endorsement: a) The additional insured must give us written notice as soon as practicable of an "occurrence" or an offense which may result in a claim. To the extent possible, such notice should include: i. How, when and where the occurrence" or offense took place; ii. The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses; and Iii. The nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the "occurrence" or offense. b) If a claim is made or "suit" is brought against the additional insured, the additional insured must: I. Immediately record the specifics of the claim or "suit" and the date received; and Ii. Notify us as soon as practicable. The additional insured must see to it that we receive written notice of the claim or "suit" as soon as practicable. T 1 CG D2 46 08 05 Copyright, The Travelers Indemnity Company, 2002 Pagel of 2 s ., COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY c) The additional insured must immediately send us copies of all legal papers received in connection with the claim or "suit", cooperate with us in the investigation or settlement of the claim or defense against the "suit", and otherwise comply with all policy conditions. d) The additional insured must tender the defense and indemnity of any claim or "suit" to any provider of "other insurance which would cover the additional insured for a loss we cover under this endorsement. However, this condition does not affect whether the insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is primary to "other insurance" available to the additional insured which covers that person or organization as a named insured as described in paragraph 3. above. 5. The following definition is added to SECTION V. — DEFINITIONS: Written contract requiring insurance" means that part of any written contract or agreement under which you are required to include a person or organization as an additional insured on this Coverage Part, provided that the "bodily injury and "property damage' occurs and the "personal injury is caused by an offense committed: a. After the signing and execution of the contract or agreement by you; b. While that part of the contract or agreement is in effect; and c. Before the end of the policy period. CG D2 46 08 05 Copyright, The Travelers Indemnity Company, 2002 Page 2 of 2 1 ARKANSAS City of Fayetteville, Arkansas e Water and Wastewater Department David Jurgens, Director PROJECT MANUAL FOR PROJECT NO.WL-6 HAMESTRING LIFT STATION RLF PROJECT NUMBER CS -050808-03 FAYETTEVILLE WASTEWATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENT PROJECT Volume 2 of 2 May 2006 ENGINEER RJN Group, Inc. 26 E. Meadow, Suite 8 Fayetteville, AR 72701 RJN Project No. 18187500 [I]S7►1DI.I City of Fayetteville Waste and Wastewater Department 113 West Mountain Street Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701 PROJECT MANUAL Volume 2 of 2 Hameshing Lift Station Wastewater System Improvement Project Fayetteville, Arkansas Water and Wastewater Department Project No. WL-6 RLF Project No. CS -050808 -03 Engineer's Project No. 18187500 Engineer: RJN Group, Inc. 26 E. Meadow, Suite 8 Fayetteville, AR 72701 Telephone (479) 444-6119 Fax (479) 444-6119 (call first) 00001b -Project Tide Page 00001b - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Volume 2 of 2 ProjectNumber: WL-6 Contract Title: Hamestring Lift Station RLF Project Number: CS -050808-03 Volume 1 INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00100 BID SOLICITATION 00120 Invitation to Bid 00120-1 of 4 00140 Bidder's Qualification Statement 00140-1 of 4 00200 Instructions to Bidders 00200-1 of!! Property Descriptions 1 of 7 00400 BID FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS 00400 Bid Form 00400-1 of 8 00410 Bid Bond 00410-1 of 2 00430 List of Subcontractors 00430-1 of 1 00450 Equipment Questionnaire 00450-1 of! • Contractor's Act of Assurance Form RLF-52. I of 2 MBEIWBE Compliance Evaluation Form RLF-96 I of I 00500 AGREEMENT FORMS 00500 Agreement 00500-1 of 11 00550 Notice to Proceed 00550-I of 2 00600 BONDS AND CERTIFICATES. 00610 .. Performance Bond _ 00610-1 of 3 . 0061!. Labor and Material Payment Bond 00611-1 of 4 00700 CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents 00700 TOC-1 of 5 Contract General Conditions 00700=1 of 49 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Supplemental Conditions of Revolving Loan Fund RLF-53 1 of 15 Appendix A -Labor Standards Provisions Ap A -I of 8 Appendix B -Compliance Responsibility for Equal Employment Opportunity Ap B -I of 11 Prevailing Wage Determination 1 of 4 29 CFR Part 1926 SubpartP, OSHA Standards I of 55 [Ihl'ZIhi3(I]7Iy��J�y 00930 Request for Interpretation 00930-1 of 1 00931 Field Order 00931-1 of 1 00932 Request for Proposal 00932-1 of 1 00940 Change Order 00940-1 of 1 00945 Work Change Directive 00945-1 of 2 00010 Table of Contents 00010-1 DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS , 01110 Summary of Work 01110-1 of 3 01250 Contract Modification Procedures 01250-1 of 2 01290 Payment Procedures 01290-1 oft 01290.01 Application for Payment 01290.01-1of 01290.02 Schedule of Values 01290.02-1 of 1 01290.12 Certificate of Substantial Completion 01290.12-1 of 1 • . 01290.14 Contractor Affidavit for Final Payment 01290.14-1 of 2 01290.15 Subcontractor Affidavit for Final Payment 01290.15-1 of 1 01320 Project Meetings, Schedules & Reports 01320-1 of 4 01321 CPM Schedule 01321-1 of 8 01321.01 CPM Appendix A 01321.01-1 of I 01325 Construction Photos 01325-1 of 5 01330 Submittals 01330-1 of9 01330.01 Submittal Information Block 01330.01-1 of 1 01420 Definitions & Standards 01420-1 of 4 01520 Field Offices & Sheds 01520-1 of 2 01530. Barriers & Temperature Controls 01530-1 of 6 01560 TemporaryUtilities & Facilities 01560-1 of 7 01580 Project Identification & Signs 01580-1 of 2 01600 Equipment & Materials 01600-1 of 6 01631 Substitutions 016314 of 3 01631.01 Substitution Request Form 01631.01-1 of 2 01700 Training 01700-1 of 3 01750 Manufacturer's Field Services 01750-1 of 2 01780 Contract. Closeout 01780-1 of 6 01785 Warranties 01785-1 of 3 DIVISION 2- SHE CONSTRUCTION 02100 Site Preparation 02100-1 of 5 02161 . Excavation Safety 02161 -loll 02200 Excavation, Embankment, Backfill and Grading 02200-1 of 7 02221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting . - - 02221-1 of 6 02223 Explosives and Blasting 02223-1 of 6 02227 Aggregate Materials - 02227-1 of 2 02229. ,� ...Rock_Removal, . • •• 02229-1 of 2 02240 Dewatering 02240-1 of 2 02261 Site Restoration 02261=1 of 3 02270 Environmental Specifications 02270-1 of 16 02271 Geotextile Fabric 02271-1 of 2 02272 Riprap 02272-1 of 2 02451 Rock Anchors 02451-1 of 7 02535 Manhole Testing 02535-1 of 2 02601 Cast -in Place Manholes 02601-1 of3 02602 Pre -Cast Concrete Manholes 02602-1 of 4 02616 Polyethylene Encasement 02616-1 of 3 02622 Plastic Pipe and Fittings . 02622-1 of 4 02640 Valves & Accessories 02640-1 of 4 02665 Water Systems 02665-1 of 3 02730 Ductile Iron Pipe 02730-1 of 12 02751 Concrete Paving 02751-1 of 10 02752 Concrete Paving joints 02752-1 of 4 02753 Concrete Pavement Curing 02753-1 of 2 02771 Integral Curb 02771-1 of 3 02775 Concrete Sidewalks 02775-1 of 3 00010 Table of Contents 00010-2 02830 Chain Link Fences & Gates 02830-1 of 5 DIVISION 3- CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories 03100-1 of 5 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03200-1 of 5 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete 03300-1 of 12 03414 Precast Concrete Stairs 03414-1 of 5. 03600 Grout 03600-1 of 2 DIVISION 4- MASONRY Not Used • DIVISION 5- METALS 05511 Metal Stairs, Landings, Platforms, Catwalks, Ladders and Railings DIVISION 6- WOOD AND PLASTICS Not Used DIVISION 7- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07140 Fluid -Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing 07180 Traffic Coatings DIVISION 8- DOORS AND WINDOWS 08311 Access Hatches 08950 Skylight System DIVISION 9- FINISHES 09703 Wet -Well Concrete Lining 09900 Painting DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10520 Emergency Shower and Eye Wash 05511-1 of9 07140-1 of5 07180-1 of5 08311- 1 of2 08950-1 of 6 09703-1 of 10 09900- 1 of 6 10520-1 of 3 DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT 11349 FRP Ductwork and Accessories .. 11349-1 of 4 11357 CarbonAdsorber 11357-1 of7 11360 Grease Eliminator 11360-1 of 2 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Not Used DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13121 Pre -Engineered Metal Buildings DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not Used Volume 2 13121-1 of8 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 Wet Well / Dry Well Piping 15010-1 of 5 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15050-1 of 3 15071 Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls 15071-1 of 8 15080 Wastewater Pump Suction and Discharge Valves 15080-1 of 3 00010 Table of Contents 00010-3 J I 15081 Sump Pump Piping and Fittings 15081-1 of 1 ' 15082 Pump Discharge Check Valve Control System 15082-1 of 2 15085 Duct Insulation 15085-1 of 8 15183 Refrigerant Piping 15183-1 of 6 15430 Piping Specialties 15430-1 of 4 15445 Wastewater Pumps : 15445-1 of 7 15446 Sump Pumps 15446-1 of 4 15447. Pump Installation, Grouting, and Alignment 15447-1 of 10 15500 Odor Control Chemical Feed System 15500-1 of 7 15671 Air -Cooled Condensing Units 15671-1 of 4 15733 Outdoor Air Conditioners 15733-1 of 7 15734 Dehumidifier Units 15734-1 of 7 15767 Propeller Unit Heaters 15767-1 of 3 15815 Metal Ducts 15815-1 of 5 15820 Duct Accessories 15820-1 of 3 15837 Centrifugal Fans 15837-1 of 6 15855 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 15855-1 of 2 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-1 of 10 I DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16011 Short-Circuit/Coordination Study 16011-1 of 3 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16050-1 of 8 16060 Grounding and Bonding 16060-1 of 5 16080 Electrical Testing 16080-1 of 2 16117 Concrete -Encased Duct Banks 16117-1 of 4 16120 Conductors and Cables 16120-1 of 4 16130 Raceway and Boxes 16130-1. of 6 16140 Wiring Devices 16140-1 of 3 16429 Switchboards — Low Voltage (Group Mounted Feeders) 16429-1 of 15 16442 Panel Boards 16442-1 of 5 16461 Dry -Type Distribution Transformers (1,000 KVA and Below) 16461-1 of 4 16481 RVSS — Low -Voltage Starters 16481-1 of 5 16482 Motor Control Centers — Low Voltage 16482-1 of 8 16483 Variable Frequency Drives 16483-1 of 10 16511 Interior Lighting 16511-1 of 3 16800 General Requirements— Instrumentation and Controls 16800-1 of 7 16801 Instrumentation Identification & Tagging Methods 16801-1 of 2 16802 Measuring and Controlling Instruments 16802-1 of 6 16802 Instrument Dataand ISA Sheets 16802-1 of 12 16805 Cabinets, Control Panels and Enclosures 16805-1 of 4 16900 Programmable Logic Controller 16900-1 of 16 16900 PLC I/O List 16900-1 of 4 16901 Human -Machine Interface 16901-1 of 5 16905 Uninterruptible Power Supply System (UPS) 16905-1 of 5 Process Control Description I of 6 END OF DOCUMENT 00010 I 00010 Table of Contents 00010-4 SECTION 15010 - WET WELL / DRY WELL PIPING PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and install wet well and dry well process piping as shown on the Drawings and M-2 through M-5 and specified herein. Does not include sump pump piping. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: Section 15050. B. Piping furnished with equipment is included in the specific equipment item. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE/DUCTkLE IRON FITTINGS - WET WELL: 2.02 A. Pipe within wet wells shall be flanged pipe unless otherwise shown on the Plans. B. Ductile iron flanged pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA Specification A21.11, latest revision. Minimum class of ductile iron pipe to be used for flanging shall be Class 53. Linings and coatings shall be in accordance with ANSI A21.4. Flanges shall be ANSI B16.1, Class 125. C. Flange fittings shall be ductile iron Class 350 in accordance with ASTM A21.10 latest revision with ASA 125 flange drilling unless otherwise noted on the Plans. D. Pipe shall have an outside bituminous coating with an inner ceramic epoxy lining unless otherwise approved by Engineer in writing. E. Minimum pressure classes for ductile iron pipe shall be as follows, unless noted otherwise on the plans: 4" - 12" diameter: Pressure Class 350 14" - 24" diameter. Pressure Class 250 30" diameter and over: Pressure Class 200 All pipe shall be designed for the working pressures listed above and shall have an additional surge allowance of at least 100 psi. STEEL PIPE - DRY WELL: A. Contractor may use ductile iron pipe as specified for the wet well or may use steel pipe. All piping shall be API 5L -B, ASTM 106-B or ASTM A53 -B, SCH 20. B. Flange shall be ANSI B16-5 150 -pound flat faced or compatible with mating equipment. Fitting butt -weld, thickness not less than pipe size ASTM A234 -WPB. C. Pipe shall have an inner ceramic epoxy lining unless otherwise approved by Engineer in writing. 15010 -Wet Well/Dry Well Piping 15010-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15010 — WET WELL / DRY WELL PIPING (continued) 2.03 WALL PIPE AND SLEEVES: A. All wall pipe shall be furnished with cast or welded collar water stops in the positions shown on the Drawings. Welding of water stop collars on pipe shall be accomplished by the wall pipe manufacturer in their shop. All centrifugally cast wall pipe shall be ductile iron meeting the requirements of AWWA C151 for the pipe barrel, conforming to the pressure rating of the pipeline in which installed, and in no case be lighter than Class 53. All statically cast wall pipe shall be ductile iron meeting the requirements of AWWA Cl 10 for fittings. Mechanical joint end and cast -on flange end wall pipe shall conform to AWWA CI10 and threaded flange wall pipe shall conform to AWWA Cl 15. Wall pipe shall have the same pressure rating as connecting pipe. All wall pipe shall be cement -mortar lined per AWWA C104. The outside of wall pipes shall be left uncoated and shall be field primed for painting on the portion exposed, uncoated where embedded and field coated with standard bituminous coated where buried. 2.04 COUPLINGS AND ADAPTERS: A. Flexible couplings shall be of the sleeve type with a middle ring, two round -wedge shaped rubber gaskets at each end, two following rings together and compress the gasket against the pipe. Flexible couplings shall be steel with minimum wall thickness of the middle ring or sleeve installed on pipe being 5/16 -inch for pipe smaller than 10 inches, 3/8 -inch for pipe 10 inches or larger. The minimum length of the middle ring shall be 5 -inches for pipe sizes up to 10 inches and 7 inches for pipe 10 inches to 30 inches. The pipe stop shall be removed. Gaskets shall be suitable for 250 psi pressure rating or at rated working pressure of the connecting pipe. Couplings shall be harnessed and designed for 250 psi. B. Flanged adapters shall have one end suitable for bolting to a pipe flange and the other end of flexible coupling similar to that described hereinbefore. All pressure piping with couplings or adapters shall be harnessed with full threaded rods spanning across the couplings or adapters. The adapters shall be furnished with bolts of an approved corrosion resistant steel alloy, extending to the adjacent pipe flanges. Flanges on flanged adapter (unless otherwise indicated or required) shall be faced and drilled ANSI 816.1 Class 125. 2.05 FLANGED JOINTS: A. Flange bolts and nuts shall have hexagonal heads. All bolts, nuts and studs for flanged pipe in submerged locations shall be of 300 Series stainless steel. The flanges shall be drawn together until the joint is perfectly tight, with bolts of a length such that they will not project greater than'/< -inch from the nut nor fall short of the end of the nut when drawn up. No washers shall be used. Gaskets shall be carefully fabricated prior to installation and must be suitable for pressure rating for the pipe for which it is used. B. All flanges (unless otherwise indicated or required) shall be faced and drilled ANSI B16.1 125 -pound for ductile iron and ANSI 816.5 150 -pound for steel. C. At the Contractor's option, and at no additional expense to the Owner, the following patented SBR flange gaskets or approved equal may be substituted for standard sheet packing ring gaskets in ductile iron flanged pipe. TORUSEAL by American Cast Iron Pipe Company 15010 -Wet Well/Dry Well Piping 15010-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15010 — WET WELL /DRY WELL PIPING (continued) FLANGE-TYTE by United States Pipe & Foundry Company D. When using such gaskets, flange bolts shall be torqued to manufacturer's recommended torque values. 2.06 METAL PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS: A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all pipe hangers, inserts, brackets, plates, anchors, and other supports not specifically included under other items. Generally pipe supports are not shown on the Drawings, but shall be supplied as specified herein. However, any bracing or support details shown on the Drawings shall be followed. B. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, manufacturer's data sheets on all catalogued items to be used and sketches covering all specially designed hanger and support assemblies and fabrications. C. Supports and hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell, Elcen, or Fee & Mason, or fabricated by the Contractor or equal. Field fabricated supports may be used only for special conditions where manufactured items may not be suitable. In such cases, details of proposed supports shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. All such supports shall be galvanized. D. Except as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, supports and hangers shall be as follows: 1. Pipes with centerlines less than 24 -inches from a wall shall be supported by a typical wall support bracket. Pipes with centerlines less than 6 feet above a floor shall be supported from below. All other pipes shall be hung from above. Piping shall be supported at no greater than 10 feet 0 inches on centers. 2. Pipe supported from underneath shall have adjustable pipe saddle supports on properly sized pipe stanchions. The saddle assembly shall be of cast iron Standard pipe stanchions with hold-down "U" bolts shall be Grinnel Fig. 259, Elcen Fig. 49, Fee & Mason Fig. 2595, or equal. 3. Hangers are to be suspended from concrete work. Hangers shall be supported from approved metal inserts placed in concrete before the concrete is placed. Standard concrete inserts shall be Grinnell Fig. 281 or 282, Elcen Fig. 86 or 65, Fee & Mason Fig. 186 or 2570, or equal. If special support from overhead concrete is necessary due to unusually heavy loads, support shall be as detailed on the Drawings. In no case shall standard concrete inserts be used where pipe load exceeds the manufacturer's recommended load for the insert, or where the hanger rod exceeds 7/8" diameter. 4. All pipe hangers, inserts, clamps, supports and other like items shall be submitted for review by the Engineer prior to installation. 5. All inside horizontal flanged piping shall be supported with approved split ring type adjustable hangers of malleable iron with suitable hanger rods unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. Special supports shall be constructed in accordance with details shown on the Drawings. Wall supports and/or hangers shall be placed not over 10 feet apart. All piping shall be rigidly supported to prevent loosening under vibration. 6. Pipe, valve operating stems, fixtures and conduits shall be bracketed or suspended from walls, ceilings, and beams at or near valves and fittings and where needed for firm support, by standard brackets, rods, turnbuckles, and 15010 -Wet Well/Dry Well Piping 15010-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15010 — WET WELL / DRY WELL PIPING (continued) - ' ring made especially for pipe of sizes supported. Perforated strap iron and/or copper will not be acceptable. 7. Clevis hangers for "iron pipe size" O.D. pipe shall be Grinnell Figure 65, Elcen Figure 12, Fee & Mason Figure 239, or equal. Clevis hangers for Cast Iron O.D. pipe shall be Grinnell Figure 260, Elcen Figure 12C, Fee & Mason Figure 104, or equal. All Clevis hangers shall be galvanized. 8. Turnbuckles shall be forged steel. Rods shall be of black steel, machine threaded of following sizes: Pipe Size Rod Diameter %2" - 2" I/O" 2'A" - 3" 4" - 8"- 12" 7/8" 14"-16" 1" 18" 11/8" 20" - 24" 1 '/." ' 9. Brackets shall be of standard castings of fabricated steel and shall be reviewed by the Engineer. Standard catalogued bracket shall be medium duty Grinnell Fig. 195, Elcen Fig. 57, Fee & Mason Fig. 151, or equal, galvanized, size as noted on Drawings. Provide light or,heavy duty brackets if specifically noted on Drawings. "U" bolts shall be Grinnell Fig. 137, Elcen Fig. 68 or 68A, Fee & Mason Fig. 176, or equal. 10. Column type pipe supports shall consist of pipe columns of size required to carry the full pipe and standard cast iron bases and saddles as required. Saddles shall. be of proper size to fit the pipe being supported. ' PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: I A. Materials shall be new and of the best grade and quality; workmanship shall be first class in every respect. B. Each piece of pipe and each fitting shall be plainly marked at the foundry with class number and weight. ' C. All pipe couplings shall be designed to safely withstand the operating pressure of the lines in which they are installed. D. Taps and connections to piping shall be made as required to connect equipment, sample ' lines, etc., and where otherwise shown on the Drawings. E. Piping shall be installed straight and true, parallel or perpendicular to walls, with approved offsets around obstructions. Standard pipe fittings shall be used for changing direction of piping. No mitered joints or field fabricated pipe bends are permitted unless accepted by the Engineer. ' F. All piping, fittings, valves and other accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, chips and foreign matter before joint connections are made. 15010 -Wet Well/Dry Well Piping 15010-4 PJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15010 — WET WELL /-DRY WELL PIPING (continued) G. Teflon tape shall be used on all plastic pipe threaded connections. H. All pipe threads shall conform to ANSI B2. 1. I. Piping shall be erected to provide for expansion and contraction. J. Screwed or soldered unions shall be provided in all small piping as required to permit convenient removal of equipment, valves and piping accessories from the piping system. K. Dielectric insulating couplings or brass adapters shall be used whenever the adjoining materials being connected are of dissimilar material such as connections between copper tubing and steel pipe. END OF SECTION 15010 15010 -Wet Well/Dry Well Piping 15010-S RUN Project No. 11-1875-00 J I II SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL: A. Submittals: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. 1. Samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification material and device. 2. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment. B. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." C. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping." D. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes involved and that certification is current. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS: IA. Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods. Comply with ASME B 1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings. ' B. Joining Materials: Refer to individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 for special joining materials not listed below. 1. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for the chemical and thermal ' conditions of the piping system contents a. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness, except where thickness or specific material is indicated ' (1) Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125 cast-iron and cast - bronze flanges (2) Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250 cast-iron and steel flanges ' b. ASME B16.20 for grooved, ring joint, steel flanges C. AWWA Cl 10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 -inch thick, except where other thickness is indicated and full -face or ring type, except where type is '• indicated 2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, except where other material is indicated ' 3. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B32, alloys to suit system requirements 4. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, alloys to suit system requirements 5. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials ' appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 6. Flanged, Ductile -Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber ' gasket, carbon steel bolts and nuts 7. Couplings: Iron body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of plain -end pressure pipes 15050 -Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods 15050 -1 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (continued) ' a. Sleeve: ASTM A126, Class B, gray iron b. Followers: ASTM A47, (ASTM A47M), Grade 32510 or ASTM A536 ductile iron c. Gaskets: Rubber d. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111 e. Finish: Enamel paint C. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. D. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular, watertight, mechanical type. Components include interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Connecting bolts and pressure plates cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened. E. Steel Sheet -Metal Sleeves: 24 -gauge or heavier galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint F. Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B, premixed and factory -packaged, 5000 psi, 28 -day compressive strength, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXECUTION: ' A. Piping Systems: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise. Individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 specify piping installation requirements unique to the piping system. 1. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. ' Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. 2. Install piping at indicated slope. 3. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. 4. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service areas. 5. Install piping free of sags and bends. 6. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, except where indicated. 7. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. 8. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 9. Install couplings according to manufacturer's printed instructions. 10. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, concrete floor and roof slabs, and where indicated. 11. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. 12. Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified below. 1 15050 -Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods 15050 -2 RN Project No 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (continued) a. Install unions in piping 2 inches and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having 2 inches or smaller threaded pipe connection. b. Install flanges in piping 2'/z inches and larger adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection. c. Dry Piping Systems (Gas, Compressed Air, and Vacuum): Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. d. Wet Piping Systems (Water and Steam): Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. I 1 1 1 I B. Equipment Installation: Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights are not indicated. 1. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Engineer. 2. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, except where otherwise indicated. 3. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or -replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. 4. Install equipment giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope. C. Painting and Finishing: Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting requirements. 1. Damage and Touch -Up: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. D. Erection of Metal Supports and Anchorage: Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS DI.I "Structural Welding Code -Steel." END OF SECTION 15050 15050 -Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods 15050 - 3 RJN Project No 11-1875-00 SECTION 15071 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS ' PARTI- GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and ' Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 SUMMARY: IA. This Section includes the following: 1. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 2. Restrained spring isolators. ' 3. Housed spring mounts. 4. Elastomeric hangers. 5. Thrust limits. ' 6. Resilient pipe guides. 7. Freestanding and restrained air spring isolators. 8. Restrained vibration isolation roof -curb rails. ' 9. Seismic snubbers. 10. Restraining cables. 11. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases. ' 1.03 DEFINITIONS: A. Av: Effective peak velocity related acceleration coefficient. B. Cc: Component or System Seismic Coefficient. C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development for the State of California. OSHPD assigns a unique anchorage preapproval "R" number to each ' seismic restraint it tests. The number describes a specific device applied as tested. D. P: Performance Criteria Factor. ' 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: A. Av: 0.125 ' B. Component Seismic Coefficient: See schedule, Section 3.06. C. Performance Criteria Factor: See schedule, Section 3.06. ' D. Attachment Amplification Factor: 1.0 (If fixed connections) 1.05 SUBMITTALS: ' A. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following: I. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads. 1 15071 -Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls 15071-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 H SECTION 15071 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS (continued) 1.06 1.07 1.08 2. Seismic -Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of seismic restraints and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors. 3. Submittals for Interlocking Snubbers. OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Seismic -restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis performed according to OSHPD and shall bear anchorage preapproval "R" number, from OSHPD or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic -restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic -restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads and I test or analysis at 45 degrees to the weakest mode. COORDINATION: A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into base. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. EXTRA MATERIALS: A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 2.02 Seismic Snubber Units: Furnish replacement neoprene inserts for all snubbers. MANUFACTURERS: A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. VIBRATION ISOLATORS: A. Available Manufacturers B. Manufacturers 1. Ace Mounting Co., Inc. 2. AmberBooth Company, Inc. 3. B -Line Systems, Inc. 4. California Dynamics Corp. 15071 -Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls 15071-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15071 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS (continued) 5. Isolation Technology, Inc. 6. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc 7. Mason Industries, Inc. 8. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 9. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc. 10. Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund. C. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel base plates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Material: Standard neoprene D. Restrained Elastomeric Mounts: All -directional elastomeric mountings with seismic restraint. 1. Materials: Cast -ductile -iron housing containing two separate and opposing, molded, bridge -bearing neoprene elements that prevent central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock -absorbing materials compounded according to, the standard for bridge -bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO. fl IH L I I I I I E. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open -spring isolators with seismic restraint. I. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory -drilled base plate bonded to 1/4 -inch- thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to base plate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. F. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers. I. Housing: Ductile -iron or steel housing to provide all -directional seismic restraint. 2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure. 3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4 -inch travel before contacting a resilient collar. G. Elastomeric Hangers: Double -deflection type, with molded, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color -code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. 2.03 RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF -CURB RAILS: A. Available Manufacturers 15071 -Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls 15071-3 RJN Project No. II -1875-00 1 SECTION 15071 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS (continued) B. Manufacturers 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corp. 3. Isolation Technology, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 5. Mason Industries, Inc. 6. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 7. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc. 8. Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund. C. Description: Factory -assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed to resiliently support equipment and to withstand 125 -mph wind impinging laterally against side of equipment. D. Lower Support Assembly: Sheet -metal "Z" section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support upper floating frame. Upper frame shall provide continuous support for equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. Lower support assembly shall have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials, and shall be insulated with a ' minimum of 2 inches of rigid, glass -fiber insulation on inside of assembly. E. Spring Isolators: Adjustable, restrained spring isolators shall be mounted on 1/4- inch- thick, elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are accessible ..for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof. 1. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open -spring isolators with seismic restraint. a. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops and adjustable ' equipment mounting and leveling bolt. b. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. c. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. d. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. e. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 2. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel base plates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. F. Snubber Bushings: All -directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch thick. G. Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at comers, attached to upper support frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counterflashed over roof materials. ' 15071 -Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls 15071-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I 7 I J 7 J I P L L L I1 I I I SECTION 15071- MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS (continued) 2.04 SEISMIC -RESTRAINT DEVICES: A. Available Manufacturers B. Manufacturers I. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. " B -Line Systems, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corp. 4. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 5. Loos & Co., Inc.; Cableware Technology Division. 6. Mason Industries, Inc. 7. TOLCO Incorporated. 8. Unistrut Diversified Products Co.; Wayne Manufacturing Division. 9. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 10. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc. 11... Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund. C. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1 -piece, molded, bridge -bearing neoprene complying with AASHTO M 251. D. Seismic Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural -steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings. 1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic -rated, drill -in, and stud -wedge or female -wedge type. 2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1 -piece, molded, bridge -bearing neoprene complying with AASHTO M 251. E. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable engagement. F. Anchor Bolts: Seismic -rated, drill -in, and stud -wedge or female -wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M. 2.05 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES: A. Available Manufacturers B. Manufacturers 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corp. 3. Isolation Technology, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 5. Mason Industries, Inc. 6. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 7. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc. 8. Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund. C. Steel Base: Factory -fabricated, welded, structural -steel bases and rails. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than I - inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary ' 15071 -Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls 15071-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Li SECTION 15071 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS (continued) 1 motor slide bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory -welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. D. Inertia Base: Factory -fabricated, welded, structural -steel bases and rails ready for field -applied, cast -in -place concrete. I. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than f- inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory -welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. 4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor -bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor -bolt templates from supported equipment manufacturer. 2.06 FACTORY FINISHES: A. Manufacturer's standard prime -coat finish ready for field painting. ' B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory -assembled and -tested equipment before shipping. 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be electrogalvanized. Hot -dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color -code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic -control devices to indicate capacity range. PART3-EXECUTION I 3.01 EXAMINATION: ' A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic -control devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. ' B. Examine roughing -in of reinforcement and cast -in -place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. ' C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as shown on drawings. 1 15071 -Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls 15071-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 L I. ' SECTION 15071- MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS (continued) B. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on either side of equipment. IC. Install seismic snubbers on isolated equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure. D. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze ' •-anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. E. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile -iron ' clamps to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor • locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods. ' F. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts. 3.03 EQUIPMENT BASES: A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to supported equipment manufacturer's written instructions for seismic codes at Project site. I. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 2. Install epoxy -coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions famished with items to be embedded. ' 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 5. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written ' instructions. 3.04 ADJUSTING: IA. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight. ' B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. IC. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4 -inch movement during start and stop. D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism. IE. Adjust active height of spring isolators. F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations. ' G. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. H. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to resist seismic forces. 15071 -Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls 15071-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15071- MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS (continued) 3.05 CLEANING: A. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic - control devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. 3.06 VIBRATION ISOLATOR AND SEISMIC -RESTRAINT SCHEDULE: MECHANICAL COMPONENTS SYSTEMS SCHEDULE Performance Criteria Component or System Factor (P) Seismic Coefficient Seismic Hazard Exposure Mechanical Component C Group III 1. Water Heaters, Booster 2.0 1.5 Heaters, Reciprocating, or Rotating Equipment, Heat Exchangers Tanks 2. Pipe Systems Gas & High 2.0 1.5 Hazard & Fire Suppression 2.0 1.5 Other 0.67 1.5 3. HVAC Ducts * 0.67 1.5 * Note: Seismic Restraints are not required for the following: a. Ducts suspended by hangers 12" or less. b. Ducts hanging cross-sectional area less than 6 sq. ft. END OF SECTION 15071 15071 -Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls 15071-8 MN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 1 I 1 1 I SECTION 15080 - WASTEWATER PUMP SUCTION AND DISCHARGE VALVES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and install the suction and discharge valves on pumps Pt through P7 as shown on M-2 and M-4. This includes 12 inch valve on return line (PV8) and the two 24 inch valves and 30 inch valve on the force mains outside the dry well. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Division 1 — General Requirements B. Section 01330 — Submittals C. Section 02640 — Valves & Accessories D. Section 15082 — Pump Discharge Check Control Valve System 1.03 OUALITY ASSURANCE A. The valves shall be manufactured by one manufacturer who shall be responsible for all components. The valves shall be of standard products and shall be provided by a manufacturer who has at least 10 yeas of history of manufacturing valves. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Descriptive literature, catalog cuts, and dimensional prints clearly indicating all dimensions and materials of construction, shall be submitted on all items specified herein to the Engineer for review before ordering. Comply with provisions of Section 01330. B. At the time of submission, the Contractor shall, in writing, call Engineer's attention to any deviations that the submittals may have from the requirements of the Engineer's Contract Drawings and Specifications. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Henry Pratt Company, MDT with Dura-Cyl power cylinder or approved equal 2.02 BALLCENTRIC PLUG VALVES A. Ballcentric Plug valves shall be of the non -lubricating, eccentric type and shall be ' designed for a working pressure of 175 -psi for valves 12" and smaller, 150 psi for valves 14" and larger. Valves shall provide tight shut-off at rated pressure. Valves 20" and smaller shall have round port design. 24" and larger valves shall have ' rectangular port design. Minimum port area for all valves shall be 80% of corresponding pipe area. B. The valve body shall be cast iron ASTM A126 Class B with welded -in overlay of ' 90% nickel alloy content on all surfaces contacting the face of the plug. Sprayed, plated, nickel welded rings or seats screwed into the body are not acceptable. ' 15080 -Wastewater Pump Suction and 15080 - 1 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 Discharge Valves I SECTION 15080 - WASTEWATER PUMP SUCTION AND DISCHARGE VALVES (continued) 2.04 C. The valve plug shall be cast iron ASTM A126 Class B, with Buna N resilient seating surface to mate with the body seat. D. Valve flanges shall be in strict accordance with ANSI B16.1, Class 125. E. Valve shall be furnished with permanently lubricated sleeve type bearings conforming to AWWA C504. Bearings shall be of sintered, oil impregnated type 316 stainless steel ASTM A-743 Grade CF=SM or bronze ASTM 8-127. F. Valves shaft seals shall be of the "U" cup type, in accordance with AWWA C504. Seals shall be self adjusting and repackable without moving the bonnet from the valve VALVE OPERATORS: G. Hydraulic Valve Operators 1. Hydraulic actuators shall comply with AWWA C-540. 2. Hydraulic actuators shall provide characterized closure, which by slowing down valve travel as the valve approaches the closed position to minimize the possibility of water hammer. 3. Hydraulic actuator is self locking without a unidirectional sustained force from the valve. Actuator shall maintain valve position under conditions of fluctuating, turbulent and intermittent flow. 4. Hydraulic actuators shall be sized to meet the requirements of the Pump Discharge Check Control Valve System (Section 15082). Actuators shall be equipped with valve position limit switches and other accessories that are required to interface with the Discharge Check Control Valve System. 5. Hydraulic actuators shall be constructed of non -corrosive materials for water service and shall use materials that will not promote galvanic corrosion between components. 6. Hydraulic actuators shall be constructed to resist impact. Flexure strength, modulus of elasticity, water absorption and friction coefficients of the materials of construction shall be suitable for long life in water service. H. Manual Valve Operators Manual actuators shall provide characterized closure, which by slowing down valve travel as the valve approaches the closed position to minimize the possibility of water hammer. 2. Actuator is self locking without a unidirectional sustained force from the valve. Actuator shall maintain valve position under conditions of fluctuating, turbulent and intermittent flow. I U I I El I I I I J I I 1l I 15080 -Wastewater Pump Suction and 15080 -2 RJN Project No 11-1875-00 Discharge Valves I SECTION 15080 - WASTEWATER PUMP SUCTION AND DISCHARGE VALVES (continued) 3. Actuator shall allow one person operation against full line pressure. ' 4. Valves shall be positioned to cause the most convenient position of the actuator possible. Valves located six (6) feet or more from floor level shall be furnished with chainwheel operators or chain level operators. Chains ' shall extend to within four (4) feet off the floor. All NRS floor stands and geared operators shall be indicating type. All hand wheels shall have an arrow cast into them indicating the direction to turn the valve to open. ' 5. Actuators shall be constructed of non -corrosive materials for water service and shall use materials that will not promote galvanic corrosion between ' components. 6. Actuators shall be constructed to resist impact. Flexure strength, modulus of elasticity, water absorption and friction coefficients of the materials of construction shall be suitable for long life in water service. 7. Valve Actuators: 6" and smaller exposed valves shall be provided with wrench actuators. 8" and larger exposed valves shall be provided with worm gear type manual actuators. All buried valves shall be provided with worm and gear actuators suited for the intended service and shall be in valve boxes. ' Pump suction valves shall have an extension bonnet to extend 30 inches above walkway grating. I 11 U I I '7 I Pump Discharge/Suction Valve Schedule SIZE VALVE ACTUATOR Pump Suction 16" Ballcentric Plug Manual w/extension bonnet Pump Discharge FVI-FV7 16" Ballcentric Plug Hydraulic Pump Discharge 16" Ballcentric Plug Manual Return PV8 12" Ballcentric Plug Hydraulic 24"Forcemain 24" Ballcentric Plug Manual (buried service) 30"Forcemain 30" Ballcentric Plug Manual (buried service) Forcemain Crossover 24" Ballcentric Plug Manual (buried service) :PART 3 -EXECUTION .3.01 INSTALLATION: A. All valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. All valves shall open left (counterclockwise). END OF SECTION 15080 15080 -Wastewater Pump Suction and 15080 - 3 RJN Project No 11-1875-00 Discharge Valves SECTION 15081 - SUMP PUMP PIPING AND FITTINGS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes 1. This section specifies the furnishing of pipe and fittings for sump pump piping and wastewater pump discharge check valve control water piping. 2. Installation of these items is covered in other sections of the specifications. B. Related Sections 1. Section 15446 — Sump Pumps 2. Section 15082 — Pump Discharge Check Valve Control System 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Conform to requirements of Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. 1.03 OUALITY CONTROL: A. Provide manufacturer's certifications that all pipe and fittings meet provisions of this Section and have been hydrostatically tested at factory and meet requirements of ANSI A21.51. B. Provide certifications that all pipe joints have been tested and meet requirements of ANSI A 21.11. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS: A. All pipe of a given type, material, and size shall be the product of a single manufacturer. B. Pipe: %2" thru 2", Sch. 80, seamless, API 5L -B, ASTM 106-B, A53 -B C. Flanges: %z" thru 2", screwed, class 150 Flat Faced, ASTM A-105 D. Fittings: %z" thru 2", screwed, CL 3000, ASTM A-105 E. Unions: 'If' thru 2", screwed, CL 3000, ASTM A-105 with integral steel seats 2.02 GASKETS: A. Ring gaskets for flanged joints, 1/8 -inch -thick gasket, suitable for wastewater service. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 15081 15081 -Sump Pump Piping and Fittings 15081-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I I Fl I I I L [Li SECTION 15082 - PUMP DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE CONTROL SYSTEM PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. This section specifies construction, performance, and installation a system to control the discharge valve position of the 7 lift station pumps feeding the waste water treatment plant. The system will control the valve position for pump startup and shutdown. It will close the valve if no flow conditions are detected in the discharge pipe during periods when the pump should be operational. 1.02 GENERAL: A. Like items of equipment specified herein shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for operation, maintenance, spare parts and manufacturers services. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit sufficient descriptive literature to demonstrate compliance with these specifications. B. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature; catalog cuts; and installation and operation manuals. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 EOUIPMENT: A. Performance 1. The control system for the pump check valve shall provide the following functions: a. Independent adjustable rates of valve opening and closing operations. ' b. Independent adjustable emergency closure rate resulting from an electric power failure or other operational signal eliminating power to the system. ' B. The system shall be provided with a single solenoid four-way valve for the normal open and close function. Two solenoid operated two-way valves shall be provided for emergency closure, bypassing the single solenoid four-way valve. Separate adjustable ' speed control valves shall be furnished for open, close and emergency operation. The system shall be provided with a manual override for the normal open and close function. 1 Li I ' 15082 Pump Discharge Check Valve Control 15082-I RJN Project No. 11-11875-00 System I L SECTION 15082 - PUMP DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE CONTROL SYSTEM (continued) I 1. The required speeds of operation shall be as follows: Normal open ' 60 seconds minimum 300 seconds maximum Normal close ' 60 seconds minimum 300 seconds maximum Emergency close 10 seconds minimum 20 seconds maximum C. The system will be controlled by the Lift Station PLC. D. Controller shall be Henry Pratt Company, Check -Mate or equal. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION: A. The control system shall be fully piped and wired, and contained within a NEMA XII cabinet with a hinged access door. All fittings and tubing shall be brass and copper. Electrical wiring shall terminate in a separate NEMA IV junction box within the control cabinet. B. The pump check valve shall be furnished with three limit switches. One each for the full open or full close positions, and the third switch shall provide momentary. interruption of the pump motor control to initiate pump shutdown prior to 100% valve closure to minimize hydraulic surge. 2.03 BACKUP SYSTEM: A. Provide Water Bladder Accumulator Tank Backup system. System shall be sized to ' provide a sufficient supply of water and pressure to actuate each check valve three times (fully open to fully closed to fully open). System to activate in the event of a power failure. The system shall be of a manufacturer who is regularly engaged in the manufacture of this type of equipment and shall be provided complete with interconnecting piping, valves, control panel (NEMA 12) and electrical equipment to operate as a single unit. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: ' A. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Utilize all mounting holes provided in the equipment. END OF SECTION 15082 I 15082 Pump Discharge Check Valve Control 15082-2 RJN Project No. 11-11875-00 System I I I I I I I Li I I 11 I 1J H I I 11 SECTION 15085 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes semi -rigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation; insulating cements; field -applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds. 1:03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: I. Application of field -applied jackets. 2. Applications at linkages for control devices. C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field -applied jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 12 -inch- square sections of each sample material. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests. E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements. 1.04 DUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame -spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke - developed rating of 150 or less. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. ' 15085 -Duct Insulation 15085-1 RJN Project No. 11-] 875-00 I I SECTION 15085 - DUCT INSULATION (continued) I 1.06 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application. ' 1.07 SCHEDULING: A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may ' begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers ' offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Insulation a. CertainTeed Manson b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH c. Owens -Coming Fiberglas Corp. d. Schuller International, Inc. 2. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Rubatex Corp. 3. Closed -Cell Phenolic -Foam Insulation a. Kooltherm Insulation Products, Ltd. 4. Calcium Silicate Insulation a. Owens -Coming Fiberglas Corp. b. Pabco c. Schuller International, Inc. ' 2.02 INSULATION MATERIALS: A. Mineral -Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all -service jacket manufactured from krafl paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. ' B. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type Il, without facing and with all -service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. 2.03 FIELD -APPLIED JACKETS: A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying with ASTM B 209, and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over entire surface in contact with insulation. Metal thickness and corrugation dimensions are scheduled at the end of this Section. 15085 -Duct Insulation 15085-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15085 - DUCT INSULATION (continued) 1. Finish: Smooth finish 2. Finish: Cross -crimp corrugated finish 3. Finish: Stucco -embossed finish 4. Finish: Factory -painted finish 5. Moisture Barrier: 1 -mil- thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper C. Stainless -Steel Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets of stainless steel complying with ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316; 0.10 inch thick; and roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes. I. Moisture Barrier: 1 -mil -thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper 2. Moisture Barrier: 3 -mil -thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper 3. Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 3/4 inch wide 2.04 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS: II L I H [1 U A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL -C -20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass -fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. I. Tape Width: 4 inches. B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket: I. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick. 3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick. 4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick. 5. Nickel -Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick. C. Wire: 0.080 -inch, nickel -copper alloy; 0.062 -inch, soft -annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062 -inch, soft -annealed, galvanized steel. D. Weld -Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper -coated steel pin for capacitor - discharge welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 1.. Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the attached surface. E. Adhesive -Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface. F. Self -Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 2.05 VAPOR RETARDERS: A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. ' 15085 -Duct Insulation 15085-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 H SECTION 15085 - DUCT INSULATION (continued) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: ' A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. ' B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION: ' A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.03 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS: A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each duct system. C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. E. Seal joints and seams with vapor -retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical. I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor - retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder. L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows: 1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 15085 -Duct Insulation 15085-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15085 - DUCT INSULATION (continued) 3. Vapor -Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. IN. Install vapor -retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders. 1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal ' with vapor -retarder mastic and pressure -sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -retarder seal. 2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with outward clinching staples and pressure -sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. ' O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing. 1. Seal penetrations with vapor -retarder mastic. ' 2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends. 3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor -retarder mastic. ' P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire -rated walls and partitions. Q. Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor ' support at top of floor. I. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation ends with vapor -retarder mastic. ' 3.04 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION: A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with ' adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings ' and transitions. 3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: I. a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. ' b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. 15085 -Duct Insulation 15085-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15085 - DUCT INSULATION (continued) c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. 4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers. 5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by ' removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2 -inch staples, I inch o.c., and cover with pressure -sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. 7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6 -inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 10. Apply vapor -retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder. B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. I. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Space anchor pins as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. ' b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. 4. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2 -inch staples, I inch o.c., and cover with pressure -sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. 1 15085 -Duct Insulation 15085-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 n SECTION 15085 - DUCT INSULATION (continued) L1 I FT u FT I I I I Li I I I I Fl Ii 6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6 -inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 8. Apply vapor -retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder. 3:05 FIELD -APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION: A. Apply glass -cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory -applied jackets. I. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2 -inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062 -inch- thick coats of jacket manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation. 3.06 FINISHES: A. Glass -Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass -cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. 3.07 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS: • A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems: I. Outdoor exposed supply D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: I. Fibrous -glass ducts 2. Metal ducts with duct liner 3. Factory -insulated flexible ducts 4. Factory -insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections 5. Flexible connectors 15085 -Duct Insulation 15085-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15085 - DUCT INSULATION (continued) 6. Vibration -control devices 7. Testing agency labels and stamps 8. Nameplates and data plates 9. Access panels and doors in air -distribution systems OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE: A. Service: Rectangular, supply -air ducts 1. Material: Mineral -fiber board 2. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches 3. Number of Layers: One 4. Field -Applied Jacket: Aluminum a. Aluminum Thickness: 0.032 inch b. Corrugation Dimension: 1-1/4 by 1/4 inch 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes B. Service: Rectangular, return -air ducts (Electric Building only) 1. Material: Mineral -fiber board 2. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches 3. Number of Layers: One 4, Field -Applied Jacket: Aluminum a. Aluminum Thickness: 0.032 inch b. Corrugation Dimension: 1-1/4 by 1/4 inch 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes END OF SECTION 15085 15085 -Duct Insulation 15085-8 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications, including pipes, tubing, fittings, and specialties; special -duty valves; and refrigerants. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each valve type and refrigerant piping specialty specified. C. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. 1.04 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. ASME Compliance: Qualify brazing and welding processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes: 1. ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping." 2. ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." C. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant -Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves." D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that is UL listed and labeled. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS: A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. I. Filter -Dryer Cartridges: I of each type. 15083 -Refrigerant Piping 15183 -1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING (continued) PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Refrigerants a. Allied Signal Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants b. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div. c. Elf Atochem North America, Inc. d. ICI Americas Inc.; Fluorochemicals Bus. 2. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties a. Danfoss Electronics, Inc. b. Eaton Corporation; Industrial Control Div. c. Emerson Electric Company; Alco Controls Div. d. Henry Valve Company e. Parker -Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Division f. Sporlan Valve Company 2.02 PIPES AND TUBES: A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), drawn temper. 2.03 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS: A. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought -copper streamlined pattern. 2.04 JOINING MATERIALS: A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (Silver). B. Welding Materials: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section II, Part C, for welding materials appropriate for pipe being welded. 2.05 VALVES: A. Thermal Expansion Valves: Conform to ARI 750; thermostatic -adjustable, modulating type; size as required and factory set for superheat requirements; solder - end connections; with sensing bulb, distributor having side connection for hot -gas bypass line, and external equalizer line. 2.06 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. Angle -Type Strainers: 430-psig working pressure; forged -brass or steel body with stainless -steel wire or brass -reinforced Monel screen, and screwed clean -out plug, with solder -end connections. 15183 -Refrigerant Piping 15183-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I ' SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING (continued) B. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 500-psig operating pressure, 200 deg F operating temperature; forged -brass body, with replaceable, polished, optical viewing window ' with color -coded moisture indicator, and solder -end connections. C. Replaceable -Core Filter -Dryers: 500-psig operating pressure; steel shell, flange ring, and spring, ductile -iron cover plate with steel cap screws, and wrought -copper fittings for solder -end connections; with replaceable -core kit, including gaskets, as follows: . 1. Filter -Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid -core sieve with activated ' alumina, ART 730 rated for capacity. 2.07 REFRIGERANT: ' A. ASHRAE, R-22: Monochlorodifluoromethane PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: IA. Examine roughing -in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.02 APPLICATIONS: A. Aboveground: Type L drawn -copper tubing ' 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." IC. Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings. D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other ' equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, or between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full -thickness insulation. IF. Insulate suction lines. I. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have been eliminated. I. G. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically and symmetrically. ' H. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed to mechanical injury. 15183 -Refrigerant Piping 15183-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING (continued) I. Slope refrigerant piping as follows 1. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward to compressor. 2. Liquid lines may be installed level. J. Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I K. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated. L. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down. M. Provide bypass around moisture -liquid indicators in lines larger than 2 -inch NPS (DN50). N. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure -regulating valves, expansion valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators. O. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection, 'at right angles to axial movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft. P. Install replaceable -core filter -dryers, with isolation valves and valved bypass. Q. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions. R. When brazing, remove sight glasses; and remove stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near bulb of expansion valve. S. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator. 1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion -valve outlet. 2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line. 4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction -line pressure at bulb location. T. Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following ASHRAE 15 procedures. U. Charge system as follows: I. Install filter -dryer core after leak test, but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump, until temperature of 35 deg F is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator. 3. Maintain vacuum for a minimum of 5 hours. 4. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas and charge to 2 psig. L 3.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors: Provide according to ASME 831.5 and MSS SP -69 and Seismic Protection. B. An adjustable steel clevis hanger for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length. 15183 -Refrigerant Piping 15183-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I 1l I r P L I I I I L I I I I I Li I I 1J SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING (continued) C. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. D. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes. Tube sizes are nominal or standard tube sizes as expressed in ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M). 1. ;. 1/2 Inch: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. 5/8 Inch: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. 1 Inch: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 4. 1-1/4 Inches: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 5. 1-1/2 Inches: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. 1-5/8 Inches: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. F. Support vertical runs at each floor. 3.05 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION: A. Basic pipe and tube joint construction is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent formation of scale. 3.06 VALVE INSTALLATIONS: A. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install valves on suction and discharge of compressor, for gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet, for gage taps at hot -gas bypass regulators, on inlet and outlet, and on each side of strainers. C. Install check valves on compressor discharge and on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser systems. D. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator. 1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line. 3. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction -line pressure at bulb location. E. Install pressure -regulating and relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15. 3.07 SPECIALTIES APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION: A. Install strainers immediately upstream of each automatic valve. B. Install moisture -liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter -dryers and thermostatic expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver. C. Install flexible connectors at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb vibration. ' 15183 -Refrigerant Piping 15183-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING (continued) 3.08 CONNECTIONS: A. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections for electrical ' connections. 3.09 FIELD DUALITY CONTROL: ' A. Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. 1. Pressure test with nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27-psig vacuum and 200 psig using halide torch or electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage. B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Repair leaks using new materials; re -test. 3.10 ADJUSTING: A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements. 3.11 CLEANING: A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings I with trichloroethylene. 3.12 COMMISSIONING: I A. Charge system using the following procedures: I. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump until temperature of 35 deg F is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator. 3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping. 4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between vacuum pump and system. 5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 6. Complete charging of system, using new filter -dryer core in charging line. Provide full -operating charge. END OF SECTION 15183 1 15183 -Refrigerant Piping 15183-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15430 - PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Furnish and install potable water meter, 2 back flow preventers and strainer. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Division 1— Basic Requirements B. Section 01330— Submittals C. Section 15080 —Valves 1.03 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Components shall be standard products and shall be provided by a manufacturer who has at least 10 years of history of manufacturing. B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. C. Design Concepts: The drawings indicate capacities, sizes and dimensional requirements of system components. Components having equal performance characteristics that deviate from indicated size and dimensions may be considered provided deviations do not change the design concept of intended performance. The burden of proof for equality of products is on the Contractor. Refer to Division 1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures, B. Submittals product data including rated capacities of selected models and weights (shipping, installation, and operation). Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following plumbing specialty products: 1. Backflow preventers 2. Hose bibs and wall hydrants 3. Drain valves C. Maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and maintenance manuals as specified in Section 01330 — Submittals Procedures. 1.05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REOUIREMENTS: A. Components and installation capable of producing piping system with following minimum working pressure ratings, except where otherwise indicated: 1. Water distribution system 125 psig 15430 -Piping Specialties 15430-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15430 - PIPING SPECIALTIES (continued) I 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below. Package them in protective covering for storage and identify with clearly describing contents. 1. Operating keys (Handles) 2. Furnish 1 extra key for each key -operated hose bib and hydrant installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 2.02 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacture: Subject to compliance with requirement., manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to , the following: 1. Meter: To be supplied by city 2. Backflow Preventers a. Ames Co., Inc. b. Cash by A.W. Cash Valve Mfg. Corp. c. Cla-Val Co. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Febco f. Hersey Products, Inc. Grinnell Corp. g. Sparco, Inc. h. Watts Regulator Co. i. Wilkins Regulators Div., Zurn Industries, Inc. 3. Wall Hydrants a. Ancon, Inc. b. Jones Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Josam Co. d. Smith by Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. Div., Smith Industries, Inc. e. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe f. Watts Regulators Co. g. Woodford Manufacturing Co. Div., WCM Industries, Inc. h. Zurn by Hydromechancis Div., Zurn Industries, Inc. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS: A. Backflow preventers shall be installed as shown on the Plans in the potable water line serving the lift station. The backflow preventer shall be of the reduced pressure type. It shall include two check valves, an automatically operating pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves and two cut-off valves. The relief valve and relief valve discharge port shall be low enough to drain the intermediate chamber to a level below the supply line inlet. All moving parts and trim shall be made of corrosion resisting material. The backflow preventer shall be equipped with test cocks. Only units complying with the requirements of and having received the approval of the U.S. Public Health Service and the American Water Works Association and the ARKANSAS DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY will be acceptable. The backflow preventers shall be , 1 L I I I 1 C I I I I n I 15430 -Piping Specialties 15430-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15430 - PIPING SPECIALTIES (continued) manufactured by Clayton Valve Company, Beeco (Hersey-Sparling Meter Co.), Crane Company, or equal. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. Strainers: Y pattern, except where otherwise indicated, full size of connecting piping. Include Type 304 stainless -steel screens with 3/64 -inch perforations except where other screens are indicated. 1. Pressure Rating 125-psig minimum steam working pressure except where otherwise indicated 2. Sizes 2 Inches and Smaller Bronze body, with female threaded ends 3. Sizes 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior FDA - approved epoxy coating and flanged ends 4. Y -Type Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown. a. Drain: Pipe plug. b. Drain: Factory- or field -installed, hose -end drain valve 5. T -Type Strainers: Malleable -iron or ductile -iron body with grooved ends; access end cap with drain plug and access coupling with EDPM gasket. 6. Basket -Type Strainers: Bolted flange or clamp cover, and basket having lift -out handle a. Simplex Type: Single unit with 1 basket. b. Duplex Type Double unit, with bronze or stainless -steel diverter valve and 2 baskets c. Drain: Pipe plug d. Drain: Factory- or field -installed. hose -end, drain valve 7. Hose Bibs: Bronze body, with renewable composition disc, 1/2- or 3/4 -inch threaded or solder joint Inlet. Provide ASME BL2O.7 garden -hose threads on outlet and integral or field -installed, nonremovable, drainable, hose -connection vacuum breaker a. Finish: Rough brass (Type "HB-1 ") b. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated (Type "HB-2") c. Operation: Wheel handle 8. Wall Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M or ASSE 1019, nonfreeze, automatic draining antibackflow type, key operation, with 3/4- or 1 - inch threaded or solder -joint inlet and ASME B 1.20.7 garden -hose threads on outlet. Provide 1 operating key. a. Type: Recessed b. Finish: Nickel bronze PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION: A. Install backflow preventers of type, size and capacity indicated, at each water supply connection to mechanical equipment and systems, and to other equipment and systems as indicated. Comply with plumbing code and authority having jurisdiction. Locate in room as equipment being connected. Install air -gap fitting on units having atmospheric vent connection and pipe relief drain to nearest floor drain. Do not install bypass around backflow preventer. 15430 -Piping Specialties 15430-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15430 - PIPING SPECIALTIES (continued) 3.02 3.03 3.04 B. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure -regulating valve, and solenoid valve where indicate; C. Install hose bibs with integral or field -installed vacuum breaker. D. Install wall hydrants with integral or field -installed vacuum breaker. COMMISSIONING: A. Preparation: Perform the following checks before start-up: 1. System checks are complete. 2. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired. 3. There is clear space for servicing of specialties. B. Before operating systems, perform these steps: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants and hose bibs. 2. Open valves to full open position 3. Remove and clean strainers. 4. Verify drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until clear. ADJUSTING: A. Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning. PROTECTION: A. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 15430 15430 -Piping Specialties 15430-4 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15445 - WASTEWATER PUMPS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Furnish and install seven (7) end suction centrifugal pumps. B. Work includes: Pumps, motors, couplings, base plates and accessories as specified. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Division 1 — Basic Requirements B. Section 01330 — Submittals C. Division 16 — Electrical 1.03 ' QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The pump systems, including the pump, coupling, guard, motor and base plate shall be supplied by one manufacturer who shall be responsible for all components. The pump systems shall be standard products and shall be provided by a manufacturer who has at least 10 years of history of manufacturing similar sized end suction centrifugal pumps. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. B. Submittals to include pump technical information, materials of construction, head curves, horsepower curves, solids handling capabilities, motor data, and data on proposed accessory equipment as specified here in. Submittals to also include operation and maintenance manuals as specified in Division 1. 1.05 FACTORY ASSEMBLY AND FACTORY TESTING: A. All 7 pump assemblies (pump, motor and coupling) shall be completely assembled in the manufacturer's factory. B. Testing 1. Each pump assembly (motor, coupling, pump) with its variable speed drive shall be fully tested on water at the manufacturer's factory before shipment. Tests shall consist of laboratory testing at shutoff and two points over the operating range of the pump. The testing of all 7 pumps shall be witnessed by the engineer for the Hamestring project and a city representative. Testing results must be within 5% of the following defined operating points: Head Flow w�Efff1. Ut` I �� n i. Shutoff 230 0 0 ii. Primary design 190 4,350 77.0 iii. Secondary design 140 7,200 80.0 15445 -Wastewater Pumps 15445-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15445 - WASTEWATER PUMPS (continued) Certified test data will include head, capacity, motor output HP, RPM, pump efficiency and be charted and graphed. All tests will be under the direction of a registered engineer and be conducted in accord with the applicable Hydraulic Institute Standards and Procedures according to Level "B" and be submitted as requested. 2. Each pump shall be vibration tested when operating at prime design point at the manufacturer's factory before shipment. Test shall be conducted as directed by the Hydraulic Institute Standards according to Level "B" and under the direction of a registered Engineer. Test data will be certified and submitted as requested. 3. Each pump shall be hydrostatically tested for casing integrity at 1.25 times the shut-off pressure of actual trim at operating speed at the manufacturer's factory before shipment. Tests shall be conducted as directed by a registered Engineer and data certified and submitted as requested. 4. Each pump shall be tested for its NPSHR, when operating and in conjunction with the H/Q performance test conducted at the factory before shipment. The test shall include three (3) points on the test performance curve using water at ambient temperature. Tests shall be conducted and submitted as requested. 5. Results of the factory tests shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipping the pump units. Provide two weeks notification prior to factory tests to allow Engineer and Owner time to schedule the event. 1.06 SHIPMENT, HANDLING AND STORAGE: 1.07 A. The Engineer's approval of submittals and factory test results must be received by the manufacturer, prior to shipment. B. Ship fully assembled units intact in appropriate shipping containers. C. Store pump units on site in protective enclosures, prior to installation. Storage area must comply with manufacturer's recommendations concerning temperature, humidity, etc. A. End suction centrifugal pumping units shall conform to all applicable requirements of NEMA, IEEE, NEC, FM, SWPA, and Hydraulic Institute, as in effect on the date of bid. B. End suction centrifugal pump motors shall further conform to and be certified per IEEE 117, with a minimum of Class F insulation materials. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Cornell Pump Company B. Or equal 2.02 EQUIPMENT DESIGNATIONS: A. Hamestring Lift Station I I El I I I I I I I I 15445 -Wastewater Pumps 15445 - 2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 H SECTION 15445 - WASTEWATER PUMPS (continued) 2.03 WASTEWATER PUMP REQUIREMENTS: A. Pumps 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1 15445 -Wastewater Pumps The pedestal mounted end suction centrifugal pump shall be mounted on formed Channel Steel base and coupled to driver by means of flexible type coupling. Base, coupling and guard shall be fully assembled by the pump manufacturer, with final alignment check by installer. Base shall be of sufficient size and strength to resist twisting or bending from hydraulic forces and support the full weight of motor and pump. It shall have an OSHA approved coupling guard. Anchor bolt holes shall be of sufficient size for required anchorage to the pump pad. The drive coupling shall be of the flexible type designed to transmit full horsepower and torque load. The pump casing shall be tangential discharge of back pullout design allowing for removal of rotating element without disturbing piping connections. The casing shall be constructed of fine grain cast iron of ASTM A48 Class 30. All casing sections shall have heavy wall thickness to provide long life under abrasive and corrosive operating conditions. Casing shall be of double volute design with internal cutwater extending around the impeller axis for control of hydraulic radial thrusts. All mating surfaces shall have register fits to ensure proper alignment. Piping connections shall be ANSI 125# flat face drilled flange. Flange face surface finish shall be a minimum of 250 micro inch finish. Replaceable double suction wear rings shall be provided. The rings shall be of the peripheral design requiring no axial adjustment. One ring shall be press fit into the case and the opposite ring shall press onto the impeller eye. The rings shall be constructed of AISI 420 heat treated hardened Stainless - steel. The rings shall be hardened to a minimum of 400-500 Brinell with a minimum of 50 Brinell hardness difference between rings to prevent galling. The shaft shall be a high strength steel bar made by LaSalle stress proof grade AISI 1144 or better. The shaft will be able to obtain maximum ductility and strength and minimum warpage. The shaft is to include tensile strength of 130,000 psi (mean), yield strength of 1000,000 psi min. The impeller shall be of heavy section Cast Iron ASTM A48, Class 30 with the two -port design. Impellers will have backvanes to reduce axial thrust and lower the stuffing box pressure. Internal vane edges shall be well rounded to present smooth flow. Impeller shall have a straight non -tapered bore, be dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and further secured with a Stainless -steel washer and a Stainless -steel impeller lockscrew. The impeller shall be fixed at location with no expected or required adjustment. The Secondary Design Point Capacity shall be within plus or minus 5.0% of the specified flow when operating at the Secondary Design Point Head of 140'. Hydraulic efficiency shall be no less than 80.0%. The best efficiency point for the pump curve shall be located between the Primary Design Point and the Secondary Design Point so that as pumps are cycled on and off or varied in speed they shall pass through the best efficiency point. Pumps shall be non -overloading over the entire curve from runout to shutoff head. 15445-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I SECTION 15445 - WASTEWATER PUMPS (continued) 9. Pump volutes shall be capable of being fitted with an impeller large enough to produce at least an additional 60 feet of shutoff head at the design RPM of 1,190 at some point in the future. B. Motors I. The motor shall be of United States manufacture, horizontal "T" Frame type. 2. The motor shall be not less than 350 hp at 1,200 rpm, totally enclosed fan cooled. 3. The motor shall be non -overloading, exclusive of the service factor at any point on the pump head capacity curve. The motor shall be rated to run on a V.F.D drive. 4. The motor shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of NEMA, ANSI, IEEE and NEC. Motors are to be designed for continuous duty for three phase, 60 Hz, 460 volt operation. NEMA design B. Ratings to be based on a 40 degree C ambient, 1000 meter altitude or lower operation with a maximum winding temperature rise of 85 degree C by resistance at 1.0 service factor. 5. Motors to be furnished with Class F insulation. All motors covered under this specification shall be capable of operating at 1.15 service factor but shall be selected for operation within their full load rating without applying the service factor. Motors shall be Premium Efficiency design, using low loss silicon lamination steel. Motors shall be equipped with space heaters appropriate for the frame size and thermal protection by either thermostats in series or thermistors. 6. Bearings shall be either double shielded or of open construction, deep groove Conrad type, and have a Class 3 internal fit conforming to AFBMA std 20. Bearings shall be selected to provide LI0 life of 100,000 hrs minimum for flexible direct coupled applications. Bearing temperature rise shall not exceed 60 degrees C for 3600 RPM motors and 50 degrees C for 1800 RPM and slower motors. Temperature rise is to be measured by RTD or thermocouple at the bearing outer race. 7. Motor lubrication system is to be re-greasable. Motor to be greased by manufacturer with a premium moisture -resistant polyurea-thickened grease containing rust inhibitors and suitable for operation over temperatures from - 25 degrees C to 120 degrees C. 8. Motor enclosure, including frame, end brackets, fan shroud and conduit box, and cover shall be cast iron type ASTM A48 class 25 or better. Motor main conduit box shall be cast iron construction, rotatable in 90 degree increments with a bolted and sealed cover. Motor leads will 'be potted into the motor frame to prevent any moisture leakage into the motor frame. Conduit box and covers shall be designed to prevent moisture leakage. Any required connection diagrams shall be affixed to the inside of the conduit box or on the name plate. 9. The blower fan shall be corrosion resistant, non -sparking bi-directional. The main motor shaft will not protrude through the opposite drive end bracket and there will be no running fit to allow entrance of water into the motor. 10. Motor rotor construction shall be of cast aluminum or fabricated copper and their alloys. Rotors shall be dynamically balanced to 1/3 of NEMA standards and shall be keyed to the shaft and rotating assemblies, Balance weights if 15445 -Wastewater Pumps 15445 -4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I L I I I I U I I II I U 11 SECTION 15445 - WASTEWATER PUMPS (continued) required shall be secured to the rotor resistance ring or fan blades by rivets. Machine screws and nuts are prohibited. 11. All mating frame fits shall have rabbet joints with O -rings to ensure a watertight design. 12. All motor parts, including frame, bracket, fan cover and terminal box are to T. receive a minimum of two coats severe duty, high grade epoxy paint. All motor parts in frame size 449 and smaller shall be primed with an epoxy primer. These parts include the stator/frame assembly, rotor assembly, end brackets, fan cover, conduit box, and conduit box cover. Completed motor assembly must successfully withstand salt spray tests for corrosion per ASTM B -I 17 for 96 hours. 13. All motors shall successfully operate under power supply variations per NEMA MGI-1993-14.30. I I I 14. All motors shall be NEMA Design B with torque and starting currents in accordance with NEMA-MG1-1993-12.35 and 12.38 except in special applications where Design C torque is required. 15: Motors shall have copper windings. Motor insulation shall be class F minimum on all motors. Insulation systems shall be evaluated in accordance with IEEE 117 classification tests. 16. Motor leads shall be non -wicking type, Class F temperature rating or better and permanently numbered for identification. 17. Each completed and assembled motor shall receive a routine factory test per NEMA standards. C. Couplings 1. The pump assembly shall include a coupling guard and coupling. 2. The coupling guard shall be installed in compliance with 29 CFR, 1910.219. 3. The coupling shall be a non lubricated design using EPDM sleeves and use standard shaft spacing and suitable for variable speed drives. 4. The service factor shall be 1.25. 5. The couplings shall be a TB Woods, sure flex elastomeric coupling or equal. 2.04 WASTEWATER PUMP DESIGN CAPACITIES: A. Primary Operating Point P-1 through P-7 Design Point Capacity 4350 USGPM Design Point Total Head 190 Ft Operating Head Range 120-210 Ft Minimum Spherical Solids Capability 3.20" Minimum Shut Off Head 230 Ft Maximum Speed 1190 RPM Motor Horsepower 350 HP Min. Hydr. Efficiency at Design Point 77.0% Minimum Suction Size 12" Minimum Discharge Size 12" B. Secondary Operating Point Design Point Capacity 7200 USGPM Design Point Total Head 140 Ft Min. Hydr. Efficiency at Design Point 80.0% ' 15445 -Wastewater Pumps 15445-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15445 - WASTEWATER PUMPS ('continued) 2.05 SEALS: A. A volute backplate with deflector vanes constructed of ASTM A48 Class 30 Grey Iron shall be provided, including a single mechanical seal, John Crane Type I (tungsten carbide vssilicon carbide). B. The design shall allow for continuous operation without the need for external flush water or venting. 2.06 VIBRATION MONITORING: A. Pump manufacturer shall install a permanent fitting on the pump for the mounting of a vibration sensor. B. Location of sensor fitting shall be determined by the pump manufacturer to detect critical vibration that will lead to shutdown of the pump. C. Pump manufacturer shall install a'' h" NPT female fitting for mounting the vibration sensor. Space above the fitting is required for the vibration sensor head, dimensions are 5.2" tall by 3.5" diameter. D. Manufacturer shall provide vibration range setting to shut down pump. 2.07 TEMPERATURE SENSORS: A. The manufacturer shall install a temperature switch on/in pump bearings housing to detect oil temperature. Discrete output to PLC to shutdown pump on high oil temperature. PLC provided by others. 2.08 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS: A. Provide special tools required for normal operation and maintenance for each pump. B. Spare Parts 1. Provide complete set of recommended spare parts necessary for normal operation of pump systems. 2. Properly bind and label for easy identification without opening packaging, and protect suitably for long-term storage. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install according to manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with Drawings. 3.02 WARRANTY: A. The pumps shall be warranted for a period of 24 months from date the pumps are placed in service. 15445 -Wastewater Pumps 15445-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I I 11 I I I I I Li SECTION 15445 - WASTEWATER PUMPS (continued) 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES: A. Provide factory representative with complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance of equipment for one day to perform the following: 1. Inspection of final installation and supervision of equipment test run 2. Field testing of equipment until such time as entire installation is complete • and ready for testing B. Provide factory representative for one (1) additional day to train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of equipment; coordinate training schedule with Owner. C. Provide factory representative for a minimum of one (I) day for and "End of Warranty" inspection and test, to be conducted approximately 23.5 months after the pumps are placed in service. END OF SECTION 15445 15445 -Wastewater Pumps 15445 -7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15446 - SUMP PUMPS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Furnish and install two (2) submersible sump pumps. B. Work includes: Pumps, motors, and accessories as specified. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Division 1— Basic Requirements B. Section 01330 — Submittals C. Section 15080 —Valves D. Section 15081— Sump Pump Piping and Fittings E. Division 16 - Electrical 1.03 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The pump systems, including the pump, level switches, duplex control panel and power cable shall be supplied by one manufacturer who shall be responsible for all components. The pump systems shall be standard products and shall be provided by a manufacturer who has at least 10 years of history of manufacturing similar sized centrifugal pumps. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. I I B. Submittals to include pump technical information, materials of construction, head curves, horsepower curves, solids handling capabilities, motor data, and data on proposed accessory equipment as specified here in. Submittals to also include operation and maintenance manuals as specified in Division 1. 1.05 FACTORY ASSEMBLY AND FACTORY TESTING: A. Pump assemblies shall be completely assembled in the manufacturer's factory. B. Testing 1. Each pump shall be fully tested on water at the manufacturer's factory before shipment. Tests shall consist of laboratory testing at shutoff and the design point for each pump. Certified test data will include head, capacity, motor output HP, RPM, pump efficiency and be charted and graphed. All tests will be under the direction of a registered engineer and be conducted in accord with the applicable Hydraulic Institute Standards and Procedures according to Level "B" and be submitted as requested. 2. Each pump shall be vibration tested when operating at prime design point at the manufacturer's factory before shipment. Test shall be conducted as directed by the Hydraulic Institute Standards according to Level "B" and under the direction of a registered Engineer. Test data will be certified and submitted as requested. 15446 -Sump Pumps 15446-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15446 - SUMP PUMPS (continued) 3. Each pump shall be hydrostatically tested for casing integrity at 1.25 times the shut-off pressure of actual trim at operating speed at the manufacturer's factory before shipment. Tests shall be conducted as directed by.a registered Engineer and data certified and submitted as requested. 4. Each pump shall be tested for its NPSHR, when operating and in conjunction with the H/Q performance test conducted at the factory before shipment. Test shall be conducted using water at ambient temperature. Tests shall be conducted and submitted as requested. 5. Results of the factory tests shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipping the pump units. Provide two weeks notification prior to factory tests in the event that the Engineer and/or Owner wish to observe the test. ' 1.06 SHIPMENT. HANDLING AND STORAGE: A. The Engineer's approval of submittals and factory test results must be received by the manufacturer, prior to shipment. B. Ship fully assembled units intact in appropriate shipping containers. C. Store pump units on site in protective enclosures, prior to installation. Storage area must comply with manufacturer's recommendations concerning temperature, humidity, etc. 1.07 REFERENCES: A. End suction centrifugal pumping units shall conform to all applicable requirements of ' NEMA, IEEE, NEC, FM, SWPA, and Hydraulic Institute, as in effect on the date of bid. B. End suction centrifugal pump motors shall further conform to and be certified per IEEE 117, with a minimum of Class F insulation materials. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Goulds B. Or equal 2.02 EOUIPMENT DESIGNATIONS: A. Hamestring Lift Station 2.03 SUMP PUMP REQUIREMENTS: A. Pumps 1. Casing: corrosion resistant ANSI 304 stainless -steel. All exposed nuts or bolts shall be AISI type 304 stainless -steel construction. All metal surfaces coming into contact with the pumpage, other than stainless -steel or brass, shall be protected by a factory applied spray coating of acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primer with a polyester resin paint finish on the exterior of the pump. 15446 -Sump Pumps 15446-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I C Li L-, I II I I 7 J fl I I C I SECTION 15446 -SUMP PUMPS (continued) 2. Mechanical Seal: drive lube silicon carbide sealing surfaces; all metal components of ANSI type 304 stainless -steel running in protected oil chamber. 3. Impeller: ANSI 304 stainless -steel construction, two vane non -clogging design. 4. Elastomers: BUNA-N 5. Shaft: ANSI 304 stainless -steel with keyed and locking cap screw impeller fastening. 6. The cable entry: molded NEMA plug. B. Motors 1. Single phase, 230 -volt motors 2. The pump motor shall be a NEMA, Air filled, class F insulted. 3. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty handling pumped media of 40°C (104°F) and capable of up to 15 evenly spaced starts per hour. Thermal overload protection, built in automatic rest. 4. Motors are sufficiently cooled by the surrounding environment or pumped media. A water jacket is not required. 5. The motor and the pump shall be produced by the same manufacturer. 2.04 SUMP PUMP DESIGN CAPACITIES: A. Primary Operating Point P-9 P-8 Design Point Capacity 10 USGPM 50 GPM Design Point Total Head 30 Ft 40 Ft Operating Head Range 7-35 Ft 7-50 Ft Maximum NPSHR Over Operating Range 47 Ft 47 Ft Minimum Spherical Solids Capability 1" 1" Minimum Shut Off Head 35 Ft 48 Ft Maximum Speed 3450 RPM 3450 RPM Motor Horsepower 1/2 HP 1 %2 HP Min. Hydr. Efficiency at Design Point 40 % 40% Minimum Suction Size 1" 1" Minimum Discharge Size 1 'F2" 2" 2.05 CONTROL PANELS: A. Pump will be supplied with a control panel that will provide indication of pumps running and failure to the PLC specified in Division 16. B. Pumps shall be controlled from a duplex three phase control panel provided by the pump manufacturer that will control both pumps. C. Panel shall be equipped with 3 phase built in, adjustable Class 10 overloads. D. Panel shall accommodate a three float level system (single action floats to be provided with the panel). One level for pump shutoff (6 inches from bottom of sump pump pit), one level to turn on first pump (10-gpm pump - 10 inches from bottom of sump pump pit), third level to turn on second pump (50-gpm pump — 18 inches from bottom of sump pump pit). 15446 -Sump Pumps 15446-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 7 I SECTION 15446 - SUMP PUMPS (continued) E. Pumps shall be equipped with seal failure alarm and high heat alarm. Panel shall indicate alarm and provide a single output for each pump to the PLC indicating a pump failure for each pump. 2.06 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS: _ A. Provide special tools required for normal operation and maintenance for each pump. ■ B. Spare Parts 1. Provide complete set of recommended spare parts necessary for normal operation of pump systems. 2. Properly bind and label for easy identification without opening packaging, and protect suitably for long-term storage. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install according to manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with Drawings. 3.02 WARRANTY: ' The pumps shall be warranted for a period of 24 months from the date the pumps are placed in service. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES: A. Provide factory representative with complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance of equipment for one day to perform the following: 1. Inspection of final installation and supervision of equipment test run. 2. Field testing of equipment until such time as entire installation is complete and ready for testing. B. Provide factory representative for one (1) additional day to train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of equipment; coordinate training schedule with Owner. C. Provide factory representative for a minimum of one(1) day for and "End of Warranty" inspection and test, to be conducted approximately 23.5 months after the pumps are placed in service. END OF SECTION 15446 L I Ll I 15446 -Sump Pumps 15446-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 15447 - PUMP INSTALLATION, GROUTING AND ALIGNMENT PART I- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. This specification prescribes that minimum requirements to be performed by the • Contractor for the installation of pumps and drivers. B. The Contractor shall install pumps and drivers per this specification, but it should be noted that the Contractor shall also follow any particular instructions provided by the equipment manufacturers. Conflicts shall be resolved by the Engineer. C. Equipment or materials containing or coated with insulating oils, corrosion inhibitors, antifreeze solutions, desiccants, or other chemicals shall be prominently tagged or labeled at openings or other appropriate locations to indicate the nature of the contents and precautions for shipping, storage and handling. Vendor shall provide a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) with respect to such oils, inhibitors, solutions, desiccants, and other chemicals. Vendor shall forward the MSDS prior to shipment of the equipment. The MSDS shall fully comply with the federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration Hazard Communication Standard (29 CFR Section 1910.1200) and relevant state Worker Right -to -Know laws. If any chemical so shipped is exempt from such laws, a statement to that effect shall be included on the MSDS. D. "Mounting Plates" refers to baseplates and/or soleplates. 1.02 PREINSTALLATION: A. The Contractor shall protect the equipment during any on -site storage and during construction to prevent corrosion and damage. If no special rust preventative is available, Daubert Chemical "Knox Rust" VCI-105 or equal shall be used for protection against rust. All nozzles and openings shall be kept covered or plugged until piping is attached. B. Contractor shall fill all bearing housings with oil or grease as required by the manufacturer. C. All exposed machined surfaces shall be kept coated with a suitable rust preventative or grease. The Contractor shall rotate the shaft of the idle equipment 180° every week. D. Mechanical seals are precision components; therefore, pumps with mechanical seals require special handling during transport and installation. Locating cams on mechanical seals shall be in preset position. During transportation, pumps shall be securely restrained to prevent excessive vibration and/or damage to the shaft and seal by dropping or striking the shaft. When installing the pump, do not use the shaft as a leverage or lifting point. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FOUNDATION AND ANCHOR BOLTS: A. Plastic or metal anchor bolt sleeves shall be used on all anchor bolts, NOTE: Sleeves are not intended to encourage careless positioning of the anchor bolts. They 15447 -Pump Installation, Grouting and Alignment 15447 - 1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15447 - PUMP INSTALLATION. GROUTING AND ALIGNMENT (continued) will allow for slight errors in base plate hole layouts and small shifting of the anchor bolts during the concrete pouring process. B. Prior to the concrete pour, the anchor bolts should be: 1. Accurately set according to manufacturer's drawings and firmly secured to prevent shifting during the pouring process 2. Dimensionally checked versus the manufacturer's drawings for proper length, diameter, threat length, etc. 3. Checked for proper projection. (Check for correct elevation as referenced to an established bench mark.) 4. Make sure that the threads are protected by heavily greasing or waxing with paste wax. The exposed bolts should be covered with plastic, polyethylene, etc. NOTE: The protective wrapping must be firmly secured with tie wire. C. All drivers and driven equipment shall be removed from the soleplates prior to grouting. In addition, all drivers and driven equipment greater than 100 HP shall be removed from the surfaces for alignment. Drivers and driven equipment shall be removed if they interfere with grouting holes. Drivers and driven equipment shall be reinstalled after the mounting plates have been grouted. D. Base plate or soleplates shall not be placed on the foundation until a minimum of 10 days have elapsed after pouring of normal concrete. Baseplates or soleplates shall not be placed on foundations until the concrete has had time to dry and cure, so that at least 85 percent of the shrinkage has taken place. E. The foundation shall be chipped to remove all laitance and defective or weak concrete. A chipping hammer shall be used for chipping the foundation. Sandblasting or needle gun preparation of concrete surfaces to be grouted is not acceptable. The amount of concrete removed shall be such that the final base plate or soleplate elevation results in 1.0 to 2.0 inches of grout between the surface of the foundation and lower base plate flange or the underside of the soleplates. After chipping, the top surface of the foundation shall be rough, reasonably level, and free of all oil, grease, and loose particles. Any oil or grease inadvertently deposited on the surface to be grouted shall be removed with a suitable solvent that completely evaporates and leaves no film (normally available from grout manufacturer). F. When using epoxy grout, the concrete surface must be dry at the time grout is applied. When using cement -based grout, keep the foundation and surface wet for the time period recommended by the grout manufacturer prior to grouting. Remove the tops of the plastic anchor bolt sleeves and ensure that the sleeves are free of foreign material. Check the condition of the bolt threads and repair as necessary. 2.02 MOUNTING PLATE PREPARATION: A. The Contractor must inspect and verify that the base plate or soleplate is in accordance with the following. If any deviations from these specifications are identified, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer prior to proceeding. I . Mounting plate surfaces (except for mounting pads and threaded holes, but including the outside edge) which will be in contact with the grout shall have been previously coated with inorganic zinc silicate. Bare meal, blistered, or rusted surfaces are unacceptable. 15447 -Pump Installation, Grouting and Alignment 15447 - 2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I LJ I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 15447 - PUMP INSTALLATION, GROUTING AND ALIGNMENT (continued) 2. All baseplates shall be provided with at least one grouting opening have a clear area of no less than 19 square inches (0.01 square meter) and no ' dimensions less than three inches (76.2 millimeters) in each bulkhead section. Vent holes (1/2 inch [12.7 millimeters] minimum diameter) shall be provided in each comer of all bulkhead compartments. For dropped -center- ' trough baseplates, the holes shall be in the high section adjacent to the trough. Grout holes in the drip -pan area shall have 1/2 inch (12.7 millimeter) raised -lip edges. I3. All outside corners of mounting plates in contact with the grout shall be rounded to at least two-inch (50.8 millimeters) radius to prevent stress focusing which can create stress risers in the grout. ' B. All surfaces of the base plate or soleplate (including the outside edges) which will be in direct contact with the grout shall be made free of all oil, grease, and rust, by wire brushing and wiping with a suitable solvent. IC. Position the base plate or soleplate on the prepared foundation. Support on leveling screws, rectangular leveling shims, or wedges having a small taper. These support pieces shall be placed next to each or on both sides of the foundation bolt. Cover ' leveling screws with a lubricant or wax so as to prevent the grout from adhering. Wax, mask off, or oil areas which require protection from grout splatter: D. Check the elevation of the machined mounting surfaces on the mounting plate. ' NOTE: The proper elevation shall allow for a minimum of 1/8 inch total shim thickness under pump (only when mounted on a soleplate) and driver(s). The base plate or soleplate is now ready for grouting. ' E. Using a precision level, level the base plate or soleplates side -to -side, end -to -end, and diagonally to within 0.002 inches per foot. It is mandatory that the machined ' mounting surfaces of the base plate or soleplates be flat and parallel. Corresponding mounting surfaces in the same plane must be within 0,002 inches overall. This mounting surface tolerance must be maintained after all anchor bolts have been adequately torqued to prevent stress and distortion of the pump and driver. ' F. When the mounting plate is level, check that all support wedges or shims are in contact with the foundation plate, then tighten the foundation bolts evenly and ' recheck the level. The mounting plate is now ready for grouting. 2.03 GROUTING: ' Approved epoxy -type grout shall be used for the installation of all pumps and drivers. When using epoxy grout, the Contractor shall follow the installation procedures in Paragraphs 2.03.A.I though 2.03.A.12. When a cement -based grout is specified, the grout ' shall be premeasured, prepackaged, nonshrink-type grout, and the Contractor shall follow the installationprocedwes for this type grout in Paragraphs 2.03.B.1 through 2.03.B.15. A. Epoxy Grout 1. ` See Section 03600 for a list of acceptable organic epoxy grout manufacturers. The epoxy grout manufacturer's requirements and instructions shall be strictly followed. ' CAUTION: Materials shall be kept away from open flame, high heat sources, or sparks. It shall be mixed in a well -ventilated area. Workmen 15447 -Pump Installation, Grouting and Alignment 15447-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 L I SECTION 15447 - PUMP INSTALLATION, GROUTING AND ALIGNMENT (continued) 2. 5. 6. shall wear eye protection, gloves, and protective clothing at all times during mixing and placing of grout and aggregate. Grout forms shall be built of materials of adequate strength and shall be securely anchored and shored to withstand the pressure of the grout under working conditions. Epoxy grout forms must be coated with a paste wax, e.g., colored floor type wax, on areas that will come in contact with the. grout to keep them form becoming bonded to the grout. All wax shall be removed from the concrete, base plate, or soleplate before grouting. To permit easy clean-up, wax or cover all surfaces where grout may splash. Forms shall be liquid tight because epoxy will flow through even the smallest opening. Any open spaces or cracks in forms or at the joint between forms and the foundation shall be sealed off using'a suitable caulking compound. The top of the grout on baseplates with flange -type support shall be at the top of the flange. The top of the grout on baseplates with solid sides and soleplates shall be 1.0 inch above the bottom of the base plate or the underside of the soleplate. The outside top edges of the grout for all mounting plates shall be chamfered at 45° Foundation anchor bolt sleeves should be filled with a nonbonding, pliable material such as silicone rubber molding compound to prevent a water pocket around the anchor bolt. A split hose of approximately 1/4 inch thickness shall be placed around the exposed threads of anchor bolts to prevent direct contact between the epoxy grout and anchor bolts. Duct tape may be used in place of a split hose. The foundation shall be protected from rain since it is important that the foundation be clean and dry at the time of grouting. Normal grouting temperature shall be between 40°F and 90° F. Due to the accelerated rate of curing at high temperature, the shading of the foundation from summer sunlight for at least 24 hours before and 48 hours after grouting may be required. In the hot summer weather, it is preferable to place the grout during the afternoon, so that the initial cure will occur during the cooler evening hours. The grouting materials, including the aggregate, shall be stored at temperatures below 90° F for 24 hours prior to mixing. In cold weather, the grouting materials (including the aggregate) shall be stored at a temperature above 70°F for 24 hours prior to mixing. When the temperature is below 65°F, the grout manufacturer shall be consulted before mixing and placing the grout. However, for best results in cold weather, fabricate a temporary shelter with minimum of three feet clearance around the perimeter of the base plate or soleplate to be grouted and prewarm the base plate or soleplate and foundation. When prewarming the installation, use convection -type space heating equipment and be careful not to overheat localized areas. Do not use radiant heating or open steam. Radiant heating warms the grout upper surface more than the lower surface. The grout surface therefore cures in a thermally expanded state, and after dissipation of the heat, produces stresses that tends to make the grout "curl -up", resulting in cracks in concrete at the foundation corners just below the grout line. Epoxy grout has a limited shelf life and a limited pot life. Check the grout manufacturer's instructions prior to use. 15447 -Pump Installation, Grouting and Alignment 15447 - 4 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 I U I I I. I I U I L I I I [1 L I SECTION 15447 - PUMP INSTALLATION, GROUTING AND ALIGNMENT (continued) E I 11 I I I I 9. 10. 12. Timing and proper mixing are the secrets to successful grouting. The grout supplier's instructions must be followed explicitly. Before mixing the components together, everything else shall be ready — surfaces cleaned and dry, forms completed and sealed, pouring tools, rags, cleaning solvents available, and adequate manpower. Epoxy grout shall have a consistency very similar to that of a hydraulic cement slurry but with the self -leveling flow characteristics. Epoxy grouts can generally be handled with the same methods and tools that are used with flow grade sand -cement grouts. Epoxy grout can be manually mixed in a wheelbarrow using mortar -mixing hoes, or mixing can be done in small cement or mortar mixers. Over -mixing and/or violent mixing whips air into the grout, and results in weaker grout. Therefore, excessive air entrapment shall be avoided by limiting the motorized drum mixer to 40 RPM maximum. The actual placing of the epoxy grout can be accomplished by several means. Epoxy grout is very viscous; however it will flow and seek its own level given time and an ambient temperature above 35°F. Generally, it is best to start placing the grout at one end of the base plate or soleplate and work toward the other end in such a manner as to force the air out from beneath the base plate or soleplate to eliminate voids as the grout moves along. A funnel type box shall be used to provide a constant head on the grout which helps the flow under the base plate. Plywood strips, sheet metal strips, wires, and push rods may also be used to place the grout completely under base plate or soleplate, but care shall be. exercised in order to prevent working air into the grout. NOTE: Check the forms frequently for leaks. Leaks do not self -seal. If not stopped, they will cause voids. . Epoxy grout curing rate depends on the temperature and pour thickness. Lower ambient temperatures and very thin layers of grout require longer curing time. Forms may be removed when the epoxy grout is adequately cured. This generally occurs in approximately 12 to 24 hours at 75°F or when the surface becomes firm and not tacky to the touch. When an accelerator is used, follow the manufacturer's instructions to determine the typical curing times required. After the grout has cured, the base plate and soleplate shall be checked, for complete grouting by tapping the base plate or soleplate with a steel bar. IF grouting voids are found based on a "hollow" sound, holes shall be drilled in the base plate or soleplate deck at each end of the voids and the voids filled with epoxy grout without aggregate; one hole shall be used for the grout and the other hole as an air vent. A grease gun is normally used to force the grout into voids. When pressure injection is used, install dial indicators on the base plate or soleplate deck to confirm that epoxy placement is being accomplished without lifting the base plate or soleplate deck. The leveling shims or wedges used to level the base plate or soleplate shall be left in place after grouting. If for some reason they are removed after the grout has cured, the resulting voids shall be cleaned of loose material and filled with epoxy grout without aggregate. 15447 -Pump Installation, Grouting and Alignment 15447-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I SECTION 15447 - PUMP INSTALLATION; GROUTING AND ALIGNMENT (continued) If leveling screws are used, they shall be removed after the grout has cured to allow the full equipment weight to be distributed evenly over the grouted area. The holes shall be caulked with a suitable caulking compound. The foundation anchor bolts can now be retightened and the pump and driver installed. The pump and driver are now ready for alignment. B. Cement -Based Grout I. Section 03600 is a list of acceptable cement -base grout manufacturers. The grout manufacturer's requirements and instructions shall be strictly followed. Field mix cement -based grout is not acceptable under any circumstances. 2. Dry packing of cement -based grout is not acceptable. 3. Grout forms shall be built of materials of adequate strength and shall be securely anchored and shored to withstand the pressure of grout under working conditions. Forms shall be tight against all surfaces, and joints shall be sealed with suitable caulking compound. Grout forms must be coated with form oil on areas that will come in contact with the grout to keep them from becoming bonded to the grout. All oil shall be removed from the concrete, base plate, or soleplate before grouting. To permit easy cleanup, cover all surfaces where grout may splash. 4. Prior to placing the grout, the top surface of the concrete foundation shall be saturated with water for the time period recommended by the grout manufacturer. Excess surface water and water in the foundation bolt holes shall be removed just prior to placing the grout. 5. Foundation anchor bolt sleeves should be filled with a nonbonding, pliable material such as silicone molding compound to prevent direct contact between the grout and anchor bolts. Duct tape may be used in place of a split hose. 6. The temperature of the base plate or soleplate, supporting concrete foundation, and the grout shall be maintained between 40°F and 90°F during grouting and for a minimum of 24 hours thereafter. 7. The temperature of the base plate or soleplate, supporting concrete foundation, and the grout shall be maintained between 40°F and 90°F during grouting and for a minimum of 24 hours thereafter. 8. Grout shall be mixed with only water to produce the desired consistency according to the procedures recommended by the manufacturer. 9. The placement of the grout shall be rapid and continuous so as to avoid cold joints under the base plate or soleplate. Generally, it is best to start placing the grout at one end of the base plate or soleplate and work toward the other end in such a manner as to force the air out from beneath the base plate or soleplate to eliminate voids as the grout moves along. A floating tower is very helpful in forcing grout underneath by simply applying pressure on top. Plywood strips, sheet metal strips, wires, and push rods may also be used to place the grout completely under the base plate or soleplate, but care shall be exercised in order to prevent working air into the grout. 10. Grout shall be cut back to the bottom outer edge of the mounting plate and tapered to the existing concrete. The top of the grout on baseplates with flange -type support shall be at the top of the flange. The top of the grout on baseplates with solid sides and soleplates shall be 1.0 inch above the bottom 15447 -Pump Installation, Grouting and Alignment 15447 - 6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 Lam' I E L I El I I H I n I n I 7 I SECTION 15447 - PUMP INSTALLATION, GROUTING AND ALIGNMENT (continued) of the base plate or the underside of the soleplate. The outside top edges of the grout shall be chamfered at 45°F. 11. After the grout has reached an initial set (the grout can be cut with a steel trowel and will stand up without support), it should be trimmed back to the level indicated on the drawings. 12. Grout shall be cured according to the manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. 13. After the grout has cured, the mounting plate shall be checked for complete grouting by tapping the base plate or soleplate with a steel bar. If grouting voids are found based on a "hollow" sound, holes shall be drilled in the base plate or soleplate deck at each end of the voids and the voids filled with epoxy grout without aggregate; on hole shall be use for grout and the other used as an air vent. A grease gun is normally used to force the grout into voids. When pressure injection is used, install dial indicators on the base plate or soleplate deck to confirm that epoxy placement is being accomplished without lifting the mounting plate deck. 14. Forms shall remain in place for a minimum of 24 hours except where form removal is needed to trip back grout. 15. The leveling shims or wedges used to level the base plate or soleplate shall be left in place after grouting. If for some reason they are removed after the grout has cured, the resulting voids shall be cleaned of loose material and filled with grout without aggregate. If leveling screws are used, they shall be removed after the grout has cured to allow the full equipment weight to be distributed evenly over the grouted area. The holes shall be caulked with putty. The foundation anchor bolts can now be retightened and the pump and driver installed. The pump and driver are now ready for alignment. C. Alignment: 1. The reverse indicator method of alignment shall be used on all pumps and drivers unless otherwise specifically approved. 2. Mount the equipment on the mounting plate assuring that there is a minimum 1/8 inch thick shim pack under each support pad of the pump (only when mounted on soleplates) and driver(s). Shims shall be made using stainless steel and the number of shims composing each shim pack shall be held to a minimum. Shims shall be slotted and cover the entire equipment support surface; stepped or tapered shims are not permitted. The Contractor shall provide shims when the pump vendor does not mount the driver. 3. Measure and adjust the distance between the driver and the pump shaft ends (D.B.S.E.). This distance shall be in accordance with the pump layout drawing and within the tolerance provided by the coupling manufacturer. The D.B.S.E. shall be set with the pump and driver shafts pulled together for turbine drives and motor drives with antifriction bearings. For motor drives with sleeve bearings, the D.B.S.E. shall be set with the motor shaft on its magnetic center. 4. Both the driver and pump shafts shall be checked for mechanical run -out using a dial indicator. Mechanical run -out shall not exceed 0.002 inches total indicator reading (TIR). Locating cams on mechanical seals must be rotated out of the way prior to shaft rotation. ' 15447 -Pump Installation, Grouting and Alignment 15447-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15447 - PUMP INSTALLATION. GROUTING AND ALIGNMENT (continued) 5. Initial alignment shall be made at ambient temperature and "pipe -free", no pipe forces or weight on the equipment (pump and turbine flanges shall be unbolted). 6. To eliminate adding mechanical run -out to alignment error, indicator readings shall be taken by turning the pump and driver shafts together. 7. Tighten the equipment hold down bolts and recheck the alignment; adjust as necessary. Check for a "soft foot" by loosening each hold-down bolt in turn while measuring with a dial indicator movement between machine foot and soleplate or base plate. If movement or loosening a nut exceeds approximately 0.001 inch (0.025 millimeters) at any foot, shim changes should be made to eliminate the "soft foot" and alignment rechecked before proceeding. 8. Alignment shall be checked and recorded after both bolt -up of all the piping to the pump and bolt up of all the piping to the driver(s). No significant strain shall be present as indicated by the pump-driver(s) alignment. The "pipe -free" alignment shall not change by more than 0.001 inch. Adjust the piping as necessary to meet this requirement. NOTE: Where "cold set" has been included in the piping design, the alignment shall be checked and the tolerances met after the system is at temperature. 9. See Paragraph 2.04 for preoperational checks before the pump and driver are coupled up. 10. The Contractor shall record all alignment readings for each pump installation and supply a copy of these readings to the Engineer. 11. Pipe -free and pipe bolted -up) checks shall be witnessed and approved by Engineer. 12. After the final alignment has been approved, the support pads for the pumps and drivers shall be drilled at two locations and tapered dowel pins with threaded ends to facilitate removal shall be installed. Unless specifically located by the equipment manufacturer, the dowel pins shall be placed as shown in Figure 1. ' FIGURE 1 • MOTOR ' END SUCTION PUMP BETWEEN BEARING PUMP SOLEPLATE MOUNTED 1 BETWEEN BEARING PUMP BASEPLATE MOUNTED • DOWEL LOCATION i 15447 -Pump Installation, Grouting and Alignment 15447 - 8 RUN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 15447 - PUMP INSTALLATION, GROUTING AND ALIGNMENT (continued) 2.04 PREOPERATIONAL INSTRUCTIONS AND CHECKS: A. For packed pumps with an external gland oil supply not flushed by product, the gland I Li I I I LI I oil supply piping shall be cleaned by oil or solvent flushing prior to connecting to the pump. The external gland oil system shall be oil flushed at the design flow rate at a temperature of 160°F (or lower, as component design dictates) using the system pump and lint -free cloth filter bags at all packing inlet connections; oil shall be circulated for a minimum of four hours. The filter bags shall be examined and cleaned at 30 -minute intervals. Flushing shall be continued until there is no evidence of particle pickup for two consecutive 30 -minute periods. For pumps with tandem mechanical seals, the overhead reservoir and all flush oil supply piping shall be thoroughly cleaned by oil flush prior to connecting the pump. It is important for good seal or packing performance that dirt and/or foreign debris not be introduced into the seal or packing cavity. B. NOTE: Pumps with an external seal flush shall not be flushed out, steamed out, pressure tested, or operated without the seal gland oil system in operation at the specified level. C. The flushing and steaming of pumps shall be held to a minimum period of time to: I. Minimize the amount of debris entering the seal cavity, and 2. Prevent destroying the static seal elements by overheating. Static seal elements shall not be heated above the temperature listed below. Element Material Degree F Buna-N 225 Florocarbons 475 Neoprene 175 Viton 375 Kalrez 475 D. All cooling water piping on pumps shall be flushed and connected prior to operation. E. Prior to operation, any lube oil in bearing housings and constant level oilers shall be drained out and new, clean lube oil added, and the proper oil level established. Verify that the oil level in the bearing housing is correct and that the constant level oiler is functioning properly. F. If a separate lube oil system is provided, the system shall be cleaned and flushed, and all alarms and shutdown devices shall be set and tested prior to operating equipment. G. Drivers shall be power -rotated to check for proper direction of rotation prior to coupling to the driven equipment. Gear type coupling halves installed on drivers shall be provided with a solo plate during rotational check. H. Couplings shall be installed (and may require lubrication) per coupling manufacturer's instructions. I. The coupling guard shall be installed prior to rotating any shaft under power. 15447 -Pump Installation, Grouting and Alignment 15447 -9 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 U I SECTION 15447 - PUMP INSTALLATION, GROUTING AND ALIGNMENT (continued) ' 2.05 INITIAL OPERATIONAL CHECKS: A. The Engineer shall witness and check, after temperatures have stabilized, that the i pumps and drivers are free from excessive noise and vibration, seal or packing leakage, piping vibration, oil leaks, etc. Appropriate corrections shall be made promptly by the Contractor. When necessary, the appropriate equipment manufacturer's serviceman shall be called in to assist. END OF SECTION 15447 ' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 15447 -Pump Installation, Grouting and Alignment 15447 - 10 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15500 - ODOR CONTROL CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM ARTICLE 1— GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemen- tal Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section. 1.02 SCOPE: A. Provide one (1) odor control chemical storage and feed system for the control of hy- drogen sulfide at the Fayetteville, AR Hamestring Lift Station and Force Mains, as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. B. Provide start-up, training and construction services and performance testing associ- ated with the equipment. C. All items furnished by the equipment supplier under this section are for installation by the Contractor. D. The chemical feed system shall consist of the following major components: 1. Chemical Storage Tank 2. Chemical Feed Controls 3. Chemical Feed Pumps 4. All piping and appurtenances required for a complete system 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. All components of the chemical feed system shall be provided by a single manufac- turer who shall have sole -source responsibility for the equipment elements detailed here -in. B. The manufacturer of the systems shall be recognized in the design and production of chemical feed systems. Upon request, the manufacturer shall provide with the sub- mittal data, a list of five (5) chemical feed system installations associated with the treatment of hydrogen sulfide and other malodorous compounds. The list shall in- clude contact names, telephone numbers and length of service for each named instal- lation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit information to establish compliance with the specifications in accordance with the provisions of Section 01330 Submittals. I. Dimensional drawings showing plan and elevation views of the system and all applicable connections. 2. Details of all external termination points. 3. List of Materials of Construction. 4.. Statement of warranty in accordance with Section 3.03. B. All deviations and/or exceptions to this specification must be detailed and explained with the reason for the deviation and the effect of the deviation on the operation and/or performance of the equipment. C. Equipment booklet including: I. Equipment data sheets. 15500 -Chemical Feed System 15500 - 1 RN. Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15500 - ODOR CONTROL CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM (continued) 2. MSDS Sheets for chemicals to be supplied. 3. Performance data. 4. Descriptive literature and bulletins. 5. Customer contact list with telephone numbers (minimum of 10 contacts from similar facilities). 6. Operation and maintenance manual with installation, start-up and mainte- nance instructions. Submit after approval of equipment and prior to ship- ment. 1.05 OPERATING CONDITIONS: A. All components of the systems shall be compatible with the conditions and chemicals to which they may be subjected during normal operation of the system. Compounds with which the materials of construction must be compatible include, but are not lim- ited to: 1. Ferric Sulfate 2. Ferrous Sulfate 3. Calcium Nitrate 4. Hydrogen Sulfide 1.06 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: A. The system shall be capable of removing hydrogen sulfide in solution to a level of less than 0.5 ppm at the Hamestring force main discharge point in the Fayetteville Westside Wastewater Treatment Plant. ARTICLE2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. The chemical feed system shall be U.S. Filter Davis Products, or equal. The chemi- cal to be supplied shall be U.S. Filter Davis Products Odo-FreeTM , or equal. 2.02 CHEMICAL STORAGE TANK: A. The chemical storage tank shall be double -wall construction and shall have the fol- lowing capacity and approximate dimensions: Parameter Requirement Nominal Capacity (gallons) 6,550 Diameter (feet, inches) 9'-11" Height (feet, inches) 15'-6" Empty Weight @ounds) 4,200 B. The chemical storage tank shall be constructed of Rotationally Molded High -Density Crosslinked Polyethylene (HDXLPE). The HDXLPE tank shall be manufactured by the rotational molding process in accordance with ASTM D 1998-93 Standard Speci- fication for Polyethylene Upright Storage Tanks, Type I only. Rotational molding shall be defined as a three -stage process consisting of loading the mold with pow- dered resin, fusing the resin by heating while rotating the mold about more than one axis, and cooling and removing the molded article. 15500 -Chemical Feed System 15500-2 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 I n I I I I II I I n 1 I I I SECTION 15500 - ODOR CONTROL CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM (continued) IC. The molding powder used shall be Marlex CL -250 or CL -200 as manufactured by Phillips 66, or powders of equal physical and chemical properties. Ii. The polyethylene shall be virgin material. 2. The polyethylene shall have a stress -cracking resistance of 500 h minimum F50 in accordance with Test Method D 1693, Condition A, full-strength ' stress -cracking agent. The test specimens shall be rotationally molded. The temperature shall be 390° F (197 °C) and the platen shall be kept closed un- der full pressure for 5 minutes at the specified temperature in order to bring ' about the crosslinking reaction. The conditions for rotational molding shall be similar to the conditions used for molding a vessel from this polyethylene. D. The plastic shall contain no fillers. All plastic shall contain an ultraviolet stabilizer at ' a level adequate to give protection for the intended service life of the vessel, mini- mum of 0.25 percentage. This stabilizer shall be compounded in the polyethylene. Pigments must be compounded at the same time of resin manufacture. ' E. Mechanical Properties: The nominal value for the properties of the materials shall be based on the molded parts: I I I I Li I I I F G Property ASTM Value Units Density D105 59(0.937-0.944) Lb/ft3 (S.G.) ESCR spec. thickness D1693 900-1000 Hrs. 0.125" Tensile Strength Ulti- mate 2"/min. D638 Type IV 2600 PSI Elongation at Break 2"/min. D638 Type IV 450 % Vicat Softening Temp. D1525 255 °F Brittleness Temp. D746 -180 °F .Flexural Modulus D790 100,000-110,000 PSI Design Parameters 1. Hoop Stress. The vessels shall be designed with a hoop stress value no greater than 600 psi at 100 °F with a safety factor of no less than 2, using the Barlow Formula for calculating wall thickness. 2. Wall Thickness. The minimum required wall thickness of the cylindrical shell at any fluid level shall be determined by the Barlow Formula. The wall thickness shall be based on the maximum temperature of the service. 3. Tank shall be designed to store up to 6,550 gallons of chemical with a spe- cific gravity of up to 1.8. Cut Edges: All edges where openings are cut into the vessel shall be trimmed smooth. 1 15500 -Chemical Feed System 15500-3 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 I. I SECTION 15500 - ODOR CONTROL CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM (continued) H. Appearance: Type 1 finished vessel walls shall be free, as commercially practicable of visual defects such as foreign inclusions, air bubbles, pinholes, pimples, crazing, cracking, and delaminations that will impair the serviceability of the vessel. I. Dimensions and Tolerance: The vessel diameter shall be measured externally. The tolerances on the outside diameter, including out of roundness, shall be plus or minus 1 percent. Measurement shall be taken in a vertical position. J. Fittings I . All fittings with the exception of the overfill protection site glass, shall be lo- cated on the tank top or dome. No penetration of the tank sidewall shall be made. 2. Plastic Fittings. Plastic fittings shall be "bulk -head" or "two -flange" style and shall be constructed of PVC. There shall be four bolts on any bolted flanges up to and including 3 inch, 8 bolts on fittings 4 inch - 8 inch diame- ter, and 12 bolts on 10 inch - 12 inch fittings. All bolts shall be all thread de- sign with heads completely encapsulated in polyethylene. The polyethylene encapsulation shall fully cover the bolt head and a minimum of 1/4" of the threads closest to the bolt head. The polyethylene shall be color coded to dis- tinguish bolt material: (Green -316 grade S.S., Red-Hastelloy "C", Blue- Monel, Black -Titanium). Each bolt shall have a gasket, which is on the in- side of the vessel. ' 3. Openings that are cut in vessel to install fittings shall not have sharp comers. Holes shall have minimum clearance to insure best performance of fittings. 4. For all flanged connectors, the flange drilling and bolting shall be in accor- dance with ANSI/ASME B-1 6.5 for 150 -psi pressure class straddling the principal centerline of the vessel. K. Tank Manway Covers I. Manway covers shall be 24 inch diameter. 2. Manway covers shall have a bolted cover and gasket. 2.03 CHEMICAL FEED CONTROLS: A. General: The operation of the Chemical Feed System shall be controlled from a Control Panel. All equipment control switches, pilot lights, controllers, etc. and the chemical feed pumps shall be housed in this panel. The control system shall be UL Approved and shall bear the UL Listed Enclosed Industrial Control Panel Label. B. Enclosure: The control panel enclosure shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel and shall be rated NEMA 3R. It shall be equipped with a door with a continuous hinge. The hinged door shall have two latches and shall be capable of locking via a padlock. The enclosure shall be mounted on the control stand, which shall contain the calibra- tion stand. C. The Control Box shall contain the following: 2- 24 -Hour Time Clocks 1- 15 -Amp Circuit Breaker, 115 volt 1- Ground Fault Receptacle 5- On/Off Switches with LED Indicator Lights 2- Chemical Feed Pumps 1- Cooling Fan 15500 -Chemical Feed System 15500-4 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 P SECTION 15500 - ODOR CONTROL CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM (continued) ' 2- Dry Contact to Receive Signal from Remote Source ID. Controls Layout: All manually operated controls (control switches, pilot lights, etc.) shall be located on a panel behind the enclosure door. The panel shall be outfitted with a main power disconnect located in the Control Stand. E. Standards: All control system design, fabrication, and wiring shall conform to the standards of Underwriter's Laboratories, National Electrical Code, and any other ap- plicable federal, state, or local codes. IF. Chemical Feed Pumps: The bellows pump shall be controlled by a three -position HAND/OFF/AUTO switch. When in the AUTO position the pump shall be con- trolled by a timer. The timer shall turn the pump on and off based upon preset time ' intervals. When in the HAND position the pump shall run, regardless of the preset time interval. Either one or both chemical feed pumps may turn on or off at preset speeds and preset times. ' The two chemical feed pumps shall be U.S. Filter Davis Products Bellows Pumps, Model 15908-001, 63 - 630 mL/min flow range, maximum discharge pressure of 20 psig, or equal. ' The pumps shall be self -priming capable of suction lifts, when dry, up to seven (7) feet, and with bellows full, they will prime up to twenty (20) feet pumping any of the chemicals listed in Section 1.05. The flow rate of each pump shall be adjustable by ' diameter of bellows and adjustment of stroke length. The pump suction and dis- charge shall be ' 3/8" ID polypropylene barbed connection for "T" tubing. A 1-1/2" wye strainer will be installed. Pump construction materials shall be: ' Bellows Polypropylene Poppet valves EPT O -rings EPT Springs Hastelloy C The pump motors shall be totally enclosed 115 volt, 60 Hz, 0.034 HP, single-phase I. and shall be rated for continuous duty. G. Pump control box shall be mounted on a 316 stainless -steel pedestal control stand. ' H. The control stand shall include a calibration cylinder used to measure the chemical being injected into the system. A 3 way valve shall be located at the top and bottom of the calibration tube to facilitate flow measurement. Access inside this pedestal ' shall be accomplished through a door located on the front of the pedestal. Instruc- tions for use of this cylinder shall be permanently affixed to the interior of the enclo- sure. ' 1. A main power disconnect shall be located in the control stand. 2.04 PIPING AND APPURTENANCES: ' A. The pump discharge piping shall be''/2", High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Tubing. 15500 -Chemical Feed System 15500 - 5 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15500 - ODOR CONTROL CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM (continued) B. All suction piping shall be ``/1" Schedule 80 PVC. All valves, fittings, and connectors shall be Schedule 80 PVC. C. All fill line piping shall be 2" Schedule 80 PVC. All fill line valves, fittings, and connectors shall be Schedule 80 PVC. D. Fill line shall have a 2" stainless -steel male camlock with a 2" plastic female camlock cap. E. All chemical feed seals shall be compatible with the chemicals to be used in the regular operation, maintenance, and cleaning of the feed system. F. All fittings shall be solvent -welded or threaded. G. There shall be a spill containment basin and a piping sump for the fill port. H. A leak detection system shall be included to alert the Owner of a leak in the double - wall interstice. 1. All discharge piping, valves, and fittings shall be protected from freezing via temperature controlled heat tracing and pipe insulation. J. A tank liquid level indicator shall be provided. The system shall utilize a signal generated from a pressure transducer to measure the tank liquid level. A digital display shall be provided to indicate liquid level locally. The system shall include a 4 — 20 mA output signal to be sent to a remote PLC for tank level monitoring. 2.05 SPARE PARTS: A. The manufacturer shall supply four (4) spare metering pump bellows. ARTICLE 3 —EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES. START-UP AND TRAINING SERVICES: A. Installation of the systems shall be completed by the Contractor in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions. A manufacturer's technical representative shall be available for consultation during the installation and shall visit the site at least once for a minimum of two (2) days. B. Start-up of the system shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer who shall fur- nish competent personnel to complete this activity. Start-up will commence follow- ing a visual inspection and check out of the system by the manufacturer's technical representative. The start-up person shall be on -site fora minimum of two (2) days. C. Operator training on the chemical feed system shall be conducted in accordance with Section 01700. D. A 2" Schedule 40 PVC drain shall be installed to drain the spill containment basin to the lift station wet well, as shown on the drawings. E. The ½" HDPE discharge line shall be encased in a 4" Schedule 80 PVC casing from the control box to the lift station wet well discharge point, as shown on the drawings. F. The Contractor shall fill the chemical storage tank with a minimum of 6,000 gallons of OdoFreeTM chemical prior to start-up and testing. 15500 -Chemical Feed System 15500-6 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 1 U I I I n I L SECTION 15500 - ODOR CONTROL CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM (continued) 3.02 SHOP TESTING AND PERFORMANCE TESTING: A. Prior to shipping the equipment, the Manufacturer shall perform shop tests. These tests shall include at a minimum: I. Visual inspection of all equipment. 2. Complete assembly, start-up, and "wet test" of feed pumps and calibration piping. B. Performance testing shall be completed following system installation to demonstrate reduction of hydrogen sulfide to meet the requirements of Section 1.06 of this speci- fication. If required, the Manufacturer shall make any changes to the system, at his own expense, that may be necessary to meet the performance requirements of the system. C. Performance testing shall be conducted to demonstrate the piping system is air -tight and the metering pumps will prime themselves and deliver the design flow rate to the system. 3.03 WARRANTY: A. The manufacturer shall warrant that the systems shall be supplied in accordance with these specifications and shall perform as described herein. The manufacturer shall warrant the systems to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a pe- riod of one (1) year after installation. B. The manufacturer shall warrant the integrity of the chemical storage tank for a period of five (5) years from the date of installation. END OF SECTION 15500 15500 -Chemical Feed System 15500 - 7 RJN. Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15671- AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and ' Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 SUMMARY: •' A. This Section includes the following: I. Air-cooled condensing units a. Division 15, Refrigerant Piping ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; ' dimensions; required clearances; methods for assembling components; furnished specialties; accessories; and installation and startup instructions for each model indicated. ' B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. IC. Maintenance Data: For each condensing unit to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1. Include a parts list for each condensing unit, control, and accessory; troubleshooting maintenance guide; and servicing and preventive maintenance procedures and schedule. D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. I1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this ' Section that is listed and labeled. a. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. b. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized ' Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for ' Mechanical Refrigeration." C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. Comply with UL 303, "Refrigeration and Air -Conditioning Condensing and I Compressor Units." 1.05 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate installation of equipment curbs, equipment supports, and wall penetrations. 1 15671 -Air -Cooled Condensing Units 15671-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15671 - AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS (continued) 1.06 WARRANTY: A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: A written warranty, executed by Contractor and signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials and workmanship within the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have been followed. a. Warranty Period: Manufacturers standard, on all components of the condenser, but not less than one (1) year, except on the compressor. A minimum five (5) year warranty is required on the compressor. Warranty period to begin after issuance of substantial completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Div. B. McQuay International. C. Trane Co. (The); North American Commercial Group. D. York International Corp. E. Dunham Bush, Inc. 2.02 UNIT DESCRIPTION: A. Provide and install as shown on the plans factory assembled, factory run tested, air- cooled compressor condensing units in the quantity specified. Each unit shall ' consist of hermetic compressor(s), air-cooled condenser section, control system, suction and liquid stub -out connections, sightglass, filter/drier and all components necessary for safe and controlled unit operation when connected to the specified low side equipment. ' 2.03 DESIGN REOUIREMENTS: A. Performance: Refer to the schedule of performance on the drawings. The unit shall be capable of stable operation to a minimum of 50 percent of full load without hot gas bypass. ' 2.04 CONDENSING UNIT COMPONENTS: A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of casing, compressors, condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls. B. Compressor: Hermetic compressor designed for service with crankcase sight glass, crankcase heater, and backseating service access valves on suction and discharge ports. a. Capacity Control: Cylinder unloading (down to 25%). I 15671 -Air -Cooled Condensing Units 15671-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15671- AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS (continued) C. Condenser: Seamless copper -tube, aluminum -fin coil, with separate and independent refrigeration circuit for each compressor. Include liquid accumulator and subcooling circuit and backseating liquid -line service access valve. Factory test coils at 450 psig, then dehydrate by drawing a vacuum and fill with a holding charge of nitrogen. D. Condenser Fans: Propeller -type vertical discharge; direct drive. Include the following: a. Permanently lubricated ball -bearing motors. b. Separate motor for each fan. c. Motors with thermal -overload cutouts. d. Dynamically and statically balanced fan assemblies. e. Low Ambient Control: Factory -installed damper assembly, fan -speed control, or fan -cycling control. E. Operating and safety controls include the following: a. Manual reset, high-pressure cutout switches. b. Automatic reset, low-pressure cutout switches. c. Low oil pressure cutout switch. d. Compressor -winding thermostat cutout switch. e. 3 -leg, compressor -overload protection. f. Control transformer. g. Magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors. h. Automatic, nonrecycling pump down and a timing device to prevent excessive compressor cycling. F. Unit Casings: Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components and controls and with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives. Additional features include the following: a. Steel, galvanized or zinc coated, for exposed casing surfaces, treated and finished with manufacturer's standard paint coating. b. Lifting lugs to facilitate rigging of units. c. Gasketed control panel door. d. Unfused disconnect switch, factory mounted and wired, for single external electrical power connection. 2.05 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES: A. The following options are to be included: a. Low ambient head pressure control to 0°F. b. Spring vibration isolators for field installation. 15671 -Air -Cooled Condensing Units 15671-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15671- AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS (continued) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's requirements, shop drawings, and contract documents. B. Adjust and level unit in alignment on supports. C. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with drawings. D. Evacuate system and charge with refrigerant in accordance with standard practice. E. Coordinate electrical installation with electrical contractor. F. Coordinate controls with control contractor. G. Provide all appurtenances required to insure a fully operational and functional chiller. 3.02 START-UP: A. Ensure proper system charge of refrigerant and oil. B. Provide testing and starting of system, and instruct the Owner in its proper operation and maintenance. END OF SECTION 15671 15671 -Air -Cooled Condensing Units 15671-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15733 - OUTDOOR AIR CONDITIONERS Li L Li I L I I Il I I Li II I n 11 PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.02•,. SUMMARY: A. This Section includes the following outdoor air conditioners: 1. Cooling only units larger than 20 tons (70 kW). 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer: 1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 2. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Field quality -control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For outdoor air conditioners to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.04 DUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of rooftop air conditioners and are based on the specific system indicated. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." D. Energy -Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings." E. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings." F. Comply with NFPA 54 for gas -fired furnace section. G. ARI Certification: Units shall be ARI certified and listed. 15733 -Outdoor Air Conditioners 15733-I RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I L SECTION 15733 - OUTDOOR AIR CONDITIONERS (continued) H. ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities Less Than 135,000 Btuh: Rate outdoor air -conditioner capacity according to ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air -Conditioning and Air -Source Heat Pump Equipment." 1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment." ' 1.05 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. ' Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. 1.06 WARRANTY: A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to ' replace components of outdoor air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. ' I. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Warranty Period for Solid -State Ignition Modules: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Warranty Period for Variable -Speed Fan Motors: Manufacturer's standard. 6. Warranty Period for Electronic Thermostats: Manufacturer's standard. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS: ' A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are ' packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fan Belts: One set. 2. Filters: One set. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.02 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS LARGER THAN 20 TONS (70 kW): A. Manufacturers I. Carrier Corp. 2. Engineered Air 3. Lennox Industries Inc. 4. McQuay International 5. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group 6. YORK International Corporation 1 15733 -Outdoor Air Conditioners 15733-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15733 - OUTDOOR AIR CONDITIONERS (continued) I I I I B. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting of compressor, indoor and outside refrigerant coils, indoor fan and outside coil fan, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers. C. Casing: Manufacturer's standard double -wall galvanized sheet metal construction with exterior enamel paint finish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 1/2 -inch- thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs. D. Indoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable motor sheaves, grease -lubricated ball bearings, and motor. Mount fan and motor assembly on base with spring isolators having 2 -inch deflection. E. Return -Air Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable motor sheaves, grease -lubricated ball bearings, and motor. Mount fan and motor assembly on base with spring isolators having 2 -inch deflection. F. Outside Coil Fan: Propeller type, directly driven by permanently lubricated motor. G. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum -plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized -steel casing with equalizing -type vertical distributor and thermal expansion valve; tested to 450 psig and leak tested to 300 psig with air under water. Insulate coil section. Provide phenolic epoxy corrosion -protection coating to both coils. H. Compressor(s): Number as scheduled hermetic reciprocating compressors with integral vibration isolators, internal overcurrent and overtemperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater. I. Refrigeration System: 1. Compressor(s). 2. Outside coil and fan. 3. Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator. 4. Check valves. 5. Expansion valves with replaceable thermostatic elements. 6. Refrigerant dryers. 7. High-pressure switches. 8. Low-pressure switches. 9. Thermostats for coil freeze-up protection during low -ambient temperature operation or loss of air. 10. Independent refrigerant circuits. 11. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines. 12. Charge of refrigerant. 13. Timed Off Control: Automatic -reset control shuts compressor off after five minutes. 14. Refrigerant Circuits: Interlaced refrigerant -coil circuiting with circuit for each compressor. 15. Capacity Control: Hot -gas bypass valve and piping on one compressor. 16. Compressor Motor Overload Protection: Manual reset. 17. Antirecycling Timing Device: Prevents compressor restart for five minutes after shutdown. ' 15733 -Outdoor Air Conditioners 15733-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15733 - OUTDOOR AIR CONDITIONERS (continued) 18. Adjustable, Low -Ambient, Head -Pressure Control: Designed to operate at temperatures as low as 0 deg F by cycling outside coil fans and controlling speed of last fan of each circuit. 19. Oil -Pressure Switch: Designed to shut down compressors on low oil pressure. ' J. Filters: 2 -inch- thick, fiberglass, pleated, throwaway filters in filter rack. K. Outside -Air Damper: Linked damper blades, for 0 to 25 percent outside air, with fully modulating, spring -return damper motor and hood. L. Economizer: Return- and outside -air dampers with neoprene seals, outside -air filter, and hood. 1. Damper Motor: Fully modulating spring return with adjustable minimum position. 2. Control: Electronic -control system uses mixed -air and outside -air temperature to adjust mixing dampers. 3. Leakage: Maximum leakage 2.5 percent at nominal airflow of 400 cfm per ton with 1 -inch wg pressure differential. M. Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit -mounted , disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control -circuit transformer with built-in circuit breaker. N. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features: I. Indoor fan on/off delay. 2. Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption. 3. Service relay output. 4. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage. 5. Field -adjustable control parameters. 6. Defrost control. 7. Economizer control. 8. Low -ambient control, allowing operation down to 0 deg F. • ' 9. Return -air temperature limit. 10. Smoke alarm with smoke detector installed in return air and heat detector in supply duct. 11. Low -refrigerant pressure control. 12. Digital display of outside temperature, supply -air temperature, return -air temperature, economizer damper position, indoor -air quality, and control parameters. O. Electromechanical Thermostat: Staged heating and cooling on subbase with manual system switch (on -heat -auto -cool) and fan switch (auto -on). 1. Fan -proving switch to lock out unit if fan fails. 2. Dirty -filter switch. P. Optional Accessories: 1. Service Outlets: Two, 115-V, ground -fault, circuit -interrupter type. 2. Dirty -filter switch. 15733 -Outdoor Air Conditioners 15733-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15733 - OUTDOOR AIR CONDITIONERS (continued) 2.03 MOTORS: A. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 15 Section "Motors." B. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated; if not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. C. Controllers, electrical devices, and wiring are specified in Division 16 Sections. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances. Install according to ARI Guideline B. Install unit on slab on grade. 3.02 CONNECTIONS: r L I P I I [1 I I A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: I. Install ducts to termination at unit. 2. Install normal -weight, 3000 psi, compressive strength (28 -day) concrete mix, 4 inches thick. Concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified in Division 3. C. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls. D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3i03 FIELD DUALITY CONTROL: A. Perform the following field quality -control tests and inspections and prepare test reports: I. After installing air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie -down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. ' 15733 -Outdoor Air Conditioners 15733-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15733 - OUTDOOR AIR CONDITIONERS (continued) ' 3.04 STARTUP SERVICE: A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written I instructions and do the following: 1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. 3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled outside coil, and fans. 4. Inspect internal insulation. 5. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 7. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 8. Verify that filters are installed. 9. Clean outside coil and inspect for construction debris. 10. Adjust vibration isolators. 11. Lubricate bearings on fan. 12. Inspect fan -wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. 13. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 14. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Start refrigeration system in summer only. b. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report. 15. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. ' 16. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 17. Calibrate thermostats. 18. Adjust and inspect high -temperature limits. 19. Inspect outside -air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return -air dampers. 20. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following: a. Coil leaving -air, dry- and wet -bulb temperatures b. Coil entering -air, dry- and wet -bulb temperatures c. Outside -air, dry-bulb temperature d. Outside -air -coil, discharge -air, dry-bulb temperature 21. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown, 22. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve. a. Supply -air volume b. Return -air volume c. Relief -air volume d. Outside -air intake volume 23. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following: a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot -gas pressures b. Short circuiting of air through outside coil or from outside coil to outside -air intake I 15733 -Outdoor Air Conditioners 15733-6 RN Project No, 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 15733 - OUTDOOR AIR CONDITIONERS (continued) 24. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot -light operation and failure modes. Inspect the following: a. Freezestat operation b. Economizer to limited outside -air changeover c. Alarms 25. After startup and performance testing, change filters, and cooling and outside coils, lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and inspect operation of power vents. 3.05 ADJUSTING: A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. B. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges as indicated. END OF SECTION 15733 15733 -Outdoor Air Conditioners 15733-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I ' SECTION 15734 - DEHUMIDIFIER UNITS PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and I Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 SUMMARY: ' A. Provide all required equipment and accessories for a complete Desiccant • Dehumidifier. ' B. Dehumidification shall be accomplished by a desiccant by absorption of water vapor to maintain humidity control level independent of load variations within design limit. C. Unit(s) shall be capable and designed for year round 24 hours a day operation and ' requiring only connections of ductwork, utilities and remote sensor/controllers and monitor. Units to be shipped with coils stubbed in case of remote condensing units. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: ' A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished ' specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and ' size of each field connection. Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. ' 2. General arrangement drawings with overall dimensions showing all major components with overall dimensions, utility and duct work connections, bolting arrangement, operating weight and required service and equipment removal clearances. 3. Control diagram(s) for complete system, to include electric circuits interface points, all control set points. ' 4. Technical data on design operating inlet and outlet conditions, air flows with flow diagram showing air volumes and conditions throughout the system, dehumidification capacity. 5. Major component literature and data (motors, desiccant wheel, blowers, filters). C. Field quality -control test reports. ID. Operation and Maintenance Data: For dehumidifier units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. E. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section. 1.04 QUALITY. ASSURANCE: IA. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 15734 -Dehumidifier Units 15734-1 RJN PROJECT NO. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15734 - DEHUMIDIFIER UNITS (continued) 1.05 1.06 1.07 B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". C. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with AMCA standards. D. NRTL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of the air handling units, which have been listed and labeled by an NRTL and comply with NEMA standards. E. NRTL and NEC Compliance. COORDINATION: A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. WARRANTY: A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of rooftop air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard 2. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard 3. Warranty Period for Variable -Speed Fan Motors: Manufacturer's standard 4. Warranty Period for Electronic Thermostats: Manufacturer's standard EXTRA MATERIALS: A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 2. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 2.02 Fan Belts: One set for each belt -drive fan Filters: One set of filters for each unit MANUFACTURERS: A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. DEHUMIDIFIER UNITS: A. Manufacturers: 1. 2. 15734 -Dehumidifier Units Dryomatic SEMCO Dehumidifier Corporation of America 15734-2 RJN PROJECT NO. 11-1875-00 I I I I I 1J I II I I I I1 I 1t I. ' SECTION 15734 - DEHUMIDIFIER UNITS (continued) B. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting of compressor, outside refrigerant coils, desiccant wheel, outside coil fan, ' refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers. C. Casing: Unit shall be designed for outdoor installation. Standard panels shall be ' 20 -gauge galvanized steel, lined with'h-inch- (12 -mm-) thick neoprene insulation where required. A structural base that forms a pan to ensure weather tight construction shall support the unit housing. Removable lifting lugs shall be provided at the unit base. A galvanized steel sheet metal weather hood, bird screen, and an ' automatic damper with electric operator shall protect the outdoor air intake opening. All regular service access points shall be reached through full height hinged access doors. The exterior of the unit shall be coated with an epoxy primer and a ' polyurethane enamel painting system rated to meet a 1,500 -hour salt spray test. D. Outdoor Air Filters: Standard filter section shall consist of a side access filter rack ' with two-inch- (50 -mm-) thick pleated filters factory supplied and installed. E. Indoor Fan: Fan shall be single inlet backward curve plenum type. Fans shall incorporate a wheel; heavy gauge reinforced steel inlet plate with removable spun t inlet cone, structural steel frame, and direct drive motor to form a heavy-duty integral unit. All fan wheels shall be tapered spun wheel cones or shrouds providing stable flow and high rigidity. The wheels shall be non -overloading type. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fan ratings shall be based on tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard 210 and shall bear the AMCA Seal. Fan shall include an integral airflow station for system balancing and monitoring of performance. Fan motors shall be standard NEMA frame, high efficiency, with 1.15 ' service factor and open drip -proof enclosures. The unit access to the fan and motor shall be through a hinged access door with latches that require a tool for entry. IF. Desiccant Rotor: The desiccant rotor shall be uniform in nature, comprised of a corrugated substrate material either permanently impregnated or coated with a non - migrating adsorbent desiccant material. The desiccant shall be specifically selected for use as a reactivated desiccant suitable for regeneration with low-grade energy at or below 220°F. The rotor shall be suitable for direct gas flame regeneration or waste heat regeneration using a steam or hot water coil. Rotor media shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E-84 to document a flame and smoke generation index in ' accordance with NFPA-90A. The media shall be cleanable with water and light detergent, without degradation to the rotor. ' G. Compressors: Units shall have high efficiency direct -drive hermetic scroll type compressors, with centrifugal type oil pumps. Motor shall be suction gas-cooled and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10 percent of unit nameplate voltage. Internal overloads shall be provided with all scroll compressors. All models ' have crankcase heaters. Compressors shall have rotalock fittings that allow for a service port at the compressor suction and discharge points. A variable speed compressor shall serve the primary refrigeration circuit. On larger units requiring a ' second compressor, a constant speed compressor shall serve the secondary circuit. H. Refrigerant Circuits: Each refrigerant circuit has a thermal expansion device, service pressure ports and refrigerant line driers factory installed as standard. 15734 -Dehumidifier Units 15734-3 RJN PROJECT NO. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15734 - DEHUMIDIFIER UNITS (continued) Evaporator and Condenser Coils: The evaporator and condenser coils shall have internally rifled, copper tubes mechanically bonded to corrugated aluminum plate fins. All coils shall be pressure and leak tested. Sloped stainless -steel condensate drain pans are standard. J. Outdoor Fan: The outdoor fan(s) shall be direct -drive, statically and dynamically balanced, and draw -through in the vertical discharge position. The fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed and permanently lubricated. Fans shall have modulating capability either by staging of fans or use of A/C inverters. K. Unit Electrical: The unit shall be wired complete and ready to run with the connection of only one main high voltage power feed. Separate voltage feed for duct heater is required. Unit shall include all internal branch circuit and overload protection as required by UL 1995 and the National Electric Code. All internal low voltage circuits shall be fed from 24 -volt AC transformer connected to the high voltage power feed. Variable speed control where required for the indoor fan, outdoor fans, compressor and desiccant wheel shall be accomplished by the use of A/C inverters. L. Unit Controls: The unit shall be controlled by a dedicated DDC control system. This system shall be capable of operating the unit as a Dedicated Outdoor Air System (DOAS) or as a Total Conditioning System (TCS) as indicated on the schedules. The control system shall have the ability to communicate through the following protocols: BACnet, Modbus, LonTalk and Johnson N2. The TCS option shall include the zone sensors to be field installed by the installing contractor. 1. The control system shall include the ability to monitor the following status points: a. Status Points i. System on /off ii. Supply fan on /off iii. Compressor 1 on /off iv. Compressor 2 on / off (if a dual compressor unit) v. Compressor VFD status vi. Condenser fan status vii. Condenser fan VFD status viii. Regeneration fan on / off ix. Burner power on / of x. Reversing valve (if heat pump unit) 2. Additional performance state checkpoints can also be obtained if desired. These performance state points are: a. Performance State Points i. Outdoor air: airflow, temperature, dew point, relative humidity, and enthalpy ii. Return air: airflow, temperature, dew point, and relative humidity iii. Entering cooling coil: temperature, dew point, relative humidity, and enthalpy iv. Leaving cooling coil: temperature, dew point, and enthalpy v. Supply air: airflow, temperature, dew point, relative humidity, and enthalpy 15734 -Dehumidifier Units 15734-4 RJN PROJECT NO. 11-1875-00 II I I LII Li I I I I I I I I I I II II Ii I SECTION 15734 - DEHUMIDIFIER UNITS (continued) vi. Regeneration in: temperature vii. Regeneration out: temperature M. Roof Curb: The roof curb shall be designed to mate with the unit and provide support and a watertight installation when property installed. The roof curb design shall allow field -fabricated rectangular supply / return ductwork to be connected directly to the curb. An option for through the curb electrical connections shall be available. ' PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: P L 3.02 A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances. B. Unit Support: Install unit level on house keeping pad. Install flexible duct connectors and vibration isolation and seismic -control devices. IA. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings ' indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: IC. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls. D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." ' E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.03 FIELD DUALITY CONTROL: A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to ' inspect, test, and adjust field -assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing. ' B. Perform the following field quality -control tests and inspections and prepare test reports: I. After installing dehumidifier units and after electrical circuitry has been ' energized, test units for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie -down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. ' 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. 15734 -Dehumidifier Units 15734-5 RJN PROJECT NO. 11-1875-00 II SECTION 15734 - DEHUMIDIFIER UNITS (continued) ' 3.04 START-UP SERVICE: A. Complete installation and start-up checks according to manufacturer's written 1 instructions and do the following: 1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. 3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled outside coil, and fans. 4. Inspect internal insulation. ' 5. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 7. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 8. Verify that filters are installed. 9. Clean outside coil and inspect for construction debris. 10. Adjust vibration isolators. 11. Lubricate bearings on fan. 12. Inspect fan -wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. 13. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 14. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Start refrigeration system in summer only. b. Complete start-up sheets and attach copy with Contractor's start-up report. 15. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 16. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 17. Calibrate thermostats and humidistat. 18. Adjust and inspect high -temperature limits. ' 19. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following: a. Coil leaving -air, dry- and wet -bulb temperatures b. Coil entering -air, dry- and wet -bulb temperatures c. Outside -air, dry-bulb temperature d. Outside -air -coil, discharge -air, dry-bulb temperature e. Humidity in space 20. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown. 21. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. a. Supply -air volume b. Return -air volume c. Relief -air volume d. Outside -air intake volume 22. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following: a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot -gas pressures b. Short circuiting of air through outside coil or from outside coil to outside -air intake 23. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot -light operation and failure modes. Inspect the following: a. High -limit heat exchanger b. Freezestat operation 15734 -Dehumidifier Units 15734-6 RJN PROJECT NO. 11-1875-00 L SECTION 15734 - DEHUMIDIFIER UNITS (continued) 24. After start-up and performance testing, change filters, vacuum heat exchanger and cooling and coils, lubricate bearings and, adjust belt tension. 3.05 ADJUSTING: A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. B. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges as indicated. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION: A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain dehumidifier units. END OF SECTION 15734 15734 -Dehumidifier Units 15734-7 RJN PROJECT NO. 11-1875-00 L SECTION 15767 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS L I I I I 1.J I L PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes propeller unit heaters. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration. B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each unit type and configuration: 1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. 3. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. 4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories. C. Maintenance Data: For propeller unit heaters to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carrier Corp. 2. Dunham -Bush, Inc. 3. Engineered Air 4. McQuay International 5. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group ' 15767 -Propeller Unit Heaters 15767-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Li 1 SECTION 15767 - PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS (continued) ' 2.02 UNIT HEATERS: A. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in horizontal ' discharge configuration with horizontal, adjustable louvers in blow -through configuration. 2.03 MATERIALS: A. Casing: Galvanized steel, with removable panels. , B. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow -coat with baked -on primer and manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory -assembled and -tested propeller unit heater before shipping. 2.04 ELECTRIC -RESISTANCE HEATING ELEMENTS: A. Nickel -chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and 60=Hz hum, embedded ' in magnesium -oxide insulating refractory and sealed in high -mass steel or corrosion - resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends shall be enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature shall not exceed 550 deg F at any point during normal operation. I. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit controls for overtemperature protection of heaters. 2. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated. 2.05 FAN: A. Propeller with aluminum blades directly connected to motor. 2.06 FAN MOTORS: A. Motors, 1/2 hp and Smaller: Shaded -pole, multispeed motor with integral thermal - overload protection B. Motors, 3/4 hp and Larger: Totally enclosed with permanently lubricated ball bearings 2.07 ACCESSORIES: I A. Horizontal Configuration: Louver fm diffuser 2.08 CONTROLS: A. Control Devices: Unit -mounted fan -speed switch and thermostat 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL: ' A. Test propeller unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33. I I 5767 -Propeller Unit Heaters 15767-2 RJN Project No, 11-1875-00 SECTION 15767 - PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS (continued) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: A. Examine areas to receive propeller unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing -in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before propeller unit heater installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb. B. Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A. C. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with rubber -in -shear vibration isolators (rubber hangers). 3.03 A. Ground equipment. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. I I I I I I 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Testing: Perform the following field quality -control testing and report results in writing: 1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made. 3.05 CLEANING: A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. B. After installing units, clean propeller unit heaters internally according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Install new filters in each propeller unit heater within two weeks after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 15767 15767 -Propeller Unit Heaters 15767-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes rectangular, round (oval duct may be used in lieu of round), metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10 -inch wg. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, duct -mounted access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts 2. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles" 1.03 DEFINITIONS: A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k -Value): As defined in ASTM C 168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu. 1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k -Value): 0.26 1.04 A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air -moving and - distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Engineer, Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Insulation and sealing materials B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following: I. Penetrations through walls and roof 2. Terminal unit installations 3. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, seismic restraints, and duct attachment C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. D. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and installed accessories and devices. 15815 -Metal Ducts 15815-I RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS (continued) t 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating ' Systems". B. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems". 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver sealant and �ftrestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, ' expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written recommendations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METAL MATERIALS: ' A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view. For dry side of pump station and the electric building. B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized, sheet metal ducts C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for 36 -inch length or less; ' 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches 2.02 SEALANT MATERIALS: A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open -weave fabric strips and mastics. 1. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass -fiber fabric reinforced 2. Tape Sealing System: Woven -fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal 3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One -part, nonsag, solvent: release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids 4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One -part, acid -curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O 2.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder -actuated fasteners, or structural - steel fasteners appropriate for building materials 1. Use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for standard -weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 15815 Metal Ducts 15815-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS (continued) 2. Exception: Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight - aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod I. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all -thread rod or galvanized rods with threads painted after installation 2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M 1. Supports for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates 2.04 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION: A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction with stainless steel, PVC coated or galvanized, sheet steel, as required according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible". Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie -rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification. 2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and discolorations B. Static -Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the following: 1. Supply Ducts: 3 -inch wg 2. Return Ducts: 2 -inch wg negative pressure 3. Exhaust Ducts: 2 -inch wg negative pressure C. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less; with more than 10 sq. ft. of unbraced panel area I PARTS -EXECUTION 3.01 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. B. C. D. E. 15815 Metal Ducts Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. 15815-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS (continued) F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch. I I. Non-Fire-RatedPartition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. J. Install a volume damper in every branch duct. 3.02 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING: A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated I and as described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Meta] and Flexible". B. Pressure Classification Less Than 2 -inch wg: Transverse joints C. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation. ' 3.03 HANGING AND SUPPORTING: A. Install rigid rectangular metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible". B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor. D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one- fourth of failure (proof -test) load. E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete. F. Install powder -actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely II cured. 3.04 CONNECTIONS: A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories". B. No flexible duct 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. 15815 Metal Ducts 15815-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS (continued) B. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface area of test section. C. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Classification 3 for round and flat -oval ducts, Leakage Classification 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classifications less than and equal to 2 -inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Classification 6 for pressure classifications from 2- to 10 -inch wg. D. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable. E. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual". 3.06 ADJUSTING: A. Adjust volume -control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow. 3.07 CLEANING: a After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris. END OF SECTION 15815 15815 Metal Ducts 15815-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES PART1- GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Section includes the following: 1. Backdraft dampers 2. Manual -volume dampers 3. Duct silencers 4. Turning vanes 5. Flexible connectors Related Sections include the following: I. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles" SUBMITTALS: Product Data: For the following: I. Manual -volume dampers Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field connection. Detail the following: 1. Special fittings and manual- and automatic -volume -damper installations. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self -noise power levels; and airflow performance data, static -pressure loss, dimensions, and weights. QUALITY ASSURANCE: NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards: I. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." EXTRA MATERIALS: Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed. Aluminum sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H 14, sheet form; with standard, mill finish. 15820 -Duct Accessories 15820-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES (continued) PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METAL MATERIALS: ' A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) ' coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view. B. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form; with standard, one -side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and mill finish for concealed ducts. 2.02 MANUAL -VOLUME DAMPERS: A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single -blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. 1. Pressure Classifications of 3 -Inch wg (750 Pa) or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. B. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single -blade, parallel- or opposed -blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and ' suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Aluminum Frames: Hat -shaped, 0.10 -inch- (2.5 -mm) thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. C. Damper Hardware: Zinc -plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32 - inch thick zinc -plated steel, and a 3/4 -inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating -rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. ' 2.03 TURNING VANES: A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal ' and Flexible." B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1 -1/2 -inch wide, curved blades set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts. 2.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS: A. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with a synthetic -rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and ozone environment. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp, and 440 lbf/inch in the filling. I 15820 -Duct Accessories 15820-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES (continued) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards" for fibrous -glass ducts. 3.02 ADJUSTING: A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings. B. Final positioning of manual -volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." END OF SECTION 15820 15820 -Duct Accessories 15820-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 15837 - CENTRIFUGAL FANS PARTI-GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY: ' A. This Section includes roof -mounted centrifugal fans. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: ' A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations. B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each ' type of product indicated and include the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound -power ratings. ' 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics. 4. Material gages and finishes. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. ' B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. I1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators ' and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary ' motor slides and rails, and base weights. C. Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in maintenance manuals by Manufacturer. ' 1.05 DUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in ' NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and 'shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. 15837 -Centrifugal Fans 15837-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15837 - CENTRIFUGAL FANS (continued) 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver fans as factory -assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping ' limitations, with protective crating and covering. B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. ' 1.07 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate size and location of structural -steel support members. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS: A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Belts: Two sets for each belt -driven unit PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of ' the following: 1. Ammerman Company, Inc./General Resource Corp. 2. Carrier Corp. 3. Cook, Loren Company 4. Trane Co. (The) 5. Greenheck 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS: A. Description: Factory -fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt -driven ' centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure. 2.03 HOUSINGS: , A. Materials and Fabrication: Formed panels to •make curved scroll housings with shaped cutoff, spun -metal inlet bell, and doors or panels to allow access to internal parts and components. B. Coatings: Hot -dip galvanized Powder -baked enamel. I 15837 -Centrifugal Fans 15837-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 u SECTION 15837 - CENTRIFUGAL FANS (continued) 2.04 WHEELS: A. Backward -Inclined Fan Wheels: Steel Aluminum One-piece, fiberglass -reinforced plastic construction with curved inlet flange, back plate, backward -inclined blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast-iron or cast -steel hub riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws. B. Forward -Curved Fan Wheels: Black -enameled or galvanized steel construction with inlet flange, back plate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow, mechanically secured to flange and back plate; cast -steel hub swaged to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws. C. Coatings: Powder -baked enamel. 2.05 SHAFTS: A. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. B. Turned, ground, and polished hot -rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating of lubricating oil. C. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range. 2.06 BEARINGS: • A. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self -aligning, pillow -block -type ball bearings I. Ball -Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L100 of 120,000 hours 2. Roller -Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 of 120,000 hours B. Grease -Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self -aligning, pillow -block -type, tapered roller ' bearings with double -locking collars and two-piece, cast-iron housing 1. Ball -Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, LI 0 of 120,000 hours 2. Roller -Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 of 120,000 hours IC. Grease -Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self -aligning, pillow -block -type, ball or roller bearings with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing I. Ball -Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, LI 0 of 120,000 hours ' 2. Roller -Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, LI 0 of 120,000 hours 2.07 BELT DRIVES: IA. Description: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation 1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.2 ' B. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory ' C. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the, middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. 15837 -Centrifugal Fans 15837-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 15837 - CENTRIFUGAL FANS (continued) D. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives 1. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements; 0.1046 -inch- thick, 3/4 -inch diamond -mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place. E. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning 2.08 ACCESSORIES: A. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick -opening latches and gaskets B. Companion Flanges: Galvanized steel, for duct connections C. Variable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades supported at both ends with two permanently lubricated bearings. Variable mechanism terminating in single control lever with control shaft for double -width fans. D. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-duty steel assembly with opposed blades constructed of two plates formed around and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings, with blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever E. Inlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid screen F. Scroll Drain Connection: NPS I steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll G. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat from shaft H. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single -width fans I. Weather Cover: Enameled -steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing 2.09 MOTORS: A. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled 2.10 SOURCE DUALITY CONTROL: C. Sound -Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data". Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans". Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. D. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating". PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb. 15837 -Centrifugal Fans 15837-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 15837 - CENTRIFUGAL FANS (continued) B. Support floor -mounting units using spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch. I1. Secure vibration controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base. ' C. Install floor -mounting units on concrete bases. D. Install floor -mounting units on concrete bases. E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. ' 3.02 CONNECTIONS: A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories". ' B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment. D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. ' 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Equipment Start -Up Checks I. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that ' connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal -overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. ' B. Starting Procedures 1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm. 2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage. ' C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with ' new units, and retest. D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature -control operators. 15837 -Centrifugal Fans 15837-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I. I SECTION 15837 - CENTRIFUGAL FANS (continued) 3.04 3.05 F. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. G. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. H. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest, as specified above after repairs or replacements are made. ADJUSTING: A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Adjust belt tension. C. Lubricate bearings. CLEANING: A. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet. B. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. 15837 -Centrifugal Fans END OF SECTION 15837 15837-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 U I I n I I I I I I I I I I I I. ' SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PARTI- GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and ' Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 SUMMARY: ' A. This Section includes diffusers, registers, and grilles. B. Related Sections include the following: I1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories". 2. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers, registers, and grilles. • 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following: I. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction, finish, and mounting details. 2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static -pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS: A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings. 2.02 SOURCE DUALITY CONTROL: A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I' 15855 -Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 15855-1 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (continued) 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards. B. Duct Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. Where items conflict with installation, notify Engineer for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.03 ADJUSTING: A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. 3.04 CLEANING: A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes. 3.05 MANUFACTURES: A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, grilles that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Air Systems Components; Krueger Div. 2. Carnes Co. Inc. 3. Titus C. Material: Steel D. Finish: Baked enamel, white E. Face Blade Arrangement: Varies, see Model No. on schedule, on Drawing. F. Rear Blade Arrangement: Varies, see Model No. on schedule, on Drawing. G. Mounting: Countersunk screw H. Accessories: See schedule on Drawings. 1. Size: Varies, see Model No. on schedule on Drawing. END OF SECTION 15855 15855 -Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 15855-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY: ' A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives, including the following: I. Balancing airflow at each air handling unit and new duct connection, to ' indicate quantities according to specified tolerances 2. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment 3. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly ' 4. Measuring sound and vibration 5. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section ' 1.03 DEFINITIONS: A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper ' B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to design quantities IC. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated ID. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results ' E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump. ' G. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system ' H. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested II. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system J. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment ' K. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures ' L. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council M. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau 15990 -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (continued) N. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. B. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either AABC or NEBB. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire testing, adjusting, and balancing period. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations. 1.07 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate the efforts of factory -authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities. B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. 1.08 WARRANTY: A. General Warranty: The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART2-PRODUCTS NOT USED 15990 -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (continued) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to ' discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment. 1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary ' Conditions of the Contract. 2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow -control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual ' volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment ' operation. B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. C. Examine project record documents. ' D. Examine equipment performance data, including fan curves. Relate performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the ' equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems --Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. ' Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions. E. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification I. Sections have been performed. F. Examine system and equipment test reports. ' G. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow -control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly ' installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. H. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting '• and balancing. I. Examine air -handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ' ready for operation. J. Examine heat -transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight ' fns. 15990 -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 U SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (continued) ' K. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. L. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: 1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended ' controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in mixing boxes. 4. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 5. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 6. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values. 7. Interlocked systems are operating. 8. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values. M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures 3.02 PREPARATION: A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes step-by-step ' procedures. B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Automatic temperature -control systems are operational. 3. Equipment doors are securely closed. 4. Balance dampers are open. 5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. ' 6. Doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met. 3.03 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES: A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC national standards and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate.performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment settings with permanent identification material, including damper - control positions, valve indicators, fan -speed -control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. I 15990 -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-4 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (continued) 3.04 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES: A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as -built" duct layouts. C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. D. Check the airflow patterns from the outside -air louvers and dampers and the return - and exhaust -air dampers, through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers. E. Locate start -stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. H. Check for airflow blockages. I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. J. Check for proper sealing of air -handling unit components. , 3.05 CONSTANT -VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES: A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant -volume supply-, return-, and exhaust -air systems. B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan manufacturer. I. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each air -handling unit component. a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters. 3: Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. ' 15990 -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Ii I SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (continued) ' 4. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Engineer. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan -speed changes. 5. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan -motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. 2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances. 3.06 TEMPERATURE TESTING: A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature -control system. B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 ' successive 8 -hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied. C. Measure outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures. 3.07 TEMPERATURE -CONTROL VERIFICATION: A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions. ' C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low -temperature controllers). E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper. ' F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems. I. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply. J. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations. 15990 -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 L SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (continued) 3.08 TOLERANCES: A. Set HVAC system airflow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent 3.09 FINAL REPORT: A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter -quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3 -ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following: 1. Fan curves 2. Manufacturers' test data 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers 4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop Drawings and Product Data D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page 2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent 3. Project name 4. Project location 5. Engineer's name and address 6. Contractor's name and address 7. Report date 8. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report 9. Summary of contents, including the following: a. Design versus final performance b. Notable characteristics of systems • c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents E. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. F. Data for air handling and power ventilators units, including manufacturer, type size, andf ttings G. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values H. Test conditions for fans performance forms, including the following: 1. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust -air dampers 2. Conditions of filters 3. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions 15990 -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (continued) 4. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter 5. Other system operating conditions that affect performance I. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air systems. Present with single - line diagrams and include the following: 1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows 2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes J. Air -Handling Unit Test Reports: Include the ventilations following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification b. Location c. Make and type d. Model number and unit size e. Manufacturer's serial number f. Unit arrangement and class g. Discharge arrangement h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore i. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches j. Number of belts, make, and size k. Number of filters, type, and size K. Motor Data: Include the following: 1. Make and frame type and size 2. Horsepower and rpm 3. Volts, phase, and hertz 4. Full -load amperage and service factor 5. Sheave make, size in inches and bore 6. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches L. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: I. Total airflow rate in cfm 2. Total system static pressure in inches wg 3. Fan rpm 4. Discharge static pressure in inches wg 5. Filter static -pressure differential in inches wg 6. Cooling coil static -pressure differential in inches wg 7. Heating coil static -pressure differential in inches wg 8. Outside airflow in cfm 9. Return airflow in cfm 10. Outside -air damper position II. Return -air damper position M. Apparatus -Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following: I. Coil Data: Include the following: a. System identification b. Location c. Coil type d. Number of rows 15990 -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-8 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (continued) e. Fin spacing in fins per inch f. Make and model number g. Face area in sq. ft h. Tube size in NPS i. Tube and fin materials j. Circuiting arrangement 2. ... Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Airflow rate in cfm b. Average face velocity in fpm c. Air pressure drop in inches wg d. Outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F e. Return -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F f. Entering -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F g. Leaving -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F N. Fan Test Reports: For exhaust fans, include the following Fan Data: Include the following: a. System identification b. Location c. Make and type d. Model number and size e. Manufacturer's serial number f Arrangement and class g. Sheave make, size in inches and bore h. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches 2. Motor Data: Include the following: a. Make and frame type and size b. Horsepower and rpm c. Volts, phase, and hertz d. Full -load amperage and service factor e. Sheave make, size in inches and bore f. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches g. Number of belts, make, and size 3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Total airflow rate in cfm b. Total system static pressure in inches wg c. Fan rpm d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg e. Suction static pressure in inches wg O. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following Report Data: Include the following: a. Instrument type and make b. Serial number c. Application d. Dates of use e. Dates of calibration 15990 -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-9 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (continued) 2. V -Belt Drive: a. Identification/location b. Required driven RPM c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum and actual END OF SECTION 15990 15990 -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-10 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16011 - SHORT-CIRCUIT/COORDINATION STUDY PARTI- GENERAL J II 1 II II 7 I 1.01 SCOPE: A. The studies shall be submitted to the Design Engineer prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to release of equipment for manufacturing. If formal completion of the studies may cause delay in equipment manufacturing, approval from the Engineer may be obtained for a preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of device ratings and characteristics will be satisfactory. B. The studies shall include all portions of the electrical distribution system from the normal power source or sources down to and including the smallest adjustable trip circuit breaker in the distribution system. Normal system connections and those, which result in maximum fault conditions, shall be adequately covered in the study. C. The firm shall be currently involved in high- and low -voltage power system evaluation. The study shall be performed, stamped and signed by a registered professional engineer. Credentials of the individual(s) performing the study and background. of the firm shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to start of the work. A minimum of five (5) years experience in power system analysis is required for the individual in charge of the project. D. The firm performing the study shall demonstrate capability and experience to provide assistance during start up as required. 1.02 DATA COLLECTION FOR THE STUDY: A. The Contractor shall provide the required data for preparation of the studies. The Engineer performing the system studies shall furnish the Contractor with a listing of the required data immediately after award of the contract. B. The Contractor shall expedite collection of the data to assure completion of the studies as required for final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to release of the equipment for manufacturing. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SHORT-CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION AND COORDINATION STUDY: A. The short-circuit study shall be performed with the aid of a digital computer program and shall be in accordance with the latest applicable IEEE and ANSI standards. B. In the short-circuit study, provide calculation methods and assumptions, the base per unit quantities selected, one -line diagrams, source impedance data including power company system characteristics, typical calculations, tabulations of calculation quantities and results, conclusions, and recommendations. Calculate short-circuit interrupting and momentary (when applicable) duties for an assumed 3 -phase bolted fault at each supply switchgear lineup, unit substation primary and secondary terminals, low -voltage switchgear lineup, switchboard, motor control center, distribution panelboard, pertinent branch circuit panelboard, and other significant 16011 -Short-Circuit/Coordination Study 16011-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 El SECTION 16011 - SHORT-CIRCUIT/COORDINATION STUDY (continued) overcurrent protective device locations throughout the system. Provide a ground fault current study for the same system areas, including the associated zero sequence impedance data, Include in tabulations fault impedance, X to R ratios, asymmetry factors, motor fault contribution, short circuit kVA, and symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. C. In the protective device coordination study, provide time -current curves graphically indicating the coordination proposed for the system, centered on conventional, full- size, log -log forms. Include with each curve sheet a complete title and one -line diagram with legend identifying the specific portion of the system covered by that particular curve sheet. Include a detailed description of each protective device identifying its type, function, manufacturer, and time -current characteristics. Tabulate recommended device tap, time dial, pickup, instantaneous, and time delay settings. D. Include on the curve sheets power company relay and fuse characteristics, medium - voltage equipment protective relay and fuse characteristics, low -voltage equipment circuit breaker trip device characteristics, pertinent transformer characteristics, pertinent motor and generator characteristics, and characteristics of other system load protective devices. In addition, include all devices down to the largest branch circuit and largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor control center, and main breaker in branch panelboards. Include all adjustable settings for ground fault protective devices. Include manufacturing tolerance and damage bands in plotted fuse characteristics. Show transformer full load currents, transformer magnetizing inrush, ANSI transformer withstand parameters, and significant symmetrical fault currents. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting the maximum symmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed. E. Select each primary protective device required for a delta-wye connected transformer so that its characteristic or operating band is within the transformer characteristics, including a point equal to 58 percent of the ANSI withstand point to provide secondary line -to -ground fault protection. Separate transformer primary protective device characteristic curves from associated secondary device characteristics by a 16 percent current margin to provide proper coordination and protection in the event of secondary line -to -line faults. Separate medium -voltage relay characteristic curves from curves for other devices by at least a 0.4 -second time margin. F. Include complete fault calculations as specified herein based on contract documents. G. Submit qualifications of individual(s) who will perform the work for approval prior to commencement of the studies. Provide studies in conjunction with equipment submittals to verify equipment ratings required. Submit the study to Engineer for review prior to delivery of the study to the Owner. Make all additions or changes as required by the reviewer. H. Contractor shall furnish all data as required by the short-circuit/coordination study vendor. Utilize data for the study obtained by the Contractor from contract documents, including contract addendums issued prior to bid openings. 16011-Short-Circuit/CoordinationStudy 16011-2 RJN ProjectNo. 11-1875-00 El n I 1 I Li I I I [ II I I SECTION 16011 - SHORT-CIRCUIT/COORDINATION STUDY (continued) I I I I I I I Li I L n I I I. Notify the Engineer in writing of circuit protective devices not properly rated for fault conditions. J. Mechanical Contractor shall provide settings for the packaged motor starters. K. When emergency generator is provided, include phase and ground coordination of the generator protective devices. Show the generator decrement curve and damage curve along with the operating characteristic of the protective devices. Contractor shall obtain the information from the generator manufacturer and include the generator actual impedance value, time constants and current boost data in the study. Do not use typical values for the generator. 2.02 . STUDY REPORT: A. The results of the power system study shall be summarized in a final report. Six (6) bound copies of the final report shall be submitted. B. The report shall include the following sections: I. Descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope of the study 2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse and other protective device ratings versus calculated short-circuit duties, and commentary regarding same 3. Protective device time versus current coordination curves, tabulations of relay and circuit breaker trip settings, fuse selection, and commentary regarding same 4. Fault current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of computer printout. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 POWER COMPANY APPROVAL: A. Where required, copies of the final report shall be submitted to the power company for their review and approval. Approved copies of the report shall be submitted to the Design Engineer. 3.02 FIELD SETTINGS: A. The Contractor shall perform field adjustments of the protective devices as required to place the equipment in final operating condition. The settings shall be in accordance with the approved short-circuit study, protective device evaluation study, and protective device coordination study. B. Necessary field settings of devices and adjustments and minor modifications to equipment to accomplish conformance with the approved short-circuit and protective device coordination study shall be carried out by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 16011 1 16011-Short-Circuit/Coordination Study 16011-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16050- BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY: IA. This Section includes the following: 1. Supporting devices for electrical components 2. Concrete equipment bases ' 3. Cutting and patching for electrical construction 4. Touch-up painting 1.03 SUBMITTALS: ' A. Product Data: For electricity -metering equipment. ' B. Shop Drawing: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electricity - metering equipment. 1.04 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having ' jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.05 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate ' the electrical installations that follow. I. Set inserts and sleeves in poured -in -place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed. ' B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building. ' C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies. I1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity -metering components. ' 2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services. D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed ' by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Hatches". 1 16050 -Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16050-1 RUN Project No. 11-1875-00 El SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (continued) E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field -finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface. F. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORTING DEVICES: ' A. Material: PVC -coated cold -formed steel, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: PVC coated. C. Slotted -Steel Channel Supports (PVC Coated or Stainless Steel): Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16 -inch -diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs. 1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports (PVC coated or stainless steel). D. Nonmetallic Channel and Angle Systems: Structural -grade, factory -formed, glass - fiber -resin channels and angles with 9/16 -inch -diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least one surface. I. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and angles. 2. Fittings and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items shall be stainless steel. E. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C -clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring - steel clamps or click -type hangers, shall be PVC coated or stainless steel. I F. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, stainless steel, or PVC, plain ends. G. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable -iron casting with hot -dip galvanized finish and Bakelite with steel band -zinc plated, nuts and bolts stainless steel. H. Expansion Anchors: Stainless -steel wedge or sleeve type. I. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type, stainless steel. J. Power -Driven Threaded Studs: Heat -treated steel (contractor shall verify permissible areas for power -driven studs). ' 16050 -Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16050-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (continued) 1 2.02 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION: IA. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications. B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size ' of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. I. Color: Black letters on orange background. ' 2. Legend: Indicates voltage, circuit identification as directed by owner. C. Wire and Cable Identification 1. Each individual wire, cable and pneumatic tube in power, control, ' indication, and instrumentation circuits shall be provided with identification markers at the point of termination as derived by the contractor from the Schematic Diagrams, wire termination points and from the shop drawings. 'Locate the label within 2" of the wire, cable or tube termination. The wire marker shall be Grafoplast Trasp System or approved equal. 2. Conductor identification system shall consist of plastic sleeves with pre- ' printed individual alpha/numeric element inserts. Plastic sleeves shall fully encircle the conductor. Wiremarking system shall also include conductor terminal pins and terminal block markers. Conductor terminal pins shall be ' insulated, crimp -on with integral insert sleeve. The conductor terminal pins and terminal block markers shall both utilize the same alpha/numeric element inserts or the SI plotted tag inserts specified for the conductor ' marking system. The conductor marking system shall be the Grafoplast Trasp System. The conductor crimp type terminations shall be performed using the appropriate ratchet crimp tool, Grafoplast Spark Crimp Tool, ' Item #773. Conductor stripping shall be performed using the Grafoplast Wire Stripping Tool, Item #780. Provide Grafoplast or approved equal. D. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright -colored, continuous -printed, vinyl ' tape with the following features: 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick 2. Compounded for permanent direct -burial service. I. 3... Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4.. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line. E. Color -Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme. F. Engraved -Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine ' plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16 -inch minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 -inch minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background. ' G. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Preprinted, aluminum, baked -enamel -finish signs, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application. H. Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Weather -resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose -acetate butyrate 16050 -Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16050-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (continued) signs with 0.0396 -inch, galvanized -steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application. 1/4 -inch grommets in comers for mounting. I. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless -steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless -steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 2.03 EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERING: A. Meter Equipment: Coordinate with Electrical power utility company to obtain/install metering equipment; current transformers, potential transformer, meterbase and wire pack, as directed by the utility. B. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure. 2.04 CONCRETE BASES: A. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Section "Cast -in - Place Concrete": B. Concrete: 3000 -psi (20.7-MPa), 28 -day compressive strength. 2.05 TOUCH-UP PAINT: A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc -rich paint recommended by item manufacturer. C. PVC Surfaces: Per manufacturer's instructions. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION: A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom. B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated. C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. D. Right -of -Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION: A. Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. B. Install wiring at outlets with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet. 16050 -Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16050-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (continued) C. Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 3.03 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION: A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: PVC -coated hot -dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U -channel system components. B. Dry Locations: PVC -coated steel materials. C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: PVC -coated clamp system per manufacturer's instructions. D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. All supports shall be PVC coated or stainless steel. E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; minimum of 200 -lb design load. 3.04 SUPPORT INSTALLATION: A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical ' components. B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U -bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits. C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket -type ' hangers. D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 -percent minimum in the future. ' E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate PVC -coated, malleable -iron pipe hangers or PVC -coated clamps. IF. Install 1/4 -inch -diameter or larger threaded stainless -steel or PVC -coated hanger rods. G. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals. H. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors. II. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar _hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box. J. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, ' control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength. Install 16050 -Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16050-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 11 I SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (continued) sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core - drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire -rated gypsum walls and of all other fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls. K. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated: 1. Wood: Fasten with stainless -steel wood screws or screw -type nails. 2. Masonry: Stainless -steel toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units. 3. Concrete: Concrete inserts with stainless -steel machine screws and bolts. 4. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers may be used in existing concrete. 5. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring -tension clamps on steel. a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Dl.l. 6. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or other items. 7. Light Steel: Stainless -steel sheet etal screws. 8. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof -test load. 3.05 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES: A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout. Project. C. Bands: Pretensioned, snap -around, colored plastic sleeves or colored adhesive marking tape. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. 1. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50 -foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25 -foot maximum intervals in congested areas. 2. Colors: As follows: a. Fire Alarm System: Red. b. Security System: Blue and yellow. c. Telecommunication and Instrumentation System: Green and yellow. D. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and communication lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches, overall, use a single line marker. E. Color -code 208/120-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch -circuit conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows: I. Phase A: Black. 16050 -Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16050-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (continued) 2. Phase B: Red. 3. Phase C: Blue. 4. Neutral: White. 5. Ground: Green F. Color -code 480/277-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch -circuit conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows: 1. Phase A: Yellow. 2. Phase B: Brown. 3. Phase C: Orange. 4. Neutral: White with a colored strip or gray. 5. Ground: Green G. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic -laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal -backed butyrate signs for outdoor items. H. Install engraved -laminated emergency -operating signs with white letters on red background with minimum 3/8 -inch -high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations. 3.06 UTILITY COMPANY ELECTRICITY -METERING EQUIPMENT: A. Install equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding and empty conduits as required by utility company. 3.07 CONCRETE BASES: • A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger, in both directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's ' anchorage recommendations and setting templates for anchor -bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise indicated. Use 3000 -psi (20.7-MPa), 28 -day compressive -strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in "Cast -in -Place Concrete" specification. ' 3.08 CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces ' required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent I undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved. ' 3.09 FIELD DUALITY CONTROL: IA. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following: I. Building wire and connectors. 16050 -Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16050-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (continued) 2. Supporting devices for electrical components. 3. Electricity -metering components. 4. Concrete bases. 5. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 6. Touch-up painting. B. Provide written reports to the engineer indicating any deficiencies and proposed remedy. Verify with the engineer before proceeding. 3.10 REFINISHING AND TOUCH-UP PAINTING: A. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location. B. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats. C. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. D. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed fmish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris. B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 16050 ' 16050 -Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16050-8 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section maybe supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following: 1. Test procedures used 2. Test results that comply with requirements 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1. Comply with UL 467. B. Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead -line construction and medium -voltage underground construction, with IEEE C2. C. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods a. Chance/Hubbell b. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group c. Koms: C. C. Koms Co.; Division of Robroy Industries d. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group e. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell 16060 -Grounding and Bonding 16060-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING (continued) 2.02 A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" B. Material: Copper C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green -colored insulation D. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green -colored insulation with yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow. E. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable F. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated G. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33 H. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows: 1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, '/. inch in diameter 2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor (per N.E.C. requirements) 3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick 4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned -copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick 2.03 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS: A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items. B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted -pressure -type connectors, or compression type C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions 2.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODES: A. Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION: A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials. B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors. 16060 -Grounding and Bonding 16060-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING (continued) C. Exothermic -Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections. D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps. E. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG ' minimum. Bury at least 24 inches below grade or encase in duct bank when installed as part of the duct bank. 3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: ' A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than ' required by NFPA 70 are indicated. B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits. I. C. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. D. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, and central equipment location (PLC cabinet). ' 1. PLC Cabinet: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. E. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Bond electrical power ' system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit. 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one -rod length from each I. other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes. I. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or fmal grade, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating. Connect ductbank ground and instrumentation grounds and ' distribution grounds to the system. B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may ' be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic -welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect -type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance. 16060 -Grounding and Bonding 16060-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING (continued) D. Ufer (Concrete -Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, Paragraph 250-81(c), using a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor within the base of the foundation. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four (4) locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or to a grounding electrode external to concrete. 3.04 CONNECTIONS: A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. I. Use electroplated or hot -tin -coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum -to -steel connections with stainless -steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum -to -galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. B. Exothermic -Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure -type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure -type connectors. D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated. E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. F. Compression -Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. G. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable. 16060 -Grounding and Bonding 16060-4 RJN Project No. I 1-1875-00 SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING (continued) 3.05 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING: 3.06 A. Duct Banks: Install a 4/0 grounding conductor at the top of the duct bank. B. Pad -Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install four ground rods and counterpoise circling pad. Ground pad -mounted equipment and noncurrent -carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Use copper conductor No.4/0 AWG for counterpoise and for taps to equipment ground pad. Bury counterpoise not less than 18 inches (450 mm) below grade and 6 inches from the foundation. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Testing: Perform the following field quality -control testing: I. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform.tests, by the fall -of -potential method according to IEEE 81. 3. Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. a. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms b. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms c. Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms d. Substations and Pad -Mounted Switching Equipment: 5 ohms e. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms 4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. ' 16060 -Grounding and Bonding END OF SECTION 16060 16060-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Li SECTION 16080 - ELECTRICAL TESTING I I PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: ' 1.02 I I A. Division 16, Individual Electrical Specification. SUMMARY: A. This Section includes general requirements for electrical field testing and inspecting. Detailed requirements are specified in each Section containing components that require testing. General requirements include the following: I. Coordination requirements for testing and inspecting. 2. Reporting requirements for testing and inspecting. PART2-PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS: A. Include the following minimum preparations as appropriate: I1. Perform insulation -resistance tests. 2. Perform continuity tests. 3. Perform rotation test (for motors to be tested). ' 4. Provide a stable source of single-phase, 208/120-V electrical power for test instrumentation at each test location. 5. Perform a software -based harmonic analysis on the VFDs to determine the actual harmonic mitigation requirements, as per IEEE Standard 519 - 1992. ' B. Test and Inspection Reports: In addition to requirements specified elsewhere, report the following: I1. Manufacturer's written testing and inspecting instructions. 2. Calibration and adjustment settings of adjustable and interchangeable devices involved in tests. . ' 3. Tabulation of expected measurement results made before measurements. 4. Tabulation of "as -found" and "as -left" measurement and observation results. C. The following additional requirements provide further guidance: ' I . Shop Inspection and Testing a. While in the manufacturer's shop, electrical equipment shall be subjected to all inspections and testing required by applicable codes, I. as well as those normally provided by the manufacturer. 2. Functional Acceptance Test (FAT): a. After electrical equipment is certified for proper installation and ' prior to performance and reliability testing, the equipment shall be subjected to a FAT. The FAT shall include checking for proper alignment, noisy operation and the elements listed in the paragraphs below, as applicable. Initial adjustment and calibration shall be ' performed in the presence of and with assistance from the equipment supplier/manufacturer. 16080 -Electrical Testing 16080-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16080 - ELECTRICAL TESTING (continued) 3. 4. 16080 -Electrical Testing The electrical system shall be tested after permanent cables are in place to demonstrate that the entire installation and equipment performs satisfactorily and that it is free of shorts and undesirable grounds, and a record made of the results which shall be submitted to the Engineer. After the cables are installed and before they are put in service, their insulation resistance between phases and from each phase -to -ground shall be individually tested in an approved manner. Al] 480 -volt cables shall be tested using a 500 -volt Megger and a record shall be submitted in writing of all test results. The insulation resistance for any given circuit shall not be less than the value recommended by the IPCEA or a minimum of I Megohm for 600 -volt and less service. Any cable not meeting the recommended value or which fails when tested under full load conditions, shall be replaced at the contractor's expense with a new cable for the full length. Lighting circuits shall be tested with branches connected and switches closed, all fixtures and outlets in place and connected, all local switches closed. Each individual power circuit shall be tested at its motor starter and also its controller if remote from starter with leads connected for operation. The FAT shall be performed by the contractor under the direction of the Engineer and in concern with the overall Pump Station Start -Up Plan, Performance Acceptance Test (PAT): a. After electrical equipment is certified for proper installation and tested for proper function and prior to reliability testing, the equipment shall be subjected to a PAT. The PAT shall verify that the equipment can perform according to the specification without consequence. The PAT shall be performed by the contractor and equipment manufacturer under the direction of the Engineer and in concert with the overall Pump Station Start -Up Plan. Reliability Acceptance Test (RAT): D. a. After successful functional and performance testing, the equipment shall be subjected to a RAT. The RAT shall verify that the equipment can perform its intended function at the specified performance level for a period of at least four (4) consecutive 24 - hour days (or a lesser period specified by the Engineer) without consequence. The RAT shall be performed by the contractor under the direction of the Engineer and in concert with the overall Pump Station Start -Up Plan. END OF SECTION 16080 16080-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I U I 7 I L1 I I n I I Li SECTION 16117 - CONCRETE -ENCASED DUCT BANKS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and Gederal Provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to provide concrete - encased electrical duct banks as specified. B. Duct banks are shown on the Drawings in approximate locations. 1.03 REFERENCES: A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following except where otherwise shown or specified: I. UL -65 1, Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit 2. NEMA TC 2, Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80) 1.04 SUBMITTALS: • A. Product Data I. Copies of manufacturers' specifications, technical information and installation instructions for all components proposed for use in duct banks B. Shop Drawings 1. Proposed duct bank locations and duct sizes used in each run of underground duct bank C. Closeout Submittals II. Actual routing of duct banks shall be shown on the Project Record Documents, including coordinates, elevations and general dimensions of the duct banks and the duct sizes and contents of the ducts. ' PART2-PRODUCTS 2:01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Amoco Chemicals Corp. B. Carlon, Division of Indian Head, Inc. ' C. Underground Devices, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS: A. Nonmetallic conduit shall be Schedule 40 PVC, conforming to UL -651, and NEMA TC 2, B. Elbows and other fittings shall be formed of the same material and by the same manufacturer as base conduit. 16117 -Concrete Encased Duct Banks 16117-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Li C SECTION 16117 - CONCRETE -ENCASED DUCT BANKS (continued) C. Duct bank ground conductor shall be size 4/0 AWG, 19 strand, annealed, bare copper. D. Concrete Reinforcement shall meet the requirements of Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete". E. Cast -in -Place Concrete shall meet the requirements of Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete". F. Detectable Underground Warning Tape shall meet the requirements of ' Section 16050, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Duct banks shall be provided as shown on the Drawings and specified. B. The installation of duct banks shall be coordinated with piping and other underground systems and structures and located clear of interferences. Underground systems shall be field verified. C. Duct banks shall be assembled using nonmetallic conduit, rigid metal conduit, concrete and concrete reinforcement. 1. Conduit size and fill shall meet the requirements of Section 16130, Raceways and Boxes. 2. Conduit sections shall be joined using manufacturers' recommended solvent cement. 3. Installation shall allow for expansion and contraction as extreme temperature variations are anticipated. D. Duct banks shall be assembled using nonmetallic spacers, saddles and separators. Separators shall be positioned to provide 3 -inch minimum, or greater as required by NEC, separation between the outer surfaces of ducts. Spacers, saddles and separators shall be installed at intervals of not more than five feet. E. Unless otherwise shown or specified, duct bank shall be reinforced as follows: 1. Concrete reinforcement shall consist of # 4 longitudinal steel bars placed at each comer and along each face at a maximum parallel spacing of 12 inches ' on center, and # 3 stirrups transversely placed at 12 -inch maximum longitudinal intervals. 2. A clearance of not less than three inches from center of bars to the surface of the concrete encasement shall be provided. 3. A clearance of not less than three inches from center of bars to the surface of the ducts shall be provided. 4. Duct bank reinforcement shall be integrated with reinforcing of structures (including manholes and handholes). F. Ducts shall be firmly fixed in place during placement of concrete. Concrete shall be carefully spaded and vibrated to insure filling voids. G. A 6 -inch minimum concrete covering around the outer ducts on both sides, top and bottom of duct banks shall be provided. 16117 -Concrete Encased Duct Banks 16117-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16117 - CONCRETE -ENCASED DUCT BANKS (continued) • H. Unless otherwise shown, duct banks shall slope toward manholes and away from buildings. Supports shall be provided to prevent sagging and assure continuity of ' slope. 1. Duct bank penetrations through foundation walls and slabs shall be made watertight. ' J. Bends shall be made using sweeps having a bending radius as indicated by NEC, Conductor Bending Radius. The maximum angle at couplings shall be 5 degrees. K. A transition from nonmetallic to rigid metal conduit shall be made from where duct ' banks turn upward for continuation above grade. Ducts shall continue inside buildings with rigid metal conduit or as shown on the Drawings. L. Where duct banks enter manholes and handholes, ducts shall be terminated with ' conduit end bells. M. The duct bank ground conductor shall be installed in the concrete between the I. reinforcing bars and the ducts. I. The duct bank ground conductor shall be installed in the concrete between the reinforcing bars and the ducts. 2. The duct bank ground conductor shall be bonded to the grounding electrode ' system. 3. Duct bank ground conductors shall be bonded to the ground rod in manholes and handholes. ' N. Where duct banks enter structures (manholes and handholes excluded) duct terminations meeting the requirements of Section 16130, Raceways and Boxes, shall be provided unless otherwise shown or specified. ' O. Duct ends shall be capped and sealed at the end of each work day. P. Excavating backfilling and compacting meeting the requirements of Section 02200, ' shall be provided. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified, General backfill shall be provided. Q. Detectable underground warning tape meeting the requirements of Section 16050, ' Basic Electrical Materials and Methods, shall be installed approximately 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade over the full length of underground duct banks. I1. The center of the warning tape shall be placed above each duct bank edge and at intervals across the top width of the duct bank such that the clear space between tapes does not exceed six inches. ' 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Duct banks shall pass a mandrel test: I. I. After completion of the duct bank and prior to pulling cable a test mandrel shall be pulled through each duct. The test mandrel shall be the short rubber slug type, as manufactured by Condux International, or equal. The test ' mandrel shall be the same nominal size as the trade size of the duct. The test mandrel shall be pulled using the pulling means and maximum pulling force that is to be used to install the duct contents. No pulling compound shall be ' used during mandrel testing. Duct banks which fail to allow the passage of the mandrel shall be repaired or replaced, and re -tested I 16117 -Concrete Encased Duct Banks 16117-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 P SECTION 16117 - CONCRETE -ENCASED DUCT BANKS (continued) B. Items shall be inspected for damage upon delivery to the site. C. Damaged components shall not be installed. 3.03 CLEANING: A. Duct banks shall be cleaned: I. After passing the mandrel test, ducts shall be cleaned using rubber, leather or wire brush cleaning mandrels, as manufactured by Condux International, or equal. All foreign material shall be removed from ducts. After cleaning, duct ends shall be capped and sealed. END OF SECTION 16117 16117 -Concrete Encased Duct Banks 16117-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1:02 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Field Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Listing and Labeling: Provide wires and cables specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7 B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING: A. Deliver wires and cables according to NEMA WC 26. 1.06 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations. B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions and as approved by the Engineer. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Wires and Cables a. American Insulated Wire Corp.; Leviton Manufacturing Co. b. BICC Brand -Rex Company c. Carol Cable Co., Inc. d. Senator Wire & Cable Company e. Southwire Company I Belden g. Alpha Wire 16120 -Conductors and Cables 16120-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Ii I SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (continued) 2. Connectors for Wires and Cables a. AMP Incorporated b. General Signal; O-2JGedney Unit c. Square D Co., Anderson d. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division 2.02 BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES: ' A. UL -listed building wires and cables with conductor material, insulation type, cable construction, and rating as specified in Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article. B. Rubber Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 3. C. Thermoplastic Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 5. D. Cross -Linked Polyethylene Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 7. E. Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 8. F. Conductor Material: Copper G. Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded conductor for larger than No. 10 AWG 2.03 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM WIRES AND CABLES: A. Analog Signals: PVC insulated #18 AWG copper, twisted, shielded pairs with an overall aluminum shield, overlapped for 100% coverage. Cable shall be designed for instrumentation and process control applications and meet NEMA WC 55 requirements. Cable shall be rated at 300 volts AC minimum. Shield drain wires shall be tinned copper, #20 AWG minimum. B. Digital Signals: THWN insulated #14 AWG copper wires, rated for 300 volts AC minimum 2.04 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES: ' A. UL -listed raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance and requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires and cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: A. Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires and cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 WIRE AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS: A. Service Entrance: Type REW or THWN, in raceway; or as required by the utility ' 16120 -Conductors and Cables 16120-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 PL SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (continued) U I LI I I I I II I I U I I I I B. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway C. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway D. Fire Alarm Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway or as indicated by the .. .. manufacturer E. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. Install wires and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA's "Standard of Installation". B. Pull Conductors: Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods". F. Identify wires and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods". G. Connect all process control and instrumentation cable shields to the ground bus in the control system cabinet. Cut and tape the field ends of cable shields. H. Discrete (I20VAC or 24VDC) and analog (4-20mA) cables shall be routed in separate conduit. I. Instrumentation cable shall be routed to separate junction boxes according to signal type. Discrete and analog signals shall not be routed through the same junction boxes. J. Install an equipment ground in each circuit. 3.04 CONNECTIONS: A. Conductor Splices: Keep to minimum. B. Install splices and tapes that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack. D. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. ' 16120 -Conductors and Cables 16120-3 RJN Project No.11-1875-00 1-1875-00 SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (continued) 3.05 FIELD DUALITY CONTROL: A. Testing: On installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with requirements. B. Correct malfunctioning conductors and cables at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. END OF SECTION 16120 16120 -Conductors and Cables 16120-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, anchors, and identification products 2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes 1.03 DEFINITIONS: A. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit B. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible steel metal conduit with PVC jacket C. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit D. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged - cover enclosures, and cabinets 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.06 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, piping and other mechanical equipment. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 16130 -Raceways and Boxes • 16130-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES (continued) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.02 METAL CONDUIT: A. Manufacturers 1. Anamet Electrical, Inc.: Metal Hose Anaconda 2. Wheatland Tube Co. 3. Rob Roy B. Aluminum Rigid Conduit ANSI C80.5 C. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 D. IMC: ANSI C80.6 E. Plastic -Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1 F. Plastic -Coated IMC and Fittings: NEMA RN 1 G. Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket (LFMC) H. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit 2.03 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: A. Manufacturers 1. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 2. Thomas & Betts Corporation B. NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC C. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit material. D. LFNC: UL 1660 2.04 METAL WIREWAYS: A. Manufacturers 1. Crouse -Hinds 2. Square D 3. O -Z Gedney: Unit of General Signal B. Material and Construction: Aluminum metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 3R; NEMA 7, 8 to comply with Class 1, Division 1 C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70. E. Wireway Covers: Flanged and gasketed type F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish 16130 -Raceways and Boxes 16130-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES (continued) 2.05 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS: A. Manufacturers 1. Hoffman 2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products B. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with no holes or knockouts. Cover is gasketed with oil -resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections are flanged, with stainless -steel screws and oil -resistant gaskets. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70. 2.06 SURFACE RACEWAYS: IA. Surface Metal Raceways: Stainless steel or PVC externally coated with snap -on or bolt -on covers. Finish with manufacturer's standard prime coating. I. Manufacturers I. a. Airey-Thompson Sentinel Lighting; Wiremold Company (The) b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The) c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division d. Robroy Industries, Inc. ' B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound with matte texture I1. Manufacturers a. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Device Division b. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products ' c. Panduit Corp. C. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that match and mate with raceways ' 2.07 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS: A. Manufacturers I1. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 2. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal 3. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. ' 4. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. B. Aluminum Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: ANSI C80.5 ' C. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2 E. Small Aluminum Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: ANSI 80.5 ' 16130 -Raceways and Boxes 16130-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES (continued) F. Cast -Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover G. All boxes surface mounted shall have external mounting ears. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION: A. Outdoors 1. Exposed: Rigid Aluminum or PVC externally coated, rigid steel. 2. Concealed: PVC Schedule 40. 3. Underground, Single Run: PVC Schedule 40 4. Underground, Grouped: PVC Schedule 40 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC 6. Boxes and Enclosures: Copper free aluminum or PVC externally coated, rigid steel B. Indoors 1. Rigid aluminum conduit or PVC externally coated, rigid steel 2. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC 3. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid aluminum conduit 4. Boxes and Enclosures: Copper -free aluminum a. Hazardous Locations: NEMA 250, Type 7, 8, 9 to comply with Class I Division I C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 -inch trade size (DN 21) D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location I. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits. E. Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete. Provide conduit supports to prevent contact when supporting from concrete. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. B. Support raceways as specified in National Electrical Code. C. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. D. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. E. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. 16130 -Raceways and Boxes 16130-4 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I ri LJ I [II I II I P Li I El II SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES (continued) F ' H. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible. I1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. 2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for ' parallel raceways. 1. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight. I1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. J. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools. ' K. Terminations I. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box. 2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed. L. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line ' with not less than 200 -lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. M. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2 -Inch Trade Size (DN 53) and Smaller: In I. addition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90 -degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. N. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL -listed sealing compound. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: I. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations 2. Classified hazardous locations 16130 -Raceways and Boxes 16130-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 F. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 2 inches of concrete cover. 1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. 2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. 3. Run conduit larger than 1 -inch trade size (DN 27) parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 4. Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, before rising above the floor. G. Penetration of walls and floors for conduit 1. Openings for conduit shall be core -drilled through existing walls and floors. 2. Sleeves shall be provided for individual exposed conduit passing through new walls or slabs. 3. Individual conduit penetrations shall be sealed using mechanical pipe seals. SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES(continued) 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70 O. Stub -up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with aluminum conduit; LFMC may be used 6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver -operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections. P. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi -recessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in all locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. Q. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in all raceways. R. Install hinged -cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each comer. 3.03 PROTECTION: 1 A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. I. Repair damage to galvanize finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.04 CLEANING: A. After completing installation of exposed, factory -finished raceways and boxes, I inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 16130 ' I I I I 16130 -Raceways and Boxes 16130-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. .1.02 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates. 1.03 DEFINITIONS: A. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter 1':04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: For each product specified B. Shop Drawings: Legends for receptacles and switch plates C. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction B. Comply with NEMA WD 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Wiring Devices a. GE Company; GE Wiring Devices b. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div. c. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. d. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 2. Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations a. Crouse -Hinds Electrical Co.; Distribution Equipment Div. b. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. c. Pyle -National, Inc.; an Amphenol Co. 2.02 RECEPTACLES: A. Straight -Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-duty grade 16140 -Wiring Devices 16140-I RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES (continued) B. GFCI Receptacles: Feed -through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5- 20R duplex receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Design units for installation in a 2 -3/4 -inch- (70 -mm-) deep outlet box without an adapter. Box covers shall close with receptacles in place to maintain the GFCI rating. C. Industrial heavy-duty receptacle: Comply with IEC 309-1. D. Hazardous (classified) Location Receptacles: Comply with NEMA FBI I. 2.03 SWITCHES: A. Snap Switches: Heavy-duty B. Combination Switch and Receptacle: Both devices in a single gang unit with plaster ears and removable tab connector that permit separate or common feed connection. 1. Switch: 20 A, 120/277-V ac 2. Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-15R C. Hazardous (classified) Location Receptacles: Comply with NEMA 3, 7B, C, D 9EFG, 12. 2.04 WALL PLATES: A. Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.04 -inch- (1 -mm-) thick, Type 302, satin- fmished stainless steel 2.05 FINISHES: A. Color: Aluminum or metallic finish unless otherwise indicated or required by Code B. Color: Hazardous (classified) Locations: Stainless steel, natural PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure. B. Install wall plates when painting is complete. C. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi -gang wall plates. D. Protect devices and assemblies during painting. E. Install seal fittings in Hazardous (classified) areas per NEC. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION: A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods". 1. Switches: Identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate. 16140 -Wiring Devices 16140-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES (continued) 2. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use machine -printed, pressure -sensitive, abrasion -resistant label tape on face of plate and durable wire markers or tags within outlet boxes. In Hazardous (classified) areas use stainless -steel markers adjacent to the outlet box. 3;03 CONNECTIONS: A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch -circuit equipment grounding conductor. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturers torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.04 FIELD DUALITY CONTROL: 3.05 A. Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device at least six times. B. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Replace damaged or defective components. CLEANING: A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates or devices. I' 16140 -Wiring Devices END OF SECTION 16140 16140-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16429 - SWITCHBOARDS- LOW VOLTAGE (GROUP MOUNTED FEEDERS) PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. The Contractor shall furnish and install, where indicated, a free-standing, deadfront- type low -voltage distribution switchboard, utilizing group mounted circuit protective devices as specified herein, and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. The low -voltage distribution switchboards and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable following standards: I. NEMA PB-2 2. UL Standard 891 1.03 SUBMITTALS — FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL: A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Master drawing index 2. Front view elevation 3. Floor plan 4. Top view 5. Single line 6. Schematic diagram 7. Nameplate schedule 8. Component list 9. Conduit entry/exit locations 10. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 11. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 12. Cable terminal sizes 13. Product data sheets B. Where applicable, the following additional information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Busway connection 2. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations 1.04 SUBMITTALS - FOR CONSTRUCTION: A: The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: I. Final as -built drawings 2. Wiring diagrams 3. Certified production test reports 16429 -Switchboards - Low Voltage 16429-1 RJN Project No. I I-1875-00 (Group Mounted Feeders) I SECTION 16429 - SWITCHBOARDS — LOW VOLTAGE (GROUP MOUNTED FEEDERS) (continued) 4. Installation information 5. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage details B. The final (as -built) drawings shall include the same drawings as the original construction drawings and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS: A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the circuit protective devices within the assembly. B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. D. The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet all applicable seismic requirements of the BOCA National Building Code, Paragraph 1612.6. This shall include both vertical and lateral required response spectra as specified. Alternatively, the manufacturer's certification may be based on a detailed computer analysis of the entire assembly structure and its components. Guidelines for the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the switchgear manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative equipment. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. The test response spectra shall meet or exceed the required response spectra peak acceleration of 1.6g's (3.2-1 1 Hz) and a ZPA of 1.0g as specified in the BOCA National Building Code, for all equipment natural frequencies up to at least 35 Hz. E. The following minimum mounting and installation guidelines shall be met, unless specifically modified by the above -referenced standards. 1. The Contractor shall provide equipment anchorage details, coordinated with the equipment mounting provision, prepared and stamped by a licensed civil engineer in the state. Mounting recommendations shall be provided by the manufacturer based upon approved shake table tests used to verify the seismic design of the equipment. 2. The equipment manufacturer shall certify that the equipment can withstand, that is, function following the seismic event, including both vertical and lateral required response spectra as specified in above codes. 3. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. Seismic qualification shall be considered achieved when the capability of the equipment meets or exceeds the specified response spectra. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: ' A. The low -voltage switchboard shall be UL labeled. 16429 -Switchboards - Low Voltage 16429-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' (Group Mounted Feeders) ■1 L iJ I I 11 I I I I I P 1l I SECTION 16429 - SWITCHBOARDS — LOW VOLTAGE (GROUP MOUNTED FEEDERS) (continued) 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: A. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped and shall include instruction leaflets, instruction bulletins and renewal parts lists where applicable, for the complete assembly and each major component. PART 2- PRODUCTS '2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Cutler -Hammer B. Siemens 2.02 RATINGS: A. The assembly shall be rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short- circuit conditions when connected directly to a power source having available fault current of 100,000 amperes minimum symmetrical at rated voltage. Final values in excess of 100,000 amperes shall be as determined by Specification Section 16011, Short/Circuit Coordination Study. B. Voltage rating to be as indicated on the drawings. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION: A. Switchboard shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly. The sides and rear shall be covered with removable bolt - on covers. All edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. Provide adequate ventilation within the enclosure. B. All sections of the switchboard shall be front and rear aligned with depth as shown on drawings. All protective devices shall be group mounted. Devices shall be front removable and load connections front accessible. C. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means. D. The switchboard shall be equal to Cutler -Hammer -type Pow -R -Line C utilizing the components herein specified and as shown on the drawings. E. The switchboard shall be suitable for use as service entrance equipment and be labeled in accordance with UL requirements. 16429 -Switchboards - Low Voltage 16429-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 (Group Mounted Feeders) SECTION 16429 - SWITCHBOARDS - LOW VOLTAGE (GROUP MOUNTED FEEDERS) (continued) 2.04 BUS: A. All bus bars shall be silver-plated copper. Main horizontal bus bars shall be mounted with all three phases arranged in the same vertical plane. Bus sizing shall be based on NEMA standard temperature rise criteria of 65 degrees C over a 40 degrees C ambient (outside the enclosure). B. Provide a full capacity neutral bus. C. A copper ground bus (minimum 1/4 x 2 inch) shall be furnished firmly secured to each vertical section structure and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard. D. All hardware used on conductors shall be high -tensile strength and zinc -plated. All bus joints shall be provided with conical spring -type washers. 2.05 WIRING/TERMINATIONS: A. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchboard shall be furnished as required. Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. B. Mechanical -type terminals shall be provided for all line and load terminations suitable for copper or aluminum cable rated for 75 degrees C of the size as indicated on the drawings. C. Lugs shall be provided in the incoming line section for connection of the main grounding conductor. Additional lugs for connection of other grounding conductors shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. D. All control wire shall be type SIS, bundled and secured with nylon ties. Insulated locking spade terminals shall be provided for all control connections, except where saddle -type terminals are provided integral to a device. All current transformer secondary leads shall first be connected to conveniently accessible short-circuit terminal blocks before connecting to any other device. All groups of control wires leaving the switchboard shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips. Provide wire markers at each end of all control wiring. 2.06 POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS: A. The Main Protective device shall be fixed low -voltage power air -circuit breakers, Cutler -Hammer -type Magnum DS or approved equal. Frame rating shall be 4,000 amperes, LSG. The branch devices shall be molded case breakers. All breakers shall be UL listed for application in their intended enclosures. B. The main breaker shall be electrically operated (EO) and be equipped with ground fault protection. All other breakers shall be manually operated (MO). C. Electrically operated breakers shall be complete with 120 VAC motor operators. The charging time of the motor shall not exceed 10 seconds. 16429 -Switchboards - Low Voltage 16429-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 (Group Mounted Feeders) SECTION 16429 - SWITCHBOARDS - LOW VOLTAGE (GROUP MOUNTED FEEDERS) (continued) I I I I I I I U I I I I I I [1 D. Breaker to have 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. auxiliary contacts wired out to a customer terminal block. E. Breaker shall have a N.O. Bell Alarm contact wired to a customer terminal block. P. The main breaker shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity of 100,000 amperes. To assure a fully selective system, the main circuit breakers shall • have 30 -cycle short -time withstand rating of 85,000 amperes, regardless of whether equipped with instantaneous trip protection or not. G. All power circuit breakers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with ANSI C37.13, C37.16, C37.17, C37.50, UL 1066 and NEMA SG -3 standard. The breaker shall carry a UL label. H. To facilitate lifting, the power circuit breaker shall have integral handles on the side of the breaker. The power circuit breaker shall have a closing time of not more than 3 cycles. The primary contacts shall have an easily accessible wear indicator to indicate contact erosion. The power circuit breaker shall have three windows in the front cover to clearly indicate any electrical accessories that are mounted in the breaker. The accessory shall have a label that will indicate its function and voltage. The accessories shall be plug and lock type and UL listed for easy field installation. They shall be modular in design and shall be common to all frame sizes and ratings. The breaker control interface shall have color -coded visual indicators to indicate contact open or closed positions as well as mechanism charged and discharged positions. Manual control pushbuttons on the breaker face shall be provided for opening and closing the breaker. The power circuit breaker shall have a "Positive On" feature. The breaker flag will read "Closed" if the contacts are welded and the breaker is tripped or opened. K. The current sensors shall have a back cover window that will permit viewing the sensor rating on the back of the breaker. A rating plug will offer indication of the rating on the front of the trip unit. L. A position indicator shall be located on the faceplate of the breaker. This indicator shall provide color indication of the breaker position in the cell. These positions shall be Connect (Red), Test (Yellow), and Disconnect (Green). The levering door shall be interlocked so that when the breaker is in the closed position, the breaker levering -in door shall not open. M. Each power circuit breaker shall offer sixty (60) front -mounted dedicated secondary wiring points. Each wiring point shall have finger safe contacts, which will accommodate #10 AWG maximum field connections with ring tongue or spade terminals or.bare wire. 2.07. MAIN PROTECTIVE DEVICES TRIP UNITS: A. Trip Units: Each low -voltage power circuit breaker shall be equipped with a solid- state tripping system consisting of three current sensors, microprocessor -based trip device and flux -transfer shunt trip. Current sensors shall provide operation and 16429 -Switchboards - Low Voltage 16429-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 (Group Mounted Feeders) I I SECTION 16429 - SWITCHBOARDS — LOW VOLTAGE (GROUP MOUNTED FEEDERS) (continued) signal function. The trip unit shall use microprocessor -based technology to provide the basic adjustable time -current protection functions. True rms sensing circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined trip levels and time delay settings are reached. Interchangeable current sensors with their associated rating plug shall establish the continuous trip rating of each circuit breaker. The trip unit shall be Cutler -Hammer -type Digitrip 520M or approved equal. B. The trip unit shall have an information system that provides LEDs to indicate mode of trip following an automatic trip operation. The indication of the mode of trip shall be retained after an automatic trip. A reset button shall be provided to turn off the LED indication after an automatic trip. C. The trip unit shall be provided with a display panel, including a representation of the time/current curve that will indicate the protection functions. The unit shall be continuously self -checking and provide a visual indication that the internal circuitry is being monitored and is fully operational. D. The trip unit shall be provided with a making -current release circuit. The circuit shall be armed for approximately two cycles after breaker closing and shall operate for all peak fault levels above 25 times the ampere value of the rating plug. E. Trip unit shall have selectable thermal memory for enhanced circuit protection. F. Complete system selective coordination shall be provided by the addition of the following individually adjustable time/current curve shaping solid-state elements: 1. The Main shall have individual adjustments for short delay pickup and time, and include I2t settings. 2. The Main shall have individually adjustable ground fault current pickup and time, and include 12t settings or ground alarm only. G. The trip unit shall have provisions for a single test kit to test each of the trip functions. H. The trip unit shall provide zone interlocking for the short -time delay and ground fault delay trip functions for improved system coordination. The zone interlocking system shall restrain the tripping of an upstream breaker and allow the breaker closest to the fault to trip with no intentional time delay. In the event that the downstream breaker does not trip, the upstream breaker shall trip after the present time delay. I. The trip unit shall have an information system that utilizes battery backup LEDs to indicate mode of trip following an automatic trip operation. The indication of the mode of trip shall be retained after an automatic trip operation. The indication of the mode of trip shall be retained after an automatic trip. A test pushbutton shall energize a LED to indicate the battery status. J. The trip unit shall have a 4 -character LCD display showing phase, neutral, and ground current. The accuracy of these readings shall be +/- 2% of full scale. 16429 -Switchboards - Low Voltage 16429-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 (Group Mounted Feeders) I I I I L I I IJ I I U I SECTION 16429 - SWITCHBOARDS — LOW VOLTAGE (GROUP MOUNTED FEEDERS) ' (continued) K. The trip unit shall be equipped to permit communication via a network twisted pair ' for remote monitoring and control. 2.08 FEEDER PROTECTIVE DEVICES TRIP UNITS EACH MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT: ' A. Breaker microprocessor -based tripping system shall consist of three (3) current sensors, a trip unit and a flux -transfer shunt trip. The trip unit shall use microprocessor -based technology to provide the adjustable time -current protection ' functions. True rms sensing circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors, and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined trip ' levels and time -delay settings are reached. The trip unit shall be Cutler -Hammer - type Digitrip 510 or approved equal. B. An adjustable trip setting dial mounted on the front of the trip unit, or I. interchangeable ratings plugs shall establish the continuous trip ratings of each circuit breaker. Rating plugs shall be fixed or adjustable as indicated. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not interchangeable between frames, and interlocked ' such that a breaker cannot be closed and latched with the rating plug removed. C. Each feeder breaker over 400A shall have 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contacts wired ' out to a customer terminal block. D. Each feeder breaker over 400A shall have a N.O. Bell Alarm contact wired to a customer terminal block. E. System coordination shall be provided by the following microprocessor -based time - current curve shaping adjustments: I. Adjustable long-time setting (set by adjusting the trip setting dial or rating ' plug) 2. Adjustable short -time setting and delay with selective curve shaping 3. Adjustable instantaneous setting ' 4. Ground Fault Zone interlocked for coordination. The zone interlocking shall be factory wired and tested. F. The microprocessor -based trip unit shall have both powered and unpowered thermal memory to provide protection against cumulative overheating should a number of overload conditions occur in quick succession. ' G. Breakers shall have built-in test points for testing the long-time delay, instantaneous, and ground fault functions of the breaker by means of a test set. 2.09 UTILITY METERING: ' A. Furnish a separate barriered-off utility metering compartment complete with hinged sealable door. Bus work shall include provisions for mounting utility company ' current transformers and potential transformers or potential taps as required by the utility company. Provide service entrance label and provide necessary applicable service entrance features per NEC and local code requirements. 1 ' 16429 -Switchboards - Low Voltage 16429-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 (Group Mounted Feeders) SECTION 16429 - SWITCHBOARDS — LOW VOLTAGE (GROUP MOUNTED FEEDERS) (continued) 2.10 CUSTOMER METERING: A. Provide a separate customer metering compartment with front hinged door and include the following: B. Current transformers for each meter. Current transformers shall .be wired to shorting - type terminal blocks. 2.11 MICROPROCESSOR -BASED METERING EQUIPMENT: A. IQ Analyzer 6000 Series 1. Provide a digital line Power Quality Meter & Analyzer (MM6) device equal to Cutler -Hammer -type IQ Analyzer 6000 Series having the featuresand functions specified below. The MM6 shall be UL, CSA and CUL listed, CE marked and also meet ANSI standard C37.90.1 for surge protection. The MM6 device will also meet ANSI C12.20 (0.5%) energy revenue metering accuracy standard. 2. The MM6 shall provide direct reading metered or calculated values of the items listed below and shall auto range between units, kilounits and megaunits for all metered values. The device shall be capable of displaying the frequency distribution in graphic form and shall be capable of displaying the Waveform in graphic form. The device shall be capable of displaying multiple parameters at once, including four (4) user -configurable custom screens, displaying any seven (7) of the parameters listed. a. AC current (amperes) in A, B, and C phase, 3 -phase average, Neutral (N) and Ground (G) (provide neutral and ground current transformer). Accuracy +/- 0.2%. b. AC voltage (volts) for A -B, B -C and C -A, phase average, A -N, B -N and C -N, average phase to N, and N to G. Accuracy +/- 0.2%. c. Real Power (Watts), Reactive Power (vars), Apparent Power (VA), Real Energy (WH), Reactive Energy (VARH), Apparent Energy (VAN) for each phase and system. Accuracy +/- 0.4%. Forward/Reverse indication shall be provided. d. Frequency (Hertz) Accuracy +/- 0.4% e. Demand values for System Current (Amperes), System Real Power (Watts), System Reactive Power (vars), and System Apparent Power (VA) f. Power Factor for both Displacement and Apparent g. Percent Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) for all Currents and Voltages h. K -Factor, Transformer Derating Factor, and Crest Factor 3. The MM6 shall provide the following advanced, analysis features: a. Onboard logging capability, including the ability to log a total of 24 parameters with intervals ranging from 0.13 seconds (every 8 cycles) to twice a week (5,040 minutes). Four separate trends shall be available. 16429 -Switchboards - Low Voltage 16429-8 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' (Group Mounted Feeders) 11 SECTION 16429 - SWITCHBOARDS - LOW VOLTAGE (GROUP MOUNTED FEEDERS) (continued) b. Trend Analysis Screens displaying the minimum and maximum ' values for each metered value, with all parameters time stamped to 10 millisecond resolution. c. Time -of -use metering capability to store energy usage data for time- ' of -use revenue metering. Provide complete programmability for 32 • schedules including weekday, Saturday, Sunday, 22 holidays, 8 seasons, and 10 time periods per schedule for up to four (4) different ' utility rates. d. Demand Analysis Screens displaying present demand and peak demands for phase currents and power. Peak demands shall display ' time and date stamped to within 10 millisecond resolution. Demand Window Selection for metered demand values shall be selectable as a fixed or sliding window, a synch, pulse initiation, or a ' communication system initiation. e. Harmonic Analysis Screens shall be capable of being function key triggered to capture a high-speed waveform of two (2) cycles of data sampled at 128 samples per cycle, simultaneously recording all ' currents and voltages. Data captured shall include the magnitude and the direction of the harmonic source from 1st through the 50th harmonic. If. Event/Alarm Analysis Screens shall display data recorded for up to ten (10) event/alarm conditions. For each event/alarm a description of the event/alarni, date, and time of event/alarm shall be recorded ' (10 mS resolution). g. The MM6 shall be capable of transmitting all data at time of the event via communications to a personal computer for creating and ' displaying waveforms. h. The MM6 shall have the ability to store the last 504 meter events in non-volatile memory. Each event will be date and time stamped with 10 millisecond accuracy. The MM6 shall provide the ability to view the events via the local display or via communications. i. Event/Alarm Condition Levels shall be capable of being triggered by up to 7 of any of 61 conditions when the programmed threshold is exceeded. All shall have programmable time delays from 0.1 to 60 seconds except voltage disturbance which shall be programmable ' from 0 to 3,600 cycles. 4. The MM6 shall be capable of receiving the following inputs: a. Instrument Transformers: Input ranges of the MM6 shall accommodate external current transformers with ranges from ' 10,000/5 through 5/5 amperes. Provide external current transformers for each phase, neutral and ground circuit with rating as indicated on the drawing or sized for incoming service or ' associated feeder. MM6 shall be capable of overranging up to eight (8) times nominal current rating. Potential transformers shall be self included and fused for up to 600 volts with potential connections ' suitable for 3 -phase IOOV, 208/220/240V, 380/416V, 460/575 V. ' 16429 -Switchboards - Low Voltage (Group Mounted Feeders) 16429-9 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16429 - SWITCHBOARDS — LOW VOLTAGE (GROUP MOUNTED FEEDERS) (continued) Above 600V, provide fused external potential transformers for up to 500 kV. b. Control Power: The MM6 control power shall be capable of being supplied from the monitored incoming AC line up to 600 volts without the need for a separate AC control circuit. The device shall also be capable of being supplied from a separate control power source when indicated on the drawings (input range of 100 to 240V AC, 100 to 250V DC, or 24 to 48V DC). c. Dry Contacts: Three (3) dry discrete input contacts shall be monitored which may be programmed by the user to perform any of the following functions. The status of the input contacts shall be locally displayable and accessible through the communications port. 1) Trigger an Event/Alarm Analysis including Harmonic Analysis information for display on the device and information for Waveform Analysis and display at a personal computer. 2) Act as a synchronizing pulse input to synchronize demand windows with a utility provided synchronizing pulse. 3) Actuate a relay output. 4) Reset a relay output, peak demand, Minimum/Maximum, or Event Analysis records. 5) Furnish Relay Output Contacts with four (4) Form C (NO/NC) relay output contacts which shall be capable of being independently programmed for the following functions: a) Act as a kWH, kVARH, or kVAH pulse initiator output. b) Actuate on one (1) or more Event/Alarm conditions, including discrete inputs and Communication Command signal. 6) Furnish one (1) 0 to 20 mA analog input and four (4) 0 to 20 mA outputs. 7) The device shall be fully programmable from the faceplate, including alarm relay and power quality (e.g., harmonic distortion) settings. Programming shall be password protected. 8) Provide a communication card capable of transmitting all data, remotely controlling and programming the MM6 over a compatible two -wire local area network (LAN) to an Allen-Bradley Control Logix PLC. There shall also be an RJ-45 Ethernet connection on the MM6. Ethernet communications protocol shall be compatible with the Allen-Bradley Ethernet/IP protocol. 2.12 ENCLOSURES: A. NEMA I Enclosure 16429 -Switchboards - Low Voltage 16429-10 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 (Group Mounted Feeders) I I I I I I Li I I Li I I I I I SECTION 16429 - SWITCHBOARDS - LOW VOLTAGE (GROUP MOUNTED FEEDERS) (continued) 2.13 -;z 2.14 2.15 NAMEPLATES: A. Engraved nameplates, mounted on the face of the assembly, shall be furnished or all main and feeder circuits as indicated on the drawings. Nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black characters on white background. Characters shall be 3/16 - inch high, minimum. Nameplates shall give item designation and circuit number as well as frame ampere size and appropriate trip rating. Furnish master nameplate giving switchboard designation, voltage ampere rating, short-circuit rating, manufacturer's name, general order number, and item number. B. Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. FINISH: A. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the switchboard shall be properly cleaned and provided with a rust -inhibiting phosphatized coating. Color and finish of the switchboard shall be ANSI 61 light gray. TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION: A. Electrical Requirements I. Unit Operating Voltage: Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit configuration. Minimum rating for the Switchboard TVSS will be 250kA. 2. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): The MCOV shall be greater than 115% of the nominal system operating voltage. 3. The suppression system shall incorporate a hybrid designed Metal -Oxide Varistors (MOV) surge suppressor for the service entrance and other distribution level. The system shall not utilize silicon avalanche diodes, selenium cell, air gaps or other components that may crowbar the system voltage leading to system upset or create any environmental hazards. 4. Protection Modes:. For a wye configured system, the device must have directly connected suppression elements between line -neutral (L -N), line - ground (L -G), and neutral -ground (N -G). For a delta -configured system, the device must have suppression elements between line to line (L -L) and line to ground (L -G). 5. UL 1449 2nd Edition Suppressed Voltage Rating (SVR): The maximum UL 1449 2nd Edition SVR for the device must not exceed the following: Modes 208Y/120 480Y/277 600Y/347 L -N; L -G; N -G 400V 800V 1200V L -L 800V 1800V 1800V 6. ANSI/IEEE Cat. C3 Let Through Voltage: The let through voltage based on IEEE C62.41 and C62.45 recommended procedures for Category C3 surges (20 kV, 10 kA) shall be less than: ' 16429 -Switchboards - Low Voltage (Group Mounted Feeders) 16429-11 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16429 - SWITCHBOARDS - LOW VOLTAGE (GROUP MOUNTED FEEDERS) (continued) Mode 208Y/120 480Y/277 600Y/347 L -N 560V 960V 1840V 7. ANSI/IEEE Cat. 83 Let Through Voltage: Let through voltage based on IEEE C62.41 and C62.45 recommended procedures for the ANSI/IEEE Cat. B3 ringwave (6 kV, 500 amps) shall be less than: Mode 208Y/120 480Y/277 600Y1347 L -N 160V 165V 168V B. TVSS Design 1. Balanced Suppression Platform: The surge current shall be equally distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. The surge suppression platform must provide equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. Designs incorporating TVSS modules shall not be acceptable. 2. Electrical Noise Filter: Each unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be 50 dB at 100 kHz using the MIL -STD -220A insertion loss test method. Products not able to demonstrate noise attenuation of 50 dB @ 100 kHz shall be rejected. 3. Extended Range Filter: The Surge Protective Device shall have a High Frequency Extended Range Tracking filter in each Line to Neutral mode with compliance to UL 1283 and NEMA LS1. The filter shall have published high frequency attenuation rating in the attenuation frequencies. Attenuation Frequency 50kHz 100kHz 500kHz 1MHz 10MHz 100MHz Insertion Loss (ratio) 40 316 316 89 200 79 Insertion Loss (dB) 32 50 50 39 46 38 Internal Connections: No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall be used as surge current conductors. All internal components shall be hardwired with connections utilizing low impedance conductors and compression fittings. Standard Monitoring Diagnostics: Each TVSS shall provide integral monitoring options: a. Each unit shall provide a green / red solid state indicator light which shall be provided on each phase. The absence of a green light and the presence of a red light shall indicate which phase(s) has been damaged. b. Remote Status Monitor: The TVSS device shall include form C dry contacts (one NO and one NC) for remote annunciation of unit status. The remote alarm shall change state if any of the three phases detect a fault condition. c. Audible Alarm: The TVSS shall provide an audible alarm with a reset pushbutton that will be activated under any fault condition. 16429 -Switchboards - Low Voltage 16429-12 RN Project No. 11-1875-00 (Group Mounted Feeders) E SECTION 16429 - SWITCHBOARDS — LOW VOLTAGE (GROUP MOUNTED FEEDERS) (continued) I I I I H I I I I I H I I I I I d. Event Counter: The TVSS shall be equipped with an LCD display system designed to indicate to the user how many surges, sags, swells and outages have occurred at the location. The event counter triggers each time under each respective categories after significant event occurs. A reset pushbutton shall also be standard allowing all counters to be zeroed. e. Push to Test: The TVSS shall be equipped with a push -to -test feature designed to provide users with real time testing of the suppressor's monitoring and diagnostic system. By depressing the test button, the diagnostic system initiates a self test procedure. If the system is fully operational, the self test will activate all indicator lights. f. Voltage Monitoring: The TVSS shall display true Root Mean Square (RMS) on three L -N voltage protection mode on wye configuration and three L -L voltage on delta configuration. 6. Monitoring Diagnostics: a. Non -Volatile Memory: The TVSS shall at least be able to save the last 1,000 events. b. Network Communication: The TVSS shall have the ability to communicate via Ethernet lOBaseT port or Modbus to provide information to the network master drive. c. Security: The TVSS monitoring diagnostics shall be password protected. d. Protection Remaining: The TVSS shall indicate the level of protection remaining. e. Total Harmonic Distortion (%THD): The TVSS shall display Total Harmonic Distortion. 7. Overcurrent Protection Fusing: In order to isolate the TVSS under any fault condition, the manufacturer shall provide:. a. Individual Fusing: MOVs shall be individually fused via Copper Fuse Trace. The Copper Fuse shall allow protection during high surge (kA) events. b. Thermal Protection: MOVs shall be equipped with Thermal Fuse Spring (TFS) Technology which allows disconnection of the suppression component at the overheated stage common during temporary over -voltage condition. For small fault currents between IOOmA to 30Amp, or if the occurrence is over a longer period of time, the TFS will disconnect first. Manufacturers that utilize fuse trace only shall not be approved since there is no fault current protection between I OOmA to 30A. c. All overcurrent protection components shall be tested in compliance with UL 1449 -Limited Current Test and AIC rating test. C. Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capability as per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and ANSI/IEEE C62.45: 1992 1. The suppression filter system shall be repetitive surge tested in every mode utilizing a 1.2 x 50µsec, 20kV open circuit voltage. 8 x 20µsec, l OkA short circuit current Category C3 hi -wave at one minute intervals without 16429 -Switchboards - Low Voltage 16429-13 RJN Project No. I I-1875-00 (Group Mounted Feeders) I SECTION 16429 - SWITCHBOARDS — LOW VOLTAGE (GROUP MOUNTED FEEDERS) (continued) suffering either performance degradation or more than 10% deviation of clamping voltage at a specified surge current. The minimum repetitive surge current capability as per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and ANSI/IEEE C62.45 — 1992 shall be: a. Service Entrance: 12000 impulse per mode b. Distribution Panelboard: 10000 impulse per mode c. Branch Location Panelboard: 9000 impulse per mode 2.16 SYSTEM APPLICATION: A. The TVSS applications covered under this section include distribution and branch panel locations, bus plugs, motor control centers (MCC), switchgear, and switchboard assemblies. The branch panel located TVSS shall be tested and demonstrate to be suitable for ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category Cl environments. B. Surge Current Capacity: The minimum total surge current 8 x 20 microsecond waveform that the device is capable of withstanding shall be as shown in the following table: Minimum Total Surge Current and Withstand Capability With Compliance to ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and NEMA LS1 Surge Withstand Capabilities ANSI/IEEE C3 Application Per Phase Per Mode Wave (10 kA) Service Entrance Locations 250kA 125kA 12000 (Switchboards, Switchgear, MCC Main Entrance) High Exposure Roof Top Locations 160kA 80kA 10000 Distribution Panelboards) Branch Locations (Panelboards, 120kA 60kA 9000 MCCs, Busway) C. Lighting and Distribution Panelboard Requirements 1. The TVSS application covered under this section includes lighting and distribution panelboards. The TVSS units shall be tested to demonstrate suitability for ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category Cl environments. 2. The TVSS shall not limit the use of Through -feed lugs, Sub -feed Jugs and Sub -feed breaker options. 3. The TVSS shall be immediately installed on the load side of the main breaker. 4. The panelboard shall be capable of re -energizing upon removal of the TVSS. 5. A direct bus bar connection shall be used to mount the TVSS component to the panelboard bus bar to reduce the impedance of the shunt path. 6. The TVSS panelboard shall be constructed using a direct bus bar connection (cable connection between bus bar and TVSS device is not acceptable). TVSS units that use a cable connection do not meet the intent of this specification. J C I I I I I I U I k I H. 16429 -Switchboards - Low Voltage 16429-14 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' (Group Mounted Feeders) LJ I SECTION 16429 - SWITCHBOARDS — LOW VOLTAGE (GROUP MOUNTED FEEDERS) ' (continued) 7. The TVSS shall be included and mounted within the panelboard by the ' manufacturer of the panelboard. 8. The TVSS shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboard. 9. The complete panelboard including the TVSS shall be UL67 listed. 2.17 WARRANTY: A. The manufacturer shall provide a full ten- (10-) year warranty from the date of ' shipment against any TVSS part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and any applicable national or local code. ' PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORY TESTING: A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards. II. The switchboard shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted, and tested at the factory. After assembly, the complete switchboard will be tested for operation under simulated service conditions to assure the accuracy of the ' wiring and the functioning of all equipment. The main circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 2200 volts for one (1) minute between live parts and ground, and between opposite polarities. The wiring and control circuits ' shall be given a dielectric test of 1500 volts for one (1) minute between live parts and ground. 2. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test ' reports. 3.02 INSTALLATION: IA. The Contractors shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's instructions, contract drawings and National Electrical Code. B. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of ' being moved into installation position and bolted directly to the floor without the use of floor sills provided the floor is level to 1/8 inch per 3 -foot distance in any direction. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided ' by the Contractor. 3.03 FIELD SERVICE: ' A. A trained authorized manufacturer's field representative shall perform all necessary start-up functions on this equipment. This service will be followed by a written report as well as one additional year of factory warranty on any equipment ' commissioned by the factory authorized service engineer. Any start-up services performed by other than a factory authorized person will not carry the additional one-year warranty. 1 END OF SECTION 16429 ' 16429 -Switchboards - Low Voltage 16429-15 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 (Group Mounted Feeders) 1 SECTION 16442 - PANEL BOARDS PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 16429 - Switchboards - Low Voltage (Group Mounted Feeders) 1.03 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes load centers and panel boards, overcurrent protective devices, and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V and less for the following types: 1. Lighting and appliance branch -circuit panel boards 2. Distribution panel boards 1.04 DEFINITIONS: A. SPDT: Single pole, double throw B. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter 1.05 SUBMITTALS: I I A. Product Data: For each type of panel board, overcurrent protective device, TVSS device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panel board and related equipment 1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type I b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings c. Short-circuit current rating of panel boards and overcurrent protective devices d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components 2. Wiring Diagrams: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. C. Panel Board Schedules: For installation in panel boards D. Maintenance Data: For panel boards and components to include in maintenance manuals specified in the general conditions. In addition to requirements specified in the general conditions include the following: I. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices 2. Time -current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device 16442 -Panel Boards 16442-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16442 - PANEL BOARDS (continued) 1.06 1.07 DUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use B. Comply with NEMA PB 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. COORDINATION: A. Coordinate layout and installation of panel boards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 2.02 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Panel boards, overcurrent protective devices, controllers, contractors, and accessories: a. Square D Co. b. Eaton Corp.; Cutler -Hammer Products c. O-Z/Gedney — Unit of General Signal d. Siemens: Electrical Product and Systems e. Killark Electrical MFD. Co. FABRICATION AND FEATURES: A. Enclosures: Surface/recessed cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1, to meet environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R 2. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4 3. Hazardous Locations: NEMA 250, Type 7 & 8 to comply with Class 1, Division 1 B. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush -mounted fronts, overlap box. C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion -resistant treatment or primer coat D. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted inside metal frame, inside panel board door E. Bus: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity F. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material 16442 -Panel Boards 16442-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16442 — PANEL BOARDS (continued) G. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch -circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box ' H. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panel boards with main service disconnect switches II. Refer to Section 16429, Switchboards - Low Voltage (Group Mounted Feeders) for transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) 2.03 PANEL BOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING: ' A. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals ' B. Ratings shall be established by Section 16011, Short -Circuit Coordination Study. 2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANEL BOARDS: IA. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units B. ' Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike 2.05 DISTRIBUTION PANEL BOARDS: ' A. Doors: Front mounted, except omit in fused -switch panel boards; secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. B. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker C. Branch overcurrent protective devices shall be one of the following: 1. For Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt -on circuit ' breakers 2. For Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt -on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive -locking device ' requires mechanical release for removal 2.06 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES: ' i. A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents 1. Therml-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low- I. level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. ' 2. Current -Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let - through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5 B. Molded -Case Circuit -Breaker Features and Accessories. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles I. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors I 16442 -Panel Boards 16442-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 16442 — PANEL BOARDS (continued) 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air conditioning, and refrigerating equipment PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install panel boards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEC for height of top operating handle. C. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panel boards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish. D. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panel board loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION: A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods". B. Panel Board Nameplates: Label each panel board with engraved metal or laminated- I plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion -resistant screws. 3.03 CONNECTIONS: ' A. Install equipment grounding connections for panel boards with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panel board bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. ' B. Testing: After installing panel boards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded -case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. I 16442 -Panel Boards 16442-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16442 - PANEL BOARDS (continued) 3.05 ADJUSTING: A. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges. 3.06 CLEANING: A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panel boards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION 16442 16442 -Panel Boards 16442-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16461- DRY -TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS (1,000 KVA AND BELOW) PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. '1.02 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes dry -type distribution and specialty transformers rated 1,000 V and less. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Include data on features, components, ratings, and performance for each type of transformer specified. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevation views. Show minimum clearances and installed devices and features. B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and identify terminals for tap changing and connecting field -installed wiring. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transformers certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for tests specified in Part 3. F. Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in the maintenance manuals specified in the general conditions 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Listing and Labeling: Provide transformers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized . Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7 7 Li I I B. Comply with IEEE C2. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.05 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated -type unit throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. •' 16461 -Dry -Type Distribution Transformers (1,000 KVA and Below) 16461-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16461 - DRY -TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS (1,000 KVA AND BELOW) (continued) PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering transformers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Square D; Groupe Schneider 2. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp. 3. Siemens Enegy and Automation 2.02 TRANSFORMERS, GENERAL: ' A. Description: Factory -assembled and -tested, air-cooled units of types specified, designed for 60 -Hz service B. Cores: Grain -oriented, non -aging silicon steel C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices, except for taps D. internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type E. Enclosure: Class complies with NEMA 250 for the environment in which installed 2.03 GENERAL-PURPOSE DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS: A. Comply with NEMA ST 20 and list and label as complying with UL 1561. B. Cores: One leg per phase C. Windings: One coil per phase in primary and secondary D. Enclosure: Indoor, ventilated E. Insulation Class: 185 or 220 deg C class for transformers 15 kVA or smaller; 220 deg C class for transformers larger than 15 kVA 1. Rated Temperature Rise: 115 deg C maximum rise above 40 deg C F. Taps: For transformers 3 kVA and larger, full -capacity taps in high -voltage windings are as follows: 1. Taps, 15 through 500 kVA: Six 2.5 -percent taps, 2 above and 4 below rated high voltage G. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding is independently single shielded with a full - width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance. 1. Coil leads and terminal strips are arranged to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output connections. 2. Shield Terminal: Separate; marked "Shield" for grounding connection. 3. Capacitance: Shield limits capacitance between primary and secondary to a maximum of 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz 4. Common -Mode Noise Attenuation: Minus 120 dB minimum, 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minus 65 dB minimum, 1.5 to 100 kHz t 5. Normal -Mode Noise Attenuation: Minus 52 dB minimum, 1.5 to 10 kHz 16461 -Dry -Type Distribution Transformers 16461-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 (1,000 KVA and Below) I SECTION 16461 - DRY-TYPE:DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS (1,000 KVA AND BELOW) (continued) 2.04 FINISHES: ' A. Indoor Units: Manufacturer's standard paint over corrosion -resistant pretreatment and primer 2.05 SOURCE DUALITY CONTROL: A. Factory Tests: Design and routine tests comply with referenced standards. ' PART3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: 1 A. Comply with safety requirements of IEEE C2. B. Arrange equipment to provide adequate spacing for access and for circulation of 'cooling air. C. Identify transformers and install warning signs according to Division 16 Section '• "Basic Materials and Methods". D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those ' GROUNDING; in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.02NDING: IA. Separately Derived Systems: Comply with NFPA 70 requirements for connecting to grounding electrodes and for bonding to metallic piping near the transformer. ' B. Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for materials and installation requirements. 3.03 FIELD DUALITY CONTROL: A. Tests: Include the following minimum inspections and tests according to manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91 for test methods 'and data correction factors. 1. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical and electrical integrity, and damage or deterioration. Verify that temporary shipping ' bracing has been removed. Include internal inspection through access panels and covers. 2. Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturer's published torque values or, if not available, those specified in ' UL 486A and UL 486B. 3. Insulation Resistance: Perform megohmmeter tests of primary and secondary winding to winding and winding to ground. • a. Minimum Test Voltage: 1,000 V, dc • b. Minimum Insulation Resistance: 500 megohms c. Duration of Each Test: 10 minutes Id. Temperature Correction: Correct results for test temperature deviation from 20 deg C standard. ' 16461 -Dry -Type Distribution Transformers 16461-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 (1,000 KVA and Below) r SECTION 16461 - DRY -TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS (1.000 KVA AND BELOW) (continued) B. Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data. Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Verify that transformers meet specified requirements. 3.04 CLEANING: A. On completion of installation, inspect components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair scratches and mars on finish to match original finish. Clean components internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. 3.05 ADJUSTING: A. After installing and cleaning, touch up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish. B. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization equipment throughout normal operating cycle of facility. Record primary and secondary voltages and tap settings and submit with test results. C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in readjusting transformer tap settings to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to 2 visits to Project site for this purpose without additional cost. 1. Voltage Recordings: Contractor performed. Provide up to 48 hours of recording on the low -voltage system of each medium -voltage transformer. 2. Point of Measurement: Make voltage recordings at load outlets selected by Owner. END OF SECTION 16461 ' I I I —1 16461 -Dry -Type Distribution Transformers 16461-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' (1,000 KVA and Below) SECTION 16481 - RVSS - LOW -VOLTAGE STARTERS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the low voltage motor starters as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. The motor starters shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of NEMA, ANSI and UL. 1.03 SUBMITTALS - FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL: • A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Master drawing index 2. Dimensioned outline drawings 3. Conduit entry/exit locations 4. Cable terminal sizes 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Nameplate schedule 7. Ratings including: a. Voltage b. Horsepower and/or continuous current 8. Product data sheets 1.04 SUBMITTALS - FOR CONSTRUCTION: A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final as -built drawings 2. Wiring diagrams 3. Seismic certification B. The final (as -built) drawings shall include the same drawings as the construction drawings and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS: A. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. B. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. C. The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet all applicable seismic requirements of the BOCA National Building Code, Paragraph 1612.6. This shall include both vertical and lateral required response spectra as specified. Alternatively, the manufacturer's certification may be based on a detailed computer analysis of the entire assembly structure and its components. Guidelines for the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided 16481-RVSS - Low -Voltage Starters 16481-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16481 - RVSS - LOW -VOLTAGE STARTERS (continued) by the switchgear manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative equipment. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. The test response spectra shall meet or exceed the required response spectra peak acceleration of 1.6g's (3.2-11 Hz) and a ZPA of I.Og as specified in the BOCA National Building Code, for all equipment natural frequencies up to at least 35 Hz. D. The following minimum mounting and installation guidelines shall be met, unless specifically modified by the above -referenced standards. I. The Contractor shall provide equipment anchorage details, coordinated with the equipment mounting provision, prepared -and stamped by a licensed civil engineer in the state. Mounting recommendations shall be provided by the manufacturer based upon approved shake table tests used to verify the seismic design of the equipment. 2. The equipment manufacturer shall certify that the equipment can withstand, that is, function following the seismic event, including both vertical and lateral required response spectra as specified in above codes. 3. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. Seismic qualification shall be considered achieved when the capability of the equipment, meets or exceeds the specified response spectra. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: I I I Li I I A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Cutler -Hammer B. Toshiba C. Allen Bradley 2.02 SOLID-STATE REDUCED -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL: A. Reduced -Voltage Motor Starter 1. Controller shall be Cutler -Hammer type S801 or approved equal. 2. The solid-state reduced -voltage starter shall be UL and CSA listed. The solid-state reduced -voltage starter shall be an integrated unit with power SCRs, logic board, paralleling bypass contactor, and electronic overload relay enclosed in a single molded housing. 3. The SCR -based power section shall consist of six (6) back-to-back SCRs and shall be rated for a minimum peak inverse voltage rating of 1,500 volts PIV. 4. Units using triacs or SCR/diode combinations shall not be acceptable. 16481-RVSS — Low -Voltage Starters 16481-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 r - II I I 11 I SECTION 16481 - RVSS — LOW -VOLTAGE STARTERS (continued) 1 5. Resistor/capacitor snubber networks shall be used to prevent false firing of SCRs due to dV/dT effects. 6. The logic board shall be mounted for ease of testing, service and replacement. It shall have quick disconnect plug-in connectors for current 1. transformer inputs, line and load voltage inputs and SCR gate firing output ' circuits. 7. The logic board shall be identical for all ampere ratings and voltage classes and shall be conformally coated to protect environmental concerns. I 8. The paralleling run bypass contactor shall energize when the motor reaches 90 of full speed and close/open under one (1) times motor current. 9. The paralleling run bypass contactor shall utilize an intelligent coil t controller to limit contact bounce and optimize coil voltage during varying system conditions. 10. The coil shall have a lifetime warranty. I. 11. Starter shall be provided with electronic overload protection as standard and shall be based on inverse time -current algorithm. Overload protection shall be capable of being disabled during ramp start for long acceleration loads via a DIP switch setting on the device keypad. 12. Overload protection shall be adjusted via the device keypad and shall have a motor full load ampere adjustment from 30 to 100% of the maximum continuous ampere rating of the starter. ' 13. Starter shall have selectable overload class setting of 5, 10, 20 or 30 via a DIP switch setting on the device keypad. 14. Starter shall be capable of either an electronic or mechanical reset after a ' fault. 15. Units using bimetal overload relays are not acceptable. 16. Overtemperature protection (on heat sink) shall be standard. II?. Starters shall provide protection against improper line -side phase rotation as standard. Starter will shut down if a line -side phase rotation other than A -B -C exists. This feature can be disabled via a DIP switch on the device ' keypad. 18. Starters shall provide protection against a phase loss or unbalance condition as standard. Starter will shut down if a 50% current differential between any t two phases is encountered. This feature can be disabled via a DIP switch on the device keypad. 19. Start shall provide protection against a motor stall condition as standard. ' This feature can be disabled via a DIP switch on.the device keypad. 20. Starter shall provide protection against a motor jam condition as standard. This feature can be disabled via a DIP switch on the device keypad. 21. Starter shall be provided with a Form C normally open (NO), normally ' closed (NC) contact that shall change state when a fault condition exists. Contacts shall be rated 60 VA (resistive load) and 20 VA (inductive load). In addition, an LED display on the device keypad shall indicate type of fault (Overtemperature, Phase Loss, Jam, Stall, Phase Reversal and Overload). 22. The following control function adjustments on the device keypad are required: ' a. Selectable Torque Ramp Start or Current Limit Start b. Adjustable Kick Start Time: 0-2 seconds ' 16481 -RVSS — Low -Voltage Starters 16481-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16481 - RVSS - LOW-VOLTAGEiSTARTERS (continued) t c. Adjustable Kick Start Torque: 0-85% d. Adjustable Ramp Start Time: 0.5-180 seconds e. Adjustable Initial Starting Ramp Torque: 0-85% f. Adjustable Smooth Stop Ramp Time: 0-60 seconds 23. Units enclosed in motor control centers shall be of the same manufacturer as that of the circuit breaker and motor control center for coordination and design issues. 24. Maximum continuous operation shall be at 115% of continuous ampere ' rating. 2.03 ENCLOSURES: A. The enclosure shall be general purpose NEMA 1. ' 2.04 OPTIONS: A. Each starter shall be equipped with a fused control power transformer (100 VA minimum), HOA selector switch, start -stop pushbutton, red "run" pilot light, green "stop" pilot light, 2 NO/2 NC auxiliary contacts. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORY TESTING: A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMA standards. B. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports. 3.02 FIELD DUALITY CONTROL: A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative to ' assist the Contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this section. The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained herein. ' B. The following minimum work shall be performed by the Contractor under the technical direction of the manufacturer's service representative. 1. Inspection and final adjustments 2. Operational and functional checks of starters/starters and spare parts C. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION: A. A qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing that •1 the equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1 16481-RVSS — Low -Voltage Starters 16481-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16481 - RVSS - LOW -VOLTAGE STARTERS (continued) B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification to the owner. 3.04 TRAINING: A. The Contractor shall provide a training session for up to five (5) owner's representatives for 2 normal workdays at a jobsite location determined by the owner. B. The training representative shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. C. The training program shall consist of the following: I. Instructions on the proper maintenance and operation of the equipment END OF SECTION 16481 16481-RVSS — Low -Voltage Starters 16481-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16482 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS - LOW VOLTAGE PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the motor control centers as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 16481 - Motor Starters - Low Voltage B. Section 16483 - Variable -Frequency Drives C. Section 16429 - Switchboards - Low Voltage (Group Mounted Feeders) 1.03 REFERENCES: A. The Motor Control Centers and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of NEMA, ANSI and UL 845. 1.04 SUBMITTALS - FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL: A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: I. Master drawing index 2. Front view elevation 3. Floor plan 4. Top view 5. Single line 6. Unit wiring diagrams depicting remote devices 7. Nameplate schedule 8. Starter and component schedule 9. Conduit entry/exit locations 10. Assembly ratings including: a. - Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 11. Major component ratings including: d. Voltage e. Continuous current f. Interrupting ratings 12. Cable terminal sizes 13. Product data sheets B. Where applicable the following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Busway connection 2. Connection details between close -coupled assemblies 3. Composite floor plan of close -coupled assemblies 4. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations. 16482 -Motor Control Centers -Low Voltage 16482-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 H SECTION 16482 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS - LOW VOLTAGE (continued) 1.05 SUBMITTALS — FOR CLOSEOUT: A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: t 1. Final as -built drawings 2. Unit wiring diagrams 3. Certified production test reports 4. Installation information 5. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage details. B. The final (as -built) drawings shall include the same drawings as the construction ' drawings and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS: A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. D. The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet all applicable seismic requirements of the BOCA National Building Code, Paragraph 1612.6. This shall include both vertical and lateral required response spectra as specified. Alternatively, the manufacturer's certification may be based on a detailed computer analysis of the entire assembly structure and its components. Guidelines for the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the switchgear manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative equipment. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. The test response spectra shall meet or exceed the required response spectra peak acceleration of 1.6g's (3.2-11 Hz) and a ZPA of I.0g as specified in the BOCA National Building Code, for all equipment natural frequencies up to at least 35 Hz. E. The following minimum mounting and installation guidelines shall be met, unless specifically modified by the above -referenced standards. 1. The Contractor shall provide equipment anchorage details, coordinated with the equipment mounting provision, prepared and stamped by a licensed civil engineer in the state. Mounting recommendations shall be provided by the manufacturer based upon approved shake table tests used to verify the seismic design of the equipment. 2. The equipment manufacturer shall certify that the equipment can withstand, that is, function following the seismic event, including both vertical and lateral required response spectras as specified in the above codes. 3. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. Seismic qualification shall be ' 16482 -Motor Control Centers -Low Voltage 16482-2 RJN'Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16482 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS - LOW VOLTAGE (continued) 1 considered achieved when the capability of the equipment meets or exceeds the specified response spectra. I 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. The motor control centers shall bear a UL label. Certified copies of production test Ii reports shall be supplied demonstrating compliance with these standards when requested by the Engineer. 1.08 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at. time of shipment. 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: A. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped and shall include instruction leaflets, instruction bulletins and renewal parts lists where applicable, for the complete assembly and each major component. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Cutler -Hammer ' B. Siemens C. Square D 2.02 RATINGS: ' A. The Motor Control Center(s) shall be 600 -volt class suitable for operation on a three- phase, 60 -Hz system. The system operating voltage and number of wires shall be as indicated on the drawings. '• 2.03 CONSTRUCTION: A. Motor Control Center(s) shall be based on Cutler -Hammer type F2 100. ' B. Structures shall be totally enclosed deadfront, free-standing assemblies. They shall be 90 inches high and 16 inches deep for front -mounted units. Structures shall contain a horizontal wireway at the top, isolated from the horizontal bus and shall be readily accessible through a hinged cover. Adequate space for conduit and wiring to enter the top or bottom shall be provided without structural interference. C. Compartments for mounting control units shall be incrementally arranged such that ' not more than six (6) Size I starters mounted within each vertical structure. Guide rails shall be provided. 16482 -Motor Control Centers -Low Voltage 16482-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I SECTION 16482 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS - LOW VOLTAGE (continued) D. A vertical wireway with minimum of 35 square inches of cross sectional area shall be adjacent to each vertical unit and shall be covered by a hinged door. Wireways shall contain steel rod cable supports. E. All full voltage starter units through NEMA Size 5 shall be of the drawout type. Draw -out provisions shall include a positive guide rail system and stab shrouds to absolutely ensure alignment of stabs with the vertical bus. Draw -out units shall have a tin-plated stab assembly for connection to the vertical bus. No wiring to these stabs shall extend into the bus compartment. Interior of all units shall be painted white for increased visibility. Units shall be equipped with side -mounted, positive latch pull -apart -type control terminal blocks rated 600 volts. Knockouts shall be provided for the addition of future terminal blocks. All drawout units shall be secured by a spring -loaded quarter -turn -indicating -type fastening device located at the top front of the unit. Each unit compartment shall be provided with an individual front door. F. An operating mechanism shall be mounted on the primary disconnect of each starter unit. It shall be mechanically interlocked with the unit door to prevent access unless the disconnect is in the OFF position. A defeater shall be provided to bypass this interlock. With the door open, an interlock shall be provided to prevent inadvertent closing of the disconnect. A second interlock shall be provided to prevent removal or re-insertion of the unit while in the ON position. Padlocking facilities shall be provided to positively lock the disconnect in the OFF position with from one (1) to three (3) padlocks with the door open or closed. In addition, means shall be provided to padlock the unit in a partially withdrawn position with the stabs free of the vertical bus. 2.04 BUS: A. Each structure shall contain a main horizontal copper silver-plated bus, rated ' 600 amperes as shown on the drawings. The horizontal bus shall be rated at 65 degrees C temperature rise over a 40 degree C ambient in compliance with UL standards. Vertical bus feeding unit compartments shall be copper and shall be securely bolted to the horizontal main bus. All joints shall be front accessible for ease of maintenance. The vertical bus shall have a minimum rating of 300 amperes. B. The vertical bus shall be completely isolated and insulated by means of a labyrinth design barrier. It shall effectively isolate the vertical buses to prevent any fault - generated gases to pass from one phase to another. The vertical bus shall include a shutter mechanism to provide complete isolation of the vertical bus when a unit is removed. C. Buses shall be braced for 100,000 amperes minimum RMS symmetrical. Final bus rating in excess of 100,000A shall be established per Specification Section 16011, Short Circuit Coordination Study. D. A copper ground bus shall be furnished firmly secured to each vertical section structure and shall extend the entire length of the motor control center. E. Each structure shall contain tin-plated vertical ground bus rated 300 amperes. The ' vertical ground bus shall be directly connected to the horizontal ground bus via a tin - 16482 -Motor Control Centers -Low Voltage 16482-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I I II I L I II I I I Li SECTION 16482 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS - LOW VOLTAGE (continued) plated copper connector. Units shall connect to the vertical bus via a tin-plated copper stab. 2.05 WIRING/TERMINATIONS: A. Wiring shall be NEMA Class I, Type B. 2,06 MOTOR CONTROLLERS: A. Combination starter units shall be full -voltage non -reversing, unless otherwise shown, and shall utilize Cutler -Hammer -type HMCP Motor Circuit Protectors. Each combination unit shall be rated 100,000 AIC symmetrical at 480V. The HMCP shall provide adjustable magnetic protection and be provided with pin insert to limit magnetic adjustment to a maximum of 1700% motor nameplate full load current to comply with NEC requirements. All HMCP combination starter units shall have a "tripped" position on the unit disconnect and a push -to -test button on the HMCP. Type HMCP motor circuit protectors shall include transient override feature for motor inrush current. HMCP shall be used to provide IEC 947-4 Type 2 coordination to 100,000 amperes. B. Motor Starters - Freedom Design or Approved Equal I. Magnetic starters through NEMA Size 9 shall be equipped with double - break silver alloy contacts. The starter must have straight -through wiring. Each starter shall have one (I) NO auxiliary contact. 2. Coils shall be of molded construction through NEMA Size 9. All coils to be color -coded through Size 5 and permanently marked with voltage, frequency and part number. 3. Solid -State Overload Relay a. Provide a solid-state overload relay for protection of the motors. The relay shall be Cutler -Hammer type CEP7 or approved equal. b. The overload relay shall provide high accuracy through the use of state-of-the-art microelectronic packaging technology. The relay shall be suitable for application with NEMA Size I through Size 7 motor starters. c. The overload relay shall be modular in design, be an integral part of a family of relays to provide a choice of levels of protection, be designed to directly replace existing electromechanical overload relays, and be listed under UL Standard 508. d. The overload relay shall have the following features: I) Be self -powered 2) Class 10 tripping characteristics • 3) Manual or automatic reset 4) Phase loss protection. The relay shall trip in 2 seconds or less under phase loss condition when applied to a fully • loaded motor 5) Visible trip indication 6) One NO and one NC isolated auxiliary contact 7) Test button that operates the normally closed contact 8) Test trip function that trips both the NO and NC contacts 9) A current adjustment range of 3.2:1 or greater 16482 -Motor Control Centers -Low Voltage 16482-5 RJN Project No. I I-1875-00 Li IT SECTION 16482 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS - LOW VOLTAGE (continued) 10) Ambient temperature compensated 11) Ground fault protection. Relay shall trip at 50% of full load ampere setting 12) Jam/stall protection. Relay shall trip at 400% of full load ampere setting, after inrush. 4. NEMA size 00 through 2 starters shall be suitable for the addition of at least six (6) external auxiliary contacts of any arrangement normally open or normally closed. Size 3 through 8 starters shall be suitable for the addition of up to eight (8) external auxiliary contacts of any arrangement normally ' open or normally closed. 5. Motor starters shall be Cutler -Hammer Freedom Series or approved equal. C. Each starter shall be equipped with a fused control power'transformer, two (2) 1 indicating lights, HOA selector switch, and two (2) NO contacts, unless otherwise scheduled on the drawings. Device panel to have space to accommodate six (6) oil - tight pilot -control devices or indicating ammeters, voltmeters, or elapsed meters. 2.07 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) A. Provide TVSS per Specification 16429, Switchboards, Section 2.15, Transient ' Voltage Surge Supression. 2.08 OVERCURRENT DEVICES: A. Circuit Breakers I. Individual feeder breakers shall have a minimum interrupting capacity of 100 kAIC at rated voltage or as scheduled on the drawings. Refer to Section 16429, Switchboards — Low Voltage (Group Mounted Feeders) for circuit breaker specifications. 2.09 INCOMING FEEDER TERMINATIONS AND DEVICE: A. Incoming cable shall terminate within the control center on a main lug termination point. Main lug terminations shall have adequate dedicated space for the type and size of cable used and the lugs shall be compression -type with anti -turn feature. 2.10 ENCLOSURES: ' A. The type of enclosure shall be in accordance with NEMA standards for Type IA with gasketed doors. All enclosing sheet steel, wireways and unit doors shall be gasketed. 2.11 NAMEPLATES: A. Each unit will have a 1.0 x 2.5 -inch hot stamped nameplate. The lettering shall be black 3/16 inch high in a white background. 2.12 FINISH: A. The control center shall be given a phosphatizing pretreatment. The paint coating ' shall be a polyester urethane, thermosetting powder paint. Manufacturer's standard color shall be used. I 16482 -Motor Control Centers -Low Voltage 16482-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I SECTION 16482 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS - LOW VOLTAGE (continued) B. The control center finish shall pass 600 hours of corrosion resistance testing per ASTM B 117. PART 3- EXECUTION 3:01 FACTORY TESTING: A. The motor control centers shall have been tested in a high -power laboratory to prove adequate mechanical and electrical capabilities. ' B. All factory tests required by the latest ANSI, NEMA and UL standards shall be performed. IC. A certified test report of all standard production tests shall be available to the Engineer upon request. D. Factory tests as outlined above shall be witnessed by the owner's representative. II. The manufacturer shall notify the owner two (2) weeks prior to the date the tests are to be performed. 2. The manufacturer shall include the cost of transportation and lodging for up Ito three (3) owner's representatives. The cost of meals and incidental expenses shall be the owner's responsibility. 3.02 FIELD DUALITY CONTROL: A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative to assist the contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this ' section for a period of I working day. The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and ' components contained therein. B. The following minimum work shall be performed by the Contractor under the technical direction of the manufacturer's service representative: 1. Rig the MCC assembly into final location and install on level surface. 2. Check all removable cells and starter units for easy removal and insertion. 3. Perform insulation tests on each phase and verify low -resistance ground connection on ground bus. • 4. Connect all power wiring and control wiring and verify basic operation of each starter from control power source. ' 5. Torque all bolted connections made in the field and verify all factory bolted connections. 6. Calibrate any solid-state metering or control relays for their intended ' purpose and make written notations of adjustments on record drawings. Perform startup of any solid-state starters and adjustable frequency drives. C. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's field startup ' report. ' 16482 -Motor Control Centers -Low Voltage 16482-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Li I SECTION 16482 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS - LOW VOLTAGE (continued) 3.03 3.04 3.05 3.06 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION: A. A qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Equipment shall be inspected prior to the generation of any reports. B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. EXAMINATION: A. Installing Contractor to fully inspect shipments for damage and report damage to manufacturer and file claim upon shipper, if necessary. B. Overload relay heater ratings must be properly sized and coordinated for each motor starter unit. C. Installing Contractor to verify NEC clearances as dictated on the contract drawings prior to installation. Verify UL labeling of the assembly prior to installation. INSTALLATION: A. Contractor to follow the installation instructions supplied by the manufacturer. B. Control wiring shall be as shown on the contract drawings except as modified by the approval and submittal process. Interface all local and remote devices into the control wiring and operational systems for each load. C. Provide DeviceNet trunk and drop cabling with threaded, sealed and keyed device taps. D. Follow the manufacturer's instructions and the contract documents concerning any short-circuit device settings, heater selection, timing relays, or start-up of components. START-UP: A. A trained authorized manufacturer's field representative shall perform all necessary start-up functions on this equipment. This service will be followed by a written report as well as one additional year of factory warranty on any equipment commissioned by the factory -authorized service engineer. END OF SECTION 16482 I .1 I L I I E I I I 16482 -Motor Control Centers -Low Voltage 16482-8 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 16483 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. This specification describes the electrical, mechanical, environmental, agency and reliability requirements for three-phase, adjustable frequency drives as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: Not Used 1.03 REFERENCES: A. The adjustable frequency drives and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of IEC, UL, CUL, and NEMA. 1.04 SUBMITTALS - FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL: A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: I. Dimensioned outline drawing 2. Schematic diagram 3. Power and control connection diagram(s) 4. Product data sheets 5. Harmonic study. B. Where applicable, the following additional information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Connection details between close -coupled assemblies 2. Composite front view and plan view of close -coupled assemblies 3. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations 1.05 SUBMITTALS - FOR CONSTRUCTION: A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final as -built drawings 2. Installation information. TI 3. A report of the voltage THD and current TDD as specified in 3.05. B. The final (as -built) drawings shall include the same drawings as the construction drawings and shall incorporate all changes made during the construction phase. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS: A. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. B. The supplier of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 16483 -Variable Frequency Drives 16483-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16483 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (continued) C. The VFD manufacturer shall maintain, as part of a national network, engineering service facilities within 250 miles of project to provide start-up service, emergency service calls, repair work, service contracts, maintenance and training of customer personnel. D. The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet all applicable seismic requirements of the BOCA National Building Code, Paragraph 1612.6. This shall include both vertical and lateral required response spectra as specified. Alternatively, the manufacturer's certification may be based on a detailed computer analysis of the entire assembly structure and its components. Guidelines for the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the switchgear manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative equipment. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. The test response spectra shall meet or exceed the required response spectra peak acceleration of 1.6g's (3.2-11 Hz) and a ZPA of I.Og as specified in the BOCA National Building Code, for all equipment natural frequencies up to at least 35 Hz. E. The following minimum mounting and installation guidelines shall be met, unless specifically modified by the above -referenced standards. I. The Contractor shall provide equipment anchorage details, coordinated with the equipment mounting provision, prepared and stamped by a licensed civil engineer in the state. Mounting recommendations shall be provided by the manufacturer based upon approved shake table tests used to verify the seismic design of the equipment. 2. The equipment manufacturer shall certify that the equipment can withstand, that is, function following the seismic event, including both vertical and lateral required response spectra as specified in above codes. 3. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. Seismic qualification shall be considered achieved when the capability of the equipment meets or exceeds the specified response spectra. F. Every variable frequency drive controller shall consist of all system components required to meet the performance, protection, safety, testing, and certification criteria of this Specification. These components would include incoming harmonic filter/power factor correction unit, input isolation transformer, VFD converter/DC- link/inverter, and output filter, as a minimum. G. The VFD system shall: I . Represent a fully integrated package. 2. Include all material necessary to interconnect any VFD system elements, even if shipped separately. H. Any modifications to a standard product provided to meet this Specification shall be performed by the VFD manufacturer only. I. The VFD system shall be completely factory pre -wired, assembled and then tested as a complete package by the VFD manufacturer, to assure a properly coordinated, fully integrated drive system. 16483 -Variable Frequency Drives 16483-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I II I I I I I I I I El I 11 I I SECTION 16483 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (continued) J. After VFD-manufacturer-testing, the drive shall be shipped to the pump manufacturer for final testing. This testing shall be as indicated in the Sewage Pumps Specification. The VFD manufacturer shall provide testing assistance with on -site factory representatives as required, but not less than one representative for two weeks. Additional requirements are stated in training and execution of this specification section. K. Any third -party certification, safety or protection requirements shall be applied to the VFD system as a whole. Certification or protection of system elements or individual components by themselves is not acceptable. L. The VFD shall provide communications and control interface as indicated in Section 16805 - Cabinets, Control Panels and Enclosures for the pump controls through the local control panel (LCP). I::07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. The VFD and pump shall adhere to IEEE 519-1992 as an installed package. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: A. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped, and shall include instruction leaflets and instruction bulletins for the complete assembly and each major component. 1.10 EXTRA PRODUCTS: PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: ' A. Cutler -Hammer B. Rockwell Automation/Allen Bradley IC. Robicon 2.02 CONSTRUCTION: I A. Where shown on the drawings, adjustable frequency drives 1 through 1100 hp shall have the following features: 1. The VFD shall be rated 480V AC (optional input voltages of 208, 240, 380 ' and 575V AC). The VFD shall provide microprocessor -based control for three-phase induction motors. 2. The VFDs shall be of the Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) design converting the utility input voltage and frequency to a variable voltage and frequency output via a two-step operation. Adjustable Current Source VEDs are not I16483 -Variable Frequency Drives 16483-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16483 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (continued) acceptable. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs) shall be used in the inverter section. Bipolar Junction Transistors, GTOs or SCRs are not acceptable. 3. The VFDs shall have an efficiency at full load and speed that exceeds 95% for VFDs below 15 Hp and 97% for drives 15 Hp and above. The efficiency shall exceed 90% at 50% speed and load. 4. The VFDs shall maintain.the line side displacement power factor at no less than 0.96, regardless of speed and load. 5. The VFDs shall have a one (1) minute overload current rating of 150% and a ' two (2) second overload current rating of 250% for constant torque drives. The VFDs shall have a one (1) minute overload current rating of 110% for variable torque drives. 6. The VFDs shall be capable of operating any NEMA design B squirrel cage induction motor, regardless of manufacturer, with a horsepower and current rating within the capacity of the VFD. 7. The VFDs shall use an 18 -pulse clean power option. 8. The VFDs shall be able to start into a spinning motor. The VFDs shall be able to determine the motor speed in any direction and resume operation without tripping. If the motor is spinning in the reverse direction, the VFDs shall start into the motor in the reverse direction, bring the motor to a controlled stop, and then accelerate the motor to the preset speed. 9. Standard operating conditions shall be: a. Incoming power: Three-phase, 480V AC, +10% to -15%, and 50/60 Hz (+1-5 Hz) power to a fixed potential DC bus level b. Frequency stability of +1-0.5% for 24 hours with voltage regulation of +1-1% of maximum rated output voltage c. Speed regulation of +/- 0.5% of base speed d. Load inertia dependant carryover (ridethrough) during utility loss e. Insensitive to input line rotation f. Humidity: 0 to 95% (non -condensing and non -corrosive) g. Altitude: 0 to 3,300 feet (1,000 meters) above sea level I h. Ambient temperature: -10 to 50 degrees C (CT), -10 to 40 degrees C (VT) i. Storage temperature: -40 to 60 degrees C. ' 2.03 CONTROL FUNCTIONS: A. Frequently accessed VFD programmable parameters shall be adjustable from a digital operator keypad located on the front of the VFD. The VFDs shall have a three -line alphanumeric programmable display with status indicators. Keypads must use plain English words for parameters, status, and diagnostic messages. ' Alphanumeric codes and tables are not acceptable. B. Standard advanced programming and troubleshooting functions shall be available by using a personal computer's RS -232 port and Windows® based software. In addition the software shall permit control and monitoring via the VFD's RS232 port. The manufacturer shall supply the required software. C. The operator shall be able to scroll through the keypad menu to choose between the following: I 16483 -Variable Frequency Drives 16483-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16483 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (continued) 1. Monitor 2. Operate 3. Parameter setup 4. Actual parameter values 5. Active faults 6. Fault history 7. LCD contrast adjustment 8. Information to indicate the standard software and optional features software loaded. D. The following setups and adjustments, at a minimum, are to be available: 1. Start/stop command from keypad, remote or communications port 2. Speed command from keypad, remote or communications port 3. Motor rotation selection 4. Maximum and minimum speed limits 5. Acceleration and deceleration times, two settable ranges 6. Critical (skip) frequency avoidance 7. Torque limit 8. Multiple attempt restart function 9. Multiple preset speeds adjustment 10. Catch a spinning motor start or normal start selection 11. Programmable analog output 12. DC brake current magnitude and time 13. Proportional/integral process controller. 2.04 SYSTEM INTERFACES: A. Inputs — A minimum of six (6) programmable digital inputs, and two (2) analog inputs shall be provided with the following available as a minimum: I. Local/Remote Speed Setpoint 2. Remote start/stop 3. Remote forward/reverse 4. Remote preset speeds 5. Remote external trip 6. Remote fault reset 7. Process control speed reference interface, 4-20 mAdc 8. Potentiometer and 1-1 0V DC speed reference interface 9. RS232 programming and operation interface port B. Outputs — A minimum of two (2) discrete programmable digital outputs, one (1) programmable open collector output, and one (1) programmable analog output shall II II II be provided, with the following available at minimum. 1. Programmable relay outputs with one (1) set of Form C contacts for each, selectable with the following available at minimum: a. Fault b. Run c. Ready d. Reversing e. Jogging f. At speed 16483 -Variable Frequency Drives 16483-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16483 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (continued) g. In torque limit h. Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded i. Overtemperature. 2. Programmable analog output signal, selectable with the following available at minimum: a. Output current b. Output frequency c. Motor speed d. Motor torque e. Motor power f. Motor voltage g. DC link voltage. 2.05 MONITORING AND DISPLAYS: A. The VFDs display shall be an LCD type capable of displaying three (3) lines of text and the following thirteen (13) status indicators: 1. Run 2. Forward 3. Reverse 4. Stop 5. Ready 6. Alarm 7. Fault 8. Local 9. Panel 10. Remote 11. Hand 12. Auto 13. Off. B. The VFDs display shall be capable of displaying the following monitoring functions at a minimum: 1. Output frequency 2. Output speed 3. Motor current 4. Motor torque 5. Motor power 6. Motor voltage 7. DC -link voltage 8. Heatsink temperature 9. Total operating days counter 10. Operating hours (resettable) 11. Total megawatt hours 12. Megawatt hours (resettable) 13. Voltage level of analog input 14. Current level of analog input 15. Digital inputs status 16. Digital and relay outputs status 16483 -Variable Frequency Drives 16483-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16483 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (continued) 17. Motor temperature rise, percentage of allowable. C. Protective Functions 1. The VFD shall include the following protective features at minimum: a. Overcurrent b. Overvoltage c. Inverter fault d. Undervoltage e. Phase loss f. Output phase loss g. Undertemperature h. Overtemperature i. Motor stalled j. Motor overtemperature k. Motor underload I. Logic voltage failure m. Microprocessor failure n. DC injection braking o. The VFD shall provide ground fault protection during power -up, starting, and running. VFDs with no ground fault protection during running are not acceptable. ID. Diagnostic Features 1. Fault History a. Record and log faults. ' b. Indicate the most recent first, and store up to 9 faults. 2.06 OPTIONS: IA. Optional features to be included in the VFDs: I. Provide motor dv/dt filter, as described below, for use on motor cable runs exceeding 100 feet. ' a. The dv/dt filter shall be located at the VFD and shall reduce the dv/dt clamp any voltage overshoots of the VFD output. It will return the energy in the voltage overshoots to the VFDs DC bus. A ' power dissipative resistance device is not acceptable. Filter shall be a Cutler -Hammer MotoRX 1000 volt per microsecond type for motor leads between 100 and 300 feet and 1000 volt per ' microsecond type for motor leads between 300 and 600 feet. b. Output line reactors are not acceptable for any motor lead lengths. 2. Laminated plastic or steel nameplate engraved with user's identifying name ' or number 3. 120V AC control to allow VFD to interface with remote dry contacts 4. Graphical keypad a. The operator interface shall consist of a LCD keypad located on the front of the VFD. Features shall include: b. Twelve (12) pushbuttons for selection, display, and modification of the VFD characteristics as follows: 1) Scroll left 2) Scroll right 1 16483 -Variable Frequency Drives 16483-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 U SECTION 16483 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (continued) 3) Scroll up/increase 4) Scroll down/decrease 5) Parameter 6) Monitor 7) Page 8) Operate 9) Enter 10) Reset 11) Start 12) Stop. c. The keypad LCD panel shall provide a choice of eight (8) lines of text or a 64x128 pixel graphical display of key waveforms or a combination of both. d. The operator shall be able to scroll through the keypad menu to choose between the following screens: 1) Monitor 2) Operate 3) Parameter setup 4) Actual parameter values 5) Operating parameter trends 6) Menu for selection of parameters for graphical trend display 7) Active faults 8) Fault history 9) LCD adjustment 10) Info/files selection to indicate the standard software and optional features software loaded. 2.07 SPARE PARTS: A. A spare main logic board, keypad and power supply board shall be supplied for each different type of drive supplied under this specification. 2.08 ENCLOSURE: A. The VFD enclosure shall be NEMA 1. The VFD shall have complete front accessibility with easily removable assemblies. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORY TESTING: A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMA standards. 1. All final assemblies shall be tested at full load with application of line -to - line and line -to -ground bolted faults. The adjustable frequency drive shall trip electronically without device failure. 2. After all tests have been performed, each VFD shall undergo a bum -in test. The drive shall be burned in at 100% inductive or motor load without an unscheduled shutdown. 16483 -Variable Frequency Drives 16483-8 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16483 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (continued) 3. After the bum -in cycle is complete, each VFD shall be put through a motor load test before inspection and shipping. B. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Provide the services of a qualified manufacturer's employed Factory Authorized Field Service Engineer to assist the Contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this section. Sales representatives will not be acceptable to perform this work. The manufacturer's service representative shall provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the equipment, installation as specified in manufacturer's installation instructions, wiring, application dependant adjustments, and verification of proper VFD operation. B. The following minimum work shall be performed by the Contractor under the technical direction of the manufacturer's service representative: 1. Inspection and final adjustments 2. Operational and functional checks of VFDs and spare parts 3. The contractor shall certify that he has read the drive manufacturer's installation instructions and has installed the VFD in accordance with those instructions. C. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report before final payment is made. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION: A. A qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification to the Owner. 3.04 TRAINING: A. The Contractor shall provide a training session for up to five (5) owner's representatives for 3 normal workdays with a maximum of 5 trips at a job site location determined by the owner. Training and instruction time shall be in addition to that required for start-up service. B. The training shall be conducted by the manufacturer's qualified representative. C. .The training program shall consist of the following: 1. Instructions on the proper operation of the equipment 2. Instructions on the proper maintenance of the equipment. 3.05 HARMONIC STUDY: A. The VFD manufacturer shall perform harmonic measurements at the point where the utility feeds multiple customers (PCC) to verify compliance with IEEE519-1992. A report of the voltage THD and current TDD shall be sent to the Engineer. The 16483 -Variable Frequency Drives 16483-9 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16483 - VARIABLE FREOUENCY DRIVES (continued) contractor shall provide labor, material, and protection as needed to access the test points. The readings shall be taken with all drives and all other loads at full load or as close as field conditions allow. END OF SECTION 16483 16483 -Variable Frequency Drives 16483-10 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' I Ii SECTION 16511- INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessories. B. Related Sections include the following. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture indicated, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, and the following: I. Dimensions of fixtures 2. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric performance 3. Fluorescent and high -intensity discharge ballasts 4. Types of lamps B. Maintenance Data: For lighting fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division I 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Fixtures, Emergency Lighting Units, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.05 COORDINATION: A. Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures with ceiling system and other construction. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be ' incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products indicated on the Drawings. 2.02 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL: ' A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp comers, and edges ' B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. 16511 -Interior Lighting 16511-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16511- INTERIOR LIGHTING (continued) C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position. D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated. 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and ultraviolet radiation 2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch (3 mm) minimum, unless greater thickness is indicated F. Fixtures shall adhere to area classification as indicated on drawings. 2.03 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS: A. General Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following: I. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent B. Ballasts for Low -Temperature Environments: As follows: 1. Temperatures 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C) and Above: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0 Deg F (minus 17 Deg C) starting temperature C. Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C for limitations on electromagnetic and radio -frequency interference for consumer equipment. 2.04 HIGH -INTENSITY -DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS: A. General: Comply with ANSI C82.4. Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following: 1. Type: Constant wattage autotransformer or regulating high power factor type, unless otherwise indicated 2. Operating Voltage: Match system voltage 3. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 Deg F for single -lamp ballasts 4. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 Deg F 5. Open -circuit operation that will not reduce average life. 6. Auxiliary, Instant -On, Quartz System: Automatically switches quartz lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. Automatically turns quartz lamp off when high -intensity -discharge lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output. B. Encapsulation: Manufacturer's standard epoxy -encapsulated model designed to minimize audible fixture noise 1651 1 -Interior Lighting 16511-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING (continued) 2.05 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS: A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," for channel- and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. -2A6 FINISHES: A. Fixtures: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated I. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion -resistant treatment or primer, free of defects 2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each fixture. 3.02 CONNECTIONS: A. Ground Equipment 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Tests: As follows: 1. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation. 2. Report results in writing. C. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. D. Corrosive Fixtures: Replace during warranty period. 3.04 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING: A. Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities. END OF SECTION 16511 16511 -Interior Lighting 16511-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Fl SECTION 16800 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS ' PART I - GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Technical Specifications: ' I . Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 2. Section 16120 - Conductors and Cables 3. Section 01330 - Submittals ' 4. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding 5. Section 16080 - Electrical Testing 1.02 SUMMARY: ' A. This Section describes the basic requirements for furnishing and installing the complete process control instrumentation system for the Fayetteville Hamestring ' Sewage Lift Station. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: IA. Referenced Standards: I. The Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (ISA) a. 55.1, Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. ' U. 55.2, Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations c. S5.3, Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display Instrumentation, Logic and Computer Systems Id. S5.4, Standard Instrument Loop Diagrams e. S20, Standard Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves ' 2. National Institute of Standards Technology (NIST) B. Miscellaneous: 1. Comply with electrical classifications and NEMA enclosure types shown on ' Drawings. C. Qualifications: U1. Instrumentation subcontractor: a. Experience 1) Have satisfactorily provided a process control system for a minimum of five projects of similar magnitude and function. ' 1.04 DEFINITIONS: A. Calibrate: To standardize a device so that it provides a specified response to known inputs B. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller 1 ' 16800 -General Requirements - 16800-1 RJN Project No. 1 I-1875-00 Instrumentation and Controls I I SECTION 16800 - GENERAL REOUIREMENTS - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (continued) 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A. Control System Requirements 1. This Specification Section provides the general requirements for the instrumentation and control system. 2. The instrument and control system consists of the PLC and all primary measuring elements, transmitters, switches, controllers, computers, recorders, indicators, panels, signal converters, signal boosters, amplifiers, ' special power supplies, special or shielded cable, special grounding or isolation, auxiliaries, software, wiring, and other devices required to provide complete control of the plant as specified in the Contract Documents. B. Instrumentation Signals 1. Unless otherwise required for instrument compatibility, electric control signals shall be 4 to 20 mA and pneumatic signals shall be 3 to 15 psi. Hydraulically actuated devices shall be per vendor specification. 2. All signals shall be directly proportional to the measured variable unless specifically noted otherwise. ' C. Instrumentation Subcontractor 1. Furnish and coordinate instrumentation system through a single instrumentation subcontractor. The instrumentation subcontractor shall be responsible for functional operations of all systems, performance of control system engineering, supervision of installation, final connections, calibrations, preparation of drawings and operation and maintenance manuals, startup, training, demonstration of substantial completion and all other aspects of the control system. ' 2. Ensure coordination of instrumentation with other work to ensure that necessary wiring, conduits, contacts, relays, converters, and incidentals are provided in order to transmit, receive, and control necessary signals to other control elements, to control panels, and to receiving stations. ' 1.06 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings ' I. Submit six (6) shop drawings for review and approval prior to commencing manufacture. 2. Submittals shall be original printed material or clear unblemished photocopies of original printed material. Facsimile information is not acceptable. 3. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced b. Equipment catalog cut sheets c. Instrument data sheets 1) Instrumentation shall be specified using the ISA S20 format. 2) Submit a separate data sheet for each instrument. d. Materials of construction e. Minimum and maximum flow ranges 16800 -General Requirements - 16800-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' Instrumentation and Controls I SECTION 16800 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS ' (continued) £ Pressure loss curves IC. Physical limits of components including temperature and pressure limits h. Size and weight Ii. Electrical power requirements and wiring diagrams j. NEMA rating of housings k. Submittals shall be marked with arrows to show model number and ' exact features to be provided 4. Loop diagrams shall be prepared using the ISA S5.4 format. a. Each loop diagram shall be drawn on a separate sheet. ' b. Each sheet shall contain the following minimum information: I) All loop devices clearly identified 2) Identification of the loop and each loop component, including connections to such things as recorders and the ' PLC. Numbering and tagging must agree with the P&ID(s). 3) All interconnections with identifying numbers for: a) Electrical cables ' b) Conductor pairs 4) Identification of connections including: a) Junction boxes ' b) Terminals c) Bulkheads d) Ports ' e) PLC input/output connections I) Grounding systems 5) Signal levels and ranges ' 6) Device location 7) Energy sources designating voltage, pressure, and other applicable requirements ' 8) Enough process lines and equipment to clearly show the process side of the loop and provide clarity of control action. This includes: ' a) What is being measured b) What is being controlled c) Other information required to complete the process loop ' 9) Reference to supplementary records and drawings to show inter -relation to other control loops 10) Controller action (INC/INC or INC/DEC) ' 11) Control valve action upon signal failure (F.O. or F.C.) 5. Comprehensive set of point-to-point wiring diagrams showing all interconnections between packaged systems or equipment control panels, ' motor control centers, instrumentation and all other electrical equipment as required to depict a complete and functional plant -wide electrical control system. Instrumentation wiring already shown on loop diagrams need not be ' included on point-to-point wiring diagrams. a. • Diagrams shall provide the following minimum information: ' 16800 -General Requirements - 16800-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Instrumentation and Controls I SECTION 16800 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (continued) 1) Terminal block identification (includes terminals on remote equipment furnished by others) 2) Wire size 3) Wire type 4) Wire color 5) Wire shielding and insulation type 6) Conductor quantities and associated conduit size 7) Ground points 8) Interconnection requirements to existing systems or equipment furnished by others b. Diagrams shall be drawn to minimize the number of sheets. 1) Maximum drawing size shall be 24 x 36 in. 2) Minimum drawing size shall be 11 x 17 in. 6. Electrical schematic control diagrams. Diagrams shall include: a. Terminal identification b. Unique identification of all control devices and contacts. Utilize owner's device identification numbers or instrument tag numbers where applicable. c. Wire identification d. Equipment identification e. Indication of remote and local devices and wiring f. Overcurrent protection indication g. Voltage h. All hard -wired relay logic 7. Panel fabrication drawings 8. Scaled floor plan layouts of control room 9. PLC equipment drawings 10. Graphic layouts 11. Graphic component construction 12. Nameplate layout drawings 13. Drawings, systems, and other elements are represented schematically in accordance with ISA S5.1 and S5.3. The nomenclature, tag numbers, equipment numbers, panel numbers, and related series identification contained in the Contract Documents shall be employed exclusively throughout submittals. 14. Certifications: a. Documentation verifying that calibration equipment is certified with NIST traceability b. Approvals from independent testing laboratories or approval agencies, such as UL, FM or CSA. Certification documentation is required for all equipment for which the specifications require independent agency approval. 15. Testing reports a. Source quality control reports B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1. Submit four (4) bound Instruction Manuals covering operation and maintenance of all furnished instrumentation. Manuals shall be complete 16800 -General Requirements - 16800-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Instrumentation and Controls SECTION 16800 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (continued) with wiring drawings, parts lists, list of recommended spare parts, and troubleshooting instructions. C. Warranties 1. Provide four (4) copies of warranties and list of factory authorized service agents. 1.07 DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING: A. Do not remove shipping blocks, plugs, caps, and desiccant dryers installed to protect the instrumentation during shipment until the instruments are installed and field connections are made. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REOUIREMENTS: A. Control System Performance 1. Stability: After controls have taken corrective action, as result of a change in the controlled variable or a change in setpoint, oscillation of final control element shall not exceed two cycles per minute or a magnitude of movement of 0.5 percent full travel. 2. Response: Any change in setpoint or change in controlled variable shall produce a corresponding corrective change in position of final control element and become stabilized within 30 seconds. 3. Agreement: Setpoint indication of controlled variable and measured indication of controlled variable shall agree within 3 percent of full scale over a 6:1 operating range 4. Repeatability: For any repeated magnitude of control signal, from either an increasing or decreasing direction, the final control element shall take a repeated position within 0.5 percent of full travel regardless of force required to position final element. 5. Sensitivity: Controls shall respond to setpoint deviations and measured variable deviations within 1.0 percent of full scale. 6. Standardization: All instruments and control devices shall perform in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. 2.02 ACCESSORIES: I A. Provide instruments with manufacturer's identification nameplate showing: 1. Manufacturer's model number 2. Manufacturer's serial number 3. Measurement range 4. Power supply requirement 5. Process wetted materials of construction ' 16800 -General Requirements - Instrumentation and Controls 16800-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16800 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS ' (continued) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Use bottom entry for all conduit entry to instruments and junction boxes, except as ' specified and shown on drawings. B. Install electrical components per applicable Division 16 specification sections. C. Panel -Mounted Instruments 1. Mount and wire so removal or replacement may be accomplished without interruption of service to adjacent devices. 2. Locate all devices mounted inside enclosures so terminals and adjustment devices are readily accessible without use of special tools and with terminal markings clearly visible. D. Field -Mounted Instruments 1. Mount all instrumentation in easily accessible locations. No field instrumentation shall be mounted more than six (6) feet above grade or an access platform. No instrument shall be permitted to be attached to a handrail. 3.02 FIELD OUALITY CONTROL: A. Maintain accurate daily log of all startup activities, calibration functions, and final setpoint adjustments. I. Documentation requirements include the utilization of the forms located at the end of this Section. a. Loop Checkout Sheet b. Instrument Certification Sheet c. Final Control Element' Certification Sheet B. Instrumentation Calibration 1. Verify that all instruments and control devices are calibrated to provide the performance required by the Contract Documents. 2. Calibrate all field -mounted instruments, other than local pressure and temperature gauges, after the device is mounted in place to assure proper installed operation. 3. Calibrate in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. 4. Bench calibrate pressure and temperature gauges. Field mount gauge within 1 day of calibration. 5. Check the calibration of each transmitter and gauge across its specified range at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent. Check for both increasing and decreasing input signals to detect hysteresis. 6. Replace any instrument which cannot be properly adjusted. 7. Mark range, date, setpoint and calibrator's initials on each instrument by means of blue or black ink on a waterproof tag affixed to the instrument. 8. Calibration equipment shall be certified by an independent agency with traceability to NIST. Certification shall be up-to-date. Use of equipment with expired certifications shall not be permitted. 16800 -General Requirements - 16800-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Instrumentation and Controls 1 I SECTION 16800 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (continued) 1 ' a. 1 1 I. 1 1 I. 9. Calibration equipment shall be at least three times more accurate than the nominal accuracy of the instrument being calibrated. C. Loop checkout requirements are as follows: I. Check control signal generation, transmission, reception and response for all control loops under simulated operating conditions by imposing a signal on the loop at the instrument connections. Use actual signals where available. Closely observe controllers, recorders, alarm and trip units, remote setpoints, and other control components. Make corrections as required. Following any corrections, retest the loop as before. 2. Verify that all input signals going to the PLC are repeated at the West Wastewater Plant control room operator interface, utilizing the radio modem. 3. Stroke all control valves, cylinders, drives and connecting linkages from the local control panel and from the West Wastewater Plant control room operator interface, utilizing the radio modem. 4. Verify that all input signals are being read by the PLC using the appropriate PLC software and a PC. 5. Force all output signals being generated by the PLC using the appropriate PLC software and a PC. 6. In addition to any other as -recorded documents, record all setpoint and calibration changes on "as built" Contract Documents and turn over to the owner. D. Provide written verification of system assembly, power, ground, and I/O tests. E. Furnish copies of all of the above documentation to Owner's Representative prior to Contract closeout. ' 16800 -General Requirements - Instrumentation and Controls END OF SECTION 16800 16800-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Ti I SECTION 16801 - INSTRUMENTATION IDENTIFICATION & TAGGING METHODS PART I - GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Technical Specifications: I1. Section 16900 — Programmable Logic Controller. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes furnishing and installing the following, as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. B. Marking of instrumentation wiring and tubing. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: IA. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. '• B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.04 COORDINATION: I. A. Where instrument identification and marking is applied to field -finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface. B. Where identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.01 INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION: A. Each individual wire, cable and pneumatic tube in power, control, indication, and instrumentation circuits shall be provided with identification markers at the point of termination as derived by the Contractor from the Schematic Diagrams, PLC 1/O list and from the shop drawings. Locate the label within 2" of the wire, cable or tube ' termination. The wire marker shall be Grafoplast Trasp System. Substitutions are not acceptable. ' B. Conductor identification system shall consist of plastic sleeves with pre-printed individual alpha/numeric element inserts. Plastic sleeves shall fully encircle the conductor. Wiremarking system shall also include conductor terminal pins and terminal block markers. Conductor terminal pins shall be insulated, crimp -on with ' integral insert sleeve. The conductor terminal pins and terminal block markers shall both utilize the same alpha/numeric element inserts or the SI plotted tag inserts specified for the conductor marking system. The conductor marking system shall be the Grafoplast Trasp System. The conductor crimp type terminations shall be performed using the appropriate ratchet crimp tool, Grafoplast Spark Crimp Tool, 16801 -Instrumentation Identification & 16801-1 RJN PROJECT NO. 11-1875-00 Tagging Methods I SECTION 16801 - INSTRUMENTATION IDENTIFICATION & TAGGING METHODS (continued) Item #773. Conductor stripping shall be performed using the Grafoplast Wire Stripping Tool, item #780. C. Create wire names for field instrumentation from the Process Area name and Tag Identifier listed on the 11O list in Section 16900 — Programmable Control System. The individual device tag should match the designation shown on the P&ID. 1. For multi -pair cables use Process Area as the instrument cable tag and Tag Identifier as the pair tag. 2. For single -pair cables use Tag Identifier as the pair tag. END OF SECTION 16801 U I I I 11 El L 16801 -Instrumentation Identification & 16801-2 RN PROJECT NO. 11-1875-00 ' Tagging Methods SECTION 16802 - MEASURING AND CONTROLLING INSTRUMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Technical Specifications: 1. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 2. Section 16080 - Electrical Testing 3. Section 16120 - Conductors and Cable - 4. Section 16801 - Instrumentation Identification & Tagging Methods 5. Section 01330 - Submittals 1.02 SUMMARY: A. Furnish and install the instruments as shown on the Drawings and listed in the Specifications. Provide all materials, tools, labor, supervision and appliances for, and properly erect, install, connect up, adjust, test and place in continuous and satisfactory operation at the locations indicated or directed, the instrumentation equipment, complete with controllers, indicators, recorders, timers, spare parts and other appurtenances. 1.03 OUALITY ASSURANCE: IA. Qualifications of Manufacturers/Suppliers I. Consideration will be given only to the products of well established and reliable manufacturers who are regularly engaged in such work and ' thoroughly experienced in the design and manufacture of equipment of the sizes and types specified, and who have not less than three installations of comparable sizes and types that have been in successful and continuous ' operation, in service similar to that contemplated herein, for not less than 5 years. 2. Evidence of this experience and data on the operation of those installations over a period of not less than 5 years shall be furnished to the Engineer on request. 3. Data on service history and operation of submitted equipment shall be made available to the Engineer, if requested, for his use in determining that the ' equipment and specialties offered meet the intent of this Contract. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: ' A. Make submittals as specified in Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Provide detailed dimensional shop drawings of the instruments and ' complete assembly. C. Furnish product data and dimension sheets for all instruments. ID. The manufacturer shall supply the required number of Submittal Drawings, Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Parts Lists as specified in Section 01330. 1. Standard Submittal will consist of: 16802 -Measuring & Controlling Instruments 16802-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16802 - MEASURING AND CONTROLLING INSTRUMENTS (continued) ' a. Complete technical data showing materials of construction, weight, type and length of cables b. Complete electrical data including NEMA code c. Dimensional prints and installation details d. Details on accessories being supplied E. A full set of shop drawings detailing the control system layout as specified in Division 16 and the Contract Drawings. The system layout shall include all mechanical, electrical, ladder diagrams, and panel details to completely describe the system and system operation. 1.05 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver, store and handle all equipment and materials in a manner to ensure ' installation in sound and undamaged condition, to prevent damage from exposure to the elements, and in accordance with the requirements in Division 1. B. Adequately seal and protect equipment prior to shipment for outdoor storage at the lift station site. 1.06 GUARANTEE: ' A. All items furnished under this Section shall be warranted to be free from defect in ' workmanship and materials for a minimum period of one year after date of initial start-up. Warranty shall apply to both parts and labor, and shall be submitted for Engineer's approval. PART2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 GENERAL: A. This Section covers furnishing all labor and material and performing all instrumentation work as required by this Contract. All items may not have been detailed; the Instrumentation Contractor shall furnish, without additional cost to the Owner, all labor, material, drawings, services, and connections necessary to make the work completely functional and ready for Owner's use, within the limits of this Contract. B. Full responsibility for fabricating and erecting all the control and instrumentation equipment and appurtenances, for selecting materials of construction, for establishing operating procedures and for demonstrating compliance with specified performance requirements rests with the Contractor, and through him the suppliers, under this Item. The Engineer's approval of any portion of this work will be general. Neither the Engineer's approval of the design, construction, nor operation of the equipment, nor the use of material included in this Specification, nor the Engineer's approval of alternative materials offered by the suppliers, will in any way relieve the Contractor and suppliers of full responsibility for meeting all performance requirements under this Item and this Contract. 2.02 SYSTEMS RESPONSIBILITY: A. The Contractor shall employ a subcontractor with proven experience in this field, who will have complete responsibility for the instrumentation system. Specifically, 1 16802 -Measuring & Controlling Instruments 16802-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 L I SECTION 16802 - MEASURING AND CONTROLLING INSTRUMENTS (continued) this shall include defining required systems components, preparing as -built detailed systems schematics and interconnection wiring diagrams, developing instrument I. installation details, instrument layouts, and field debugging, calibrating and tuning the various systems in accordance with the sequence of construction. B. The Contractor is cautioned that, because of the complexity of the systems logic and ' control circuits, the elementary schematics on the Contract Drawings represent only a conceptual "paper design" and minor circuit revisions may be required for proper operation and such provision should be included in the bid price. 1 C. Instruments of the same type shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. This requirement applies to instrumentation included with packaged equipment. D. The Contractor is responsible for final selection of the instrument based on the Drawings and Instrument Data Sheets. 2.03 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: ' A. Installation work shall be made in a neat and workmanlike manner, in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications. Defective equipment or equipment ' damaged in the course of installation or test shall be replaced or repaired in a manner meeting with the approval of the Engineer. B. The Drawings indicate the general location of the sample draw tubing inlet. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to route the sample draw tubing from the sample point to the sample draw transmitter in the electrical room. The routing of the sample draw tubing shall not interfere with the operation and/or maintenance of pump station equipment. 2.04 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES: IA. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the location of equipment with other equipment or material to the extent that interference between such items is avoided. Relocation of any items as a result of failure of the Contractor to coordinate ' his work shall be at the expense of the Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.05 STANDARD PRODUCTS: 1 A. Unless otherwise indicated, the materials to be furnished under this specification shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design complying with the specification. 2.06 INSTRUMENT WIRING: ' A. Instrumentation wiring shall be as specified herein and in accordance with the ei applicable requirements of other Sections of Division 16. Where conflicts occur, the ' requirements of this Section shall govern. B. Instrumentation wiring shall include all wiring carrying signals to or from instruments, and shall consist of a complete system of cables, wires, tags and wire ' terminations installed in place. 16802 -Measuring & Controlling Instruments 16802-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I I SECTION 16802 - MEASURING AND CONTROLLING INSTRUMENTS (continued) 2.07 2.08 C. Instrumentation analog signal wiring shall be routed in conduits separate from power and control wiring. D. Terminations to instruments, terminal blocks, etc., shall match the terminals. For connection to screw terminals, use Thomas & Betts spade -tongue crimping -type insulated terminal connectors, or approved equal. E. Terminal boxes and instrument panels shall be adequately sized for all enclosed terminal blocks and/or equipment and shall be located as shown on the Drawings. Terminal boxes and instrumentation panels shall have a NEMA rating that meets the classification of the area that the boxes and/or panels are mounted. Materials of construction shall be either carbon steel or stainless steel, as required by the area classification. F. Instrument signal wiring entering or leaving a panel shall be terminated at terminal blocks. Shielded cables shall be grounded at one end only. The shield shall be carried through at the terminal blocks. G. Each field -mounted instrument that requires 120 -volt AC, 60 Hz, 12VDC or 24VDC power shall be supplied from the designated fuse in the control panel. H. Special equipment -furnished cables, interconnecting sensing elements with their transmitters or converters, such as level sensor coaxial cables, shall be installed in accordance with the Engineering drawings in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. Special precautions should be taken when pulling and shortening equipment furnished cables. Where these cables may leave conduit runs, they must exit through a watertight strain relief connector. I. Instrumentation signal wiring is generally specified in Section 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES. J. Where instrumentation applications require types of cable different than that specified in Section 16120, furnish and install cable as recommended by the instrument manufacturer for the application intended. INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION: I I I I 1 i I I El A. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary supports and shall mount instrumentation I as per manufacturers' installation instruction. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of mounting locations with other installations for working clearances and accessibility for maintenance of the instruments. CALIBRATION AND COMMISSIONING OF INSTRUMENTS AND OTHER SERVICES: A. After all equipment and accessories to be furnished under this Item have been installed in place, the Contractor shall put them in final adjustment and give such operating tests as will assure the Engineer that they are in proper adjustment and in permanent operating condition. This particular work shall include the services of a qualified factory -trained field service or start-up Engineer of the equipment supplier as required to secure proper installation, adjustment, and testing. 16802 -Measuring & Controlling Instruments 16802-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I 1 E P 11 SECTION 16802 - MEASURING AND CONTROLLING INSTRUMENTS (continued) I I I P L P1 I I I I I I I I B. Provide all labor, supervision, coordination, tools, and other equipment required to calibrate and commission the instruments after installation and prior to start-up. C. General commissioning requirements are as follows: I. Inspect the instrument and its connections for compliance with specifications, drawings, and manufacturer's recommended installation practice. Instruments shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended installation practice. Verify that devices and installations meet all applicable codes and regulations and agree with specified installation details. 3. Remove all shipping stops before calibration and install any loose components which have been supplied separately, but are integral parts of equipment. 4.. If any doubt exists as to the correct method of calibrating an instrument, the manufacturer's printed recommendations shall be used as an acceptable standard. 5. Perform a loop check from the instrument to the control system, and from the control system to the final control element. a. Loop checkout or commissioning involves those activities needed to prove out a loop. This is normally done when all loop connections are complete. Calibration may be performed during loop checkout, if desired. D. Calibrate instrumentation per manufacturers' standard procedures and methods in concurrence with process parameters and requirements. Calibration data sheets shall be used to record all data and final adjustment, along with time and date. Completed data sheets are to be turned over to the Engineer after calibration. Instruments shall be tagged with a label (which will withstand long-term cleaning and wear), after calibration, indicating the state of calibration, the date of calibration, and clearly read initials of the calibrator. 2.09 INSTRUCTION MANUALS: A. The Contractor shall furnish four (4) bound Instruction Manuals covering operation and maintenance of all equipment furnished. Manuals shall be complete with wiring diagrams; drawings, parts lists, catalog pages, troubleshooting instructions and other necessary maintenance data. All spare parts shall be numbered or otherwise clearly identified to facilitate ordering or replacement. B. Submit manuals in duplicate draft form for review by the Engineer prior to final inspection, and in final form within 30 days after return by the Engineer of draft form with notations. 2.10 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATIONS: A. The detailed information relating to suggested manufacturer, process measurement range, materials, and other required performance specifications for each instrument contained herein is presented on the ISA specifications forms immediately following this Section. 16802 -Measuring & Controlling Instruments 16802-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I 7 SECTION 16802 - MEASURING AND CONTROLLING INSTRUMENTS (continued) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: ' A. The Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the instrument and control system. If any departures from the Drawings are considered necessary by the Contractor, details of such departure and the reason therefore shall be submitted as soon as possible to the Engineer for approval. No departures shall be made without prior written approval of the Engineer. B. Any cutting of existing construction and repair of same shall be included as work in this Section and shall be accomplished by the proper trade. No structural supporting members shall be cut or drilled without review by the Engineer. Holes shall not be made in steel plates or members with a cutting torch. Holes through concrete and masonry shall be drilled with a core -drilling machine, which cuts a smooth round hole. Over -cut shall be caulked or grouted. 3.02 TRAINING: A. Services of a manufacturer's factory -trained process or applications Engineer shall be ' furnished for not less than two, 8 -hour working days, at Contractor expense, at the site to review with the plant personnel the up-to-date overall operation and maintenance of the equipment, and to discuss ways to improve the operation and overall results. This service may be called for by the Owner at his convenience anytime within 1 year from the Contract Completion Date. 3.03 SUPPLEMENTS: A. Supplements listed below, following "END OF SECTION 16802", are a part of this Specification. I. Instrument Index 2. Instrument Data Sheets END OF SECTION 16802 ' I L I L I 16802 -Measuring & Controlling Instruments 16802-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 I SPECIFICATION SECTION 16802 SUPPLEMENT No. 1 ' INSTRUMENT INDEX AND ISA DATA SHEETS PROJECT: Hamestring Lift Station 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Tag Numbers Description Device Type PBIDs ISPEC. Volts AC -1 Ambient air monitor gas analyzer IC -1 IS -1 120 AC AE -1 Methane detectors Infrared IC -1 IS -1 24 DC AE-2,AE-3 Hydrogen sulphide detectors Electro-chemical IC -1 IS -1 24 DC LE-1/LIT-1 Wetwell level transmitter Sonic IC -1 IS -3 120 AC LSL-1,LSH-1,LSHH-1 Wetwell level switches Float IC -1 IS -4 NA LSHH-2 Drywell level Float switch IC -1 IS -4 NA • PSH-1 Pump #1 pressure Pressure switch IC -1 IS -5 NA PSH-2 Pump #2 pressure Pressure switch IC -2 IS -5 NA PSH-3 Pump #3 pressure Pressure switch IC -2 IS -5 NA PSH-4 Pump #4 pressure Pressure switch IC -3 IS -5 NA PSH-5 • Pump #5 pressure Pressure switch IC -3 IS -5 NA PSH-6 Pump #6 pressure Pressure switch IC -4 IS -5 NA PSH-7 Pump #7 pressure Pressure switch IC -4 IS -5 NA PSL-8 Utility water pressure Pressure switch IC -1 IS -5 NA PIT-8,PIT-9 Forced main pressures Press. Transmitter IC -5 IS -7 24 DC VS -1 Pump #1 vibration Vibration switch IC -1 IS -2 120 AC VS -2 Pump #2 vibration Vibration switch IC -2 IS -2 120 AC VS -3 Pump #3 vibration Vibration switch IC -2 IS -2 120 AC VS -4 Pump #4 vibration Vibration switch IC -3 IS -2 120 AC VS -5 Pump #5 vibration Vibration switch IC -3 IS -2 120 AC VS -6 Pump #6 vibration Vibration switch IC -4 IS -2 120 AC VS -7 Pump #7 vibration Vibration switch IC -4 IS -2 120 AC TSH-8 Electric Room Temp Temperature switch IC -1 IS -6 NA U 1 1 1 1 1 Hamestring Lift Station Fayetteville, Arkansas METHANE GAS ANALYZER SHEET 1 OF 3 SPEC NO Is -1 REV APPR. NO BY DATE REVISION CONTRACT 60-03252 DATE 2114105 A DS 2/14/05 Review REQ. P.O. BY DS CHK'D APPR. P&ID: IC -1 Tag Numbers: AE -1 Range: 0-100% LEL Methodology: dual beam infrared Sample Type: single point diffusion Enclosure Material: 316 SS Enclosure Rating: CL 1, Div. 1, Groups B,C,D Temperature Range: -40 to +60 C Humidity Range: 0 to 95% RH Repeatability 1% Stability 2% per year Power: 750 mA at 24 VDC Response Time: 2 seconds Signal Output: 4-20 mA Quantity Required: 2 Manufacturer: MSA Model Number. Ultima XIR Options: Provide (1) CH4 calibration gas kit Provide (1) duct mounting kit and remote mounting bracket S20.03B 1 T U r L_ II I El 1 Hamestring Lift Station Fayetteville, Arkansas HYDROGEN SULPHIDE ANALYZER SHEET 2 OF 3 SPEC NO IS -1 REV APPR. NO BY DATE REVISION CONTRACT 60.03252 DATE 2/14/05 A DS 2114/05 Review REQ. P.O. BY DS CHK'D APPR. P&ID: IC -1 Tag Numbers: AE -2, AE -3 Range: 0-50 ppm Methodology: electrochemical cell Sample Type: single point diffusion Enclosure Material: 316 SS Enclosure Rating: CL 1, Div. 1, Groups B,C,D Temperature Range: -40 to +60 C Humidity Range: 15 to 95% RH Repeatability: 2 ppm Stability: 10% per year Power: 200 mA at 24 VDC Response Time: 30 seconds Signal Output: 4-20 mA Quantity Required: 2 Manufacturer: MSA Model Number: Ultima XE Options: Provide (1) H2S calibration gas kit for the (2) sensors Provide (1) Ultima Monitor Calibrator for the (2) sensors Provide (2) duct mounting kits. Provide (2) remote mounting brackets. S20.03B I I 1 1 I. 1 1 I I. 1 - Hamestring Lift Station Fayetteville, Arkansas GAS MONITOR SHEET 3 OF 3 SPEC NO IS -1 REV APPR. NO BY DATE REVISION CONTRACT 60-03252 DATE 8/5/04 A DS 8/5/04 Review REQ. P.O. BY DS CHK'D APPR. P&ID: IC -1 Tag Number: AC -1 Channels: 6 Reading Display: 3 digit LED for each channel Status Display: Caution, Warning, Alarm LEDs for each channel Mounting: control panel Enclosure Material: epoxy coated aluminum Enclosure Rating: unclassified Temperature Range: 0 to +52 C Humidity Range: 0 to 95% RH Re atabil : 1% of full scale Power: 1 amp at 120 VAC Detector Signals: 4-20 mA Signal Output: 4-20 mA Relay Outputs: Caution, Warning, Alarm, Trouble, Horn Relay Contacts: SPDT Contact Rating: 5 amps at 120 VAC Quantity Required: 1 Manufacturer. MSA Model Number: 5300 -P -1 -03 -M -B-0 Options: Provide a bezel kit S20.03B F II I I I I II I Li I I I U Hamestrinq Lift Station Fayetteville, Arkansas ULTRASONIC LEVEL INSTRUMENTS SHEET I OF 1 SPEC NO IS -3 REV A NO BY DATE REVISION CONTRACT 60-03252 DATE 8/6104 A DS 816/04 Review REQ. P.O. BY CHK'D APPR. Ds Tag No. LE-1/LIT-1 Service Wetwell level Line NoNessel No Wetwell P&ID IC -1 CONNECTIONS Connection Type Pipe Connection Size/Rating 1" Connection Material Plastic SERVICE MaSdmum Temperature 100 F Operating Temperature 60 F MaSdmum Pressure AMB Operating Pressure AMB Lower Fluid water Lower Fluid Specific Gravity 1.0 Upper Fluid Upper Fluid Specific Gravity Foam Height Foam Density Floating Solids YES Mounding during fill VortSng during emptying Vessel Size Vessel Type Open well Max. level height (from bottom) 30 FT VESSEL Min. level hei ht (from bottom) 0.5 FT Type of tillin Side Type of emptying Bottom AgtdGon T e NO Bottom Sparging in NO SENSOR Styte Pipe mounted Orientation Vertical Mounting intrusive/non-intrusive Non -intrusive Material Frequency Ran emir/max 44 KHZ 10-29 FT Enclosure Class Class 1 Div 1 G ABC D Enclosure Material Plastic Conduit Connection 1" NPT Cable Length 15 FT Set Ran e 0 - 20 FT OUtPUt 4-20mA Enclosure Class NEMA 4X TRANSMITTER Enclosure Material Plastic Power Requirements,Volts/Amps/H2 120 VAC Tag No LIT -1 Remote/integral (in relation to sensor Remote Integral Indicator YES T' Accuracy 0.4 inches Mounting intrusive/non-intrusive 2" Pipe Manufacturer Endress & Hauser Model No FMU860R1A1B1/FDU81QN1A Notes: Furnish 2" pipe mounting kit #919566-0001 S20.62 U I I [I I I I I Hamestring Lift Station Fayetteville, Arkansas LEVEL INSTRUMENTS (DISPLACER or FLOAT) SHEET 1 2 SPEC NO ls-4 REV A NO BY DATE REVISION CONTRACT 60-03252 DATE 816/04 A DS 8/6/04 Review REQ. P.O. BY DS CHK'D APPR. 1 2 3 Tag No. LSL-1 LSH-1 Service Wetwell low level Wetwell high level P&ID IC -1 IC -1 Line NoNessel No Wetwell Wetwell BODY/ CASE Body or Cage Material NA NA Rating Conn. Size & Location U e Type Conn. Size & Location Lowe Type Case Mounting Type Rotatable Head Orientation Cooling Extension DISPLACER OR FLOAT Dimensions 7" H X 3" W 7" H X 3" W Insertion Depth Displacer Extension Di . or Float Material Polypropylene Polypropylene Displacer S rin ube MV Function Low level interlock at 4 ft water High level alarm at 15 ft water Output Control Modes XMTR/ CONTRLR Differential Output Action: Level Rise Mounting Enclosure Class Elec. Power or Air Supply Upper Liquid SERVICE Lower Li uid Water Water Sp. G.: Upper Lower 1.0 1.0 Press. Max. Normal 13 psig13 psig Temp. Max. Normal 100 F 100 F Airset jSupplygage Gee Glass Connections OPTIONS Cage Glass Model No. Contacts: No. IForm 1 IC 1 IC Contact Rating 8 amps at 250 VAC 8 amps at 250 VAC Action of Contacts Close on rising level Close on rising level Manufacturer Kobold Kobold Model No NNE -9130 NNE -9130 Notes: Furnish with integral 16 foot cable. S20.26 I II II II II I I 1l I I H I I I Hamestring Lift Station Fayetteville, Arkansas LEVEL INSTRUMENTS (DISPLACER or FLOAT) SHEET 2 2 SPEC NO IS -4 REV B NO BY DATE REVISION CONTRACT 60-03252 DATE 4/26/05 A DS 8/6/04 Review B DS 4/26/05 Add LSHH-2 REG. P.O. BY DS CHK'D APPR. 1 2 3 Tag No. LSHH-1 LSHH-2 Service Wetwell high -high level Drywell high -high level P&ID IC -1 IC -1 Line NoNessel No Wetwell Drywell Body or Cage Material NA NA Rating Conn. Size & Location Uppe Two BODY/ CASE Conn. Size & Location Lowe Type Case Mounting Type Rotatable Head Orientation Cooling Extension DISPLACER OR FLOAT Dimensions 7" H X 3" W 7" H X 3" W Insertion Depth Displacer Extension Dis . or Float Material Polypropylene Polypropylene Displacer S do ube Mti XMTR/ Function High level alarm at 23 ft. water High alarm at 6" water O ut Control Modes Differential CONTRLR Output Action: Level Rise Mounting Enclosure Class Elec. Power or Air Supply SERVICE Upper U uid Lower Liquid Water Water Sp. G.: Upper Lower 1.0 1.0 Press. Max. Normal 13 psig0 0 Temp. Max. Normal 100 F 100 F 60 F Airset ISupply gage Gage Glass Connections OPTIONS Gage Glass Model No. Contacts: No. Form 1 IC - 1 IC Contact Rating 8 amps at 250 VAC 8 amps at 250 VAC Action of Contacts Close on rising level Close on rising level Manufacturer Kobold Kobold Model No NNE -9130 NNE -9130 Notes: Furnish with Integral 16 foot cable. S20.26 El ' PRESSURE SWITCHES SHEET 1 OF 1 Hamestring Lift Station (POSTIVE PRESSURE) SPEC NO REV Fayetteville, Arkansas IS -5 A ' NO BY DATE REVISION CONTRACT DATE A DS 11/19/04 Review 60-03252 REQ. P.O. ' BY CHK'D APPR. DS GENERAL SWITCH • 1. Type: Press X Vacuum _ • Comp. X Dff. Press._ 8. Type: Mercury_ Snap — 2. Setting: Set in Field X Factory Set Other Hermetically sealed ' _ Internal X External Dial9. Quantity: SingleDual X 3. Dead Band: Fixed Adj. _ Min — . 10. Form: SPST— SPDT X DPDT— Other ELEMENT 11. Rating: 11 Amps 125 Volt 60 Hz ' 4. Type: Diaphragm Bourdon_ Bellows_ 12. Load: Inductive X Non -Inductive Other Belleville spring 13. Enclosure: General Purpose Weatherproof_____5. Material: Bronze_ SS X Alloy_ None Explosion Proof X ' Other Class 1, Div. 1, Grps B,C,D 6. Connection: Mfr Std X Other Size 14. Conduit Connection: MFR STD X Other Bottom X Back_ Manufacturer Ashcroft Model No B7-68-B-XFM-XG3-100psi ' 7. Mounting: Local X Surface_ Flush_ P&ID IC -1,2,3,4 Process Set Point Operating ' Rev Tag No. AdJ. Range Service Notes Condition Process Signal Temp. Press. PSH-1 Water 0- 100 psig 60 F 63 psig Lift pump #1 1 ' PSH-2 Water 0 -100 psig 60 F 63 psig Lift pump #2 1 PSH-3 Water 0 -100 psig 60 F 63 psig Lift pump #3 1 PSH-4 Water 0 - 100 prig 60 F 63 psig Lift pump #4 1 PSH-5 Water 0-100 psig 60 F 63 psig Lift pump #5 1 ' PSH-6 Water 0 100 psig 60 F 63 psig Lift pump #6 1 PSH-7 Water 0 -100 psig 60 F 63 psig Lift pump #7 1 PSL-8 Water 0-100 psig 60 close 60 F 80 psig Utility water Notes: 1. Furnish switches with type a 203 diaphragm seal system. The diaphragm shall be 304 SS, factory -filled with Silicone fluid and have a 3" 150# RF flanged process connection. 1 ' S20.42A 1 I I I I SHEET 1 OF 2 Hamestring Lift Station PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS SPEC NO REV Fayetteville, Arkansas IS -7 A NO BY DATE REVISION CONTRACT DATE 60-03252 8/9/04 A DS 819104 Revision REQ. P.O. BY CHK'D APPR. DS Tag No. Service P&ID PIT -8 24" Forced main to WWTP 2 Function Record_ Indicate X Control_ Blind_ Trans X Other 3 Case Mfr Std X Nom Size Color Mfr Std Other 4 Mounting Flush Surface _ Yoke Other 5 Enclosure CI General Purpose WeatherProof Explosion Proof_ Class For use in Intrin. Safe System Other GENERAL 6 Power Supply 117V 60Hz Other AC _ DC 24 Volts Other 7 Chart Strip Roll Fold Circular Time Marks Range Number 8 Chart Drive Speed Power 9 Scale Type 1 2 3 4 Range 1 2 3 4 10 Transmitter 4-20 mA X 10-50 mA 21-103kPa (3-15 psig) Other XMTR Output For Receiver See Spec Sheer 11 Control Modes P = Prop (Gain), I = Integral (Auto Reset), D = Derivative (Rate), Sub: s = Slow, f = Fast P P1 PD_ PID_ If Df Is_ Ds Other 12 Action On Meas. Increase Output Increases Decreases CONTROLLEF13 Auto-Man Sw None_ Mfr Std_ Other 14 Set Point Adj. Manual_ External Remote Other 15 Manual Reg. None_ Mfd Std_ Other 16 Output 4-20 mA 10-50 mA 21-103kPa (3-15 psig) Other 17 Service Gage Press X Absolute_ Vacuum Compound 18 Element Type Diaphragm X Hera Bourdon Bellows_ Other 19 Material 316 SS X Ber Copper Other 20 Range Fixed Adj. Range 0 -150 psig Set at 0 -100 psig ELEMENT Overrange protection to 21 Process Data Press: Norm Max 63 psig Min Element Range 22 Process Conn. 1/4" in. NPT_ 1/7' in. NPT_ Other Location: Bottom_ Back_ Other 23 Alarm -Switches QuantityForm Rating 24 Function Pressure Deviation Contacts To on Inc.Pressure 25 Options Fitter -Reg Supply Gage Output Gage X Charts Diaph Seal X Type Flange Diaphragm 3" Bet Bowl OPTIONS Connection Flat face Capillary X Length 10 ft Material 316 SS Other Flushing ring 26 Manufacturer Rosemount Model 3o51TG2A2B21AS1B4E5M5 Notes: Attach capillary seal model 1199PDD10AFFW71 CAA7G S20.40A I I I I SHEET 2 OF 2 Hamestring Fayetteville, Lift Station Arkansas PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS SPEC NO IS -7 REV A NO BY DATE REVISION CONTRACT DATE 60-03252 819104 A DS 8/9104 Revision REQ. P.O. BY CHK'D APPR. DS Tag No. Service P&ID PIT -9 30" Forced main to WWTP 2 Function Record_ Indicate X Control_ Blind_ Trans X Other 3 Case Mfr Std X Nom Size Color Mfr Std Other 4 Mounting Flush Surface _ Yoke Other 5 Enclosure Claw General Purpose WeatherProof Explosion Proof Class For use in Intrin. Safe System_ Other GENERAL 6 Power Supply 117V 60Hz Other AC DC 24 Volts Other 7 Chart . Strip Roll Fold Circular Time Marks Range Number 8 Chart Drive Speed Power 9 Scale Type 1 2 3 4 Range 1 2 3 4 10 Transmitter 4-20 mA X 10-50 mA 21-103kPa (3-15 psig) Other XMTR Output For Receiver See Spec Sheet 11 Control Modes P = Prop (Gain), I = Integral (Auto Reset), D = Derivative (Rate), Sub: s = Slow, f = Fast P PI PD_ PID_ If Df Is_ DS Other 12 Action On Meas. Increase Output Increases Decreases CONTROLLEF13 Auto -Man Sw None_ Mfr Std Other 14 Set Point Adj. Manual_ External Remote Other 15 Manual Reg. None_ Mfd Std_ Other 16 Output 4-20 mA 10-50 mA 21-103kPa (3-15 prig) Other 17 Service Gage Press X Absolute_ Vacuum Compound 18 Element Type Diaphragm X Helot Bourdon Bellows_ Other 19 Material 316 SS X Bar Copper Other 20 Range Fixed AdJ. Range 0 - 150 psig Set at 0 -100 psig ELEMENT Overrange protection to 21 Process Date Press: Norm Max 63 psig Min Element Range 22 Process Conn. 114" in. NPT_ 112" in. NPT_ Other Location: Bottom_ Back_ Other 23 Alarm -Switches Quantity Form_ Rating 24 Function Pressure Deviation Contacts To on Inc.Pressure 25 Options Fitter -Reg Supply Gage Output Gage X Charts Diaph Seal X Type Flange Diaphragm 3" Bot Bowl OPTIONS Connection Flat face Capillary X Length loft Material 316 SS Other Flushing ring 26 Manufacturer Rosemount Model 3051TG2A2B21AS1B4E5M5 Notes: Attach capillary seal model 1199PDD10AFFW71 CAA7G S20.40A I Hamestrinq Lift Station Favetteville, Arkansas VIBRATION SWITCH SHEET 1 OF 1 SPEC NO IS -2 REV A NO BY DATE REVISION CONTRACT 60-03252 DATE 2/1/2005 A DS 2/112005 Review REQ. P.O. BY DS CHK'D APPR. Tag No. VS -1/2/3/415/6!1 Service Raw sewaa pumps123456and7 Line NoNessel No Line Size, Schedule P&ID IC -1 2,3 and 4 PROBE Orientation per pump mfg. e 1/2" NPT Material steel Sheath Insertion Length Inactive Length Gland Size AMPLIFIER Remote/Integral none Enclosure Class Conduit Connection Power Supply Volts/Amps/Hz SWITCHES No. of Contacts Form 1 Triac Rating Housing 5A at 120 VAC CL 1, Div. 2, Gm C Open at Close at Level Incr/Decr Level Incr/Decr 0 - 1 inches/sec Load Type relay coil Options relay art no. 94500-065 TRANSMITTER Make & Model No Input Signal OutputSignal Set Range Enclosure Class OPTIONS Compensation Cable Local Indicator I/P Transducer Signal Ugh Upper Fluid Density Lower Fluid Density SERVICE Max. Pressure Norm. Pressure Max. Temperature Norm. Temperature Moisture Material Buildup Vibration Manufacturer Metric Model No 54770-001 Notes: S20.6:3 I 7 IL L I I I I I I I I I Li d I I Li TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS (FILLED SYSTEM) SHEET 1 OF t SPEC NO ISM REV A Hamestring Lift Station NO BY DATE REVISION CONTRACT DATE' Fayetteville, Arkansas 4/26/2005 A DS 4/26/2005 Review REQ. - P.O. BY CHK'D APPR. Tag No. Service P&ID TSH-8 Electric Room Air Temperature IC -1 2 Function Record Indication X Control_ Blind _ Trans _ Other 3 Case MfrStd X Nom Size 6" Color MfrStd X Other 4 Mounting Flush Surface X Yoke Other 5 Enclosure Class Weather Proof Explosion Proof_ Class GENERAL 6 Power Supply For Use in Intrinsically Safe System.__ Other 117V 60Hz Other AC DC Volts 7 Chart Strip_ Roll_ Fold_ Circular Time Marks 8 Chart Drive Speed Power 9 Scale Type Linear Range 1 50-150F 2 3 4 10 Transmitter 4-20 mA 10-50 mA 21-103kPa (3-15 psig) _ Other XMTR Output For Receiver See Spec Sheet 11 Control Modes P = Prop (Gain), I = Integral (Auto Reset), D = Derivative (Rate), Sub: s = Slow, f = Fast P PI PD PID_ _ If Df_ Is Ds_ Other 12 Action On Meas. Increase Output Increases_ Decreases_ CONTROLLE 13 Auto -Man Sw None_ Mfr Std Other 14 SetPointAdj. Manual_ External_ Remote_ Other 15 Manual Reg. None Mid Std Other 16 Output 4-20 mA_ 10.50 mA_ 21-103kPa (315 psig)_ Other 17 Fill SAMA Class III B Compensation case 18 Process Data Temp: Normal 70 F Max 100 F Max Pressure Atmospheric 19 Range Fixed X Adj. Range Set at 50 - 150 F Overrange Protection to 250 F 20 Bulb Type Gas MU. SS Extension: Length None Type ELEMENT Size: Diameter Length 3" min. Insertion Conn: 3/4" NPT Location 1 Ft Above X Below_ Instr. 21 Capillary MFR STD X Length min MU. copper Armor No 22 Well MU. None Insertion Lag Ed. Conn. _ Const Drilled_ Built -Up_ Other 23 Alarm -Switches Quantity 1 Form SPOT Rating 10A,120VAC 24 Function Temperature X Deviation _ Contacts To close on Inc.Temperature 25 Options Fitt. Reg. ___ Sup. Gage Output Gage_ Charts Other Fixed minimum deadband 26 Manufacturer Model No. Notes: Field set to close contacts at 120 degrees F. S20.11A I SECTION 16805 - CABINETS, CONTROL PANELS AND ENCLOSURES PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and ' Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Technical Specifications I1. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 2. Section 16080 - Electrical Testing 3. Section 16120 - Conductors and Cables ' 4. Section 16140 - Switches and Circuit Breakers 5. Section 16801 - Instrument Identification & Tagging Methods 6. Section 01330 - Submittals ' 7. Section 16900 - Programmable Logic Controller 8. Section 16901 - Human Machine Interface (HMI) 9. Section 16905 - Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) System I. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. Furnish and install the control panel enclosure in the MCC Room of the Fayetteville ' Hamestring Lift Station in accordance with the Contract Drawings. The control panel enclosure shall include all devices as shown on the enclosure layout detail drawing and wired in accordance with the schematic diagrams. The control panel will contain the PLC, HMI, UPS and all other controls, relays and associated ' terminals required to automatically control the lift pumps. The control panel shall be installed on a housekeeping pad of the size and dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Six (6) sets of detailed shop drawings shall be submitted and approved before ' fabrication, shipment or work specified under this Section begins. 1. Furnish shop drawings as specified under Section 16800, Part 1.06. ' 1.04• APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. D1248 - Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials ' B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. ICS - Industrial Controls and Systems ' 1.05 DUALITY ASSURANCE: A. All equipment, materials and work shall be provided in accordance with best I. engineering and shop practice. Individual components shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gages, so that repair parts (furnished at any time) can be readily installed in the field. All equipment shall be new and shall not have been in service ' at any time prior to delivery at this job site, except as required for specified tests. Manufacturers shall have a satisfactory field service record. ' 16805 -Cabinets, Control Panels and Enclosures 16805-I RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 C H SECTION 16805 - CABINETS. CONTROL PANELS AND ENCLOSURES (continued) 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver, store and handle all equipment and materials in a manner to ensure I installation in sound and undamaged condition, and to prevent damage from exposure to the elements. PART 2- PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION ' 2.01 FABRICATION DETAILS: A. Control Panel 1. The Contractor shall install all control systems, displays and instrumentation as shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. The Control Panel enclosure shall be a NEMA 12, two -door single access enclosure (two doors on front) with piano hinges. Enclosure size is designated on the Contract Drawings. 3. The construction material for the enclosures shall be 12 -gauge steel. The seams shall be continuously welded and ground smooth, no hole or knockouts. The enclosure shall have lifting eyes for easy handling. The latching rods of the 3 -point latching system shall have rollers for easier door closing, mounting channels shall be welded horizontally to the interior body sides at top, bottom, and center. A full-length and two side -mounted panels with mounting hardware shall be provided with the enclosure. An oil - resistant door gasket shall be attached with oil -resistant adhesive and held in place with steel retaining strips. A grounding stud shall be provided on the doors. The finish of the enclosures shall be white inside with ANSI gray outside finish over phosphatiied surfaces. Internal panels, mounting channels and heavy duty panel supports shall also be white. 4. The Control Panel enclosure shall be installed with a light fixture and on -off switch. A door switch for the light to energize/de-energize upon opening/closing of the panel door is required. 5. Enclosure doors shall be key -lockable and shall provide proper environmental protection enclosure without the use of retaining clips. 6. Control Panel enclosures shall be equipped with replaceable corrosion inhibitors to minimize the effect of environmental conditions. Corrosion inhibitor shall be A-HCL240R by Hoffman, or approved equal. 7. All wiring inside the enclosures shall be installed in plastic, open -slot wiring duct. B. Terminal Strips 1. Terminal strips shall be of the DIN rail mounted screw type, rated for 600V at 20 -amp. 2. A minimum of 20 percent spare fused and un-fused terminals shall be installed. 3. Each field wire shall be terminated on an 11O terminal strip. All wires which provide current from the panel to a field device shall be fused at the terminal strip. I 16805 -Cabinets, Control Panels and 16805-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' Enclosures SECTION 16805 - CABINETS. CONTROL PANELS AND ENCLOSURES (continued) ■ C. Panel Wiring 1. All internal wires shall be wired to only one side of the terminal strip. Field ' 11O wiring shall terminate on the other side. No more than two wires shall be connected to each terminal. 2. Standard copper switchboard wire, type SIS, or type MTW, No.14 AWG ' minimum size shall be used throughout, except for specific devices which require special conductors or shielding. Shielded pair cables shall also be #14 AWG and rated for 600 volts. ' 3. Each conductor (except for short jumpers wired to same device) shall be identified at each end with Grafoplast Trasp System wire markers. Substitutions are not acceptable. Refer to Section 16801 — Instrumentation Identification & Tagging Methods. ' 4. Wiring nuts or butt splice terminations shall not be used. 5. Wiring shall be arranged so those components may be removed and/or serviced without unduly disturbing the wiring. No wire shall be routed across the face or rear of a device in a manner preventing opening of covers, removal of equipment, access to leads, terminals or devices. 6. Wire shall be installed in wire troughs or grouped in bundles and secured ' with nonflammable, nonmetallic tie bonds. The bundles shall be run in an orderly manner with minimum radius bends and shall be adequately supported. Lacing of conductors is not acceptable. ' 7. Incoming power conductors shall be wired directly to a NEMA-approved circuit breaker disconnect switch. Contractor shall use the terminal lugs recommended by the manufacturer when connecting the terminal lugs of the power conductors to the terminal lugs of the disconnect. 8. Connect the wet well float switches to the control panel thru intrinsic safety barriers. Segregate the intrinsically safe wiring from all other wires. ID. Nameplates I. Nameplates shall be in accordance with Section 16801 — Part 2.2F of these Specifications, and as shown on the Drawings. The control panel shall be identified by fastening a nameplate near the top front center of the enclosure. Nameplates for front -mounted components shall be fastened to the panel above each device: Nameplates for equipment mounted within the control panels shall, be fastened adjacent to each unit and located so as not to be obscured by the wiring. E. Grounding 1. The control panel shall contain a ground lug for connection of an external No. 4 copper ground conductor. It shall be connected to bare cabinet metal. Enclosure doors shall have grounding straps installed, connected back to the ' main ground lug. • 2. A copper ground bus shall be installed near the field termination strips to terminate signal cable shields. It shall be connected to bare cabinet metal. F. Transient Voltage Surge Protection 1. 120 VAC to the UPS shall be transient voltage protected. 2. Suppressors on 120 VAC power supply connections shall be tested and rated for a minimum of 50 occurrences of IEEE 587 Category B test waveform. ' 16805 -Cabinets, Control Panels and 16805-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Enclosures IT SECTION 16805 - CABINETS CONTROL PANELS AND ENCLOSURES (continued) First -stage clamping voltage shall be 350 volts or less while second -stage clamping voltage shall be 210 volts or less. 3. All analog signal lines shall be protected by at the point of entry into the control panel. a. EDCO PC642 series or SRA-64 series b. Engineer -approved equal. 4. All digital signal lines shall be protected at the point of entry into the control panel. a. EDCO HSP-121 series b. Engineer -approved equal. 5. Ethernet signal lines shall be protected at the point of entry into the control panel. a. EDCO SRA-64 series b. Engineer -approved equal. I E E E I U 2.02 ASSEMBLED SYSTEM: A. The UPS shall supply all 120 VAC power loads internal to the panel. B. AC power for external instrumentation shall be derived from the UPS, and sent outside via fused terminal strips. C. Redundant 24 VDC power supplies shall supply all field instrumentation loads, via a fused terminal strip. D. The assembled system shall include fuses sized for each application installed in the fuse blocks. One hundred percent (100%) spare fuses shall be supplied with the panel. E. Within the enclosure all 11O racks, HMI display, UPS and instrument power supplies shall be grounded to meet the manufacturer's specifications. F. All cables (with associated plugs, connectors and receptacles) requiring user field installation shall be designed for commercial use, to withstand an industrial environment. G. Each limit switch, pushbutton, or other input device shall be connected to only one individual input point. H. Each output device shall be connected to only one individual output point. I. No fans or air conditioners are required. J. At the time the equipment is shipped, one reproducible copy of each panel assembly and wiring drawing shall be provided in a door pocket of the panel. END OF SECTION 16805 I I 16805 -Cabinets, Control Panels and 16805-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 Enclosures ri ' SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 WORK INCLUDED HEREIN IA. Furnish and install the programmable logic controllers (PLCs) shown on the Drawings and listed in the Specifications. Provide all hardware, fumware, software, components, materials, tools, labor supervision and appliances for, and t properly erect, install, connect up, adjust, test and place in continuous and satisfactory operation at the Fayetteville Lift Station location indicated on the Drawings and/or Specifications. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: ' A. Section 16050, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods B. Section 16080, Electrical Testing ' C. Section 16805, Cabinets, Control Panels and Enclosures ID. Section 16483, Variable Frequency Controllers E. Section 16901, Human -Machine Interface ' F. Section 01330, Submittals 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. .Make submittals as specified in Section 01330. PART -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL 1 A. This section covers furnishing all labor and material and performing all instrumentation work as required by this Contract. All items may not have been ' detailed; the Contractor shall furnish, without additional cost to the Owner, all labor, material, drawings, services, and connections necessary to make the work completely functional and ready for Owner's use, within the limits of this ' Contract. B. Full responsibility for designing, fabricating and erecting all the control and instrumentation equipment and appurtenances, for selecting materials of construction, for establishing operating procedures and for demonstrating compliance with specified performance requirements rests with the Contractor, ' Programmable Logic Controller 16900-1 ION Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (continued) 1 and through him the suppliers, under this Item. The Engineer's approval of any portion of this work will be general. Neither the Engineer's approval of the design, construction, nor operation of the equipment, nor the use of material included in this Specification, nor the Engineer's approval of alternative materials offered by the suppliers, will in any way relieve the Contractor and suppliers of full responsibility for meeting all performance requirements under.this item and this Contact. ' 2.2 STANDARD PRODUCTS A. Unless otherwise indicated, the materials to be furnished under this specification shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design complying with the specification. 2.3 SPECIFIC PRODUCTS ' A. The Contractor shall provide all hardware, software, input/output system components, cables and accessories for a complete and operable PLC control system. All license agreements, certifications, warranties, validations, etc. associated with the PLC and its 11O system shall be consigned to the Owner upon ' the satisfactory completion of all required test, checkout and startup procedures. B. All devices and components of the PLC and 11O systems shall be constructed so as to withstand, without damage, their intended use in a wastewater pumping ' facility. C. Contractor shall furnish one (1) Modicon Premium Programmable Logic Controller. As a minimum The contractor shall provide all necessary modules, cables, and other hardware to implement the system configuration included in the scope of work of this specification and associated Contract Drawings: D. The contractor shall supply and license, if needed, to the Owner the latest version of the programming software. This software shall be provided on CD-ROM's. The programming software shall be provided on an early delivery schedule to the Owner to ensure that the programming will be completed in a timely manner to meet the system startup schedule. 2.4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS A. This specification has been developed to establish minimum requirements for a solid-state Programmable Controller designed to provide high reliability in industrial applications. The internal wiring of the controller 'shall be fixed and the logic functions it must perform in a given application shall be programmed into its memory. The controller shall be supplied with the processor, input/output scanner, inputs, outputs, memory, power supply, and all power and interface Programmable Logic Controller 16900-2 KIN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (continued) I I II I I I I I I I n nI cables necessary to function as a complete and operable Programmable Controller system. B. The objective of the Programmable Controller will be to automatically control seven (7) wastewater lift pumps and their associated valves. C. The specification, shall be followed in accordance with the contract and all questions or requests for deviations shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. 2.5 SERVICE A. The supplier shall provide operating instruction manuals with adequate information pertaining to the following: 1. System specifications 2. Electrical power requirements 3. Application considerations 4. Assembly and installation procedures 5. Power up procedures 6. Troubleshooting procedures 7. Programming procedures 8. Explanation of internal fault diagnostics 9. Shut down procedures 10. Recommended spare parts list B. The supplier shall provide a network of field sales and support personnel located in key cities throughout the United States. The supplier shall also provide a field service department with experienced representatives stationed in major cities with the capability to provide telephone consultation, prompt on -site service, and field replacement stock. C. The supplier shall provide product application assistance by trained and experienced engineers lo assist the Owner with program and system development through telephone consultation and on -site check-out, debug, and start-up assistance.. D. The supplier shall provide an Owner training program, if requested by the Owner, that's designed to teach the • Owner's personnel how to apply and maintain the PLC. The training program shall include training manuals and "hands-on" programming experience on a Programmable Controller of a type similar to that provided by the supplier. E. The supplier shall have the capability to conduct on -site training programs, if requested by the Owner, at a location provided by the Owner. 2.6 DESIGN DESCRIPTION A. Modules are defined herein as devices that plug into a chassis and are keyed to allow installation in only one direction. The design must prohibit upside down insertion of the modules as well as safeguard against the insertion of a module Programmable Logic Controller 16900-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (continued) into the wrong slot or chassis via an electronic method for identifying a module. Electronic keying performs an electronic check to insure that the physical module is consistent with what was configured. B. The Programmable Controller shall have downward compatibility whereby all new module designs can be interchanged with all similar modules in an effort to reduce obsolescence. C. The Programmable Controller shall have the ability to be updated electronically to interface with new modules. D. All hardware of the Programmable Controller shall operate at an ambient temperature of 0 to 60 degrees C (32 to 140 degrees F), with an ambient temperature rating for storage of —20 to +85 degrees C. E. The Programmable Controller hardware shall function continuously in a relative humidity range of 5% to 95% with no condensation. F. The Programmable Controller system shall be designed and tested to operate in a high electrical noise environment. G. The Programmable Controller shall have the capability of addressing up to 4096 input points and 4096 output points, either analog or discrete without restriction. It shall also have the ability to communicate with up to 250 physical nodes that contain I/O points. These calculations are based upon the connection limitation of the controller. H. Each input and output module shall be a self-contained unit housed within an enclosure (chassis). These input/output enclosures with their respective modules shall be field expandable up to 512 (16 modules x 32pts/module) unique points. The Programmable Controller shall use multiple independent, asynchronous scans. These concurrent scans shall be designated for processing of input and output information, program logic, and background processing of other processor functions. Input and output devices located in the same backplane (local I/O) as the processor will produce data at the rate of configured RPI (Requested Packet Interval), and for inputs enabled for Change Of State (COS), at the time any point changes state. J. The Programmable Controller shall have the ability to communicate with multiple remote 1/O chassis or devices configured with multiple 1/O modules. Networks that allow remote 1/O include Universal Remote I/O (RIO), Ethernet. K. It shall be possible to communicate with remote I/O chassis or other PLCs via fiber optic cable by inserting fiber optic converters into the links. Redundant fiber optic cabling shall be an option. L. The Programmable Controller shall have the ability to support multiple data communications links by using Ethernet modules. M. The Programmable Controller shall have one dedicated serial port, which supports RS -232-C signals. It shall be accessible in control logic and provide Programmable Logic Controller 16900-4 RJN ProjectNo. 11-1875-00 I I I I I I II I I I SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (continued) support :for DF1 Master, DF1 Point to point and DFl Slave communication protocols. Alternatively, it must be usable for programming and data monitoring purposes. 2.7 CONTROLLER HARDWARE A. The processor shall be a self-contained module. It will provide control program execution and support remote or local programming. The processor will also supply 11O scanning and inter -processor and peripheral communication functions. B. The user program and data shall be contained in battery backed -up random access memory. The operating system shall be contained in non-volatile firmware. The memory containing the operating system can be updated via a separate update tool to allow for easy field updates. C. The processor module shall be furnished with 16 Kbyte battery backed RAM. D. In a single chassis all system and signal power to the processor and support modules shall be distributed on a single motherboard or backplane. No interconnecting wiring between these modules via plug -terminated jumpers shall be acceptable. E. The processor within the system shall perform internal diagnostic checking and give visual indication to the user by illuminating a "OK" indicator when no fault is detected and a "red" indicator when a fault is detected. F. The front panel on the processor that shall include color indicators showing the following status information: 1. Program or Run mode of the controller 2. The fault status of the controller. 3. IO status 4. RS -232 activity 5. Battery status G. The front panel of the processor shall include a holder and a connector for a lithium battery. The battery shall provide backup power for user programs and data when the main power supply is not available ' H. The front panel of the processor shall include a 9 -pin D -shell serial RS232 port. I. All system modules, local and remote chassis shall be designed to provide for free ' airflow convection cooling. No internal fans or other means of cooling, except heat sinks, shall be permitted. ' J. All system modules including the processor shall be removable from the chassis or inserted in to the chassis while power is being supplied to the chassis without faulting the processor or damaging the modules. 2.8 POWER SUPPLIES ' Programmable Logic Controller 16900-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (continued) 1 A. The Programmable Controller shall operate with an electrical service of 85-265 VAC, single phase, in the frequency range from 47 to 63 Hz. B. The manufacturer shall be able to provide as standard equipment a modular power supply capable of converting AC standard low voltage line power to the DC power required to operate the Programmable Controller system. C. A single main power supply shall have the capability of supplying power to the processor and local input/output modules. Other power supplies shall provide power to remotely located chassis. D. The power supply shall automatically shut down the Programmable Controller system whenever its output power is detected as exceeding 125% of its rated power. ' E. The power supply shall monitor the incoming line voltage for proper levels. When the power supply is wired to utilize AC input, the system shall function properly within the range of 85 to 265 VAC. When the power supply is wired to utilize DC input, the system shall function properly within the range of 19.2 to 32 VDC. In addition, the power supply shall provide surge protection, isolation, and outage carry-over up to 2 cycles of the AC line. F. Design features of the Programmable Controller power supply shall include a diagnostic indicator mounted in a position easily viewed by the user. This indicator shall provide the operator with the status of the DC power applied. In addition, a means of disabling power to the processor shall be possible from a power disconnect switch mounted in a position easily accessible by the operator. G. At the time of power -up, the power supply shall inhibit operation of the processor • and I/O modules until its output DC voltages are within specifications. ' H. In addition to the electronic protection described above the power supply shall offer a failsafe fuse that is not accessible by the user. 2.9 PROGRAM CREATION AND STORAGE A. The program storage medium shall be of a static battery backed RAM type. B. The Programmable Controller system shall be capable of addressing memory up to 7.5 Mbytes. C. Base memory is available for user program and data. Furthermore, the base memory will exclusively contain all I/O tags even if expansion memory is installed. Non 11O tags and ladder logic shall be stored in base memory and optional expansion memory. ' D. Memory capacity shall be configurable to allow for the most economical match to the intended application. It shall be possible to upgrade to a processor with a larger memory size simply by saving a program, installing a memory expansion card, and downloading the program to the new system without having to make any program changes. Programmable Logic Controller 16900-6 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (continued) E. The memory shall be provided with a lithium battery capable of retaining all stored program data through a continuous power outage for 2.7 months under worst case conditions. The capability shall exist to remove all batteries from the system without removing system power. A low battery condition must be detectable in ladder logic, but shall not automatically generate a major fault. A low battery condition will generate a minor fault and will be detectable in ladder logic. F. Thefl operator should be able to back up volatile memory, including data and program logic onto a personal computer storage disk or CD. G. All user memory in the processor not used for program storage shall be available for data storage. The Programmable Controller system shall be capable of storing 3 data types: 1. Predefined 2. User -defined 3. Module -defined H. Predefined include the following data types 1. AXIS OBJECT 2. BOOL 3. CONTROL 4. COUNTER 5. DINT 6. INT 7. MESSAGE 8. MOTION_GROUP OBJECT 9. MOTION_INSTRUCTION 10. PIDOBJECT 11. REAL 12. SINT 13. TIMER I. User -defined: User -defined data is limited to structures. Each structure contains one or more data definition's called members. Each member is a predefined type. J. Module -defined: Object includes a structure for each I/O module and system or module specific information (hidden from user). Any data can be displayed in Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal, or Decimal radices. Function -specific data types such as PID, Axis, Axis Group or Message shall have dedicated displays available annotating the meaning of specific control bits and words within them and allowing for selective control where appropriate. K. If contacts or entire rungs are intentionally deleted from an existing logic program, the remaining program shall be automatically repositioned to fill this void. Whenever contacts or entire rungs are intentionally inserted into an existing program, theoriginal program shall automatically be repositioned to accommodate the enlarged program. All rung comments shall maintain their original links. Programmable Logic Controller 16900-7 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (continued) ' L. The number of times a normally open (N.O.) and/or normally closed (N.C.) contact of an internal output can be programmed shall be limited only by the memory capacity to store these instructions. M. The number of times a timer or counter can be programmed shall be limited only ' the memory capacity to store these instructions. N. Control logic programs shall have immediate access to the sub -elements of ' control structures by address and sub -element mnemonic, such as timer accumulator value, timer done bit, or P1D process variable value. 2.10 INTERFACING AND PERIPHERALS A. The programming means shall be a laptop computer running under a Windows operating system (referred to as Windows workstation in the next subsection). This computer will be furnished by the Owner and is not a part of this Specification. B. The means to indicate contact or output status shall be by intensification of the contact or output on the CRT screen. Each element's status shall be shown independently, regardless of circuit configuration. C. The Programmable Controller system shall be able to interface with a data ' terminal, which is RS -232-C compatible to generate hard copy messages. D. The Programmable Controller system shall also be able to interface with a Bell 202 modem, which is RS -232-C compatible to send and receive radio data to a remote PLC. E. The Programmable Controller shall have the capability to interface to a floppy disk and/or a hard disk for loading a user program into, or recording the contents of, the processor's memory. It shall be possible to load or record the entire contents of memory. 2.11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES I A. The Programmable Controller shall have communication interface modules for ' Ethernet, and Remote I/O (RIO). B. The Ethernet interface shall support the following: 1. Standard TCP/IP communications 2. IEEE Standard 802.3 (10baseT) 3. CSMA/CD access method 4. Subnet masking 5 Standard repeaters, bridges, routers, host computers, peer PLCs. 6. RJ-45 and AUI ports 7. Boot client 8. Manual configuration 9. Programmable controller messaging to peer controllers and workstations Programmable Logic Controller 16900-8 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (continued) C. On-line programming and upload/downloads of control programs shall be able to occur over the Ethernet network. D. The manufacturer shall offer HMI (Human Machine Interface) software for data acquisition, supervisory control, operator interface, and information management, which reads data from the programmable controller over the Ethernet network. r. 2.12 PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES A. The programming format shall be IEC 1131-3 compliant, Ladder Diagram. B. The controller shall organize user applications as Tasks, which can be specified as continuous or periodic. C. Periodic tasks shall run via an interrupt at a user -defined interval in one millisecond increments to a maximum of 2000 seconds. D. The interrupt mechanism of periodic tasks shall adhere to the IEC 1131-3 definition of pre-emptive multitasking. E. The controller shall be able to accommodate a maximum of 32 individual tasks of which one can be continuous. F. The periodic tasks shall have an associated, user assignable priority from one to fifteen which specifies that task's relative execution priority in the multitasking hierarchy. G. Each task shall have a watchdog timeout which is unique to that task and user defined. H. Each task shall include a maximum of 32 programs which can be ordered for execution within the task. I. Each program shall include user ladder logic routines of which one can be specified as the main routine and one can be specified as the fault routine. J. Variables within the controller shall be referenced as unique, default or user defined tags. K Tag naming convention shall adhere to specifications in IEC 1131-2. L. It shall be possible to create tags off-line, on-line in program mode and at the same time the ladder logic is entered. - M. The system shall have the capability to store a description for each tag. Programmable Logic Controller 16900-9 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (continued) 1 N. Tags shall be available to all tasks in the controller (controller scoped) or limited in scope to the routines within a single program (program scoped) as defined by the user. O. Any tag shall have the ability to be aliased by another tag which is defined by the user. P. It shall be possible to program control logic via tag names. Q. It shall be possible to program ladder rungs with the following restrictions: 1. series instruction count limited only by user memory, 2. branch extensions limited only by user memory, 3. branch nesting to six levels. R. It shall be possible to interleave input and output instruction types on the same 1 contiguous rung. S. It shall be possible to change a contact from normally open to normally closed, 1 add instructions, change referenced tags, etc. It shall not be necessary to delete and reprogram the entire rung. T. It shall be possible to insert relay ladder diagram rungs anywhere in the program, even between existing rungs, insofar as there is sufficient memory to accommodate these additions. U. The Programmable Controller shall have the capability to remove an entire logic rung into an edit buffer where individual parameters may be easily altered. 1 V. A single program command or instruction shall suffice to delete an individual ladder diagram rung from memory. It shall not be necessary to delete the rung contact by contact. W. It shall be necessary to, issue a two part command in order to delete all relay ladder rungs from memory. This will provide a safeguard wherein the operator must verify their intentions before erasing the entire program. X. A clock/calendar feature shall be included within the processor. Access to the time and date shall be from the programming terminal or user program. The clock shall be accurate to 1.0 milliseconds. Y. Latch functions shall be internal and programmable. Z. The system shall have the capability to address software timers and software counters in any combination and quantity up to the limit of available memory. All management of these instructions into memory shall be handled by the processor. Instructions shall permit programming timers in the "ON" or "OFF" delay modes. Timer programming shall also include the capability to interrupt timing without resetting the timers. Counters shall be programmable using up - increment and down -increment. Programmable Logic Controller 16900-10 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 1 C SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (continued) AA. Timer instructions shall have a time base of 1.0 milliseconds. The timing range of each timer shall be from 0 to 2,147,483,648 increments. It shall be possible to program and display separately the timer's preset and accumulated values. BB. The Programmable Controller shall use a signed double integer format ranging from -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,648 for data storage of the counter preset and accumulated values. CC. The Programmable Controller shall store data in the following formats: 1. Boolean values (0 or 1). 2. Short Integer Numbers ranging from -128 to +127. 3. Integer Numbers ranging from -32,768 to +32,767. 4. Double Integer Numbers ranging from —2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647. 5. Floating Point Numbers consisting of eight significant digits. For numbers larger than eight digits, the processor shall convert the number into exponential form with a range of plus/minus 54944 E -38 to plus/minus 2823 E+38. DD. The Programmable Controller shall have support for integer and floating point signed math functions consisting of addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, square root and negation. EE. Trigonometric instructions supported must include Sine, Cosine, Tangent, Inverse Sine, Inverse Cosine, and Inverse Tangent. These instructions must fully support floating point math. FF. Additional floating point instructions supported must include Log 10, Natural Log, and Exponential. I R up GG. It shall be possible to complete complex, combined calculations in a single instruction, such as flow totalizing or equations of the format ((A+((B-C)*D))IE). HH. File function instructions supported shall include Sort, Average and Standard Deviation. II. Value arrays shall be limited in size only by the amount of available memory. JJ. Arrays shall be configurable with one, two or three dimensions. KK. The processor shall support indexed addressing of array elements. LL. Array element manipulation instructions such as high speed "array copy" and "array fill", "array to array" move, "element to array" move, array to element" move, and "first in -first out" shall be supported by the system. The four function •nmath instructions and instructions for performing "logical OR", "logical AND", "exclusive OR"; and comparison instructions such as "less than", "greater than", and "equal to" shall be included within the system. All instructions shall execute on either single words or arrays. Programmable Logic Controller 16900-11 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (continued) ' MM. For any module specifically associated with the Programmable Controller, it shall be possible to query the current status of all channels through controller scoped tags without any programming. NN. The system shall contain instructions which will construct asynchronous and ' synchronous 16 bit word shift registers. Additional instructions shall be provided to construct synchronous bit shift registers. OO. The Programmable Controller shall have a jump instruction which will allow the programmer to jump over portions of the user program to a portion marked by a matching label instruction. PP. The Programmable Controller shall have an embedded motion planner capable of doing course motion planning for up to 32 axes. This planner must be the highest priority task of the controller. QQ. The Programmable Controller shall have a ladder interface to the motion planner which allows the user to request that the motion planner create and execute a specific motion profile which can be changed dynamically through the ladder interface. RR. The Programmable Controller shall provide a master system clock that will allow synchronization of all axes in the chassis local to the controller. SS. It shall be a function of the processor to automatically manage all data types. For example, if a word stored in an Integer tag is transferred into a Floating Point tag, the processor shall convert the integer value into floating point prior to executing the transfer. TT. In applications requiring repeatable logic rungs it shall be possible to place such rungs in a subroutine section. Instructions which call the subroutine and return to the main program shall be included within the system. It shall be possible to program several subroutines and define each subroutine by a unique program file designator. The processor will support nesting of subroutines up to available memory. It shall be possible to pass selected values (parameters) to a subroutine before its execution. The number of these parameters is limited only by available memory. This allows the subroutine to perform mathematical or logical operations on the data and return the results to the main program upon completion. These subroutines will be accessed by jump -to -subroutine ' instructions. W. The program format shall display all instructions on a windows workstation ' screen with appropriate mnemonics to define all data entered by the programmer. The system shall be capable of providing a "HELP" utility which when invoked by the programmer will display on the screen a list of instructions and all data and keystrokes required to enter an instruction into the system memory. ' VV. At the request of the programmer, tags contained in system memory shall be displayed on the windows workstation screen. This monitoring feature shall be provided for all tags regardless of format or scope. Programmable Logic Controller 16900-12 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (continued) WW. The system shall have the capability to enter rung comments above ladder logic rungs. These comments may be entered at the same time the ladder logic is entered. ' XX. The capability shall exist for adding, removing, or modifying ladder logic rungs during program execution. When changes to ladder logic are made or new logic rungs are added, it shall, be possible to test the edits of such rungs before removal I. of the prior logic rung is executed YY. It shall be possible to manually set (force) either on or off all hardwired discrete ' input or output points from the windows workstation screen. It shall also be possible to manually set (force) an analog input or output to a user specified value. Removal of these forced 11O points shall be achieved either individually or 'totally through selected keystrokes. The programming terminal shall be able to ' display forced 11O points. ' ZZ. A means to program a fault recovery routine shall exist. When a major system fault (Controller Fault) occurs in the system, the controller fault recovery routine shall be executed and then the system shall determine if the fault has been eliminated. If the fault is eliminated, program execution resumes. If the fault still ' exists, the system will shut down. A user shall have the option to either resume operation or to shut down upon fault detection AAA. The capability shall exist for each program to have its own fault routine for ` program fault recovery. Each having the same features as the controller based fault routine. ' BBB. An instruction shall be available to give the control program diagnostic information, state control, and sequencing of a process simultaneously, while • 't allowing the capability of user-friendly state programming techniques. CCC. An instruction shall be supported to incorporate closed loop control systems. The "proportional", "integral", and "derivative" elements shall be accessible to the user ' in order' to tune a closed loop system. This instruction must fully support floating point math. DDD. The system shall support both bit and word level diagnostic instructions. Ii EEE. To facilitate conditional event detection programming, output instructions shall '} include "one shot" instructions which may be triggered on either low -to -high (rising) or high -to -low (falling) rung conditions. ' FFF. To facilitate debugging, an "always false" instruction shall exist which may be utilized to temporarily inhibit the execution of control logic. • GGG. The processor shall support Master Control Reset (Relay) type functionality to selectively disable sections of logic. HHH. The processor shall include direct support of FOR. NEXT loop constructions. 2.13 OPERATOR INTERFACE AND DIAGNOSTICS 1' Programmable Logic Controller 16900-13 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (continued) 1 A. The control system shall utilize an industrial computer and fiat panel display as a Human Machine Interface. The HMI shall communicate with the programmable controller through the Ethernet Network. This system is specified under Section 16901. ' 2.14 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. The Programmable Controller processor shall be able to withstand conducted susceptibility tests as outlined in the following: 1. IEC 60068-2-6 Vibration of Unpackaged Products ' 2. IEC 60068-2-27 Shock of Unpackaged Products 3. ASTM D999-91 Vibration of Packaged products 4. NSTA Project 1 Shock of Packaged products 5. IEC 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity 6. IEC 60068-2-1 & 60068-2-2 Temperature 7. IEC 60068-2-30 Humidity 8. IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated Electromagnetic Immunity 9. EEC 61000-4-5 Surge Transient Immunity 10. IEC 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity 11. CISPR 11 (EN55011) Radiated Emissions 12. EEC 61000-4-6 Conducted Electromagnetic Immunity 11 B. Flammability and Resistance to Electrical Ignition — Materials meet UL94V ' C. All completed units shall be subjected to a bum -in test of cycles between —20 and +85 degrees C for at least 1.75 hours and a final test of 18 minutes in a heat chamber at 70 degrees C. 2.15 SPARE PARTS AND TESTING EQUIPMENT A. The following spare parts shall be provided to the Owner on an early delivery schedule to ensure that the programming and testing can be completed prior -to system delivery: • Each I/O location whether local, remote or distributed shall include a minimum of 20% spare discrete I/O points and 20% spare analog 1/O points for future use. Spare points shall be terminated and active. Unmounted spares shall be provided for each component in the PLC ' system as follows: • Ten percent (minimum of one) of each type of module, including but not restricted to I/O modules, power supplies, CPU's and communications modules. • One of each type of cable. • One of each type of backplane. Five percent (minimum of two) of each type of terminal strip. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION Programmable Logic Controller 16900-14 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 H SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (continued) 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the instrumentation and control system. If any departures from the Drawings are considered necessary by the Contractor, details of such departure and the reason therefore shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. No departures shall be made without prior written approval of the Engineer. B. Any cutting of existing construction and repair of same shall be included as work in this Section and shall be accomplished by the proper trade. No structural supporting members shall be cut or drilled without review by the Engineer. Holes shall not be made in steel plates or members with a cutting torch. Holes through concrete and masonry shall be drilled with a core -drilling machine, which cuts a smooth round hole. Over -cut shall be caulked or grouted. 3.2 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the location of equipment and control system wiring/cabling with other equipment or material to avoid interference. Relocation of any items as a result of failure of the Contractor to coordinate his work shall be at the expense of the Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.3 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS A. The contractor shall be responsible for supplying as -built drawings for the entire functioning system in an Owner approved electronic format and also in a hardcopy format as specified by the Owner: 1. One as -built electronic format set shall be delivered to the Owner. 2. One as -built hardcopy set shall be delivered to the Owner. 3. One as -built hardcopy set shall be placed in the door pocket of the control panel. 3.4 TRAINING A. Services of a manufacturer's factory -trained process or applications engineer shall be furnished for not less than two (2), 8 -hour working days, at contractor expense, at the site to review with the plant personnel the up-to-date overall operation and maintenance of the equipment, and to discuss ways to improve the operation and overall results. This service may be called for by the Owner at his convenience anytime within 1 year from the Contract Completion Date. B. The.. Contractor shall furnish four (4) bound Instruction Manuals covering operation and maintenance of all equipment furnished.: Manuals shall be complete with wiring diagrams, drawings, cuts, parts lists, catalog pages, troubleshooting instructions and other necessary data. All parts shall be numbered or otherwise clearly identified to facilitate ordering or replacement. In addition, all license agreements and certifications shall be registered to the Owner. Programmable Logic Controller 16900-15 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16900 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (continued) 3.5 PROGRAMMING A. Applications and process logic programming will be performed by the Owner. 3.6 SUPPLEMENTS A. PLC 11O List, following "END OF SECTION 16900", is a part of this specification. END OF SECTION 16900 Programmable Logic Controller 16900-16 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ui 0 w ow C- Z I -0 t~L W ] O Z 2 J rca U u LL = W y { It O r - ,- . ,- .- r ,- .- ,- ,-r r r r r - NN N N N N N NN a UUUUUUUUcioUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUti ------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - d ED > p 0 dSa 0 O C� m :% c 3 >� �. Z� c a pZF 0 a C N O J € Q€ Z �p c Opp .. N c c Z �p c « N LL LL° VWIc� O o > J 7 N R y vu" v N 2 N U U t p > c E� o�W ° E i° ° oJu W m ayiZ� U �Q H oa c o j r U m m U C7 a O Q v v 2 5 0 m m O Q v v d H> 0 O ta t 3 t O o N 2 L t L N O V c N N t L t 3 ._ O 'O O b c0 m 3 LL O N W O 0 LL O d J O J 2 ._ S O m o S O .- S p J> J N N U LL ._ S .- S ._ S O D U> J .r (n U N LL S S S Qo00000000000000Q.0000000p00pQQ0000 a I- 0 O 0 r I- C) r W N Q O U ...—•—N N N N NN N ��=x _,S S SODUz �UiQSUS N SZ SQSQQSQ JJJJ�LLJQQ QSQ Q. NaNNS�N=�UrF>a c Q N NCD eeee 00.E a0 M�NOOOf°CN O r N'reee r r Ot0CMO r \ r \ \ \ QM \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ M Q 0 N 0O V OOOO 000UUUUUUUUU000000000p J 0. Q to N O a 0 r r c 'y0 N ewe m Q >>> - >>> N N N ft N N N N N NaflQ _000000 E E E fl 000000 E E E N m at ow 00 N« LL LL LL LL LL LL J 7 J 0 0° LL LL LL LL LL LL 7 7 Wm ��3�33O33 »»»>aaaLLLLti»»»aaa v. C C, a I I I I I I N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M m M M M OOc Oddc5c5000Uc5UUUUUUUUUddUddUd0ODUc� a -- - - - - - - - - - - - ------------- - - ----- J N ° W d d w W cc °CO 3 C fl c.O O N z O 10 0 O C NC0NOO WC ILf CO aO? 0 E Z 2 d O �' 7 O%'� EZE flub" - W -0 a Z w W E0WO O0� Z O Z u. a d Oa 0adl 5 C W L O N N V SxfAODU>jrn lAtAt0iixxx000OZitnxxcnx0000 jcoxxcnxOU �0000Op0ooQQ�00��Op00000p�0�p0�0DOp0�� F O a z ar H m 0 r r r r r r 0 2 -------------- - r r w- r r r r r !- !- f r r r r dl m Cr2 CO NMMMMMMMMMMMMY v� d v_ x»dcld z—loci—¢ N , z xdcsd in 1h<n x xx(000U) x N w } W wwww Q Q N N S N F> a N N 2 _> 2 a H a y -�1 rNOrrre Q NMI— W----fOO�O Q r Q g QM1y 1j 0�wr aI�Nr V aaa V; a f�sl Rra �jppppODUUUUUUUUUUfJO�OpO U J a � " O E d ;,xw QI SO�NNN J J coMM.0-.2 r0 C E E E m m w 0 0 w O O O GI OOO>>> > > > �2 �2 r2 V'�R Q ti d d 3 3° 0 0 0 p p p E E E 3 E E E E E E w O Ja3.Mmi0.CLaJaJaJaJ O O wwwlilili>>>>>> a 0 N C a H I! I I 0 M aT < a a V V a a I a V O L9 a UUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUU a C iiij j 'O N 'C m O O N cc O m 0 F O m cc o m = 0 0 0 0 0 0 c m c e ` c o E Z d O J O= E z uj d O o= E m Z Z Z Z Z Z ._ N ._ o E Z W 'm ._ J N .- N O E Z Z Z - Z — Z Z O o Ea (a N OZ� Ea o d a> d y ` cZ� W aD oa W d oa x- CCZZZZZZ d L L C L y N N N Lq a I I I I I I 0xZ0 m,_ m,_ O O Z m._,_ m._ o o d V OCL ZZZZZZZZZ U¢OJcnxxcnSODUOJLnxScnxODUaaQJDN000000000 ,_N m 00 00 00 0p oo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 a o 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H O Q z r F- 0 0 I. m .- cO� Q com m cq co co co rrr Q r mr r rr aornQmU P�Nc� vNc30_d Ll a r OQO U) CO 0)fA(D VJ U)f/J Q Q Q a222 2' ' �flJ}Ln>(0 �fn}(n>Lny d d LL LL LL�N� H N N - LO to LO L r r r r— e- e- —• — e Nw� ��� �Nr Lo fo aJ co u7� u7 c0 uJr� r-10 fo to M U Ito LOL Qr�O d o 0 0 0 b d o o o o U d O O o O D U d O U O 0 0 U d b O U o o o o o j j C) J a. r N M N M m d '-N '-c cc c — V V w o O D ao 1 0) L. x L. L." m m J E E E J J J m m m a �Q 0 0 0 O p � �p �p 0 0 0 O rrr N N u>srrttL E O 0 0 0 0 O O O m N aL g g E E E c m m2 2 d m m ��� 2 > >> LLI W 0 > 022 >>> y al 3000 m m m E m 0 m m m m m m m m m m r r r r r r r m N ma 000 3�EEEEEEE333EEEEEEE333y�(LCLCL> ccc Z) D7N000000LW W tL W dddddddlL LL LL ddddd m dLL EL LL dll IL LL a `0 Ol m a C a (SO M N C C) WO o t� mQww c E m E E I1 m N J 7 E 000 p a N F m N N 15 Z Z Z c ._ E mm c c 000wxcoww d 00000000 I - O Q Z m !_:::::::E::: ,- — — rC.) N r O O O OOOQ±�QQ vLhCDUccn UU ODD>F- x xx N r M M iz r Q 00000000 J a C Q N N d o tn co Q. a`mUEEUU C EEE>OO • m m m x cr x x x E coo= u o_ O. N m co N S N m —p O C C C N N +� 0 W I mL I L I i O W W O O SECTION 16901 -HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. WORK INCLUDED HEREIN A. Furnish and .install one (1) operator, interface device for providing human -machine interface (HNII) functionality as shown on the Drawings and listed in the Specifications.. Provide, all hardware, firmware, software, components, materials, tools, labor, supervision and appliances for, and to properly erect, install, connect up, adjust, test and place in continuous and satisfactory operation at the locations indicated on the Drawings and/or Specifications. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16050, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods B. Section 16080, Electrical Testing C. Section 16900, Programmable Logic Controller PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. This section covers furnishing all labor and material and performing all operator interface work as required by this Contract. All items may not have been detailed; therefore, the Contractor shall furnish, without additional cost to the Owner, all labor, material, drawings, services, and connections necessary to make the work completely functional and ready for Owner's use, within the limits of this Contract. B. Full responsibility for fabricating and installing all operator interface equipment and appurtenances, and for demonstrating compliance with specified performance requirements rests with the Contractor, and through him/her their suppliers, under this. Item. The Engineer's approval of any portion of this work will be general. C. Neither the Engineer's approval of the design, construction, nor operation of the equipment, nor the use of material included in this Specification, nor the Engineer's approval of alternative materials offered by the suppliers, will in any way relieve the Contractor and suppliers of full responsibility for meeting all performance requirements under this item and this Contact. Human -Machine Interface 16901-1 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16901 -HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE 2.2 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Installation work shall be made in a neat and workmanlike manner, in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications. Defective equipment or equipment damaged in the course of installation or test shall be replaced or repaired, at no cost to the Owner, in a manner meeting with the approval of the Engineer. B. The Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the HMI. If departure from the Drawings is considered necessary by the Contractor, details of such departure and the reason therefore shall be submitted as soon as possible to the Engineer for approval. No departures shall be made without prior written approval of the Engineer. C. Any cutting of existing construction and repair of same shall be included as work in this Section and shall be accomplished by the proper trade. No structural supporting members shall be cut or drilled without review by the Engineer. Holes shall not be made in steel plates or members with a cutting torch. D. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the location of equipment conduit and cable tray with other equipment or material to the extent that interference between such items is avoided. Relocation of any items as a result of failure of the Contractor to coordinate his work shall be at the expense of the Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner 2.3 STANDARD PRODUCTS A. Unless otherwise indicated, the materials to be furnished under this specification shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design complying with the specification. 2.4 INSTRUCTION MANUALS A. The Contractor shall furnish four (4) bound Instruction Manuals covering operation and maintenance of all equipment furnished. Manuals shall be complete with wiring diagrams, drawings, cuts, parts lists, catalog pages, programming instructions, troubleshooting instructions and all other necessary data. All parts shall be numbered or otherwise clearly identified to facilitate ordering or replacement. In addition, all license agreements and certifications shall be registered to the Owner. Applications programming shall be performed by the Owner. PART 3- SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The HMI system shall be Telemecanique Megalis Model XBT GT. The hardware and software supplied under this specification shall be the manufacturer's standard, non -customized, offering. The following specifications apply: 3.1 PROGRAMMING Human -Machine Interface 16901-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16901 -HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE A. Man -machine interface (MMI) functionality shall be accomplished through the application of programmable operator interface devices. B. Programming software shall be 100% compatible with Microsoft Windows operating system. Editing software shall be Windows -based and shall provide a common programming environment for the entire product family of touchscreen operator interfaces. MMI displays shall be capable of emulating hard -wired devices such as push buttons, selector switches, faceplate as well as symbolically represent process equipment such as pumps, tankage, valves, etc. Displays shall be capable of real-time, dynamic representation of analog and discrete process conditions. MMI monitoring and control functions shall include push buttons, pilot lights, selector switches, illuminated push buttons, numeric data display and entry, message display, bar graph display, bit/word alarm monitor, display and management, and bit -mapped graphic displays. A. Communication between the operator interfaces device shall support Modicon Premium PLC protocol. The operator interface shall communicate with the PLC over a direct serial RS -232 cable. Special third -party drivers or custom protocols are unacceptable D. The HMI system shall include the programs software and communication drivers with all necessary licenses and hardware/software keys. 3.2 HARDWARE REQUII?EMENTS A. Operator interface device shall be designed for front panel installation. B. The following components are the minimum required for the proper operation of the HMI system. ' I. Integrated system with 64 bit processor 2. 15" flat panel display 2.32 MB Random access memory 3. RS -232C Serial port 4. USB port 5. 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port C. Storage for user and operational programs shall be nonvolatile Flash EPROM. Battery backup for storage of volatile program configurations is unacceptable. D. All necessary programming, communication cables, and connectors shall be furnished by the operator interface manufacturer. I I E. SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Operating Voltage 115 VAC Power Consumption 100 VA Max Power Failure Immunity 20 ms max Human -Machine Interface 16901-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16901 -HUMAN -MACHINE INTERFACE 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 Withstand Voltage Insulation Noise Immunity Operating Temperature Storage Temperature. Operating Humidity Storage Humidity Vibration Grounding Method Cooling System DOCUMENTATION 1500 Vac (20 ma max., 1 min.) 10 MSZ @ 500 VDC 1000 V(p) 1µs pulse 0to45°C -10 to 60° C 30 to 85% RH non -condensing 5 to 85% RH non -condensing 10 to 25 Hz, 2G on each of X,Y,Z 30 min Class 3 grounding Natural air convection A. The system shall provide complete user documentation, including examples of how to operate the various modules within the system. The documentation must be in electronic format, HTML based with the ability to search for topics by keyword or search or specific text. ON-LINE HELP A. An on-line "help" facility, based upon Windows standard Hypertext, shall provide useful, context -sensitive information on the operation of the package. This help facility shall be capable of being invoked on-line through a point -and - click operation. The "help" facility must also support the ability to perform full text word search, add custom comments, bookmark topics, copy and pasting into another application, printing, and use of system fonts and colors. DISPLAY -ONLY COMMUNICATIONS A. To facilitate more efficient communications with programmable controllers, the system must be able to provide display -only communications. Communications to read or write tags (Analog Registers and Digital Registers) will only be established when a graphics display containing these tags is open. When. the display is closed, communications will cease. ERROR DETECTION AND RECOVERY B. Wherever possible, the device communications program will perform error checking on messages. These error checks will include lost response (time-out) and data error. C. Should communications errors be detected, the software shall automatically indicate that the data (on graphic displays, in historical files, etc.) is no longer valid. The invalid data should be replaced with any used defined characters or have the ability to alter the color, or font to let the operator know the data may be invalid. The system shall automatically attempt to re-establish communications, and, if successful, shall then replace the characters with valid data. These Human -Machine Interface 16901-4 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 E 1 I I I L I C I I L .1 .1 l SECTION 16901 -HUMAN -MACHINE INTERFACE capabilities shall be built-in to the software and shall not require any user programming or other actions to implement. • 1 1 4.1 The supplier shall have the capability to provide standard classroom courses or on -site training, if requested by Owner, for engineers and operators of the system that cover the configuration and use of the system. PART 5 - WARRANTY AND CUSTOMER SUPPORT 5.1 The vendor must provide the capability of delivering extended warranty support, as well as after-hours warranty support. The vendor shall specify the length of the warranty (3 month minimum is required), availability and cost of extended support, and type of customer support provided (dedicated department or handled by programming staff or distributor, telephone hours, Email & Web support, FTP download area, Knowledge. Base, bulletin board service, field service, etc.) I I I I# L L PART 6- DUALITY ASSURANCE 6.1 The vendor must have a formal and documented set of quality assurance procedures that are applied to the engineering design, development, and documentation of the software. The presence of a formal quality assurance department shall be required. 6.2 The vendor must also demonstrate that its source code for the product is regularly. archived both on -site and off -site in facilities suitable to withstand physical harm. Human -Machine Interface END OF SECTION 16901 16901-5 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 L I SECTION 16905 - UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM (UPS) PART I - GENERAL I j� 1 I1 1 I Ii II 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Technical Specifications I. Section 16050 — Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 2. Section 16080 — Electrical Testing 3. Section 16120 — Conductors and Cables 4. Section 16800 — General Requirement — Instrumentation and Controls 1.02 SUMMARY: A. This Section covers the furnishing and installation of the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) system as described and listed in the Specifications. The work includes all materials, tools, labor, supervision to properly install, connect up, adjust, test and place in continuous and satisfactory operation at the location indicated or directed. B. The UPS system shall be installed in and sized to provide backup power to the Fayetteville Lift Station control panel. The single phase power to the UPS shall be determined by load. This power should be developed as indicated in the NEC's, Separately Derived System," with a K -rated transformer. All instrumentation grounding should be separated from power grounding with the only connection point at the ground grid. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Consideration will be given only to the products of well established and reliable manufacturers who are regularly engaged in such work and thoroughly experienced in the design and manufacture of equipment of the sizes and types specified, and who have not less than three installations of comparable sizes and types that have been in successful and continuous operation, in service similar to that contemplated herein, for not less than 10 years. B. Evidence of this experience and data on the operation of those installations over a period of not less than 10 years shall be furnished to the Engineer upon request C. Data on service history and operation of submitted equipment shall be made available to the Engineer, if requested, for his/her use in determining that the equipment and specialties offered meet the intent of this Contract. D. UPS installation shall be made in a neat and workman like manner, in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications. Defective equipment or equipment damaged in the course of installation or testing shall be replaced or repaired in a manner meeting with the approval of the Engineer. The Drawings indicate the general location of the UPS. If any departures from the Drawings are considered necessary by the Contractor details for 16905-Uninterruptible Power Supply 16905-1 System (UPS) RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I SECTION 16905 - UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM (UPS) (continued) ' such departures and the reasons thereof shall be submitted as soon as possible to the Engineer for approval. No departures shall be made without prior written approval of the Engineer. E. Any cutting of existing construction and repair of same shall be included as work in this Section and shall be accomplished by the proper trade. No structural supporting members shall be cut or drilled without review by the Engineer. Holes shall not be made in steel plates or members with a cutting torch. Holes through concrete and masonry shall be drilled with a core - drilling machine, which cuts a.smooth round hole. Over -cut shall be caulked or grouted. F. The equipment shall be installed in the control panel as shown on the drawings in a manner that will allow for normal operation of surrounding equipment. The mounting of the equipment shall not interfere with the maintenance or troubleshooting of the control system. Relocation of any items, as a result of failure of the Contractor to coordinate his work, shall be at the expense of the Contractor, and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data 1. Submit manufacturer's technical data on uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system for each module and accessory. 2. Submit complete and detailed specifications and data covering all ' materials and equipment furnished. 3. Contractor shall verify size of the UPS, prior to purchase, based on the final estimated electrical load of the control panel. a. Shop Drawings 1) All shop drawings, maintenance manuals, load calculations and warranty information shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to manufacture of ' the UPS. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualification 1. Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of uninterruptible power supply systems, components and accessories, of types, capacities and characteristics required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications 1. Firms with at least 3 years of successful installation experience of uninterruptible power supply systems similar to that required for this project. C. Codes and Standards 1. Contractor shall perform all work in accordance with all authorities having jurisdiction including the following Federal, State and Local codes, ordinances, regulations, standards and practices: a. National Building Code (BOCA) b. National Electric Code (NEC) c. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 16905-Uninterruptible Power Supply 16905-2 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' System (UPS) It SECTION 16905 - UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM (UPS) (continued) d. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) ,I e. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) f. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) g. Factory Mutual Systems (FM) ' 1.06 WARRANTY: A. The UPS equipment shall be provided with a minimum 2 -year warranty, ': from acceptance date, against defects in material and workmanship. �, 'PART2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. The uninterruptible power supply system shall be a Sola, 3000VA, double 'I conversion UPS with external batteries, or Engineer approved equal. f1 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: IA. Unless otherwise indicated, the materials to be furnished under this Specification shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall be the manufacturer's ' latest standard design complying with the specification. B. The UPS system shall be furnished to provide a reliable source of uninterruptible power to the control panel with no break in AC output power ' during a complete or partial interruption of incoming line power. The UPS shall be UL listed. 2.03 OPERATION: ' A. Normal Mode ' In normal operation incoming AC power is fed to the input power factor corrected rectifier that converts the AC power to DC power for the inverter. In this mode, power is also derived from utility power for the battery charger. The inverter derives DC power from either the rectifier or the battery and regenerates filtered and regulated AC sine wave power for the connected load. The battery will be charged once the unit is connected to utility power, regardless of whether the UPS is ON or OFF. I' In the event of a utility outage or severe abnormality, the inverter will support the connected load from battery power, until the battery is discharged ' or the utility returns; whichever occurs first. B. Battery Mode Upon failure of utility AC power, the critical AC load is supplied by the ' inverter, which obtains power from the battery. There is no interruption in power to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the AC source. I. C. Recharge Mode Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a power outage, the input converter automatically restarts and assumes supplying power to the inverter 1 and the battery charger to recharge the battery. 16905-Uninterruptible Power Supply 16905-3 RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 ' System (UPS) I SECTION 16905 - UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM (UPS) (continued) D. Automatic Restart Mode Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a power outage and complete battery discharge, the UPS automatically restarts and assumes supplying power to the critical load and the battery charger automatically recharges the battery. This feature shall be capable of being disabled by the user. E. Bypass Mode The integral bypass performs an automatic transfer of the critical AC load from the inverter to the bypass source, in the event of an overload, PFC failure, over temperature, DC Bus over voltage, or inverter failure conditions. F. Monitoring and Control Package 1. The UPS monitoring system shall have front panel displays for: a. UPS fault b. Battery status c. Load level d. Battery discharge level 2. The normally closed contact of the relay card will open to indicate a summary alarm for the UPS to PLC under the following conditions: a. UPS fault b. Low battery G. Output Capacity UPS Ratings 1. The Contractor shall furnish and install the UPS system sized to provide uninterruptible power for all PLC, HMI and other control cabinet components, instrumentation and DC power supplies for thirty (30) minutes at full load. 2. Overload capability shall be 110 percent + 8 percent. 2.04 COMPONENTS OF THE SYSTEM: Item Oty, Description Part No. 1 1 3000 VA Sola, rack mounted S4K2U3000 2 1 Power Distribution/Bypass Module, 115V A2D 115A 3 2 External Battery Module, sealed lead acid, rack S4K2U96BAT mounted 4 3 Rack Slide Kit S4K1826RS 5 1 Alarm Relay Card RELAYCARD-INT 2.05 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Input Voltage 0-140 VAC B. Input Frequency 50-60 Hz C. Output Voltage 120 VAC D. Voltage Regulation + 3% of Nominal (at factory default setting) E. Efficiency > 88% on line F. Wave Shape Pure sine wave 16905-Uninterruptible Power Supply 16905-4 System (UPS) RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 SECTION 16905 - UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM (UPS) (continued) i 1 r 1 G. Output Frequency H. Electrostatic Discharge Protection I. Temperature J. Dimensions (UPS) K. Dimensions (Battery) L. Battery Type M. Output Protection N. Input Protection PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORY TESTS: 60 Hz + 5%. ENC 61000-4-5, level 4 Operating: 32°F - 104°F; Storage: 5°F - 122°F. 3.5"Hx" 17" W x 24.2D 3.5" H x" 17" W x 24.2 D Sealed, maintenance -free, lead acid Current and over -voltage protection Circuit breaker A. The manufacturer's standard tests for performance, reliability and safety shall be performed and certified prior to shipment. 3.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver uninterruptible power supply system components properly packaged in factory -fabricated containers. Enclose an operating impact sensor in each container which is holding sensitive electronic equipment, capable of recording a 5G shock. B. Store UPS system components in original containers in a clean dry space and protect from weather and construction traffic. C. Handle UPS system equipment and components carefully to avoid breakage, impacts, denting or scratching finishes. Do not install damaged equipment; return damaged units to equipment manufacturer and replace with new units. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES: A. Field testing will be done using the incoming power source specified on the drawings. Testing with a temporary power source is not acceptable. The test shall verify the minimum required output voltage is maintained for the required hold-up time, with the completed control panel as the load. B. The Engineer or a representative of the Owner will witness all system field testing. C. Before the system is turned over to the Owner the manufacturer shall provide system operations training, at Contractor expense, at the project site or a mutual agreed upon convent location for the Owner's Representative. This training shall be conducted during normal business hours of the equipment supplier at a date and time of mutual convenience. END OF SECTION 16905 16905-Uninterruptible Power Supply 16905-5 System (UPS) RJN Project No. 11-1875-00 I Hamestring Lift Station Fayetteville, Arkansas Project No. 118600 Process Control Description • General Description LI 'i '4 ii 'I I; 'I '1 Ii I 11 An electronic instrumentation system shall be installed to monitor and control the pumps, check valves and wetwell piping at the Hamestring Lift Station. A redundant PLC -based control system shall control the station's seven (7) pumps and valves automatically, based on wetwell level. Each pump produces 6.3 MGD of raw wastewater flow. The lift station control system communicates to the Westside Waste Water Treatment Plant (WWWTP) control system over a radio link. The PLCs, HMI touch screen display and radio are installed in a control panel in the station's electrical room. The HMI displays process information and alarms. The station WWWTP operator shall be able to remotely operate the pumps over the radio link. The HMI computer shall archive the alarms on a hard drive. Process Measurements The wetwell level is measured with an ultrasonic instrument (LIT -1) calibrated to sense the level over a 20 foot range. The zero point is adjusted to coincide with the bottom of the stilling well, 1 foot above the wetwell floor. The 20 foot range provides a continuous indication beyond the high -high level float switch setting of 19.0 feet. Descriptions of operating level setpoints in this document are referenced to the ultrasonic level instrument. Both forced main pressures are measured with D/P type pressure transmitters. The range is 0- 100 psig. . Local or Remote Pump Operation The control system shall be programmed to operate as the localcontrol system component of a SCADA system. The WWWTP control system shall have the capability of sending supervisory commands and remote pump speed setpoints to the station PLC. Station Local -Remote (L/R) switches shall determine whether any of the pumps is in Local mode or Remote mode. These switches shall be installed next to the fixed speed pumps and on the VFD control station display for the variable speed pumps. The station operator shall choose the mode for each pump individually. The PLC shall send the Local -Remote status for each pump to the WWWTP. The operation and speed of any pump which is locally controlled shall be set manually by the operator at the appropriate Run pushbutton (fixed speed pumps) or VFD panel (variable speed pumps). The operation and speed of any pump which is remotely controlled shall be determined by the PLC level control program or by the WWWTP supervisory control system. If WWWTP control is desired for a pump, the WWWTP system shall send a WTP Remote Control command I signal over the radio. The PLC shall turn over control of thatipump when. commanded by the WWWTP and return a confirmation signal back to WWTP. However, if the PLC detects loss of radio signal from the WWWTP control system, the PLC shall automatically assume control of all the pumps. Default control of the pumps shall be the PLC. Manual or Automatic Pump Operation The HMI display in the PLC control panel shall have Manual — Auto (M/A) switches to allow the station operator to choose the type of PLC control for each pump. The settings shall be sent to the WWTP for each pump. These switches shall be active only when WWWTP Remote Control is not enabled and the pump L/R switch is in Remote mode. When the pump L/R switch is in Local mode the M/A switches shall have no effect. When in Remote Manual mode, the operation and speed setpoint of the pump shall be controlled by the operator at the HMI display. When in Remote Auto mode the PLC level control program shall control the operation and speed setpoint of the pumps. Operation of the M/A and L/R switches is indicated in Table 1 for the case where the PLC is in control. Table 1 Operator Switch Control Options for Pumps 1,2 and 3 M -A L/R Motor Start VFD Speed Setpoint Manual Local VFD VFD Auto Local VFD VFD Manual Remote HMI HMI Auto Remote PLC PLC Operator Switch Control Options for Pumps 4,5,6 and 7 M -A L/R Motor Start Manual Local Run button Auto Local Run button Manual Remote HMI Auto Remote PLC Operation of the M/A and L/R switches is indicated in Table 2 for the case where the WWWTP is in control. Table 2 Operator Switch Control Options for Pumps 1,2 and 3 M -A L/R Motor Start VFD Speed Setpoint Manual Local VFD VFD Auto Local VFD VFD Manual Remote WWWTP WWWTP Auto Remote WWWTP WWWTP 2 'i Operator.Switch Control Options for Pumps 4,5,6 and 7 ' M -A L/R Motor Start Manual, Local Run button { Auto Local Run button ' Manual WWWTP WWWTP Auto WWWTP WWWTP To ensure safe operation of the pumps the low level float switch LSL-1 shall over -ride other PLC ' program controls and WWWTP commands, andstop all pumps. To protect the station from flooding the high level float and high -high level float switches (LSH- 1: and LSHH-I, respectively) shall over -ride other PLC program controls and WWWTP ' commands, and shall sequentially start pumps at pre-set wet well levels. i .. Wet Well Level Control Using the Variable Speed Pumps 'Variable speed pumps P1, P2 and P3 are sufficient to handle dry -weather conditions. The pumps have VFD control of their speeds from a minimum setting (by the pump manufacturer) to 1200 rpm maximum. The VFD control systems shall be configured so that the speed can be adjusted ' from the PLC, via the HMI, utilizing a standard 4 — 20 mA signal. The VFD speed feedback shall be returned to the PLC with a 4 — 20 mA signal and displayed on the HMI. ' Manual -Automatic operation is set from the HMI display. In Manual mode pump speed can be adjusted from the HMI. In Automatic mode the PLC adjusts the speeds to match a setpoint derived either from the internal PLC program or from a WWWTP remote setpoint. 1 In Automatic mode the PLC shall maintain equal speeds for these pumps to ensure equal discharge head pressures. The program maintains runtime totals for the pumps. The PLC 'program shall use a lead -lag scheme to choose pump start sequencing. If the level is above 7.5 feet, all three pumps. shall run at 1200 rpm: Pumps P1, P2 and P3 are brought on line based on wetwell level as shown in Table 3. ' iii Table 3 — Variable Speed Pump Starts at Wetwell Level (in Feet) Pump Start level (Elev.) RPM Full Full speed level (Elev.) (Elev.) RPM 1st 4.5 feet (1125.5) mm 5.99 feet (1126.99) 1200 4 2"d 6.0 feet (1127.0) min 7.49 feet (1128.49) 1200 3'd 7.5 feet (1129) min 8.99 feet (1129.99) 1200 ' When a.WTP Remote Control command is received, the PLC shall bring on the pump selected from the WWWTP and the PLC shall maintain the speed of each VFD at the setpoint sent from 1 the WWWTP. I 14 Li Wet Well Level Control Using Constant Speed Pumps Local -Remote operation is set from a local selector switch and Run pushbutton station at the PUMP. In Remote mode the constant speed pumps, P4, P5, P6 and P7 shall start as required to maintain level in wet -weather conditions. The pumps operate at 1200 rpm. The PLC program maintains runtime totals for the pumps and uses a lead -lag scheme to choose pump start sequencing. When the wetwell level reaches 9.0 feet the program brings on the constant speed pump that has the least runtime. If the level is above 13.5 feet, all seven pumps shall run at 1200 rpms. Constant speed pumps stop when the level drops 1.0 foot below the start setpoint. Pumps P4, P5, P6 and P7 are brought on line based on wetwell level as shown in Table 4. Table 4 — Constant Speed Pump Starts at Wetwell Level (in Feet) Pump Start level (Elev.) RPM Stop Level (Elev.) RPM 4`h 9.0 feet (1130.0) 1200 8.0 feet (1129.0) 1200 5`h 10.5 feet (1131.5) 1200 9.5 feet (1130.5) 1200 6`h 12.0 feet (1133.0) 1200 11.0 feet (1132.0) 1200 7th 13.5 feet (1134.5) 1200 12.5 feet (1133.5) 1200 When a WTP Remote Control command is received, the constant speed pumps shall start as commanded from the WWWTP. Process Alarms All alarms are sent to the PLC and shall be transmitted to the WWWTP using the radio system. All alarms shall be displayed and logged on the HMI and archived on the HMI computer. The station operator shall be able to acknowledge the alarms using the HMI touch screen. • Three float switches shall provide wet well level alarms. At low level all pumps shall be interlocked off by the PLC, whether in Local or Remote mode. At high -high level all pumps shall be turned on by the PLC, whether in Local or Remote mode. LSLL-1 = Low -Low Wet Well Level = 3.0 feet (Elev. 1124.0) LSH-1 = High Wet Well Level = 7.5 feet (Elev. 1129.5) LSHH-1 = High -High Wet Well Level = 12.0 feet (Elev. 1133.0) • A low water pressure switch shall provide an alarm on city water required to operate the hydraulically actuated pump check valves. • The PLC shall provide an alarm on processor failure and automatic switchover to the backup processor. • The control system uninterruptible power supply (UPS) shall provide an alarm to the PLC on low battery or loss of incoming power. r I 1 1 1 1 1 1 • A pressure switch on the discharge of each pump shall confirm pump operation and enable the opening of the check valve. • Temperature and vibration switches shall monitor the pump mechanical condition and generate alarms to the PLC. In Local Automatic mode the PLC shall shutdown a pump which has high temperature or vibration and start another pump as required to maintain setpoint level. • A float switch (LSHH-2) mounted near the floor of the drywell shall monitor flooding and alarm. Pump and Check Valve Operation The pump check valves are hydraulically actuated from city water pressure. There is one (1) check valve on each pump discharge line. The valves are designed to prevent backflow of sewage from the forced main and into the wetwell when the pump is not up to speed. To start a pump the PLC shall send a start signal to the MCC or VFD and an open permissive signal to the valve actuator. The pump start signal shall start the pump against the closed valve. After starting, when the line pressure reaches the high pressure setting recommended by the valve manufacturer, the valve shall open. To stop a pump the PLC shall remove the valve open permissive signal and the valve shall begin, to close. When the valve is 90% closed a manufacturer -supplied limit switch on the valve shall turn off the pump. The motor starter or VFD and the valve are interconnected by a hard -wired interlock circuit provided by the valve manufacturer. Loss of AC power to a valve actuator shall cause the valve to close in a rapid manner. When the valve is 90% closed the pump is shut down by the hard -wired interlock circuit. HVAC System The drywell air shall be refreshed and dehumidified with three (3) exhaust fans and dehumidifiers. The PLC shall run two of the three continuously. Runtimes shall be calculated and displayed on the HMI. A system H -O -A switch shall be implemented on the HMI display to enable PLC control of the fan/dehumidifier units. In automatic mode the PLC shall cycle the units so that the two with the lowest running time are operating, and the third is off. This sequence shall be maintained to equalize runtimes of the three units. A system Local/Remote switch shall be implemented on the HMI display to enable WWWTP control of the exhaust fan/dehumidifier units, when in Remote mode. The status of all HVAC system components shall be transmitted to the PLC for station HMI display and WWWTP alarms: 5 I Wetwell HVAC • Run status and airflow of the wetwell exhaust fan and carbon absorber shall be monitored. • Ambient air monitors shall provide alarms on high concentrations of hydrogen sulphide or combustible gases in the wetwell duct and hydrogen sulphide gas in the exhaust stack. Drywell HVAC • Run status of exhaust fans and dehumidifiers in the dry well shall be monitored. • Dehumidifier run times shall be calculated and displayed on the HMI. • Inlet and outlet dampers status shall be monitored. Electric Room HVAC I • Run status of the electric room air handling unit and heater shall be monitored. • Electric room duct heat detector and duct smoke detector shall be monitored and alarmed. I C I 1 .1 1 1 1 6 CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE I6/25/2007 DATEh PRODUCER (20s)B7e-1e4s Hines, Ridolphi 8 Associates, Inc. THISCERTR�CATEISISSUEDASAMATTER OFNIFORMAT'ION Suz I Phi I pot ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE PO Box 531310 HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR Birafnghaa, AL 35253 ALTER THECOVERAGEAFFORDEDBYTHEPOLICIESBELOW. INSURED INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE Brasfield & 6orrie, LLC NAICe P.O. Box 10383 INSURER A:Travelers Property Casualty Co. BirdINSURER a: Birmingham AL 95201-0389 THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFlCATE MAYBE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. R TvwcK.e,,....Y _ __.. 78526663 ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS ANY AUTO EKCESMMBIRELLA UABIG y OCCUR Lii CLAIMS MADE DEDUCTIBLE RERENTON $ WORKERS CONPENSATON AND EMPLOYERS, LIAel If ye dnct. wide SPECUL PROVISIONS bwbw OTHER ESCRWfl jOF OPEMT)cNIS / LOCATONS I VEPICL Project: Haaeatring Lift Station CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS WASTE AND WASTEWATER DEPT 113 WEST MOUNTAIN STREET FAYETTEVILLE AR 72701 07/01/2007 I 07/01/2008 q SINGLE UMIT E 1 BODILY (Pore aY nonon i BODILY INJURY (Pr .eddn $ _.. OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY; SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POUCIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 3O DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CEITRICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL SIPOSE No OeuaA oc OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE MURK ITS AGENTS OR L City of Fayetteville Staff Review Form. City Council Agenda Items or Contracts N/A: Mayor's Approval City Council Meeting Date David Jurgens Wastewater System Improv Proj Submitted By Division Action Required: Approval of Change Order # 5 reducing the construction contract with Brasfie $26,160.28, for construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL-6. $ 26,160.28 Cost of this request 4520.9520.5801.00 Account Number 02133.0362 Project Number Budgeted Item City $ 7,031,154 Category / Project Budget $ 6,935,960 Funds Used to Date $ 95,194 Remaining Balance Budget Adjustment Attached zot1qOg Date Szaq�' Date `f �� 4 . Pa. • 2O - 08 Finance and Internal Service Director Date wjnan Water/Wastewater Department amount Wastewater System Imp Project Program Category / Project Name Water and Wastewater Program / Project Category Name Water/Sewer Fund Name Previous Ordinance or Resolution # 126-06 2-( 18 -Jul -06 Original Contract Date: 4 -Mar -08 Original Contract Number: 1045 Received in City Clerk's Office Received in Mayor's Office EHT m Sa �' T�ye ..vile KANSAS CONTRACT REVIEW MEMO Mayor's Approval To: Mayor Dan Coody From: David Jurgens, Water and Wastewater Director Fayetteville Sewer Committee Date: May 16, 2008 Subject: Approval of Change Order # 5 reducing the construction contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of $26,160.28, for construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL-6. RECOMMENDATION Staff recommends approval of Change Order # 5 reducing the construction contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of $26,160.28, for construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL-6. BACKGROUND The Hamestring Lift Station (WL-6) pumps over 85% of the wastewater to the new West Side Wastewater Treatment Plant, with a capacity of 36 million gallon per day through seven 350 horsepower pumps. The lift station pumps water through the 24" and 30" sewer force mains and is the single critical pivot point to the City's wastewater system on the west side of town. The lift station is where 5l Street crosses Hamestring Creek. Previous change orders included the addition of a channel grinder on the front end of this lift station. This project is substantially complete, with the exception of the channel grinder, which should be in service by 23 May 2008. This change order reconciles final work to be performed on the site, including all work related to both the lift station and the channel grinder. It includes reduction modifications to the paving, coating on the top of the lift station, and modifications to the valve actuator as well as additions of epoxy coating of the interior of the channel monster structure, an overflow weir in the piping configuration, and control programming. This Change Order has been reviewed by RJN Group, the Engineer; they recommend approval. BUDGET IMPACT The $26,160.28 contract reduction and $95,194 unused contingency shall be returned to the WSIP project budget. WL-6 Change Order#5 CCMemoMay08 Change Order No. 5 Page 1 of I CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER Contract Schedule Section Date 5/152008 RLF Project No.: CS -050808-03 Owner Project No.: WL-6 Project Name: Hamestring Lift Station - Location: Fayetteville, Arkansas Owner: City of Fayetteville Contractor: Brasfield & Gorrie Address: 113 West Mountain Address: 3021 7th Avenue South Fayetteville, AR 72701 Birmingham, AL 35233 THE FOLLOWING CHANGES ARE HEREBY AMENDED INTO THE CONTRACT PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: ITEM f! DESCRIPTION DECREASE INCREASE Furnish the necessary labor, materials, equipment, tools and supervision to: I PLC Programming and software change - $1,028.31 2 Epoxy coating of new channel monster interior snueant $16,009.98 3 Install overflow weir in manhole $1,430.56 4 Paving revision credit $29,838.18 5 Changed 30" nctunlor to above ground $2,357.77 6 - Omit traffic coaling on Lift Station roof $12,433.18 TOTAL DECREASE AMOUNT $44,629.13 $18,468.85 TOTAL INCREASE AMOUNT NET CHANGE ORDER -$26,160.28 ENGINEERS FINAL CHANGE TO CONTRACT AMOUNT: TOTAL AMOUNT $6.130.000.00 ELIGIBLE AMOUNT Original Contract Amount Total Previous Change Orders) $805.960.00 Net Amount This Change Order -$26,160.28 -$26.160.28 TOTAL CONTRACT AMOUNT TO DATE $6.909.799.72 CHANGE TO CONTRACT COMPLETION DATE: Original Completion Date Wednesday, December 19, 2007 Previous Adjusted Completion Date Monday, June 16, 2008 (Tncrease)(Decrease) This Change Order 0 Calendar Days NEW CONTRACT COMPLETION DATE: Monday, June 16, 2008 RECOMMENDED: 4GROUP Engine BY: Project Manager 5/15/2008 Signature Title Date ACCEPTED: Brasfield & Genie, LLC Cony ctor BY: ao Vice President and Div. Manager 5/152008 Sign tore Title Date APPROVED: t City of Faye eville O E3Y: L Signature T'il Date CD I (5.22.08) Clarice Pearman - Brasfield & Gorrie Page 1 From: Clarice Pearman To: Jurgens, David Date: 5.22.08 5:16 PM Subject: Brasfield & Gorrie Attachments: 05.16.08 Brasfield & Gorrie CO4.pdf; 05.22.08 Brasfield & Gorrie CO5.pdf CC: Audit David: Attached are copies of the Change Order No. 4 and 5 for Brasfield & Gorrie. This will confirm that Lori picked up five of the six signed original Change Order No. 4. Also, this will confirm that you receive of one of two signed originals of Change Order No. 5. Please let me know if there is anything else needed for these items. Have a good evening. Thanks. Clarice David Jurgens Submitted By Order City of Fayetteville Staff Review Form City Council Agenda Items or Contracts N/A- Mayor's Approval City Council Meeting Date Wastewater System Improv Proj Division Action F the construction Water/Wastewater Department $8,896.90, for the construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WSIP Subproject WL-6. $ 8,896.90 $ 7,031,154 Wastewater System Imp Project Cost of this request Category / Project Budget Program Category / Project Name 4520.9520.5801.00 Account Number 02133.0362 Project Number Budgeted Item $ 6,909,800 Funds Used to Date $ 121,354 Remaining Balance Budget Adjustment Attached Water and Wastewater Program / Project Category Name Water/Sewer Fund Name Previous Ordinance or Resolution # 126-06 2-08 ____,_ a_ 18 -Jul -06 Date Original Contract Date: 4 -Mar -08 Original Contract Number: 1045 City Attorney Date Received in City Clerk's O e `____� aL {� - 6 1R` its.-Og Finance and Internal Service Director Date Received in Mayor's Office BIT Mayor Date yea�e..y,Y��.le CONTRACT REVIEW MEMO To: Mayor Dan Coody From: David Jurgens, Water and Wastewater Director Fayetteville Sewer Committee Date: June 14 2008 Mayor's Approval Subject: Approval of Change Order #1 increasing the construction contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of $8,896.90, for the construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WSIP Subproject WL-6. RECOMMENDATION Gad Staff recommends approval of Change Order #$ increasing the construction contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of $8,896.90, for the construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, Subproject WL-6. The Hamestring Lift Station (W L-6) pumps over 85% of the wastewater to the new West Side Wastewater Treatment Plant, with a capacity of 36 million gallon per day through seven 350 horsepower pumps. The lift station pumps water through the 24" and 30" sewer force mains and is the single critical pivot point to the City's wastewater system on the west side of town. The lift station is where 51st Street crosses Hamestring Creek. Previous change orders included the addition of a channel grinder on the front end of this lift station. This project is substantially complete, with the channel grinder in service as of 23 May 2008. The lift station began pumping water to the new West Side WWTP on 29 May 2008. This is the final change order for this project, including all work related to both the lift station and the channel grinder. It includes the replacement of a 30 amp breaker and # 10 wire with a 40 amp breaker and # 8 wire on the channel monster, and the installation of additional valve controls. These changes were identified and very strongly recommended by JWC, the channel monster manufacturer, after the original plans were completed. If we did not make these changes, JWC would not honor the channel monster warranty. This Change Order has been reviewed by RJN Group, the Engineer; they recommend approval. BUDGET IMPACT $121,354.28 remains within the approved contingency after all previous change orders. This change order would reduce that contingency to $112,457.38. Upon project close out, which should happen in a few weeks, the contingency shall be returned to the WSIP project budget. WL-6 Change Order46 CCMemoJune08 rjngroiip Excellence through Ownership June 10, 2008 Lynn Hyke WSIP Construction Manager City Hall 113 West Mountain Street Fayetteville, Arkansas, 72701 Re: Change Order #6 Dear Mr. Hyke: Please find attached Change Order #6 for: www.rjn.com 1. Changed out 30 amp breaker and #10 wire to the channel monster to 40 amp and # 8 wire per manufacturer's specification. 2. Additional valve controls & MCC'module re -feed to allow manual actuation of the hydraulic check valves. Total change order: credit of $8,896.90. See attached. The completion date of June 16, 2008 as revised in Change order #5 has not changed. If you have any questions, please contact me at (314) 558-9764 x325. Sind Kevin White, P.E. Project Manager RJN Group, Inc. 4 CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER Date Project No.: CS -050808-03 Owner Project No.: ,et Name: Hamestring Lift Station Location: er: City of Fayetteville Contractor: ess: 113 West Mountain Address: Fayetteville, AR 72701 TITHE FOLLOWING CHANGES ARE HEREBY AMENDED INTO THE CONTRACT PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: II Furnish the necessary labor, materials, equipment, tools and supervision to: 1 40 amp Service for Channel Monster $3,053.92 2 Additional Valve Controls & MCC Module Re -Feed $5,842.98 TOTAL 4NGE TO CONTRACT AMOUNT: TOTAL AMOUNT ELIGIBLE AMOUNT ;inal Contract Amount $6,130,000.00 d Previous Change Order(s) $779799.72 Amount This Change Order $8,896.90 8$ 896_90 [AL CONTRACT AMOUNT TO DATE 1 $6,918.696.62 Completion Date Wednesday, December 19, 2007 Adjusted Completion Date Monday, June 16, 2008 :)(Decrease) This Change Order 0 Calendar )NTRACT COMPLETION DATE: Monday, June 16.2008 iCGROUP Engi r Project Manager Signature Title Brasfield & GorriKLLC AJ Vice President & Div. Manager 6/9/200E Title Date (6.17.08 Clarice Pearman - Brasfield & Gorrie Page 1 From: Clarice Pearman To: Jurgens, David Date: 6.17.08 12:45 PM Subject: Brasfield & Gorrie Attachments: 06.16.08 Brasfield & Gorrie LLC CO6.pdf CC: Audit David: Attached Is a copy of Change Order 6 for Brasfield & Gorrie. I will forward to you one of two original change orders via interoffice mail. Please let me know if there is anything else needed for this item. Have a good day. Thanks. Clarice 1 11111 (iX 1/761PA&A� l Le I A L5n I r/I/nA1 17 %_li(a ACORDp CERTIFICATE OF LI ILI Y INSURANCE DATE(MINDD"YYY) 7/24/2007 PRODUCER (205)879-1945 Hines, RidoIphi & Associates, Inc. THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE 1I Suzi Phi I pot PO Box 531310 HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Birmingham, AL 35253 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIL # INSURED Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC INsuRER a Travelers Property Casualty Co. INSURERB:Charter Oak Fire P.O. Box 10383 Birmingham, AL 35201-0383 INSURER c: Great American Insurance Company INSURER D: A51 INSURER E: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. S L $DATE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE MM/DD/YY POLICY EXPIRATION DATE WDD/YV LIMBS GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 X Dni1AGE To RENTED PREMISES Ea occurence $ 50,000 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR CO 7852B663 -- 07/01/2007 - 07/01/2008 - MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 A PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPUES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 POLICY X PRa LOC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO CAP 54498876 07/01/2007 07/01/2008 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ee opptlent) $ 1,000,000 X BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ A ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS X HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per acmdenl) $ X PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EAACC $ $ AUTO ONLY: AGG EXCESSNMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000 X IOCCUR CLAIMSMADE G22053231001 07/01/2007 07/01/2008 AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000 $ D $ DEDUCTIBLE RETENTION $ $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND v WC STATU- TORY T 0TH - EL EACH ACCIDENT -_ -S- __ 1,000,000 B' EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY • ANY PROPRIETOR PARTNEREXECUTIVE OFFICEIVMEMBER EXCLUDED? No UM=70058775 - -r--- -- 07/01/2001 • 07/01/2008 E.L. DISEASE- EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If vos, describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POUCY LIMIT $ 1 000 000 OTHER PROJECT LIMIT $6,130,000 C BUILDER'S RISK COMPLETED VALUE FORM ALL RISK IMP 704-23-53 08/01/2007 08/01/2008 NO FLOOD COVERAGE EARTHQUAKE 6 .130.000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS Owner, Engineer & Engineer's Consultants, respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents & other consultants & subcontractors of each are Add'I Insureds on General Liability, Excess Liability & Builder's Risk for the Hamestring Lift Station, Fayetteville, AR. General Liab poi Icy is primary. Rights of Subrogation are waived against the Additional Insureds. Blanket Add'I Insured End applies. Builder's Risk includes Boiler & Machinery, no flood coverage- Job#061602 CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE WASTE & WASTEWATER DEPT 113 WEST MOUNTAIN STREET FAYETTEVILLE AR 72101 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILLV RV MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, �UR7�LL SIP DSEVS99BuoAvptsons 91NYliOFYIAzAngnnqn1vwMba t' orffs OR (2001/08) 4 IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED (CONTRACTORS) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART WHO IS AN INSURED - (Section II) is amended to include any person or organization that you agree in a "written contract requiring insurance" to include as, or that has received a "certificate of insurance" describing such person or organization as, an additional insured on this Coverage Part, but: a) Only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal injury"; and b) If, and only to the extent that, the injury or damage is caused by acts or omissions of you or your subcontractor in the performance of uyour work" to which the "written contract requiring insurance" or the "certificate of insurance" applies. The person or organization does not qualify as an additional insured with respect to the independent acts or omissions of such person or organization. 2. The insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is limited as follows: a) The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal injury" arising out of the rendering of, or failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering or surveying services, including: i. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders or change orders, or the preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, drawings and specifications; and ii. Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. b) The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" caused by "your work" and included in the "products -completed operations hazard" unless you agree in a "written contract requiring insurance" to include such person or organization as an additional insured on this Coverage Part and such contract or agreement specifically requires you to provide such coverage for that additional insured, and then the insurance provided to the additional insured applies only to such "bodily injury" or "property damage" that occurs before the end of the period of - -- -- --time for which the "written contract -requiring insurance" requires you to provide such - - coverage or the end of the policy period, whichever is earlier. 3. The insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is excess over any valid and collectible "other insurance", whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, that is available to the additional insured for a loss we cover under this endorsement. However, if you agree in a "written contract requiring insurance to include such person or organization as an additional insured on this Coverage Part and such contract or agreement specifically requires that this insurance apply on a primary basis or a primary and non-contributory basis, this insurance is primary to "other insurance" available to the additional insured which covers that person or organization as a named insured for such loss, and we will not share with that "other insurance". But the insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement still is excess over any valid and collectible "other insurance", whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, that is available to the additional insured when that person or organization is an additional insured under such "other insurance". 4. As a condition of coverage provided to the additional insured by this endorsement: CG T8 xx 07 06 O 2006, The St Paul Travelers Companies, Inc. Page 1 of 2 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY a) The additional insured must give us written notice as soon as practicable of an "occurrence" or an offense which may result in a claim. To the extent possible, such notice should include: How, when and where the "occurrence" or offense took place; ii. The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses; and iii. The nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the "occurrence" or offense. b) If a claim is made or "suit" is brought against the additional insured, the additional insured must: Immediately record the specifics of the claim or "suit" and the date received; and ii. Notify us as soon as practicable. The additional insured must see to it thatwe receive written notice of the claim or "suit" as soon as practicable. c) The additional insured must immediately send us copies of all legal papers received in connection with the claim or "suit", cooperate with us in the investigation or settlement of the claim or defense against the "suit", and otherwise comply with all policy conditions. d) The additional insured must tender the defense and indemnity of any claim or "suit" to any provider of "other insurance" which would cover the additional insured for a loss we cover under this endorsement. However, this condition does not affect whether the insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is primary to "other insurance" available to the additional insured which covers that person or organization as a named insured as described in paragraph 3. above. 5. The following definitions are added to SECTION V. - DEFINITIONS: "Certificate of insurance" means a certificate evidencing insurance that is signed by us, or any of our authorized representatives, and describes a person or organization as an additional insured on this Coverage Part, provided the "bodily injury" and "property damage" occurs and the personal injury" is caused by an offense committed: a. After the person or organization described in the certificate as an additional insured has e received that certificate; b. While that certificate is in effect; and T c: _Before the end of the pblicy pero.'" - - - - "Written contract requiring insurance" means that part of any written contract or agreement under which you are required to include a person or organization as an additional insured on this Coverage Part, provided that the "bodily injury" and "property damage" occurs and the "personal injury" is caused by an offense committed: a. After the signing and execution of the contract or agreement by you; b. While that part of the contractor agreement is in effect; and c. Before the end of the policy period. CG T8 xx 07 06 © 2006, The St Paul Travelers Companies, Inc. Page 2 of 2 Hines, Ridolphi & Associates, Inc. P.O. Box 531310 Birmingham, Alabama 35253 Phone: (205) 879-1945 Fax: (205) 879-1946 Memorandum RECEIVED JUL 3O2007 N5 CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE MAYOR'S OFFICE I-Il lus., l? irkol ph; Ass9G414s' To: City of Fayetteville Waste & Wastewater Department From: Suzi Philpot Date: 7/24/07 Re: Brasfield & Gorrie — Hamstring Lift Station, Fayetteville, AR. To Whom It May Concern: Attached is revised Certificate of Insurance for the policy year 7/1/06-07. Certificate had to be had to be revised because the previous Certificate of Insurance showed Flood Coverage, but there is none. Renewal Certificate for the year 07-08 is enclosed also. Sincerely, ,Suzi Philpot 1 ACS!RDR CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE D TE(MW / YY) PRODUCER (205)879-1945 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Hines, Ridolphi & Associates, Inc. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE Suz i Ph i l pot PO Box 531310 HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Birmingham, AL 35253 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC INSURER A -Travelers Property Casualty Co. P.O. Box 10383 INSURERB:Charter Oak Fire INSURERc:Great American Insurance Company Birmingham, AL 35201-0383 INSURER D:Westchester Fire Insurance Company INSURER E: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR DDL NSRC TYPE OF NSU ANC POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE MWDD/Y POLICY EXPIRATION DATE (MWDD!YYI LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 X DAMAGE To RENTED PREMISES Eaoccurence $ 50,000 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CO 7852B663 07/01/2006 07/01/2007 CLAIMS MADE OCCUR MEDEXP(My oneperson) $ 5,000 A PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 PODGY X PRO LOC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ 1,000,000 X ANVAUTO CAP 5449B876 01/01/2006 07/01/2007 (Eaaxident) BODILY INJURY $ ALL OWNED AUTOS A SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) X BODILY INJURY $ HIRED AUTOS X NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per GARAGE LIABILITY ® AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHERTHAN EAACC $ ANVAUTO $ AUTO ONLY: AGG EXCESSNMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,0GG 00G X OCCUR CLAIMS MADE G22053231001 77/01/2006 07/01/2007 AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000 $ D $ DEDUCTIBLE $ RETENTION $ WORKERSCOMPENSATIONAND X WC STATU- TOPYUMITS OTH- EL. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1 ,000,000 EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY UM 70058775 07/01/2006 07/01/2007 -B ANY PROPRIETORRTNEWEYECUTIVE OFFICERrMEMBER EXCLUDED? No E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE $ 1,000 000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1 •000 000 If yes, describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below OTHER PROJECT LIMIT $6,130,000 BUILDER'S VISK C COMPLETED VALUE FORM IMP 704-23-53 08/01/2006 08/01/2007 NO FLOOD COVERAGE ALL RISK EARTHQUAKE $6,130,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS / VEHICLES / EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS Owner, Engineer & Engineer's Consultants, respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents & other consultants & subcontractors of each are Add'I Insureds on General Liability, Excess Liability & Builder's Risk for the Hamestring Lift Station, Fayetteville, AR. General Liab poi Icy is primary. Rights of Subrogation are waived against the Additional Insureds. Blanket Add'I Insured End applies. Builder's Risk includes Boiler & Machinery, no flood coverage- Job#061602 CANCELLATION CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE WASTE & WASTEWATER DEPT 113 WEST MOUNTAIN STREET FAYETTEVILLE AR 72701 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILLMAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, J7J63i3J�33LL BOB 25 (2001/08) ® ACORD CORPORATION 1988 IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. r COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED (CONTRACTORS) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART 1. WHO IS AN INSURED - (Section II) is amended to include any person or organization that you agree in a 'written contract requiring insuranceto include as an additional insured on this Coverage Part but a) Only with respect to liability for bodily injury,' property damage' or 'personal injury; and b) If, and only to the extent that, the injury or damage Is caused by acts or omissions of you or your subcontractor in the performance of "your work" to which the 'written contract requiring insurance' applies. The person or organization does not qualify as'an additional- insured with respect to the - independent acts or omissions of such person or organization. 2. The insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is limited as follows: a) The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to "bodily injury, "property damage" or 'personal injury arising out of the rendering of, or failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering or surveying services, including: I. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders or change orders, or the preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, drawings and specifications; and it. Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. b) The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to 'bodily injury or "property damage' caused by your work" and included in the "products -completed operations hazard" unless the 'written contract requiring insurance specifically requires you to provide such coverage for that additional Insured, and. then the insurance provided to the additional insured applies only to such 'bodily injury or'propedy damage' that occurs before the end of the period of time for which the 'written contract requiring insurance" requires you to provide such coverage or the end of the policy period, whichever is earlier. 3. The insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is excess over any valid and collectible 'other Insurance', whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, that is available to the additional insured for a loss we cover under this endorsement. However, if the 'written contract requiring insurance specifically requires that this Insurance apply on a primary basis or a primary and non-contributory basis, this insurance is primary to 'other insurance available to the additional Insured which covers that person or organization as a named insured for such loss, and we will not share with that "other Insurance". But the Insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement still is excess over any valid and collectible 'other insurance", whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, that is available to the additional Insured when that person or organization is an additional insured under such other insurance'. 4. As a condition of coverage provided to the additional insured by this endorsement: a) The additional insured must give us written notice as soon as practicable of an 'occurrence or an offense which may result In a claim. To the extent possible, such notice should include: I. How, when and where the 'occurrence" or offense took place; It. The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses; and III. The nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the 'occurrence or offense. b) If a claim Is made or 'suit' is brought against the additional insured, the additional insured must: I. Immediately record the specifics of the claim or 'suit" and the date received; and Ii. Notify us as soon as practicable. The additional insured must see to it that we receive written notice of the claim or 'suit" as soon as practicable. CG D2 46 08 05 Copyright, The Travelers Indemnity Company, 2002 Page I of 2 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY c) The additional insured must immediately send us copies of all legal papers received in connection with the claim or'suit, cooperate with us in the investigation or settlement of the claim or defense against the suit", and otherwise comply with all policy conditions. d) The additional insured must tender the defense and indemnity of any claim or'suit' to any provider of bother insurance' which would cover the additional insured for a loss we cover under this endorsement However, this condition does not affect whether the insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is primary to bother insurance available to the additional insured which covers that person or organization as a named insured as described in paragraph 3. above. 5. The following definition is added to SECTION V. — DEFINITIONS: 'Written contract requiring insurance' means that part of any written contract or agreement under which you are required to include a person or organization as an additional insured on this Coverage Part, provided that the 'bodily injury and 'property damage occurs and the 'personal injury" is caused by an offense committed: a. After the signing and execution of the contract or agreement by you; b. While that part of the contract or agreement is in effect; and c. Before the end of the policy period. w CG D2 46 08 05 Copyright, The Travelers Indemnity Company, 2002 Page 2 of 2 L ACQ 1D: CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DAM (MMR)DIYYYY)7/24/2007 PRODUCER (205)879-1945 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Hines, Ridolphi & Associates, Inc. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE Suz i Phi I pot HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR PO Box 531310 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Birmingham, AL 35253 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIL # INSURED Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC INSURERA:Travelers Property Casualty Co. P.O. Box 10383 INSURERB:Charter Oak Fire Birmingham, AL 35201-0383 INSURERc:Great American Insurance Company INSURER D: INSURER E: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSI3D POLICY NUMBER POUCY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS LIP $ $ NC DATE DATE MWND/YY GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CO 78528663 07/01/2007 07/01/2008 PREMISES Eaoccurence $ 50,000 CLAIMS MADE I X I OCCUR - MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 A PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS- COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 POLICY X 5 LOG AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE OMIT X ANY AUTO CAP 54498876 07/01/2007 07/01/2008 (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY A SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ X NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per accident) OAR AGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY -EA ACCIDENT $ ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $ AUTO ONLY: AGG $ EXCESSNMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000 000 X OCCUR CLAIMS MADE G22053231001 07/01/2007 07/01/2008 AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000 D $ DEDUCTIBLE $ RETENTION $ $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND X WC STAN- og, EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY UM 70058775 07/01/2007 07/01/2008 E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000 000 B ANY PHOPRIETORIPAP.TNEWEXEC'JTIVE OFFICEWMEMBER EXCLUDED? NO E.L. DISEASE- EA EMPLOYEE $ 1 ,000,000 If yes, describe under E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1 000 000 SPECIAL PROVISIONS below OTHER PROJECT LIMIT $6,130,000 C BUILDER'S RISK COMPLETED VALUE FORM IMP 704-23-53 08/01/2007 08/01/2008 NO FLOOD COVERAGE ALL RISK EARTHQUAKE $6,130.000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS I VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS Owner, Engineer & Engineer's Consultants, respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents & other consultants & subcontractors of each are Add'I Insureds on General Liability, Excess Liability & Builder's Risk for the Hamestring Lift Station, Fayetteville, AR. General Liab policy is primary. Rights of Subrogation are waived against the Additional Insureds. Blanket Add'I Insured End applies. Builder's Risk includes Boiler & Machinery, no flood coverage- Job#061602 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE WASTE & WASTEWATER DEPT SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION 113 WEST MOUNTAIN STREET DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILLRO MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, F.&R�C*LINF�CSO AR�CLL FAYETTEVILLE AR 72701 soR s. AUTH I D REPRES V ACORD 25 (2001/08) ®ACORD CORPORATION 1988 _ .R IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25 (2001/08) COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED (CONTRACTORS) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART WHO IS AN INSURED - (Section II) is amended to include any person or organization that you agree in a "written contract requiring insurance" to include as, or that has received a "certificate of insurance" describing such person or organization as, an additional insured on this Coverage Part, but: a) Only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal injury"; and b) If, and only to the extent that, the injury or damage is caused by acts or omissions of you or your subcontractor in the performance of "your work" to which the "written contract requiring insurance" or the "certificate of insurance" applies. The person or organization does not qualify as an additional insured with respect to the independent acts or omissions of such person or organization. 2. The insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is limited as follows: a) The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal injury" arising out of the rendering of, or failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering or surveying services, including: i. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders or change orders, or the preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, drawings and specifications; and ii. Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. b) The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" caused by "your work" and included in the "products -completed operations hazard" unless you agree in a "written contract requiring insurance" to include such person or organization as an additional insured on this Coverage Part and such contract or agreement specifically requires you to provide such coverage for that additional insured, and then the insurance provided to the additional insured applies only to such "bodily injury" or "property damage" that occurs before the end of the period of time for which the "written contract requiring insurance" requires you to provide such coverage or the end of the policy period, whichever is earlier. 3. The insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is excess over any valid and collectible "other insurance", whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, that is available to the additional insured for a loss we cover under this endorsement. However, if you agree in a written contract requiring insurance" to include such person or organization as an additional insured on this Coverage Part and such contract or agreement specifically requires that this insurance apply on a primary basis or a primary and non-contributory basis, this insurance is primary to "other insurance" available to the additional insured which covers that person or organization as a named insured for such loss, and we will not share with that "other insurance". But the insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement still is excess over any valid and collectible "other insurance", whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, that is available to the additional insured when that person or organization is an additional insured under such "other insurance". 4. As a condition of coverage provided to the additional insured by this endorsement CG 18 xx 07 06 © 2006, The St Paul Travelers Companies, Inc. Page 1 of 2 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY a) The additional insured must give us written notice as soon as practicable of an "occurrence" or an offense which may result in a claim. To the extent possible, such notice should include: How, when and where the 'occurrence" or offense took place; ii. The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses; and iii. The nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the "occurrence" or offense. b) If a claim is made or "suit" is brought against the additional insured, the additional insured must: Immediately record the specifics of the claim or "suit" and the date received; and ii. Notify us as soon as practicable. The additional insured must see to it that we receive written notice of the claim or "suit" as soon as practicable. c) The additional insured must immediately send us copies of all legal papers received in connection with the claim or "suit", cooperate with us in the investigation or settlement of the claim or defense against the "suit", and otherwise comply with all policy conditions. d) The additional insured must tender the defense and indemnity of any claim or "suit" to any provider of "other insurance" which would cover the additional insured for a loss we cover under this endorsement. However, this condition does not affect whether the insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is primary to "other insurance" available to the additional insured which covers that person or organization as a named insured as described in paragraph 3. above. 5. The following definitions are added to SECTION V. - DEFINITIONS: "Certificate of insurance" means a certificate evidencing insurance that is signed by us, or any of our authorized representatives, and describes a person or organization as an additional insured on this Coverage Part, provided the "bodily injury" and "property damage" occurs and the "personal injury" is caused by an offense committed: a. After the person or organization described in the certificate as an additional insured has received that certificate; b. While that certificate is in effect; and c: Before the end of the policy period. "Written contract requiring insurance" means that part of any written contract or agreement under which you are required to include a person or organization as an additional insured on this Coverage Part, provided that the "bodily injury" and "property damage" occurs and the "personal injury" is caused by an offense committed: a. After the signing and execution of the contract or agreement by you; b. While that part of the contractor agreement is in effect; and C. Before the end of the policy period. CG TS xx 07 06 © 2006, The St Paul Travelers Companies, Inc. Page 2 of 2 -IIITIIJ, From: Clarice Pearman To: Jurgens, David Date: 7.31.07 10:52 AM Subject: Brasfield & Gorrie Attachments: 07.24.07 Hines Ridolphi & Associates.pdf CC: Audit David: Attached are copies of the above company's Certificate of Insurance. It will be filed with Res. 126-06. Have a good day. Thanks. Clarice F IQ I>)I r t& -or W-S('19-to/AS ACORDm CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE 6/26/2008 PRODUCER (205)879-1945 HRA Risk Services, LLC Suzi Phi I pot 3016 7th Avenue South Birmingham, AL 35233 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ii70 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.' INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED Brasfield & Carrie, LLC P.O. Box 10383 Birmingham, AL 35201-0383 INSURER A: Travelers Property Casualty Co. INSURER B: Charter Oak Fire INSURER C: INSURER D: INSURER E: COVERAGES l ' M THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INS LTR DD'L NSR O SU NC POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE MWDD/YY POLICY EXPIRATION DATE MWDD/YY LIMBS GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1 ,000,000 X DAMAGE TO REN lED PREMISES CEaoccur� $ 50,000 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CO 7852B663 07/01/2008 07/01/2009 I CLAIMS MADE O OCCUR MEDEXP(Any one Person) $ 5,000 A Contractural Liability X PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 X Completed Operations GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER'. PRODUCTS- COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 PRO POLICY X i JECT I I LOC A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS MIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS CAP 5449BB76 07/0 URRREECE , pCH• JUN 3 CITY 7401/2009 `S pT' 'O 1000 F ry COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Eaaccident) $ 1,000,000 X BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ X BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ X PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accdent) $ GARAGE LIABILITY ANY AUTO f E Z ` Yad AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC AUTO ONLY: AGG $ $ EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000 AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000 X OCCUR CLAIMSMADE CUP 58008505 07/01/2008 07/01/2009 A $ $ DEDUCTIBLE RETENTION_ . $ _ -. $ I WORKERS COMPENSATION AND X WC STATU- TO LIMI 0TH - EL. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1 000,000 B EMPLOYERSLIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICEWMEMBER EXCLUDED? No UB 7005B175 07/01/2008 07/01/2009 E.L. DISEASE -EA EMPLOYEE $ 1 000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1 000 000 H yes, describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS / VEHICLES / EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS Owner, Engineer & Engineer's Consultants, respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents & other consultants & subcontractors of each are Add'I Insureds on General Liability and Excess Liability for the Hamestring Lift Station, Fayetteville, AR. General Liab poilcy is primary. Rights of Subrogation are waived against the Additional Insureds. Blanket Add'I Insured End applies. Job#061602 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE WASTE & WASTEWATER DEPT 113 WEST MOUNTAIN STREET FAYETTEVILLE AR 72701 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, OUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authori:ced representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amand, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. L COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED (CONTRACTORS) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART WHO IS AN INSURED - (Section II) is amended to Include any person or organization that you agree in a 'written contract requiring insurance' to include as, or that has received a'certificate of insurance" describing such person or organization as, an additional Insured on this Coverage Part, but: a) Only with respect to liability for "bodily injury, "property damage" or "personal Injury"; and b) If, and only to the extent that, the injury or damage is caused by acts or omissions of you or your subcontractor In the performance of "your work" to which the "written contract requiring Insurance" or the "certificate of insurance" applies. The person or organization does not qualify as an additional insured with respect to the independent acts or omissions of such person or organization. 2. The insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is limited as follows: a) The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to "bodily injury, "property damage" or "personal injury arising out of the rendering of, or failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering or surveying services, including: i. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders or change orders, or the preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, drawings and specifications; and ii. Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. b) The Insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" caused by "your work" and included in the "products -completed operations hazard" unless you agree in a "written contract requiring insurance" to include such person a organization as an additional insured on this Coverage Part and such contract or agreement specifically requires you to provide such coverage for that additional insured, and then the insurance provided to the additional insured applies only to such 'bodily injury" or "property damage" that occurs before the end of the period of time for which the "written contract requiring insurance" requires you to provide such coverage or the end of the policy period, whichever Is earlier. 3. The Insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is excess over any valid and collectible 'other Insurance", whether primary, excess, contingent oror1 any other basis, that is available to the additional -- - -- - 'insufed for a loss we coverunderthis endorsement: However, it you agree In a "written contract requiring insurance" to include such person or organization as an additional insured on this Coverage Part and such contract or agreement specificelly requires that this insurance apply on a primary basis or a primary and non- contributory basis, this insurance is primary to "other insurance" available to the additional Insured which covers that person or organization as a named insured for such loss, and we will not share with that "other Insurance". But the insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement still is excess over any valid and collectible 'other Insurance", whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, that is available to the additional Insured when that person or organization is an additional insured under such "other Insurance". 4. As a condition of coverage provided to the additional insured by this endorsement: a) The additional insured must give us written notice as soon as practicable of an "occurrence" or an offense which may result in a claim. To the extent possible, such notice should include: 1. How, when and where the "occurrence" or offense took place; Ii. The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses; and iii. The nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the 'occurrence or offense. b) If a claim is made or "suit" is brought against the additional insured, the additional insured must: 1. Immediately record the specifics of the claim or "suit" and the date received; and CG D2 46 08 05 Copyright, The Travelers Indemnity Company, 2002 Page 1 of 2 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY ii. Notify us as soon as practicable. The additional insured must see to it that we receive written notice of the claim or "suit" as soon as practicable. c) The additional insured must immediately send us copies of all legal papers received in connection with the claim or "suit", cooperate with us In the investigation or settlement of the claim or defense against the'suil', and otherwise comply with all policy conditions. d) The additional insured must tender the defense and indemnity of any claim or "suit" to any provider of 'other insurance' which would cover the additional insured for a loss we cover under this endorsement. However, this condition does not affect whether the insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is primary to "other insurance" available to the additional insured which covers that person or organization as a named insured as described In paragraph 3. above. 5. The following definition is added i:o SECTION V. - DEFINITIONS: "Certificate of insurance" means a certificate evidencing insurance that is signed by us. or any of our authorized representatives, and describes a person or organization as an additional insured on this Coverage Part, provided the "bodily hrjuryr' and "property damage" occurs and the "personal injury" is caused by an offense committed: a. After the person or organization described in the certificate as an additional insured has received that certificate; b. While that certificate Is in effect; and C. Before the end of the policy period. "Written contract requiring insurance" means that part of any written contract or agreement under which you are required to include a person or organization as an additional insured on this Coverage Part, provided that the "bodily Injury" and "property damage" occurs and the "personal injury" is caused by an offense committed: a. After the signing and execution of the contract or agreement by you; b. While that part of the contract or agreement is in effect; and c. Before the end of the policy period. CG D2 46 08 05 Copyright, The Travelers Indemnity Company, 2002 Page 2 of 2 IS City of Fayetteville Staff Review Form City Council Agenda Items or Contracts N/A=Mayor's Approval City Council Meeting Date OcR ,ora5Cr�eld c Crorrtz David Jurgens Wastewater System Improv Proj Water/Wastewater Submitted By Division Department Action Required: Approval of change order # 1 to the construction contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of $3,546.00, for construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL-6. Funds are available within the approved contract of $245,000.00. $3,546.00 Cost of this request 4480-9480-5315.00 Account Number 02133.0362 Project Number Budgeted Item city $ 245,000.00 Category/Project Contingency $ Funds Used to Date $ 245,000.00 Remaining Balance Budget Adjustment Attached IJ Wastewater System Imp Project Program Category / Project Name Water and Wastewater Program / Project Category Name Water/Sewer Fund Name Previous Ordinance or Resolution Date Original Contract Date: 18 -Jul -06 Finance and Internal Service Director Date 1 Original Contract Number: 1045 Receive I rk's Office as Received in Mayor's Office City Council Meeting of N/A- Mayor's Approval CONTRACT REVIEW MEMO To: Mayor Dan Coody Fayetteville Sewer Committee From: David Jurgens, Water and Wastewater Director af. Date: February 21, 2007 Subject: Approval of change order # 1 to the construction contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of $3,546.00, for construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL-6. Funds are available within the approved contract contingency of $245,000.00. RECOMMENDATION City Administration recommends approval of change order # I to the construction contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of $3,546.00, for construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL-6. A contingency of $245,000.00 is availble to cover this change order. BACKGROUND The Hamestring Lift Station project entails building a 36 million gallon per day sewer lift station containing seven 350 horsepower pumps. The lift station pumps water through the 24" and 30" sewer force mains (construction completed) to the West Side Wastewater Treatment Plant and is the primary source of wastewater to the plant. The lift station is where 51st Street crosses Hamestring Creek. DISCUSSION This change order is required to execute the analysis confirming that the connection between the backup power generator and the lift station will adequately protect the Ozarks Electric power supply network from overload when the lift station starts up or operates under maximum demand and/or power is transferred to and/or from the backup power generator. This change order has been reviewed by RJN Group, the Engineer; they recommend approval. BUDGET IMPACT Funds are available within the approved contract contingency of $245,000.00. A balance of $241,454.00 will remain in the contingency after this change order. WL-6 Brasfield Chg Ordr I CCMemoEeb07 rin rroup Excellence through Ownership February 19, 2007 Lynn Hyke WSIP Construction Manager City Hall 113 West Mountain Street Fayetteville, Arkansas, 72701 Re: Change Order — Short Circuit & Protection Device Coordination Study Revision Dear Mr. Hyke: www.rjn.com Please find attached the hard copy of the change order for the `Short Circuit & Protection Device Coordination Study Revision', which was previously emailed to you on February 9, 2006. If you have any additional questions, contact me (618) 558-9764 x325. Sincerely, 7Kevin White, P.E. Project Manager RJN Group, Inc. ChangeOrderNo. I Page 1 of 1 CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER Contract Schedule Section Date 2/9/2007 ProjectNo.: CS -050808-03 Owner ProjectNo.: ctName: Hamestring Lift Station Location: Cr: City of Fayetteville Contractor. ess: 113 West Mountain Address: Fayetteville, AR 72701 THE FOLLOWING CHANGES ARE HEREBY AMENDED INTO THE CONTRACT PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: ITEM # DESCRIPTION DECREASE INCREASE 1 IRevise'Short Circuit & Protection Device Coordination $3,546 Study' to accommodate 480 volt generator connection See attached TOTAL DECREASE TOTAL INCREASE inal Contract Amount 1 Previous Change Orders) Amount This Change Order AL CONTRACT AMOUNT TO DATE Completion Date Adjusted Completion Date ;)(Decrease) This Change Order ELIGIBLE AMOUNT $0.00 $3.546.00 S, 5, 4A 00 Calendar V GRO Er� er p T�DiiGT2 d Signature Title Date Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC Contracto (ao '; AiW )Ga • 1?ilxuvat ( 2 g' o igna' a Title Date Robert Bailey Electric, Inc. Hamestring - Revise Coordination Study 1/16/2007 Qty Description Cost Unit Total Labor Unit Total 1 WES quote $ 2,700.00 ea. $ 2,700.00 ea. $ - ea. $ - ea. $ - ea. $ - ea. $ ea. $ ea. $ - ea. $ - ea. $ - ea. $ - ea. $ - ea. $ - ea. $ - ea. $ ea. $ ea. $ - C..'. ♦-•-.'- ea. $ - 4) Z,ruu.uu nr 5 - Rate $ 33.00 Tax $ 236.25 Totals $ 2,936.25 $ - Overhead & Profit 15% $ 440.44 Grand -totals Materials $ 3376.69 Labor $ - Mat. $ 3,376.69 SELL $ 3,376.69 (2.27.07 dance Pearman - Brasfield &Gorrie Page 1 From: Clarice Pearman To: Jurgens, David Date: 2.27.07 12:26 PM Subject: Brasfield & Gorrie Attachments: 02.26.07 Brasfield & Gorrie LLC CO1.pdf CC: Audit David: Attached is a copy of the Change Order No. 1 for Brasfield & Gorrie. Please be aware that there was not extra originals of this change order to return. Please let me know if there is anything else is needed. Thanks. Clarice tp/6 I David Jurgens Submitted By City of Fayetteville Staff Review Form City Council Agenda Items or Contracts N/A- Mayor's Approval City Council Meeting Date Wastewater System Improv Proj Division Water/Wastewater Department Action Required: pproval of change order # 2 to the construction contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of 146,260.00, for construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL-6. Funds are available within the approved Dntract contingency of $241,454.00. $146,260.00 Cost of this request 4480-9480-5315.00 Account Number 02133.0362 Project Number Item rite Attnrn>v $ 245, 000.00 Category/Project Contingency $ 3,546.00 Funds Used to Date $ 241,454.00 Remaining Balance Budget Adjustment Attached Wastewater System Imp Project Program Category / Project Name Water and Wastewater Program / Project Category Name Water/Sewer Fund Name Previous Ordinance or Resolution # 126-06 Date Original Contract Date: 18 -Jul -06 Original Contract Number: 1045 r City Council Meeting of N/A- Mayor's Approval CONTRACT REVIEW MEMO To: Mayor Dan Coody Fayetteville Sewer Committee (� From: David Jurgens, Water and Wastewater Director I`a(II Date: July 2, 2007 Subject: Approval of change order # 2 to the construction contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of $146,260.00, for construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL-6. Funds are available within the approved contract contingency of $241,454 RECOMMENDATION City staff recommends approval of change order #2 to the construction contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of $146,260.00, for construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL-6. Funds are available within the approved contract contingency of $241,454. Brasfield and Gorrie is constructing the 36 million gallon per day Hamestring Lift Station containing seven 350 horsepower pumps. The station pumps water through the 24" and 30" sewer force mains (construction completed) to the West Side Wastewater Treatment Plant, and is the primary source of wastewater to the plant. It is located where 51 s` Street crosses Hamestring Creek. This change order makes a number of relatively minor improvements for the lift station, as detailed on the change order itself. The most expensive action is the addition of $91,430 worth of piping that will allow the future installation of a screen at the pipeline entrance to the lift station, significantly increasing the ability to protect the pumps (at over $150,000 replacement cost each) from damage from foreign materials that may come down the pipelines. This screen was much debated in the design and value engineering phases of the project. The pipeline will allow the flexibility to install a screening mechanism in the future if it is determined one is needed. This change order also integrates connections and interfaces between work performed under other contracts in the same area (backup power generator, WL-1 and 3 pipeline, WL-4 pipeline). This change order has been reviewed by RJN Group, the Engineer; they recommend approval. The project is over 65% completed; no further change order items are anticipated. BUDGET IMPACT Funds are available within the approved contract contingency of $241,454.00. A balance of $95,194.00 will remain in the contingency after this change order. WL-6 Brasfield Chg Ontr 2 CCMemoJun07 ('hange Order No. 2 Page I of I CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER Contract Schedule Section Date 5/21/2007 RI .F Project No.: CS -050808-03 Owner Project No.: WL-6 Project Name: Hamestring Lift Station Location: Fayetteville, Arkansas (honer: City of Fayetteville Contractor: Brasfield & Genie Address: 113 West Mountain Address: 3021 7th Avenue South Fayetteville, AR 72701 Birmingham, AL 35233 11 IF FOLLOWING CHANGES ARE HEREBY AMENDED INTO THE CONTRACT PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: I1YM # DESCRIPTION DECREASE INCREASE Furnish the necessary labor, materials, equipment, tools and supervision to install: I Generator and Transformer Pad $10,790.00 2 Automated Pump Volute Air Vent Valves $8,364.00 3 Electric Heater for Backflow Preventer $2,053.00 4 Revise Water Piping and Backflow Preventer Elevation $11,481.00 5 Manhole Coatings $2,149.00 6 Dry Well Suction Valve and Line $8,521.00 7 24 inch Sewer Line Loop to 48 inch $91,430.00 8 Access Hatch Revisions $7,552.00 9 Additional PLC inputs $2,336.00 10 Chemical Pad Stairs to Safety Shower $3,113.00 II Additional Dewatering $10,364.00 12 Roof Modification -$11,893.00 TOTAL DECREASE AMOUNT -$11,893.00 TOTAL INCREASE AMOUNT $158,153.00 NET CHANGE ORDER $146,260.00 ENGINEERS FINAL t I IANGE TO CONTRACT AMOUNT: TOTAL AMOUNT ELIGIBLE AMOUNT Original Contract Amount $6-130.000.00 coral Previous Change Order(s) 3S .546.00 Net Amount This Change Order $146,260.00 $146,260.00 Tl f l'AL CONTRACT AMOUNT TO DATE 56.279.806.00 ('I IANGE TO CONTRACT COMPLETION DATE: Original Completion Date Previous Adjusted Completion Date ( IncreaseRDecrease) This Change Order No change Calendar Das, N NW CONTRACT COMPLETION DATE: RECOMMENDED: N GRO Engi r NY: Project Manager 5i21;2007 Signature Title Date ACCEPTED: Brasfield & Gorrie, LL Con for Ii Y: (≥d ir5-rnN Mr 4 .r¢ O ignature Iitle )air APPROVED: City of Fa et i Signature isle I)ate r! n rip Excellence through Ownership June 22, 2007 Judd Branch Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC 3021 7th Avenue South Birmingham, AL 35233 Re: Change Order No. 2 Dear Mr. Branch, Please find attached Change Order No. 2 for $146,260 for the following items: www.rjn.com 1. Generator and Transformer Pad — these pads were not part of the original contract because at the time of bidding the foundation details were not available from the providers. 2. Automated Pump Volute Air Vent Valves — this is to prevent the pumps from potential air locking of the pump volute cavity and causing cavitation at start-up. 3. Revise water piping and backflow preventer — the backflow preventer had to be raised above the 100 year flood plan. Piping changes were also required to accommodate the placement of the city water tap. 4. Electric Heater for Backflow Preventer — a heater for the elevated backflow preventer was not included in the bid specifications. 5. Manhole Coatings — the two onsite manholes did not have coatings specified in the bid package. 6. Dry Well Suction Line — this will provide a method to pump out the dry well should the sump pumps fail to provide adequate capacity. 7. 24 inch Sewer Line Loop to 48 inch — This is being added for future consideration of a self cleaning screen to filter all the influent to the lift station. 8. Access hatch revisions — the specifications did not include corrosion resistant hardware. 9. Additional PLC inputs — this will provide inputs to the PLC for a temperature and humidity read out and alarm for the dry well, odor control chemical feed failure alarm, and automation of PV 8; the force main return valve to the wet well. 10. Chemical Pad Stairs — this will provide ready access to the safety shower for anyone on the chemical pad. The safety shower is at grade to accommodate the truck operator during unloading. Should anyone on the elevated chemical pad need access to the safety shower this will provide unobstructed access. 9 www.rin.com Excellence through Ownership 11. Additional dewatering — dewatering requirements increased at the lift station with the excavation of the WL-4 sewer line. This occurred before the lift station roof was installed and the walls of the lift station were at risk to failure from exterior water pressure. 12. Roof modification (credit) — modifications were made to how the roof is constructed to reduce the amount of materials required. Please sign and return. I will return a copy after the City has approved. If you have any questions please feel free to contact me at 314-588-9764 x325. Sincerely. Kevin White, P.E. Project Manger RJN Group, Inc. (7 12 07) Clarice Pearman - Brasfield & Gorrie Page 1 From: Clarice Pearman To: Jurgens, David Date: 7.12.07 1:28 PM Subject: Brasfield & Gorrie Attachments: 07.11.07 Brasfield & Gorrie LLC CO2.pdf CC: Audit David: Attached is a copy of the above change order. If anything else is needed please let me know. Have a good day. Thanks. Clarice David Jurgens Submitted By City of Fayetteville Staff Review Form City Council Agenda Items or Contracts N/A= Mayor's Approval City Council Meeting Date Wastewater System Improv Proj Division Water/Wastewater Department Approval of change order # 3 to the construction contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of $31,663.00 for construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL-6. Funds are available within the approved contract contingency. $ 31,663.00 $ 245,000.00 Wastewater System Imp Project Cost of this request Category/Project Contingency Program Category / Project Name 4480-9480-5315.00 Account Number 02133.0362 Project Number Budgeted Item City Attorney ''rte a.. \r --.- Finance and Internal Service Director $ 149, 806.00 Funds Used to Date $ 95,194.00 Remaining Balance Budget Adjustment Attached EJ ! Date I -t.-07 Date L2 6 Mayor Date Water and Wastewater Program / Project Category Name Water/Sewer Fund Name Previous Ordinance or Resolution # Original Contract Date: Original Contract Number: 126-06 18 -Jul -06 1045 City Council Meeting of N/A- Mayor's Approval CONTRACT REVIEW MEMO To: Mayor Dan Coody Fayetteville Sewer Committee From: David Jurgens, Water and Wastewater Director Date: December 5, 2007 Subject: Approval of change order # 3 to the construction ��4ntract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of $31,663.00, for construction of the Hamestr g Sewer Lift Station, WL-6. Funds are available within the approved contract contingency RECOMMENDATION City Administration recommends approval of change order # 3 to the construction contract with Brasfield & Gorrie, LLC., in the amount of $31,663.00, for construction of the Hamestring Sewer Lift Station, WL-6. $95, 194 remain within the approved contract contingency. . BACKGROUND The Hamestring Lift Station project entails building a 36 million gallon per day sewer lift station containing seven 350 horsepower pumps. The lift station pumps water through the 24" and 30" sewer force mains (construction completed) to the West Side Wastewater Treatment Plant and is the primary source of wastewater to the plant. The lift station is where 51x1 Street crosses Hamestring Creek. This project is approximately 95% complete, and has proceeded very well. It is an impressive and very functional facility. DISCUSSION This change order is required to make minor adjustments to the chemical tank pad, the Electrical Building to improve maintenance personnel safety and access, to allow temperature monitoring on the pump motors, and to add a non -slip epoxy coating to the concrete floor and lower wall sections in the dry well, and cover minor Generator Pad modifications. No change in time is required for this change order. This change order has been reviewed by RJN Group, the Engineer; they recommend approval. BUDGET IMPACT $95, 194 remain within the approved contract contingency. A balance of $63,531.00 will remain in the contingency after this change order. W L 6 13msricld Chg Ordr 3 CCMemoDeO7.doc Change Order No. 3 Page 1 of 1 CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER Contract Schedule Section Date 12/4/2007 RLF Project No.: CS -050808-03 Owner Project No.: WL-6 Project Name: Hamestring Lift Station . Location: Fayetteville, Arkansas Owner: City of Fayetteville Contractor: Brasfield & Gorrie Address: 113 West Mountain Address: 3021 7th Avenue South Fayetteville, AR 72701 Birmingham, AL 35233 THE FOLLOWING CHANGES ARE HEREBY AMENDED INTO THE CONTRACT PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: ITEM # DESCRIPTION DECREASE INCREASE Furnish the necessary labor, materials, equipment, tools and supervision to install: I Platform and Handrail Modifications- Chem Pad & Elect Bldg $4,573.00 2 Add Pump Motor RTD Indicator $9,824.00 3 Dry Well Floor Coating $16,253.00 4 Generator Pad Modifications $983.00 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 TOTAL DECREASE AMOUNT $0.00 $31,633.00 TOTAL INCREASE AMOUNT $31,633.00 NET CHANGE ORDER ENGINEERS FINAL HANGE TO CONTRACT AMOUNT: TOTAL AMOUNT $6,130,000.00 ELIGIBLE AMOUNT riginal Contract Amount otal Previous Change Order(s) $149,806.00 Net Amount This Change Order $31.633.00 31 633.00 OTAL CONTRACT AMOUNT TO DATE $6,311.439.00 CHANGE TO CONTRACT COMPLETION DATE: Original Completion Date Wednesday, December 19, 2007 Previous Adjusted Completion Date None 6K (lncrease)(Decrease) This Change Order IncreaseA3 days Calendar Days NEW CONTRACT COMPLETION DATE: Friday, February 15, 2008 RECOMMENDED: GROUP Engin r BY: Project Manager 12/4/2007 Sign ure Title Date ACCEPTED: Brasfield & e, LLC Con tot BY: DIVISION MANAGER 12 _lO 07 Sig ature Title Date APPROVED: Cit of Fa eville BY: O /fl a$U& Si tore itle Date II(1211312001)Lisa Branson - WL-6 Brasfield & Gorrie Change Order # 3- Staffing _ PI'i1 From: David Jurgens To: Broyles, Lana; Smith, Sondra CC: Branson, Lisa; Dumas, Gary; Williams, Kit Date: 12/13/2007 6:11 AM Subject: WL-6 Brasfield & Gorrie Change Order # 3- Staffing Lana, Sondra, I need to pull the originals of the change order number 3 for Brasfield & Gorrie and get it stamped. This was approved by the Water/Sewer Committee Tuesday night, and I need to get it stamped so the contractor can continue to work without delaying the project. I will brief whoever I need to for approval. This was a known item that was Identified before the Mayor left as needing to be stamped while he was gone. Thank you, David